The URL can be used to link to this page

Project Manual Vol 1 051706r i i r i i Project Man?~al Yelm Community Scf~cols District No. 2 Ridgeline Middle School Volume 1 April S, 2003 SET # ERIC{<§ON•M~G~!/ERi~ ArchitectureAnalysi~SchoolDesign Erickson McGovern, PLLC tel: 253-531 ~-0205 V 20 131st Street South fax: 253-531-9197 Tacoma, WA 98444-4804 '~ ~ s~ ~ ~~ ~qr cF%. I)?O FQ ~6' ' Project Manual - ~ Ridgeline Middle School t Yelm Community Schools District No. 2 1 OWNER ' YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS P.O. Box 476 YELM, WA 98597 CONTACT: ERLING BIRKLAND PHONE: (360) 458-6128 FAx: (360) 458-6434 ', ARCHITECT ACOUSTICAL ENGINEER ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P.L.L.c. SSA AcousTlcs 120 131ST STREET SOUTH 6042 SEAVIEW AVENUE NW, #102 ' TACOMA, WA 98444 SEATTLE, WA 98107 CONTACT: STAN ZIELINSKI CONTACT: WILLIAM STEWART PHONE: (253) 531-0206 PHONE: (206) 839-0819 ' FAx: (253) 531-9197 FAx: (206) 839-0824 CIVIL ENGINEER LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT .JEROME W. MORRISSETTE & ASSOCIATES, INC. WEISMAN DESIGN GROUP, INC. 1700 COOPER POINT ROD SW, #B-2 2329 EAST MADISON STREET OLYMPIA, WA 98502 SEATTLE, WA 98112 .CONTACT: ROBERT TAUSCHER CONTACT: DAVE ANDREWS PHONE: (360) 352-9456 PHONE: (206) 322-1732 FAx: (360) 352-9990 FAx: (206) 322-1799 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER HARDWARE CONSULTANT PUTNAM COLLINS SCOTT ASSOCIATES ADAMS CONSULTING & ESTIMATING 950 PACIFIC AVENUE, SUITE 1100 2337 NORTH 57T" STREET TACOMA, WA 98402 SEATTLE, WA 98103 CONTACT: DOUG GOODWIN /LUKE HEATH CONTACT: CORDON ADAMS PHONE: (253) 383-2797 PHONE: (206) 528-0244 I FAx: (253) 383-1557 FAx: (206) 528-0138 MECHANICAUELECTRICALENCINEERS FOOD SERVICE CONSULTANT ~; ~ ,-BCE ENGINEERS, INC. HALLIDAY ASSOCIATES 6021 12~" STREET EAST, SUITE 200 .. _ 656 NW NORWOOD`. TACOMA, WA 98424 CAMAS, WA 98607 :.` '' .CONTACT: (MECH) CHRIS CAFFEE /BRYAN COLE CONTACT: LAURA BOURLAND / VERNE HALLIDAY (ELEC) MIKE COZART / TIM AMIOT PHONE: (360) 834-6657 PHONE: (253) 922-0446 FAx: (360) 834-5453 'I FAx: (253) 922-0896 _ i APRlL 5, 2005 ' TABLE OF CONTENTS RIDGELINE MIDDLE SCHOOL . VOLUME 1 DESCRIPTION NUMBER OF PAGES FRONTISPIECE ..:..:.........:..........:.....:.....:........ `.TABLE OF CONTENTS :....~::: BIDDING REQUIREMENTS ii SECTION 00030,-ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS ...........................:............ 2 00120,INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ........................................ 3 00300, FORM OF PROPOSAL ............................................. 4 00350, SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING ........................................ 1 00420, SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES ...................................... 2 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM ..................................... 2 CONTRACT FORMS SECTION 00500, CONTRACT FORMS .............................................. 1 00800, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ..................................... 27 00830, PREVAILING WAGE RATES ........................................ 25 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01010; SUMMARY OF THE WORK/SPECIAL CONDITIONS ......................... 3 01030, ALTERNATES .................................................. 3 01095, REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS ............................ 8 01200, PROJECT MEETINGS ............................................. 3 01330, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ......................................... 7 ELECTRONIC INFORMATION DISCLAIMER .. ............................. 2 01400, QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES ...................................... 4 01500, CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS .................. 6 01510, SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS ......................................... 5 01600, EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS ....................................... 10 01700, PROJECT CLOSEOUT ............................................ 6 01730, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA ................................ 4 01810,COMMISSIONING ..............................................:. 14 DECLARATION OF COMPLETION :....... ............................. 1 TRAINING CHECKLIST ............................................ 1 DIVISION 2: SITE. WORK SECTION 02215,SUBGRADE PREPARATION ........................................... 4 - ;02220, SITE DEMOLITION, CLEARING & PREPARATION .........:................. 5 02300; EARTHWORK ...................:.1...........:.,.:..:.:.:........ 5 _ ° .SOILS INVESTIGATION REPORT DATED 1/24/05 ........................'._.: 27 02315, TRENCHING, BACKFILLING & COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES ......:::......... 4 02370, EROSION CONTROL .............................:...............~... 2 ..02510, WATER SYSTEM ................................................ 5 02530, SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS .................................... 6 02535, INFIELD SKIN ............:.....................:........:......... 2 . 02630,STORMWATER SYSTEM ............:.........:.................... 5 [ridgeline ms] 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 DESCRIPTION DIVISION 2, SITE WORK (CONTINUED) NUMBER'OF PAGES 02721, CATCH BASINS AND INLETS .......................................... 4 02740., ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING ....................................... 5 02750,. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT, CURBS AND SIDEWALKS ......... . 8 02765, SIGNS AND PAVEMENT.MARKINGS ......: .:.......:................:. 3 ....................................... 9 02810, IRRIGATION ......:..... . 02821, RUBBERIZED SURFACING ...................:..................... 4 02831, CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES .................................'.... 4 02870, SITE IMPROVEMENTS ............................................ 3 02900.,PLANTING& SEEDING ........:...................................... 9 , 02995, DIVISION 2 -COMMISSIONING ...........:.......................... 1'3 DIVISION 3, CONCRETE SECTION 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE .........::.................~............ 14 DIVISION 4, MASONRY SECTION 04200, UNIT MASONRY ......................:......................... 13 DIVISION.5, METALS SECTION 05120, STRUCTURAL STEEL .............................................. 6 05300, METAL DECKING ............................................:.....3 05500, METAL FABRICATIONS .......................................... ~:. 9 05510, METAL STAIRS ................................................. 5 05521, HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS ..........................................~_7 DIVISION 6. WOOD AND PLASTICS SECTION 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY ............................................: 1O 06151, PREFABRICATED WOOD/METAL TRUSSES ......:...................... 3 06170, STRUCTURAL GLUED LAMINATED UNITS ......~ ......................... 3 06190, FABRICATED WOOD JOISTS ..........:....................`....... _ . 3 06192, PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES ..........:.................:...... 3 06200, FINISH CARPENTRY .........................'..................... 8 06240, PLASTIC LAMINATE ................................................. 2 DIVISION 7. THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION .......... SECTION 07160, BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING ..........................: . 07175, WATER REPELLENTS ............................................ 2 07200, INSULATION .........................................:.......... 7 07311, ASPHALT SHINGLES ....................................:......... 5 07411, PREFORMED (MANUFACTURED) ROOF PANELS ... . ..................... 4 07412, PREFORMED ROOFING .............................:............. 4 07620, SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ..... ' ..........:.........:......... 6 07700, ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES :.....:........:......:........ 3 . _.07840;FIRESTOPPING .........................:........,,.:....::.......'.8 07900, JOINT SEALERS ......... ~ , ~, : , _• .6 [ridgeline ms] 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 ,, ,' DESCRIPTION NUMBER OF PAGES 'i DIVISION 8, DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08111, STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ........................................ 6 08211, FLUSH WOOD DOORS ............................................ 5 ' 08305, ACCESS DOORS ...............•................................ 08330, OVERHEAD COILING DOORS .. 3 7 :08340, OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES .................•...............,...... 3 ._08360; SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS ...................~...................... 4 ' _ .. .. 08525, VINYL WINDbWS ..................:....................:......... 08700, FINISH HARDWARE ................:. .. .... 6 23 08800, GLASS ANq GLAZING ....................................:....... 7 08920, TRANSLUCENT WINDOW PANELS ................ ..................... 2 1 DIVISION FINISHE 9, S SECTION 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL .............................................. 8 ' 09300,TILE ......................................................... 7 09511, ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS ...................................... 6 09512, ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS ........................................ 4 ~ .09515, ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILING AND WALL PANELS ........................ 4 ,; 09517, LINEAR METAL CEILING SYSTEM .................................... 5 09520, ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS ....................................... 4 09522, THEATER BOARD CEILING ......................................... 3 09551, STAGE FLOOR SYSTEM ........................................... 3 09563, WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING ....................................... 5 09655, FLOORING PREPARATION ......................................... 2 09660, RESILIENT TILE FLOORING ......................................... 5 09666, SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS ................................... 6 09669, RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING ..................................... 4 09678, RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES ............................. 5 09680, CARPETING ................................'................... 2 09800,INTERACTIVE ACOUSTICAL PANELS .................................. 3 09900, PAINTING ..................................................... 13 09950, WALLCOVERING ................................................ 5 09955, VINYL TACKBOARD PANELS ...............:........................ 2 09986, FIBERGLASS WALL PANELS ........................................ 2 DIVISION 10, SPECIALTIES ,, SECTION 10100, VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS ......................................... 5 10160, TOILET PARTITIONS ............................................. 4 10190, CUBICLE CURTAIN AND TRACK ...................................... 2. 10425, SIGNS ........................................................ 11 10430, ELECTRONIC READER BOARDS ..................................... 6 10500, METAL LOCKERS ............................................... 5 10605, WIRE MESH PARTITIONS .......................................... 3 10650, OPERABLE PARTITIONS ........................................... 7 ' 10800, TbILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES ..................................... 4 1 10900, MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES ...................................... 7 . ~~ [ridgeline mss 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 DESCRIPTION DIVISION 11, EQUIPMENT NUMBER OF PAGES SECTION- 11050, BOOK DETECTION SYSTEM ........................................ 2 11062, CURTAINS AND TRACKS .......................................... 5 11400, FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT ........................................ 24 11450, RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT ......................................... 3 11480, RECREATION EQUIPMENT ......................................... 4 11500,INDUSTRIAL SAFETY ..............................................2 11995, DIVISION 1 1 -COMMISSIONING ..................................... 2 DIVISION 12, FURNISHINGS SECTION 12345, STOCK FACTORY-BUILT CASEWORK ................................. 11 12500, WINDOW TREATMENT ........................................... 4 12760, TELESCOPING BLEACHERS ........................................ 8 DIVISION 13. SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 13125, FRAME-TYPE BLEACHER .......................................... 3 (ridgeline ms] 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS 4 'I ,1 DESCRIPTION VOLUME 2 DIVISION 15. MECHANICAL NUMBER OF PAGES MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................ 2 SECTION 15055, GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS ............................. . 15060, PIPE AND FITTINGS .............................................. 15065, EXCAVATION & BACKFILL FOR MECHANICAL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES ....... . 15095, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ......................................... 15100, VALVES ......:............................................... 15120, PIPING SPECIALTIES ............................................ . 15170, MOTORS AND VARIABLE DRIVES .................................... 15190, MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION ..................................... . 15200, SLEEVES AND SEALS ............................................ 15240, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL ................................. . 15261, PIPING INSULATION .............................................. 15290,EQUIPMENT/DUCTWORKINSULATION ................................ 15330, WET PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS ......... _ ................ . 15335, DRY PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS ........................... . 15340, PRIVATE FIRE SERVICE MAINS ..................................... . 15412, SOIL, WASTE & VENT PIPING SYSTEM ............................... . 15440, PLUMBING FIXTURES ............................................. 15454,PUMPS ....................................................... 15455, ELECTRIC STORAGE TYPE WATER HEATERS ........................... 15460, HIGH EFFICIENCY GAS FIRED WATER HEATERS ........................ . 15485, COMPRESSED AIR .............................................. 15487, NATURAL GAS ................................................. 15530, REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM ..................................... 15557, COPPER BOILER ................................................ 15640, FLUES ....................................................... 15645, ELECTRIC HEATERS ............................................. 15700,HYDRONIC SYSTEM .............................................. 15778, AIR COOLED CHILLERS .......................................... . 15781, SPLIT SYSTEM UNITS ............................................ 15830, AIR-TO-AIR HEAT EXCHANGERS .................................... 15840, WATER TREATMENT(HYDRONIC SYSTEMS) ............................ 15851, VAV TERMINAL BOX UNITS ....................................... . 15855, AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS .................................. . 15860, AIR SYSTEM TESTING & BALANCING ................................ . 15869, EXHAUST FANS ................................................. 15870,HVAC SPECIALTIES ............................................. 15891, STEEL DUCTWORK .............................................. 15932, AIR TERMINALS ................................................ 15933, ROOF MOUNTED AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS ........................... . 15950, WATER SYSTEM BALANCING ....................................... 15970, ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROLS (DDC) ........................ . 15995, DIVISION 15 COMMISSIONING ..................................... . [ridgeline ms] 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS 12 5 6 6 4 8 4 3 12 5 2 18 19 8 3 7 5 2 2 2 3 6 4 2 1 9 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 5 8 3 1 3 21 10 5 NUMBER OF PAGES DIVISION 16. ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................. 2 SECTION 16050, ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS ........:......................... 1 1 16051, ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY ...............:....:.. 3 16055, EXCAVATION & BACKFILL FOR ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES .......... 4 16110,RACEWAy .:...............:.................................... 4 16120, WIRES AND CABLES ..........., ........:......................... 3 ~16130,OuTLET AND PULL BOXES ......................................... 3 16132, FLOOR OUTLET DEVICES -FLUSH ..........................:......... 2 16140,SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES ..................................... 3 16155, MOTOR CONTROLLERS ............................................. 2 16160,PANELBOARDS .................................................. 3 16170, DISCONNECTS AND FUSED SWITCHES ................................. 1 16180,FusES ............:.......................................... 2 1.6251, AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH ..................................... 6 16450,GROUNDING ................................................... 2 16461, DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS ........................................ 3 16470,SWITCHBOAROS ................................................. 5 16495, EMERGENCY GENERATOR .:....................................... .8 16500, LIGHTING ...................................................... 8 16550, LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL ......................................... 6 16580, THEATRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEM - (ALTERNATE BID E-1) ................... 7 16680; TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION .......................... 4 16720, FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS ............................................ 18 16725, CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM (CCTV) (ALTERNATE BID E-2) ........ 8 16727, INTRUSION ALARM AND DOOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM ..:.............. 18 16740, COMMUNICATION/CLOCK/PROGRAM SYSTEMS (ALTERNATE BID E-3A, E-36 ANO E-3C) ............................... 11 16745, ROUGH IN FOR LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS .................:............ 2 16751, GYMNASIUM SOUND SYSTEM ....................................... 8 16752, COMMONS SOUND SYSTEM ........................................ 8 16753, AUXILIARY GYMNASIUM SOUND SYSTEM .............:... •............. 6 16754, CHOIR AND BAND ROOM SOUND SYSTEMS .............................. 4 16780, TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM (ALTERNATE BID E-3A, E-36, E-3C) ...... 6 16800, DATA AND VOICE INFRASTRUCTURE ............• ....................... 14 16995, DIVISION 16.COMMISSIONING ..................................:..... 4 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS [ridgeline ms] 6 TABLE OF CONTENTS 6 '~ i SECTION 00030 -ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS ~; 1 NOTICE TO BIDDERS ' 2 3 Sealed bids will be received by Yelm Community Schools"District No. 2 at the District Office, 107 15` Street . 4 North, P.O. Box 476, Yelm, Washington 98597, for the construction of the new Ridgelir-e Middle School ` 5 and related site work, 10605. Carter Street SE, Yelm, Washington, at the following times and dates: 6 ~.- 7 Base Bids will be received on Part 1 of the Form of Proposal until 4:00 P.M., P.D.S.T.,.May 4, 2005 8 (stamped in and held). 9. •10 'Alternate Bids will be received on Part 2 of the Form of Proposal, along. -with the required 11 subcontractors listing (Section 00350), until 5:00 P.M., P.D.S.T.,-May 4, 2005 (One hour later than 12 Part 1). . 13 14 . , All bids and alternates will then and there be publicly opened and read aloud. Bidders and others, properly '` 15 interested are invited to be present at the bid opening. Bid Proposals Part 1 and Part 2 ,either one or both, 16 not received prior to their scheduled time of receipt will automatically be disqualified and will not be 17 considered. 18 19 20 ~ DOCUMENTS ~ . 21 ': 22 Specifications, including bid and contract documents, and drawings, may be examined at the office of 23 Erickson McGovern, P.L.L.C., 120 South 131st Street, Tacoma, Washington and at the following locations: 24 25 Associated Sub Contractors, 3312 So. Union, Tacoma, WA 98409 . 26 • Builders Exchange of Washington, 2607 Wetmore Ave., Everett, WA 98201 27 Construction Data West, 1200 NW Front Ave, Portland, OR 97209 ~ . ' 28 Daily Journal of Commerce, 2840 NW 35th Ave., Portland, OR 97210 29 McGraw-Hill Construction Plancenter, 13010. Northrup Way, Bldg. C-3, Suite 1, Bellevue, WA 98005 30 McGraw-Hill Construction Plancenter, 4803 Pacific Highway E., #3, Tacoma, WA 98424. 31 - McGraw-Hill Construction Plancenter, 200 SW Michigan Ave., Suite 100A, Seattle, WA 98106 I 32 Olympia Plan Center, 123 Fir Street, Olympia, WA 98506 33 Olympic Peninsula Plan Center, 301 Pacific Ave., Bremerton, WA 98337 34 Reed Construction Data, 10504 NE 37th Circle, Bldg. #7, Kirkland, WA 98033 1 35 Spokane Regional Ptan Center, East 102 Boone, Spokane, WA 99202 36 Valley Plan Center, 1819 So. Central Ave., Suite 82, Kent, WA 98032 37 Weekly Construction Reporter, 2215 Midway Lane, Suite 208, Bellingham, WA 98226 38 ' 39 Only General Contractors submitting bids directly to the School District may obtain two (2) sets of Contract 40 Documents maximum. PRIME Mechanical/Electrical Subbidders mayobtain one (1) set maximum of Contract 41 Documents. Documents may be ordered by contacting City Blue Print at 1 (800) 334-9486, Fax (253) 473- 42 6584 or email: cityblue1@wamail.net and providing a refundable deposit check in the amount of ' 43 $175.00 per set payable to Yelm School District. Documents are available at City Blue Print, 8042 44 Pacific Avenue, Tacoma, WA 98408 or Royal Reprographics, 7825 S.180th Street, Kent, WA 98032. 45 Please call for availability and fax your request prior to pickirig up. Return of deposits to be in 46 accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. Bid sets will be shipped upon request after receipt of a non- . 47 refundable shipping fee paid to City Blue Print, the amount of which will vary depending upon what is ordered. 48 Should a Bidderwish additional printed sets, parts of sets, or drawings in digital format on compact disk (CD), "-;49 . ,they may obtain them from City Blue Print, (253): 474-9486,, by paying .the cost of reproduction. .50 .. 5.1 . b2 [ridgeline ms] 00030 - 1 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00030 - 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 MANDATORY PRE-BID MEETING There shall be a mandatory pre-bid meeting on April 26; 2005 at 3:00 P.M. at the project site, 10605 Carter Street SE, Yelm, WA. Because this is a mandatory pre-bid meeting, all contractors wishing to bid on this project are required to be present at this meeting or have a representative of their company in attendance. Bids from any contractor not meeting these requirements will not be accepted. REFUND OF DEPOSITS The full amount of the previously paid deposit for documents will be refunded to bona fide bidders upon return of the documents in good condition to City Blueprint within 10 days after the time set for opening bids. There will be no refund for the return of additional sets or parts of sets. Planholders who do not submit a bona fide bid and do not return the documents on or before the day previously noted will forfeit the full amount of their deposits. SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING - The Principal Bidders submitting bids to the School District are required to submit a Subcontractor Listing Form as indicated in Section 00120 -Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. BY ORDER OF: Yelm Community Schools District No. 2 Published: March 30, 2005 April 6, 2005 END OF SECTION 00030 [ridgeline ms] 00030 - 2 ADVERTlSEIV1ENT FOR BIDS 00030 - 2 f I SECTION 00120 -SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO B/DDERS i 1 .INSTRUCTIONS TO' BIDDERS -STANDARD FORM 2 3 4 The "Instructions to Bidders" A.I.A. Document A701, 1997 Edition, is hereby made a part of these specifications whether or not herein included. This document may be purchased directl from the American 5 y Institute:ofArchitects, 1201 PacificAveriue; Fountain Court Level; Suite C-4, Tacoma, WA98402. Telephone: 6 (253) 627-4006. FAX (253) 572-2634:. , ~~ 8 9 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 10. . " 11 These Supplementary Instructions to Bidders" form a part of and -are incorporated in the contract for 12 construction. All terms defined elsewhere in the contract shall have the same meaning here, unless the 13 contract clearly indicates otherwise. In case of conflict between the provisions of the "Supplementary 14 Instructions to Bidders" and any other Contract Document, the "Supplementary Instructions to Bidders" shall 15; govern. 16 17 18 ARTICLE 2. BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS ! 19 20 2.1.3 (Add the following supplemental information) 21 ' 22 Existino Conditions: 23 24 These Contract Documents contain reference to existing building and site conditions, materials, ,! 25. furnishings and equipment. This information is developed from non-as-built drawings, site and 26 building observations, and is provided for reference only. It is to be assumed the building is not.level, 27 square or plumb. The contractor shall verify all existing conditions and dimensions. Even though the 28 Pre-Bid Meeting may not be mandatory, it is highly recommended that the contractors attend and take 29 advantage of this time to check out and verify these conditions. Submitting a bid shall indicate the 30 contractors acceptance of the existing conditions, and willingness to provide the labor, materials and 31 equipment necessary to complete the work intended by these Contract Documents. 32 33 34 ARTICLE 3. BIDDING DOCUMENTS: 35 - 36 37 3.1 COPIES 38 ' 39 3.1.1 Add the following supplementary information: 40 41 Each individual holder of the Bidding Documents shall be responsible to confirm that the Documents 42 are complete with all pages, sheets, addenda, etc. ~~ 43 44 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 45 1 46 ~ 3.3.2 (Add the following supplemental information) 4 .. 47 48 Div. 15 and Div. 16 Substitutions: In order to .help expedite the turn-around time for substitution 49 requests, any Div. 15 ar Div.. 16 material, equipment, product, system.supplier, or manufacturerwho _ ~i 50 submits.a subs#itution, request form for their product in lieu of the specified, shall submit two copies 51 of all re wired inform i n q at o directly to the appropriate consulting engineer and a copy of the,transmittal X52 letter to the Architect. 53 54 [ridgeline ms] 00120 - 1 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00920 - 9 1 ARTICLE 4. BIDDING PROCEDURES 2 3 4 4.1 PREPARATION OF BIDS . 5 6 4.1.8 (Add the following new paragraphs) - 7 8 For Divisions 15 and 16, during the bidding process, the "Mechanical Subcontractor" and "Electrical 9 Subcontractor" are the Principal Bidders that bid directly to the General Contractor. The General 10 Contractor is the Principal Bidder that bids directly to the Owner. 11 12 All Division 15 -Mechanical sub-bidders shall submit their bids only to.the Principal Mechanical 13 Subcontractor. (Not to the Principal General Contractor.) In turn, the Principal Mechanical 14 Subcontractors shall submit their bid, which represent the total Work for their Divisions, to the 15 .Principal General Contractor. The Principal Mechanical Subcontractor shall be responsible for all 16 Work of their Division. 17 18 All Division 16 -Electrical sub-bidders shall submit their bids only to the Principal Electrical 19 Subcontractor. (Not to the General Contractor.) In turn, the Principal Electrical Subcontractors shall 20 submit their bid, which represent the total Work for their Division, to the Principal General Contractor. 21 The Principal Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for all Work of their Division. 22 23 4.2 BID SECURITY 24 25 4.2.1 (Add the following supplemental information) 26 27 Certified check or bank cashier's check or bid bond required with each-bid, equal to five percent of 28 Base Bid plus additive Alternate Bids, Base Bid Substitute Bids and Alternate Bid Substitute Bids, if 29 any..Make payable to "Owner" as defined in Section 01095. 30 31 Should a bidder fail to enter into contract and furnish performance and payment bonds within ten days 32 after his proposal has been accepted, his bid guarantee will be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated 33 damages, but not as a penalty. 34 35 4.2.3 , (Add the following supplemental information) 36 37 The successful bidder's check or bid- bond will be retained until he has entered into contract and 38 furnished the required performance and payment and maintenance~bonds. The right is reserved to 39 hold the bid guarantees of the two next low bidders until he has done so, o~ for a,period of (30) thirty 40 days, whichever is the shorter time. Bid guarantees of all otherbidde~s mill be•returned as soon as 41 feasible after bids are opened. 42 43 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 44 45 4.3.5 (Add new paragraph) Subcontractor Listing 46 47 Per RCW 39.30.060, every invitation to bid on a contract that is expected to cost one million dollars 48 or more for the construction, alteration., 'or repair of any public building or public work of the state or 49 a state agency or municipality as defined under RCW 39.04.010 or an institution of higher education 50 as defined under RCW 288.10.016 shall require each bidder to submit as part of the.bid, orwithin one 51 .hour after the published bid submittal time, the names of the subcontractors with whom the bidder, 52 _ if awarded the contract, will subcontract'for performance of the work of heating, ventilation and air 53 conditioning, plumbing as described in chapter 18:106 RCW, and electrical as described in chapter 54 19:28 RCW, or to name itself for the work..The bidder shall not list more than one subcontractor for 55 each category of work identified, unless subcontractors vary with bid alternates, in which case the 56 ~ ~ bidder must indicate which subcontractor will be used for which alternate. Failure of the bidder to 57 submit as part of the bid the names of such subcontractors or to name itself to perform such work or [ridgeline ms] 00120 - 2 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00120 - 2 '` 1 the naming .of two or more subcontractors to perform the same work shall render the bidder's bid 2 Nonresponsive and, therefore, void. The requirement of this section to name the bidder's proposed 3 heating, ventilation and air conditioning, plumbing, and electrical subcontractors applies only to 4 : proposed heating, ventilation and air conditioning, plumbing, and electrical subcontractors who will 5 ~ contract directly with the general contractor submitting the bid to the public entity. This form must be 6 included in the P. art 2-Form of Proposal submittal which shall be submitted not later than one hour ~~ 7 ~ after the time set to receive the Part 1-Form of Proposal submittal. See Advertisement for Bids, 8 Section 00030, for these times and dates. For "Subcontractor Listing Form".see Section 00350. 9 •. 10 FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS REQUIREMENT SHALL RENDER THE BID VOID; AND THE ' 11 OWNER SHALL NOT ACCEPT THE BID. 12 1 13 14 END OF SECTION 00120 [ridgeline ms] 00120 - 3 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00120 - 3 SECTIOIU 00300 -FORM OF PROPOSAL 2 3 5 6 7 9 10 ' 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 ' 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 ' 36 37 38 ' 39 40 ~41 42 . , f?ART'1'OF„2 ' ,... ,;. `~~R/DGELINE' MIDDLE. SCHO~DL ~. In this Section 00300 there is a Part 1 and a Part 2, of which both must be submitted with the correct bid package and at the appropriate times as specified in Section 00030, Advertisement For Bids. To: Yelm Community Schools District No. 2 107 1s` Street North P.O. Box 476 Yelm, Washington 98597 Having carefully examined the Project Manual and Drawings entitled Ridgeline Middle School, as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, the Undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies and to construct the project and perform all work as required by the Contract Documents for the following sums: BASE BID For the Base Bid, as defined in the Specifications, the sum of: ($ Written format Dollars TRENCH EXCAVATION SAFETY PROVISIONS ......................... $ (Include also in Base Bid) If the bid amount contains any work which requires trenching exceeding a depth of four feet, all costs for trench safety shall be included in the Base Bid and indicated above for adequate trench safety systems in compliance with Chapter 39.04 RCW, 49.17 RCW and WAC 296-155-650. Bidder must include a lump sum dollar amount in blank above (even if the value is $0.00)'to be responsive. ALTERNATE BID M-1 Temperature Controls: M-1A (Alerton Controls) ...................................... $ M-1 B (Barber Coleman) ..................................... $ M-1C (Honeywell) .......................................... $. [ridgeline ms] 00300 - 1 FORM OF PROPOSAL 00300 - 1 ADDENDA - Receipt~of the following Addenda is hereby acknowledged: Addendum No: datedAddendum No: dated Addendum No. dated Addendum No. dated SALES TAX None of the above bid prices include State Sales- Tax. THE UNDERSIGNED ALSO AGREES AS FOLLOWS: ' To do any extra work, not covered by the above schedule of prices which may be ordered by the Owner, pursuant to the Contract Documents. , TIME OF COMPLETION/ LIQUIDATED DAMAGES The Undersigned agrees if awarded the Contract, to complete the entire project as stipulated in the Contract Documents. The Undersigned further agrees that the Owner may retain from the compensation otherwise due, the liquidated damage costs incurred by the Owner, for each calendar day expiring beyond the time fixed for completion that the work remains not substantially completed, this sum not to be construed in any sense as penalty, but as agreed liquidated damages which the Owner shall sustain in the case of the failure of the Undersigned to complete the work at the time stipulated. For dates of completion and liquidated damages amount, see SECTION 01010 -SUMMARY OF THE WORK/SPEGIAL CONDITIONS. CONTRACT AND BOND If the Undersigned be notified of the acceptance of this Bid within thirty (30) days after the time set for opening bids, he agrees to execute a Contract for the above work for a compensation established by adjusting the Base .Bid by any Alternate Bids selected by the Owner, in the Form of Agreement required by the i Specifications, and to furnish Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bonds as required by the Specifications. ~, BID GUARANTEE The Undersigned further agrees that the check or bid bond accompanying this Bid is left in escrow with the Owner, that its amount is the measure of the damages which the Owner will sustain by the. failure of the Undersigned to execute said agreement and bonds, and that if the Undersigned fails to deliver said documents within ten (10) days after written notice of the award of the Contract to him, then the check shall become the property of the Owner or the bid bond shall remain in full effect. But if this Bid is not accepted within thirty (30) days after the time set for opening bids, or if the Undersigned delivers said Contract and bonds, then the check shall be returned to him or the bid bond shall become void: COMPANY NAME SIGNATURE [ridgeline msj 00300 - 2 FORM OF PROPOSAL (TITLE) ' ~_. 00300 - 2 ` t_.. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 4 5 6 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29. 30 31 32 SECTION 00300 -FORM OF PROPOSAL PART 2 0F'i2 RIDGELINE'M/DDLESOHOOL. ALTERNATE BIDS A-1 Reader Board ............................................. $ A-2 Field House ............................................... $ A-3 East Play Fields & Playground ................................ $ A-4 West Track /Field .......................................... $ A-5 Subcontractor Bonding: A-5a (Civil) ............................................. $ A-5b (Mechanical) ........................................ $ A-5c (Electrical) ......................................... $ E-1 Theatrical Lighting System ................................... $ E-2 Close Circuit Television System ............................... $ E-3 Intercom, Clock/Program, TV Distribution System: E-3a TelecorSystem ..................................... $ E-3b Rauland-Borg System ................................ $ E-3c Bogen System ...................................... $ (ridgeline msl 00300 - 3 FORM OF PROPOSAL 00300 - 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 REINSTATEMENT OF ALTERNATE BIDS The Undersigned agrees that the Owner has the right to reinstate, at the bid price, any Alternate Bid., Base Bid Substitute Bid or Alternate Bid Substitute Bid, not incorporated in the Contract, provided the Owner so notifies the Undersigned within 30 calendar days after the Contract is signed. ` COMPANY NAME SIGNATURE ADDRESS CITY STATE ZIP TELEPHONE CONTRACTOR'S REGISTRATION NO. (TITLE) END OF SECTION 00300 _ [ridgeline ms] 00300 - 4 FORM OF PROPOSAL 00300 - 4 _ i ~i ~' SECTION 00350 - SUBCONTRA TOR LI IN C ST G ~~ 1 PROJECT: RIDGELINE MIDDLE SCHOOL 2 a 3 ... 4 Every bidder must supply list(s) identifying the Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning, Plumbing, 5 and Electrical subcontractors as required per R.C.W. 39.30.060 (See Section 00120 -Supplementary 6 Instructions to Bidders). This listing must be included in the envelope with the sealed bidder's O 7 Part 2 -Form of Proposal submittal 8 9 10 CONTRACTOR FIRM NAME WORK CATEGORY 11. j 12 '~ 13 ', 14 1 HVAC 2 PLUMBING 3 ELECTRICAL 4 15 16 17 18 ~ 19 20 Name of Firm: 21 22 23 24 ' 25 26 Signed by Official Capacity: 27 28. 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 i 'i ~~ END OF SECTION 00350 ~~ 1 ~I _. [ridgeline ms) 00350 - 1 Date SUBCONTRACTOR LfSTING 00350 - 1 r ': SECTION 00420 -SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 1 DURING BIDDING PERIOD 2 3 Requests for approved equal or substitutions, clarification of specifications, or protest of specifications shall 4 be received by Architect, not later than ten (1'0) days prior to bid date. Requests received after that time will 5 not be considered. 7 To aid in the review of request, submit on form following this section, which may be copied. 8 9 If proposed substitution is approved, such approvals will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall 10 11 not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. 12 13 AFTER CONTRACT AWARD 14 15 The Owner mav, at his option, consider formal requests from Contractor for substitution of products in place 16 of those specified when submitted in accordance with the requirements of this Section. One or more of the ' 17 18 following conditions must also be documented: 19 The substitution must be required for compliance with final interpretation of code requirements or 20 insurance regulations. 21 22 The substitution must be due to the unavailability of the specified products, through no fault of the 23 Contractor: The Contractor must provide a letter from the supplier or manufacturer attesting to the 24 products unavailability. 25 26 The substitution may be requested when subsequent information discloses the inability of the 27 specified products to perform properly or to fit in the designated space. 28 29 The substitution may be due to the manufacturer's or fabricator's refusal to certify or guarantee 30 performance of the specified product as required. 31 •~ 32 The substitution may be requested when it is clearly seen, in the judgment of the Architect, that a 33 substitution would be in the Owner's best interest in terms of cost, time, or other considerations. 35 36 Request for substitution beyond those identified in items 19 through 30 above, will not be considered unless General Contractor and/or material supplier agree to an adjustment in the contract amount 37 associated with costs relating to the review of the substitution request. An adjustment in the contract 38 amount shall be required in both cases of approval or disapproval of the substitution request. 39 40 Rates of Compensation shall be as follows: 41 42 43 Architect/Engineer $125.00 per hour Mileage .36 per mile 44 45 Substitutions will not be considered if: 46 47 Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. 48 49 50 They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without request submitted in accordance with the General Conditions. 52 Document each reguest.with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract 53 Documents. 54 ~~ (ridgeiine ms] 00420 - 1 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 00420 - 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27. 28 29 30 31 32 A request for.substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. Will provide the same warranty. for the substitution as for the specified product. ` W[II coordinate installation and make changes, to other Work which may kie required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. - Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re- approval by authorities. Substitutions. will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop. drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. ~ . Substitution Submittal Procedure: Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed . substitution. Submit" shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product . equivalent. Burden of proof is on proposer. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. END OF SECTION 00420 [ridgeline ms) 00420 - 2 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 00420 = 2 i= I SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM '' TO: Erickson McGovern, P.~.~.c.~ FROM: PROJECT: Ridgeline Middle School We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above project: Section Paragraph Specified Item '' Proposed Substitution: Attach complete technical data, including laboratory tests, if applicable. ~' Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. Submit with request all necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality and performance to that which is specified. PLEASE INDICATE ALL COMPARATIVE INFORMATION, i.e. material weights, gauges, finishes; strength of materials, insulation, anchorage, power requirements, "R"factor, "U"factor, etc. Clearly mark manufacturer's literature to indicate equality in performance. Please submit all Division 15 and Division 16 substitution requests directly to the appropriate engineers. ' Complete the following: 1. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings? Yes No If Yes, clearly indicate changes. - 2. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by the requested substitution? '. ~; 3. What effect does substitution have on other trades? ', 4. What effect does substitution have on applicable code requirements? 5. Differences between proposed substitution and specified items are: [ridgeline ms) SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM. Page 7 of 2 I . 6. Manufacturer's guarantees of the proposed and specified items are: Same Different (Explain) CERTIFICATION OF EQUAL PERFORMANCE AND ASSUMPTION OF LIABILITY FOR EQUAL PERFORMANCE The undersigned states that.the function,. appearance, and quality are equivalent or superior to the specified item. Submitted bv: Firm Date Address Telephone Signature Title Signature must be by~person having authority to legally bind his firm to the above terms. Failure to provide legally binding signature will result in retraction of approval. For Use by Architect: Approved Received Too Late Approved as Noted Disapproved Remarks Erickson McGovern, P.~.~.c. 120 South 131st Street Tacoma, WA 98444 BY DATE r [ridgeline msl SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM ~ Page 2 of 2. II ~: 1 2 3 ,; 4 5 6 '' 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 ! 19 20 21 j 22 23 24 25 26 r SECTION 00500 -CONTRACT FORMS -FORM OF AGREEMENT The Standard Form, of the American Institute of Architects, No. A101 entitled "Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor," 1997 Edition, shall be designated and made the FORM OF AGREEMENT,. for this Contract, as fully as if hereto attached or herein repeated. Copies of the "A.I.A. Form of Agreement" may be examined at the office of the Architect, or may be purchased directly from the American Institute of Architects, 1201 Pacific Avenue, Fountain Court Level, Suite C-4, Tacoma, Washington 98402. Telephone: (253) 627-4006. PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT (LABOR 8~ MATERIALI, AND MAINTENANCE BONDS The standard State of Washington Pertormance Bond covering pertormance, Payment Bond covering labor and material, and Maintenance Bond covering one-year warranty work, in form as required by RCW 39.08 of the State Statutes for Public Work shall be designated and made the Form of Pertormance and Labor and Material Payment Bond for this Contract, as fully as if hereto attached or herein repeated. Copies may be examined at the office of any State of Washington licensed Surety broker or agent. See also Supplementary Conditions Paragraph 11.5.1. The Surety Company writing the above mentioned bonds shall be a company listed in the most current edition of the Federal Register as "Company's Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties" and also shall be listed in Best's Key Rating Guide with a minimum rating of "A-, VII" or better. END OF SECTION 00500 [ridgeline ms] 00500 - 1 CONTRACT FORMS 00500 - 1 '! _ SECTION 00800 -SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS INDEX - GENERAL CONDITIONS, STANDARD FORM STANDARD GENERAL CONDITION ARTICLES MODIFIED BY THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PAGE 3 ARTICLE 1 -GENERAL PROVISIONS 3 ' 1.1 Basic Definitions 1.2 Correlation And Intent Of The Contract Documents ARTICLE 2 -OWNER 3 2.1 General 2.2 Information And Services Required Of The Owner 2.4 Owner's Right To Carry Out The Work 2.5 Owner Rights And Responsibilities ARTICLE 3 -CONTRACTOR 5 3.2 Review Of Contract Documents And Field Conditions By Contractor. 3.3 Supervision And Construction Procedures 3.4 Labor And Materials 3.5 Warranty 3.6 Taxes 3.7 Permits, Fees And Notices 3.9 Superintendent 3.10 Contractor's .Construction Schedule 3.11 Documents And Samples At The Site. 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data And Samples 3.13 Use Of Site 3.18 Indemnification ARTICLE 4 -ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 9 4.2 Architect's Administration Of The Contract 4.3 Claims And Disputes 4.5 Mediation 4.6 Arbitration ARTICLE 5 -SUBCONTRACTORS ~ 11 5.2 Award Of Subcontracts And Other Contracts For Portions Of The Work ARTICLE 6 -CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTOR 11 6.1 Owner's Right To Preform Construction And To Award Separate Contracts 6.2 Mutual Responsibility [ridgeline ms] 00800 - 1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -1 ARTICLE 7 -CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 General 7.2 Change Orders 7.3 Construction Change Directives ARTICLE 8 -TIME 8.1 Definitions 8.2 Progress And Completion 8.3 Delays And Extensions Of Time ARTICLE 9 -PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.2 Schedule Of Values - 9.3 Applications For Payment 9.4 Certificates For Payment 9.5 Decisions To Withhold Certification 9.6 .Progress Payments 9.7 Failure Of Payment 9.8 _ Substantial Completion 9.10 Final Completion And Fina4 Payment ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.3 Hazardous Materials 10.4 ARTICLE 11 -INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 General Provisions 11.2 Contractor's Liability lnsiarance 11.3 Property Insurance 11.5 Performance Bond And Payment~Bond ARTICLE 12 - UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 1.2.1 Uncovering Of Work 12.2 Correction Of Work ARTICLE 13 -MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 12 16 . 17 13.1 :Governing Law 13.4 Rights And Remedies 13.5 Tests And Inspections 13.7 Commencement Of Statutory Limitation Period ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 Termination By The Contractor 14.2 Termination By Owner For Cause 14.3 Suspension By The Owner For Convenience 14.4 Termination By The Owner For Convenience ARTICLE 15 - ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 15.1 Provisions To The Revised Code Of Washington 21 21 24 24 25 26 [ridgeline ms] 00800 - 2 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -2 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS -STANDARD FORM 2 3 The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," A.I.A. Document A-201 1997 Edition are hereby 4 made a part of these Specifications whether or not herein included. Copies of the "A.I.A. Document A-201" 5 may be examined at the office of the Architect, br may be purchased directly from the American Institute of 6 Architects,1201 Pacific Avenue, Fountain Court Level, Suite C-4; Tacoma, WA98402. Telephone: (253) 627- ' 7 4006.. , .8 9 ~ . 10 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ,~ 12 The followin Su lementa Conditions amend modi and/or delete rovisions of the "General Conditions 9 pP rY fY P 13 , of the Contract for Construction," AIA Document A201, Fifteenth Edition, 1997. Where a portion of the 14 General Conditions is amended, modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered 15 portions:of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. ' 16 17 '~ 18 ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 19 20 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 21 i 22 1.1.1 Supplement as follows: Add the Instructions to Bidders, the Accepted Bid or Proposal, to the items 23 consisting of the Contract Documents. 24 25 1_2 : , CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 26 27 1..2.1 Supplement as follows: Whenever an article, device or. piece of equipment is referred to in singular 28 , number; such reference applies to all such articles shown on drawings or. required.to complete the 29 installation: .. 30 . 31 1.2.3 Supplement as follows: In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, ' ~ 32 interpretations will give precedence in the following order: (1) The Agreement; (2) Addenda, with. 33 those of later date having precedence over those of earlier date; (3) Supplementary Conditions; (4) 34 :. General Conditions; and (5) Drawings and Specifications. In the case of inconsistency between the ' 35 Drawings and Specifications or within either document, the better quality or greater quantity of work 36' shall be provided in accordance with the Architect's interpretation without additional compensation 37 . to the Contractor. 38 i 3g ~ 40 ARTICLE 2 > .OWNER . , 41 ' 42 2_1 GENERAL '! 43 . 44 2.1.1 Delete in its entirety and insert the following: The Owner of this project is the Yelm Community 45 Schools District No. 2, which is governed by its School Board of Directors (the "Board"), The Board ' 46. has designated CSG (Construction Services Group-2500 NE 6"' Avenue, Vancouver, WA 98661, 47 Phone (360/750-7500), FAX (360/750-9.706) as the Project Managerwho shall be the primary contact 48 ~ . on behalf of the Board and District. Such Manager shall have such authority as shall be confirmed ~ 49 by the Board. Unless specifically limited by the Board, such Manager shall have the ability to make 50 decisions on behalf of the Owner: The Board shall retain the final decision on acceptance of the 51 ~ contract and approval of any proposed Change Orders or proposed Construction Change Directives 52 except for the limited delegation in.this paragraph. Should the Contractor proceed to carry out the 'I 53 ~ Work required by the Construction.Cliange Directive approved by the Project Manager (as opposed 54 to approval by the Board itself) the Contractor by so doing agrees to accept as full compensation for 55 all costs and claims arising from and related to such Construction Change Directive a reasonable sum ~ 56 which shall in no case exceed $25,000. Except for the limited approval authority delegated for ,; 57 Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, the School Board of Directors shall have the ~ [ridge~ine ms] 00800 - 3 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -3 '! ._ sole authority to authorize any change to the provisions of the Contract which the Contractor claims may entitle the Contractor to any equitable adjustment or extra compensation. 2.1.3 Address paragraph as follows: PROJECT MANAGER ON SITE. The Board's designated Project Manager referred to in paragraph 2.1.1 above shall have only that authority stated above. The presence on site of the Board's designated Project Manager, any Board member, maintenance staff, principal, teacher, or any other employee or officer of the School District shall not imply any authority by such person to direct extra work or make approvals or acceptances except as specifically delegated in this Contract or as adopted. by, formal action of the School Board of Directors and communicated in writing to the Contractor: This limitation of authority shall apply whether or not such • persons on site are called clerk of the works, inspector, or any other related designation. The presence of such persons on the site and his/her observations, knowledge, and/or statements shall not create any apparent authority. No act or omission, statement or silence by such person on site shall waive any requirements of this Contract, constitute acceptance or approval by the Owner, or waive any requirement of written notice. No such Project Manager or other Owner employee or officer shall have authority: to direct the manner or means by which the Contractor carries out the work; to direct or approve safety measures of the Contractor; or to direct any extra work, except the Project Manager may do so by the written Construction Change Directive procedure within the limited monetary authority herein provided. The presence on site of such persons shall in noway derogate from the authority of the Architect; nor shall it alter the contractually specified procedures for communication through the Architect. 2.1.4 The Project Manager and the Architect, separately and jointly, shall have authority on behalf of the Owner to condemn or reject Work when, in the Project Manager's or the Architect's opinion, the work does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever in the Project Manager's or the Architect's reasonable opinion it is considered necessary or advisable to insure the proper implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Project Manager or-the Architect shall have the authority to require special inspection or testing of any Work in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents whether or not such Work be then fabricated, installed, or completed. 2:1.5 The ProjectManager will have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not such Work be then fabricated, installed, or completed. However, neither the Project Manager's • ' authority nor any decision made by the Project Manager in good faith either exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of the Project Manager to the Contractor, any subcontractor, any of their agents or employees, or any other person performing any of the Work. 2.1.6 The Project Manager shall have the authority and discretion to call, schedule, and conduct job meetings to be attended by the Contractor, and representatives of his Subcontractors, and Material Suppliers and Vendors and the Architect, to discuss such matters as procedures, progress, problems, and scheduling. 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 Delete in its entirety. 2.2.3 Supplement by adding the following: Such surveys and the drawings show physical characteristics and utility locations based upon information readily available at the time of their preparation. To the extent the surveys or drawings depict the expected location of underground utilities or wires, pipes, or similar plumbing or electrical locations which are hidden behind walls, the Contractor understands and assumes the risk that the exact locations may be somewhat different. The Contractor shall use care in exploring and locating such underground or behind walls utilities, plumbing and electrical runs and shall adjust any necessary work or connections relating to such existing utility plumbing and electrical locations without additional costs to the Owner. [ridgeline ms] 00800 - 4 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ~ 00800 -4 ' ~ 1 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2 3 2.4.1 Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: If the Contractor neglects to carry out the Work in 4 accordance with the Contract Documents or fails to correct defective work and fails within a seven 5 (7) calendar day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue 6 correction of such failure or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice 7 to other remedies the.Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In the event such deficiencies 8 threaten the health or safety of employees or occupants, the Owner may proceed to correct such 9 - deficiencies with such notice (or no notice) to the Contractor as is reasonable under the 10 . circumstances.. When the' Owner has undertaken to carry out a portion of the Work prior to final ' 11 acceptance of the Contract, an appropriate Modification shall be issued deducting from payments 12 . then orthereafterdue the Contractorthe cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation 13 for the Architect's additional services, and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect or 14 failure. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, 15 the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. 17 2_5 Add OWNER RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES: , 18 ; 19 2.5.1 The Owner will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for construction means, 20 methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, orforsafety precautions and programs in connection ' 21 with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor s responsibility as provided in Paragraph 3.3. 22 The Ownerwill not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry outthe Work in accordance with 23 the Contract Documents. The Owner will not have control over or charge of and will not be 24 responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or 1; 25 of any other persons performing portions of the Work. 26 27 2.5.2 In the exercise .of the Owner's right to carry out the Work under Paragraphs 2.4 and/or 12.2, the 28 Owner shall have the right to use the Owner's own forces or hire another Contractor with or without 29 public bid to. carry out such work. ,~ 32 ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR , 33 .. 34 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 35 ~ 36 3.2.1. Supplement as follows: The existence of errors, omissions or inconsistencies in the contract 37 documents should not entitle the contractor to compensation or extra costs for delay, but may entitle 38 - the contractor to an extension of time; and the contractor shall use all reasonable efforts to minimize '~ 39 the costs and delays occasioned by discovery of errors, omissions or inconsistencies in the contract 40 documents. 41 42 3.2.2 Supplement as follows: In all cases except those in which the contract documents detail a 43 construction which violates any applicable law, statute, ordinance, building code, or rule and 44 regulation, the contractor shall be responsible to construct the work in accordance with all applicable ~, 45 laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulation. ~ (. 47 3.2.3 Supplement as follows: If the contractor fails to perform the obligations of subparagraph 3.2.1 and 48 3.2.2, the contractor shall not be entitled to additional costs or time which would have been saved had 49 the contractor pertormed those obligations. 50 ` 51 3.2.4 Investigation of subsurface conditions on the site have been made for design purposes. The results 52 of such investigations are available to prospective bidders and the Contractor, and are to be 53 considered a part of the Contract Documents. There is no guarantee, either express or implied, that ~ 54 the conditions indicated are representative of those existing throughout the site, or that unforeseen 55 developments may not occur. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any interpretations of ~, 56 the information or extrapolations beyond the location of each individual boring or test pit. 57 [ridgeiine ms] 00800 - 5 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -5 1 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.3.4 The Contractor will establish and maintain existing lot lines, restrictions and bench marks shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall establish and maintain all other line levels and bench marks necessary for the execution of the Work, and take such steps as are necessary to prevent their dislocation or destruction. The Contractor shall employ a professional land surveyor registered in the State of Washington to lay out the Work and be responsible for the accuracy of same. 3.3.5 Contractor shall coordinate, lay out, and schedule all work sufficiently in advance of its scheduled. performance to adjust conflicts and to avoid related delays. This responsibility addresses all work, regardless of its assignment by Contractor to a subcontractor orthe requirements on different pages of the plans to place the work of separate specialties (such as mechanical and electrical) within tight spaces. The Contractor will coordinate its work and that of its subcontractors to minimize wall penetrations and other cutting, patching or moving of previously placed work by other trades or specialties. 3.3.6 The Contractor shall coordinate and be informed on delivery of materials of all Subcontractors. Negligence of the Contractor(s) to schedule material delivery in advance will not constitute a justification for delay. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.3_ Supplement as follows: Contractor shall prohibit from working at a public school site any employee who has pled guilty to or been convicted of any felony crime involving: physical neglect of a child under Chapter 9A.42 RCW; the physical injury or death of a child under Chapter 9A.32 or 9A.36 RCW (except motor vehicle violations under Chapter 46.61 RCW); sexual exploitation of a child under Chapter 9.68A -RCW; sexual offenses under Chapter 9A.44 RCW where a minor is the victim; promoting prostitution of a minor under Chapter 9A.88 RCW; the sale or purchase of a minor child under RCW 9A.64.030; or violation of similar laws of another jurisdiction. The Contractor shall bind subcontractors to the same restriction. This restriction is as mandated by RCW 28A.400.330. Violation of this provision shall be grounds for immediately terminating this Contract. 3.4.4 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect may consider a formal request for the substitution of the products in place of those specified only under exceptional conditions. Any substitution requests made must indicate a time and / or cost advantage to the Owner. See Division 1 of the specifications. By making requests for substitutions, the Contractor: 3.4.4.1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified; 3.4.4.2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same or greater warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified; 3.4.4.3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; 3.4.4.4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making at Contractor's sole cost such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects; and 3.4.4.5 shall pay for all the Architect's reasonable and necessary fees in reviewing the proposed substitution and reviewing any resulting changes to the work. 3.4.5 WAGE RATES: 3.4.5.1 The prevailing rate of wages to be paid to all workmen, laborers, or mechanics employed in the performance of any part of this Contract.shall be in accordance with the provisions of (ridgeline ms] 00800 - 6 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -6 r 1 Chapter 39.12 RCW, as amended. The rules and regulations of the Washington State 2 Department of Labor and Industries and the schedule of prevailing wage rates forthe locality 3 or localities where this Contractwill be performed as determined by the Industrial Statistician '; 4 of the Department of Labor and Industries, are by reference made a part of this Contract as 5 though fully set forth herein. 6 7 3.4.5.2 Inasmuch as the Contractor will be held responsible for paying the: prevailing wages, it is 8 imperative that all Contractors familiarize themselves with the current wage rates before 9 submitting bids based on these specifications. Owners information on current wage rates, 10 if included herein, is as a convenience to bidders. 1° 11 12 3.4.5.3 Incase any dispute arises as to what are the prevailing rates of wages for work of a similar 13 nature and- such dispute cannot be adjusted by the parties in interest, including labor and 14 management representatives, the matter shall be referred for arbitration to the Director of the 15 Department of Labor and Industries of the State and his or her decision therein shall be final 16 .and binding on all parties involved in the dispute as provided for by RCW 39.12.060 as ~. 17 amended. ~` 19 3.4.5.4 The Contractor and all subcontractors shall each. complete and file a Statement of Intent to 20 Pay Prevailing Wages on Public Contract form, prior to starting work under the Contract. 21 22 3.4.5.5 Each progress payment request submitted by a Contractor for payment on a project estimate 23 shall state that prevailing wages have been paid in accordance with the pre-filed statement 24 or statements of intent on file with the Dept. of Labor and Industries as approved by the ' 25 Industrial Statistician. ~ . 26 27 3.4.5.6 At the conclusion of the project the Contractor and the Subcontractors shall.submit affidavits i 28 of wages paid to the Department of Labor-and Industries, 1601 Second Avenue, Seattle, 29 Washington 98101, for certification by the Director. Contractor shall provide a copy to the 30 Owner. 3.4.6 ~ Use of tobacco products is prohibited on all School District property. Violators are subject to fines as specified.by the State of Washington. 3.5 WARRANTY 37 3.5.1 Amend as follows: Iri the first sentence, change the phrase "quality required or permitted ..." to read 38 ".;...quality specified ...." In the second to the last sentence, change the phrase "... or normal wear 39 and tear and normal usage" to read ".. , or normal wear and tear under normal usage." 40 41 3.5.2 All work under this Contract shall be performed in a skillful and workmanlike manner. The warranties 42 set forth in this paragraph and elsewhere in the Contract Documents and claims relating to breach 43 thereof shall survive substantial completion, final acceptance and final payment. 45 3_6. TAXES 46 47 3.6.1 -Supplement as follows: Taxes to be paid by Contractor include those imposed by federal, state, 48 county and city governments, excepting only real estate taxes on the property; and such taxes as 49 applicable shall be included in the proposal sums. The state, county, and city retail sales taxes are 50 not permitted to be included in the proposal sums; the Owner shall pay sales taxes proportionately 51 with each periodic and final estimate in addition to the amount allowed on the payment certificate and 52 Contractor shall pay such taxes to the authority as required by law. '~ 53 ~ 54 3_7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 56 3.7.1Supplement this paragraph with the following: The local building department plan check fee, building ri 57 permit, and building inspection. fees will be paid by the Owner and shall not be included within the [ridgeline ms] 00800 - 7 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -7 Contract Sum. All other permits, and any surcharges, and public inspection fees shall be secured by and paid by the Contractor and included in the Contract Sum. The Contractor shall pay for any reinspections. 3_9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 Add the following supplemental information to the existing Paragraph 3:9.1:' "The Contractor shall employ a competerit superintendent, who shall be in attendance full-time at the Project site. The superintendent shall pertorm strictly in a supervisory role and not in a working (physical) role. The superintendent shall not be replaced without the prior written consent of the Owner or Architect. If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to the superintendent proposed by the General Contractor, the General Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection." 3:10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 3.10.1_ Add to paragraph as follows: "Include costs in the Proposal for furnishing the Progress Schedule (CPM) in the form as follows: SCHEDULE OF WORK: The Contractor who is the apparent low bidder shall submit to the Architect within ten days of the commencement of work a proposed Progress Schedule in a simplified critical path method (CPM) illustrating his basic plan for meeting the completion dates specified in this contract. This CPM network shall be activity-oriented showing as nearly as can be determined the starting and completion dates of each event. This preliminary network should show shop drawing submittals, material, delivery, fabrication, installation and checkout of each major item of work. Prior to the first pay estimate, the Contractor shall develop an expanded network showing not less than 150 activities. Significant coordination and interfacing of construction will be necessary. The CPM shall be cost loaded for each activity. The approved cost loaded CPM shall be the basis for determining pay requests throughout the project. In order to efficiently implement the major portion of these interfaces and avoid numerous interferences, the following procedures shall be adhered to: MAINTENANCE OF PROJECT SCHEDULE: The General Contractor shall-maintain the project CPM schedule in current condition and shall continuously monitor the progress of the work to assure completion of the work-in compliance with the schedule. PROGRESS REPORT: ~No later than 30 days after receipt of notice to proceed and prior to the first pay request, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a copy of the time-oriented project CPM schedule updated to show the current status of each major .CPM activity as of the fourth Friday of each month. This progress report shall be submitted monthly with each pay estimate. Activities which are found to be consistently behind schedule shall be worked expeditiously to correct the schedule and assure a timely project completion. FLOAT TIME: The inclusion of float time in the activity listing of the Contractor's Construction Schedule shall be owned entirely by the Owner. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Time, the Contractor's Construction Schedule, or the Contract Sum, or to any additional payment of any sort by reason of the loss or use of any float time, including time between the Contractor's anticipated completion date and the actual completion date. PROSECUTION OF WORK: Contractorshallfurnish sufficientforces, construction plantand equipment, as may be necessary to insure the prosecution of the work, in accordance with [ridgeline ms] 00800 -. 8 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -8 U 11 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE the approved construction schedule. If Contractor falls behind such schedule, Contractor shall take such steps as may be necessary to improve his progress without,additional cost to Owner." 3.11.2 Add the following new subparagraph: "In addition, the Contractor shall keep the approved permit set of plans at the jobsite during construction, in good condition. Just prior to final acceptance 'the Contractor shall deliver this permit set to the Project Manager." 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS. PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.7 Supplement paragraph as follows: "The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Architect and shall resubmit the required number of corrected copies of shop drawings or new samples. Resubmittal of-shop drawings or samples necessitated by required corrections shall not be a cause for extension of time. All such portions of the work shall be in accordance with the approved submittals." 3.13 USE OF SITE 3:13.1 Supplement as foliows: In order to minimize interference with District activities, the Contractor shall coordinate all of his operations with and secure approval of the Owner's Project Manager before using . any portion of the site. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 3.18.3 It is the intent of the indemnification paragraphs hereinabove to require the Contractor to indemnify the named parties to the fullest extent permitted by RCW Chapter 4.24 as it now exists or is hereafter . amended. It is specifically intended that the Contractor's .indemnity shall cover allegations of concurrent negligence of indemnitor and indemnitee, their agents or employees; and that the duty to. so indemnify shall cover all costs of defense of such claims. The Contractor's indemnity obligations shall not- cover allegations or adjudicated determinations that the liability arises from the sole negligence of an indemnitee. In claims against any indemnitee by_an employee of the Contractor, a subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation hereundershall'not be limited by the Washington State worker's compensation law, RCW Title 51. The Contractor shall provide insurance covering such indemnity obligations subject to the terms and conditions provided in Article 11 including the naming of Owner and Architect as additional insureds upon such policy. Only to the extent necessary to provide the indemnification of others provided hereinabove, and only to the.extent an indemnification is required by the Contract to be covered by insurance, the signing of the Contract by the Contractor shall operate as a waiver of the Contractor's immunity from suit under RCW Title 51. This waiver does not apply to a claim made by an employee of the Contractor against only the Contractor. ARTICLE 4ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2' ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.1 Supplement as follows: The authority of the Architect as the Owner's representative is separate from the Board's designated Project Manager as described in Article 2. The presence of the Architect or any Architect representatives orconsultants onthe site, their knowledge, their acts or omissions, their statements or silence shall not give rise to any apparent authority beyond that authority specifically stated in the Contract Documents; nor shall such operate as a waiver of any of the requirements of the Contract Documents including the requirements for any written notice required by the Contract Documents. (ridgeline ms] 00800 - 9 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -9 1 4.2.4 Communications Facilitatin Contract•Administration. Su lement as follows: Communications 2 between the Contractor or subcontractor and Architect's consultants, Owner's maintenance staff or 3 occupants of occupied buildings shall be limited to matters of information, security arrangements, or 4 incidental access to occupied buildings; but in no case shall such communications relate to or 5 authorize changes to the Work or give rise to claims for additional work. Should any party to the 6 Contract believe unauthorized communications are being made by any person, such shall be reported 7 in writing to the Architect and to the Project Manager, and Contractor's Superintendent. 8 - 9 4.2.12 Supplement as follows: The architect's obligations under this subparagraph shall not derogate from 10 architect's responsibilities under its contract to the Owner; nor shall the provisions of this 11 subparagraph preclude the architects receiving advise from and consulting with Owner's 12 representatives and attorneys regarding claims and contract interpretations. 13 14 4_3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 15 , 16 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: Subject to the requirement 17 ' than the Contractor give written notice of any possible claim within seven (7) calendar days of 18 ~ occurrence prior to proceeding to execute any work claimed to be extra or additional, Claims by the 19 Contractor must be made by detailed written notice within twenty-one (21) calendar days after 20 occurrence of the event giving rise to such claim. 21 ~, 22 4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: Pending final ~ 23 resolution of the claim or-dispute including the necessary time to resolve any litigation, the Contractor 24 shall proceed diligent{y with the performance of the contract and any work directed, whether or not , 25 ~ the Contractor alleges: that a dispute constitutes a total breach of contract; that a dispute is beyond 26 I the scope of the contract; or that there has been a cardinal change; or that conditions would allow-the 27 Contractor the right to rescind. This obligation to continue work is deemed to cover all disputes 28 related in any way to the contract between the parties. The Contractor will incorporate this clause to i 29 obligate its subcontractors and material men to likewise continue performance despite the pendency ~ 30 of a'dispute. The Owner shall during a dispute continue to make payments as such payments are 31 otherwise due in accordance with the terms of these contract documents. 32 .,. ~' 33 4.3.7 ~~ Claims for: Additional Time ~ ~- 34 35 4~:~3.7.1: Supplement as follows: Except as provided in Supplementary General Conditions 8.3.3, +' 36 Contractor is entitled only to an extension of time for delay. 37 - 38 4.3.10 Consequential Damages:. Delete in its entirety. , 39 ' • 40 4:3.11 Access to Contractor Cost Records. The Contractor's entire cost records and bid working papers for , 41 the~project~shall be open to inspection and audit by representatives of the Owner during the life of the 42 contract and for a period of not less than three (3) years after the date of acceptance thereof. The ~' 43 Contractor shall retain such records for that period. The Owner shall have the right to seek ~ 44 reimbursement of any amount it determines it has overpaid to the Contractor or for payment for ` 45 materials or labor or based on the costs thereof to forces other than the Contractor. The Contractor 46 shall require by contract that the cost records of its subcontractors, material men and suppliers shall J 47 be open to inspection and audit by representatives of the Owner on the same terms and conditions 48 as the cost records of the Contractor. If an audit is to be commenced more than sixty (60) days after 49 the acceptance date of the contract, the Contractor will be given reasonable notice of the time of 50 when such audit is to begin. 51 52 4_5 MEDIATION 53 i ' 54 Delete this section in its entirety. 55 _ 56 I' [ridgelin e ms] 00800 - 10 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -10 ~...~ r . ~l ~ 1 ~~ _6 . . ARBITRATION is amended as follows: The title "ARBITRATION" is deleted and substituted in its 2 place is "DISPUTE RESOLUTION" as the new title of the section. Wherever in the Contract i 3 Documents reference is made to "arbitration," or to "mediation" the term "dispute. resolution" shall be 4 deemed to be substituted.in its place. 5 6 4.6.1. Delete in its entirety and.substitute the following:.Any controversy or claim arising out of or related 7 ~ ~ to the Contract, or the.breach thereof, except as provided in Subparagraph 4.2.13 with respect to the ' ! 8 ~ ~ Architect's.decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect and except. for claims which have been 9 waived as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents and except for claims waived under the 10 provisions of the Contract Documents, shall be decided by court of law under the reguiar rules of civil 11 procedure unless the parties hereafter mutually agree in writing to mediation or to binding arbitration. 12 This provision for litigation in place of arbitration shall be called in these Contract Documents "dispute 13 resolution:" Wheri elsewhere in the Contract Documents "arbitration" or "mediation" is used, the term ~ 14 "dispute resolution" shall be deemed substituted in place thereof. When the term "demand for 15 mediation or arbitration" or any phrase with similar meaning shall be used in the Contract Documents, 16 there shall be deemed substituted in the place thereof the term "commencement of litigation." Claims 17 upon which the Architect has given notice and rendered a decision as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.6 ~ 18 shall be subject to litigation if litigation is commenced within thirty (30) days after Contractor's receipt 19 of notice; otherwise, such right to litigation of the dispute is waived. Litigation may be commenced 20 wheri forty-five (45) calendar days have passed after a claim has been referred to the_Architect as 21 provided in Section 4:4 and no decision has been rendered. 22 23 Parag raphs 4.6.2 through 4.6:6.are deleted in their entirety. 24 25 ' ~ 26 ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 27 28 5_2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 29 30 5.2..1. Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: Within ten (10) days after Owners issuance, of a 31 Notice of Intent to Award Contract, Contractor shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the. 32 Architect the names of all subcontractors and those suppliers who are to furnish major equipment r . 33 items or materials.,or equipment fabricated to a special design for the work.. Such listing is in addition 34 to the listing of major subcontractors required to tie submitted at the time of bid. The Architect will i 35 promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due ~ 36 investigation, have reasonable objection to any such proposed subcontractor person or entity. Failure ` 37 of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. 38 Contractor thereafter may not change the subcontractor or supplier except upon a showing of good j 39 cause and upon prior written approval by Owner, Owner will not unreasonably withhold approval. 40 41 5.2.5 - Add paragraph as follows: 42 ~ . ~ 't 43 . "The provisions of subparagraphs 5.2.1 through 5.2.4 shall be superseded to.the extent of conflicting 44 provisions, if,any, in the Form of Proposal, if listing of subcontractors is required therein." 45 46 , . 47 ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 48 i 49 6_1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 50 . 51 6.1..1 .Amend and supplement as follows: Delete the period.on the last sentence and substitute a semi- 52 . colon followed by: "except that contractor shall have no such claim for constructions or operations 53 which are disclosed to the contractor in the bidding or contract documents." ' f 54 ~55 , r ~ i _ . [ridgeline ms] 00800 - 11 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -11 -- - ... 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.3 Delete and substitute as follows: In the event there is more than one Contractor engaged on the project site, each such Contractor shall be responsible to the other for damages to the Work, injury to any person or persons, or for any loss, cost, claims or damages arising out of or in connectiori with the Work required by its Contract or any loss, cost; expense; or damage caused by Contractor's. neglect or failure to finish or satisfactorily~complete its part of-the Work within the time prescribed. In all events, the provisions of Paragraph 3.18 shall be applicable. If, such separate Contractor sues or initiates a proceeding against the Owner; and/or the Architect on account of any damage or delay alleged to.have been caused by a Contractor, the Ownershall notify such Contcactorwho shall defend such proceedings at his own expense, and if~any judgment or award against the Owner, and/or the Architect arises therefrom, the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and shall reimburse the Owner, and/or the Architect for all attorneys' fees, court and other costs which the Owner, and/or the Architect have incurred. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7_1 GENERAL 7.1.1 Amend and supplement as follows: In the second line; change the words "Construction Change Directive" to "Proposal Request" and add the following: The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the bonding and insurance company(s) of any changes in the Work; provided that neither the number or quality of changes nor Contractor's failure to provide notice shall release bonding or insurance coverages. 7.1.2 Amend as follows: In the second line, change the words "Construction Change Directive" to "Proposal Request." 7.1.3 Amend as.follows: In the third line, change the words "Construction Change Directive" to "Proposal Request." 7.1.3. Amerid as follows: In the third line, change the words "Construction Change Directive" to "Proposal Request." 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 7.2.3 Add as new Subparagraph: The allowances for and limitations on overhead and profit as provided in Paragraph 7.3 (as amended and -supplemented) shall apply to Change Orders ,Proposal Requests, and all Claims for extra cost or damage. 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES -Delete the title "CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES" and substitute the title "PROPOSAL REQUESTS" Add: Wherever in the Contract Documents reference is made to ~"Construction Change Directive(s)" the term "Proposal Request" shall be deemed to be substituted in its place. 7.3.6 Delete the last sentence and substitute the following: The term "reasonable allowance for overhead. and profit" as used in this paragraph and elsewhere in the Contract Documents is defined. as and shall be limited to the allowances provided in this Subparagraph. The itemized accounting and supporting data shall be submitted by the Contractor and all Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors through the Contractor on breakdown sheet forms provided by-the Architect and shall include only the following costs grid allowances: .1 Delete text and substitute the following: ADDITIVE CHANGES a. Direct Labor Costs: This is defined as the estimated labor costs determined by either the estimated number of craft man hours multiplied by the hourly costs [ridgeline ms] 00800 - 12 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -12 ' 1 2 3 4 i 5 6 1 7 '! 8 9 10 11 12 13 i 14 'j 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 i 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 ~ 29 30 31 ~ 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 '~ 39 ~ 40 41 42 ~ 43 ~ 44 45 ~ 46 1' - 48 ~49 50 i 51 52 53 54 - 55 56 ~ 57 (. necessary to perform the change in the Work; or the unit labor costs applied to the material quantities, providing said unit labor costs are developed from the above craft man hours costs; whichever is applicable, according to industry practice. The hourly costs shall be based on the following: (1) Basic Wages: Current minimum prevailing hourly wage rates, including vacation pay, for all labor, crew foreman, and general foreman performing and/or directly supervising the Work on-the site, as established by the State ' of Washington., Department of Labor and Industries. (2) Fringe Benefits: Fringe benefits established by the State of Washington, Department of Labor and Industries or contributed to labor trust funds as itemized fringe benefits, whichever are applicable. (3) Workman's Insurances: Direct contributions to the State of Washington as Industrial Insurance; Medical Aid; and Supplemental Pension, by the class and rates established by the State of Washington, Department of Labor and Industries. (4) Federal and State Contributions: Direct contributions required by the . FederallnsuranceCompensationAct(F.I.C.A.);FederalUnemploymentTax - Act (F.U.T.A.); and the State Unemployment Compensation Act (S.U.C.A.). (5) Costs incurred for compliance with the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA); established as 2% of 1, 2, 3 and 4 above. (6) Travel allowance and/or subsistence if applicable not to exceed those established by Regional Labor Union Agreements, itemized, documented with receipts, and identified separately. b. Direct Material Costs: This is defined as an itemization of the estimated. quantity of materials necessary to perform the change in the Work and the cost therefore. These costs shall be the unit cost applied to the quantity and extended. The unit costs sliall be based on the following: - (1) The net cost after all offered or available discounts or rebates. (2) _ Freight costs, express charges, or special delivery costs when applicable. No lump sum costs will be allowed except when approved in advance by the Architect. c. Construction Equipment Usage Costs: (1) Rental Equipment: This is defined as an itemization of and the estimated `~ length of time construction equipment will be used on Proposal Request Work .at the site. The rental costs applied thereof will be the rates established by the following whichever is applicable: (a) The current rental rates established by agreement• between the Associated General Contractors (A.G.C.) and Washington State Department of Highways. [ridgeline ms] 00800 - 13 (b) The current rental rates established by the State of Washington, Utilities and Transportation Commission for trucks used on highways. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -13 (c) The Current rental rates established by the National Electrical Contractor's Association (N.E.C.A.) for equipment used on electrical work. (d) The current rental rates established by the Mechanical Contractor's Association for equipment used on mechanical work. (e) Equipment required for which a rental rate is not established in any of the above, shall be at an agreed rental rate established for that equipment. Such rates and the use of the equipment on the Work must be approved by the Project Manager prior to performing the Work. (f) The rates as determined above include full compensation for furnishing all fuel, oil, lubrication, repairs, maintenance, and insurance. (2) Small Tools, Expendables and Consumable Supplies: (a) These are general in nature and are defined as tools for which the initial purchase price is under $250 and are normally furnished by .the performing contractor. (b) The allowable rate for small tools will be as follows: General Contractors 3% direct labor costs Specialty Contractors 5% direct labor costs (c) Expendables and consumable supplies directly associated with the Proposal Request Work shall be itemized. ' d .Subcortractor's Proposals: Subcontractor's proposals are to be itemized as provided in a., b. and c. above. e. Overhead and Profit by the Contractor or Subcontractor Actually Performing the Work: A total amount, not to exceed 15% of items a., b. and c. above will be allowed for overhead and profit for the Contractor and Subcontractor actually performing the Requesf Proposal Work. This is to compensate such contractor for all costs not provided for in the above allowances, including: personnel not defined in "a" above; temporary construction facilities, home office costs; office engineering and estimating costs; profit; plus any other cost incidental to the performance of the change in Work. f. Overhead and Profit by the Contractor and Subcontractors Not Actually Performing the Work But Who Supervise and Administer the Subcontractors Performing the Work: . (1) A total amount not to exceed 8% of the total amount of Subcontractors' and Sub-subcontractors' proposal as defined in "d" above will be allowed for overhead and profit for the Contractor and Subcontractor not actually performing the Work butwho supervises and administers the Subcontractor performing the Work and for all other costs listed in "e" above. (2) No direct labor by the Contractor will be allowed to be added to a Subcontractor's orSub-subcontractor's proposal. Contractor's direct labor, if required, must be submitted as outlined in "a" above. [~idgeiine ms] 00800 - 14 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -14 n g. Cost of Any Increase or Decrease in Premium for Insurance and Bond Caused by the Change: (1) Contractor's Liability Insurance: To the above, the costs of the Contractor's Liability Insurance may be added, if increased. I1 ii (2) Bond: To the above, the cost of the Contractor's Bond may be added, if increased. h. The costs and allowance for overhead and profit as calculated in accordance with this paragraph shall constitute Contractor's full entitlement to compensation or equitable adjustment for the changed Work, relating thereto, or resulting therefrom. No additional compensation shall be allowed for costs including, but not limited to, direct, indirect, impactor ripple effects caused to labor by changes, costs of delay or acceleration, and home office overhead. .2 Delete the text and, substitute the following: DEDUCTIVE CHANGES Items in 7.3.6.1 "a", "b"; "c", "d", "e", "f°, and "g" will be itemized for changes which delete Work. .3 Delete the text and substitute the following: ADDITIVE CHANGES AND DEDUCTIVE CHANGES TOGETHER. a. If a change in the Work involves both additive and deductive changes, the appropriate overhead and profit amount allowed will be added to the net difference of items in 7.3.6.1 "a", "b", "c", and "d". b. If other additive unrelated change items are included in the same Proposal Request, the appropriate 7.3.6 overhead and profit allowed is to be applied to these individual . changed items. .4 Delete the text and substitute the following: If the. description of the change in the Work is, in the opinion of the Architect or Project Manager, definitive enough for the Architect or Project Manager to determine fair value and the total of the change does not exceed $500 no breakdown is required. .5 Delete the text and substitute the following: If the description of the change in the Work is, in the opinion of the Architect or Project Manager, definitive enough for the Architect or Project Manager to determine fair value is between $500 and $1,500, the breakdown shall consist of the following: a. Lump sum labor; b. Lump sum materials; c. Lump sum equipment usage; d. Appropriate overhead and profit as defined in 7.3.6 above. 7.3.7 Delete this Subparagraph. [ridgeline ms] 00800 - 75 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -75 ~' 7.3.9 Supplement as follows: In the event the Owner or Contractor do not agree with the determination of the Architect, in any subsequent dispute resolution, the total compensation or credit for the changed Work, relating thereto, or resulting therefrom shall be limited to costs (plus overhead and profit) as described and limited in Subparagraph 7.3.6. If either the Contractor or Owner disagrees with the Architect's determination of the change in the dollar amount or change in the Contract Time, a written notice of Claim must be submitted to the Architect within twenty-one (21) days after the issuance of the Architect's determination. Failure timely to submit such written notice of Claim shall operate as waiver of any right to adjustment of the Contract Sum or Time other than as contained in the Architect's previously issued determination. ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1. DEFINITIONS 8.1.2 Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: Within ten calendar days of Owner's written notification to the Contractor of their intent. to award the contract, the Contractor shall submit an executed contract, surety bond, preliminary progress schedule, certificates of insurance, any documents required by state or local authorities, and all other documents required by the Contract. Failure to make such a submission shall constitute a material breach of the conditions of the bid and bid bond; and, at Owner's sole discretion, Owner may void the bid award and forfeit contractor's bid bond. The Owner shall issue a `Notice to Proceed,' which shall be the date of commencement of the work. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2:3 Supplement as follows: After substantial completion the Contractor shall carry the work forward expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve final completion, satisfying all requirements necessary for the Owner's acceptance of the project, within thirty (30) calendar days after substantial completion. 8:`2.4` The Contractor shall furnish such manpower, materials, facilities, and equipment and shall work such hours; including night shifts, overtime operations and Sundays and holidays, as may be necessary to insure the progress and completion of the Work within the time required by the Contract. If Work actually in place falls behind the currently updated progress schedule which complies with contractual requirements; ahd if it becomes apparent from the current schiedule that the Work will not be completed within.the Contract Time, the Contractor agrees that he will, as necessary, take some or all of the following actions, at no additional cost to the Owner, as required to' substantially eliminate the backlog of work: a. increase the manpower in such quantities and crafts as will substantially eliminate in the opinion of the Project Manager the backlog of Work, b. increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per workingday, working days per week, or the amount of equipment, or any combination of the foregoing sufficiently to .substantially eliminate, in the opinion of the Project Manager, the backlog of Work; and, c. .reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrence of accomplishment of activities. ' 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.3 Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: Except as provided in this subparagraph, the Contractor's sole remedy for delays shall.be an extension of time. Except for unreasonable delays in performance caused by the acts or omissions of the Owner or persons acting for.the Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to damages, extra compensation, or equitable adjustment-for direct, [ridgeline msl 00800 - 16 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS -. 00800 -16 1 indirect, or impact damages for delay, including but not limited to cost of acceleration, home office 2 overhead or lost profits. 3 4 In the event of unreasonable delays caused by the acts or omissions of the Owner or persons acting 5 for the Owner,.the Contractor shall be entitled to damages and equitable adjustment upon due notice 6 and claim as follows: ° 7 _ _ 8 a. Contractor shall give written notice within seven (7) calendar days of occurrence to the 9 Owner and Architect that such •delay is impending or has commenced. No damage or 10 adjustment shall be allowed for any day prior to receipt of such notice. 11 12 b. Contractor shall give timely notice of claim and proof: that the act or omission or delay was 13 unreasonable and that delay actually resulted to scheduled work which was critical to the 14 Contractor's progress. 15 16 ~ c. Because of the difficulties and disputes commonly attending claims for delay, the parties 17 ~ agree that.the Contractor's reasonable compensation for damages or equitableadjustment 18 for delay, including direct, indirect or impact damages of every nature, shall be in the 19 - liquidated sum as follows: Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the same 20 daily. sum established for general (iquidated damages due the Owner for. Contractor delay in 21 achieving substantial completion. . 22 23 24 ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 25 . 26 93 -SCHEDULE OF VALUES 27' i 28 9_.2:1 Supplement by adding the following:. The schedule of values shall allocate 3% of the Contract sum 29 to a category which shall be entitled "Achieving Final Completion." Such sum shall cover all work and 30 ~ services necessary for the Contractor to proceed from substantial completion through satisfying all 31 requirements for Owner acceptance, including completion of all punch list work and the requirements 32 contained in paragraph 9.10. No portion of such sum shall be due the Contractor until all 33 requirements for Owner acceptance are satisfied. . 34 35 9_3~ APPLICATION fOR PAYMENT 36 _ . 37 9.3.1 Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: Progress payments will be made monthly for duly 38 certified and approved work performed duringthe calendar month preceding the application. Unless 39 the Owner notifies the Contractor that its fiscal procedures and schedule require a different submittal 40 date, the Contractor shall, within the first ten calendar days of each month, submit to the Architect, 41 with~a copy to the Owner, an itemized, notarized application for payment for work performed during 42 ~ the prior calendar month on a form supplied by Owner, supported by such data substantiating the 43 Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, and reflecting retainage as 44 provided elsewhere in the Contract.' Contractor shall also. provide along with this pay request 45 their certified payroll breakdown for the same period of time as, for the pay request as well as 46 any./ all conditional and unconditional lien waivers for the current and previous pay periods. 47 48 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR. PAYMENT 49 50 9.4.1 Supplement as follows: The Architect shall include, in the written statement of specific reasons for. 51 withholding certification of payment, a statement of what remedial action must be taken by the 52 Contractor to receive the amount for which certification is withheld..The Owner shall have until close 53 • of business of the eighth.(8th) working day after the Architect's receipt of the Payment Request in 54 which to provide in writing to Contractor and Architect the Owner's own statement of reasons and 55 remedial action; provided that in the absence of Owner action within the stated time, the Owner shall 56 be deemed, as of close of business on the eighth (8th) working day, to have adopted and ratified, as 57 its own, the Architect's statement of reasons and remedial actions as required by RCW 39.76.011. (ridgeline ms] 00800 - 17 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ~ 00800 -17 9:5 `'DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1.7 Delete and substitute the following: "Unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work by the Contractor, including but not limited to failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents." 9.5.1.8 Failure or refusal of the Contractor: to fully comply with requirements in the Contract Documents for preparation and submission of scheduling of the Work and updates thereof; failure to present affidavits pertaining to wages paid as' required by statute; or failure to comply with any applicable equal employment or affirmative action requirements. 9.5.3 Add the following: "a. Contracts for public improvements or work, other than for professional services, by the state, or any county, city, town, district, board, or .other public body, herein referred to as 'public body', shall provide, and there shall be reserved by the public body from the moneys earned by the `contractor on estimates during the progress bf the improvement or work, a sum equal to, not more than five percent said sum to be retained by the state, county, city, town, district, board, or other public body, as a trust fund. for the protection and payment of any person or persons, mechanic, subcontractor or mate~ialman. who shall perform any labor upon such contract or the doing of said work, and all persons or subcontractors with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of such work, and the state with respect to taxes imposed pursuant to Title 82 RCW which may be due from such contractor. Every person performing labor or furnishing supplies toward the completion of said improvement or work shall have a lien upon said moneys so reserved: PROVIDED, That such notice of the lien of such claimant shall be given in the manner and within the time provided in RCW 39.08.030 as now existing and in accordance with any amendments that may hereafter be made thereto: PROVIDED FURTHER, that the board, council, commission, trustees, officer or body acting for the state, county or municipality or other public body thirty days after completion and acceptance of all contract work other than landscaping, may release and pay in full the amounts retained during the performance of the contract (other than continuing retention of five percent of the moneys earned for landscaping) subject to the provisions of RCW 60.28.020. b. The moneys reserved under the provisions of subsection (1) of this section, at the option of the contractor, and with written request, shall be: (1) Retained in a fund by the public body until thirty days following the final acceptance of said improvement of work as completed; (2} Deposited by the public body in an interest-bearing account in a bank; mutual savings bank, or savings and~loan association, not subject to withdrawal until after the final acceptance of said improvement or work as completed, or until agreed to by both parties: PROVIDED, That interest on such account shall be paid to the contractor; (3) Placed in escrow with a bank or trust company by the public body until thirty days following the final acceptance of said improvement orwork as completed. When the moneys reserved are to be placed in escrow, the public body shall issue a check representing the sum of the moneys reserved payable to the bank or trust company and the contractorjointly. Such check shall be converted-into bonds and securities chosen by the contractor and approved by the. public body and such bonds and securities shall be held in escrow. Interest on such bonds and securities shall be paid to the contractor as the said interest accrues. c. The contractor may withhold payment of not more than five percent from the moneys earhed by any subcontractor,or supplier contracted with by the contractor to provide labor, materials, [ridgeline ms] 00800 - 18 ~ SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -18 r I 1 or equipment to the public project. Whenever the contractor reserves funds earned by a 2 subcontractor or supplier, the contractor shall pay interest to the subcontractor or supplier at ~ ~ 3 a rate equal to that received by the contractor from reserved funds. The contractor may submit a bond for the full amount of funds retained by the public body in a form acceptable to the public body. The public body shall release the retained funds to the contractorwithintifteen calendar days of accepting the bond from the contractor. Whenever a public body accepts a bond in lieu of retained funds from a contractor, the contractor shall accept like bonds from any subcontractors or suppliers from which the contractor has retained funds. The contractor shall then release the funds retained from the subcontractor or supplier to the subcontractor or supplier within fifteen calendar days of accepting the bond from the subcontractor or supplier. 14 e. If the public body administering a contract, after a substantial portion of the work has been 15 completed, finds that an unreasonable delay will occur in the completion of the remaining 16 portion of the contract for any reason not the result of a breach thereof, it may, if the 17 contractor agrees, delete from the contract the remaining work and accept as final the 18 improvement at the stage of completion then attained and make payment in proportion to the 19 amount of the work accomplished and in such case any amounts retained and accumulated 20 under this section shall be held for a period of thirty days following such acceptance. In the 21 event that the work shall have been terminated before final completion as provided in this '; 22 section, the public body may thereafter enter into a new contract with the same contractor 23 to perform the remaining work or improvement for an amount equal to or less .than the cost ~ 24 of the remaining work as was provided for in the original contract without advertisement or 25 bid. The provisions of this Chapter 60.28 RCW shall be deemed exclusive and shall 26 supersede all provisions and .regulations in conflict herewith." 28 9_6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 'f 30 9.6.1 Su lement b add'n pp y i q the following: The Owner shall withhold as retainage a sum equal to five 31 percent (5%) of each such progress payment. The retainage, its management and payment shall be 32 in accordance with RCW Chapter 60.28 as they now exist or are hereafter amended. 33 34 9.6.2 Supplement by adding the following: Contractors and subcontractors are limited in the extent to which 35 .they may withhold retainage and they shall be governed by the provisions of.RCW Chapter 60.28. 36 The Architect .or Owner majr require as 'a condition to issuance of a progress payment proof of ' 37 .payments to subcontractors in accordance with the Contract Documents and applicable statutes. No 38 work shall commence until the Contractor has submitted for Contractor and each subcontractor an 39 approved "Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages." Each Application for payment shall include 40 the Contractor's statement that the prevailing wages have been paid in accordance with the approved 41 Statements of Intent. 43 9.6.7 Delete in its entirety. t' 44 45 9_7 FAILURE OF.PAYMENT 46 ~~ 47 9.7.1 Amend by changing "7" days to "15" calendar days in all places where it occurs in the paragraph. 48 ~ 49 9_8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ~~ 51 9.8.1 Supplement as follows: No portion of the project will be considered substantially complete until each 52 of the following conditions are met: local building and fire authorities shall have issued a Certificate 53 of Occupancy covering that portion of the Work; all of the project's parts and .systems shall be 54 accessible, operable, and usable by the Owner, including site work.; the project shall be cleaned; and 55 only incidental corrective work under punch lists and final cleaning (if required) may remain for final 56 completion. The Work may not be considered substantially complete if the corrective work or punch 'i 57 list work, in the Architect's consultant's seasonable judgment, cannot be completed within thirty (30) i, i [ridgeline ms) 00800 - 19 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -79 calendar days under conditions of Owner occupancy and without material interference with Owner occupancy. 9.8:4 Add as follows:. At the time the Contractor signs the last Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall cause to be attached thereto a written list identifying each claim that is outstanding and unresolved at that time. Any claim by the Contractor which is not so identified and attached to the Certificate of Substantial Completion is waived, except for: Contract sums not then due; retainage; and events which may occur after the signing of the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 9.8.5 Delete the last sentence. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 Add the following sentence: "The Architect's final Certificate for Payment shall establish the date of Final completion. If the contractor notifies the Architect that the punch list items are completed and requests an inspection to determine compliance, and the Architect determines that some or all the punch list items are not completed, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs, including Architect's fee, for any future Architect's inspections after the first inspection to determine subsequent compliance with the Architect's punch list." 9:10.2 Supplement by adding the following: Such recoverable costs and attorney fees shall include those expended by Owner in defending such lien claim even if Owner does not pay to discharge same. See Division 1000 for other conditions precedent to final payment. 9.10.3 Delete in -its entiretyand substitute the following: If the School Board of Directors, after a substantial portion of the Work has been completed, finds that an unreasonable delay will occur in the completion of the remaining portion of the Contract for any reason not the result of a breach thereof, it may, if the Contractor agrees, delete from the Contract the remaining work and accept as final the improvement at the stage of completion then attained and make payment in proportion to the amount of work accomplished. The rights of the parties and the conditions under which such action is~taken shall be governed by the provisions of RCW Chapter 60.28, as the same now exists or is hereafter amended. ,, 9.10.4 Delete in its entirefy. 9.10.6 Retainage shall not be paid until the Contractor has obtained certification or approvals required by law, including the approval of the Department of Labor & Industries of "Affidavit of Wages Paid" and the certification of the Washington Department of Revenue regarding taxes pursuant to RCW 60.28.060. The disposition of retainage shall be fully subject to all rights and requirements stated in RCW Chapter 60.28. A bond for retainage or lien against retainage shall be one issued by a bonding company licensed to do business in the State of Washington and shall have a Best's rating of A-NII or better. "Final completion," "acceptance" and "completion of all contractwork"shall mean passage of a resolution of acceptance by the School Board of Directors. Such acceptance shall be due promptly upon the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment and Owner's receipt of Contractor's submissions required by this Section 9.10. 9.10.7 Add new paragraph as follows: After completion of all contract work other than landscaping, the Contractor may request that the Owner release and pay in full the amount retained during the performance of the contract. Upon certification by the Architect that all contract work other than landscaping is complete, and after the Contractor has made all submissions required by Paragraph 9.10.2 as supplemented, the School Board of Directors shall pass a resolution of partial acceptance. With regard to all contract work other than landscaping, all claimants of lien against retainage shall file claims of lien against the retainage within forty-five (45) calendar days after the School Board of Directors' resolution of partial acceptance. Within sixty (60) days of such partial contract completion and partial acceptance by the School Board of Directors, the Owner shall pay in full the amounts retained (other than continuing retention of five percent [5%] of the monies earned for landscaping) [ridge~ine ms) 00800 - 20 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -20 r 0 subject to the provisions of Chapters 39.12 and 60.28 RCW and Chapter 223, 1992 Laws of Washington." . ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS [Note that the provisions of this section shall not apply to the extent .contractor's scope of work includes removal, remediation or encapsulation of hazardous substances disclosed in the Contract Documents.] 10.3.2 Delete in its entirety and substitute the following:. The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to verify that it has been rendered harmless. The term rendered harmless as used in this section shall include removal, encapsulation, or otherwise appropriately shielded to protect Contractor's area of work. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, work in the affected area shall resume. The contract time shall be extended appropriately and the contract sum shall be adjusted as agreed by the parties or as provided and limited in paragraph 7.3:6 above. 10.3:3 Amend 6y deleting from the last line of the subparagraph the word"sole." 10.4 Delete in its entirety' and substitute the following: The Contractor shall not install in the Work any material containing asbestos, which is defined as including: chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, tremolite asbestos, anthophyllite asbestos, actinolite asbestos, and any of these minerals that have been chemically treated and/or altered. In the event the Contractor reasonably believesfhat any specified material, project, equipment or appliance contains asbestos the Contractor shall immediately give written notice to the Architect and Owner, identifying fully: the material, project, equipment or appliance believed to contain asbestos and the basis for the belief. The .Owner at its sole responsibility shall respond promptly to Contractor's notice by:.determining whether asbestos 'is present and giving the Contractor written direction either to install the questioned material, product, equipment or appliance onto install a substitute. Should the process described-in this paragraph cause the Contractor to ihcur delay or additional cost which is not the subject'of a Change Order or Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall give notice and files claims as provided in Article 4. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS: Paragraphs 11.1 through 11.4.10 are deleted and substituted therefor is the following: 11.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS The Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect him, the Owner, and the Architect and their agents, representatives and employees from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the. Contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such insurance shall include the following: .1 claims under worker's or workmen's compensation, disability benefit, and similar employee benefit acts with workmen's compensation and employer's liability insurance in an amount .not less than those necessary to meet the statutory requirements of the state(s) having jurisdiction over any portion of the Work; 2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of persons performing work or services or supplying materials for the Work; [ridgeline ms] 00800 - 2? SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -27 .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than his employees; ' .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by any person as a result of any offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by the Contractor, or (2) by any other person; .5 . claims for dams es other than to the Work itself because of in~u to or destruction 9 J ry of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the Ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. For each policy of insurance required by this Article 11, Contractor shall provide to Owner prior to commencement of the Work and within ten days after issuance of the Notice of Intent to Award Contract, two copies of certificates of insurance, informs acceptable to the Owner. Provide one copy to Owner and one to Architect. THE OWNER MAY WITHHOLD ITS 'NOTICE TO PROCEED' AND/OR PAYMENT TO THE CONTRACTOR UNTIL SUCH CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE, ACCEPTABLE TO THE OWNER IS RECEIVED OR THE BIDDER MAY BE DISQUALIFIED AND THE BID REJECTED. Insurance shall be provided only by.insurance carriers licensed in.the state of Washington. Each certificate shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled until at least thirty (3Q) days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. Each such policy of insurance required by this Article 11 shall be endorsed to name as AbDITIONAL INSUREDS the OWNER and ARCHITECT, their officers, agents and employees; and such policy shall be PRIMARY and NONCONTRIBUTING toany insurance possessed or procured by the Owner and/or Architect. 11.2 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 Commercial General Liability. Contractor shall procure for this project a Commercial General Liability policy with endorsements and supplemental coverage providing at least the following coverages on an occurrence basis: . (a) premises and operations; (b) Owner's and Contractor's protective; (c) products liability including completed operations; (d) contractual liability; (e) .property damage including explosion, underground, collapse, and fire; (f) personal injury liability; (g) cross liability clause; and I' (h) employer's stop gap. 11.2.2 Automobile Liability Coverage. Contractor shall procure for this project automobile bodily injury and ~ f' property damage insurance including the following coverages: (a) all owned vehicles; ,' (b) non-owned automobiles; and (c) hired automobiles. l' _ [ridgeline ms] 00800 - 22 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -22 _.__~~. ' 1 11.2.3 Primary Insurance Limits and Umbrella Coverage. The Commercial General Liability and Automobile 2 Liability policies, with the coverages described above, shall have PRIMARY COVERAGE limits of at 3 least One Million Dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence for bodily injury/personal injury and Five 4 Hundred Thousand Dollars ($500,000) for property damage. Contractor shall, in addition, provide an 5 UMBRELLA FORM excess insurance applicable to this project in the minimum amount of Five Million 6 Dollars ($5,000,000) single limit. ' 7 8 11.2.4 Subcontractor Insurance. Contractor shall require that each subcontractor of every tieron this project 9 shall maintain liability coverages as described above in at least the amount of the primary coverage. 10 ' 11 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 12 13 11.3.1 The Contractor shall purchase and at all times maintain until final acceptance by the School Board 14 such insurance as will protect as insureds the Contractor, Owner, and the Owner's representatives, 15 agents and employees, the Architect, Engineers and their consultants, subcontractors and sub- 16 subcontractors from loss or damage to work or property in the course of construction, including all 17 machinery, materials, and supplies on the premises or in transit thereto or stored off site, and 18 intended to become a part of the finished Work. This insurance shall be in the form of a Builder's 19 Risk policy including "Builder's All-Risk Coverage," "All-Risk Installation Floater," or equivalent and 20 shall provide coverage on full replacement cost, including sales tax and additional Architect's fees ' 21 made necessary by the loss. Such policy shall insure against the perils of fire, extended coverage 22 and physical loss or damage, including without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, earthquake, 23 flood, malicious mischief, collapse, false work, temporary buildings and debris removal, including 24 demolition occasioned by the enforcement of any applicable legal requirements. Contractor shall ' 25 cause such policy or policies of insurance required under this subparagraph to be endorsed: to name 26 the Owner and Architect as Additional Insureds; to provide that the insurer or insurers waive any right 27 of subrogation against the Owner and Architect; and to make the policy PRIMARY and 28 NONCONTRIBUTORY to any other insurance policies. Any deductible provision in such insurance ' 29 shall not exceed $10,000, except for earthquake and flood coverages which shall be the greater of 30 2% of the contract or $25,000. Notwithstanding any such deductible provision, Contractor shall ' 31 32 remain solely liable for the full amount of any item covered by such insurance. 33 11.3.2 Any loss insured under subparagraph 11.3.1 is to be adjusted with the Owner and made payable to 34 the Owner as trustee for the insureds, as their interests may appear. The Contractor shall pay each 35 subcontractor a just share of any insurance monies received by the Contractor, and by appropriate ' 36 agreement, written where legally required for Validity, shall require each subcontractor to make 37 payments to his sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 39 11.3.3 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other for damages to the extent covered by 40 insurance obtained pursuant to this paragraph 11.3 or any other property insurance applicable to the 41 Work, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as 42 trustee. The Contractor shall require, by appropriate agreement, written where legally required for 43 validity, similar waivers in favor of the Owner and the Contractor by subcontractors and sub- 44 subcontractors. With respect to the waiver rights or recovery, the term "Owner" shall be deemed to 45 include, to the extent covered by property insurance applicable thereto, his consultants, employees ' 46 and agents, and representatives including the Architect and his consultants, employees and agents. 47 The Contractor waives as against any separate Contractor described in Article 6 all rights for 48 ' 49 damages caused by fire or other perils in the same manner as is provided above as against the 50 Owner. 51 52 11.3.4 If required in writing by any parry in interest, the Owner as trustee shall, upon the occurrence of an ' 53 insured loss: deposit in a separate account any money so received; and distribute it in accordance 54 with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with a court order or 55 award. If after such loss no other special agreement is made, replacement of damaged work shall ' 56 be covered by an appropriate Change Order. 57 00800 -23 [ridgeiine ms] 00800 - 23 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 11.3:5 The~Owner as trustee shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of =the parties in interest shalt object in writing within five (5} days-after the occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power, and if such objection be made, the matter shall be decided by a court of competent jurisdiction or as the parties in interest otherwise agree. The Owner as trustee shall, in that case, make settlement with the insurers in accordance with the directions of such court or arbitrators. If distribution of the insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, the arbitrators will direct such distribution. 11.3:6 If the Owner firids it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to substantial completion thereof, such occupancy shall not commence prior to written notice to and consent of the insurance company or companies providing the property insurance. This insurance shall not be canceled or lapsed on account of such partial occupancy. Consent of the insurance company or companies to such occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. 11.3:7 In the event Contractor neglects, refuses, orfails to provide the insurance required underthe Contract Documents, or if such insurance is canceled for any reason, the Owner shall have the right but not the duty to procure the same, and the cost. thereof. shall be deducted from monies then due or thereafter to become due to the Contractor. 11.5 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS 11.5.1 Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: "The Contractor shall secure and pay for performance and labor and material payment and maintenance bohds (a Washington Public Works Bond fully satisfying all requirements of RCW Chapter 39.08), issued by a bonding company licensed to transact business in the State of Washington, in statutory form. This bond and any bond offered in .lieu of retainage must be issued by.a Surety Company with a Best's rating of A-NII or better. Liability under each of the bonds shall be: 100% of contract sum plus sales tax for (1) performance, (2).labor and materials payment. Within ten days after the issuance of the Notice of Intent to Award Contract, the Contractor shall deliver two copies of the bond to the Owner and one copy to the Architect. THE OWNER MAY WITHHOLD ITS 'NOTICE TO PROCEED' AND/OR PAYMENTTO THE CONTRACTOR UNTIL SUCH SURETY BOND IS RECEIVED OR THE BIDDER. MAY BE DISQUALIFIED AND THE BID REJECTED. ARTICLE 12 ~ UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12:1.3 Add new paragraph as follows: Wherever the term "Architect" is used in.Sections 12.1.1 and 12.1.2, the Owner's Project Manager shall have the same rights and powers acting through the Architect 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 12.2.2.1 Delete the third sentence starting with "During" and ending with "warranty." 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.1.1 Supplement as follows: Venue for any legal action arising from or relating to this Contract shall be in the county where the project is located. ~_' [ndgeline ms] 00800 - 24 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -24 ._...._.. --- _...__. -I1 ~. ,I 1 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 2 3 13.4.1 Delete in~its entirety and substitute the following: Except as limited herein or specially provided for I 4 ~ herein, the parties shall have such other duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed 5 or made available by the law of the State of Washington. 6 7 13.4.2 Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: The failure of any party to insist in any one or more ! 8 instances upon the strict performance of any one or more of the provisions of this Contract, or to 9 exercise any right herein contained or provided by law; shall not be construed as a waiver or 10 relinquishment of the performance of such provisions or rights or of the right to subsequently demand 11 such strict performance or exercise of such rights. 12 13 13.4.3 If any clause, sentence, or provision of this Contract is held as a matter of law to be void or 14 unenforceable, the remainder of the Contract shall be enforceable without such clause, sentence, or 15 provision. 16 17 13.5 -TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 18 19 13.5.7 No acceptance of any Work shall be construed to result from anjr inspections, tests or failures to 20 inspect or test by the Owner, the Owner's representatives, the Architect or any other person. No 21 inspection, test, failure to inspect or test, or failure to discover any defect or nonconformity by the 22 Owner, the Owner's representatives, the Architect or any other person shall relieve the Contractor of 23 its responsibility for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents or impair the Owner's right 24 to reject defective or nonconforming items or right to avail itself of any other remedy to which the ' 25 s knowledge of the defect or nonconformity, its Owner may be entitled, notwithstanding the Owner ! 26 substantiality or the ease of its discovery. 27 ~ 28 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD. 29 30 This section including its subparagraphs; is deleted in its entirety. ~ ~' 33 ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 34 35 14:1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR. 36 37 Delete Paragraphs 14.1.1 14.1.2 14.1.3 and 14.1.4 in their entirety and substitute the following: The 38 Contractor shall have the right to terminate the Contract only under the circumstances and with the 39 rights and remedies provided in RCW 60.28.080. 40 41 14.2 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE . 42 ! 43 14.2.5 If action by Owner under this paragraph 14.2 upon claim, is determined to have been inappropriate, 44 the compensation to the Contractor resulting therefrom shall be computed pursuant to provisions of 45 paragraph 14.4, Termination for Convenience. i 46 ' 47 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 48 49 14.3.2 Supplement as follows: Allowance for overhead and profit as provided in this Paragraph 14.3 shall ' 50 be limited to those allowances provided in Paragraph 7.3 as supplemented. 51 52 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE =Delete this section in its entirety and 53 substitute the following: 54 55 The Owrier may terminate performance of work under this contract in whole or part if it determines 56 that a termination is in its best interest. Termination for convenience shall be transmitted by written ' ~ 57 notice specifying the extent of the contract work which is, terminated and the effective date. i [ridgeiine ms] 00800 - 25 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -25 I. - -- . After receipt of a notice of termination and except as directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall immediately proceed to perform the following, regardless of any delay in determining or adjusting any amount due under this clause: (1) Stop work as specified in the notice, (2) Place no further subcontracts or orders for materials, services or facilities except as necessary to complete the continued portion of the contract; (3) Terminate all subcontracts to the extent they relate to the work-terminated. On termination for convenience, if the Owner and Contractor fail to agree on the whole amount to be paid because of the termination of the work, the Contractor shall be .paid the value of the work satisfactorily completed as determined by the Architect by reference to the approved schedule of values. Profit on Work Performed. If it appears that the Contractor would have sustained a loss on the entire contract had it been completed, profit may be reduced or eliminated from sums due upon work satisfactorily completed. No profit shall be payable on the portion of the work terminated. In no case shall the amounts paid to the Contractor for termination for convenience exceed the original contract sum of the work plus agreed upon change orders. Add the following new Article: ARTICLE 15 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS, 15.1 All provisions to the Revised Code of Washirigton (RCW) are specifically included in the General Conditions by reference, including the following (in the event of conflict between these and other provisions of the General Conditions, these shall govern): 15.1.1 RCW Chapter 39.04: Relating to plans and specifications on work done for public bodies, estimates of costs of the work, supplemental plans and specifications, supplemental estimates, accounts and records of. costs, engineer's certificate. 15.1.2 RCW Chapter 39.08: Relating to form of Contractor's bonds and liens. 15.1.3 RCW Chapter 39.12: Concerning the prevailing wage rates to be paid to labor on public works, the certificates required by the state, the arbitration of disputes over wages, and penalties. 15.1.4 RCW Chapter 60.28: Relating to labor and materials liens and taxes and retainage. 15.1.5 RCW Chapter 39.16: Relating to resident employees on public works. 15.1.6 RCW Chapter 49.28: Relating to hours of labor. 15.1.7 RCW Chapter 18.27: Relating to registration of Contractors. 15.1.8 RCW Chapter 39.25: Relating to offshore items. 15.1.9 RCW Chapter 49.60: Relating to unfair or discriminatory practices. 15.1.10 RCW Chapter 70.92: Relating to the aged and handicapped. 15.1.11 The.Americans With Disabilities Act. [ridgeline ms] 00800 - 26 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -26 . _.. _ .. _ . 1~ _ 1' . l di t t h . 1 s ric oo 15.1.12 RCW 28A.210.310: Relating to the prohibition of tobacco use on all sc 2 property.'' 3 4 .15.1.13 SCHOOL DISTRICT POLICY "BACKGROUND CHECKS" ~ ' .5 6 ~ District contractors whose employees will have regularly scheduled unsupervised access to children ~ 1 7 . must certify in writing that they have complied with the pre-employment background check ,' 8 requirements of 1992 Washington Laws Chapter 159 and that, as to employees who, will be 9 performing services for the District, no background check has disclosed any information suggesting 10 that it would be inappropriate for the employee(s) to have unsupervised access to children. 11 12 Within two~day after the issuance of the Notice of Intent to Award Contract, and before any on site 13 work commences, the Contractor shall deliver two copies of a letter stating their intent to comply with 14 School District policy. Submit one copy of the letter to the Owner and one copy to the Architect. THE ' 15 OWNER _ MAY WITHHOLD ITS 'NOTICE TO PROCEED' AND/OR PAYMENT TO THE 16 CONTRACTOR UNTIL SUCH LETTER IS RECEIVED. 1~ 17. 18 _ All contractors, suppliers, and visitors who come onto school property shall be required to display an li i f 19 ers n cases o supp identification badge on their person. This badge shall identify their company or 20 and visitors, a general visitor badge with General Contractor's .insignia shall be acceptable. All `21 badges to display signature of Project Superintendent. 1'i 22 23 24 END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITION . 1~ I. 1~ 11 1~ ~ ° _. II 1 1'~ . . 1 i 1 1 [ridgeline ms] 00800 - 27 1~ SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ~ 00800 -27 ~. r r r r t .. t t r r r. r i~. SECTION 00830 -PREVAILING WAGE RATES The following is a list of the Prevailing Wage Rates as required per RCW 39.12.022 and as furnished by the State of Washington Department of Labor and Industries (Employment Standards Section), Prevailing Wage, P.O. Box 44540, Olympia, Washington 98504-4540, Telephone (360) 902-5335, Fax (360) 902-5300. Section 2 of WAC 296-127-011 states that for all contracts, except Building.Services Maintenance Contracts, the prevailing Wage Rates which.are iri effect on the date when the bids. by the Prime Contractor are required to be submitted to the Contract Awarding Public Agency are the prevailing wage_ rates_which must be paid for the duration of the contract. " [ridgelne ~ms] 00830 - 1 PREVAILING "WA'GE RATES 00830 =.1_ _ .. " '~ State of Washington DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES Prevailing Wage Section -Telephone (360) 902-5335 PO Box 44540, Olympia, WA 98504-4540 ,{ Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On public works projects, workers' , wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of overtime calculation requirements is provided on the Benefit Code Key. - THURSTON COUNTY i ~ Effective:3/312005 (See Benefit Code Key) 1 I ,i i I ii 'I 'I ~~ . ~I. 11 ~. . r~. Classification Prevailing Wage Overtime Code Holiday Code Note Code ASBESTOS ABATEMENT WORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $32.61 i N 5D BOILERMAKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $32.01 1 BRICK AND MARBLE MASONS JOURNEY LEVEL $39.87 1M 5A CABINET MAKERS (IN SHOP) JOURNEY LEVEL $13.02 1 CARP ENTERS ACOUSTICAL WORKER $39.11 1M 5D BRIDGE, DOCK AND WARF CARPENTERS $38.95 1M 5D CARPENTER $38.95 1M 5D CREOSOTED MATERIAL ~ $39.05 1M 5D DRYWALL APPLICATOR $39.63 1M 5D FLOOR FINISHER $39.08 1M 5D FLOOR LAYER $39.08 1 M 5D FLOOR SANDER $39.08 1M 5D MILLWRIGHT AND MACHINE ERECTORS $39.95 1M 5D PILEDRIVERS, DRIVING, PULLING, PLACING COLLARS AND WELDING $39.15 1M 5D SAWFILER $39.08 1M 5D SHINGLER $39.08 1M 5D STATIONARY POWER SAW OPERATOR $39.08 1M 5D STATIONARY WOODWORKING TOOLS $39.08 1M 5D CEME NT MASONS JOURNEY LEVEL $40.01 1M 5D DIVERS S TENDERS , DIVER $80.62 1M 5D 8A DIVER TENDER $41.72 1M 5D DREDGE WORKERS - ASSISTANT ENGINEER $39.52 1B 5D 8L ASSISTANT MATE (DECKHAND) $38.76 16 5D SL BOATMEN $39.52 iB 5D 8L ENGINEER WELDER $39.57 18 5D 8L LEVERMAN, HYDRAULIC $41.04 16 5D 8L MAINTENANCE $38.76 16 5D 8L MATES $39.52 1 B 5D 8L OILER $39.16 1 B 5D SL DRYWALL TAPERS JOURNEY LEVEL $39.44 1J 5B ELECTRICAL FIXTURE MAINTENANCE WORKERS . JOURNEY LEVEL $7.35 1 ELECTRICIANS -INSIDE ' CABLE SPLICER $47.40 1 G 5C JOURNEY LEVEL $44.23 1G 5C LEAD COVERED CABLE SPLICER $50.57 1G 5C WELDER $47.40 1G 5C ~~, [ridgeline ms]~00830 - 3 ~~ ~ ~ PREVAILING VI/AGE RATES ~~. ~~' ~ ~` - ~ ~~` ~ ~ - `~` ~ 00830 :_3._ THURSTON COUNTY Effective: 3/3/2005 (See Benefit Code Kev) Classification Prevailing Wage Overtime Code Holiday Code Note Code ELECTRICIANS -MOTOR SHOP CRAFTSMAN $15.37 2A 6C JOURNEY LEVEL $14.69 2A 6C ELECTRICIANS - POWERLINE CONSTRUCTION CABLE SPLICER $50.84 4A 5A CERTIFIED LINE WELDER $46.37 4A 5A GROUNDPERSON $33..64 4A 5A HEAD.GROUNDPERSON $35.46 4A 5A HEAVY LINE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $46.37 4A 5A JACKHAMMER OPERATOR $35.46 4A 5A JOURNEY LEVEL LINEPERSON $46.37 ~ 4A 5A LINE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $39.50 4A 5A POLE SPRAYER $46.37 4A 5A POWDERPERSON $35.46 4A 5A ELEC TRONIC & TELECOMMUNICATION TECHNICIANS $12.07 1 JOURNEY LEVEL __ ____ _ _ _ _ _ ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS MECHANIC $52.27 4A __ 60 __ _ MECHANIC IN CHARGE $57.41 4A _~ 6Q I __ __ _ FABRICATED PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS ALL CLASSIFICATIONS - $13.50 1 FENCE ERECTORS FENCE ERECTOR $17.65 1 FLAGGERS JOURNEY LEVEL ~ $27.93 1 N 5D GLAZIERS JOURNEY LEVEL $39.96 2E 5G HEAT & FROST INSULATORS AND ASBESTOS WORKERS MECHANIC $41.93 1 F 5E HEATING EQUIPMENT MECHANICS MECHANIC $27.68 1 HOD CARRIERS 8 MASON TENDERS JOURNEY LEVEL $33.09 1 N 5D INDUSTRIAL ENGINE AND MACHINE MECHANICS MECHANIC $15.65 1 INDUSTRIAL POWER VACUUM CLEANER JOURNEY LEVEL $9.07 1 INLAND BOATMEN CAPTAIN $35.14 1K 56 COOK $30.11 1 K 5B - DECKHAND $29.09 1 K 56 ENGINEER/DECKHAND $31.66 1 K 56 MATE, LAUNCH OPERATOR $33.24 1 K 56 INSPECTION/CLEANINGISEALING OF SEWER & WATER SYSTEMS BY REMOTE CONTRO L CLEANER OPERATOR, FOAMER OPERATOR $9.73 1 GROUT TRUCK OPERATOR $11.48 1 HEAD OPERATOR $12.78 1 TECHNICIAN $7.35 1 TV TRUCK OPERATOR $10.53 1 INSULATION APPLICATORS JOURNEY LEVEL $38.95 1 M 5D IRONWORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $43.12 1 B 5A LABO RERS ASPHALT RAKER $33.09 1 N 5D BALLAST REGULATOR MACHINE $32.61 1 N 5D BATCH WEIGHMAN $27.93 1 N 5D BRUSH CUTTER $32.61 i N 5D BRUSH HOG FEEDER $32.61 iN 5D BURNERS $32.61 1 N 5D [ridgeline ms] OUS3U - 4 F~KCVH/LIIVC~ VVH(~C KH 1 CJ uvo3u - ~ THURSTON COUNTY Effective: 3!3!2005 (See Benefit Code Key) i Classification Prevailing Wage Overtime Code .Holiday Code Note Code LABORERS (continued) CARPENTER TENDER $32.61 1 N 5D CASSION WORKER $33.45 1 N 5D CEMENT DUMPER/PAVING $33.09 1N 5D CEMENT FINISHER TENDER $32.61 1 N 5D . CHANGE-HOUSE MAN OR DRY SHACKMAN $32.61 1N 5D CHIPPING GUN (OVER 30 LBS) $33.09 1N 5D CHIPPING GUN (UNDER 30 LBS) $32.61 1N 5D CHOKER SETTER $32.61 1 N 5D CHUCK TENDER $32.61 1 N 5D CLEAN-UP LABORER $32.61 1N 5D' CONCRETE DUMPER/CHUTE OPERATOR $33.09 1N 5D CONCRETE FORM STRIPPER $32.61 1N 5D CONCRETE SAW OPERATOR $33.09 1N 5D CRUSHER FEEDER $27.93 1 N 5D CURING LABORER $32.61 1N 5D _ _ __ DEMOLITION, WRECKING & MOVING (INCLUDING CHARRED MATERIALS) $32.61 1N 5D __ I __ ___ DITCH DIGGER ___ $32.61 1N 5D i ____ __ _ DIVER $33.45 1 N 5D DRILL OPERATOR (HYDRAULIC, DIAMOND) $33.09 1 N 5D DRILL OPERATOR, AIRTRAC $33.45 1 N 5D DUMPMAN $32.61 1 N 5D EPOXY TECHNICIAN $32.61 1 N 5D EROSION CONTROL WORKER $32.61 1 N 5D FALLER/BUCKER, CHAIN SAW $33.09 1 N 5D FINAL DETAIL CLEANUP (i.e., dusting, vacuuming, window cleaning; . NOT construction debris cleanup) $25.61 1N 5D _ FINE GRADERS $32.61 1N 5D FIRE WATCH $27.93 1N 5D FORM SETTER $32.61 1N 5D GABION BASKET BUILDER $32.61 1N 5D GENERAL LABORER $32.61 1 N 5D GRADE CHECKER 8~ TRANSIT PERSON $33.09 1 N 5D GRINDERS $32.61 1N 5D GROUT MACHINE TENDER $32.61 1 N 5D GUARDRAIL ERECTOR $32.61 1 N 5D HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL A $33.45 1 N 5D HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL B $33.09 1 N 5D HAZARDOUS. WASTE WORKER LEVEL C $32.61 1 N 5D HIGH SCALER $33.45 1N 5D HOD CARRIER/MORTARMAN $33.09 1 N 5D JACKHAMMER $33.09 1 N_ 5D LASER BEAM OPERATOR $33.09 . 1 N 5D MANHOLE BUILDER-MUDMAN $33.09 1N 5D MATERIAL YARDMAN $32.61 1 N 5D MINER $33.45 1 N 5D NOZZLEMAN, CONCRETE PUMP, GREEN CUTTER WHEN USING HIGH PRESSURE AIR & WATER ON CONCRETE & ROCK, SANDBLAST, GUNITE, SHOTCRETE, WATER BLASTER $33.09 1 N 5D PAVEMENT BREAKER $33.09 1 N 5D PILOT CAR $27.93 1 N 5D PIPE POT TENDER $33.09 1 N 5D PIPE RELINER (NOT INSERT TYPE) $33.09 1N 5D PIPELAYER & CAULKER $33.09 1N 5D PIPELAYER 8 CAULKER (LEAD) $33.45 1 N 5D PIPEWRAPPER $33.09 1N 5D POT TENDER $32.61 1 N 5D _ POWDERMAN $33.45 -1 N 5D POWDERMAN HELPER $32.61 1 N _ 5D [ridgelirie ms] 00830 - 5 Phl~VA1LING WAC~t hCH l tJ wrssu~--o- THURSTON COUNTY Effective: 3/3/2005 (See Benefit Code Key) Classification Prevailing Wage Overtime Code Holiday Code Note Code LABO RERS (continued) POWERJACKS $33.09 1 N 5D RAILROAD SPIKE PULLER (POWER) $33.09 1 N 5D RE-TIMBERMAN $33.45 1 N 5D RIPRAP MAN $32.61 1 N 5D. RODDEFt $33.09 1 N 5D SCAFFOLD ERECTOR $32.61 1 N 5D SCALE PERSON $32.61 1 N 5D SIGNALMAN $32.61 1N 5D SLOPER (OVER 20") $33.09 .1N 5D SLOPER SPRAYMAN ~ $32.61 iN 5D SPREADER (GLARY POWER OR SIMILAR TYPES) - $33.09 1 N 5D SPREADER (CONCRETE) $33.09 1N 5D STAKE HOPPER $32.61 1 N 5D STOCKPILER $32.61 1N 5D TAMPER & SIMILAR ELECTRIC, AIR & GAS __ _ ~ $33.09 1N _ 5D __ _ __ __ _ _ _ TAMPER (MULTIPLE & SELF.PROPELLED) $33.09 _ _ 1 N 5D . _ TOOLROOM MAN (AT JOB SITE) $32.61 1 N 5D j TOPPER-TAILER j $32.61 i 1N i SD TRACK LABORER $32.61 1 N 5D TRACK LINER (POWER) $33.09 1 N 5D TRUCK SPOTTER $32.61 1 N 5D TUGGER OPERATOR $33.09 1 N 5D VIBRATING SCREED (AIR, GAS, OR ELECTRIC) $32.61 1 N 5D VIBRATOR $33.09 1N 5D VINYLSEAMER $32.61 1N 5D WELDER $32.61 1N 5D WELL-POINT LABORER $33.09 1N 5D LABORERS -UNDERGROUND SEWER & WATER GENERAL LABORER $32.61 1N 5D PIPE LAYER $33.09 1N 5D. LANDSCAPE CONSTRUCTION IRRIGATION OR LAWN SPRINKLER INSTALLERS $11.42 1 LANDSCAPE EQUIPMENT OPERATORS OR TRUCK DRIVERS $7.81 1 LANDSCAPING OR PLANTING LABORERS $7.93 1 LATHERS JOURNEY LEVEL $39.63 1 M 5D MACHINISTS (HYDROELECTRIC SITE WORK) MACHINIST $0.00 1 META L FABRICATION (IN SHOP) FITTER $23.02 1 R 6T LABORER $14.88 1R 6T LAYEROUT $25.07 1 R 6T MACHINE OPERATOR $18.74 1 R 6T WELDER $20.99 iR 6T MODULAR BUILDINGS CABINET ASSEMBLY $9.98 1 ELECTRICIAN $9.98 1 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE $9.98 1 PLUMBER $9.98 1 PRODUCTION WORKER $9.75 1 TOOL MAINTENANCE $9.98 1 UTILITY PERSON $9.98 1 WELDER $9.98 1 PAINTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $30.76 26 5A PLASTERERS JOURNEY LEVEL $39.93 1 R 5A PLAYGROUND & PARK EQUIPMENT INSTALLERS JOURNEY LEVEL $7.93 1 -[ridgeline ms) 00830 - 6 ~PREVA~IL"ING-Vl/A~GE-RATES ~ 00830 - 6 '! i 'I ,! ~~ 1 ~! '~ i~ ~I '• '~ I. 11. ~~~ - THURSTON`COUNTY Effective: 3/3/2005 ISPP. RPn PIIf r!~/IP KPV~ Classification Prevailing' •Wa a Overtime Code Holiday Code Note Code PLUMBERS & PIPEFITTERS JOURNEY LEVEL . $45.67 1 B 5A POW ER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS ASSISTANT ENGINEERS $37.26 1l' 5D 8L BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (3 YD & UNDER) $39.88 iT 5D 8L BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (OVER 3 YD & UNDER 6 YD) $40.34 1T SD 8L BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (6 YD AND OVER WITH ATTACHMENTS) - $40.86 iT - 5D - SL - BACKHOES, (75 HP & UNDER) $39.49 1T 5D SL BACKHOES, (OVER 75 HP) $39.88 iT 5D 8L ' BARRIER MACHINE (ZIPPER) $39.88 1T 5D 8L BATCH PLANT OPERATOR, CONCRETE $39.88 1T bD 8L BELT LOADERS (ELEVATING TYPE) $39.49 1T 5D SL BOBCAT (SKID STEER) $37.26 1T 5D 8L BROOMS $37.26 1T ~ •5D SL BUMP CUTTER $39.88 1T 5D 8L CABLEWAYS $40.34 1T 5D SL CHIPPER ___________ __ $39.88 :1T '5D 8L COMPRESSORS ~ $37.26 iT 5D 8L I CONCRETE FINISH MACHINE -LASER SCREED $37.26 1T __ SD _ 8L CONCRETE PUMPS $39.49 iT 5D. 8L CONCRETE PUMP=TRUCK MOUNT WITH BOOM ATTACHMENT $39.88 1T 5D SL CONVEYORS $39.49 1T 5D 8L CRANES, THRU 19 TONS, WITH ATTACHMENTS $39.49 1T 5D 8L CRANES, 20 - 44 TONS, WITH ATTACHMENTS $39.88 1T 5D 8L' CRANES, 45 TONS - 99 TONS, UNDER 150 FT OF BOOM (INCLUDING JIB WITH ATTACHMENTS) $40.34 iT 5D 8L CRANES, 100 TONS - 199 TONS, OR 150 FT OF BOOM (INCLUDING JIB.WITH ATTACHMENTS) $40.86 1T 5D 8L CRANES, 200 TONS TO 300 TONS, OR 250 FT OF BOOM (INCLUDING JIB WITH ATTACHMENTS) $41.40 1T 5D 8L CRANES, A-FRAME, 10 TON AND UNDER $37.26., ~ 1T 5D 8L' CRANES, A-FRAME, OVER 10 TON $39.49 ~ 1T 5D ~ SL CRANES, OVER 300 TONS, OR 300' OF BOOM INCLUDING JIB WITH ATTACHMENTS $41.92 1T 5D 8L CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE (20 - 44 TONS) $39.88 1T 5D 8L CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE (45 - 99 TONS) $40.34 1T 5D 8L CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE (100 TONS 8 OVER) $40.86 1T 5D 8L CRANES; TOWER CRANE UP TO 175' IN HEIGHT, BASE TO BOOM $40.86 1T 5D 8L CRANES, TOWER CRANE OVER 175' IN HEIGHT, BASE TO BOOM $41.40 1T 5D 8L CRUSHERS $39.88 , 1T 5D 8L DECK ENGINEER/DECK WINCHES (POWER) $39.88 1T 5D 8L DERRICK, BUILDING $40.34 1T 5D 8L DOZERS, D-9 & UNDER $39.49 1T. 5D 8L DRILL OILERS -AUGER TYPE, TRUCK OR CRANE MOUNT $39.49 1T 5D 8L DRILLING MACHINE $39.88 1T 5D 8L ELEVATOR AND MANLIFT, PERMANENT AND SHAFT-TYPE $37.26 1T 5D 8L EQUIPMENT SERVICE ENGINEER (OILER) $39.49 1T 5D 8L FINISHING MACHINE/BIDWELL GAMACO AND SIMILAR EQUIP $39.88 1T 5D SL FORK LIFTS, (3000 LBS AND OVER) $39.49 1T 5D SL FORK LIFTS, (UNDER 3000 LBS) $37.26 1T 5D 8L GRADE ENGINEER $39.49 1T 5D 8L GRADECHECKER AND STAKEMAN $37.26 1T 5D. 8L GUARDRAIL PUNCH $39.88 1T 5D 8L HOISTS, OUTSIDE (ELEVATORS AND MANLIFTS), AIR TUGGERS $39.49 1T 5D 8L HORIZONTAUDIRECTIONAL DRILL LOCATOR $39.49 1T 5D 8L HORIZONTAL/DIRECTIONAL DRILL OPERATOR $39.88 1T 5D SL HYDRALIFTS/BOOM. TRUCKS (10 TON & UNDER) $37.26 1T 5D . 8L _ HYDRALIFTS/BOOM TRUCKS (OVER 10 TON): $39.49 iT 5D . 8L LOADERS, OVERHEAD (6 YD UP TO 8 YD) $40.34 1T 5D SL '~~ [ridgeline ms] 00830 - 7 YKtVHILIIVCi WHCit FCH I tJ 00830 - 7 THURSTON COUNTY Effective: 3/3/2005 (See Benefit Code Key) Classification ' Prevailing Wage Overtime Code Holiday Code Note Code POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS LOADERS, OVERHEAD (8 YD & OVER) $40.86 1T 5D 8L LOADERS, OVERHEAD (UNDER 6 YD), PLANT FEED $39.88 1T 5D 8L LOCOMOTIVES, ALL $39.88 1T 5D 8L MECHANICS, ALL $40.34 1T 5D 8L MIXERS, ASPHALT PLANT $39.88 1T 5D 8L MOTOR PATROL GRADER (FINISHING) $39.88 1T 5D 8L MOTOR PATROL GRADER (NON-FINISHING) $39.49 1T 5D 8L MUCKING MACHINE, MOLE, TUNNEL DRILL AND/OR SHIELD $40.34 1T 5D 8L OIL DISTRIBUTORS, BLOWER DISTRIBUTION AND MULCH - SEEDING OPERATOR $37.26 1T 5D 8L PAVEMENT BREAKER $37.26 1T 5D SL PILEDRIVER (OTHER THAN CRANE MOUNT) $39.88 1T 5D 8L PLANT OILER (ASPHALT, CRUSHER) $39.49 1T 5D 8L POSTHOLE DIGGER, MECHANICAL $37.26 1T 5D 8L POWER PLANT $37.26 1T 5D 8L PUMPS, WATER $37.26 1T 5D 8L QUAD 9,.D-10, AND HD-41 _ __ $40.34 1T 5D 8L __ __ _ REMOTE CONTROL OPERATOR ON RUBBER TIRED EARTH ~ MOVING EQUIP $40.34 1T 5D 8L RIGGER AND BELLMAN $37.26 1T 5D 8L ROLLAGON $40.34 1T 5D 8L ROLLER, OTHER THAN PLANT ROAD MIX $37.26 1T 5D 8L ROLLERS, PLANTMIX OR MULTILIFT MATERIALS $39.49 1T 5D 8L ROTO-MILL, ROTO-GRINDER $39.88 1T 5D 8L SAWS, CONCRETE $39.49 1T 5D 8L SCRAPERS -SELF PROPELLED, HARD TAIL END DUMP, ARTICULATING OFF-ROAD EQUIPMENT (UNDER 45 YD) $39.88 1T 5D SL SCRAPERS -SELF PROPELLED, HARD TAIL END DUMP, ARTICULATING OFF-ROAD EQUIPMENT (45 YD AND OVER) $40.34 1T 5D 8L SCRAPERS, CONCRETE AND CARRY ALL $39.49 1T 5D 8L SCREED MAN $39.88 1T SD 8L SHOTCRETE GUNITE $37.26 1T 5D 8L SLIPFORM PAVERS $40.34 1T 5D 8L SPREADER, TOPSIDE OPERATOR - BLAW KNOX $39:88 1T 5D 8L SUBGRADE TRIMMER $39.88 1T 5D 8L TOWER BUCKET ELEVATORS $39.49 1T 5D 8L TRACTORS, (75 HP & UNDER) $39.49 1T 5D 8L TRACTORS, (OVER 75 HP) $39.88 1T 5D 8L TRANSFER MATERIAL SERVICE MACHINE $39.88 1T 5D 8L TRANSPORTERS, ALL TRACK OR TRUCK TYPE $40.34 1T 5D 8L TRENCHING MACHINES $39.49. 1T 5D 8L TRUCK CRANE OILER/DRIVER (UNDER 100 TON) $39.49 1T 5D 8L TRUCK CRANE OILER/DRIVER (100 TON & OVER) $39.88 1T 5D 8L TRUCK MOUNT PORTABLE CONVEYER $39.88 1T 5D 8L WHEEL TRACTORS, FARMALL TYPE $37.26 1 T 5D 8L YO YO PAY DOZER $39.88 1T 5D SL POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS- UNDERGROUND SEWER 8~ WATER (SEE POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS) $0.00 POWER LINE CLEARANCE TREE TRIMMERS JOURNEY LEVEL IN CHARGE $33.06 4A ~ 5A SPRAY PERSON $31.34 4A 5A TREE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $31.76 4A 5A TREE TRIMMER $29.48 4A 5A TREE TRIMMER GROUNDPERSON $21.94 4A 5A REFRIGERATION & AIR CONDITIONING MECHANICS MECHANIC $26.64 1 RESIDENTIAL BRICK & MARBLE MASONS JOURNEY LEVEL $27.50. 1 [ridgeline ms] 00830 - 8 ~ ~ ~PREVA7LING-DI/AGERATES- ~ --- ~-` -~ --`~ "- - -"008 THURSTON COUNTY Effective: 313/2005 (See Benefit Code Kevl [ridgeline ms] 00830 - 9 PREVAILING WAGE RATES Classification Prevailing Wage Overtime Code Holiday Code Note Code RESIDENTIAL CARPENTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $23.30 1 RESIDENTIAL CEMENT MASONS JOURNEY LEVEL $14.00 1 RESIDENTIAL DRYWALL TAPERS JOURNEY LEVEL $18.00 1 RESIDENTIAL ELECTRICIANS JOURNEY LEVEL $25.45 1 B 5A RESIDENTIAL GLAZIERS JOURNEY LEVEL $24.51 2E 5G RESIDENTIAL INSULATION APPLICATORS JOURNEY LEVEL $18.70 1 RESIDENTIAL LABORERS JOURNEY LEVEL ~ $9.81 1 RESIDENTIAL PAINTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $11.85 1 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBERS 8~ PIPEFITTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $20.40 1 RESIDENTIAL REFRIGERATION 8 AIR CONDITIONING MECHANICS _ JOURNEY LEVEL $26.64 1 RESIDENTIAL SHEET METAL WORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $30.22 1J 6L RESIDENTIAL SOFT FLOOR LAYERS JOURNEY LEVEL $16.00 1 RESIDENTIAL SPRINKLER FITTERS (FIRE PROTECTION) JOURNEY LEVEL $23.60 1 RESIDENTIAL TERRAZZO/TILE FINISHERS JOURNEY LEVEL $17.00 1 ROOFERS JOURNEY LEVEL $24.37 1 SHEET METAL WORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $46.74 1 J 6L SIGN MAKERS & INSTALLERS (ELECTRICAL) JOURNEY LEVEL $18.04 1 SIGN MAKERS & INSTALLERS (NON-ELECTRICAL) JOURNEY LEVEL $14.04 1 SOFT FLOOR LAYERS JOURNEY LEVEL $30.78 1 B 5A SOLAR CONTROLS FOR WINDOWS JOURNEY LEVEL $10.31 1 B 50 SPRINKLER FITTERS (FIRE PROTECTION) JOURNEY LEVEL $49.19 1 B 5C STAGE RIGGING MECHANICS (NON STRUCTURAL) JOURNEY LEVEL $13.23 1 SURVEYORS CHAIN PERSON $9.35 1 INSTRUMENT PERSON $11.40 1 PARTY CHIEF $13.40 1 TELEPHONE LINE CONSTRUCTION -OUTSIDE CABLE SPLICER $28.31 26 5A HOLE DIGGER/GROUND PERSON $15.92 2B 5A INSTALLER (REPAIRER) $27.16 2B 5A JOURNEY LEVEL TELEPHONE LINEPERSON $26.34 2B 5A SPECIAL APPARATUS INSTALL!=R I $28.31 28 5A SPECIAL APPARATUS INSTALLER II $27.74 26 5A TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (HEAVY) $28.31 26 5A TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (LIGHT) $26.34 2B 5A TELEVISION GROUND PERSON $15.12 2B 5A TELEVISION LINEPERSON/INSTALLER $20.05 2B 5A 00830 - 9 THURSTON COUNTY Effective: 3/312005 (See Benefit. Code Key) Classification Prevailing Wa a Overtime Code Holiday .Code Note Code TELEPHONE LINE CONSTRUCTION -OUTSIDE (continued) TELEVISION SYSTEM TECHNICIAN $23.82 28 5A TELEVISION TECHNICIAN $21.45 2B 5A TREE TRIMMER $26.34 2B 5A TERRAZZO WORKERS & TILE SETTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $37.03 1 H 5A . TILE, MARBLE & TERRAZZO FINISHERS FINISHER - $30.86 - 1H 5A TRAFFIC CONTROL STRIPERS JOURNEY LEVEL $31.90 1 K 5A TRUCK DRIVERS ASPHALT MIX (TO 16 YARDS) $36.89 1T 5D 8L ASPHALT MIX (OVER 16 YARDS) $37.47 1T 5D 8L DUMP TRUCK $17.23 1 DUMP TRUCK & TRAILER $17.23 - 1 OTHER TRUCKS $37.47 1T 5D 8L TRANSIT MIXER $24.11 2C 5A WELL DRILLERS & IRRIGATION PUMP INSTALLERS __ _ ___ (IRRIGATION PUMP INSTALLER $17.53 1 I ~ OILER $12.44 1 WELL DRILLER $17.68 1 [ridgeline ms] 00830 - 10 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830 - 10 ' ` fTA R O 1 STATE OF WASHINGTON ' DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES ' PREVAILING WAGE F'"O BOX 44540, OiYMf'fA, 1fiff~~~tli'dflTOiV 9-t~504-4540 (360) 902-.5335 FAX (360) 902-5300 ' *'~ NOTICE* *~ The Washington State Supreme Court ruled in Everett Concrete v. Department of Labor and Industries that workers employed in the fabrication or manufacture of 1 items specifically produced for public works projects are covered under Chapter 39.12 RCW. The law establishes that the applicable prevailing wages which must be paid to laborers, workers and mechanics are the wages that have been established for the county in which the actual physical work is performed. Because the fabrication or manufacture is performed off-site, this may not• be the ' same county in which the job site is located." Because contract awarding agencies must include the prevailing wages in their 1 contract or bid specifications for all .potential bidders, the off-site wages for every county in the state must be included. This insures that manufacturers located in ' other counties will be provided with the wages that apply to them. The followin is a lis g t of work that may include the fabrication or manufacture of items produced specifically for a public .works project. This list is not intended to ' include standard items that are always available and may be purchased on the general market. Questions regarding whether the production of a specific item is ' covered should be directed to the office of the Industrial Statistician. Cabinet, Sash, Door and Furniture Making (wood) Fabricated Precast Concrete Products (Structural, Architectural and Utility concrete) Industrial Engine and Machine Mechanics t Metal Fabrication (In-shop) - (Ironworkers, Boilermakers) Modular Buildings (Including customized prefabricated housing) Sheet Metal Work (Air ducts, ventilation systems, except round flex hose) Sign Making and Installation (Electrical and non-electrical) [ridgeline ms] 00830 - 11 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830 - 11 State'of Washington DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES Prevailing Wage Section -Telephone (360) 802-5335 PO Box 44540, Olympia, WA 98504-4540 Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of overtime calculation requirements is provided on the Benefit Code Key. CABINET MAKERS (IN SHOP) Effective: 3/3/2005 (SPe benefit Code Kevl Classification Prevailing Wage Overtime Code Holiday Code Note Code Counties Covered: ADAMS, ASOTIN, BENTON, COLUMBIA, DOUGLAS, FERRY, FRANKLIN, GARFIELD, GRANT, LINCOLN, OKANOGAN, PEND OREILLE, ' STEVENS, WALLA WALLA AND WHITMAN JOURNEY LEVEL $8.45 1 Counties Covered: CHELAN JOURNEY LEVEL $11.95 _ 1 _ ___ _ Counties Covered: - • CLALLAM JOURNEY LEVEL $14.67 1 Counties Covered: CLARK ~ ' JOURNEY LEVEL $23.00 1 Counties Covered: COWLITZ JOURNEY LEVEL $14.84 1 .Counties Covered: _ GRAYS HARBOR; ISLAND, KLICKITAT, PACIFIC, SKAMANIA AND WAHKIAKUM JOURNEY LEVEL $13.12 1' ' ' Counties Covered: JEFFERSON JOURNEY LEVEL $14.10 1 Counties Covered: KING JOURNEY LEVEL $16.67 1 Counties Covered: KITSAP ` JOURNEY-LEVEL $12.53 1 ' Counties Covered: KITTITAS JOURNEY LEVEL $14.26 1 Counties Covered: ' ,.: ~ LEWIS JOURNEY LEVEL $12.46 1 Counties Covered: • MASON JOURNEY LEVEL ~ $11.24 1 ~ ' Counties Covered: PIERCE JOURNEY LEVEL $24.76. 1 -Counties Covered: SAN JUAN JOURNEY LEVEL $19.77 1 Counties Covered: SKAGIT JOURNEY LEVEL $22.87 1 B 5C Counties Covered: SNOHOMISH ' -- JOURNEY-L-EVEL--___.. - ---- - - -- -- - ...$23:34-... ._ --2M --~- -- _-____5C-.~.----- - ------- - - - [ridgeline'ms] 00830 - 12 PR NAILING WAGE RATES 00830. - 12 ~. CABINET MAKERS (IN SHOP) Effective: 3/3/2005 (See Benefit Code Key) Classification Prevailing Wa a Overtime Code Holiday Code Note Code Counties Covered: SPOKANE JOURNEY LEVEL $14.75 1 Counties Covered: THURSTON - JOURNEY LEVEL $13.02 1 Counties Covered: WHATCOM JOURNEY LEVEL $14.38 1 Counties Covered: YAKIMA JOURNEY. LEVEL $19.24 1 '~ f_ I _.. ... _ . _. ._.. . [ridgeline ms] 00830 - 13 ~ .PREVAILING WAGE RATES. ----- .. 00830 = 13~ State of Washington DEPARTMENT OF-LABOR AND INDUSTRIES Prevailing Wage Section -Telephone (380) 902-5335 PO Box 44540, Olympia, WA 98504-4540 Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of overtime calculation requirements is provided on the Benefit Code Key. FABRICATED PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS Effective: 313/2005 (See Benefit Code Key) Classification Prevailing Wa a Overtime Code Holiday Code Note Code Counties Covered: ADAMS, ASOTIN, BENTON, COLUMBIA, DOUGLAS, FERRY, GARFIELD, GRANT, LINCOLN, OKANOGAN, PEND OREILLE, STEVENS, WALLA WALLA AND WHITMAN ALL CLASSIFICATIONS $9.96 1 Counties Covered: CHELAN, KITTITAS, KLICKITAT AND SKAMANIA . ALL CLASSIFICATION $8.61 1 S _ _ Counties Covered: CLALLAM, CLARK, COWLITZ, GRAYS HARBOR, ISLAND, JEFFERSON, KITSAP, LEWIS, MASON, PACIFIC, SAN JUAN, SKAGIT, SNOHOMISH, THURSTON AND WAHKIAKUM ALL CLASSIFICATIONS $13.50 1 Counties Covered: FRANKLIN ALL CLASSIFICATIONS $11.50 1 Counties Covered: KING ALL CLASSIFICATIONS $11.90 ~ 2K 6S Counties Covered: PIERCE ALL CLASSIFICATIONS $9.28 1 Counties Covered: SPOKANE ALL CLASSIFICATIONS $20.23 1 Counties Covered: WHATCOM ALL CLASSIFICATIONS $13.67 1 Counties Covered: YAKIMA CRAFTSMAN $8.65 1 LABORER $7.35 1 I [ridgeline ms] 00830 - 14 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830 - 14 State of Washington ~ DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES . ( Prevailing Wage Section -Telephone (360) 902-5335 PO Box 44540, Olympia, WA 98504-4540 ' Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of overtime calculation requirements is provided on the Benefit Code Key. INDUSTRIAL ENGINE AND MACHINE MECHANICS ' Effective:3/3/2005 ' ' ~ (See Benefit Code Key) Classification Prevailing Wage Overtime Code Holiday .. Code Note Code Counties Covered: ADAMS, ASOTIN, BENTON, CHELAN, CLALLAM, CLARK, COLUMBIA, COWLITZ, DOUGLAS, FERRY, FRANKLIN, GARFIELD, GRANT, GRAYS HARBOR, ISLAND, JEFFERSON, KING, KITSAP, KITTITAS, KLICKITAT, LEWIS, LINCOLN, MASON, OKANOGAN,.PACIFIC, PEND OREILLE, PIERCE, SAN JUAN, SKAGIT, SKAMANIA, SNOHOMISH, SPOKANE, STEVENS, THURSTON, WAHKIAKUM, WALLA WALLA, WHATCOM, WHITMAN AND YAKIMA MECHANIC $15.65 1 '+ '- 1 t. --~------__- --- ---------- [ridgeline ms] 00830 - 15 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830 - T 5 State of Washington DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES Prevailing Wage Section -Telephone (380) 902-5335 PO Box 44540, Olympia, WA 98504-4540 Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of overtime calculation requirements is provided on the Benefit Code Key METAL FABRICATIONS (IN SHOP) Effective: 3/3/2005 (See Benefit Code Key) Classification Prevailing Wa a Overtime Code Holiday Code - Note Code Counties Covered: ADAMS, ASOTIN, COLUMBIA, DOUGLAS, FERRY, FRANKLIN, GARFIELD, KITTITAS, LINCOLN, OKANOGAN, P.END OREILLE, STEVENS, WALLA WALLA AND WHITMAN - FITTER/WELDER $12.76 1 LABORER $8.13 1 MACHINE OPERATOR $12.66 1 PAINTER $10.20 1 Counties Covered: BENTON MACHINE OPERATOR $10.53 1 PAINTER $9.76 1 WELDER $16.70 1 Counties Covered: CHELAN FITTER $15.04 1 LABORER $8.77 1 MACHINE OPERATOR ~ $9.71 1 PAINTER $9.93 1 WELDER $12.24 1 Counties Covered: CLALLAM, GRAYS HARBOR, ISLAND, JEFFERSON, LEWIS, MASON, PACIFIC, SAN JUAN AND SKAGIT FITTERNIIELDER $15.16 1 LABORER $11.13 1 MACHINE OPERATOR $10.66 1 PAINTER $11.41 1 Counties Covered: CLARK FITTER $25.76 1 J 6B LABORER $19.50 1 J 6B LAYEROUT $26.12 1 J 6B MACHINE OPERATOR $20.04 1J 68 PAINTER $22.64 1 J 6B WELDER $25.22 1J 6B Counties Covered: COWLITZ FITTER $23.72 16 6V LABORER $15.87 1 B 6V MACHINE OPERATOR $23.72 1B 6V WELDER $23.72 1 B 6V Counties Covered: GRANT FITTER/WELDER $10.79 1 PAINTER $7.45 1 [ridgeline ms] 00830 - 16 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830 - 16 METAL FABRICATIONS (IN SHOP) Effective: 3/3/2005 (See Benefit Code Kev1 Classification Prevailing Wage Overtime Code Holiday Code Note Code Counties Covered: KING FITTER $15.86 1 LABORER $9:78 1 MACHINE OPERATOR $13.04 1 PAINTER $11:10 1 WELDER - $15.48 1 Counties Covered: KITSAP FITTER $26.96 1 LABORER $7.35 1 MACHINE OPERATOR $13.83 1 WELDER $13.83 1 Counties Covered: KLICKITAT, SKAMANIA AND WAHKIAKUM FITTERNVELDER $16.99 1 LABORER $10.44 1 MACHINE OPERATOR $17.21 1 .PAINTER $17.03 1 ! _ ~ ______,_ __ Counties Covered: PIERCE FITTER $15.25 1 LABORER $9.25 1 MACHINE OPERATOR $13.98 1 WELDER $13.98 1 Counties Covered: SNOHOMISH FITTERNI/ELDER $15.38 1 LABORER $9.79 1 MACHINE OPERATOR $8.84 1 PAINTER $9.98 1 Counties Covered: SPOKANE FITTER $12.59 1 LABORER $7.98 1 MACHINE OPERATOR $13.26 1 PAINTER $10.27 ~ 1 WELDER $10.80 1 Counties Covered: THURSTON FITTER $23.02 1 R 6T LABORER $14.88 1 R 6T LAYEROUT $25.07 1 R 6T MACHINE OPERATOR $18.74 1R 6T WELDER $20.99 1 R 6T Counties Covered: WHATCOM FITTER/WELDER $13.81 1 LABORER $9.00 1 MACHINE OPERATOR $13.81 1 Counties Covered: YAKIMA FITTER $12.00 1 LABORER $10.31 1 MACHINE OPERATOR $11.32 1' PAINTER $12.00 1 WELDER $11.32 1 _ ._ .._ [ridgeline ms] 00830 - 1 T PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830 - 17 . State of Washington DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES ,,. Prevailing Wage Section -Telephone (360) 902-5335 PO Box 44540, Olympia, WA 98504.4540 Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of overtime calculation requirements is provided on the Benefit Code Key. MODULAR BUILDINGS Effective: 3/3/2005 (See Benefit Code Key) Classification Prevailing Wage Overtime Code Holiday Code Note Code. Counties Covered: CHELAN, DOUGLAS, KITTITAS AND YAKIMA JOURNEY LEVEL $14.11 1 Counties Covered: GRAYS HARBOR, LEWIS, MASON, PACIFIC AND THURST ON CABINET ASSEMBLY $9.98 1 ELECTRICIAN $9.98 1 _ _ _ ____ ____ _ EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE _ $9.98 1 PLUMBER $9.98 1 PRODUCTION WORKER $9.75 1 TOOL MAINTENANCE $9.98 1 UTILITY PERSON $9.98 1 WELDER $9.98 1 Counties Covered: KING AND KITSAP CABINET ASSEMBLY $11.56 1 ELECTRICIAN $11.56 1 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE $11.56 1 PLUMBER $11.56 1 PRODUCTION WORKER $9.26 1 TOOL MAINTENANCE $11.56 1 UTILITY PERSON $11.56 1 WELDER $11.56 1 Counties Covered: SNOHOMISH JOURNEY LEVEL $9.00 1 ___ __ _. _ [ridgeline mss 00830 - 18 PREVAILING WAGE RATES ~ 00830 - 18 i r i r State of Washington DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES Prevailing Wage Section -Telephone (380) 902-5335 PO Box 44540, Olympia, WA 98504-4540 Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of overtime calculation requirements is provided on the Benefit Code Key. SHEET METAL WORKERS Effective: 3/3/2005 (See Benefit Code Kev) Classification Prevailing Wage Overtime Code Holiday Code Note Code Counties Covered: ADAMS, ASOTIN, CHELAN, DOUGLAS, FERRY, GRANT, LINCOLN, PEND OREILLE, SPOKANE, STEVENS AND WHITMAN JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $33.72 1 B 5A Counties Covered: BENTON, COLUMBIA, FRANKLIN, GARFIELD, KITTITAS, WALLA WALLA AND YAKIMA JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $37.12 1 B 5A Counties Covered: CLALLAM, COWLITZ, GRAYS HARBOR, KING, KITSAP, MASON, PACIFIC, PIERCE, SNOHOMISH, THURSTON AND WAHKIAKUM JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $46.74 1J 6L Counties Covered: CLARK AND SKAMANIA JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $42.88 1 B 5A Counties Covered: ISLAND JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $23.11 1 Counties Covered: JEFFERSON JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $33.53 1 Counties Covered: KLICKITAT JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $23.29 1 Counties Covered: LEWIS JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $23.81 1 Counties Covered: OKANOGAN JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $37.53 1 Counties Covered: SAN JUAN, SKAGIT AND WHATCOM JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP] $39.65 1 E 5B [ridgeline ms] 00830 - 19 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830 - 19 State of Washington , DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES Prevailing. Wage Section -Telephone (360) 902-5335 PO Box 44540, Olympia, WA 98504-4540 Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits, On public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of overtime calculation requirements is provided on the Benefit Code Key. SIGN MAKERS & INSTALLERS (ELECTRICAL) ' Effective: 3/3/2005 (See Benefit Code Kev} Classification Prevailing Wage Overtime Code Holiday Code Note Code Counties Covered: - ADAMS, FERRY, LINCOLN, PEND OREILLE, SPOKANE, STEVENS AND WHITMAN JOURNEY LEVEL $13.91 1 Counties Covered: CHELAN, DOUGLAS, GRANT AND OKANOGAN JOURNEY LEVEL $39:65 1E 5B Counties Covered: CLALLAM AND JEFFERSON JOURNEY LEVEL $19.29 1 Counties Covered: CLARK JOURNEY LEVEL $19.27 ". 1 Counties Covered: COWLITZ AND WAHKIAKUM JOURNEY LEVEL $'16:88 1 Counties Covered: GRAYS HARBOR, LEWIS, MASON, PACIFIC AND THURSTON JOURNEY LEVEL $18.04 1 Counties Covered: ISLAND, SKAGIT AND WHATCOM JOURNEY LEVEL $16.03 1 Counties Covered: KING SIGN INSTALLER $23.36 1 " SIGN MAKER $0.00 1 Counties Covered: KITSAP JOURNEY LEVEL $20.58 1 Counties Covered: - KLIGKITAT AND SKAMANIA JOURNEY LEVEL $16.83 1 Counties Covered: PIERCE AND SNOHOMISH JOURNEY LEVEL $26.17 1 Counties Covered: SAN JUAN JOURNEY LEVEL $9.75 1 R [ridgeline ms] 00830 - 20 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 1~ .._.._ ._..___..._ ._.. _ -- -- -- "-~---.. s ~.... 00830 - 20 ` ,~ State of Washington I DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES Prevailing Wage Section -Telephone (380) 902-5335 PO Box 44540, Olympia, WA 98504-4540 'j Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts I The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of overtime calculation requirements is provided on the Benefit Code ''• Key SIGN MAKERS & INSTALLERS (NON-ELECTRICAL) ' Effective: 3/3/2005 ' (See Benefit Code Key) ~I i I~ I i I Classification Prevailing Wage Overtime Code Holiday Code Note Code Counties Covered: ADAMS, FERRY, LINCOLN, PEND OREILLE, STEVENS AND, WHITMAN JOURNEY LEVEL $13.91 1 Counties Covered: ASOTIN, BENTON, COLUMBIA, FRANKLIN, GARFIELD, GRANT, KITTITAS, WALLA WALLA AND YAKIMA JOURNEY LEVEL $14.65 1 Counties Covered: CHELAN, DOUGLAS AND'OKANOGAN JOURNEY LEVEL $16.14 1 Counties Covered: CLALLAM AND JEFFERSON JOURNEY LEVEL $12.15 1 Counties Covered: CLARK JOURNEY LEVEL $31.23 1 M 5D Counties Covered: COWLITZ AND WAHKIAKUM JOURNEY LEVEL $16.74 1 Counties Covered: GRAYS HARBOR, MASON AND PACIFIC JOURNEY LEVEL $18.04 1 Counties Covered: ISLAND AND WHATCOM JOURNEY LEVEL $26.55 1 Counties Covered: KING. SIGN INSTALLER $17.31 1 SIGN MAKER $15.61 1 Counties Covered: ' KITSAP JOURNEY LEVEL $9.27 1 Counties Covered: KLICKITAT AND SKAMANIA JOURNEY LEVEL $16.83 1 Counties Covered: LEWIS, SKAGIT AND SNOHOMISH JOURNEY LEVEL $32.61 1 N 5D Counties Covered: PIERCE JOURNEY LEVEL $15.31 1 Counties Covered: SAN JUAN JOURNEY LEVEL $9.75 1 Counties Covered: SPOKANE JOURNEY LEVEL $8.00 1 [ridgeline ms] 00830 - 21 .. PREVAILING WAGE RATES ~ _ ~ ~ 00830 - 21 SIGN MAKERS & INSTALLERS (NON-ELECTRICAL) Effective: 3/3/2005 (See Benefit Code Kev) Classification Prevailing Wa a Overtime Code Holiday Code Note Code Counties Covered: THURSTON JOURNEY LEVEL $14.04 1 [ridgeiine ms] 00830 - 22 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830 - 22 i BENEFIT CODE KEY -EFFECTIVE 03-03-05 ~ OVERTIME CODES I Overtime Ca fculations are based on the hourly rate actually paid to the worker. On public works projects, the hourly rate must be not less than the prevailing rate of wage minus the hourly rate of the cost of fringe benefits actually provided for the worker. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. A. All hours worked on Saturdays, Sundays and holidays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. B. All hours worked on Saturdays shall be paid at one and one-half times the .hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. • C.' All hours worked on Sundays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. D. The first eight (8) hours worked on Saturdays of a five -eight hour work week and the first eight (8) hours worked on a fifth calendar day, excluding Sunday, in a four -ten hour schedule, shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours per day on Saturday; all hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours in a fifth calendar weekday of a four -ten hour schedule; all hours worked in excess of ten (10) hours per day Monday through Friday, and all hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. ~! F. The first eight (8) hours on Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours on Saturday, and all hours worked on Sundays and holidays (except Labor Day) shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Labor Day shall be paid at three times the hourly rate of wage. ~ G. The first ten (10) hours worked on Saturdays and the first ten (10) hours worked on a fifth calendar weekday in a four -ten hour schedule, shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage.: All hours worked in excess of ten (10) hours per day Monday through Saturday, and all hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. Fi. All hours worked on Saturdays (except makeup days if work is lost due to inclement weather conditions or equipment breakdown) shall be 'j paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at"double the hourly rate ' of wage. J. The first eight (8) hours on Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked in excess of eight ~ (8) hours and Saturday, and all hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. K. All hours worked on Saturdays and Sundays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours .worked on holidays ~ shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. " L. All hours worked on Saturdays, Sundays and holidays (except Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day) shall be paid atone and one-half ~i times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. M. All hours worked on Saturdays (except makeup days if work is lost due to inclement weather conditions) shall be paid atone and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours• worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. N. All hours worked on Saturdays (except makeup days) shall be paid of one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours_.worked on .Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. P. All hours worked on Saturdays (except makeup days) and Sundays shall be paid, at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. Q. All hours worked on Saturdays shall be paid atone and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. Ail hours worked on Sundays and holidays ~ (except Christmas Day) shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Christmas Day shall be paid at two and one- I half times the hourly rate of wage. R. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage. S. All hours worked on Sundays between the hours of 12:OOAM Sunday and 6:OOAM Monday and on holidays shall be paid at double the 'j hourly rate of wage. T. All hours worked on Saturdays, except makeup days, shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked after 6:OOPM Saturday to 6:OOAM Monday and on holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. . • U. All hours worked on Saturdays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays (except Labor Day) shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Labor Day shall be paid at three times the hourly rate of wage. W. All hours worked on Saturdays and Sundays (except makeup days) shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All 'i hours worked on holidays shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage. . 2. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE -PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ,i A. The•first six (8) hours worked on Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked in excess of • six (8) hours on Saturday and all hours worked on Sundays and Holidays shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage. B. Ali hours worked on holidays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. C. All hours worked on Sundays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on holidays shall be paid at '! two times the hourly rate of wage. D: All hours worked on Saturdays and Sundays shall be paid atone and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. The first eight (8) hours worked on holidays shall be paid at straight time in addition to the holiday pay. All hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours on holidays shall be paid atone and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. ~ E. All hours,worked on Saturdays or holidays (except Labor Day) shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on,Sundays or on Labor Day shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage. • ' [ridgeline ms) 00830 - 23 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830 - 23 BENEFIT CODE KEY -EFFECTIVE 03.03-05 F. The first eight (8) hours worked on holidays shall be paid at the straight hourly rate of wage in addition to the holiday pay, All hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours on holidays shall be paid'at double the hourly rate of wage. G. All. hours worked on Sunday shall be paid at iwo times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on paid holidays shall be paid at two and one-half times the hourly rate of wage including holiday pay. H. All hours worked on Sunday shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on holidays shall be paid at one and one- half times the hourly rate of wage. I. All hours worked on Saturdays and holidays (except Labor Day) shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Sundays and on Labor Day shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage. J. All hours worked on Sundays shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on paid holidays shall be paid at two and one-half times the hourly rate of wage, including the holiday pay. All hours worked on unpaid holidays shall be paid a4 two times the hourly rate of wage. K. All hours worked on holidays shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage in addition to the holiday pay. M. All hours worked on Saturdays, Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. O. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid atone and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. 4. A. All hours worked in excess of eight (8), hours per day or forty (40) hours per week shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. HOLIDAY CODES 5: A. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving Day, and. Christmas Day (7). B. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving Day, the day before Christmas Day, and Christmas Day (8). C. Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (8). D. Holidays:. New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday and Saturday after Thanksgiving Day; and Christmas Day (8). E. Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Presidential Election Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (9). G. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the last work day before Christmas Day, and Christmas Day (7}. H. Holidays:, New Year's' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Thanksgiving Day, the day after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (6). I'. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas-Day (6): N. Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday afterThanksgiving Day, arid Christmas Day (9). O. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Washington's Birthday, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (6). P. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday and Saturday after Thanksgiving Day, the day before Christmas Day, and Christmas Day (9). Q. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (6). R. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the day after Thanksgiving Day, one- half day before Christmas Day, and Christmas Day (7 1/2). S. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (7). T. Paid holiday: seven (7) paid holidays. V. Paid Holidays: six (6) paid holidays. W. Paid Flolldays: nine (9) paid holidays. X. Holidays: After 520 hours -New Year's Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day. After 2080 hours -New Year's Day, Washington's Birthday, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day and a floating holiday (8). Y. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Presidential Election Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday following Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (8). Z. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (8). 6. A. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (8). C. Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving Day, the last work day before Christmas Day, and Christmas Day (9). D. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, the day before or after Christmas Day (g). H. Holidays: New Year's Day, Martin Luther King Jr. Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (8). I. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day,' Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (7). [ridgeline ms] 00830 - 24 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830 - 24 ~ BENEFIT CODE KEY -EFFECTIVE 03-03-05 ~~ L. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, the last . working day before Christmas Day, and Christmas Day (8). Q. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the day after Thanksgiving Day, and ~ Christmas Day. Unpaid Holiday: Presidents' Day. R. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day (8). S. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving .Day, Christmas Eve Day, and Christmas Day (8). ` T. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Frlday after Thanksgiving Day, the last working day before Christmas Day, and Christmas Day (9). - U. Holidays: New Year's Day, Day before New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Day before Independence Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, the day before Christmas Day, Christmas Day (.10). V. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, day after Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Eve Day, Christmas Day, Employee's Birthday, and one day of the Employee's choice (10). W. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Day before New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving ' Day, day after Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, day before Christmas Day (10). X. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, day before or after New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, day after Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, day before or after Christmas Day, Employee's Birthday (11). '~~ NOTE CODES 8. A. The standby rate of pay for divers shall be one-half times the divers rate of pay. In addition to the hourly wage and fringe benefits, the ' following depth premiums apply to depths of fifty feet or more: over 50' to 100' - $1.00 per foot for each foot over 50 feet, over 100' to 175' - $2.25 per foot for each foot over 100 feet, over 175' to 250' - $5.50 per foot for each foot over 175 feet, over 250' -divers may name their own price, provided it is no less than the scale listed for 250 feet. C. The standby rate of pay for divers shall be one-half times the divers rate of pay. In addition to the hourly wage and fringe benefits, the ' following depth premiums apply to depths of fifty feet or more: over 50' to 100' - $1.00 per foot for each foot over 50 feet, over 100' to 150' - $1.50 per foot for each foot over 100 feet, over 150' to 200' - $2.00 per foot for each foot over 150 feet, over 200' -divers may name their own price. D. Workers working with supplied air on hazmat projects receive an additional $1.00 per hour: ' L. Workers on hazmat projects receive additional hourly premiums as follows -Level A: $0.75, Level B: $0.50, and Level C: $0.25. M. Workers on hazmat projects receive additional hourly premiums as follows - Levels A & B: $1.00, Levels C & D: $0.50. N. Workers on hazmat projects receive additional hourly premiums as follows -Level A: $1.00, Levei B: $0.75, Level C: $0.50, and Level D: ' $0.25. ' END OF SECTION 00830 - - ~- -~ _ ~ (ridgeline ms] 00830 - 25 ..._ PREVAILING WAGE RATES ~ ~~ ~ - ~~ ~--~- ~-- 00830- 25 r SECTION 01010 -SUMMARY OF THE WORWSPECIAL CONDITIONS '~ 1 PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 10 SUMMARY 11 .. 12 The Work consists of: New wood framed, 84,986 SF, Ridgeline Middle School located at undeveloped 13 property located at 10605 Carter Street, Yelm, WA, just west of Mill Pond Intermediate School, along with all 14 associated site ~,r:ork, 200 parking-still parking lot, 12 bus parking stalls, and firs lane. 15 16 The Work will be constructed under a single prime contract: 17 18 At the completion of the project the Contractor will be responsible for having the existing site amenities, i.e. '~ 19 grass areas, concrete walks, curbing, asphalt paving, etc., in condition equal to or betterthan original condition 20 at the beginning of project. Burden of_proof of "original condition" is the responsibility of the Contractor. This 21 could be in the form of photographs or video tape. A copy of these will be turned over to the Architect prior 'i: 22 to the beginning of construction. If this does not happen then the Architect's decision as to "original condition" 23 will govern. RELATED SECTIONS Section 01.330 "Submittal Procedure" for CAD Drawing Availability. 31 TIME OF COMPLETION ' 32 33 The work of this contract shall be commenced on the date:of~written notice to proceed or immediately after 34 the Agreement is signed, whichever.is.earlier, and shall be substantially completed on or before July 30, 2006, 35 with final completion on or before August 30, 2006. ' 36 37 Alternate Bid A-3, if accepted, will require completion on or before August 30, 2005. 38 39 40 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 41 42 43 For each calendar day after the date fixed for substantial completion., that the work remains. uncompleted, the Contractor shall pay the Owner the sum of $4,000.00 per day as fixed and agreed liquidated damages, but 44 not as ~a penalty. Should an extension of time be granted, .the Contractor, he shall indemnify and save 45 harmless the Owner for any loss to any other contractor caused by such extension of time. 46 47 48 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS . 49 50 Separate Contract: The Owner, under separate contract, will be removing and/or installing new materials and 51 equipment at the site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. 52 53 .Cooperate fully with separate contractors so that work under those contracts ,may. be carried out smoothly, t 54 without interfering-with. or delaying work under thisContract: (ridgeline ms] 01010 - 1 SUMMARY OF THE WORWSPECIAL CONDITIONS ,01010 - 1 WORK SEQUENCE The Work will be conducted in two phases. Phase 1: Alternate Bid A-3 -From Notice to Proceed to August 15, 2005. Phase 2: Work of this phase shall be substantially complete, ready for occupancy, by July 30, 2006. CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES General: During the construction period the Contractor shall have full use of the premises for construction operations, including use of the site as noted in the following paragraphs. The Contractor's use of the premises also maybe limited by the Owner's right to perform work. or to retain other contractors on portions of the Project. Use of the Site: Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated. Confine operations to areas within contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond the areas in which the Work is indicated. Coordinate with WORK SEQUENCE if specific timing of the work may be required. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy and use by the public. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to-the Owner, the .Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas `for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of rnaterials.and equipment on-site. Deliveries: Contractor shall not schedule deliveries to.the site between 8:30 and 9:30 in the morning and 3:00 and 4:00 in the afternoon. These are the busy times for school buses and student drop-off and pick-up by parents. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. Use of the Existing Building: Limit use of the building to work in areas indicated. Maintain the existing building in a weathertight condition throughout the construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Take all precautions necessary to protect the building and its occupants during the construction period. Coordinate with WORK SEQUENCE if specific timing of the work may be required. OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the entire construction period. Cooperate with the Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with the Owner's operations. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building prior to Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. Certificate of Substantial Completion: The Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied by the Owrier prior to.such occupancies. Prior to partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational. Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully completed. Upon occupancy, the Ownerwill operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of the building. _._....._ .. [ridgeline_ms]_:.010.1.0;.- 2 SUMMARY OF. THE WORK/$PECIAL_CONDITIONS _. ._ ~ , 01010 - 2 ' ~'- .. i 1 Upon occupancy, the Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied 2 .portions of the building. 3 4 Certificate of Occupancy: Shall be furnished to Architect for transmittal to Owner before application for final 5 payment and prior to Owner's occupancy. (See Div. 1 Section, Project Closeout). Shall be issued by duly 6 7 authorized building officials stating that the work complies with provisions of the applicable building code. C ontractor is responsible to contact and coordinate.with building officials to review the work for Certificate of 8 Occupancy approval 9 10 11 PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 12 13 i 14 PART 3 -EXECUTION 15 16 1f 17 END OF SECTION 01010 1'; '! '' [ridgeline ms] 01010 - 3 .SUMMARY OF THE WORK/SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01010- 3 '' 1 2 3 "~ 5 6 1! 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 '! 20 21 ~ 22 23 24 25 ~ 26 27 28 ' 29 30 31 32 ' 33 34 35 ' 36 37 38 39 ' 40 41 42 43 ' 44 45 46 47 ' 48 ~49 SECTION 01030 - ALTERNATES PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Alternates. DEFINITIONS Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems,. or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. The cost or credit for each alternate is the. net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. - PROCEDURES Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully integrate that Work into the Project. , Include as part of each alternate,. miscellaneous devices, accessory .objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the :status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to~alternates. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included~at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the Work described under each alternate. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) [ridgeline ms] ~ 01030 - 1 _ ALTERNATES _ 01030 - 1 ~ . PART 3 -EXECUTION SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES Alternate Bids General: Each bidder shall state in his bid, in the spaces provided. therefor in the applicable proposal form, his proposal sums for adding to, or deducting from the Base Bid work, for the applicable contract: Failure to submit proposals on all alternates described maybe cause for rejecting the bidder's entire proposal. Alternate Bid A-1 (Readerboard): If this alternate is accepted, provide Readerboard described in Section 10430, along with concrete base as shown on detail. Electrical signal and power to sign provided in base contract. Alternate Bid A-2 (Field House and Maintenance Access Road): If this alternate is accepted, constructthe field house building including required utility extensions. Also construct a portion of the asphalt maintenance road as shown on the drawings. Alternate Bid A-3 (East Play Field and Playground): If this alternate is accepted, construct in their entirety the new multi-purpose fields and play area between the new school building and Mill Pond Elementary. Provide grading, import soils, fencing; concrete flatwork, backstops, infield areas, concrete ramps and stairs, irrigation and playground surfacing and other site improvements as shown on the plans. Salvage and relocate existing play equipment as described on the plans. Alternate Bid A-4 (West Track and Fields): If this alternate is accepted, construct in their entirety the new. softball field, cinder running track, field event venues and football field, including grading, subdrainage, irrigation, landscaping, fencing, concrete work, import soils, and other site improvements as shown on the plans. If this alternate is not accepted, provide base bid grading as indicated on the civil drawings and hydroseed the entire disturbed area. Alternate Bid A-5 (Subcontractor Bonding): In addition to the Performance and Payment Bonds provided by the General in the Base Bid, the General Contractor shall also provide bonding for the following subcontractors for the total amount of their Base Bid including State Sales Tax'. Alternate Bid A-5a (Civil): All subcontractors, with the exception of Landscaping, doing work in Division 2 -Civil. Alternate Bid A-5b (Mechanical): All subcontractors doing work in Division 15 -Mechanical. Alternate Bid A-5c (Electrical): All subcontractors doing work in Division 16 -Electrical. Alternate Bid M-1 (Temperature Controls): No controls provided in Base Bid. (This Alternate is to be submitted with the "Part 1" portion of the Form ~of Proposal.) . Alternate Bid M-1A (Alerton Controls): Provide controls per Specification Section 15970 as provided by ATS Automation. A Technical Proposal package is required prior to bidding. See Section 15970 (1.03 C.1). Alternate Bid M-1 B (Barber Coleman): Provide controls per Specification Section 15970 as provided by Controls Contractors installing Barber Coleman. A Technical Proposal package is required prior to bidding. See Section 15970 (1.03 C.1). 54 Alternate Bid M-1 C (Honeywell): Provide controls per Specification Section 15970 as provided by 55 Sound Energy installing Honeywell controls with NiagralTridium. A Technical Proposal package is 56 required prior to bidding. See Section 15970 (1.03 C.1). 57 58 ______ (ridgeline ms] , 01030.- 2_..- . __ _.._.. ___ _.. ALTERNATES__ 01030 - 2 1 Alternate Bid E-1 (Theatrical Lighting Svstem): Furnish and install a Theatrical Lighting System as shown on 2 the drawings and as specified in Section 16580. Base Bid work includes power and low voltage electrical 3 raceways above and below grade and associated floor and wall junction boxes for the Theatrical Lighting 1 i 4 System to allow for future installation without.recourse to demolition and restoration of completed work. 5 6 Alternate Bid E-2 (Close Circuit Television System): Furnish and install a CCN. system a shown on the 7 drawings and as specified in Section 16725. Base Bid work includes power and low voltage electrical. ' ± - 8 raceways. above and below grade, associated boxes, and handholes for the CCN system to allow for future 9 installation without recourse to demolition and restoration.of completed work. 10 11 ~ Alternate Bid E-3 (Intercom, Clock/Program TV Distribution System): ' I 12 13 Alternate Bid E-3a (Telecor System): Provide intercom, clock program, and N distribution systems 14 ~ incompliance with Division 16 requirements for the Telecor XL intercom system and Blonder Tongue 15 Ndistribution equipment as provided and installed by Sound Electronics of Tacoma, WA. Base Bid 16 . includes no intercom, clock program, and N distribution systems. 17 18 Alternate Bid E-3b (Rauland-Borg System): Provide intercom, clock program, and N distribution 'j 19 systems in compliance with Division 16 requirements fo the Telecenter ICS intercom system and 20 BlonderTongue Ndistribution equipmentas provided and installed by Electrocom of Lynnwood, WA. 21 Base Bid includes no intercom, clock/program, and N distribution systems. ~ 22 ~ 23 Alternate Bid E-3c (Bogen Svstem): Provide intercom, clock/program, and N distribution systems 24 in compliance with Division 16 requirements for the Bogen Multicom 2000 intercom system and 25 BlonderTongue Ndistribution equipment as provided and installed by Dimensional Communications 'j 26 of Mt. Vernon, WA. Base Bid includes no intercom, clock program, and N distribution systems. '27 28 29 END OF SECTION 01030 C [ridgeiine ms] 01030 - 3 ALTERNATES 01030 - 3 SECTION 01095 -REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and genera! provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. DEFINITIONS 'P' 12 General: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. 13 14 "Architect/Owner": The word "Architect," as used herein, shall mean "Erickson McGovern, P.L.L.c.", 120 South t~ 15 131st Street, Tacoma, Washington 98444, Tel: 253-531-0206, Fax: 253-531-9197. The word "Owner" as 16 used herein shall mean "Yelm Community Schools District No. 2." 17 18 "He. Him, His, Himself. Man": When these words or any other term referring to the masculine gender is,used 19 in this specification it shall be understood to include the equivalent feminine gender term, i.e. she, her, 20 "herself," "woman". ~! 22 "Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or 23 other paragraphs or Schedules in the, Specifications, and similar requirements in'the Contract Documents. 24 Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the reader locate the 25 reference. Location is not limited. 26 27 "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and 28 "permitted" mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases. 29 30 "Approved": The term "approved," when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's 31 submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the 32 Conditions of the Contract. 33 34 "Or Approved" (For Substitutions): The term "or approved" as used in reference to the required approval of 35 "substitute" manufacturers or products which are not listed in their respective specification section under 36 PART2-PRODUCTS, Manufacturers, shall submittotheArchitectforapproval aminimum often days prior 37 to bid date. For further detail of substitutions prior to bids see A.I.A. Document A701, INSTRUCTIONS TO 38 BIDDERS, Paragraphs 3.3.1, 3.3.2, and 3.3.3. Copies of this A.I.A. Document A701 may be examined at the ' 39 office of the Architect or may be purchased directly from the American Institute of Architects, 502 South 11th 40 Street, Tacoma, WA 98402. 42 After the contract is signed, approval of Substitutions will be made only in exceptional cases where the 43 Contractor submits evidence satisfactory to the Architect that, through no fault of his own, specified or 44 otherwise approved items cannot be obtained in time to avoid delay to the work. In any case, substitutions 45 .are subject to the approval of the Architect. ' 46 47 "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by 48 authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry 49 that control performance of the Work. 50 51 "Furnish": The term "furnish" means supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, 52 assembly, installation, and similar operations. 53 [ridgeline ms] 01095 - 1 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - 1 i "Install": The term "install" describes operations at the Project Site including the actual unloading, unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. The term "experienced," when. used with the term "installer," means having a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in .size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of authorities havingjurisdiction. This requirement shall prevail unless noted otherwise within individual sections. Trades: Using terms such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of i the corresponding generic name: "Project Site" is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities; either exclusively or in conjunction, with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of.the Project Site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built. I. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an indepentlent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required; to interpret results,of those ~'' inspections or tests. SUBMITTALS ';, r Permits Licenses, and Certificates:. For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work. ~~ Shop drawings: All submittals received by the Architect from the Contractor shall be numbered sequentially for.the purpose of tracking these items throughout the construction process. ~ Zero Percent Asbestos: The Contractor shall provide a letter certifying zero percent asbestos as described ;' under MISCELLANEOUS STANDARDS of this section. This shall be submitted as a part of the "Miscellaneous Record Submittals" required in Section 01700 -Project Closeout. 1 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION I, Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on CS~I's 16- ' Division format and MasterFormat's numbering system. Arrangement of Sections and Divisions of these Specifications into trade headings conforms roughly to customary subcontracting practices and may not be consecutively numbered. They are used for ~' convenience only. The Architect is not bound to define the limits of any subcontractor, and will not enter into disputes between the Contractor and his employees, including subcontractors. . ~_.._. [ridgeline ms] 01095 - 2 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - 2 -- -- -__... _.. _ __-- - -_ _ - . _ ---- -.... _.... _ - - --- - - - --Ti' _. _ _ l... 1 1 Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions regarding the style of language and the 2 .intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. 3 These conventions are explained as follows: 4 5 Divisions and Sections included are listed in the "Table of Contents" together with the number of 6 pages in each Division. Each biddershall be responsible for checking his copy of the Project Manual 1 7 with the Table of Contents, prior to bidding, to be sure that it is complete. 8 9 Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents is ' 10 abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not 11 stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and 12 plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents 13 indicates. ' 14 15 Streamlined Language: The Specifications generally use the imperative mood and streamlined 16 language. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. ' 17 At certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that 18 must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or by others when so noted. The words "shall be" are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. MISCELLANEOUS STANDARDS . ~ 25 Conflicts: In.the case of conflict between the following paragraphs and the "A.I.A. General Conditions" and 26 the "Supplementary Conditions," the following paragraphs of the "Reference Standards and Definitions" shall 27 govern. - - 28 'I~ 29 Drug Free, Tobacco Free and Smoke Free Workplace: The contractor shall comply with all applicable drug 30 free.workplace and smoke free workplace requirements. All use of tobacco products on District property is 31 prohibited by RCW-28A.210.310. ~~ 32 33 This policy is applicable to all District employees, students, District volunteers, outside contractors and the 34 general public. 35 '! 36 Rules and Regulations: The General Contractor, in entering into a contract for his work agrees that he shall ' 37 be solely responsible for conformance, by those in his employ and by his subcontractor and their employees 38 and'by others directly or indirectly connected with the work under his contract, with the State of Washington I 39 Department of Labor and Industries, Division of Safety "General Safety Standards" and "Safety Standards for 40 Construction Work" for ladders, scaffolding, staging, runways, hoists and construction elevators, temporary 41 lighting and temporary power outlets and their wiring and for use of all vehicles and construction processes 42 and equipment, and other safety rules and regulations required therein including protection of workmen in ' 43 excavations. 44 45 Mechanical and Electrical Utility Fees, Permits, and Charges: It shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical ~ 46 and Electrical Subcontractors to check with the local governing utility company for any costs related to the 47 project and to pay any such costs. 48 49 See Section 00800, Supplementary Conditions, Article 3.7, for listing of fees and permits to be paid f I 50 by Owner. ' 51 52 Permits, Fees, Licenses, Inspections, Utility Charges, and Connection Fees: The Owner will pay for all fees 1; 53 and costs for the aforementioned items as necessary for the completion of this contract. l 54 1. 55 See Section 00800, Supplementary Conditions, Article 3.7, for listing of fees and permits to be paid 56 by Owner. 57 [ridgeline msJ 01095 - 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS - - 01095 - 3 Schedule of Values: The General Contractor shall. prepare a Schedule of Values as listed in .the Supplementary Conditions, Paragraph 9.2, and submit to the Architect within 30 days after~date of Letter of Intent or 7 days prior to submittal of initial Application for Payment, whichever is the least time of the two. See Supplementary Conditions, Article 9, Paragraph 9.2.1. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers: See Supplementary Conditions, Article 5, Paragraph 5.2.1. Number of Specified Items Required: Wherever in these Specifications an article, device, or piece of equipment is referred to in the singular number, such reference shall include as many such articles as are shown on Drawings or required to complete the installation. General Color Selection Note:.ln any and all sections of these specifications, any color selection. relating to any materials, products, painted surfaces, etc. is for establishing a basis for bidding and may be changed to a different color, yet remaining in same price range. Zero Percent Asbestos: The General Contractor shall, during the construction period, be responsible for the verification of all new materials and products supplied and installed within the limits of his contractual responsibilities to contain 0% asbestos. In the event that the project is a remodel of an existing structure or is a remodel and addition of new building area, the General Contractor will be responsible only for the verification of the new materials and products installed within the limits of his contract. Before the issuance of the final payment the General Contractor shall furnish the Owner a signed statement certifying the 0% asbestos containment as stated above. (See SUBMITTALS this Section.) Cutting and Patching: The General Contractor and the Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors shall each be responsible fortheir own cutting, associated removal and replacement of all materials to do theirwork, and the patching back in of the substrate material to receive the final finish. (The only exception would be areas of concrete floor slabs as noted on the Architectural Drawings in which the General Contractor will only cut the existing slab and pour new concrete after the Mechanical and/or Electrical Subcontractor(s) have completed their portion of the work.) Substrate materials shall be of same type of material or of a material equal to or betterthan the existing material removed as to physical characteristics as judged by the Architect. Substrate material shall be installed to accommodate finished surface alignment. All final finishing work shall match existing adjacent surfaces and shall be done by the General Contractor. "Final finish" refers to the surface treatment which- has an influence on the final appearance as compared to the existing adjacent surfaces; i.e., wall taping and texturing, tile, vinyl wall covering, painting, concrete surface finishes and all other finishes as applicable. For cutting and patching of exterior concrete or asphalt surfaces, the trade responsible for doing the work shall also be responsible for the cutting and patching of said materials. See also "Utility Excavation" in SECTION 02200. The finish patching materials shall be of the same materials, finishes and thickness as existing and shall align flush with existing surfaces after curing and or compaction. Hours of Construction: In order to minimize noise impacts to neighboring residential areas, construction and related activities shall be limited to the hours between 8:00 a.m. and 4:30 p.m. Construction activities may be permitted before 8:00 a.m. or after4:30 p.m. if it can be determined that these activities would not generate noise levels exceeding 45 dBA at the property lines of the proposal. Any construction activities proposed before 8:00 a.m. or after 4:3'0 p.m. must be approved by the governing authority within the project jurisdiction so as to comply with applicable construction noise ordinances or governmental regulations. Slab Moisture Content: Because of the adhesives used to install the scheduled floor coverings over the concrete floor slabs is sensitive to elevated moisture vapor emission and pH levels, the contractor shall, as soon as possible, take the actions necessary to bring these slabs into the acceptable levels, thereby avoiding unnecessary delays in the installation of the floor finishes. [ridgeline mss 01095 - 4 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - 4 i , 1 Dust Control During Construction: To minimize dust and resulting impacts to neighboring residential areas, 2 site watering will occur during site development. The site shall be watered as often as is necessary to prevent 3 dust from being generated and traveling onto neighboring properties. Site watering will continue until all 4 exposed soils have been covered through hydroseeding or other appropriate method. 5 6 Job Housecleaning/Disposal of Rubbish: The Contractor shall remove from the site all rubbish and debris I 7 resulting from work under his contract. Keep building and site in a neat and orderly condition at all stages of 8 the work. .- . Public Works Statutory Provisions: The Contractor shall comply with the following statutory provisions: RCW 39.12 relating to prevailing wages on public works. The Contractor on or before the date of commencement of work shall file a statement under oath with the Owner and with the Director of Labor and Industries certifying the rate of hourly wage and fringe benefits paid and to be paid each classification of laborers, workmen or mechanics employed upon the work by the contractors or subcontractors, which shall be not less than.the prevailing rate of wage. Such statement and any supplemental statements which may be necessary shall be filed in accordance with the practices and procedures required by the Department of Labor and Industries. The Department of Labor and Industries requires the payment of a $25.00 fee with each "Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages" forms and "Affidavit of Wages Paid" forms. This fee or fees are to be included in the contract price. 2. RCW 49.28 relating to hours of labor. 3. RCW 49.60 relating to discrimination. 4. RCW 39.08 relating to contractor's bond. ~' 30 5. RCW 18.27 relating to registration of contractors. 31 32 6. RCW.70.94 relating to Puget Sound Air Pollution Control Agency. '''~ 33 . 34 7. RCW 70.92 relating to .provisions for the aged and physically handicapped. ' 35 36 8. RCW 28A.85 relating to affirmative action. 37 38 9, RCW 39.04 relating to plans and specifications on work done for public bodies, estimates of costs 39 of the work, supplemental plans and specifications, supplemental estimates, accounts and records 40 of costs, engineer's certificate. 41 42 10. RCW 60.28 relating to labor and material liens and taxes and. retainage. 43 ~` 44 45 INDUSTRY STANDARDS ~ 47 Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, 48 applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into 49 the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract ~j 50 Documents by reference. 51 52 Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents. 53 54 Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with 2 or more standards is specified and the standards 55 ~ .establish different or conflicting requirements fior minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most 56 stringent requirement. Refer to the Architect before proceeding for a decision on requirements that are 57 different but apparently equal, and where it is uncertain which requirement is the most stringent. '~ 58 . [ridgeline ms) _ 01095 - 5 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS . ~ 01095 - 5 Minimum Quantit~or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum acceptable. The actual installation may complyexactlywith the minimum quantity orquality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source. Abbreviations 'and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations, as referenced in the Contract Documents, are defined to mean the associated names. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed, but are not assured, to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ACI American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 9094 Farmington Hills, MI 48333-9094 (248) 848-3700 ANSI American National Standards institute 11 West 42nd St., 13th Floor New York, NY 10036 (212) 642-4900 ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Assoc. 6000 Executive Dr., Suite 201 Rockville, MD 20852-3803 (301) 231-9050 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race St. Philadelphia, PA 19103-1187 (610) 832-9500 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute P.O. Box 1550 13924 Braddock Rd., No. 100 Centerville, VA 22020 (703) 222-1100 BIA Brick Institute of America 11490 Commerce Park Dr. Reston, VA 22091 (703) 620-0010 FM Factory Mutual Systems 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike P.O. Box 9102 Norwood, MA 02062 ~ (617) 762-4300 GA Gypsum Association 810 First St., NE, Suite 510 Washington; DC 20002 (202) 289-5440 NFPA National Fire Protection Assoc. One Batterymarch Park P.O. Box 9101 (617) 770-3000 .Quincy, MA 02269-9101 (800) 344-3555 [ridgeline ms] 01095 - 6 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 ' 11 12 13 14 i 15 16 17 ! 18 19 20 21 j 22 23 24 ! 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 ' 32 33 34 35 ~~ 36 37 38 39 ~( 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 ~ 50 ~ 51 52 53 54 55 NRCA National Roofing Contractors Assoc. 10255 W. Higgins Rd., Suite 600 ' Rosemont, IL 60018-5607 (708) 299-9070 SDI Steel Door Institute 30200 Detroit Rd. Cleveland, OH 44.145 (440) 899-0010 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Assoc. 4201 Lafayette Center Dr. Chantilly, VA 22021 (703) 803-2980 TCA Tile Council of America P.O. Box 326 Princeton, NJ 08542-0326 (609) 921-7050 UL Underwriters Laboratories 333 Pfingsten Rd. Northbrook, IL 60062 (847) 272-8800 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau P.O. Box 23145 Portland, OR 97281 (503) 639-0651 WDMA Window and Door Mfg. Assoc. 1400 E. Touhy Ave., #470 (708) 299-5200 Des Plaines, IL 60018 (800) 223-2301 WWPA Western Wood Products Assoc. Yeon Building 522 SW 5th Ave. Portland, OR 97204-2122 (503) 224-3930 Federal Government Agencies: Names and titles offederal government standard-orSpecification-producing agencies are often abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations referenced in the Contract Documents indicate names of standard- or Specification-producing agencies of the federal government. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed, but are not assured, to be accurate and up-to- date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CS Commercial Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 EPA Environmental Protection Agency 401 M St., SW Washington, DC 20460 OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration (U.S. Department of Labor) 200 Constitution Ave., NW Washington, DC 20210. ,,. { - [ridgeline ms] 01095 - 7 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS (202) 783-3238 (202) 382-2090 (202) 219-6091 01095 - 7 PS Product Standard of NBS (U.S. Department of Commerce) Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01095 (202) 783-3238 [ridgeline ms] 01095 - 8 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - 8 i SECTION 09200 -PROJECT MEETINGS '~ .1 2 3 i 4 5 6 ~: g 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 ' 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 '. 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 ' 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 i 43 44 45 46 47 48 ' 49 50 51 ;52 PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY - This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings, including, but not limited to, the following: Preconstruction conferences. Preinstallation conferences. Progress meetings. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE The Architect will schedule apre-construction conference and organizational meeting after execution of the Agreement and prior to commencement of construction activities. The purpose of the meeting is to review ... responsibilities and personnel assignments. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect, and their consultants; the Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: Tentative construction schedule: Critical work sequencing. Designation of responsible personnel. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. Procedures~for processing Applications for Payment. Distribution of Contract Documents. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Mechanical & Electrical Substitution Requests. Preparation of record documents. Use of the premises. Parking availability. Office, work, and storage areas. Equipment deliveries and priorities. Security. . Housekeeping. ~ - Working hours. Selection of weekly progress meeting day. " [ridgeline ms] 01200 - 1 ~. ~ PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 - 1. ' i _ . ______ __ ... .., . ____:.___. _ _ _ ._ : __ _ .. _ _. PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES Conduct a preinstallation conference at the Project Site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. Attendees: The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise the Architect of scheduled meeting dates. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration at each preinstallation conference, including requirements for the following: Contract Documents. Options. Related Change Orders. Purchases. Deliveries. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality-control samples. Review of mockups. . Possible conflicts. Compatibility problems. Time schedules. Weather limitations. Manufacturer's recommendations. Warranty requirements. .. Compatibility of materials. Acceptability of substrates. Temporary facilities. Space and access limitations. Governing regulations. Safety. Inspecting and testing requirements. Required performance results. Recording requirements protection. _ Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements .of each conference, and the approved schedule. Promptly distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, including the Owner and the Architect. Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date. PROGRESS MEETINGS The Architect will be responsible to conduct the meetings and record the minutes. The distribution of the minutes will be to the Owner, General Contractor, and the Architects consultants. Attendees: Those required to be in attendance will be the Owner and Architect Representatives, General Contractor's Superintendent, Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors' Representatives and any other subcontractor or supplier currently involved in the Work. 54 Agenda: Review and corrector approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items of 55 significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the 56 Project. 57 _ _ _ __ _~[ridgeline_ms) .01200 - 2 ~ PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 - 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to insure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: Interface requirements. Time. Sequences. Status of submittals. Deliveries. Off-site fabrication problems. Access. Site utilization. Temporary facilities and services. Hours of work. Hazards and risks. Housekeeping. Quality and work standards. Change Orders. Documentation of information for payment requests. 3-week projected work schedule- In addition to the Contractor's Construction Schedule, at each Progress Meeting the Contractor shall provide a 3-week projected work schedule identifying specific as-planned construction activities at specific areas of the project. This schedule shall also include the percentage complete of each identified work activity, any coordinated work activities by outside utilities and the. Owner, and planned major material deliveries. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 09200 [ridgeline ms] 01200 - 3 PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 - 3 ~~ SECTION 0133 - 0 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ' 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 2 ~ .. 3 4 ~ ,, RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other 7 Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 9 10 SUMMARY 11 12 This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product 13 Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals. ~. 15 Related Sections include the following: 16 . 17 Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other 18 . miscellaneous submittals. 19 20. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" (System Demonstration and Certification; 21 Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials; Warranties). 22 23 Division 2 through 16 Sections for submittals as required per each separate section. 24 25 ' 26 DEFINITIONS 27 28 Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. 29 ; ' 30 Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's approval. Submittals may be 31 rejected for not complying with requirements. 32 33 34 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 35 36 CAD Drawing Availability: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings are available from the Architect and associated 37 Engineers for Subcontractor's use in preparation of their submittals. These drawings will be provided in 38 "AutoCad" drawing format utilizing Release 14 or newer version. A charge of $50.00 per drawing sheet will 39 be assessed and the Electronic Information Disclaimer form, following at the end of this section, shall be i~ 40 signed by the Subcontractor using-the drawings for their submittal preparation. The signed disclaimer form ^" 41 along with the fee _must be delivered to the Architect prior to the release of any electronic drawings. 42 43 Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. ' 44 45 Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, othersubmittals,avd related 46 activities that require sequential activity. ~ ,. - ' 47 ', 48 Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will 49 not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. 50 51 Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other 52 submittals until related submittals are received. ' ' 53 54 [ridgeline ms] 01330. - 1 ~ .' SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES - -. 01330 - 1 Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. Initial Review: Allow (7) seven days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Direct Transmittal to Consultant: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted directly to Architect's Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical consultants, provide duplicate copy of transmittal to Architect. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. Resubmittal Review: Allow [4] four days for processing each resubmittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. All submittals shall be numbered sequentially. Resubmittals shall retain original number followed by letter (i.e., A .. B .. C). , Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches (100 by 125 mm) on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: Project name. Date. Name and address of Architect. Name and address of Contractor. Name and address of subcontractor. Name and address of supplier. Name of manufacturer. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Deviations: Prior to distribution to subcontractors and / or suppliers, General Contractor shall highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with .provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals without review when received from sources other than Contractor. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal. Include Contractor's certification stating that information. submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. [ridgeline ms) 01330 - 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 2 '~ t 1 Transmittal. Form:.Provide locations on form for the following information: 2 3 Project name. 4 Date. ~~ 5 _ Destination (To:). 6 Source (From:). 7 Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 8 Category and type of submittal. 9 Submittal purpose and description. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. - 10 ~ Remarks. 11 Signature of transmitter. ~ . ' 12 . 13 Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, 14 installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. ' 15 16 Show distribution on transmittal forms. 17 Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection 18 with construction. 19 20 21 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 22 23 - 24 ACTION SUBMITTALS 26 General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 27 ' 28 When possible, edge bind multiple sheet shop drawings and/or other loose leaf submittals for easier 29 handling and filing. Edge bind in appropriate sized three-ring binders, report covers, etc. Edge bind ' 30 drawings as usual. Provide submittal identification, as noted in these specifications, on the spine of 31 the binders and/or the face of the report covers. _, 32 33 34 Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 35 36 If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable 37 for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 38 39 Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 40 41 Include the following information, as applicable: 42 43 Manufacturer's written recommendations. 44 Manufacturer's product specifications. ' 45 Manufacturer's installation instructions. 46 Standard color charts. 47 ~ Manufacturer's catalog cuts. ' 48 Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. 49 Printed performance curves. 50 _Operational range diagrams. 51 - Mill reports. 52 Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. 53 Compliance with recognized trade association standards. .54 Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. 55 Application of testing agency labels and seals. 56 Notation of coordination requirements. ' 57 58 Number of Copies: Submit four (4) copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect 59 will return one (1) copy. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 60 [ridgeline ms] 01330 - 3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3 Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable: Dimensions. Identification of products. Fabrication and installation drawings. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. Templates and patterns. Schedules. Design calculations. Compliance with specified standards. Notation of coordination requirements. Notation of.dimensions established by field measurement. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm). Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows: The Architect will require 4 copies; two for the Owner, one for the Architect and one for their consultant. (i.e. Structural, Mechanical, Electrical) The total number of submittals will be 4 copies + "x" number of copies for the contractors use. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following: Generic description of Sample. Product name or name of manufacturer. Sample source. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product represented by a Sample, submit at least three (3) sets of paired units that show approximate limits of the variations. (ridgeline ms] 01330 - 4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 4 f 1 Refer to ,individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate 2 workmanship, fabrication techniques, details ofassembly, connections, operation, and similar 3 construction characteristics. 4 5 Number of Samples for Verification: Submit four (4) sets.of Samples. Architect will retain one (1) 6 Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project ' 7 Record Sample. 8 - 9 Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, 10 connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. ' 11 ; 12 Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control 13 comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample-sets may be used to determine 14 final acceptance of construction, associated with each set. 15 16 Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification 17 Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. ' 18 19 Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are 20 the property of Contractor. 21 ' 22 .Submittals Schedule: Comply with the following requirements: . 23 24 Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in order by dates required by construction ' 25 schedule.. ~ . 26 27 Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 28 ' 29 Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Article 5 of "Supplementary Conditions". 30 . 31 Subcontract List: Comply with requirements in Para. 9.2 of the General Conditions. 32 ' 33 34 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 35 36 General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. ' 37 . 38 Number of Copies: Submit three (3) copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect 39 will not return copies. 40 ` 41 Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity 42 responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or 43 other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity: ' 44 45 Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Control." 46 ' 47 Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in "Section 00800 -Supplementary 48 Conditions." 49 50 Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or ' S1 person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of 52 architects and owners, and other information specified. 53 54 Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that productcomplies ' 55 with requirements. 56 57 Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with 58 requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record 59 (PQR) on AWS forms. Include riames of firms and personnel certified. [ridgeline ms] 01330- 5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 5 Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying thatlnstallercomplies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying ,that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form; indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a 'qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for. operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: Preparation of substrates. Required substrate tolerances. Sequence of installation or erection. Required installation tolerances. Required adjustments. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. [ridgeline ms] 01330 - 6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 6 ~. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if a.ny, and term of the coverage. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Owner. If submitted to Architect, Architectwill not review this information but will return it with no action taken. PART 3 -EXECUTION CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW Review each submittal and. check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. . Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. ARCHITECT'S ACTION General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. END OF SECTION 01330 [ridgeline ms] 01330 - 7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 = 7 n ' ~ ELECTRONIC INFORMATION DISCLAIMER ' ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P.c.c.c. agrees to provide electronic information to (recipient) for (project), the electronic information identified as: ,subject to the following terms and conditions. Possession of the electronic information is evidence of recipient's acceptance of, and agreement with, these restrictions: ' 1. Due to the potential that electronic information can be modified unintentionally orotherwise, ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P.c.c.c. reserves the right to remove all indices of its ownership, name, and / or involvement from electronic information not in its possession: ' 2. The use of this electronic information is restricted to the original site and project forwhich itwas prepared. The information is proprietary and is to be used only as an aid toward the successful completion of this project by the recipient person and/or company identified below: ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P.~.c.c. has provided the electronic information solely for your convenience. This does not eliminate or reduce your ' responsibility to verify any and all information relevant to your work and responsibility on this project. Recipient shall have 14 days from receipt of the electronic information to verify compatibility, readability and appropriateness for use; ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P. L. L. C. shall not be responsible for translation errors and does not agree to maintain the electronic information beyond this time period, nor to translate 1 or reconfigure the electronic information. If errors or discrepancies are discovered, please notify our office in writing immediately. Drawings shall not be interpreted to be true scale.documents of the proposed work, nor shall they be utilized for fabrication unless written approval is first obtained by ERICKSON ' MCGOVERN, P.c.c.c. If the electronic information is being altered as part of an effort to generate as-built drawings, ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P.c.c.c. accepts no liability and/or responsibility for the accuracy of such as-built documents. Material prepared from the electronic information shall not be used for other projects, or be transferred to any other party or entity for use on this or other projects. Reuse or reproduction of the electronic information, data or documents prepared from, by or with this electronic information for any other purpose or party for which the material was not strictly intended, is prohibited, as ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P.c.c.c. retains all copyright and other legal interest in the material. In addition, all drawing information contained in the electronic information including, but not limited to, symbol '~ libraries, blocks, details, etc. may not be reproduced, sold, distributed or utilized in any form on any other project or by anyone else. 3. In addition to the other conditions and restrictions contained in this Agreement, use of the electronic information is specially limited to the following: 4. Recipient recognizes that information stored on electronic information, including, but not limited to, a computer disk prepared by ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P.c.c.c., may not be 100% compatible with their own computer system due to differences in computer hardware and software, or may be subject to translation errors. In addition, recipient recognizes that designs, plans and data stored on electronic information, including but not limited to a computer disk, may be subject to undetectable alteration and/or uncontrollable deterioration. If, for any reason, a conflict occurs between information contained in the electronic information and stamped, signed documents, the information on signed or stamped documents shall govern. ' 5. In light of the foregoing, the recipient recognizes and acknowledges that the use of such electronic information will be at their sole risk and without any liability or legal exposure to ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P.c.c.c. No warranties of any nature, whether express or implied, shall attach to the electronic information or the information contained thereon. Furthermore, recipient hereby releases and shall, to the fullest extent permitted by law, defend, indemnify and hold harmless ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P.c.c.c. from any and all claims, damages, losses and expenses ("Claims")including attorney's fees arising out, or resulting ' from the use of such electronic information, including, but not limited to, Claims involving the completeness or accuracy of any data or information contained therein. Electronic Information Disclaimer Page 1 of 2 ELECTRONIC INFORMATION DISCLAIMER 6. Notwithstanding ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P. c. L. c.'s agreement to provide electronic information pursuant to this Agreement, nothing shall be construed to create contractual privity or benefit between recipient and ERICKSON MCGOVERN; P.~.~.c. except as is necessary for ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P.~.~.c. to enforce these express, limited terms and conditions. 7. Use of arSy information or data in the accompanying electronic information signifies your acceptance of the above statements without exceptions and/or modifications. Date: Recipient Signature Print name in full Electronic Information Disclaimer Page 2 of 2 'i SECTION 01400 -QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES PART1-GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality-control services Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by an independent testing laboratory. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of standard products. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. , Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements. RESPONSIBILITIES Owner Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated the Owner shall be responsible for the selection of the independent testing laboratory from firms submitting proposals to perform the inspections, tests, and other quality-control services as specified. Cost: The cost for inspections and testing as specified in this section shall be paid by the Owner. General Contractor: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and similar services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the Architect and testing laboratory not less than 24 hours in advance of operations to permitassignment of personnel. Contractor responsibilities include, but are not limited to, the following: Provide access to the Work. Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. Provide facilities for storage and curing of test samples. Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency. Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site. [ridgeline ms] 01400 - 1 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01400 - 1 Testing Laboratory Responsibilities: The testing laboratory shall engage a qualified special inspector who shall observe the work assigned for conformance with the approved design drawings and specifications, and make tests required by the Uniform Building Code, Section 1701, and other requirements for special inspections required by Codes and Ordinances for local County and/or City agencies. The special inspector is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. The special inspector shall not perform any duties of the Contractor. The special inspector shall furnish inspection reports to the Building Official, the Engineer and Architect of record, and other designated persons. All discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the contractor for correction, then, if uncorrected, to the proper design authority and to the building official. FINAL REPORT. The special inspector shall submit a final signed report stating whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of the inspector's knowledge, in conformance with the approved plans and specifications and the applicable workmanship provisions of the Building Code, under which this project was designed, and as adopted by Thurston County. COUNTY INSPECTIONS. These requirements for special inspection do not relieve the contractor's responsibility to schedule inspections by the county building inspector before concealing any work. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections, tests, or other quality- control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was Contractor's responsibility. The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the Contractor's responsibility where required tests performed on original construction indicated noncompliance with Contract Document requirements. Coordination: Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to~accommodate inspections and tests. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar activities. SUBMITTALS The independent testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection, test, or similar service to the Architect, Structural Engineer, Contractor and Building Official. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are not limited to, the following: Date of issue. Project title and number. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. (ridgeline ms] 01400 - 2 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01400 - 2 1 Designation of the Work and test method. 2 3 4 Identification of product and Specification Section. . 5 Complete inspection or test data. , 6 ' 7 Test results and an interpretation of test results. 8 9 Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing. 10 11 Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with 12 Contract Document requirements. 13 ' 14 Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 15 16 Recommendations on retesting. - 18 17 19 QUALITY ASSURANCE ~' 21 Qualifications for Service Aoencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent 22 testing laboratories, that are prequalified as complying with WABO requirements and that specialize in the 23 types of inspections and tests to be performed. 24 t 25 Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized by 26 authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the Project is located. 27 28 • t 29 PART 2 =PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 32 ~ PART 3 -EXECUTION 33 ' 34 35 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS (GENERAL WORK CONTRACT ' 36 37 Soils Compaction: Make tests at jobsite as work proceeds as described under Section 02200 -Earthwork. 38 ' 39 Asphalt Pavinq: Make tests at job site as work proceeds as described under Section 02511 -Asphalt 40 Concrete Paving. 41 42 Structural Concrete: Perform. tests to concrete as required under "Quality Control" paragraph of 43 Section 03300 -Cast-In-Place Concrete. 44 45 Bolts Installed in Concrete: Inspection and observation during the placement of concrete or e ox around b lt 46 p y o s in accordance with UBC Section 1701.5.2. 47 48 Reinforcing Steel: Inspection of placement of reinforcing steel as required per UBC Section 1701.5.4. 49 . 50 Structural Masonry: Inspection and observations of listed masonry operations. See Section 04200- Unit 51 Masonry for detailed requirements. 52 53 Mortar: Type "S"mortar. Design mortar proportions. Make compressive strength tests of mortar cubes, three 54 each day's work, in accordance with ASTM 270' Par. 10b using ASTM C91 methods. 55 56 Structural Steel Welding: Inspection and testing of welds on site and at fabrication plant as described under 57 Section 05120 -Structural Steel and Section 05500 -Metal Fabrication. ' [ridgeline ms] 01400 - 3 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01400 - 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 High-Strength Bolting: Periodic inspection of A325 and A490 bolts in accordance with nationally recognized standards and requirements of UBC Section 1701:5.6. Epoxy Bolts and Expansion Anchors: To be inspected per ICBO Evaluation Report listed on Structural Drawings. Geogrid Placement: Owner's testing lab to perform periodic inspections of placement of the geogrid and structural fill per the written recommendations of the grid manufacturer. Structural Observation: To be performed per UBC Section 1702 (Structural Observation) by Engineer of Record for this project. Plywood Shear Wall and Plywood Diaphragm Nailing: Periodic visual nailing inspections. Built-Up Roofing: Provide full-time inspection of roofing and base flashing. Make not less than one cut-out 18 inches square minimum for each 100 squares of each different type roofing; check weight per square foot for specification conformance. Firestopping: Inspecting agency employed and paid by Owner will examine completed firestopping to determine, in general, if it is being installed in compliance with requirements. Inspecting agency will report observations promptly and ih writing to Contractor and Architect. REPAIR AND PROTECTION General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect repaired construction. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services. END .OF SECTION 01400 [ridgeline ms] 01400 - 4 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01400 - 4 SECTION 01500 -CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS ~' 1 ~ PART 1 -GENERAL 2 3 ' 4 RELATED:D000MENTS - 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other 7 Division 1 Specification_Sections, apply to this Section. '' 8 9 10 SUMMARY 11 12 This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls, including temporary 13 utilities, support facilities, and security.and protection. - 14 : ,~ 15 TemporaN utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 16 17 Water service and distribution. 18 19 ~ Temporary electric power and light. 20 21 ~~ Temporary heat. t 22 23 Telephone service. 24 ' 25 Temporary toilets. 26 27 Drinking water. 28 29 Temporary site drainage. ' 30 31 Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 32 33 Field offices and storage sheds. 34 35 Access road. 1 36 37 Project sign.. 38 39 Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the, following: 40 41 Temporary fire protection. 42 43 Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 44 45 Construction fence. 46 47 Covered walkway. 48 49 Environmental protection.. 1 50 ~ ' 51 [ridgeline ms] 01500 - 1 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 1 Miscellaneous temporary requirements include, but are not limited to, the following: Dust control. Pollution control. Erosion control. Vermin control: SUBMITTALS Temporary Utilities: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of the date established for commencement of the Work, submit a schedule indicating implementation and termination of each temporary utility. QUALITY ASSURANCE Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following: Building code requirements. Environmental protection regulations. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations," ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition," and NECA "National Electric Code". PROJECT CONDITIONS Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility. At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site. PART2-PRODUCTS MATERIALS General: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide- materials suitable for use intended. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities. [ridgeline msJ 01500 - 2 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 2 ~ 1 Constr ti F P - uc on ence: rovide 0.120-inch (3-mm-) thick, galvanized 2-inch (50-mm) chainlink fabric fencing 2 6 feet (2 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) I.D. for line posts and 2-1/2 inches 3 4 (64 mm) I.D. for corner posts. 5 6 EQUIPMENT 7 8 General: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged 9 , previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for. use intended. ' 10 11 Heating Units: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM, or another 12 .recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed. 13 ' ' 14 Field Office Building: Provide substantial weathertight.office building with wooden stairs and 5-foot by 5-foot 15 platform with guardrails and handrails meeting applicable building codes, located on premises where directed. 16 Include one room of approximately 120 square feet for Architect-Contractor use. Provide for joint use of 17 . telephone and facsimile machine with Contractor's. superintendent. Provide wood floor above ground, door ' 18 with cylinder lock, and glazed windows. Equip with shelving, plan rack, plan table, stools and chairs as 19 , required for normal job administration. Provide adequate heat, electric light, and janitor service. Remove 20 building from site on completion of contract, or sooner if desired. 21 ' 22 Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained, single-occupant toilet units of the chemical type. Provide 23 units properly vented and fully enclosed with aglass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent _ 24 material. ^ 26 Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class Afire extinguishers for temporary offices 27 and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class ABC, dry-chemical 28 extinguishers or a combihation of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for the exposures. 29 30 Complywith NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location 31 and class of fire exposure. ' 32 33 34 PART 3 -EXECUTION 35 36 37 INSTALLATION 38 ' 39 Use aualifled personnel for installation of temporaryfacilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project 40 adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities 41 as required. 42 .. 43 Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay.. Maintain and modify as required. Do not 44 remove until facilities are no longer needed or as directed by Architect. 45 46 47 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION 48 49 General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing ' S0 service. Comply with company recommendations. 51 52 Arrange with company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to ' S3 - make connections for temporary services. 54 55 .Water for Construction Purposes: Contractor shall furnish water for construction. The utilization of required ' 56 on-site fire hydrants with the addition of a temporary water meter would bean acceptable source. Contractor ' [ridgeline ms) 01500 - 3 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 3 should coordinate with the water district for meter hook-up and local fire marshal for approval to use fire hydrant for water source. Temporary Electrical Lighting & Power: Lighting and electrical power shall be provided in all spaces of the building(s). Temporary lighting intensity shall be sufficient to allow construction, finishing and inspection to be accomplished without the addition of supplemented lighting. Temporary.l.ighting wiring shall be installed overhead, not with cords strung on floor. Provide a minimum of (1,) duplex receptacle for temporary power for every 1,000 sq. ft. of floor area. Care shall be exercised in the installation of power cords such that cords are run overhead across corridors, walkways and other heavy traffic areas. Remove temporary lighting and power materials and equipment and their connections at Final Completion or sooner if approved or directed. All charges issued by the local electrical power company for the electricity consumed during the total construction process up to Final Completion shall be paid by the General Contractor. This includes electric power from the building's temporary and/or permanent distribution systems. All costs relating to the supplying and installing of all equipment and materials necessary for the distribution of temporary lighting and power shall be paid by the Electrical Subcontractor. Temporary Heat: Temporary heat shall be provided by the General Contractor to protect materials and equipment from dampness and cold as well as for building dry-out. The heating equipment designed for the building shall NOT be used for this purpose. The General Contractor shall provide vented, self contained, LP- gas, electric, or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control and such units shall be fire safe. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander heating units is prohibited. All costs for temporary heating shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor, shall not allow any fan-driven supply or exhaust device to be operated during construction without the specific approval of the Architect and the Mechanical-Engineer. See technical divisions for temperatures required for work of the various trades. Temporary Telephone: Provide non-coin-box telephone connected to local exchange. Install when work is started; maintain until full completion; pay all charges. Allow all those connected with the work to use, provided they pay for toll calls. Separate Telephone Lines: Provide additional telephone lines for the following: Provide a dedicated telephone line for a fax machine in the field office. Facsimile (FAX) Machine: Furnish fax machine atjob site fortransmissionsnd receiving of document copies and messages over phone line. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units for all those connected with the work. Locate where directed when work is started; keep in sanitary condition. Remove when directed by Architect and disinfect the premises. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide in not less than two locations, for all those connected with the work, containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking-water units, including paper supply. Temporary Site Drainage: Provide and maintain temporary ditches around site to keep water away from the buildings and/or site improvement work. When final grading has been completed, fill temporary ditches and compact fill material in manner specified under Division 2 for compaction of fills. SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION Locate field offices and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. Remove support facility from site on completion of contract, or sooner if directed. Access Road: Contractor to provide and maintain on-site access roads or drives as required for delivery of materials to building and/or material storage area on site. Gravel surface of road as necessary to support the [ridgeline mss 01500 - 4 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 4 1 required temporary loads; remove gravel where interfering with finish grading, seeding, sodding or planting. 2 or other site improvements. 3 4 5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION 6 7 Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and 8 maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and 9 controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and NFPA 241 1 10 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations," or follow the requirements 11 of the authority having jurisdiction, whichever is most restrictive. 12 .. 13 Notify the local fire department or fire marshal, if applicable, seven (7) days in advance of schedule for ' 14 all fire alarm shutdowns and startup. Provide fire watch during periods fire alarm is disabled. 15 16 Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective fortheir intended purpose, but not less than one ~ 17 extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 19 Maintain unobstructed. access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection facilities, 20 stairways, and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas. 21 'I 22 Providesupervisionofweldingoperations,combustion-type temporary heating units, andsimilarsources 23 of fire ignition. ' 24 25 Security: Contractor is responsible for security of Construction. Areas and its contents during construction 26 when not otherwise occupied by the Owner. Maintain existing security system in operation during entire 27 construction period. Provide security watch of Owner's premises during .periods security system is disabled 28 due to the Contractor's activities. ' 29 30. Barricades. Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of 31 structurallyadequateharricades, fences and walks. Paintwith appropriate colors, graphics, and warnirig signs n ' 32 to i form personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed,. 33 provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. The barricades, fences, and walks shall be located 34 so as to not block any fire exits or cause dangerous situations for the building occupants. 35 ' 36 Construction Fence: The General Contractor shall install a temporary chain link fence. and gates in location 37 and height as indicated on drawings. Coordinate with local fire department for gate sizes and locations. Install 38 in a manner that will prevent people or animals from easily entering the site, except by the entry gates. 39 40 Covered Walkway: Erect a structurally adequate, protective covered walkway for passage of persons along 41 the adjacent public street. Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with 42 regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 43 44 Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing. Provide wood plank overhead decking, 45 protective plywood enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, lights, safe and well-drained ' 46 walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage. Extend the back wall beyond the 47 structure to complete the enclosure fence. Paint and maintain in a manner acceptable to the Owner and 48 the Architect. - 49 ' 50 51 MISCELLANEOUS TEMPORARY REQUIREMENTS 52 53 Dust Control: Provide positive methods and apply dust control materials to minimize raising dust from 54 dispersing into the atmosphere. 55 56 Pollution Control: Provide methods, means and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water or ' S7 atmosphere. Allow no discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. [ridgeline ms] 01500 - 5 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 5 Erosion Control: Plan and execute construction and earthwork by methods of control surface drainage from cuts and fills, and from borrow and waste disposal areas, to prevent erosion and sedimentation. Hold the areas of bare soil exposed atone time to a minimum. Provide temporary control measures such as berms, dikes and drains. Construct fills and waste areas by selective placement to eliminate surface silts or clays which will erode. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect any evidence of the start of erosion, apply corrective measures as required to control erosion. Vermin Control: Provide rodent and insect control as necessary to prevent infestation of construction or storage areas. Employ methods and materials not adversely affecting conditions at the site or on adjoining materials. Submit an informational copy of the proposed pesticide program to Owner with a copy to Architect. Clearly indicate: The area or areas to be treated;. The pesticides to be used, with a copy of the manufacturer's printed instructions, and;' The pollution preventative measures to be employed. The use of any pesticide shall be in full accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. Leave premises clean, and free of any infestation at time of Substantial Completion. TERMINATION AND REMOVAL Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended. All surtaces, both exterior and interior, which have been damaged or deteriorated due to the temporary facilities, shall be repaired or restored to the original condition, or better than their condition was, prior to the installation of the temporary facility. END OF SECTION 01500 [ridgeline ms] 01500 - 6 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 6 ,~ 1 2 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 14 15 16 17 ' 18 19 20 21 ~22 23 24 25 26 27 ' 28 29 30 31 ' 32 33 34 ' 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 ' 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 ' S0 51 52 ' S3 54 SECTION 01510 -SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS Following is a list of Drawings, and the same are hereby made a part of the contract: 0.00 PROJECT INFORMATION SHEET A0.01 CODE ANALYSIS SHEET A0.02 OVERALL FLOOR PLAN -DRINKING FOUNTAINS CIVIL DRAWINGS C0.0 SITE PLAN/ SHEET INDEX C1.0 EXISTING CONDITIONS & DEMOLITION PLAN C1.1 EROSION CONTROL & SITE PROTECTION PLAN C1.2 SITE LAYOUT PLAN C1.3 SITE LAYOUT PLAN C1.4 STORM DRAINAGE AND EROSION CONTROL DETAILS AND NOTES C1.5 ROADWAY PAVING AND CURB DETAILS C2.0 STORM AND GRADING PLAN W/ LEGEND C2.1 STORM AND GRADING C2.2 STORM AND GRADING C2.3 STORM AND GRADING C2.4 STORM AND GRADING C2:5 STORM AND GRADING C2.6 STORM AND GRADING C2.7 STORM AND GRADING C2.8 SERVICE YARD LAYOUT AND GRADING PLAN C2.9 A-LINE PROFILE C2.10 B-LINE PROFILE C2.11 C-LINE PROFILE C2.12 D-LINE PROFILE C2.13 STORM DRAINAGE DETAILS AND NOTES C2.14 STREET AND PAVING DETAILS AND NOTES C3.0 WATER SYSTEM PLAN C3.1 SANITARY SEWER PLAN C3.2 NOTES C3.3 WATER DETAILS C3.4 WATER DETAILS C3.5 STEP DETAILS C3.6 STEP TANK DETAILS C4.0 SIGNING AND STRIPING PLAN LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS L1.0 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN SHEET INDEX L1.1- L1.7 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN L2.0 LANDSCAPE PLAN INDEX & SCHEDULE L2.1-L2.7 LANDSCAPE PLAN L3.0 IRRIGATION PLAN SHEET INDEX & SCHEDULE L3.1-L3.7 IRRIGATION PLAN [ridgeline msl 01510 - 1 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS 01510 - 1 L4.0-L4.6 DETAILS L4.7 RAMP PROFILES AND SECTIONS ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS A1.01 SITE PLAN A1.02 ENLARGED SITE PLAN A1.03 ENLARGED COURTYARD PLAN A1.04 -FIELD HOUSE PLAN & SECTION A1.05 SITE DETAILS A1.06 SITE DETAILS A2.00 OVERALL FLOOR PLAN A2.01 FLOOR PLAN AREA 100 A2.01A ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN A2.02 FLOOR PLAN AREA 200 A2.03 FLOOR PLAN AREA 300 A2.04 FLOOR PLAN AREA 400 A2.05 FLOOR PLAN AREA 500 A2.06 FLOOR PLAN AREA 600 A2.07 SPORTS COURT LAYOUT A2.07A SPORTS COURT LAYOUT A2.08 WALL/CEILING TYPES A2.09 ENLARGED RESTROOM PLANS A2.10 MEZZANINE PLAN A2.11 ROOF PLAN A2.12 FINISH FLOOR PLAN A2.13 ENLARGED FINISH FLOOR PLANS A2.14 ENLARGED FINISH FLOOR PLANS A3.0-A3.07 ~ EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A4.01 BUILDING SECTIONS A4.02 BUILDING SECTIONS A4.03 BUILDING SECTIONS A4.04 BUILDING SECTIONS A4.05 BUILDING SECTIONS A4.06-A4.16 WALL SECTIONS A4.17 ENLARGED SECTIONS A5.01 DOOR SCHEDULE A5.02 FINISH SCHEDULE A5.03 DOOR & WINDOW TYPES A5.04 LOUVER TYPES & SCHEDULE A6:01 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AREA 100 A6.02 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AREA 200 A6.03 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AREA 300 A6.04 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AREA 400: A6.05 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AREA 500 A6.06 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AREA 600 A7.01-A7.17 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A8.01 EXTERIOR DETAILS A8.02 ROOF DETAILS A8.03 DOOR & WINDOW DETAILS [ridgeline ms] 01510 - 2 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS 01510 - 2 ,~ 1 A8.04 EXTERIOR DETAILS 2 A8.05 INTERIOR DETAILS ' 3 4 A8.06 A8.07 INTERIOR DETAILS INTERIOR DETAILS 5 A8.08 INTERIOR DETAILS 6 A8.09 INTERIOR DETAILS 7 A8.10 EXTERIOR DETAILS 8 A8.11 EXTERIOR DETAILS 9 10 11 FOOD SERVICE DRAWINGS 12 FS1.1 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT FLOOR PLAN 13 FS1.2 FOOD SERVICE OUTSIDE STORAGE PLUMBING PLAN ' 14 FS1.3 FOOD SERVICE OUTSIDE STORAGE ELECTRICAL/REFRIG. PLAN 15 16 FS2.1 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT FLOOR PLAN 17 FS2.2 - FOOD SERVICE PLUMBING PLAN 18 FS2.3 FOOD SERVICE MECHANICAUDEPRESSION PLAN 19 FS2.4 FOOD SERVICE ELECTRICAUREFRIGERATION PLAN 20 21 FS3.1 FOOD SERVICE WALK-IN DETAILS ' 22 FS3.2 FOOD SERVICE WALK-IN DETAILS 23 FS3.3 FOOD SERVICE FABRICATION DETAILS 24 FS3.4 FOOD SERVICE FABRICATION DETAILS ' 25 26 STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS 27 28 S0.01-S0.05 .GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES ' 29 30 S1.01 FOUNDATION PLAN -AREA 100 31 S1.02 FOUNDATION PLAN -AREA 200 ' 1 32 S1.03 FOUNDATION PLAN -AREA 300 33 S1.04 FOUNDATION PLAN -AREA 400 34 S1.05 FOUNDATION PLAN -AREA 500 35 S1.06 FOUNDATION. PLAN -AREA 600 36 S1.07 FIELD HOUSE PLAN.AND DETAILS 37 38 S2.01 FOUNDATION DETAILS 39 S2.02 FOUNDATION DETAILS 40 S2.03 FOUNDATION DETAILS 41 42 S3.01 MEZZANINE FRAMING PLAN -AREA 100 1 43 S3.02 MEZZANINE FRAMING PLAN -AREA 200 44 S3.03 MEZZANINE FRAMING PLAN -AREA 300 45 S3.04 MEZZANINE FRAMING PLAN -AREA 400 ' 46 S3.05 MEZZANINE FRAMING PLAN -AREA 500 47 S3.06 MEZZANINE FRAMING PLAN -AREA 600 48 S3.07 ROOF FRAMING PLAN -AREA 100 49 S3.08 ROOF FRAMING PLAN -AREA 200 ' 50 S3.09 ROOF FRAMING PLAN -AREA 300 51 S3.10 ROOF FRAMING PLAN -AREA 400 52 S3.11 ROOF FRAMING. PLAN -AREA 500 53 S3.12 ROOF FRAMING PLAN -AREA 600 1 54 55 S4.01 MASONRY DETAILS S6 S4.02 MASONRY DETAILS ' 57 [ridgeline ms] 01510 - 3 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS 01510 - 3 S5.01 WALL FRAMING DETAILS S5.02 WALL FRAMING DETAILS S5.03 CAT WALK FRAMING DETAILS S5.04 WALL FRAMING DETAILS S6.01-S6.07 ROOF FRAMING DETAILS MECHANICAL DRAWINGS M1.01 MECHANICAL LEGEND AND SCHEDULES M1.02 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M1.03 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M1.04 PLUMBING SCHEDULES M1.05 PLUMBING LEGEND AND SCHEDULES M2.01 FOUNDATION PLAN AREA 100 M2.02 FOUNDATION PLAN AREA 200 M2.03 FOUNDATION PLAN AREA 300 M2.04 FOUNDATION PLAN AREA 400 M2.05 FOUNDATION PLAN AREA 500 M2.06 FOUNDATION PLAN AREA 600 M3.01 PLUMBING PLAN AREA 100 M3.02 PLUMBING PLAN AREA 200 M3.03 PLUMBING PLAN AREA 300 M3.04 PLUMBING PLAN AREA 400 M3.05 PLUMBING PLAN AREA 500 M3.06 PLUMBING PLAN AREA 600 M3.07 ENLARGED KITCHEN AND BOILER ROOM PLAN M3.08 MECHANICAL SERVICE YARD PLAN M4.01 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AREA 100 M4.02 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AREA 200 M4.03 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AREA 300 M4.04 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AREA 400 M4.05 .REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AREA 500 M4.06 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AREA 600 M5.01 FURRED CEILING PLAN AREA 100 M5.02 FURRED CEILING PLAN AREA 200 M5.03 FURRED CEILING PLAN AREA 300 M5.04 FURRED CEILING PLAN AREA 400 M5.05 FURRED CEILING PLAN AREA 500 M5.06 FURRED CEILING PLAN AREA 600 M6.01 MECHANICAL MEZZ PLAN AREA 100, 200 AND 300 M6.02 MECHANICAL MEZZ PLAN AREA 400 M6.03 MECHANICAL MEZZ PLAN AREA 500, 600 M7.01-M7.04 MECHANICAL DETAILS M7.05 AIR HANDLING UNIT DETAILS M8.01-M8.05 CONTROL DIAGRAMS M9.01-M9.02 FIRE PROTECTION FLOOR PLAN (ridgeline ms) 01510 - 4 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS 01510 - 4 ~~ 1 2 3 4 5 6 ,. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ' 17 18 19 20 1 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 ' 28 29 30 31 ' 32 . 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 ' 42 43 44 45 ' 46 47 ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS E1.00 ELECTRICAL LEGEND & LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE E1.01 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E1.02 ELECTRICAL SITE DETAILS E2.00 MECHANICAL MEZZANINE LIGHTING PLAN E2.01 AREA 100 LIGHTING PLAN E2.02 . AREA 200 LIGHTING PLAN E2.03 AREA 300 LIGHTING PLAN - E2.04 AREA 400 LIGHTING PLAN E2.05 AREA 500 LIGHTING PLAN E2.06 AREA 600 LIGHTING PLAN E3.00 MECHANICAL MEZZANINE POWER PLAN E3.OOa EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE E3.01 AREA 100 POWER PLAN E3.02 AREA 200 POWER PLAN E3.03 AREA 300 POWER PLAN E3.04 AREA 400 POWER PLAN E3.05 AREA 500 POWER PLAN E3.06 AREA 600 POWER PLAN E4.00 MECHANICAL MEZZ SYSTEMS PLAN E4.01 AREA 100 SYSTEMS PLAN E4.02 AREA 200 SYSTEMS PLAN E4.03 AREA 30'0 SYSTEMS PLAN E4.04 AREA 400 SYSTEMS PLAN E4.05 AREA 500 SYSTEMS PLAN E4.06 AREA 600 SYSTEMS PLAN E5.01 PARTIAL ELECTRICAL KITCHEN PLAN E5.02 PARTIAL ELECTRICAL KITCHEN PLAN E5.03 THEATRICAL LIGHTING PLAN E5.04 THEATRICAL LIGHTIN DETAILS E6.01. POWER RISER DIAGRAM E6.02-E6.05 PANEL SCHEDULES E7.01-E7.06 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E7.03 ELECTRICAL DETAILS Prior to bidding, check Drawing Set used to make sure that all Drawings listed above are included in the Set. Failure to do so shall not be considered a cause for extra compensation. END OF SECTION 01510 [ridgeline ms] 01510 - 5 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS 01510 - 5 ' ~ 1 SECTION 01600 -- EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 2 3 , 4 PART1-GENERAL . 5 . 6 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 7 8 A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. 9 10 B. Cutting and patching. ' 11 12 C. Surveying for laying out the work. 13 14 D. Cleaning and protection. 15 16 E. Safety Procedures. 17 18 1.02 RE LATED SECTIONS 19 20 A. Section 00420 -Substitution Procedures. 21 22 B. . Section 01330 - Submittals Procedures. 23 24 C. Section 01400 -Quality Control Services: Testing and inspection procedures. 25 26 D. Section 01500 -Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Exterior enclosures 27 , temporary heating/cooling/ventilating facilities, and control of hazardous materials ' 28 . 29 E. Section 01700 -Project Closeout: Project record documents, operation and maintenance 30 data, warranties and bonds. 31 ' 32 F. Section 02300 -Earthwork:' Rough and finished grades. 33 34 1.03 SUBMITTALS 35 36 A. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting 37 survey work. 38 1. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and 39 locations of the work are' in conformance with Contract Documents. -40 2. Submit surveys and survey logs as for the project record. 41 42 B. Cutting and. Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which 43 affects: 44 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 45 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element ' 46 . 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of'any operational element. 47 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements 48 . 5. :Work of Owner's Name or separate Contractor. 49 50 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS 51 52 A. For survey work employ a larid surveyor registered in State of Washington and acceptable ' S3 to Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in 54 the form of an Insurance Certificate. 55 ^ 56 [ridgeline ms] 01600-1 ~ EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01600-1 1 B. For field engineering employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific 2 service on Project, licensed in the State in which the Project is located. 3 4 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS 5 6 A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain 7 pumping equipment. 8 9 B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect 10 site from soil erosion. 11 12 C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent 13 accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. 14 15 D. Dust Control: See Section 01500 -Temporary Controls 16 17 E. Erosion and Sediment Control: See Section 01500 -Temporary Controls 18 19 F. Pest and Rodent Control: See Section 01500 -Temporary Controls 20 21 G. Pollution Control: See Section 01500 -Temporary Controls 22 23 24 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 25 26 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS 27 28 A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for 29 patching and extending work. 30 31 B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products 32 where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. 33 34 C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for 35 substitution described in Section 00420. 36 37 38 PART 3 -EX ECUTION 39 40 3.01 EXAMINATION 41 42 A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent 43 work. Beginning new work means acceptance of existing conditions. 44 45 B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work 46 being applied or attached. 47 48 C. Examihe and verify specific conditions described in individual, specification sections. 49 50 D. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct 51 locations. 52 53 [ridgeline ms] 01600-2 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01600-2 . -. 1 E. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work,- includin 9 2 ~ elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering 3 existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work.. Beginning of cutting or 4 ~ patching means acceptance of existing conditions. ~. 5 - 6 3.02 PREPARATION 7 8 - A. Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work 9 and finishes. , 10 1 11 . ` B. Clean substrate surtaces prior to applying next material or substance. . 12 13 C. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. ~ 14 ~ 15 D. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior 16 to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 17 ~ 18 3.03 LAYING OUT THE WORK - ' 19 , 20 A. Verify locations of survey contro! points prior to starting work. , 21 22 1. Verify layout information on Drawings, in relation to property survey, existing ~ . benchmarks and field conditions before proceeding to layout Work. Locate and protect 23 ~ existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference points 'during 24 construction: - 25 , 26 B. Prom tl noti Architect of an dis p y fY y crepancies discovered. 27 ' 28 C. Control datum for survey is that indicated on Drawings. 29 1. Reference Points: Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without 30 prior .written .approval. Prorrmptly report lost or destroyed reference points, or 31 requirements to relocate reference points because of necessary change iri grades or 32 locations. Promptly replace lost or destroyed project coritrol points. Base 33 . replacements on original survey control points. Establish and maintain a minimum of 34 ~ two permanent .benchmarks: on the site, referenced to' data established by survey 1 35 control -points. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data on 36 , Project Record Documents. 37 ` 38 3 9 D. Protect survey. control..points prior to starting sitework; ;preserve permanent reference. ; . points during construction. 40 41 E. Promptly report to Architect :the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation 42 required because of changes in grades or other reasons. ~ 43 - 44 45 F. .Replace dislocated -survey control points based on original survey control. Make no ~ changes without prior written notice to Architect.. 1 46 47 G. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. 48 1. Performance: - 49 a. Layout: Working from lines and levels established by property survey establish i 50 , benchmarks, control points, and markers to set lines and levels at each story of 51 construction (such as slabs, steel bearings,' and imbeds) and elsewhere as 52 S3 needed to properly locate each element of Project. Calculate -and measure required. dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale 54 Drawings to determine dimensions. 55 1) Inform: Advise. entities engaged in construction activities of marked lines 56 . , ahd levels .provided for`their use. . S7 2) Check: As construction proceeds, check every major. element for line level 58 , and plumb. 59 [ridgeline msj 01600-3 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01600-3 r 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 2. Surveyor's Log: Maintain surveyor's log of control and other survey Work. Make this log available for reference. a. Deviations: Record deviations from. required lines and levels, and advise Architect when deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On Project Record Drawings, record deviations that are accepted and not corrected. b.. Dimensions: Show sizes, locations, angles, and elevations of buildings and sitework. 3. Site Improvements: Locate and layout site improvements, including detention ponds and county required certified pond volumes, pavements, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement, inclyding detention ponds and volumes plus utility slopes and invert elevations by instrumentation- and similar appropriate means. Confirm execution of Contract Document requirements. 4. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and layout batter boards for structures, building foundations, column grids, floor levels, and' control points for lines and levels required, including mechanical and electrical work. 5. Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing structures, utility poles, lines, services or other appurtenances located in, or affected by construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction. 6. ,Final Property Survey: Before Substantial Completion, prepare survey showing significant features o~f construction additions (real property) for Project. Include certification on survey, signed by Surveyor, to effect that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project area accurately positioned as shown on survey. 7. Project Photographs: Photograph with 35-mm camera concealed utilities (services and distributions) located in ground, under floors,. and in building superstructure. These include, but are not limited to: civil/mechanical/electrical piping, ducting, conduit, and wiring from sources off-site to equipment and device terminal points on site and at or in structures. Furnish one (1) 3 x 5 print, plus negative of each photo. Number and describe work in~ each photo, place in plastic sleeves and organize in screw post-type binder with key plan drawing locating each photo. Exhibit concealed utility photos at Progress Meeting and submit as records. H. .Establish elevations, lines and ,levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations; slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3: Building, foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations. I. Periodically verify layouts by same means. J. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. K. Existing Utilities and Equipment: Existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify existence and location , of underground utilities and other construction. Prior to construction, verify location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer and water service piping. 3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Inspection of Conditions: . 1. Require installer of each Work component to inspect both substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in acceptable manner. Initiation of installation will confirm , installer's acceptance of workplace for Work to proceed. [ridgeline ms] 01600-4 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01600-4 ' 1 2. Slab Moisture: 2 a. Monitor moisture content of concrete floor slabs which will receive finish flooring; 3 :such as wood, vinyl composition tile, vinyl tile, vinyl sheet, linoleum, ,carpet, 4 poured-in-place polyurethane and special flooring. Perform moisture tests by two 5 methods; half by radio wave method with hand held flat radio transmitter (Tramex 6 ~ Concrete Moisture Encounter, or approved) laid on floor and other half per ASTM 7 E96, Desiccant method with anhydrous calcium chloride; one test per 1,000 SF, 8 on weekly basis during sixty (60) day period prior to scheduled flooring 9 ~ ~ installation. Sixty (60) day period ray be reduced when mutually agreed by 10 Owner/Architect/Contractor .that phasing requires shorter period. If moisture 11 content of slab exceeds flooring manufacturer's required limits, typically 2.5 to 3 12 lbs. of water/24-hours/1,000 SF, provide methods to reduce moisture content 13 , such as closing off areas and using ventilating, heating, and/or dehumidifying 14 equipment, or other acceptable procedures, as necessary to achieve maximum 15 limits in time for scheduled flooring installation. Review drying procedures with 16 Architect prior to initiation to ensure gradual application of mechanical methods. 17 Cracking, crazing, curling, or related damage to concrete from overly aggressive 18 application of drying or heating techniques will require replacement of concrete 19 slabs. Owner's testing agency may also spot test for moisture. Install no finish 20 ~ flooring on slabs until moisture in concrete complies with above criteria. 21 ,, 22 B. InstalLProducts as specified in individual sections. 23 24 C. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. ' 25 . 26 D. When existing .finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not 27 possible, terminate existing surface along a straight. line at a natural line of division and 28 make recommendation to Architect. 29 30 E. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework 31 floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. 32 33 F. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs in existing work, submit 34 ~ recommendation for providing a smooth. transition for Architect review and request 35 instructions. 36 37 G. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finish: Refinish trim as required. 38 39 ~ H. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated roorims and spaces, to specified 40 condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. 41 42 I. Re-cover and refinish work that exposes. mechanical and electrical work exposed 43 accidentally during the work. 44 45 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING 46 47 A. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover . 48 work to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non- 49 conforming work, to'remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to 50 provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute 51 patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other 52 work. 53 1. Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to 54 Division 15 and Division 16 Sections for other requirements and' limitations applicable 55 to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. 56 2. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a 57 manner that would reduce their load-carrying capacity orload-deflection ratio. 58 ' [ridgeline ms) 01600-5 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01600-5 1 3. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or 2 safety related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to 3 perform as intended, or result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life 4 or safety. 5 4. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed to the exterior or in 6 occupied spaces, in a manner that would, ~ in the Architect's opinion, reduce the 7 building's aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. 8 Remove and replace Work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 9 10 B. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide 11 appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. 12 1. Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and 13 conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed. Take corrective 14 action before proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered. 15 a. Before proceeding, meet at the site with parties involved in cutting and patching, 16 including- mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential 17 interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts 18 before proceeding. 19 2. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. 20 3. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and .patching to prevent 21 damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the 22 Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. 23 a. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to 24 adjoining areas. 25 b. Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit or duct 26 work ~ serving the building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated until 27 provisions have been made to bypass them. 28 c. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply 29 with the original installer's recommendations. 30 1) In general, where cutting is required use hand or small power tools designed 31 for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots 32 neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. 33 Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 34 2). To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or 35 finished side into concealed surfaces. 36 3) Cut through concrete. and masonry using a cutting machine such as a 37 carborundum saw or diamond core drill. 38 4) Comply with requirements of applicable Sections of Division 2 where cutting 39 and patching requires excavating and backfilling. 40 5) By-pass utility services such as pipe or conduit, before cutting, where 41 services are shown or required to be removed, relocated or abandoned. 42 Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve or 43 plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of 44 moisture or other foreign matter after by-passing and cutting. 45 46 C. Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and 47 patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 48 1. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and 49 moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. 50 2. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or 51 ~ performance of other construction activities arid the subsequent fitting and patching 52 required to restore surfaces to their original condition. 53 54 D. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without 55 prior approval. 56 57 E. Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 58 59 [ridgeline ms] 01600-6 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01600-6. ! 1 F. Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. 2 3 G. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal 4 voids with fire rated material meeting required fire rating, to full thickness of the penetrated 5 element. 6 7 H. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest 8 intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 9 1. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used where exposed surfaces are 10 ~ involved, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent 11 possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials whose installed performance will 12 equal or surpass that of existing materials. 13 14 I. Patch or replace portions of existing surtaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored or 15 , showing other imperfections. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. Finish patches to 16 produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched 1 17 18 . , refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 1 Patch with durable seams th t i i ibl . a are as nv s e as possible. Comply with specified 19 .tolerances. 20 a. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the 21 installation. 22 b. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into 23 retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of 24 patching and refinishing. ,, 25 26 J. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as 27 access. Remove completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature 28 . Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing is 29 applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 30 31 3.06 PR OGRESS CLEANING ' 32 33 A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and 34 orderly condition. 35 36 B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, pleriums, attics, crawl spaces and other 37 , closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. 38 39 C. Broom and .vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue 40 cleaning to.eliminate dust. 41 ~ ' 42 D. Collect and. remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and dispose 43 off-site. 44 45 3.07 SAFETY PROCEDURES ; 46 47 A. Preliminary Work: 48 1. Prior to the start of and during the course of the Work (above and below ground) the 49 Contractor shall make a thorough survey of the entire worksite to determine all ' SO potential hazards. Workmen shall be made aware of those hazards and shall be 51 instructed. in procedures and the use of equipment for their protection. The Contractor 52 shall verify the location and condition ("live" or "dead") of all utilities on and near the ' S3 worksite and take precautions to protect his employees, the general public, and the 54 property. 55 ~ 56 [ridgeline ms] 01600-7 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01600-7 1 B. Imminent Danger: 2 1. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for any accidents (including death) 3 occurring at any time during the progress of the work and until the final acceptance of 4 the work by the Owner which may happen to any of his workmen or those of any 5 Subcontractor employed on the building, or for any damage or injuries (including 6 death) which his work and operations may cause to the work being constructed,. or to 7 existing buildings, or to any tenants and occupants of the property, or of the adjoining 8 properties, or to the public or private property. 9 10 ~C. Safety: 11 1. The Contractor shall ensure that all employees, visitors, subcontractors' employees, 12 and suppliers' employees, while on the work site, comply with the requirements of 13 WISHA, these requirements and the safety precautions contained in the several 14 Specifications Sections. The Contractor shall promptly and fully comply with, execute 15 and, without separate charge thereof to the Owrier, shall enforce compliance with the 16 provisions of the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act of 1973, with particular 17 attention paid but not limited to Chapter 296-155, WAC Safety Standards for 18 Construction Work; with particular attention paid but not limited to Chapter 296-24 19 WAC General Safety and Health Standards; with particular attention paid but not 20 limited to Chapters 296-27, 196-350 and 296-360 WAC regarding Administrative 21 Safety and Health Act Chapter 49-17 RCW, and any addenda thereto. 22 2. The Contractor shall immediately advise the Owner of inspections conducted by 23 WISHA at the work site, and shall transmit copies of citations and violations to the 24 Architect. 25 26 D. Safety Responsibilities: 27 1. Contractor shall be responsible to: 28 a. Ensure compliance with these requirements, WISHA requirements, and other 29 ~ safety requirements. 30 b. Authorize immediate action to correct substandard safety conditions. 31 c. Review and act to ensure compliance with safety procedures with his 32 supervisors, subcontractors, and suppliers. 33 d. Make thorough daily safety inspections of the work site and immediately act to 34 eliminate unsafe acts and unsafe conditions. 35 ~ e. Investigate worksite accidents and recommend immediate corrective action. 36 f. Assist in the preparation of accident investigation and reporting procedures. 37 g. Be responsible for the control, availability, and use of safety equipment, including 3$ employee personal protective equipment. 39 40 E'. :Request For Variances: 41 1. Requests for variances to deviate from WISHA requirements must follow the current 42 established procedures by the Agency. 43 44 F. Failure To Comply: 45 1. If the project is shut down due to The Contractor's failure to comply with the 46 requirements of WISHA or other applicable safety requirements, no part of the time 47 loss due to any such suspension of operations or stop orders shall be made the 48 subject of a claim for extension .of time or for increased cost or damage by the 49 Contractor. 50 51 3.08 CONSERVATION AND SALVAGE 52 53 ~ A. General: It is a requirement for supervision and administration of the work that 54 construction operations be carried out with the maximum possible consideration given to 55 conservation of energy, water and materials. 56 57 [ridgeiine ms] 01600-8 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01600-8 i ~~ 1 3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK 2 3 A. Protect installed work and provide special protection where specified in individual 4 specification sections. 5 6 B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in 7 immediate work area to prevent damage. 8 9 C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. 10 11 D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or 12 movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. 13 14 E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is 15 necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material 16 manufacturer. 17 18 F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 19 20 21 3.10 ADJUSTING 22 23 A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation: 24 25 3.11 FIN AL CLEANING 26 27 A. Clean interior and exterior glass, surtaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels 28 , stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted 29 and soft surfaces. 30 31 B. Clean finishes, surtaces, and items as recommended by manufacturer or installer free of 32 ,. dust and marks to like new condition. 33 34 C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to 35 the surface and material being cleaned. 36 37 D. Replace filters of operating equipment. 38 39 ~ E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. 40 41 F. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and other foreign 42 substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills and other foreign 43 deposits. Re-seed ground areas damaged by construction activity. 44 45 G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site 46 . 47 H. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety 48 standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess 49 materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous 50 materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a 51 lawful manner 52 1. Where extra materials of value remaining. after completion of associated Work have 53 become the Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed 54 . 55 [ridgeline ms] 01600-9 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01600-9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ~9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. See Section 01700 -Project Closeout for additional requirements. B. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. C.. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. D. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review. E. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with requirements for access to Owner's Name-occupied areas. F. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete. G. Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection. END OF SECTION 01600 (ridgeline ms] 01600-10 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01600-10 SECTION 01700 -PROJECT CLOSEOUT ', 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 2 3 '' 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other 7 Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 8 9 10 SUMMARY 11 12 This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but not 13 limited to: ~, 15 Inspection procedures (Substantial/Final Completion) 16 17 Project Record Document submittal (Record Drawings and Specifications, Record Product Data and 18 , Miscellaneous Record Submittals) ' 19 20 Submittal of Material Safety Data Sheets 21 ' 22 Final cleaning 23 24 Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: ' 25 26 Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" 27 28 Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data"~. (System Demonstration and Certification; 29 Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials; Warranties) ' 30 31 Division 2 through 16 Sections for specific construction activity closeout requirements. 32 33 34 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 35 36 Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete 37 the following. List exceptions in the request. 38 39 In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is 40 claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. ' 41 Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a 42 statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 43 ' 44 If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items the value of 45 , incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete. 46 47 Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements. 48 49 . Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and 50 similar documents. 51 52 Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services 53 and utilities; include temporary occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases 54 . 55 Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals. (See Section 01730 -Operation and Maintenance 56 Data) ' [ridgeline ms] 01700 - 1 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 1 Submit record drawings, record specifications, record product data and miscellaneous record submittals as listed under "RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS" paragraph of this section. Submit material safety data sheets (MSDS). Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. Make final change-over of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner's personnel of change-over in security provisions. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements. (See Section 01730-Operation and Maintenance Data). Complete final clean up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. Submit Certificate of Occupancy. See SECTION 01010 -SUMMARY OF THE WORK /SPECIAL CONDITIONS. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architectwill either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. The Architectwill repeat inspection when requested and assured thattheWork has been substantially completed. All repeat inspections, after the initial contractor-requested inspection, shall be paid for by the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Any reinspection charges will be deducted from the Contractor's Pay Request. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. FINAL ACCEPTANCE Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following: Submit the Final Commissioning Report verifying all equipment and systems have been successfully commissioned and all specified requirements have been satisfied. Submit final list of all subcontractors with their trade heading and equipment suppliers with equipment ,furnished. Give names, addresses, and phone numbers. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. Submit a copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated by the Architect. Submit affidavit of payrolls, bills for materials and equipment. A.I.A. Form G706. See SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, 9.10.2. Submit affidavit of release of liens. A.I.A. Form G 706A. See SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, 9.10.2. [ridgeline ms] 01700 - 2 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 2 ` 1 Submit affidavit of wages paid. See SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, 9.10.2. 2 3 Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4 5 Submit signed statement certifying the 0% asbestos containment of all new materials and products 6 supplied and installed within the project limits of contractual responsibilities: See Section 01095 - ' 7 Reference Standards and Definitions. , 8 • 9 Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including 10 inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whose completion has been 11 delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Architect. 12 13 Upon completion of re[nspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance, or advise 14 the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required 15 for final acceptance. 16 17 If necessary, reinspection will be repeated. All repeat inspections, afterthe initial contractor-requested 18 inspection, shall be paid for by the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. • Any reinspection '• 19 charges will be deducted from the Contractor's Pay Request. ~~ . 22 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS ON ELECTRONIC MEDIA 23 24 25 General: Not to be use for construction~purposes, provide a separate and complete set of blue-line drawings f or the exclusive use of daily mark-ups of all contract revisions. The satisfactory maintenance of this set 26 throughout construction is a requirement and will be reviewed priorto the progress payment approval Protect 27 . this set from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location. 28 29 Electronic Media shalt be described. as computer generated drawings on a CD or 3 '/2' disc with a format 30 compatible with Auto Cad Release 14. 31 32 33 Record DraWInQS (As Builts): The contractor shall provide one complete set of "as built" drawings on electronic media. • 34 35 The Architect will provide the contractor with all drawings on discs as necessary for the contractor to 36 develop a complete set of: as-built drawings. 1 37 38 Any variations from the original drawings which may occur during the "Project" construction process 39 shall be recorded on the electronic media and shall be maintained by the Contractorand shall include 40 , but.nor be limited to, the following: 41 42 43 In addition it shall be possible, using these drawings, to correctly and easily locate, identify and establish sizes of all .piping, directions and the like, as well as other features of work ' 44 which wilt be concealed underground and/or in the finished building. 45 , 46 Locations of underground work shall be established by dimensions to column lines orwalts locating 47 , all turns, etc., and by. properly referenced centerline or invert elevations and rates of fall ' 48 . 49 The following requirements apply to all record drawings on the electronic media: 50 ' 51 They shall be maintained at the Contractor's expense. 52 53 All such drawing work done shall be done carefully and neatly by a competent draftsman and inform 54 approved by the Architect. ' 55 56 Additional drawings shall be provided as necessary for clarification. [ridgeline ms] 01700 - 3 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 3 They shall be kept up-to-date during the entire course of the work and shall be available on request for examination by the Architect and, when necessary, to establish clearances for other parts of the work. All change order changes will be incorporated unless covered by a "change order drawing" (not on electronic media)and issued by the Architect, in which case a reference note will be made on these Record Drawings. All addenda changes will be incorporated. These record drawings must be finished complete and delivered to the Architect prior to the final payment. Acceptance of as-builts are subject to the Architects approval. RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. However, provide a separate and complete set of blue-line drawings for the exclusive use of daily mark-ups of all contract revisions. The satisfactory maintenance of this set throughout construction is a requirement and will be reviewed each month prior to the progress payment approval. Protect this set from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location. Record Drawings (As Builts): The contractor shall provide one complete set of "as built" drawings printed on reproducible mylars. The Architect will only provide the original drawings to City Blueprint, 8042 Pacific Ave., Tacoma, WA Phone (253) 474-9486, Tacoma, Washington, forthe reproduction process and-the contractor shall pay them direct for all charges related to the printing and shipping of these documents. Any variations from the original drawings which may occur during the "Project" construction process shall be recorded on the reproducible mylar drawings. For plumbing; heating, ventilating and air conditioning; electrical; and fire protection work, record drawings shall be maintained by the Contractor and shall include, but not be limited to, the following: Show the precise location of concealed work and equipment as compared to locations as shown on documents, including concealed or embedded piping, ductwork, conduit and junction boxes, all changes, deviations, change orders, job instructions, etc. In addition it shall be possible, using these drawings, to correctly and easily locate, identify and establish sizes of all piping, directions and the like, as well as other features of work which will be concealed underground and/or in the finished building. Locations of underground work shall'be established by dimensions to column lines or walls, locating all turns, etc., and by properly referenced centerline or invert elevations and rates of fall. For work concealed in the building, sufficient information shall be given so it can be located with reasonable accuracy and ease. In some cases, this maybe by dimension. In others, it may be sufficient to illustrate the work on the drawings in relation to the spaces in the building near which it was actually installed. Architect's decisions shall be final. The following requirements apply to all record drawings: They shall be maintained at the Contractor's expense. All such drawing work done to the above mylars shall be done carefully and neatly by a competent draftsman and in form approved by the Architect.. Additional drawings shall be provided as necessary for clarification. [ridgeline ms) 01700 - 4 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 4 1 They shall be kept up-to-date during the entire course of the work and shall be available on request 2 for examination by the Architect and, when necessary, to establish clearances for other parts of the ' 3 work. _ 4 5 All change order changes will be incorporated unless covered by a "change order drawing" issued 6 by the Architect, in which case a reference note will be made on the Record Drawings. 7 ~, 8 All addenda changes will be incorporated and unaccepted Alternates will be rioted. 9 . 10 The record drawings shall be returned to the Architect on completion of the work and are subject to ' 11 the approval of the Architect. 12 13 These record drawings must be finished complete and delivered to the Architect prior to the final payment. 14 '~ 15 Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including addenda, and one copy 16 of other written construction documents such as Change Orders and modifications issued in printed form 17 during construction. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in 18 comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. Give particular attention to substitutions, 19 selection of options and similar information on elements that are concealed or.cannot otherwise be readily 20 discerned later by direct observation. Note related record drawing information and Product Data. ' 21 22 ~ Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Architect for the Owner's records. 23 24 Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal.- Mark these documents to show ' 25 significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations 26 in products delivered to the site, and from the manufacturer's.installation instructions and recommendations. 27 Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work which cannot otherwise be readily 28 discerned later by direct observation. Note related Change Orders and mark-up of record drawings and ' 29 Specifications. 30 31 Upon completion of mark-up, submit complete set of record Product Data to the Architect for the 32 Owner's records. 33 34 Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of miscellaneous 35 .record-keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the ' 36 date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly 37 identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the Architect for the Owner's 38 records. 40 41 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS (MSDS1 42 43 As required per WAC 296-62-05413-1 the Gerieral Contractor shall supply to the Owner all MSDS sheets for ' 44 all materials as applicable to this project. Provide table of contents in front of binder indicating the breakdown 45 of sheets into C.S.I. divisions with further breakdown into sections. Assemble in binder with spline clearly 46 marked. 47 48 49 PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 50. 51 52 PART 3 -EXECUTION 55 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 56 Operating and Maintenance: Instructions: See Section 01730-Operations and Maintenance Data. [riclgeline ms] 01700 - 5 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 5 FINAL CLEANING General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions and included in Section "Reference Standards and Definitions". Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion. The location of this required cleaning shall be limited to those areas and spaces where work of this project has been preformed and spaces used by the Contractor in the execution of this work. This is inclusive of both the exterior.and interior of the building. The residual construction dust should be cleaned with a vacuum containing a High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filter and/or damp mopped. This includes, but not limited to, the dust on the floors, window sills, duct surfaces; tables, and chairs. Remove stains; wash and polish all glass inside and outside. This work shall be done by persons skilled and equipped for such work. Remove foreign matter, marks, stains, foreign paint; fingerprints, soil and dirt from (and have in a polished condition where applicable) the following: Painted, decorated and stained work. All hardware, fixtures and incorporated equipment. All finished surfaces and metal surfaces, whether interior or~ exterior, including all exposed interior concrete slabs. All doors and windows. Use only the cleaning materials and equipmentwhich are compatible with the surfaces being cleaned. ' Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps. Clean. the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills and- other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted, to a smooth even-textured surface. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner all rubbish and debris resulting from work under this contract. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become the Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed. END OF SECTION 01700 [ridgeline ms] 01700 - 6 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 0.1700 - 6 r r ' 1 2 3 ' 4 5 6 ' 8 9 10 ' 11 12 13 14 ' 15 16 17 18 ' 19 20 21 22 ' 23 24 25 '26 27 28 29 ' 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 '' 41 42 43 44 ' 45 46 47 48 ' 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 ' 57 SECTION 01730 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. ~ . SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Submittal of Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Systems Demonstration and Certification (Sample Form). Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials (Sample Form). Warranties (Sample Form). Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Section 00800 - "Supplementary Conditions of the Contract". Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures". Division 1 Section "Project Closeout". SUBMITTALS At substantial completion, submit one (1) preliminary set for review. Within two (2) weeks after Architect's review is complete, submit three (3) sets complete with all information. Architect recommends that Contractor starts O&M manuals during the product review process. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Product data for: Mechanical equipment and controls - Division 15 Electrical equipment and controls - Division 16 Architectural Work: All other trade work as specified.. Volumes bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch three-ring binder with durable plastic covers. Provide a separate volume for architectural, mechanical and electrical trades, with a table of contents and index tabs for each volume. Coordinate with Architectural, Mechanical, and Electrical specification sections. At the beginning of each volume, provide directory listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of: Architect, Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors and Material Suppliers. [ridgeline'ms] 01730 - 1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -1 Followingthedirectory, provide foreach installerofequipmentthatrequires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. If installers are not experienced in procedures, provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives. Schedule these instruction times all for the same day and verify with Owner. Include a detailed review of the following items: Maintenance manuals. Shop Drawings and Product Data. Operating instructions. Control sequence. Maintenance Instructions for equipment and systems. Maintenance Instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. Spare parts and materials. Tools. Lubricants. Fuels. Hazards. System Demonstration Certification. Warranties and bonds. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: Start-up. Shutdown. Emergency operations. Noise and vibration adjustments. Safety procedures. Economy and efficiency adjustments. Effective energy utilization. SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION AND CERTIFICATION Prior to final inspection. Demonstrate operation of each system to Architect, Engineer and Owner. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and systems, using the operation and maintenance data as the basis of instructions. Certification that Owner's personnel have been instructed in operation, adjustment and maintenance of equipment and systems, in substantially the following form: (Owner) RE: (Project) (Address) Gentlemen: We, as representatives /personnel for the (Owner), would like to .attest to the fact that a representative of (subcontractor) has given us an orientation on the operation and maintenance of the (product) for the (Project). Owner Owner Date Date Subcontractor Date [ridgeline ms] 01730 - 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -2 1 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS 2 3 Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual ' 4 Specification Sections. In addition to that used for construction of work. 5 6 Coordinate with Owner, deliver to project site and obtain receipt prior to final payment. 7 ' 8 Provide receipts for materials furnished to the Owner in substantially the following form: 9 ~ RE: (Project) s ' 1 (Addre s) 12 13 Gentlemen: 14 ' 15 We, as representatives Lpersonnel for the (Owner), would like to attest to the fact that the below 16 stated materials were furnished for future maintenance needs by a representative of (Contractor / 17 Subcontractor) for the (Project). ' 18 19 20 Owner Date ' 23 Owner Date 24 25 ' 26 General /Subcontractor 27 28 29 WARRANTIES ' 30 31 Warranties are to be included and bound in the appropriate sections of Architectural, Mechanical and 32 Electrical volumes. ' 34 35 Written warranty addressed to the Owner, covering the entire work.for one-year period, or as specially noted, from date noted in General conditions Letter to be substantially as follows: 36 . 37 (Owner) RE: (Project) ' 38 39 (Address) 40 Gentlemen: 41 42 I (We), the undersigned, do hereby warrant for a period of one year, or as specially noted, from the ' 43 ( )all work performed under the terms of the Contract Documents. I (We) will 44 remedy at my (our) expense any defects appearing during that period due to poor or defective 45 materials and / orworkmanship and will pay for any damage resulting from occurrence of said defects 46 or the correction of same. ' 47 48 The following subcontractors performed or furnished materials subject to the one-year warranty as 49 stated above. 51 Subcontract Firm Name 52 (Masonry work) (John Doe Company) 53 (Lathing and plastering) (Smith & Smith Co.) ' S4 Etc., listing all subcontracts and firm names. 55 56 This warranty shall not be interpreted as holding the Contractor responsible for normal wear or any 57 deterioration of the work due to normal wear or abuse of the work by the Owner. ' 58 59 Very truly yours, 60 ~z 63 Contractor ' [ridgeline mss 01730 - 3. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 For products or trades where separate or additional warranties are required, submit letter from each subcontractor or material supplier, countersigned by the Contractor, covering all portions of the work incorporated in the project underagreement between Contractorand said subcontractorforthe periods oftime specified beginning from date noted in general Conditions. Letters to be substantially as follows: (Owner) (Address) Gentlemen: We, as Subcontractor and Contractor, do hereby warrant for a period of ( )year(s) from the date noted in General Conditions ( )that portion of the work incorporated in the project by (subcontractor) as described below: (Specification Section Number, Title and Applicable Work) We will remedy at our expense any defects appearing during that period due to poor or defective materials and / orworkmanship and will pay for any damage resulting from occurrence of said defects of the correction of same. This warranty shall not be interpreted as holding the Contractor responsible for normal wear or any deterioration of the work due to abuse of the work by the Owner. Very truly yours, Subcontractor Contractor PART2-PRODUCTS (Not used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not used) RE: (Project) END OF SECTION 01730 [ridgeline ms] 01730 - 4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -4 ;,' t 1 SECTION 01810 -COMMISSIONING 2 3 '• 4 PART1 GENERAL 5 6 1.1 DESCRIPTION 7 _ A. Pur ose 8 1. The purpose of commissioning is to provide the Owner assurance that the systems listed in 9 this section (mechanical, electrical & specialty) have been installed in the prescribed manner 10 and will operate properly to fulfill the design intent as laid out in the Contract documents 11 . Commissioning is a systematic process intended to enhance the quality of system start-up 12 and aid in the orderly transfer of systems to beneficial use by the Owner. Commissioning 13 14 during the construction phase is intended to achieve the following specific objectives ' according to the Contract Documents: 15 a. Verify that applicable component equipment and systems are installed according to the 16 manufacturer's recommendations and to industry accepted minimum standards and that f ~ 7 they receive adequate operational checkout by installing contractors. 18 b. Verify and document proper performance of component equipment and systems. 19 c. Verify that O&M documentation left on site is complete. 1 20 21 d. Verify that the Owner's operating personnel are adequately trained. 22 1.2 RESPONSIBILITES 23 A. General Responsibilities The Contractor verifies installation, provides scheduling and ' 24 25 coordination of commissioning activities, performs training, starts up component equipment, assists with functional performance testing, corrects .deficiencies and assists with retests 26. . 1. Furnish labor and material to accomplish building commissioning as specified herein. 27 2. The commissioning process does not take away from or reduce the responsibility of the ' 28 system designers or installing contractors to provide a finished and fully functioning product. 29 3. Commissioning does not relieve the Contractor of Contract obligations 30 . B. The Commissioning Authority (CA), hired directly by the Owner, provides the Owner an unbiased ' 31 , objective view of the systems; _ installation, documentation, operation, and performance. The 32 responsibilities of the CA are indicated here for information only. 33 1. The CA reviews submittals for compliance with the original design intent as reflected in the 34 contract documents. 35 2. The CA performs component equipment installation verification throughout the course of the 36 project. ., 37 ~ 3. The CA verifies completion of installation and witnesses start up of component equipment 38 4. The CA develops Functional Performance Tests (FPT) for. component equipment and 39 systems listed in this section. 40 5. The CA, with the assistance of the contractor, tests the systems designated in this section to 41 verify conformance to the sequence of operation and design intent as reflected in the contract 42 documents. 43 6. The CA will develop and maintain an Issues log through the warranty period. 44 45 1.3 COORDINATION 46 A. The Contractor will provide overall coordination of the commissioning program as specified herein. The 47 Commissioning process will require cooperation of the Contractor, subcontractors, vendors, Architect 48 , CA, and Owner. The commissioning team will be comprised of the following: 49 1. Contractor 50 a. Project Manager 51 b. Subcontractors (as required by the Contractor) 52 53 ~s, ~ CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROdJP _ SPwialiSfiS in School Pwildin~S ' [ridgeiine ms) 01810-1 COMMISSIONING 01810-1- 1 2. Commissioning Authority (CA) 2 a. Project Manager 3 b. Consultants (as required by the CA) 4 3. Owner's Representative (s) 5 a. Project Manager 6 b. Maintenance Staff 7 4. Architect 8 a. Architect 9 b. Mechanical consultant 10 c. Electrical consultant 11 d. Specialty consultant (s) 12 13 1.4 SCHEDULE 14 A. Integrate commissioning requirements into the Critical Path Method (CPM) master construction 15 schedule. Commissioning scheduling is the responsibility of the Contractor. 16 B. In the Construction Schedule, the Contractor will schedule Commissioning Tasks. These tasks will 17 include .but are not limited to the following: 18 1. Submittals 19 2. Installation Checklists 20 3. Component equipment Start-up 21 4. System Integration 22 5. Functional Performance Testing . 23 6. O&M Manuals 24 7. Training 25 8. Other tasks as required, i.e. phasing. 26 C. The Contractor will provide a copy of the CPM master construction schedule and updates to the CA as 27 part of regular schedule updates and distribution. 28 29 1.5 COMMISSIONING MEETINGS 30 A. Commissioning SCOplnq Meeting: Within 60 days from Notice to Proceed, the CA will call for a 31 Commissioning Scoping Meeting. The purpose of this meeting is to give instructions to the contractor 32 on the importance of construction Installation checklists and how they will be used throughout the 33 project. The need to have the checklists in place when work starts will be stressed. The Commissioning 34 process will be explained in detail, including startup procedures, O & M manuals, training, and closeout 35 procedures. 36 B. Issues related to commissioning will be discussed as required during regularly scheduled Project 37 ~ Meetings. 38 C. The CA may require additional meetings if the commissioning process appears to be behind schedule 39 or if there are coordination issues. 40 41 1.6 COMPONENT EQUIPMENT & SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED 42 A. Definitions: 43 1. Component equipment or Component - a constituent element, as of a system, part of a 44 mechanical or electrical complex. 45 2. System - A group of interacting, interrelated, or interdependent elements forming a complex 46 whole, A condition of harmonious, orderly interaction. 47 3. Integrate - To make into a whole by bringing all parts together; unify. Many systems are 48 coordinated with or integrated into other systems (fire/smoke dampers with fire alarm). 49 Integration of component equipment into systems, and system-to-system integration will be tested 50 as noted in the matrix 51 52 4,~' COMSTRUCTIOIV SERVICES GROUP SPc~ialiStS in Sc hool Pwildin~S [ridgeline ms] 01810-2 COMMISSIONING 01810-2- ' ' . 1 B. Life /Safety Systems 2 Critical Life Safety Systems are summarized but not limited to the following: ', 3 4 1. Systems: a Automatic fire rotection s stem . p y s 5 b. Emergency lighting 6 c. Fire Alarm systems 7 d. Wheelchair lift . 8 e. Elevator 9 f. Fire Doors 10 11 ~2. System integration as applicable a Intras stem inte ration . y g 12 b. .Intersystem integration 13 14 C. Specialty Systems ' 15 Specialty systems are summarized but not limited to the following: 16 1. Systems ' 17 18 a. Site Improvements 1) Track 19 b. Chain Link Fencing 20 1) Fencing 21 2) Gates ' 22 c. Landscaping & Athletic Fields 23 1) Topsoil placement ' 24 25 2) Trees 3) Shrubs 26 4) Groundcover 27 5) Lawns 28 d. Underground Sprinkler System ' 29 1) Point of Connection 3.0 2) Back-flow Preventer ' 31 32 3) Valves 4) Irrigation controls 33 5) Piping 34 e. Food Services -General 35 ~ 1) Component equipment ' 36 2) Refrigeration 37 3) Class 1 & 2 Hoods ' 38 39 f. Theater 1) Sound 40 2) Lighting 41 3) Rigging 42 4) Seating ' 43 g. Specialty Exhaust Systems 44 1) Fume Hoods or snorkels 45 2) Dust collection systems ' 46 3) Auto shop exhaust collection. 47 4) Welding hoods or snorkels 48 h. Telescoping Bleachers 49 2. System integration as applicable 50 a. Intrasystem integration 51 b. Intersystem integration 52 ' ~. CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP SPecialiSiS in S~ hool 13vildin$S (ridgeline ms] 01810-3 COMMISSIONING 01810-3- 1 D. Mechanical Systems 2 Critical Mechanical systems are identified in the General Conditions, Division 15, and summarized, but 3 not limited to, the following: 4 1. Systems: 5 a. HVAC: All HVAC systems including, but not limited to: boilers, chillers, air handling, exhaust & 6 hydronic systems, fan coils valves & pumps. 7 b. .Domestic Water & DWV: All domestic water systems. including, but not limited to: Water 8 Heaters, pumps, pressure regulators, back-flow preventers, automatic flush valves, automatic 9 faucets, and solenoid valves. All drain, waste and'vent systems including interior rain leaders 10 and storm drains 11 c. Controls: The entire temperature control system including, but not limited to: Interface with all 12 hardware devices and component equipment, programming of all specified schedules and 13 sequences of operation, remote site interface. 14 2. System integration as applicable 15 a. Intrasystem integration 16 b. Intersystem integration 17 18 E. Electrical S stems 19 Critical Electrical systems are identified in the General Conditions, Division 16, and summarized, but 20 not limited to, the following: 21 1. Systems: 22 a. Unit substations 23 b. MCCs 24 c. Panel Boards: Alt panel boards including, but not limited to, main &sub-switchboards (480V 25 and 208V) on individual panels. 26 d. Lighting: All lighting fixtures interior and exterior, controls for each, occupancy sensors, low 27 voltage control system connections & interface to energy management system. 28 e. Generator. 29 f. Day lighting or lighting control systems 30 g. CATV 31 h. Phone/Intercom systems 32 i. PA system 33 j. Data 34 2. System integration as applicable 35 a. Intrasystem integration 36 b. Intersystem integration 37 38 1.7 COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 39 A.. The matrix below outlines required commissioning activities by system. 40 B. The CA is responsible for Functional Performance Testing of the component equipment fisted in this 41 section. 42 C. As noted in the matrix, testing required by the Architect's Consultants nor the Authority Having 43 Jurisdiction (AHJ) will serve as Functional Performance Tests for those systems. The contractor will 44 notify the CA seven (7) days in advance of such tests. The CA will witness testing by the Architect's 45 ~ Consultants and the AHJ to assure that they are adequate to completely test the systems. If the CA is 46 unavailable at the scheduled time and location of the activity, so note, and proceed per schedule. 47 1. Tlie Contactor will provide the CA with copies of the results of testing performed by others and 48 within three (3) working days of the test. A list of corrections (if required) will be included. 49 2. If the CA determines that the tests are not adequate to exercise all functions of the system, the CA 50 will develop additional tests and test the system to assure the owner that the system is completely 51 functional. 52 ' ',t CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP SPcualiStS in Srhool Pwildin~S [ridgeline ms] 01810-4 COMMISSIONING 01810-4 r t 1 1 1 1 C O SYSTEM o, a = Q ~' co ~ ~ ° ~ ... ~ ~. ~ ~ ~ ~ o ~ N m ~ ~ .Y j a i d c a = ~ c o ~ ~ ~ ' .Q '~ ~ ~ ~ ~ C C C ~ .C . N (n ~ U ~6 fn fA ~ U (n O f- O Fire/ Life /Safe S stems Auto fire rotection s stems X X X X X 'X X X Emer enc li htin X X X X X '' X X X Fire Alarm s stems X X X X X X X X Wheelchair lift X X X X X X X Elevator X X X X X X X ~X Fire Doors ~ X X X X X X X X 1 SYSTEM ' ~ E ~ rn ~~., (n m y n ~ ~ U ~ ~ cn o rn m C ~Ei rn cn ~ ~. `C ~ a c ii _ ¢ C (B N~ c ~ U~ `-" r6 C (0 ~ ~ O ~ ~ 'E H Y rn (B ~. ~ O Special S stems Site Im rovements Track X X X X Infield Skin X X X X Chain Link Fencin - Fencin X X X X Gates X X X X Landsca e & Athletic Fields To soil Placement X Trees X X Shrubs X ~ X Ground cover X X Lawns X X Under round S rinklers Point of connection X X X X X X X Back flow reventer X X X X X X X Valves X X X X X X X Irri ation Controls X X X X X X X Pi in /heads X X X X X X Food Services -General Com onent a ui ment X X X X X X Refri eration X X X X X X X Class I& II Hoods X X X X X. X X Theater Sound X X X X X X X Li htin X X X X X X X Ri in X X X X X ~~ CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP SPc~ialiS~ in School F3vildin~S [ridgeline ms] 01810-5 COMMISSIONING 01810-5- C O N ~ Q SYSTEM ~ ~ ~ N C fn mY ~ `~ E ~ a C ~~ ~ ~ ~' Y +~ fU U N .C (0 ~ V ~ C ~ ~ .C N ~ L ~ ~ U cq cn ~i U~ O H O S ecial S stems continued Seatin X X X X X S ecial Exhaust S stems Fume hoods & snorkels X X X X X X Dust Collection S stems X X X X X X X Auto sho exh collection X X X X X X Weldin hoods & snorkels X X X X X X Telesco in Bleachers X X X X X c o ~, ~ ~ Q SYSTEM ~ ~ ~ ~ O .~. C ~C G C Y N ~ ~~ ~ ~ C C C ~ C L c=n ~ U cn c! ti U~ O ~ O HVAC s stems HVAC X X X X X X X Domestic waters stem X X X X X X X 'Controls ~ X X X X X X X Electrical S stems Unit substations X X X X X 'X MCCs X X X X X X Panel Boards/sub anels X X X X X X Li htin ~ X X X X X X X Generator X X X X X X X Li htin Controls X X X X X X X CATV X X X X X X X Phones stems X X X X X X X Public Address s stems X X X X X X X Data cable/MDF/IDF X X X X X X X Securi S stem X X X X X X X UPS X X X X X X X 2 3 1.8 SUBMITTALS - 4 A. The Contractor will provide copies of all approved submittals to the CA for the systems listed in this 5 section, (see matrix above). Provide copies to the CA within 7 days of return of approved copies from 6 Architect. 7 CONSTRUCTION SERVICES.GROUP SPc~ialiStS in School F3oildinr~S [rrdgeline ms] 01810-6 COMMISSIONING 0181 D-6- ~ , 2 1.9 INSTALLATION CHECKLISTS 3 A. Contractor will utilize Installation Checklists provided in any commissioned Division iri Section XX995. ' : ~ 4 Installation Checklists are used to track proper and complete installation, start up' and system 5 integration of each component and each system being commissioned. 6 B. CA will verify that Installation Checklists are completed before any component equipment is started up. ' 7 Contractor will make available the specific installation checklists for each component being started at 8 that time for approval by the CA. 9 -. 10 1.10 STARTUP 11 A. Develop a project startup plan for all components and systems to be commissioned.. Commence with 12 component start-up after CA & Architect has approved the start-up plan and the CA has reviewed the 13 installation checklists for completion. 14 B. The Contractor will witness, system start-up and repair all system and component deficiencies noted 15 during start-up. 16 .. C. The CA, the Architect's consultant (s), and / or the Owner's Representative will witness all start-up and 17 -test activities specified in this Section. The CA will designate witnesses and alternates for each activity. 18 D. Obtain the signature of designated witness on all data forms. If the witness is unavailable at the 19 scheduled time and location. of the activity, so note, and proceed per schedule without witness. 20 21 1.11 SYSTEM INTEGRATION 8~ PRE-FUNCTIONAL TESTING ' 22 A. After successful start up of each component being commissioned, the contractor will continue to utilize 23 the installation checklist and other applicable documentation to verify the integration of individual 24 components into a fully functional system through the BAS or other means of control or automation. 25 B. Perform Prefunctional Testing. It is highly recommended that the Contractor obtain the approved FPTs 26 from the CA and perform the FPTs to verify complete and correct component and system operation 27 prior to formal FPT by the CA. Referto 'Cost of Retesting' in Part 3 of this section. 28 '. 29 1.12 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING IFPT) 30 A. Description 31 1. The purpose of Functional Performance Testing (FPT) is to assure the Owner that all work has 32 been completed as specified and that systems are functioning in the manner intended, within the 33 limits of the design and the confract documents. 34 2. The Contractor will verify the functional readiness of systems to be tested prior to requesting 35 Functional Performance Testing by the CA. 36 a. Provide the Declaration of Completion to the CA with the box checked for the appropriate 37 contractor and sign and date the form to affirm functional readiness. 38 3. Functional performance testing will commence as systems are brought to substantial completion 39 and will be done on asystem-by-system basis. The results of these tests will be documented by 40 the. CA and presented to the Owner for final system acceptance. 41 4. The FPTs and results will be passed to the owner at the end of the job as a record of baseline ' 42 building performance. The owner may use the tests at any time in the future as a diagnostic tool to 43 determine proper operation of any commissioned system in the building. 44 45 _ _ 1 46 PART2 PRODUCTS 47 NOT USED 48 . 49 50 PART 3 EXECUTION 51 3.1 SUBMITTALS 52 A. Normal Submittals. 53 1. The CA will receive a copy of the normal submittals for all component equipment or systems to be 54 commissioned: CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP SPwialiSiS in School P~~ildin$S . ' [ridgeline ms) 01810-7 COMMISSIONING 01810-7- 1 2. The CA will review and approve normal Contractor submittals applicable to systems being 2 commissioned for compliance with design intent, concurrent with the A/E reviews. 3 3. The CA may request further documentation necessary for the commissioning process. 4 4. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of the Contract 5 Documents is not relieved by the CA's review. 6 7 3.2 INSTALLATION CHECKLISTS 8 A. Installation Checklists and Installation Verification 9 1. The Contractor will install all equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents. The 10 Contractor will track the installation of all component equipment and systems being installed as 11 listed in this section. Tracking will be done as the work progresses using the Installation Checklists 12 located in the XX995 Section of commissioned Divisions in this Specification Set. 13 2. The Installation Checklists will be copied to provide individual checklists for each component or 14 system. The installation checklists will be maintained on-site in standard 3-hole binders with 15 Division and Section tabs for all Commissioned systems. 16 3. During on-site visits, the CA will perform a quality review of the work being completed. This may 17 include a review of the installation checklists to ensure the work is being accomplished according to 18 the contract documents. 19 4. If issues are found, the contractor will be notified of the issues and will be responsible for 20 rechecking all components and systems affected. Once this is accomplished, the CA will re-verify 21 the checklists for compliance with the contract documents. 22 a. The level of urgency will be indicated on the notification; 23 1) Immediate remedy required 24 2) Correct within 7 days 25 3) Correct within 30 days 26 4) Correct before job closeout 27 5. The actual completed installation checklists for each component being started, will be available to 28 the CA for review and approval prior to Startup and Commissioning. Startup will not proceed 29 without the approval of the CA. 30 6. Minor equipment issues will be listed on the Installation checklist and a complete list of issues for all 31 equipment to be started will be available to the CA prior to startup. 32 a. The Contractor will be responsible for completion of all work including change orders and 33 punch list items to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and Architect. 34 7. If any work is found to be incomplete, inaccessible, incon-ect, or non-functional, make note of 35 deficiencies and correct deficiencies before system start-up work proceeds. 36 8. Each checklist will have a place for the person doing the checkout to initial and date each item 37 indicating the task has been completed. 38 39 3.3 PROJECT START-UP 40 A. Proiect Start-uq Plan: At least 14 days prior to start-up, submit to the Commissioning Team for review 41 and approval, a Project start-up plan for all equipment to be commissioned, consisting of the following 42 items: 43 1. Project Name 44 2. Date and time of planned start-up 45 3. System and component equipment name(s) 46 4. Component equipment location and ID number 47 5. Participating parties 48 6. A copy of the specification section and manufacturer's installation instructions describing the start- 49 up requirements 50 . 7. The specific sequence of operations or other specified parameters being used during the start-up 51 process. 52 8. Specific step-by-step procedures to execute the start-up, in a clear, sequential and repeatable 53 ~ format for each component in the system. 54 9. Special cautions, alarm limits, load restrictions, etc. Y CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP . S~aliSfiS in Sc-hool F~vildin$S (ridgeline ms] 01810-8 COMMISSIONING 01810-8- 10. The Contractor will take. corrective action on all system deficiencies noted and demonstrate suitable system operation. 11. Owner's Representative and CA will physically witness start-up procedures. Contractor will obtain signature of the Owner's Representative and CA indicating successful start-up. B. Notify the Commissioning Team in writing seven (7) days prior to component.equipment start-up with an agenda that will include the date, time, location, and anticipated duration for .each piece of component equipment and/or system to be started. C. Provide written notice a minimum of 72 hours in advance of any changes in date, time, location, or anticipated duration of start-up. activities. All participants of the Commissioning team will receive notice. Contractor will reimburse Owner for actual costs incurred by the Owner as a result of failure to provide timely notice. 3.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. General: See Division 1 for all requirements related to Project Closeout and Substantial Completion. B. The CA must approve Substantial Completion. C. Substantial Completion in the Commissioning process requires that: 1. All startup of commissioned component equipment and systems must be complete and approved 2.. All installation checklists are complete and approved 3. O&M Manuals are complete, approved, and one copy on site. 4. The Training Plan is complete and approved. 3.5 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST PROCEDURES A. Objectives and Scope: Functional testing facilitates bringing the systems from a state of substantial completion to full dynamic operation. Additionally, during the testing process, areas of deficient performance are identified and corrected. A representative sample of each system will be tested in all modes of operation (seasonal, occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, part- and.full-load) where there is a specified system response. Tests will verify proper responses to standard .operating modes as well as failure and alarm conditions. Specific requirements are given in other commissioned sections xx995. B. Development of Test Procedures: 1. Tests will be developed by the CA and will be based on the specifications and Sequence of Operations provided in these documents. 2. Before the CA prepares final test procedures, the Contractor will provide to the CA all documentation and a current list of change orders affecting. component equipment or systems, control sequences and parameters. 3. Each subcontractor or vendor responsible for component equipment or systems being tested will provide assistance. to the CA in developing the FPT procedures. This assistance will be in the form of answering questions, providing documentation, etc. 4. 30 days after final submittal approval, the CA will provide a copy of the test procedures to the Architect and Contractor, who will review the tests for feasibility, safety, component, and warranty protection. The contractor and Architect's Consultant will respond with approval or revisions within 2 weeks of receiving the proposed tests. C. , Execution of Testing: 1. FPT begins after all component equipment and systems are started up and TAB and all controls work is complete. 2. Testing may proceed on finished systems for which TAB has been completed before all building systems are finished at the discretion of the CA. CA must have a draft balance report for such systems before testing can proceed. 3. O & M Manuals will be complete, approved by the CA and on-site for reference during FPT. 4. The Owner's Witness will attend the Functional Performance Testing 5. The CA will document the results of all testing and maintain a log of all issues found. 6. Address current A/E punch-lists before testing starts. _t ~, il~ CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP S~ialiS~S in S~hooi P~vildin~S [ridgeline ms] 01810-9 COMMISSIONING 01810-9- 1 D. Test Methods. 2 . 1. Functional performance testing and verification may be_ achieved by manual testing (persons 3 .. manipulate the control system or component equipment and observe performance) or by 4 monitoring the performance and analyzing the results using the control system's trend log 5 capabilities or by stand-alone dataloggers. 6 2. Sampling. Multiple identical pieces of non-life-safety component equipment may be 7 functionally tested using a sampling strategy. Significant application differences and 8 significant sequence of operation differences in otherwise identical component equipment 9 invalidates their common identity. A small size or capacity difference, alone, does not 10 constitute a difference. No sampling by contractors is allowed in installation checklist 11 execution. ' 12 a. Sampling rates are as follow; 13 1) If the number of identical components is three (3) or less, all components will be 14 ~ tested. 15 2) If the number of identical components is greater than three (3), a twenty-five (25) 16 percent sample will be used except, in no case will less than three (3) units be tested. 17 b. If a trend appears during testing (i.e. the same test faits on all like components) the 18 testing will be stopped and the contractor will investigate and correct the issue. Notify the 19 CA when ready for testing to resume. The CA will verify correction on the original sample 20 and randomly test another sample to verify compliance. 21 c. If at any point during testing, the failures rate exceeds 10%, the CA will stop the testing 22 and require the Contractor to perform and document a checkout and correction of the 23 remaining units, prior to continuing with functionally testing the remaining units. 24 3. Acceptance Criteria For FPT 25 a. All systems and their components must pass Functional Performance Testing at a rate of 26 90% or higher to be acceptable. ' 27 b. Systems and their components with a passing rate of 90% or higher, will be deemed 28 acceptable: The contractor will correct all deficiencies found by the testing procedures 29 and notify the CA when repairs are complete. The failed tests will be repeated to verify 30 proper system operation. If the system fails any,testing during the second round of tests, 31 the contractor will correct the deficiencies 'and the system will be retested until all tests 32 are passed at the contractor's expense. 33 c. Systems and their components with a passing rate of less than 90% will be deemed 34 unacceptable. The contractor will correct all deficiencies and notify the CA when repairs 35 are complete. The system will be retested until all tests are passed at the contractor's 36 expense. 37 E. Coordination and Scheduling. The Contractor will provide sufficient notice to the Owner's 38 representative and CA to schedule FPT. This will be communicated through the Master 39 Construction Schedule and updates thereto. 40 41 1. The Contractor will verify the FPT schedule with the CA not less than 14 days before FPT is 42 to begin by delivering the Declaration of Completion to the CA (electronically or in writing). 43 2. The Owner's witness will observe and witness the FPT of all component equipment and 44 systems. 45 3. Provide ladders, scaffolding, and staging as required to permit the CA & Owner's witness to directly 46 access and observe the performance of the component equipment being tested. 47 4. The contractor will provide experienced craftsmen with tools to assist the CA during FPT. 48 ~ F. Corrections of Minor Issues identified during testing may be made during the tests at the 49 discretion of the Architect's consultant and/or the CA. In such cases the issueand resolution will 50 be documented on the procedure form. The issue will be scored as a failure on the test form. 51 G. Problem Solving. The Commissioning team may recommend solutions to problems found, 52 however the burden of responsibility to solve, correct and retest problems is with the Contractor 53 and Architect. 54 ,. CONSTRUCTION SERVOCES GROUP SPwialiSf~S in School f3vildin~S ' [ridgeline msl 01810-10 ~ COMMISSIONING 01810-10- t 1 H. Deferred Testing 2 3 1. If during testing, the desired results cannot be produced because of seasonal conditions, 4 Functional Performance Testing may be deferred until the environmental conditions are satisfactory for performin the test The Ow ' R i g . ner s epresentat ve and the CA will determine the 5 scheduling for deferred seasonal test. 6 7 2. The contractor will supply labor, material and equipment as required to assist the CA with the deferred testing at no additional cost to the owner. .The CA will work with the Contractor to 8 accommodate scheduling, but no more than 14 days notice will be required to the Contactor to 9 schedule Defen-ed Testing. 10 11 3.6 DOCUMENTATION, ISSUES AND APPROVALS 12 _ A. Documentation. The CA will document the results of all functional performance tests The CA 13 . will include the completed test forms in the Commissioning manual. ' 14 B. Issues: 15 1. Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and minimize unnecessary delays 16 17 , while not compromising 'the integrity of the procedures. However, the CA will not be 1 18 pressured into overlooking deficient work or loosening acceptance criteria to satisfy scheduling or cost issues unless there is an idi ,, overr ng reason to do so at the request of the 19 Owner's representative. 20 2. As tests progress and deficiencies are identified, the CA will discuss the issues with the Contractor 21 . a. When there is no dispute on the deficiency and the Contractor accepts responsibility to correct 22 it: 23 1) The CA documents the deficiency. 24 2) The contractor corrects the deficiency. 25 3) The Contractor reschedules the test and the test is repeated. 26 27 b. If there is a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether it is a deficiency or who is b responsi le: 28 29 1) The deficiency will be documented on the deficiency list with the contractor's response and a copy given to the Contractor and the Architect 30 . 2) Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible. Other parties are 31 32 brought into the discussions as needed. Final interpretive authority is with the Architect. Final acceptance authority is with the Project Manager. 33 3) The CA documents the resolution process. 34 35 4) Once the interpretation and resolution have been decided, the appropriate party. t th d fi i 36 correc s e e c ency and provides notifies the CA. The Contractor reschedules the test and the test is repeated until satisfactory performance is achieved 37 . 3. The Contractor will respond in writing to the Architect and CA at least as often as project 38 39 meetings are being scheduled concerning the status of each outstanding issue identified during commissioning Discussion will cover ex lan ti f di 40 . p a ons o any sagreements and proposals for their resolution. 41 4. The CA retains the original Issues list until the end of the project. ' 42 5. The Contractor will not consider any required retesting by any contractor a justified reason for 43 a claim of delay or for a time extension. 44 45 C. Failure Due to Manufacturer Defect ~ If 10%, or three, whichever is greater, of identical pieces 46 (size alone does not constitute a difference) of component equipment fail to perform to the ' Contract Documents (mechanically or substantively) due to manufacturing defect, not allowing it 47 to meet its submitted performance spec, all identical units may be considered unacceptable by 48 the Architect or Owner's representative. In such case, the Contractor will provide the Owner with 49 the following: 50 1. Within one week of notification from the Architect or Owner's representative the Contractor or 51 52 , manufacturer's representative will examine all other identical units making a record of the findings. The findings will be provided to the Architect, Owner's representative within two weeks of the 53 original notice. ' 9 CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP '. SPcc-ialiSiS in School rSvildinrds5 _ [ridgeline ms] 01810-11 ~ COMMISSIONING 01810-11- 1 2. Within two weeks of the original notification, the Contractor or manufacturer will provide a signed 2 and dated, written explanation of the issue, cause of failures, etc. and all proposed solutions which 3 will include full component equipment submittals. The proposed solutions .will not significantly 4 exceed the specification requirements of the original installation. 5 3. The Architect or Owner's representative will determine whether a replacement of all identical units 6 or a repair is acceptable. 7 4. Two examples of the proposed solution will be installed by the Contractor and the Architect or 8 Owner's representative will be allowed to test the ,installations for up to one week, upon which the 9 Architect or Owner's representative will decide whether to accept the solution. 10 5. Upon acceptance, the Contractor and/or manufacturer will replace or repair all identical items, at 11 their expense and extend the warranty accordingly, if the original component equipment warranty 12 had begun. The replacement/repairtyork will proceed with reasonable speed beginning within one 13 week from when parts can be obtained. 14 D. Approval. The CA notes each satisfactorily demonstrated function on the test form. Formal 15 approval of the functional test is made later after review by the Architect's consultant and the CA 16 and by the Owner's Representative, if necessary. The CA recommends acceptance of testing to 17 the Owner's representative in his final report. 18 19 3.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (08M) MANUALS 20 A. As part of the required submittals for the Contract, Contractor will submit a draft copy of the Operation 21 and Maintenance Manuals within 30 days after normal submittals have been approved. 22 1. Submit the draft document for review by the Owner's Representative, Architect, and 23 Commissioning Agent to ensure completeness, proper written communications, and compliance 24 with each reviewer's knowledge of the significant requirements. The CA will review O & M manuals 25 for compliance with these specifications. 26 2. Unacceptable Manuals will be returned to the Contractor for revision and resubmitted for review by 27 the CA. 28 B. The following documentation will be included for all Divisions; 29 1. Format: 8 '/z" x 11" loose-leaf binders. Each binder will be clearly labeled on the spine. Use as 30 many as required. Do not overload binders. There will be dividers with permanently marked tabs 31 of card stock separating each section and sub section. Tab labels will not be handwritten. 32 2. There will be a title page and table of contents in the front of each binder for each binder's 33 contents. In each binder, there will be a main tab for each specification section. Behind the section 34 number tab there will be the component equipment ID tag sub-tab for each piece of major 35 component equipment (or group, if small or numerous). These sub-tabs will be similar to the 36 specification number tabs but have a different color. Behind each component equipment name tab 37 will be the following sections, in the given order, divided by a double weight colored sheet labeled 38 with the title of the section. 39 a. Contractor. The first page behind the component equipment tab will contain the name, address 40 and telephone number of the manufacturer and installing contractor and the 24-hour number 41 for emergency service for all component equipment in this section, identified by component 42 ~ equipment. 43 b. Submittal and Product Data. This section will include all approved submittal data, cut sheets 44 and appropriate shop drawings. If submittal was not required for approval, descriptive product 45 data will be included. 46 c. Operation and Maintenance Instructions. These will be the written manufacturer's data with 47 the model and features of this installation clearly marked and edited to omit reference to 48 products or data not applicable to this installation.. This section will include data on the 49 following: 50 1) Installation, startup and break-in instructions. 51 2) All starting, normal shutdown, emergency shutdown, manual operation, seasonal 52 changeover and normal operating procedures and data, including any special 53 limitations. 54 3) O&M and installation instructions that were shipped with the unit. CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP S~ialiS~f-S in School P~vildin~5 [ndgeline ms] 01810-12 COMMISSIONING 01810-12- 1 4) Preventative maintenance and service procedures and schedules. 2 5) Troubleshooting procedures. 3 6) A parts list, edited to omit reference to items that do not apply to this installation: 4 7) Lists of any special tools required to service or maintain the component equipment. 5 8) Performance data, ratings and curves. 6 9) Warranty, which clearly lists conditions to be maintained to keep warranty in effect 7 and conditions that would affect the validity of the warranty. 8 10) Any service contracts issued. 9 d. Supplemental Data: Prepare written text and/or special drawings to provide necessary 10 information, where manufacturer's standard printed data is not available and information 11 is necessary for a proper understanding and operation and maintenance of component 12 equipment or systems, or where it is necessary to provide additional information to 13 supplement data included in the manual or project documents. 14 e. Specifications: This section is comprised of the component or system specification 15 section copied and inserted complete with all addenda. 16 f. System Description: This section will include the individual component equipment portion 17 of the overall system Design Documentation Narrative, if available. It will contain 18 simplified professionally drawn single line system diagrams on 8 %2 x 11 or folded 11 x 17 19 sheets, if the system's control drawing is not adequate. 20 g. Preventive Maintenance Instructions: This section will include condensed typewritten 21 excerpts from the manufacturer's written instructions for weekly, monthly, quarterly, 22 annual, etc. maintenance. 23 h. Preventive Maintenance Index: This section will include a list of the location by O&M document 24 name and page number of any preventative maintenance instructions applicable to this piece 25 of component equipment. 26 i. Condensed Operating Instructions. This section will include condensed instructions for start- 27 up, shutdown, emergency operation, safety precautions, unusual features and troubleshooting 28 suggestions. Where control is clearly covered in controls description, it is not to be duplicated 29 -here. 30 1) . In addition, a copy of these instructions will be clearly laminated and secured adjacent to 31 the component equipment where it can be easily read by operating personnel. These 32 instructions will be provided for boilers, furnaces, chillers, pumps, heat rejection 33 component equipment, large air handling units (greater than 10 tons), heat pump systems, 34 control system, air compressors and dryers. 35 36 3.8 TRAINING 37 A. Prepare and submit for approval a training plan. Training plan will include for each training session: 38 1. Dates, start and finish times, and locations 39 2. Outline of the information to be presented 40 3. Names and qualifications of the presenters 41 4. List of texts and other materials required to support training. 42 B. Training materials are due 30 days before training is scheduled to begin. This will be provided to the 43 Architect for review and approval by the design team and the CA. 44 C. Obtain assistance from appropriate subcontractors and vendors to provide training for the Owners 45 operations staff as specified in all Divisions. 46 D. The Owner's Representative will arrange to provide videotaping of training sessions. Training will be in 47 a classroom setting with the appropriate schematics, handouts, and audio/visual training aids. "! CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP S~CC-ialiStS in School E3~ildin$S (ridgeline ms] 01810-13 COMMISSIONING 01810-13- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 E. Host each training session. F. Provide program overview and curriculum guidance. G. Obtain signatures of attendees on a sign-in list. H. Component equipment vendors provide training on the specifics of each system and philosophy, troubleshooting, and repair techniques as specified in the relevant sections of this specification. I. Installation subcontractors provide training on peculiarities specific to this project and job specific experience as specified in the relevant sections of this specification. 3.9 FINAL COMPLETION ' A. The CA will review Contractor's records of completion of commissioning requirements. Upon receiving evidence of satisfactory completion of Final Completion requirements in Section 01700, the CA will submit to the Owner a recommendation to accept Final Completion. 3.10 EXCLUSIONS A. The Owner's Representative and CA are not responsible for construction means, methods, job safety, or any management function related to commissioning on the job site. B. The Contractor will provide all technician services requiring tools or the use of tools to test, adjust, or otherwise bring component equipment into a full operational state. END OF SECTION 01890 :i •, ;,. CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP S~aliStS in Sr-hoot Pwildin$S [ridgeline ms] 01810-14 COMMISSIONING 01810-14- r DECLARATION OF COMPLETION Prior to Functional Performance Testing, the General Contractor will verify with the listed Subcontractors that work is ready and then will complete this document. Declaration of Completion I declare that I have reviewed the specifications and construction documents and found that all work has been completed, verified, and ready to perform as specified by the following subcontractors: ^ Irrigation Contractor ^ Mechanical Contractor ^ Controls Contractor ^ TAB Contractor ^ Electrical Contractor I have determined that all work has been completed, all corrections, punch-list items, and deficiencies have been corrected to the best of my knowledge and ability, except for those items listed here: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. I affirm that the components and systems are ready for Functional Performance Testing and understand the penalties associated with retesting as outlined in Section 01810, should components or systems fail to perform as specified. General Contractor: Date: ~~ CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP SpwialiSFS in S~l~ool P~ildin~; Declaration Form SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT 2/5/2004 TRAINING CHECKLIST Yelm School District CONSTRUCTfON SERVICES GROUP Ridgeline Middle School Project S~ialiS-I~S in School i3vildin~S Specification Section: Training Date: Training Subject: Hours of Required Training ^ Prerequisites: ^ Installation Checklists complete and approved By: ^~ Operations & Maintenance manuals approved By: ^ Record Documents approved By: ^ "Substantial Completion Achieved ^ Installerlmanufacturer's rep arranges for training of Owner's personnel ^ Instructor approved BY: ^ Submits agenda for approval (maximum 4 hours per day unless approved by CxA) Review Includes: Approved by: ^ Maintenance Manuals ^ Record Documents ^ Spare parts & materials ^ Tools ^ Lubricants ^ Fuels _ ^ Identification Systems ^ Control sequencing ^ Trouble shooting ^ Hazards ^ Cleaning ^ Warranties, bonds, maintenance agreements, etc. ^ Provide training (within 7 davs of approval) Instruction includes: ^ Startup ^ Shutdown ^ Emergency operations ' ^ Noise & vibration adjustments ^ Safety procedures ^ Economy and efficiency adjustments ^ Effective energy utilization ^ Owner provides video taping Session # Start Time: Attendees: Finish Time: Representing: . Date Training Completed: Approved By: *NOTE: Use a new checklist for each training session and each new Section and/or Subject. Cancellation of training sessions must be done 48 hours in advance of the session. Training sessions held prior to substantial Completion must be approved by the Project Manager and Commissioning Authority. No sessions will be held until the prerequisites and agenda have been approved. '~ 1 SECTION 02215 -SUBGRADE PREPARATION 2 ' 3 ` 4 PART 1 -GENERAL - 5 6 1.01 DESCRIPTION 7 8 A. Work of this Section is bound by the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specifications 9 sections, bound herein, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 10 ' 11 1.02 WORK INCLUDED 12 13 14 A. All subgrade preparation as specified herein or otherwise required for installation of new work shown or specified. 15 B. In general, work specified herein shall be included in the Bid. Work under this section 16 includes all labor, supervision,. equipment, tools, materials, service and incidentals necessary ' 17 for subgrade preparation. 18 C. There is no guarantee the project site earthwork quantities will balance. The contractor will be 19 required to import or export as required to achieve the design grades as part the bid price ' 20 21 (unknown unsuitable soils not with standing), based on the. site survey attached soils report and grading plans The Soils Report rovided is for r f l Th i . p e erence on y. e s no implied 22 guarantee.of the existing sub surface conditions 23 ' 24 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS . 25 26 A. Section 02300 -Earthwork 27 28 B. C. Section 02315 -Trenching, Backfllling and Compaction for Utilities Section 02740 -Asphalt Concrete Pavement 29 D. Section 02750 -Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, Curbs and Sidewalks 30 E. Section 02721 -Catch Basins and Inlets ' 31 F. Section 02630 - Stormwater System 32 33 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' 34 35 A. PERMITS & LICENSES 36 ~ 37 1. Obtain and pay for any required permits. 38 2. Contractor to be licensed for any work in the locality of the project ' 39 . - 40 B. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 41 42 1. The work under this section shall be governed by the 2004 version of the WSDOT 43 "Standard Specifications" for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction published by the 44 Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT). 45 2. All references in the Standard Specifications to measurement and payment shall be 46 deleted from consideration, and the terms agreed to in the Contract substituted therefore. 47 48 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS ~ , 49 50 A. CONDITION OF SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION 51 . 52 1. Accept premises on an "as-is" condition; Owner assumes no responsibility for site 53 condition now, at time of bidding, 'nor thereafter. 54 2. Assume all asks from damage or loss to premises by means of fire, theft, and all other 55 causes. ' 56 3. Damage or loss resulting from any cause to building, persons and/or property shail not 57 relieve Contractor from his obligation to complete alt work under the contract. 58 ' [yrms] 02215-1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 02215-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 41 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 B. PROTECTION 1. General: a. Conduct all operations in such a manner as to prevent damage to existing structures and surfaces and adjacent property. Keep free of damage those portions of existing . site buildings and appurtenances that are to remain. Repair any damage incurred because of the work of this section to the satisfaction of the Owner. 2. Reference benchmarks and monuments: a. Maintain benchmarks, monuments, and all other reference points. b. ~If disturbed or destroyed, monuments and benchmarks shall be replaced by a registered Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer. 3. Utilities: a. Where existing utilities exist at site, either overhead or underground, take care not to cause damage thereto; keep building drains, street drains and sewers open, for free drainage at all times. b. The Contractor shall be responsible for, and shall immediately repair, all damage to existing sewers, watermains, and building service connections to the same, operated by the Owner, which is caused by the construction work; repair such damage at no cost to Owner in manner approved by the applicable utility. Contractor shall contact the underground utility locating service at 1-800-424-5555 a minimum of 48 hours prior to construction. 4. Landscape plantings to remain: Save and protect trees as designated on applicable Architectural, Landscape and Civil Drawings or as designated in the field. 5. Adjacent buildings: Provide protection required by the. General Conditions. Such protection includes occupants of said adjacent buildings, visitors, and passers-by from damage, injury and discomfort caused by dust. 6. Street Blockage: Coordinate with the Owner should blockage of any streets by contemplated due to site prep work of this project; provide all necessary signs, lights and barricades required for any said blockage. 7. Traffic control Plan: Contractor shall provide a traffic control plan for any work that will interfere with the normal traffic flow. Contractor shall refer to WSDOT Standard Plans Section K for traffic control plans. 1.06 DEFINITIONS A. Optimum Moisture Content: 1. Ratio, in percent, of as-compacted field dry density to laboratory maximum dry density, as determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557-91. 2. Apply corrections for oversize material to either as-compacted field dry density or maximum dry density, as determined by the Engineer. B. Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of clearing and grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil, excavation to grade, and scarification and compaction of Subgrade. C. Relative Compaction: As defined in Section 02315, Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities. D. Relative Density: As defined in Section 02315, Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities. E. Subgrade: Layer of existing soil after completion of clearing, grubbing, scalping of topsoil prior to placement of fill, roadway structure. F. Proof-Rolling: Testing of Subgrade by compaction effort to identify areas that will not support the future loading without excessive settlement. G. Dry Subgrade: Subgrade for which the in-place moisture content is more than 5 percent below the optimum moisture content. H. Wet Subgrade: Subgrade for which the in-place moisture content is more than 10 percent above the optimum moisture content. I. Unsuitable Material: Material which, in the judgment of the Owner's representative, is not suitable to be usetl for the intended purpose. [yrms] 02215-2 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 02215-2 1 1.07 SEQUENCING.AND SCHEDULING 2 ' 3 A. Complete applicable work specified in Sections 02220, Site Demolition Clearing and 4 Preparation; and Section 02300, Earthwork, prior to Subgrade Preparation. 5 6 7 1.08. QUALITY ASSURANCE 8 ' A. Notify Engineer when subgrade is ready for compaction or Proof-Rolling, or whenever 9 ~ compaction'of Proof-Rolling is resumed after a period of extended inactivity. 10 ' 11 1.09 CONSTRUCTION SURVEY CONTROL .. 12 13 A. The Contractor shall supply construction survey control for approval of the Engineer prior to ' 14 , construction. The Contractor shall coordinate to obtain the Engineer's inspection of all 15 formwork grades and alignment at least 24 hours prior to the placement of concrete at each 16 location where concrete is to be placed. 17 1 18 . 1.10 PPOPERTY LINE STAKES 19 20 A. The Contractor shall provide property stakes every 200 feet along all property lines as ' 21 required by the City of Yelm. 22 23 24 , PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) ' 25 26 27 PART 3 -EXECUTION 2$ 29 3.01 GENERAL 30 ' 31 A. Keep Subgrade free of water, debris, and foreign matter during compaction or Proof-Rolling. 32 B. Bring Subgrade to proper grade and cross-section and uniformly compact surface. 33 1. Do not use sections of Prepared Ground Surface as haul roads. Protect prepared 34 Subgrade from traffic. t 35 2. Maintained Prepared Ground Surface in finished condition until next course is placed. 36 37 3.02 COMPACTION 38 ' 39 A. Under Earth fill: Compact the upper 6 inches to minimum of 90 percent Relative Compaction 40 as determined in accordance, with ASTM D 1557-91. 41 42 B. Under Pavement Structure: Floor Slabs On Grade, or Granular Fill Under Structures: C ' ompact the upper 12 inches to minimum of 95 percent Relative Compaction as determined 43 in accordance with ASTM D 1557-91. 44 45 3.03 MOISTURE CONDITIONING ' 46 47 A. Dry Subgrade: 'Add water, then mix to make moisture content uniform throughout. 48 B. Wet Subgrade:. Aerate material by blading, discing, harrowing, or other methods, to hasten 49 drying process. 50 1 51 ' [yrms] 02215-3 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 02215-3 1 3.04 CORRECTION. 2 3 A. Soft or Loose Subgrade: 4 1. Adjust moisture content and recompact, or 5 2. Over-excavate as specified in Section 02300 Earthwork, and replace with suitable 6 material from excavation, as specified in Section 02315, Trench Backfilling and 7 Compaction. 8 - 9 10 END OF SECTION 02215 - %/ ' [yrms] 02215-4 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 02215-4 , I i l ' 1 SECTION 02220 -SITE DEMOLITION, CLEARING & PREPARATION 2 ' 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 1.01 DESCRIPTION ' 7 8 A. Work of this Section is bound by the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specifications 9 sections, bound herein, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. ' 10 11 1.02 WORD INCLUDED 12 13 A. Work under this Section includes all labor, supervision, equipment, tools, materials, services ' 14 and incidentals necessary for the following: 15 1. Saw cutting and removing asphalt and concrete paving, steps and curbing; abandoning, 16 plugging and removing existing utilities; fences; bicycle racks; play equipment; landscape 17 plants and bridge; clearing and grubbing; and removing trees as showri on the plans. 18 B. Demolition: All onsite and offsite demolition and/or preparation as specified herein or 19 otherwise required for installation of new work shown or specified, excepting those items 20 shown and noted on Drawings as existing and to remain. ' 21 C. Site Clearing and Preparation: All site clearing and preparation work including clearing and 22 grubbing of vegetation, removal of trees from designated areas, removal and disposal of such 23 materials from below the ground surface, removal of existing asphalt and concrete, identify, 24 disconnect, cap and remove utilities; protect from harm any trees or other objects selected to 25 ~ remain; protect from harm offsite trees and surrounding properties. 26 D. There is no guarantee the project site earthwork quantities will balance. The contractor will be 27 required to import or export as required to achieve the design grades as part the bid price '' 28 (unknown unsuitable soils not with standing), based on the site survey attached soils report 29 and grading plans. The Soils Report provided is for reference only. The is no implied 30 guarantee of the existing sub surface coriditions 31 32 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS 33 34 A. Section 02215 - Subgrade Preparation ' 35 B. Section 02300 -Earthwork 36 C. Section 02315 -Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities 37 D. Section 02740 -Asphalt Concrete Pavement ' 38 E. Section 02750 -Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, Curbs and Sidewalks , 39 F. Section 02721 -Catch Basins and Inlets 40 G. Section 02630 - Stormwater System 41 42 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 43 44 A. PERMITS & LICENSES 45 1. Obtain and pay for any required permits. '~ 46 2. Contractor shall be licensed for any work required under this item. 47 B. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 48 49 1. The work under this section shall be governed by the 2004 version of the WSDOT 50 "Standard Specification" for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction published by the 51 Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT). 52 2. All references in the Standard Specifications to measurement and payment shall be ' S3 '~ deleted from consideration, and the terms agreed to in the Contract substituted therefore. 54 55 [yrms].02220-1 SITE DEMOLITION, CLEARING & PREPARATION 02220-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. CONDITION OF SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION 1. Accept premises on an "as-is" condition; Owner assumes no responsibility for site condition now, at time of bidding, nor thereafter. 2. Assume all risks from damage or loss to premises by means of fire, theft, and all other causes. 3. Damage or loss resulting from any cause to buildings, persons and/or property shall not relieve Contractor from his obligation to complete all work under the contract. B. PROTECTION 1. General: Conduct all operations in such a manner as to prevent damage to trees that are to remain, surfaces, and adjacent property. Keep free of damage those portions of existing site appurtenances that are.to remain or to be removed for re-use by owner. Repair any damage incurred because of the work of this section to the satisfaction of the Owner. 2. Reference benchmarks and monuments: a. Maintain benchmarks, monuments, and all other reference points. b. If disturbed or destroyed, monuments and benchmarks shall be replaced by a registered Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer.. 3. Utilities: a. Where existing utilities are located at the site, either overhead or underground, take care not to cause damage thereto; keep building drains, street drains and sewers open, for free drainage at all times. b. The Contractor shall be responsible for, and shall immediately repair, all damage. to existing sewers, watermains, and building service connections to the same, operated by the Owner, which is caused by the construction work; repair such damage at no cost to Owner in manner approved by the applicable utility. Contractor shall contact the underground utility locating service at I-800-424-5555 a minimum of 48 hours prior to construction. 4. Landscape plantings to remain: Save and protect trees as designated on applicable Architectural, Landscape and Civil Drawings or as designated in the field. 5. Adjacent buildings: Provide protection required by the General Conditions. Such protection includes occupants of said adjacent buildings, visitors, and passers-by from damage, injury and discomfort caused by dust. 6. Street blockage: Coordinate with the Owner should blockage. of any streets be contemplated due to site prep work of this project; provide all necessary signs, lights and barricades required for any such blockage. 7. Traffic control plan: Contractor shall provide a traffic control plan for any work that will interfere with the normal traffic flow. Contractor shall refer to WSDOT Standard Plans Section K for traffic control plans. 1.06 REFERENCE BENCHMARKS, MONUMENTS & PROPERTY CORNERS A.. Maintain benchmarks, monuments, property corners, and all other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, bench marks, monuments and property corners shall be replaced by a registered Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer at the sole expense of the Contractor. 1.07 PPOPERTY LINE STAKES A. The Contractor shall provide property stakes every 200 feet along all property lines as required by the City of Yelm. [yrms] 02220-2 SITE DEMOLITION, CLEARING & PREPARATION 02220-2 '' 1 PART Z -PRODUCTS (Not Used) 2 3 4 PART 3 -EXECUTION 5 6 3.01 DEMOLITION 7 . 8 A. General: Breakup, remove, haul. and dispose of all existing asphalt and concrete pavement, 9 concrete steps and retaining walls. Disconnect, cap and remove existing utilities. 10 B. Asphalt removal: Contractor shall saw cut the existing asphalt to a "neat line" prior to asphalt 11 removal. All asphalt shall be removed from the site and disposed of in an approved manner 12 (i.e. recycling plant, permitted landfill etc.). 13 C. Concrete removal: Contractor shall saw cut the existing cement concrete to a "neat line" prior 14 to concrete removal. All cement concrete shall be removed from the site and disposed of in 15 an approved manner (i.e. recycling plant, permitted landfill etc.). 16 17 3.02 SITE CLEARING AND PREPARATION 18 19 A: Provide and conform to all permits, approvals and necessary agency requirements for site 20 work indicated.on Drawings and specified herein. 21 B, Do all clearing and grubbing work required for the completion of new work shown on 22 drawings and/or specified. 23 C. Remove, haul and dispose of all debris and materials on site except those items directed to 24 remain. tl 25 D. As noted on the plans and details saw or cut materials and debris so that only those portions 26 noted are removed. 27 E: All debris as approved by the Engineer, shall become the property of the Contractor and ~ 28 removed from the site. ' 29 30 3.03 CLEARING & GRUBBING 31 . ~; 32 A. General 33 1. Clear and grub completely all materials indicated to be cleared, plus all grasses, shrubs, 34 trees, organic topsoil, asphalt and concrete pavement and other debris within areas 35 required for the .new building construction and related structures, utilities, walk, parking 36 areas, planting areas, including areas of site to be improved or altered by cut andlor fill 37 work and all other improvements within the limits shown on drawings and to a depth of at 38 least 12 inches. 39 2. Remove roots of removed trees and shrubs to 18 inches minimum below new work under 40 buildings and paved areas, to 6 inches minimum below finish grade in all other areas. 41 3. All materials cleared and grubbed under work of this Section shall be disposed of off-site 42 at a contractor provide site at no cost to the Owner. 43 B.. Stripping Topsoil: 44 1. After clearing and grubbing is completed, strip all organic topsoil below the existing grade j 45 46 of all areas to be cleared and grubbed for new building, paving, landscape, drainage, and site utility work. 47 2. Keep topsoil reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, weeds, roots and other 48 foreign materials. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered, to prevent mixing with 49 underlying subsoil. 50 C. Topsoil Stockpiling: 51 1. Stockpile existing topsoil in separate piles in designated onsite stockpile area(s) or as 52 53 otherwise directed by the Engineer, for re-use and re-spreading. 2. Construct topsoil piles to allow free drainage of surface water. When required due to dry, ' 54 wet and windy weather conditions, cover topsoil to .prevent blowing dust or erosion and 55 migration of sediments. 56 57 '~` [yrmsj 02220-3 SITE DEMOLITION, CLEARING & PREPARATION 02220-3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 3.04 UTILITIES A. Terminate and cap utilities as required for new work, conforming to local, state and. servicing utility companies' requirements. B. Take care not to cause damage to any other existing utilities; keep all other utilities intact and in continuous operation. C. If damaged, repair such damage at no cost to Owner in manner approved by the applicable utility, refer to subparagraph 1.03 B.3 above and conform to requirement therein. 3.05 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED, CLEARED & GRUBBED MATERIAL A. Remove all non-usable materials and debris from site,, streets and walks as work proceeds, excepting those material/items indicated on Drawings and/or otherwise selected by the Owner to be retained by Owner or reused in the new work. B. Remove from site all other cleared and grubbed material not selected to be retained by Owner. Let no non-usable material accumulate at site, except where burning is permitted, burn same on site; conform to all laws and ordinances relating to fires; obtain and pay for fire and air pollution permits and remove ash residue from site. Haul all said materials/debris to an approved off-site disposal site as selected by Contractor, at Contractor's expense. 3.06 UNAUTHORIZED REMOVAL OF TIMBER A. Contractor shall remove only timber that has been designated to be removed. Timber removed without the authorization of the Engineer shall be compensated at 300% of the marketable value of the unauthorized removal. In addition, the Contractor shall plant three new trees of the same type for every unauthorized removal of an existing tree at a location agreed upon by the Owner. 3.07 MAINTAIN TRAFFIC ACCESS B. Contractor shall maintain access over and through the various work areas as identified on the Contract Plans. Lane closures and traffic diversions shall be per the latest edition of the MUTCD (Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices), Contract Plans shall be submitted to the engineer for approval prior to any existing traffic modifications. 3.08 SURFACE RESTORATION A. All disturbed areas that are seeded shall be leveled free of any surface rocks prior to application of any grass seed. Disturbed areas shall be maintained/repaired by the contractor until grassed areas are established to the satisfaction of the Owner or Engineer. B. All disturbed areas that are paved shall be replaced with an acceptable pavement section as identified on the plans or approved by the Engineer. Asphalt pavement restoration shall conform to Section 02750 -Portland Cement Concrete Pavement. C. All disturbed areas that contain cement pavement, sidewalk, driveway, or curb sections shall be replaced with an acceptable section as identified on the plans or approved by the Engineer. Cement concrete pavement, sidewalk, driveway, and curb restoration shall conform to Section 02750 -Portland Cement Concrete Pavement. [yrms] 02220-4 SITE DEMOLITION, CLEARING & PREPARATION 02220-4 t f 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 3.09 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent property owners and vehicular traffic. B. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify owner and do not resume operations until directed. . C. Conduct operations with the minimum interference to public and private accesses. D. .Maintain protected egress and access at all times. E. Obtain written permission from adjacent. property owners when. demolition equipment will traverse, infringe Upon.or limit access to their property. F. Sprinkle work site with water to minimize dust. Provide hoses, water .and connections for this purpose. 3.10 DEMOLITION A. Disconnect and remove utilities within demolition area. B. Remove foundation walls and footings to a minimum of four feet below finished grade. C. Break up concrete slabs on grade and remove to permit natural moisture drainage. D. Remove tanks, components and piping from site located within demolition area. E. Backfill areas excavated caused as result of demolition. F. Rough grade and compact areas affected by demolition to maintain site grades and contours. G. Remove demolished materials from site. H. Do not burn or bury any materials on site. END OF SECTION 02220 (yrms] 02220-5 'SITE DEMOLITION, CLEARING & PREPARATION 02220-5 '` 1 SECTION 02300 -EARTHWORK 2 3 I' 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 ' 6 1.01 DESCRIPTION 7 8 .A. Work of this Section is bound by the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specifications 9 sections, bound herein, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 10 11 B. RELATED SECTIONS 12 13 1. Section 02215 - Subgrade Preparation 14 2. Section 02315 -Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities . 15 3. Section, 02630 - Stormwater System 16 4. Section 02721 -Catch Basins and Inlets 17 5. Section 02740 -Asphalt Concrete Pavement ,:~ 18 6. Section 02750 -Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, Curbs, and Sidewalks . 19 20 1.02 WORK INCLUDED '~ 21 22 A. Work under this section includes all labor, supervision, equipment, tools, materials, service 23 and incidentals necessary for the completion of the following: 24 1. All excavation as specified herein or otherwise required for installation of new work 25 shown or specified. 26 2. General filling and contouring of site surfaces for paving, structures, lawn and 27 landscaping. 28 3. Structural filling. 29. 4. Backfilling of walls. 30 ~ 5. Rough and finish grading of cut and fill surfaces., 31 6: Preparation of excavated surfaces for paving, structures, lawn and landscaping. '! 32 7. Proof rolling and compaction of fill. 33 ~ -~ 8 Inspection and testing. 34 B. There is no guarantee. the project site earthwork quantities will balance. The contractor will be ' 35 required to import or export as required to achieve the design grades as part the bid price 36 (unknown unsuitable soils not with standing), based on the site survey attached soils report 37 and grading plans. The Soils Report provided is for reference only. The is no implied '38 guarantee of the existing sub surface conditions 39 40 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 41 42 A. PERMITS & LICENSES 43 1. Obtain and pay for any required permits. , 44 2. Contractor shall .be licensed for any work required under this item. 45' B. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS '~ 46 1. The work under this section shall be governed by the most current version of the WSDOT 47 "Standard Specifications" for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction published by the 48 Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT). 49 2. All references in the Standard Specifications to measurement and payment shall be 50 deleted from consideration, and the terms agreed to in the Contract substituted therefore. 51 52 1.04 .CONSTRUCTION, STAKING S3 ~ . 54 _ A. The Contractor shall supply all construction survey control and stakeout for the approval of 55 the Engineer prior to construction. The alignment of water mains, storm sewers and sanitary '~ 56 sewers and locations of components to be installed shall be as .indicated on the Contract 57 Plans. All survey control work shall be done by a registered Land Surveyor or Professional 58 Engineer. 1 [yrms] 02300-1 - EARTHWORK 02300-1 1 B. Should construction staking be lost as a result of the Contractor's operations or as a result 2 vandalism, the Contractor shall replace the staking at the Contractor's sole expense. 3 4 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS 5 6 A. CONDITION OF SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION 7 1. Accept premises on an "as-is" condition; Owner assumes no responsibility for site 8 condition now, at time of bidding, nor thereafter. 9 2. Assurrie all risks from damage or loss to premises by means of fire, theft, and all other 10 causes. 11 3. Damage or loss resulting from. any cause to buildings, persons and/or property shall not 12 relieve Contractor from his obligation to complete all work under the contract. 13 B. PROTECTION 14 1. General: Conduct all operations in such a manner as to prevent damage to trees that are 15 to remain, surfaces, and adjacent property. Keep free of damage those portions of 16 existing site appurtenances that are to remain or to be removed for re-use by owner. 17 Repair any damage incurred because of the work of this section to the satisfaction of the 18 Owner. 19 2. Reference benchmarks and monuments: 20 a. Maintain benchmarks, monuments, and all other reference points. 21 b. If disturbed or destroyed, monuments and benchmarks shall be replaced by a 22 registered Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer. 23 3. Utilities: 24 a. Where existing utilities are located at the site; either overhead or underground, take 25 care not to cause damage thereto; keep building drains, street drains and sewers 26 open, for free drainage at all times. 27 b. The Contractor shall be responsible for, and shall immediately repair, all damage to 28 existing sewers, watermains, and building service connections to the same, operated 29 by the Owner, which is caused by the construction work; repair such damage at no 30 cost to Owner in manner approved by the applicable utility. Contractor shall contact 31 the underground utility locating service at I-800-424-5555 a minimum of 48 hours 32 prior to construction. 33 4. Landscape plantings to remain: Save and protect trees as designated on applicable 34 Architectural, Landscape and Civil Drawings or as designated in the field. 35 5.' Adjacent buildings: Provide protection required by the General Conditions. Such 36 protection includes occupants of said adjacent buildings, visitors, and passers-by from 37 damage, injury and discomfort caused by dust. 38 6. Street blockage: Coordinate with the Owner should blockage of any streets be 39 contemplated due to site prep work of this project; provide all necessary signs, lights and 40 barricades required for any such blockage. 41 7. Traffic control plan: Contractor shall provide a traffic control plan for any work that will 42 interfere with the normal traffic flow. Contractor shall refer to WSDOT Standard Plans 43 Section K for traffic control plans. 44 45 1.06 REFERENCE BENCHMARKS, MONUMENTS & PROPERTY CORNERS 46 47 A. Maintain ~ benchmarks, monuments, property corners, and all other reference points. If 48 disturbed or destroyed, benchmarks, monuments and property corners shall be replaced by a 49 ~ registered Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer at the sole expense of the Contractor. 50 51 1.07 SUBMITTALS 52 53 A. The Contractor shall submit an Excavation Plan detailing: 54 ~ 1. Methods and sequencing of excavation. 55 2. Proposed locations of stockpiled excavated material. 56 3. Proposed onsite and offsite spoil disposal sites. 57 [yrms] 02300-2 EARTHWORK 02300-2 ~; . ~ ~, '' 1. . 1.08 WEATHER LIMITATIONS 2 3 A. Material excavated during inclement weather shall not be used as fill or backfill until after '; 4 material drains and dries sufficiently for proper compaction in accordance with the Standard 5 Specifications. , 6 7 1.09- SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING - -. 8 9 A. Clearing, Grubbing, and Stripping: Complete applicable Work specified in Section 02220, Site 10 Clearing,, Demolition And Preparation, prior to excavating. ' 11 12 1.10 BASE TOPOGRAPHIC ADVISORY 13 14 A. Contractor is advised to verify site conditions prior to bidding. Attached is a copy of a soils 15 report for this project. 16 17 1.11 PPOPERTY LINE STAKES , 18 19 A. The Contractor shall provide property stakes every 200 feet along all property lines as 20 required by the City of Yelm. S 21 22 , ' 23 PART 2 -PRODUCTS " 24 ~', 25 .2.01 GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR WALLS 26 27 A. Gravel. Backfill for Walls shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-03.12(2) of the 28 Standard Specifications. 29 30 2.02 GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR FOUNDATIONS -CLASS B 31 " 32 A. Gravel Backfill for Foundations - Class B shall conform to .Section 9-03.12(1)B of the 33 Standard Specifications and shall be used as structural fill beneath building. slabs, and 34 exterior stairways when placed during the months between April 15 and October 15. Gravel 35 backfill. for foundations placed during the period between October 16 and April 14 shall 36 conform to Section 2.01 Gravel Backfill for Walls. 37 - , 38 2.03 BALLAST . . 39 40 A. Ballast shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-03.9(1)_of the Standard Specifications. 41 ' 42 2.04 , CRUSHED SURFACE TOP COURSE . 43 44 A: ~ Crushed Surface Top Course shall conform to the requirement of Section 9-03.9(3) of the 45 Standard Specifications. 46 47 2.05 IMPORT AND ON-SITE SOILS FOR STRUCTURAL OR NATIVE: FILL .48 49 A. .Structural Excavation and Fill shall conform to the requirement of Section 2-09. of the ~; 50 ` Standard Specifications. No extra paymerit for import or export of soils. 51 52 ~' 53 , [yrms] 02300-3 EARTHWORK ~i ~ . - 02300-3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Excavate to lines, grades, and dimensions shown and as necessary to accomplish Work. Excavate to within tolerance of plus or minus 0.1 foot except where dimensions or grades are shown or specified as maximum or minimum. Allow for forms, working space, granular base, • topsoil, and similar items, wherever applicable. Trim to neat lines where concrete is to be deposited-against earth. --~i B. Do not over-excavate without written authorization of Engineer. C. Remove or protect obstructions as shown. 3.02 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION -CLASS B A. Structure Excavation -Class A: shall be defined in accordance with Section 2-09.3(2) of the Standard Specifications. 3.03 EMBANKMENT AND CUT SLOPES A. Shape, trim, and finish cut slopes to conform with lines, grades, and cross sections shown, with proper allowance for topsoil or slope protection, where shown. B. Remove stones and rock that exceed 3 inch in diameter and that are loose and may roll down slope. Remave exposed roots from cut slopes. C. Round tops of cut slopes in soil to not less than a 6-foot radius, provided such rounding does not extend offsite or outside easements and right-of-ways, or adversely impacts existing facilities, .adjacent property, or completed work. D. Embankment construction shall be performed in accordance with Section 2-03.3(14) or the Standard Specifications. 3.04 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. All subgrade areas beneath structures, paving and walls shall be prepared in accordance with Section 2-06 of the Standard Specifications, with the following modifications: 1. In paragraph 2-06.3(1)6 the wording "Compact subgrade to a depth of 6 inches." shall be removed and replaced with "Compact subgrade to a depth of 12 inches." 2. In paragraph 2-06.3(2) the wording "The Contractor shall compact the subgrade to a depth of 6 inches to 95 percent standard density" shall be removed and replaced with "The Contractor shall compact the subgrade to a .depth of 12 inches to 98 percent standard density." 3.05 STOCKPILING EXCAVATED MATERIAL A. Stockpile excavated material that is suitable for use as fill or backfill until material is needed. B. Post signs indicating proposed use of material stockpiled. Post`signs that are readable from all directions of approach to each stockpile. Signs should be clearly worded and readable by equipment operators from their normal seated position. C. Confine stockpiles to within easements, right-of-way, and approved work areas. Do not obstruct roads or streets. D. Do not stockpile excavated material adjacent to trenches and other excavations .unless excavation side slopes and excavation support systems are designed, constructed, and maintained for stockpile loads. E. Do not stockpile excavated materials near or over existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed work, if weight of stockpiled material could induce excessive settlement. [yrms] 02300-4 EARTHWORK 02300-4 i '! ,' 1 3.06 DISPOSAL OF SPOIL 2 3 A. Dispose of excavated materials, which are unsuitable or exceed. quantity needed for fill or 4 backfill, offsite. 5 B. Dispose of debris resulting from removal of organic matter, trash, refuse, and junk as 6 specified in Section 02220, Site Clearing, Demolition and Preparation, for clearing and 7 grubbing debris. 8 9 3.07 EMBANKMENT AND FILL 10 1, 11 A. Earth Embankment shall consist of fill place in lawn and landscape areas, shall consist of 12 native material excavated onsite and shall be placed in accordance with Section 2-03.3(14)6 13 and compacted in accordance with Section 2-03.3(14)C - Method A of the Standard 1 14 Specification. 15 B. Gravel Backfill for Walls shall be placed in accordance with .Section 2-03.3(14)6 and 16 compacted in accordance with Section 2-03.3(14)C - Method B of the Standard ' 17 Specification. , 18 C. Ballast and Crushed Surtace Top Course shall be placed and compacted in accordance with 19 ,Section 4-04 of the Standard Specifications. 20 ' 21 22 END OF SECTION 02300 ~' '' '' ~' 1 . , [yrms] 02300-5 EARTHWORK 02300-5 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT RIDGELINE MIDDLE SCHOOL CARTER STREET SE YELM, WASHINGTON Submitted to: Yelm School District PO Bog 476 Yelm, WA 98597 Submitted by: E3RA, Inc. PO Boz 44890 Tacoma, WA 98444 January 24, 2005 T04155 PO Box 44890 Tacoma WA 98444 253-537-9400 253-537-9401 fax E3RA January 24, 2004 T04155 Yelm School District P.O. Box 476 Yehn, Washington Attention: Erling Birkland Subject: Geotechnical Engineering Evaluation Ridgeline Middle School Carter Street South East Yehn, Washington Dear Erling: E31tA is pleased to submit this r ort describin the resul ep g is of our geotechmcal engineering evaluation for the new Ridgeline Middle School to be located west of Mill Pond Elementary School. E3RA conducted preliminary subsurface explorations on the project site in the summer of 2003. This report has been prepared for the exclusive.use of the Yehn School District and their consultants, for specific application to this project, in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practice. 1.0 SITE AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION The site is anirregularly-shape parcel located west of the existing Mill Pond Elementary School on the southwest side of Yelm, Washingtoq as shown on the enclosed Location Map (Figure 1). Plans call for the construction of a main school building, bus loops, vehicle parking areas, athletic fields, and portable classrooms. The school building will be 1 % stories with slab-on-grade floors. Infiltration ponds, planned for the northwest and south corners of the site, will dispose of collected runoff water. We understand that the part of the area near the east side of the planned construction was mined for sand and gravel and bacl~illed with fill soils i 2.0 EXPLORATORY METHODS We conducted preliminary explorations onsite during the summer of 2003 and we further explored surface and subsurface conditions at the project site on October 3, 2004.Our exploration program comprised the following elements: • A surface reconnaissance of the site• _ Two preliminary test pits (designated TP-1 and TP-2), .advanced on July, 2003, near the proposed school buildin ; g - ' - 1 . January 24, 2004 ,. E3RA, Inc. T04155 / Ridgeline Middle School • Ten test pits, (designated SL-1 through SL-10), advanced on October 3, 2004, in the vicinity of the proposed school building in locations surveyed by J. W. Morrissette and Associates, Inc.; • Five test pits for infiltration analysis, (designated SP-1 through SP-5), advanced on October 3, 2004, in the proposed infiltration ponds in locations surveyed by J. W. Morrissette and Associates, Inc. • Four series of infiltration tests, performed on soils within the proposed infiltration ponds • Two Grain Size Analyses performed on soil samples from beneath the site; and • A review of published geologic and seismologic maps and literature. Table 1 summarizes the approximate functional locations and termination depths of our subsurface explorations, and Figure 2 depicts their approximate relative locations. The following text sections describe the procedures used for excavation of test pits. TABLE 1 APPROXIMATE LOCATIONS AND DEPTHS OF EXPLORATIONS Termination ' Functional Location Depth Exploration (feet) TP-1 South side planned school building 9'/2 TP-2 North side planned school building 9 SL-1 Southeast of planned school building 9 SL-2 .. East of planned school building 16'/2 SL-3 South side of east part of planned school building 9 SL-4 North side of east part of planned school building 10 SL-5 West part of planned school building 10 SL-6 North side planned school building 10 SL-7 North side planned school building 12 SL-8 West end planned school building 10 SL-9 South of west end planned school building 10 SL-10 East edge planned school building 8 SP-1 Northwest part south infiltration facility 10 SP-2* Southwest part south infiltration facility 11 SP-3* Southeast part south infiltration facility 7'/2 SP-4* South part north infiltration facility 13 SP-5* North part north infiltration facility 12 Elevation datum: Site Plan - * Includes Infiltration Test January 24, 2004 ~ . E3RA, Inc. T04155 / Ridgeline Middle School The specific number and locations of our explorations were selected in relation to the existing site features, under the constraints of surface access, underground utility conflicts, and budget considerations. We estimated the relative location of each exploration. Consequently, the data listed in Table 1 and the locations depicted on Figure 2 should be considered accurate only to the degree permitted by our data sources and implied by our measuring methods. It should be realized that the explorations performed and utilized for this evaluation reveal subsurface conditions only at discrete locations across the project site and that actual conditions in other areas could vary. Finthermore, the nature and extent of any such variations would not become evident until additional explorations are performed or until construction activities have begun. If significant variations are observed at that time, we may need to modify our conclusions and recommendations contained in this report to reflect the actual site conditions. 2_1 Test Pit Procedures Our exploratory test pits were excavatedwith atrack-mounted excavator by anowner-operator under contract to E3RA. A geologist from our firm observed the test pit excavations, collected samples, and logged the subsurface conditions. The enclosed Test Pi t Logs indicate the vertical sequence of soils and materials encountered in each test pit, based on our field classifications. Where a soil contact was observed to be gradational or undulating, our logs indicate the average contact depth. We estimated the relative density and consistency ofthe in-situ soils by means of the excavation characteristics and the stability of the test pit sidewalls. Samples were stored in air-tight containers and transported to our Tacoma facility for. laboratory testing. ,Our logs also indicate the approximate depths of any sidewall caving or groundwater seepage observed in the test pits and the depths at which samples were collected. 2_2 Infiltration Test Procedures Our infiltration tests were performed in general accordance with the procedures prescribed in the EPA manual entitled On-Site Wastewater Treatment and Disposal Systems, except as modified by onsite conditions. Because invert elevations were not available at the time of our tests, a test pit was excavated to a nominal depth of 3'/s to 4'/z feet, a 6-inch-diameter PVC pipe was tamped approximately 3 inches into the soil at the bottom of the test pit, 2 inches of coarse, clean drain rock was placed at the bottom of the pipe to prevent scouring, and soil was placed and tamped outside the pipe for stabilization. The pipe was then filled twice withl foot of water to pre-saturate the test soils. If 1 foot of water infiltrated the test soils in less than 10 minutes, further saturation was deemed unnecessary and the infiltration test proceeded. If 1 foot of water infiltrated the test soils in more than 10 minutes, the test was ended and a soil sample was collected for textural analysis. After it was determined that 1 foot of water would infiltrate test soils in less than 10 minutes, the pipe was then filled with 6 inches of water, and, because site soils were found to be rapidly permeable, the time required for . infiltration of the entire 6 inch column of water was recorded. We repeated this procedure three times at each test location and used only the slowest of the 3 recorded infiltration rates in our analysis. After completion of all tests, the PVC pipes were extracted and the excavation was extended at least 3 feet deeper to identify soil conditions below the tested elevation. January 24, 2004 T04155 / Ridgeline Middle School E3RA, Inc. 3.0 SITE CONDITIONS The following sections of text present our observations, measurements, findings, and interpretations regarding, surface, soil, groundwater, seismic, and liquefaction conditions. 3.1 Surface Conditions The site is relatively flat in the vicinity of the planned school building. Just west of the planned school building, a very shallow Swale, trending north to south, grades very gently down to the south. Vegetation at the east edge of the planned. school building is grass that is part of the outfield of a baseball diamond. This ball field is part of the grounds of Mill Pond Elementary School. Vegetation on the remainder of the site consists of high pasture grass,.scotch broom, and an occasional, scattered fir tree. Several old fruit trees grow in the vicinity of the infiltration pond planned for the south part of the site: No hydrologic or erosional features were observed onsite. Fences separate the project site from neighboring properties except on the east boundary with Mill Pond School. An old wire fence, trending north-south, traverses the site across the central part of the planned school building. An old, two-tire pathway, which has been worn into the pasture grasses onsite, winds across the parcel. 3.2 Soil Conditions Our on-site explorations revealed that soil that soil conditions are relatively uniform across the site, but there are .some important exceptions. Generally, we observed a'/Z to 2 feet thick layer of sod and topsoil overlying 1 to 2 feet of volcanic ash-rich soil. The volcanic ash is intermittently mixed with glacial outwash. Where unmixed with glacial outwash, it is soft and comprised mostly of silt. Where mixed with glacial outwash, it is medium dense and comprised mostly of sand and gravel. Underlying the volcanic ash-rich layer, we observed medium dense to dense, weathered and unweathered, glacial outwash consisting of sandy gravel with few fines, abundant cobbles,. and occasional small boulders. Important exceptions to this general soil stratigraphy were observed at the east edge of the planned school building, where fill soils were observed, and at the northwest part of the south infiltration pond, where some partially cemented soils were observed. In the vicinity of the planned school building and surrounding portable buildings and pavements, in test pits TP-1, TP-2, and SL-1, and SL-3 through SL-9, we observed 4 inches to 2 feet of sod and topsoil overlying up to 2 feet of soft, silty volcanic ash or, intermittently, medium dense volcanic ash mixed with gravelly glacial outwash. The topsoil and soft, silty volcanic ash layers are thickest in test pit SL-8, located on the west part of the planned building. There, topsoil is 2 feet thick and is underlain by 2 feet of soft, silty volcanic ash. Fill underlies the east 18 to 20 feet of the planned school footprint. Our test pits in that vicinity, SL-2 and SL-10, indicate that the fill was placed over native, medium dense glacial outwash. This fill is probably backfill for the borrow pit that reportedly underlies the east part of the site. It appears to consist of a mix of volcanic ash and sandy, gravelly glacial outwash. It is consolidated to a medium dense state. Soils observed in test pit SL-10 indicate that the fill/native soil contact is near the surface 18 to 20 feet west of the easternmost edge of the building footprint and dips down to the east at a grade of about 2H:1 V. Fill soils are 8 feet thick about 5 feet east of the east building perimeter. We estimate that they are about 10 feet thick at the east building perimeter. 4 i ., January 24, 2004 E3RA Inc. T04155 / Ridgeline Middle School ' ~I Soil conditions are somewhat variable in'the vicinity of the infiltration pond planned for the south part of the site. In test pit SP-1, located in the northwest part of the south pond, we observed a foot of sod and topsoil overlying 2'/s feet of silty sand.' At a depth of 3 %s feet, we observed afoot-thick layer of gravelly sand with some silt; this layer became partially cemented from 4% to 9 feet. From a depth of 9 to the termination of the exploration at a depth of 11 feet, we encountered very dense, silty, gravelly sand. In the southwest part of the south infiltration pond, in test pit SP-2; we~observed 2% feet of topsoil and silty, sandy gravel overlying weathered glacial outwash consisting of sandy gravel with few fines. Unweathered glacial outwash, similar in consistency to the overlying weathered glacial outwash, was encountered at 3'/z feet and was found to extend to a depth of 7 feet. From a depth of 7 feet to the terminus of the exploration at a depth of 11 feet, we observed silty gravel with some sand and abundant cobbles. In the southeast part of the south infiltration pond, in test pit SP-3, we observed 2 '% feet of silty volcanic ash and volcanic ash mixed with sandy gravel overlying, to a depth of 7 % feet, glacial outwash consisting of sandy gravel ' with few fines. Refusal was met at a depth of 7'/Z feet, where either bedrock or a layer of large boulders was encountered. In the north infiltration pond; in test pits SP-4 and SP-5, we encountered 2%Z feet of sod, topsoil, and silty, sandy gravel overlying, to the termination of the explorations at 12 to 13 feet, glacial outwash consisting of sandy gravel with few fines. TABLE 2 LABORATORY TEST RESULTS FOR INFILTRATION ZONE SOIL5 Soil Sample, - Soil Type, Location Gravel Content Sand Content Silt Content De th feet SL-5, S-1, 3-8 Unweathered Outwash school building ercent g2 ercent 17 ercent SP-1, S-1, 4%-5'/Z , Unweathered0utwash, south and 35 ~, 60 1 5 The attached exploration logs provide a detailed description of the soil strata encountered in our subsurface explorations, and the attached lab sheets graphically display our laboratory results. 3_3 Groundwater Conditions At the time of our explorations, (July 2, 2003 and October 4, 2004), we did not observe groundwater underlying the school building and surrounding structures or the north infiltration pond. We observed moderate to rapid groundwater flow at a depth of 7%s feet in test pit SP-3, located on the southeast part of the south infiltration pond. We encountered slow groundwater seepage at a depth of 8 feet in test pit SP-2, located in the southwest part of the south infiltration.pond. We do not expect that significant quantities of groundwater will not be encountered in excavations for the proposed building. At. all times of the year groundwater levels would likely fluctuate in response to precipitation patterns, off--site construction activities, and site utilization.. . ~5 January 24, 2004 E3RA, Inc. T04155 / Ridgeline Middle School 3.4 Seismic Conditions Based on our analysis of subsurface exploration logs and our review of published geologic maps, we interpret the on-site soil conditions to correspond with a seismic site class SD, as defined by Table 1615.1.5 of the 2003 International Building Code (IBC). According to the IBC, the site is Seismic Region 3. 3_5 Liquefaction Potential. Liquefaction is a sudden increase in pore water pressure and a sudden loss of soil shear strength caused by shear strains, as could result from an earthquake.. Reseazch has shown that saturated, loose sands with a fines (silt and clay) content less than about25 percent are most susceptible to liquefaction. Our on-site subsurface explorations did not reveal saturated (or potentially saturated), loose, .silty sand layers or lenses, 3_6 Infiltration Conditions and Infiltration Rate . Two infiltration preliminary infiltration pond locations have been identified onsite. The first of pond location is in the northwest comer of the site and the second pond location is in the northwest corner of the site. Our pre-saturation tests indicated that tested soils were rapidly permeable everywhere except in test pit SP-1, located in the northwest part of the south infiltration pond. There a sample was collected and a textural analysis was performed. - . Our explorations in the north pond location, test pits SP-4 and SP-5, indicate that.a rapidly permeable layer underlies the north infiltration pond azea in a zone that begins below 2'/z feet and extends beyond depths of 12 to 13 feet. Our field infiltration tests found that waterinfiltrates soilswithin this infiltration zone at a rate in excess of 1 minute per inch. Generally, the maximum accepted infiltration rate is 1 minute per inch. Applying a Factor of Safety of 2, we recommend a Design Infiltration Rate is 2 minutes..per inch Infiltration conditions aze more variable within the footprint of the south infiltration pond. Our pre-saturation of the partially cemented soils lying at depths below 4%Z feet and above 9 feet in test pit SP-1 require more than 10 minutes, so a sample was collected and' a textural analysis was conducted. Our grain size analysis indicates that this soil contains 5 percent silt, 60 percent sand, and 35 percent gravel. According to the U.S.D.A. Textural Triangle, the analyzed soil is loamy sand, with apse-design infiltration rate of 5 minutes per inch. However, because some cementation was observed, we recommend a Factor of Safety of 5. Therefore, the Design Infiltration Rate for soils within the infiltration zone in the northwest part of the south infiltration pond is 25 minutes per inch. Fairly rapidly permeable soils were observed in SP-2, located in the. southwest part of the south pond area, between the depths of 2% and 7 feet; however, groundwater was encountered there at a depth of 8 feet. Our field infiltration rate for the zone between 2'/z and 7 feet is over 1'/Z minutes per inch. After the application of a Safety Factor of 2, we recommend a Design Infiltration rate of 4 minutes per inch there. Rapidly permeable soils were encountered in SP-3, located in the southeast part of the south pond area between the depths of 2'/Z and 7'/z feet, and groundwater was encountered there at a depth of 7'/Z feet. Based on our infiltration test in the this part of the south pond, we recommend an infiltration rate of 1 minute per inch and, after application of a Safety Factor of 2, a Design Infiltration rate of 2 minutes per inch. The results of our infiltration tests are presented.in Table 2. Because infiltration was rapid, we recorded the time necessary fora 6 inch high column of water to infiltrate completely. January 24, 2004 3 T04155 / Ridgeline Middle School ERA, Inc. u TABLE 2 FIELD INFILTATION TEST RESULTS, XELM JUNIOR HIGII Test Pit Location; Depth of Test; Soil Type Field Infiltration Rate for 6 inch Column SP-2 Southwest part south pond, 3'/Z feet, outwash with few/some fines 9 min 15 sec/6 inches SP-3 Southeast part south pond, 3%z feet,.outwash with few fines 2 min 17 sec/6 inches SP-4 South part north pond, 4 feet, outwash with few fines 3 min 3 sec/6 inches SP-5 North art north ond, 3'/Z feet, outwash with few fines 19 sec/6inches In test pit SL,-1, located south of the east part of the planned school building, rapidly permeable sandy gravel with few fines were observed from a depth of 1'/z to the termination of the exploration at a depth of 9 feet. Our field classification indicates that soils there have the maximum accepted infiltration rate ofl minute per inch. Applying a Factor of Safety of 2, we recommend a Design Infiltration Rate is 2 minutes per inch in this general area. 4.0 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS Plans call for the construction of a main school building 1'/2 stories high, bus loops, vehicle parking areas, athletic fields, portable classrooms and infiltration ponds. We offer the following general geotechnical conclusions and recommendations concerning this project. ' Feasibility: Based on our field explorations, research, and analyses, the proposed construction appears feasible from a geotechnical standpoint, provided that the recommendations in Section ' Sand in this report are followed. • Foundation Options: We recommend .conventional spread footings that bear on subgrades consisting of organic-free, medium dense or denser native soils. Bearing pads that are 3 feet thick will be necessary for the footings on the east 15 feet of the school building, where fill soils are present. Bearing pads may possibly be necessary where thick topsoil and soft silt extend several feet below existing grades, as on the west side of the school building footprint. Recommendations for spread footings and bearing pads are provided in Section 5. • Floor Options: We recommend concrete slab-on-grade floors for the structure. Some over- excavation of floor subgrade soils will probably be necessary where thick topsoil and soft silt extend several feet below existing grades. Recommendations for slab-on-grade floors are included in Section 5. • Infiltration Conditions: A thick layer of rapidly permeable soils underlie the north infiltration pond site and the area south of the east part of the planned school. Fairly shallow groundwater and a discontinuous, thinner, rapidly permeable soil layer partially underlie the south infiltration pond site. The following text sections of this report present our specific geotechnical conclusions and recommendations ' concerning site preparation, spread footings, slab-on-grade floors, drainage, asphalt pavement, and sttucdnal fill. The WSDOT Standazd Specifications and Standard Plans cited herein refer to WSDOT publications M41-10, Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, and M21-O1, Standard Plans for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, respectively. 3~ iFc%K~ P~'?" l~~ t ~ ~ +-r`~-:~ l ~ 3 7 t ~,/t-~ January 24, 2004 E3RA, Inc. T04155 / Ridgeline Middle School 4_1 Site Preparation , . Preparation of the project site should involve erosion control, temporary drainage, clearing, stripping, cutting, filling, excavations, and subgrade compaction. Erosion Control: Before new construction begins, an appropriate erosion control system should be installed This system should collect and filter all surface run off through either silt fencing or a series of properly placed and secured straw bales. We anticipate a system of berms and drainage ditches around construction areas will provide an adequate collection system.. If silt fencing is selected as a filter, this fencing fabric should meet the requirements of WSDOT Standard Specification 9-33.2 Table 3. In addition, silt fencing- should embed a minimum of 6 inches below existing grade. If straw baling is used as a filter, bales should be secured to the ground so that they will not shift under the weight of retained water. Regazdless of the silt filter selected, an erosion control system requires occasional observation and maintenance. Specifically, holes in the filter and areas where the filter has shifted above ground surface should be replaced or repaired as soon as they aze identified. Temporary Drainage: We recommend intercepting and diverting any potential sources of surface or neaz-surface water within the construction zones before stripping begins. Because the selection of an appropriate drainage system will depend on the water quantity, season, weather.conditions, construction sequence, and contractor's methods, final decisions regarding drainage systems are best made in the field at the time of construction. Based on our current understanding of the construction plans, surface and subsurface conditions, we anticipate that curbs, berms, or ditches placed azound the work areas will adequately intercept surface water runoff. Clearing and Stripping: After surface and neaz-surface water sources have been controlled, the construction areas. should be cleared and stripped of all sod and topsoil. Our explorations indicate that topsoil and sod average about 1 foot thick, but locally can be much thicker, as on the west part of the school footprint, where 2 feet of sod and topsoil overlie 2 feet of soft silt, volcanic ash. Stripping is best performed during a period~of dry weather. Site Excavations: Based on our explorations, we expect that excavations will medium dense to dense glacial outwash. No special equipment will be necessary to rapidly excavate site soils. Dewaterina: Our site explorations did not encountered groundwater in the vicinity of the planned school building. and we do not anticipate that significant groundwater flow will be encountered during earthwork activities. However, if groundwater is encountered, we anticipate that an internal system of ditches, sumpholes, and pumps will be adequate to temporarily dewater excavations. Temporary Cut Slopes: All temporary soil slopes associated with site cutting or excavations should be adequately inclined to prevent sloughing and, collapse. Temporary cut slopes in site soils should be no steeper than 1'/s H:1V, and should conform to WISHA regulations, Subgrade Compaction: Exposed subgrades for footings and floors should be compacted to a firm, unyielding state before new concrete or-fill soils aze placed. Any localized zones of looser granular soils observed within a subgrade should be compacted to a density commensurate with the surrounding soils. In contrast, any organic, soft, or pumping soils observed within a subgrade should be overexcavated and replaced with a suitable structural fill material. Overexcavation of the soft, silty volcanic ash that underlies the building site at of depths of up to 4 feet will be necessary. Areas where volcanic ash is mixed with sandy, gravelly glacial outwash, and is medium dense or denser, .will not need overexcavation. Site Fillips: Our conclusions regarding the reuse of on-site soils and our comments regarding wet-weather filling aze presented subsequently. Regazdless of soil type, all fill should be placed and compacted according to our recommendations presented in the Structural Fill section of this report. Specifically, building pad fill soil should n ~. January 24, 2004 E3RA, Inc. T04155 / Ridgeline Middle -School be compacted to a uniform density of at least 95 percent (based on ASTM:D-1557). On-Site Soils: We offer the followingevaluation ofthese on-site soils in relation to potential use as structural fill: • Surficial Organic Soils: The sod and topsoil that overlies the site at depths up to 2 feet is not suitable for use as structural fill, under any circumstances,. due to high organic content. Consequently, these materials .can be used only for non-structural purposes, such as in landscaping areas. • Volcanic Ash: The black, soft, volcanic ash that underlies the topsoil layer intermittently over the building site, is extremely sensitive to moisture content variations and will be difficult to impossible to reuse or to compact in situ. • Volcanic Ash/Glacial Outwash Mix: This soil underlies the site intermittently. It consists primarily of sand and gravel. It is somewhat sensitive to moisture content variations and will be difficult to reuse during wet weather conditions. • Weathered and Unweathered Glacial Outwash: These soils, comprised of sandy gravel with ' , few fines and abundant cobbles, are relatively insensitive to moisture content variations and can be reused during most weather condition, provided particles over 6 inches'are removed: ~' Permanent Slopes: All permanent cut slopes and fill slopes should be adequately inclined to reduce long-term raveling, sloughing, and erosion. We generally recommend that no permanent slopes be steeper than 2H:1 V. For ' all soil types, the use of flatter slopes (such as 2Y:H:1V) would further reduce long-term erosion and facilitate revegetation. Slope Protection: We recommend that a permanent berm, Swale, or curb be constructed along the top edge of all .permanent slopes to intercept surface flow. Also, a hardy vegetative groundcover should be established as soon as feasible, to further protect the slopes from runoff water erosion. Alternatively, permanent slopes could be armored with quarry spalls or a geosynthetic erosion mat. 4_2 Spread Footings In our opinion, conventional spread footings will provide adequate support for the proposed school building if the ' subgrades are properly prepared. ' Footing Depths and Widths: For frost and erosion protection, the bases of all exterior footings should bear at least 18 inches below adjacent outside grades, whereas the bases of interior footings need bear only 12 inches below the surrounding slab surface level. To reduce post-construction settlemerrts, continuous (wall) and isolated (column) footings should be at least 18 and 24 inches wide, respectively. Bearing Subgrades Footings should bear on medium dense or denser, undisturbed native soils which have been strippedof surficial organic soils, or on properly compacted structural fill which bears on undisturbed, medium ' dense or denser native soils which have been stripped of surficial organic soils. In general, before footing .concrete is placed, any localized zones of loose soils exposed across the footing subgrades should be compacted to a firm, unyielding condition, and any localized zones of soft, organic, or ' debris-laden soils should be overexcavated and replaced with suitable structural fill. The soft volcanic ash, which is not mixed with gravelly glacial outwash and primarily consists of silt, is difficult or impossible to adequately compact and will probably have to. be overexcavated. '. 'i 9 January 24, 2004 E3RA, Inc. T04155 / Ridgeline Middle School Subgrade Observation: All footing subgrades should consist of firm, wielding, native soils or structural fill materials compacted to a density of at least 95 percent (based on ASTM:~-1557). Footings should never be cast atop loose, soft, or frozen soil, slough, debris, existing uncontrolled fill, or surfaces covered by standing water: Bearing Pressures: In our opinion, for static loading, footings that bear on properly prepared subgrades that consist of glacial outwash or the medium dense ash/outwash mix can be designed for a maximum allowable soil bearing pressure of 2,500 pounds per square foot (psf). A one-third increase in allowable soil bearing capacity may be used for short-term loads created by seismic or wind related activities. ' Footing Settlements: Assuming that structural fill soils are compacted to a medium dense or denser state, we estimate that total post-construction settlements of properly designed footings bearing on properly prepared subgrades will not exceed 1 inch. Differential settlements for comparablyloaded elements may approachone-half of the actual total settlement over horizontal distances of approximately 50 feet. Footing Backfill: To provide erosion protection and lateral load resistance, we recommend that all footing excavations be backfilled on both sides of the footings, and stemwalls after the concrete has cured. Either imported structural fill ornon-organic on-site soils can be used for this purpose, contingent on suitable moisture content at the time of placement. Regardless of soil type, all footing backfill soil should be compacted to a density of at least 90 percent (based on ASTM:D-1557). Lateral Resistance: Footings that have been properly backfilled as recommended above will resist lateral movements by means ~of passive earth pressure and base friction. We recommend using an allowable passive earth pressure of 275 pounds per square foot for the glacial outwash onsite and an allowable base friction coefficient of 0:35. 4.3 Slab-®n-Grade Floors In our opinion;.soil-supported slab-on-grade floors can be used in the proposed structure if the subgrades are properly prepared. We offer the following comments and recommendations concerning slab-on-grade floors. Floor Subbase Because of the intermittent nature of the soft, silty volcanic ash that underlies the site, the need and extent of subbases should be based on actual subgrade conditions observed at the time of constnuction. When a subbase is needed, subbase fill should be compacted to a density of at least 95 percent (based on ASTM:D- 1557). Capillary Break and Vapor Barrier: To retard the upward wicking of moisture beneath the floor slab, we recommend that a capillary break be placed over the subgrade. Ideally, this capillary break would consist of a fl- inch-thick layer of pea gravel or other clean, uniform, well-rounded gravel, such as "Gravel Backfill for Drains" per WSDOT Standard Specification 9-03.12(4), but clean angular gravel can be used if it adequately prevents capillary wicking. In addition, a layer of plastic sheeting (such as Crosstuff, Visqueen, or Moistop) should be placed over the capillary break to serve as a vapor barrier. During subsequent casting of the concrete slab, the contractor should exercise care to avoid puncturing this vapor barrier. 4.4 Drainane Systems In our opinion, the proposed structure should be provided with permanent drainage systems to reduce the risk of future moisture problems. We offer the following recommendations and comments for drainage design and construction purposes. Perimeter Drains: We recommend that the school building be encircled with a perimeter drain system to collect seepage water. This drain should consist of a 4-inch-diameter perforated pipe within an envelope of pea gravel or washed rock, extending at least 6 inches on all sides of the pipe, and the gravel envelope should be wrapped with filter fabric to reduce the migration of fines from the surrounding soils. Ideally, the drain iuverE would be installed 10 ' Janua 24 2004 E3RA, Inc. ry T04155 / Ridgeline Middle School '` n r 8 in h ve the base of the erimeter footin s. o mo a than c es abo p g ~. ' Subfloor Drains: Based on the groundwater conditions observed in our site explorations, we do not infer a need for subfloor drains. Dischazge Considerations: All perimeter drains should discharge to an infiltration pond or other suitable location by gravity flow. The perimeter drains should be tightlined sepazately from roof drains to prevent roof drainage from entering the perimeter drainage system. ' Runoff Water: Roof-runoff and surface-runoff water should not dischazge into the perimeter drain system. Instead, these sources should dischazge into separate tightline pipes and be routed away from the building to a ' storm drain or other appropriate location. Grading_and Capping: Final site grades should slope downwazd away from the buildings so that r~moffwater will flow by gravity to suitable collection points, rather than ponding near the building. Ideally, the azea surrounding 1 the building would be capped with concrete, asphalt, or low-permeability (silty) soils to minimize or preclude surface-water infiltration. ~ 4_5 Asphalt Pavement Since asphalt pavements will be used for. the driveways, bus loops, and parking azeas, we offer the following comments and recommendations for pavement design and construction. 1~ Sub a Prepazation: All soil subgrades should be thoroughly compacted, then proof-rolled with a loaded dump truck or heavy compactor. Any localized zones of yielding subgrade disclosed during this proof-rolling operation t should be-over excavated to a maximum depth of 24 inches and replaced with a suitable structural fill material. All structural fill should be compacted according to our recommendations given in the Structural Fill section. Specifically, the upper 2 feet of soils underlying pavement section should be compacted to at least 95 percent ' (based on ASTM D-1557), and all soils below 2 feet should be compacted to at least 90 percent. Pavement Materials: For the base course, we recommend using imported crushed rock, such as "Crushed '. Surfacing Top Course" per WSDOT Standard Specification 9-03.9(3). If a subbase course is needed, we recommend using imported, clean, well-graded sand and gravel such as "Ballast" or "Gravel Borrow" per WSDOT Standazd Specifications 9-03.9(1) and 9-03.14, respectively. Conventional Asphalt Sections: A conventional pavement section typically comprises an asphalt concrete pavement over a crushed rock base course. Using the estimated design values stated above, we recommend using ' the following conventional pavement sections: ' ~ Minimum Thickness Pavement Course. ~ Car Parking Car & Truck Travel Bus Lanes Areas Lanes Asphalt Concrete Pavement 2 inches 3 inches 4 inches Crushed Rock Base 4 inches 6 inches ~ 6 inches Granular Fill Subbase (if needed) 6 inches 12 inches 2 inches Compaction and Observation: All subbase and base course material should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D-1557), and all asphalt concrete should be cmmpacted to at least 92 percent of the Rice value (ASTM D-2041). We recommend that an E3RA representative be retained to observe the compaction of each course before auy overlying layer is placed. For the subbase and pavement 11 ~~ January 24, 2004 E3RA, Inc. T04155 / Ridgeline Middle School course,~compaction is best observed by means of frequent density testing. For the base course, methodology observations and hand-probing are more appropriate than density testing. Pavement Life and Maintenance: No asphalt pavement is maintenance-free. The above described pavement sections present our minimum recommendations for an average level of performance during a 20 year design life; therefore, an average level of maintenance will likely be required. Furthermore, a 20-year pavement life typically assumes that an overlay will be placed after about 10 years. Thicker asphalt and/or thicker base and subbase courses would offer better long-term performance, but would cost more initially; thinner courses would be more susceptible to "alligator" cracking and other failure modes. As such, pavement design can be considered a compromise between a high initial cost and low maintenance costs versus a low initial cost and higher maintenance costs. 4.6 Structural Fill The term "structural fill" refers to any placed under foundations, retaining walls, slab-on-grade floors, sidewalks, pavements, and other structures. Our comments, conclusions, and recommendationsconcerning srtuct<ualfillare presented in the following paragraphs. Materials: Typical structural fill materials include clean sand, gravel, pea gravel, washed rock, crushed rock, well-graded mixtures of sand and gravel (commonly called "gravel borrow" or "pit-run"), and miscellaneous mixtures of silt, sand, and gravel. Recycled asphalt, concrete, and glass, which are derived from pulverizing the parent materials, are also potentially useful as structuual fill in certain applications. Soils used for structural fill should not contain any organic matter or debris, nor any individual particles greater than about 6 inches in diameter. Fill Placement: Clean sand, gravel, crushed rock, soil mixtures, and recycled materials should be placed in horizontal lifts not exceeding 8 inches in loose thickness, and each lift should be thoroughly.compacted with a mechanical compactor. Compaction Criteria: Using the Modified Proctor test (ASTM:D-1557) as a standard, we recommend that structural fill used for various on-site applications be compacted to the following minimum densities: Fill Application Footing subgrade and bearing pad Foundation backfill Slab-on-grade floor subgrade and subbase Asphalt pavement base and subbase Asphalt pavement subgrade (upper 2 feet) Asphalt pavement subgrade (below 2 feet) Minimum Compaction 95 percent 90 percent 95 percent 95 percent 95 percent 90 percent Sub~ade Observation and Compaction Testing: Regardless of material or location, all structural fill should be placed over firm, unyielding subgrades prepared in accordance with the Site Preparation section of this report. The condition of all subgrades should be observed by geotechnical personnel before filling or conch action begins. Also, fill soil compaction should be verified by means of in-place density tests performed.during fill placement so that adequacy of soil compaction efforts may be evaluated as earthwork progresses. 12 i ' January 24, 2004 E3RA, Inc. T04155 / Ridgeline Middle School '' Soil Moisture Considerations: The suitability of soils used for structural fill depends primarily ontheirgrain-size distribution and moisture content when they are placed. As the "fines" content (that soil fraction passing the U.S. No. 200 Sieve) increases, soils become more sensitive to small changes in moisture content. Soils containing more than about 5 percent fines (by weight) cannot be consistently compacted to a firm, unyielding condition ' when the moisture content is more than 2 percentage points above or below optimum. For fill placement during wet=weather site work, we recommend using "clean" fill, which refers to soils that have a fines content of 5 percent or less (by weight) based on the soil fracxion passing the U.S. No. 4 Sieve. 5.0 RECOMMENDED.ADDITIONAL SERVICES Because the future performance and integrity of the structural elements will depend largely on proper site preparation, drainage, fill placement, and construction procedures, monitoring and testing by experienced '' geotechnical personnel should be considered an integral part of the construction process. Consequently, we recommend that E3RA be retained to provide the following post-report services:. '; Review all construction plans and specifications to verify that our design criteria presented in this report have been properly integrated into the design; • Prepare a letter summarizing all review comments (if required by the city of Yehn); • Check all completed subgrades for footings and slab-on-grade floors before concrete is poured, in order to verify their bearing capacity; and • Prepare apost-construction letter summarizing all field observations, inspections; and test results (if required by the city of Yehn). 6.0 CLOSURE The conclusions and'recommendations presented in this report are based, in part, on the explorations that we observed for this study; therefore, if variations in the subgrade conditions are observed at a later time, we may need to modify this report to reflect those changes. Also, because the future performance and integrity of the project elements depend largely on proper initial site preparation, drainage, and construction procedures, monitoring and testing by experienced geotechnical personnel should be considered an integral part of the construction process. E3RA is available to provide geotechnical monitoring of soils throughout construction. 13 January 24, 2004 T041551 Ridgeline Middle School E3RA, Inc. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service on this project. If you have .auy questions regarding this report or auy aspects of the project, please feel free to contact our office. Sincerely, E3RA, Inc. . e ~~ ,~~~ ;~'^ ',~ i ~~ i ;~` 'y. ~1 /( \ ~ \~fi \ rngireer~r;.~c~oi~,ai« ~'~ ~~C`~`.~7~~~ ~ j ~., ~; ~ G ~ ; c ,;; Fred E. Rennebaum, L.E.G. Senior Geologist FER/JEB Enclosures: Figure 1 - Location Map Figure 2 - Site & Exploration Plan ~y~ C - O - G ,~~ James E Brigham, P.E. Principal Engineer Test Pit Logs TP-1 and TP-2, SL-1 through SL-10, and SP-l through SP-5 14 1 1 1 1 October 15, 2004 T04155 / Yelm Junior High School Depth !feet) 0.0 - 0.5 0.5 - 1.5 1.5 - 9:5 0.0 - 0.5 0.5 - 1.5 1.5 - 9.0 TEST PIT LOGS Material Description Test Pit TP-1 Location: South of proposed Junior High School Approximate ground surface elevation: Unknown 8 inches Sod and Topsoil. Medium dense, damp, black, silty, gravelly SAND with abundant cobbles (Glacial Outwash with Volcanic Ash) (SM). Dense, damp, light brown, sandy GRAVEL with some/trace silt and abundant cobbles; lens of gravelly sand at 6 feet (Glacial Outwash) (GP). Test pit terminated at approximately 9'/z feet on July 2, 2003 Slight to moderate caving 1'/z to 9`/z feet No groundwater encountered Test Pit TP-2 Location: North of proposed Junior High School Approximate ground surface elevation: Unknown 8 inches Sod and Topsoil. Medium dense, damp, black, silty, gravelly SAND with abundant cobbles (Glacial Outwash with Volcanic Ash) (SM). Dense, damp, Light brown, sandy GRAVEL with some/trace silt and abundant cobbles; (Glacial Outwash) (GP). Test pit terminated at approximately 9 feet on July 2, 2003 Moderate caving 1 `/z to 9 feet No groundwater encountered ERA, Inc. Sample No. October 15, 2004 ,, . E3RA, Inc. T04155 / Yelm Junior High School Death (feet) 0.0 - 0.5 0.5 - 1.0 1.0 - 9.0 0.0 - 1.5 1.5 - 15.5 15.5 - 16.5 TEST PIT LOGS Material Descriation Test Pit SL.-1 Location: Southeast of planned school building Approximate ground surface elevation: Unknown 4 inches Gravelly Topsoil and Sod. Medium dense, damp, black, silty, sandy GRAVEL with some cobbles (Glacial Outvvash with Volcanic Ash) (GM). Medium dense, damp, light gray-brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt and•abundant cobbles (Glacial Outwash) (GP). Test pit terminated at approximately 9 feet on October 4, 2004 Moderate caving 1 tog feet No groundwater encountered Test Pit SIr2 Location: East of planned school building Approximate ground surface elevation: Unknown 16 inches Gravelly Topsoil and Sod. Medium dense, moist, black, silty, sandy GRAVEL with some cobbles (Fill)) (GM). Medium dense, damp, light gray-brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt and abundant cobbles (Glacial Outwash) (GP). Test pit terminated at approximately 16% feet on October 4, 2004 No caving observed No groundwater encountered Samafe No. I I i October 15, 2004 T04155 / Yelrn Junior High School '~ '~ ~; '' ~~ '.. '~ r~ i i~ i, .. Death (feet) 0.0 - 0.5 0.5 - 1.0 1.0 - 3.0 3.0 - 9.0 0.0 - 1.0 1.0 - 2.0 2.0 - 7.0 7.0 - T0.0 TEST PIT LOGS Material Description Test Pit SIr3 Location: South of east part ofplanned-school building Approximate ground surface elevation: Unknown 6 inches Topsoil and Sod. Soft, damp, black, SILT with some gravel (Volcanic Ash) (IvII.). Medium dense, damp,.light brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt and abundant cobbles (Weathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). Medium dense to dense ,damp to moist, light gray-brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt and abundant cobbles (Unweathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). Test pit terminated at approximately 9 feet on October 4, 2004 Slight caving 1 to 9 feet No groundwater encountered Test Pit SIA Location: North of east part of planned school building Approximate ground surface elevation: Unknown Topsoil and Sod. ' Soft, damp, black, SILT with some gravel (Volcanic Ash) (1VII,). Medium dense, damp, light brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt and abundant cobbles (Weathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). Medium dense to dense, damp to moist, light gray-brown, sandy, GRAVEL with trace silt and abundant cobbles (Unweathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). Test pit terminated at approximately 16'/z feet on October 4, 2004 • Moderate to severe caving 2 to 10 feet No groundwater encountered E3RA, Inc. Samale No. October 15, 2004 E3RA, Inc. T04155 / Yelm Junior High School TEST PIT LOGS Death (feet) Material Description Test Pit SIrS Location: Central part of planned school building Approximate ground surface elevation: Unknown 0.0 - 0.5 8 inches Topsoil and Sod. 0.5 - 1.5 Soft, damp, black, SILT with some gravel (Volcanic Ash) (ML). 1.0 - 5.0 Medium dense, damp, light brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt and abundant cobbles (Weathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). 5.0 - 10.0 Medium dense to dense, damp to moist, light gray-brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt and abundant cobbles (Unweathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). Test pit terminated at approximately 9 feet on October 4, 2004 Slight to moderate caving 2 to 10 feet No groundwater encountered Test Pit SIr6 Location: North of central part of planned school building Approximate ground surface elevation: Unknown 0.0 - 0.5 _ 8 inches Topsoil and Sod. 0.5 - 1.5 Medium dense, damp, black, silty, sandy GRAVEL with some cobbles (Volcanic Ash 1.0 - 5.0 mixed with Glacial Outwash) (GM).. Medium dense, damp, light brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt and abundant cobbles 5.0 - 10.0 (Weathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). Medium dense to dense, damp to moist, light gray-brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt and abundant cobbles (Lnweathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). Test pit terminated at approximately 10 feet on October 4, 2004 Slight to moderate caving 2 to 10 feet No groundwater encountered Sample No. S-1 i 1 _: . , • October 15, 2004 T04155 / Yelm Junior High School ~..! .TEST PIT LOGS 1 Depth (feet) Material Descriation E3RA, Inc. Sample No. Test Pit SLr7 Location: North of central part of planned school building Approximate ground surface elevation: Unknown ~ 0.0 - 0.5 8 inches Topsoil.and Sod. . 0.5 - 1.5 Medium:dense, damp, black, silty, sandy GRA~~LEL with some cobbles (Volcanic Ash mixed with Glacial Outwash) (Glvi).. 1.0 - 5.0 Medium dense,-damp, light brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt and abundant.cobbles • (Weathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). 5.0 - 12.0 Medium dense to dense, damp to moist, light gray-brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt and abundant cobbles (Unweathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). Test pit terminated at approximately 12 feet on October 4, 2004 Moderate caving 2 to 12 feet ' No groundwater encountered Test Pit SL-S' Location: West of planned school building Approximate ground surface elevation: Unknown ' 0.0 - 2.0 ~ Topsoil and Sod. ' ~ 2.0 - 4.0 Soft, damp,'lilack, SILT with some gravel (Volcanic Ash) (IvII,). S-1 4.0 - 7.0 .Medium dense, damp, light brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt and abundant cobbles (Weathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). . 7.0 - 10.0 Medium dense to dense ,damp to moist, light gray-brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt and abundant cobbles (Unweathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). ' Test pit terminated at approximately 10 feet on October 4, 2004 ~ Moderate caving 4 to 10 feet No groundwater encountered , .! October 15, 2004 T04155 / Yelm Junior High School Depth (feet) 0.0 - 1.5 1.5 - 3.5 3.5 - 5.0 5.0 - 10.0 0.0 - 0.5 OS - 8.0 8.0 - 9.0 0.0 - 1.0 1.0 - 3.5 3.5 - 4.5 4.5 - 9.0 9.0 - 10.0 TEST P~'T LOGS Material Descr~ation _ E3RA, Inc. Test Pit SI~-9 Location: South of west part of planned school building, in bus lane Approximate ground surface elevation: Unknown 16 inches Topsoil and Sod. Medium dense, damp to moist, black, silty, sandy GRAVEL with some cobbles (Volcanic Ash mixed with Glacial Outwash) (GM). Medium dense, damp, light brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt and abundant cobbles. (Weathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). Medium dense to dense ,damp to moist, light gray-brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt and abundant cobbles (Unweathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). Test pit terminated at approximately 10 feet on October 4, 2004 Moderate caving 4 to 10 feet No groundwater encountered Test Pit SLr10 Location: 5 feet west of east edge of planned school building Approximate ground surface elevation: Unknown 4 inches Gravelly Topsoil and Sod. Medium dense, moist, black, silty, sandy GRAVEL with some.cobbles (Fill)) (GM). Medium dense, damp, light gray-brown, sandy GRAVEL with.trace silt and abundant cobbles (Glacial Outwash) (GP). Test pit terminated at approximately 9 feet on October 4, 2004 No caving observed No groundwater encountered Test Pit SP-1 Location: Northwest part south infiltration pond Approximate ground surface elevation: Unknown 14 inches Sod and Topsoil. Loose, moist, brown silty SAND (SM). Dense, damp, light brown, gravelly SAND with some silt (SP-SM). Dense, damp, light gray brown, gravelly SAND with some silt, abundant cobbles and scattered boulders; partially cemented (Glacial Outwasht) (SM). Very dense, wet to saturated, gray-blue, silty, gravelly SAND with some cobbles (Glacial Drift) (SM). Test pit terminated at approximately 10 feet on October 4, 2004 No cavving observed ' No groundwater encountered Sam le No. A i :' S-1 October 15, 2004 ~ . E3RA; Inc. T04155 / Yelm Junior High School TEST PTT LOGS Death (feet) Material Description Test Pit SP-2 Location: Southwest part south infiltration pond Approximate ground surface elevation: Unlmown 0.0 - 1.0 Topsoil ad Sod. 1.0 - 2.5 Loose to medium dense, damp, light brown, silty, sandy GRAVEL with some cobbles (Weathered Glacial Outwash) (GM). 2.5 - 3.5 Dense, damp, light brown, sandy gravel with somehrace silt, abundant cobbles, and scattered boulders (Weathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). 3.5 - 7.0 Dense, damp, light gray, sandy gravel with trace silt, abundant cobbles, and scattered boulders (Unweathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). 7.0 - 11.0 Dense, wet to saturated, light gray, silty, sandy GRAVELwith abundant cobbles (Glacial Outwash) (GM). Test pit terminated at approximately I 1 feet on October 4, 2004 No caving observed Slow seepage 8 to 11 feet ' Sample No. Test Pit SP-3 Location: Southeast part south infiltration pond Approximate ground surface elevation: Unknown 0.0 - 2.0 Soft, damp, black, SILT with some gravel (Volcanic Ash) (ML). 2.0 - 2.5 Dense, damp, black, silty, sandy GRAVEL with abundant cobbles (Volcanic Ash and Glacial Outwash) (GM). 2.5 - 7.5 Medium dense to dense, damp, light gray, sandy gravel with trace silt, abundant cobbles, , . and scattered boulders (Unweathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). Test pit terminated at approximately 7'/i feet on October 4, 2004 due to refusal on bedrock or several large boulders Slight caving 2 to 7 feet Moderate to rapid seepage at 7'/z feet October 15, 2004 ~ . E3RA, Inc. T04155 / Yelm Junior High School Denth (feet) TEST PIT LOGS Material Descrintion Samnle No. Test Pit SP-4 Location: South part north infiltration pond Approximate ground surface elevation: Unknown 0.0 - 1.0 14 inches Sod and Topsoil. 1.0 - 2.5 Medium dense, damp, light brown, silty, sandy GRAVEL with some cobbles (Weathered Glacial Outwash) (GM). 2.5 - 3.5 Medium dense to dense, damp, light brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt (Weathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). 3.5 - 13.0 Medium dense to dense, damp, light gray-brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt and abundant cobbles (Unweathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). Test pit terminated at approximately 13 feet on October 4, 2004 Moderate caving 3 to 13 feet No groundwater encountered Test Pit SP-5 Location: North part north infiltration pond Approximate ground surface elevation: Unknown 0.0 - 1.0 Sod and Topsoil. 1.0 - 2.5 Medium dense, damp, black, silty, sandy GRAVEL with some cobbles (Glacial Outwash with Volcanic Ash) (GM). 2.5 - 3.5 Mediumdense to dense, damp; light brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt (Weathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). 3.5 - 12.0 Medium dense, damp, light gray-brown, sandy GRAVEL with trace silt and abundant cobbles (Unweathered Glacial Outwash) (GP). Test pit terminated at approximately 12 feet on October 4, 2004 Severe caving 2 to 12 feet No groundwater encountered Logged by: FER r t 1 1 1 1 r i, 4 ...__~ 2 . _ • . . ~ 1 .. .. ~ ~~ a _: ~ ~ ~ - •',• '°~_. ~ .. i ~; '1R. . ;' ,jai ". tf~\ •• ~;,Jcll~`•, ~~-b. ~,P\ ~ . i I 24 ,•. '•.-' tfl~ti~ fields `' o`., t.. .•~' ..... ,,' =: 1- ._ ., - __. __.__ ....._... ~ \f emu' ` ~...`' .1 ~~\ ~ I. ' .._.. , a ~' ,. -. I ' Golf _:. Course .` ,,~ i~%~ •~~ / i~ .__._ . ". /ice., ..~ {~~.ark~~~ F \~ ~ :s.. ` .. _ ~i ~ A Yen ~`~;:.~ . '. .: • .- ~~. i _,~ jai ~l LO?ir~ . ~~ ~ ,~~ ~.,G.. ~ ..nN ' :, '` ' Athldtic,,'Field ,._ --- ' .,, ,- .. \ ., ~~t~`~~~% err ^, • } : - ,: • f .. ~ .I (.. . 3' 2 \ ' . . ~- .. ~ i .' 1 i • _ J ~ , ., ~. I_ ~ . GRIN ------- --'-0 - '~ ~ , L ~:, , _. .: I _. 111 _. _... i''; I !`--I~Iemmersm~F jKoon ~• - r 'S~ .,~ '~ I 'O ,.,o ~ 1, ~~, i 4hletic Field /.' ~ ' _ ff„ ---------------- ---------=------- - I •: 462 j ~~-4G0 _ I i:.: _.. - . ~.- ' - I _, ~- Pit - __'L 1` °----'- - ' (~ ~~ ~ % ~m,G' N 0 2, 000' MAP SCALE = 1" :2000 ft. E3RA YELM JHS GEOTECHNICAL REPORT FIGURE PO BOX 44890 TOPOGRAPHIC AND LOCATION MAP Tacoma, Washington 98444 YELM, WASHINGTON 3000 0 3000 6000 SCALE IN FEET JOB NO. T03118 SCALE: 1" = 3000' SHEET: FIGURE 2 FILE: YJHS-PIT.DWG r ii ~--~ ~~~ ~ ~ ~~ \ nnn`iii n nnm ~~ i un ~.~~- - - ~ 7TH E 3RA ~~~. ~~ w (N 0 0 N E W - 3000 0 3000 6000 SCALE IN FEET TEST PIT LOCATIONS 8 TP-Z SAIL LOG LAND SL-2 SOIL LOG POND SP-i NOTE: BOUNDARY AND TOPOGRAPHY ARE BASED ON MAPPING PROVIDED TO E3RA BY ERICKSON MCGOVERN~ PLLC AND OBSERVATIONS MADE IN THE FlELD. THE INFORMATION SHOWN DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A FlELD SURVEY BY E3RA. P.O.BOX 44890 TACOMA, WA 98444 253-537-9400 off 253-537-9401 fax www.e3ra.com PROJECT: YELM JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL TITLE: TEST PIT LOCATIONS DESIGNER: CRL DRAWN BY: CRL CHECKED BY: JEB DATE: 9/22/04 JOB NO. T03118 SCALE: 1" = 3000' SHEET: FIGURE 2 FILE: YJHS-PIT.DWG 0 /~/ ~ ~ , i ~ ~`--~ I / yO~ ~~~~~ 104th Ave. SE '~ ~ ~ i ~ Iq ~ TYPE II LANDSCAPE BUFFER I - _ i' aar ~amr w a w N 25'TYPEIILANDSCAPE BUFFER I • v .~~~ oo~, '~ .~ ~' ,, ,; __, ._, NEW CONNE; -- TO 10 -• 707 '~ `- - NEW CONNEi '' !1 ~' 1 1 I i 1 SECTION 02315 -TRENCHING, BACKFILLING & COMPACTION FOR .UTILITIES 2 3 4 - PART1 GENERAL 5 6 1.01 DESCRIPTION ' 7 8 A. Work of this Section is bound by the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specifications 9 sections, bound herein, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. ' 10 11 B. RELATED SECTIONS , 12. 13 1. Section 02215 - Subgrade preparation • 14 2. Section 02220 -Site, Demolition and Clearing & Preparation 15 3. Section 02300 -Earthwork 16 4. Section 02740 -Asphalt Concrete Pavement 'i 17 5. Section 02750 -Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, Curbs, and Sidewalks 18 6. Section 02721 -Catch Basins and Inlets 19 7.. Section 02630 - Stormwater System 20 1;' 21 1.02 WORK INCLUDED 22 23 A. Work. under this Section includes all labor, supervision, equipment, tools materials, services ' 24 .and incidentals necessary for trenching, bedding, backfilling, compaction and dewatering for i 25 water system, sanitary • sewer system, stormwater system, wall block systems, and the 26 associated appurtenances. 27 ,j 28 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 29 30 A. PERMITS & LICENSES 31 1. Obtain and pay for any required permits. 32 2. Contractor shall be licensed for any work required under this item. 33 34 B. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS • ',~ 35 1. The work under this section shall be governed.by the most current version of the WSDOT 36 "Standard Specifications" for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction published by the 37 Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT). 38 2. .All references in the Standard Specifications to measurement and payment shall be I 39 deleted from consideration, and the terms agreed to in the Contract substituted therefore. , 40 ' 41 1.04 CONSTRUCTION STAKING i 43 A. The Contractor shall supply all construction survey control and stakeout for the approval of 44 the Engineer prior to construction. The alignment of water mains, storm sewers and sanitary 45 sewers and locations of components to be installed shall be as indicated on the Contract '~, 46 Plans. All survey control work shall be done by a registered Land Surveyor or Professional 47 Engineer. 48 '' 49 B. Should construction staking be lost as a result of the Contractor's operations or as a result of 50 vandalism, the Contractor shall replace the staking at the Contractor's sole expense. 51 + 52 1.05 REFERENCE BENCHMARKS, MONUMENTS & PROPERTY. CORNERS , 53 54 • A. Maintain benchmarks, monuments, property corners, and all other reference points. If 55 disturbed or destroyed, benchmarks, monuments and property corners shall be replaced by a 56 registered Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer at the sole expense of the Contractor. 57 [yrmsJ 02315-1 .TRENCHING, BACKFILLING & COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES 02315-1 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2 3 2.01 BEDDING MATERIAL FOR RIGID AND FLEXIBLE PIPE 4 5 A. General 6 1. In general, determination of the source material for bedding shall be the responsibility of 7 the Contractor, but use of the materials shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 8 2. Otherwise, approved imported material shall be used for all material classifications. 9 10 B. Bedding Material 11 12 1. "Select native material" shall be defined as that portion of native material, one hundred 13 percent (100%) of which can pass a 3/4-inch U.S. Standard sieve. All material not 14 passing the 3/4-inch U.S. Standard sieve sha-I be hauled off site at the Contractor 15 expense. 16 2. "Imported bedding material" shall consist of clean, well graded granular material, meeting 17 the requirements for Bedding Material for Pipe in Section 7-10.3(9) of the Standard 18 Specifications. 19 20 2.02 BACKFILL MATERIAL 21 22 A. General Backfill Material 23 1. The material shall be substantially free from peat, wood, roots, bark or other. extraneous 24 material. 25 2. The material size of stones within this material shall not exceed 6 inches in the largest 26 dimension or as approved by the Engineer. 27 B. Select Granular Backfill: Select granular backfill material shall be clean crushed, partially 28 crushed, or naturally occurring granular material, meeting the following requirements for 29 gradation and quality 30 . 31 Sieve Size Percent Passing 32 33 3" square 100 34 1/4" square 25 minimum 35 U.S. No. 40 Sieve 40 maximum 36 U.S. No. 200 Sieve 7.5 maximum 37 Sand equivalent 35 minimum 38 39 40 PART 3 -EXECUTION 41 42 3.01 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING & COMPACTION FOR PIPE 43 44 A. Trench Excavation 45 1. Clearing and Grubbing: The area to be excavated shall be cleared and grubbed by the 46 Contractor. This work shall consist of the removal and disposal of all logs, stumps, roots, 47 brush, and all other refuse within the area to be excavated. All such material shall be 48 disposed of offsite at a Contractor provided waste site unless other wise directed by the 49 Engineer. 50 2. Removal of Existing Improvements: With certain exceptions the Contractor shall remove 51 and replace all culverts, .fences, pavements, sidewalks, and other obstructions that lie 52 within the area to be excavated, except items specifically marked for demolition. The 53 exceptions are utility improvements and any other items the Engineer may direct the 54 Contractor to leave intact. All materials described above shall be disposed of offsite at a 55 Contractor provided waste site. In removing pavement, sidewalks; and curbs,. the 56 Contractor shall make a vertical saw cut between any existing pavement, sidewalk, 57 culvert, or curb that is to remain and the portion to be removed. The Contractor shall 58 replace any existing pavement, sidewalk dr other improvement designated to remain that (yrms] 02315-2 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING & COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES 02315-2 '' 1 is damaged during the Contractor's operations. The costs of all such .replacement shall 2 be borne by the Contractor. , 3 3. Existing Utilities:. Existing utilities of record (electrical power lines indicated on the plans 4 -are estimations provided by the owner) are shown on the plans. These are shown for 5 convenience only, and the Engineer assumes no responsibility for improper locations or 6 ,failure to show utility locations on the Plans. The Contractor shall be responsible for 7 protecting all existing public and private utilities including, but not limited to telephone, 8 power, gas, and water lines. Call I-800-424-5555 for utility location. Any utility owner 9 may enter the job site to repair, _ rearrange, alter or. connect their equipment. The 10 Contractor shall cooperate with such efforts and shall avoid creating delays or hindrances 11 to those doing the work. As needed, the Contractor shall arrange to coordinate work 12 schedules. To ease or streamline the work, the Contractor may desire to ask utility 13 owners to move, remove, or alter their equipment in ways other that those listed in the 14 Plans. .The Contractor shall make the arrangements and pay all costs that arise form . 15 them. All costs that this section makes the Contractor's obligation shall be incidental to 16 the Contract Bid Items and no separate compensation will be allowed. , 17 4. Trench Excavation: Trench excavation shall be performed in accordance with section 7- . 18 08 ~pf the Standard .Specifications, except as modified herein. The length of trench 19 excavated shall be only that necessary to install the required improvements, shall be kept 20 to a minimum, and in no instance shall it exceed three hundred (300) feet unless 21 specifically authorized by the Engineer. All trenches shall be closed up at the end of the 22 day. In all cases, the trench must be of sufficient width to permit proper jointing of the 23 ~ _ pipe and backfilling of material along the sides of the pipe. Trench width at the surface of 24 the ground shall be kept to the minimum necessary to safely install the improvements ' 25 _ identified in the Contract Plans. 26 5. Shoring and Cribbing: Shoring and cribbing shall comply with Section 2-09.3(3)D of the 27 Standard Specifications. 28 29 B. Stockpiling & Disposal ~ 30 1: .Unless approved or directed otherwise by the Engineer, all excavated material shall be I 31 removed from the site and disposed of at a Contractor provided waste site. If suitable 32 material is encountered, the soil shall be piled beside the trench as it is removed, unless 33 otherwise directed, and shall be backfilled from the position. T.he material shall be piled 34 and maintained so that the tow of the slope of the material is at least 2 feet from the edge I 35 of the trench. It shall be piled in such a manner to prevent surface water from flowing into 36 ~ the excavation and in a manner that will cause a minimum of inconvenience to travel. 37 Free access shall be provided to all fire hydrants, water valves and meters; and 38 clearance shall be left to enable the free flow of stormwater in all gutters, conduits, and i 39 natural watercourses. ~ 40 ~ 2. The disposal of excess material shall be considered as incidental. 41 i 42 C. Co ntrol of Water ;` 43 1. The Contractor shall furnish, install and operate all necessary machinery, appliance and 44 equipment to keep excavations free from water during construction, and shall dewater 45 and dispose of the water so as not to cause injury to public or private property or to cause 46 a nuisance or menace to the public. The Contractor shall at all times have on hand ~ 47 sufficient pumping equipment and machinery in good working conditions for all ordinary 48 emergencies, including power outage, and shall have available at all times competent 49 workers for the operation of the pumping equipment. j 50 2. The control of ground water shall be such that softening of the bottom of excavations, or 51 formations of "quick" conditions or "boils" during excavation shall be prevented. 52 Dewatering systems shall be designed and operated to prevent removal of natural soils. 53 3. Dewatering of the trench shall be considered as incidental to the construction and all 54 costs thereof shall be included in the various contract prices in the proposal. 55 56 57 'f [yrmsi 02315-3 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING & COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES 02315-3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1.3 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 D. Bedding & Backfilling: 1. Pipe shall be bedded in conformance with Section 7-08 of the Standard Specifications and the details on the Contract Plans. Beddingshall be placed in more that one lift. The " first lift is to provide at least 4 inches of bedding under any portion of the pipe and shall be placed before the pipe is installed, and shall be spread smoothly so that the pipe is" uniformly supported along the barrel. Subsequent lifts of not more that 6 inches thickness shall be installed to a depth" of 6 inches over the crown of the pipe. Each lift shall be compacted to 95 percent of the maximum. density as determined by methods outlined in Section 2-03.3(14)D of the Standard Specifications. 2. For bedding purposes, "Select native" materials" shall be defined as that portion of native material, one hundred percent (100%) of which can pass a 3/4-inch U.S. Standard Sieve. 3. Trenches shall be backfilled in conformance with section 7-10.3(10) of the Standard Specifications. Prior to backfilling, all debris shall be removed from the trench. Sheeting used by the Contractor shall be removed just ahead of backfilling. Backfill up to 12 inches over the top of the pipe shall be evenly-and carefully placed. Materials capable of damaging the pipe or its coating shall , be removed from the backfill material. The remainder of the material shall be placed by dumping into the trench by any method at the option of the contractor and shall be compacted as specified herein after. A minimum 3 inch sand cushion shall be placed between the water main and existing pipelines or other conduits when encountered during construction and as directed by the Engineer. E. Compaction " 1. Pipe Bedding shall be compacted to at least 90% of the maximum. density as determined by ASTM D-1557 except as noted. Trench Backfill shall be compacted to at least a minimum of 95% of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D-1557. At locations where paved streets, roadway shoulders, driveways, or sidewalks will be constructed or reconstructed over the trench, the backfill shall be spread in layers and be compacted by mechanical tampers. In such cases, 'the backfill material shall be placed in successive layers not exceeding 6 inches in loose thickness, and each layer shall be compacted with mechanical tampers to the density specified herein. Mechanical tampers shall be of the impact type as approved by the Engineer. 3.02 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND PUBLIC SAFETY A. Traffic control shall be in accordance with Washington State Department of Transportation requirements when work is in Washington State right of way. B. Maintain appropriate barricades and signing to protect public safety. END OF SECTION 02315 [yrms] 02315-4 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING & COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES 02315-4 'f ~~ ~ 1 ~ - ~ ~, SECTION 02370 -EROSION CONTR L O 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 .. 6 7 1.01 DESCRIPTION - ' 8 A. Work of this Section is bound by the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specifications 9 sections, bound herein,. in .addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 10 - ~ 11 . B. 'RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 12 13 14 1. Section 02220 -.Site Demolition and Clearing & Preparation 2. Section 02300 -Earthwork • ~-. 15 3. Section 02315 -Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities 16 4. Section 02740 -Asphalt Concrete Pavement - 17 , ~ '- 5. Section 02750 -Portland Cement Concrete `Pavement, Curbs and Sidewalks 18 6. Section 02721 -Catch Basins and Inlets 19 7. Section 02630 - Stormwater System 20 21 1.02 WORK INCLUDED - 22 23 A.. Work under this Section includes all labor, supervision, equipment, .tools materials, services 24 and incidentals necessary for, but not limited to: installation of silt fence, installation of catch 25~ basin inlet protection, erosion control for disturbed surfaces, provide site maintenance of any 26 sediment transport inlet protection, plastic covering,. street cleaning, construction entrances, 27 seeding, fertilizing silt traps, and mulching. 28 B. Erosion control shall include all site surtace stabilization required during the construction of 29 the, project. Specifically, this effort is to include silt fences along the down slope perimeter of . 30 - the construction area, installing inlet protection in all inlets within the fenced project area and 31 along material haul routes, and. protection of all disturbed and exposed soil surfaces during 32 the. construction period where erosion is a potential. All erosion control measures installed 33 shall be maintained by the Contractor. 34 35 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 36 37 A. PERMITS & LICENSES 38 1. Obtain and pay for any required permits. 39 2: Contractor shall be licensed for anywork required under this item. 40 B. STANDARD SPECfFICATIONS 41 1. .The work under this section shall be governed by the -2004 version of the WSDOT " " 42 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction. published by the 43 Washington State Department of Transportation {WSDOT).. 44 2. All references in the Standard- Specifications to measurement and payment shall be 45 deleted from consideration, and the terms agreed to in the Contract substituted therefore. 46 47 48 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 49. S0 2.01 MATERIALS 51 52 A. Silt fence, inlet protection, plastic covering, street cleaning, seeding, fertilizing and mulching 53 shall be in accordance with Section 8-01 of the Standard Specification. 54 B. Stabilized construction entrance rock paving. shall consist of quarry spalls as described in 55 Section 9-13.6 of the Standard Specifications. 56 57 [yrms] 02370-1 EROSION CONTROL 02370-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 PART 3 -EXECUTION .. 3.01 EROSION CONTROL A. Silt fence, inlet protection, plastic covering, street cleaning, seeding, fertilizing and mulching shall be installed in accordance with Section 8-01 of the Standard Specification. B. The Contractor shall install silt fence... on the downhill side of all open trenches and disturbed areas, to prevent the migration of soil materials due to construction activities and as directed by the Engineer. C. The contractor shall install inlet protection on stormwater catch basins and manholes within and adjacent to the construction site and as directed by the Engineer. D. Disturbed surface stabilization, consisting plastic covering, street cleaning, seeding, fertilizing, seeding and mulching (see landscape plans and specifications for type and locations of seeding and mulching) shall be applied to areas where surficial soil~is exposed for more than 14 days during the. period between October 01 and April 01 and/or as directed by the Engineer. E. Stabilized construction entrance shall be constructed in accordance Section 8-01.3(6) of the Standard Specifications and in accordance with the plans. END OF SECTION 02370 [yrms] 02370-2 EROSION CONTROL, . 02370-2 i '' - 1 SECTION 02510 WATER SYSTEM 2 3 ~ -. '` 4 . PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 .1.01 DESCRIPTION 7 8 A. Work of this Section is bound by the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specifications 9 sections, bound herein, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 10 ; 11 -1.02 WORK INCLUDED 12 . 13 14 A. ~ Work under this section includes all tabor, supervision, equipment, tools, materials, service and incidentals ,necessary to furnish and. 'install water pipelines, valves, fittings and 15 appurtenances as shown on the Contract Plans to convert domestic service to irrigation, and 16 for domestic and fire services (see'the mechanical and architectural plans for all work within ~ 17 four feet of the building structure): ' 18 - 19 1:03 RELATED SECTIONS 20. 21 A. Section 02220 =Site Demolition and Clearing & Preparation 22 ~ B. Section 02300 -Earthwork 23 C. Section 023.15 -Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities 24 D. Section 02740 -Asphalt Concrete Pavement ~' 25 E. Section 02750- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, Curbs and Sidewalks 26 F. Section 02721 -Catch Basins and Inlets 27 28 G. Section 02630 - Stormwater System ~ " 29 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 30. 31 A. PERMITS & LICENSES ' ,' 32 - 33 1. Obtain and pay for any required permits. 34: 35 2. Contractor shall be licensed for any work required under this item. . 1 36 B. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 37 - 38 1. .The work under this section shall be governed by the 2004 version of the WSDOT. 39 "Standard Specifications" for Road, Bridge; and Municipal Construction published by the 40 Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT). 4T ~ 2. `-All.. references in the Standard Specifications to measurement' and payment shall be 42 deleted from consideration, and the terms agreed to in the Contract substituted therefore. 43 44 1.05 CONSTRUCTION STAKING 45 46 A. The Contractor shalt supply all construction survey control grid stakeout for the approval of 47 " the Engineer prior to construction. The alignment of water mains, storm sewers and sanitary 48 sewers and locations of components to .be installed shall be as .indicated on the Contract 49 " Plans. All survey control work shall be done by a registered Land Surveyor or Professional 50 Engineer. - 51 B. Should construction staking be lost as a result of the Contractor's operations or as a result of 52 vandalism; the Contractor shall replace the. staking at the Contractor'ssole expense. S3 ' 54 1.06 REFERENCE BENCHMARKS, MONUMENTS & PROPERTY CORNERS 55 56 A. Maintain benchmarks, monuments,. property corners, and all other reference points. If 57 disturbed or destroyed, benchmarks, monuments and property corners shall be replaced by a 58 ~ registered' Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer at the sole expense of the Contractor. [yrmsj 02510-1. WATER SYSTEM 02510-1 1 1.07 SYSTEM INSPECTIONS 2 3 A. The water system shall be inspected by the City of Yelm as required. Coordinate with the City 4 for all required testing and inspections. The Design Engineer shall be notified 24-hour for 5 testing, inspections and backfilling. 6 7 1.08 FIRE HYDRANT LOCKS 8 9 A. All fire hydrants shall be provided with fire hydrant locks per the City of Yelm regWirements. 10 The lock shall be purchased from the City of Yelm Public Works Department. 11 12 1.09 INDICATOR POST 13 14 The Indicator Post for the fire service shall be furnished with all components meeting the City 15 of Yelm Standards. The Indicator Post Valve shall be a Kennedy Model 2945, or equivalent, 16 and shall be both UL listed and FM approved for fire service, and furnished with all required 17 components including, but not limited to: .bronze operating stem, 1-inch steel square 18 operating rod, cast aluminum "open" and "shut" indicator target plates; polycarbonate 19 window, ductile iron upper and lower body, ductile iron cap, lockable ductile iron operating 20 wrench, stainless steel operator cotter pins, and shall include a tamper switch. All required 21 metallic components shall be brass, bronze iron, or zinc plated steel. 22 23 24 PART 2 -PRODUCTS ~ . . 25 26 2.01 WATERMAIN PIPE & FITTING MATERIALS 27 28 A. Pipe shall be of several material types as noted on the plans and as described herein. Pipe 29 material types are interchangeable only as described herein. 30 1. All watermain shall meet the City of Yelm Standards and as shown on the contract plans 31 and notes. 32 2. All fittings for ductile iron pipe shall be ductile iron or PVC pipe shall be ductile iron 33 compact fittings conforming to AWWA C 153 or Class 250 gray iron conforming to 34 AWWA C 110 and C 111. All shall be cement mortor lined conforming to AWWA C 104. 35 Plain end fittings shall be ductile iron if mechanical joint retainer glands are install on the 36 plain ends. All fittings shall be connected by flanges or mechanical joints. They shall meet 37 the City of Yelm Standards. . 38 .. 39 2.02 GATE VALVES AND VALVE BOXES . 40 41 A. Gate Valves shall conform to AWWA C509-80 latest edition and shall be resilient wedge non- 42 rising stem (NRS) with two. internal o-rings stem seals. Gate valves shall be Mueller, M & H, 43 Kennedy, Clow R/W or Waterous Series 500 meeting the City of Yelm Standards as shown 44 on the contract plans and notes. 45 . 46 B. All valve boxes shall have a standard Inland Foundry, Yelm 248 Water valve box set to grade 47 with a 6 inch ASTM D30304 SDR 35 PVC riser from valve to within 4 to 6 inches of valve box 48 ~ top., if valves are not set in paved area, a 3 foot by 3 foot by 4 inch concrete pad shall be set 49 around each valve box at finished. grade..ln areas where valve box falls in road shoulder, the 50 ditch and shoulder shall be graded before placing asphalt or concrete pad. 51 52 2.03 FIRE HYDRANTS 53 54 A. The lead from the service main to the fire hydrant shall be ductile iron- cement mortor lined 55 Class 52 no less than 6 inches in diameter. MJ joints shall be restrained with wedge action 56 retainer glands; MegaLug 1006 or approved equal. 57 Fire hydrants, shall have two, 2-1/2 inch outlets and one 4-1/2 inch pumper port outlet. All4 58 - .outlets ports shall be National Standard thread. The valve opening shall be no .less than 5-1/4 [yrms] 0251 0-2 WATER SYSTEM 02510-2 ' " " 1 inch diameter with a 5-inch Storz coupling and blind flange cap installed on the steamer 2 port. The hydrant shall have a positive and automatic barrel drain and .shall tie of the "traffic 3 safety" or break-away style; i.e., when accidentally broken off, water will not flow. ' 4 5 All hydrants shall be center-stem compression design, valve shall open against pressure. 6 7 ~ Hydrants shall be M & H Reliant Style 929 or Style 129, Mueller Centurion, or Clow 8 Medallion. Ali hydrants shall be bagged. until system is approved. 9 10 2.04 PIPE DETECTION WIRE ' 11 12 A. As noted on the contract plans ..and notes, pipe detection wire shall be 14 gage heavy duty 13 14 direct bury coated wire (PAIGE "UF" single conductor or equal). 15 2.05 MARKER TAPE 16 17 A. As noted on the contract plans and notes, marker tape shall be plastic non-biodegradable 18 and metal core with backing marked "Water" which can be detected by a standard metal 19 detector. Tape shall be Terra Tape "D" or approved equal, 2" wide, blue, continuously 20 21 marked with "Caution Waterline Buried Below." 22 2.05 IRRIGATION METER 23 24 A. The irrigation meter shall meet the City of Yelm Standards and as shown on the contract 25 plans and notes (see.the irrigation plans and specifications for the landscape system beyond 26 the point of connection).., 27 28 2.06 MECHANICAL JOINT RESTRAINT GLANDS 29 30 A. Mechanical joint restraint glands shall be MegaLug 1100 Series for ductile iron pipe or 31 MegaLug 2000 PV for PVC pipe or approved equal. ' 32 33 2.07 PIPE-JOINT RESTRAINT 34 ' 35 B. Where shown on the plans pipe joint restraint for .ductile iron pipe shall. be EBBA Iron Series 36 1200 for Mechanical joint end pipe, EBBA Iron Series 1700 for bell end pipe, or mechanical 37 joint sleeve coupling with EBBA iron series_ 1200 for each end or approved. equal. 38 ' 39 2.08 DOMESTIC WATER METER 40 41 A. The 3 inch domestic water meter shall be a Neptune TRU / FLO Compound Meter, directing 42 ~ reading, reading units .of cubic feet, bronze flanges, and bronze strainer. The meter shall 43 meet the City of Yelm standards. 44 ' . 45 46 PART 3 -EXECUTION 47 3.01 PIPE AND FITTING INSTALLATION FOR WATERMAINS 48 1 49 ~ . A. Ductile Iron Pipe shall be installed in .accordance with Section 7-09 of WSDOT/APWA 50 Standard Specifications and the City of Yelm Standards. In case of conflict, follow the City of 51 Yelm Standards.. Minimum cover for waterlines shall be 3.5 feet measured from the top of 52 ~ the pipe to finished grade except as otherwise shown on the Contract Plans or as required'to 53 maintain separation from existing utilities. 54 B. The cost of furnishing and installing water fittings shall be deemed incidental to the pipe, and 55 no separate compensation shall be made. 56 C. The contractor is required to be a certified installer all fire line pipirig including the Post 57 Indication Valve to the building to meet.all fire codes. 58 ' (yrms1.02510-3' WATER SYSTEM 02590-3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 3.02 DETECTION WIRE/MARKER TAPE A. In conformance with the City of Yelm Standards as shown on the contract plans and notes, the Contractor shall furnish and install pipe detection wire. The wire shall be installed at a depth of 12" to 18" below finished grade, above the pipeline, and as approved by the Engineer. B. The wire shall be laid continuously over all portions of the Waterman, shat{ be copper taped to the top of the pipeline to prevent movement during backfilling and shall be brought up and tied to all valve bodies, meter setters with the end of the -wire accessible to hook up to a locator with a minimum of 2 ft of slack. C. The wire shall be laid loose enough to prevent stretching and damage D. Detection wire shall be detectible with a standard metal detector. E. Toning wire shall be tested prior to acceptance of the pipe system. 3.03 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with Section 7-12 of the WSDOT/APWA Standard Specifications and in conformance with the City of Yelm Standards as shown on the contract plans and details. The Contractor shall furnish and install valve operator risers as approved by the Engineer at all locations where valve operating nuts are located deeper than five (5) feet below finished grade. The cost of furnishing and installing the valve operator risers shall be deemed incidental to the gate valve, and no separate compensation shall be made. 3.04 THRUST BLOCKING A. All underground fittings shall be installed with the proper thrust blocking in conformance with the details shown on the plans and with the Waterworks Manual -Basic by the Coordinating Council for Occupational Education. Where noted on the contract plans and details mechanical joint restraining glands shall be used in lieu of thrust blocking. 3.05 WATER FACILITIES DISINFECTION AND TESTING A. Upon completion of the construction of the Water system, the Contractor shall test each component and the entire system to confirm the operational adequacy of the system and portability of the water provided. B. Bacteriological Disinfection 1. The Contractor shall chlorinate, flush and obtain satisfactory samples from the locations designated by the Engineer. All waterlines shall be disinfected and flushed in conformance with Section 7-11.3(12) of the WSDOT/APWA Standard Specifications. 2. Sections of pipe to be disinfected shall first be flushed to remove any solids or contaminated material that may have become lodged in the pipe. If no hydrant is installed at the end of the main, then a tap shall be provided large enough to develop a velocity of at least 2.5 fps in the main. 3. Taps required by the Contractor for temporary or permanent release of air, chlorination or flushing purposes, shall be provided by the Contractor as a part of the construction of water mains. 4. Where dry calcium hypochlorite is used for disinfection of the piping, flushing shall be done after disinfection. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of treated water flushed from mains and sha11 neutralize the wastewater for protection of aquatic life in the receiving water before disposal into any natural drainage channel. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposirig of disinfection solution to the satisfaction of State and local authorities. If there is no acceptable area for disposal of water flushed from mains, the Contractor shall haul the water to a site approved by School .District staff and shall dispose of the water at the site per School District staff requirements. C. Hydrostatic Pressure Testing pressure pipelines shall be tested with hydrostatic pressure in accordance with Section 7-11.3(11) of the WSDOT/APWA Standard Specifications. (yrms] 02510-4 WATER SYSTEM 02510-4 1 D. Incidentals: All service taps, temporary connections, chemicals, wastewater disposal 2 requirements, and appurtenances required for pressure and portability testing shall be 3. deemed incidental to the installation of the watermain and services and no separate 4 compensation shall be made. 5 6 END OF SECTION 02510 [yrms] 02510-5 WATER SYSTEM 02510-5 1 SECTION 02530 - 2 3 pART1 GENEgA6 4 C 1~i t ~, 1 ~~ 5 6 1.01 7 S 10 11 12 1.02 13 14 15 16 1.03 t7 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1.04 25 26 27- 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 3S 36 31 3$ 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 1 53 54 ti 55 ~ 56 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this section is bound by the Conditions of the Contr ec f cation andn 1 Specifications sections, bound herein, in addition to this Sp accompanying Drawings. RELATED SECTIONS action for Utilities. A. Section 02315 -Trenching, Backfilling and Cornp WORK INCLUDED sewage disposal including gravity collection pipe, A. This section includes sanitary s STEP tanks, clerovaltof STEP pump control & alarm panel, STEP pump , pressure sewer line, and appu~enances. Where City of Yel a d controUalarm construction is required, STE Cin of,Yelm apps vaL d pump assemblies, submit copies of ty QUAL1-f1r ASSURANCE ~ defined references The.work under this section shall be governed by the following A. , except as modified herein. STPAN.DARD SPECIFICATIONS: The "Shall be goveeneld by the 2004 of the "AP+IV:AIWSDOT" wherein referenced s American Star-daFd Specifications for Road, Bridge, and ortation (WSDOT)tion publishe by the Washington State Department of Transp and the City of Yelm Development Guidelines. a ment shall Public Works Association (APWA) ensation will be allowed. All references in the Standti n and no separate comp rement and p y be deleted from considers , The National Electric Code The Washington Safety Code . All local codes and ordinances. _ ___ r^^ 1.05 REFERtN~c o~~.~.~ ~ ...... - Maintain bench marks, monuments, property. corners, and all othe foreeere corners A. ed, bench marks, monuments and p ineer. points. If disturbed or desistered Land Surveyor or Professional Eng shall be replaced by a reg 1.06 EXISTING UTILITIES. lans. A, Existing utilities of record, except servic and the Eng neertassumes nop .These are shown for convenience only, responsibility for improper locations or failure to show utility locations on the lans. The Contractor shall be resp s Contractor shall ontact the u'ntderground P shall be responsible for any damage riot to construction. utility locating service at 1-800-424-5555 48 hours p 02530-1 SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS lyrms] 02530-I 1.07 BUILDING AND ELECTRICAL PERMITS 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 A. Obtain permits and inspections required by state and local authorities. During progress, the work will be observed by the Architect, Engineer or authorized representative and by state and local Building and Electrical Inspectors and their certificates shall be furnished to the Owner. Notify Engineer in writing when certificates have been.delivered. The Contractor shall include the costs of all permit fees in the contract bid and no separate compensation will be made. 1.08 REGULATIONS A. The pumps, float switches, and wiring, control panel, and appurtenances shall comply with the State of Washington's Department of Labor and Industries requirements. B. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner a copy of the Electrical Inspector's acceptance certificate for installation before payment will be made for that installation. 1.09 CONSTRUCTION SURVEY CONTROL A. The Contractor shall supply all construction survey control and construction staking for the approval of the Engineer prior to construction. All survey control work shall be done by a registered Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer. Maintain all bench marks, monuments and all other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, monuments and bench marks shall be replaced by a registered Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer. The Contractor shall be compensated for work performed on this project based on the units of work identified in the proposal. All work required to complete the project and not specifically identified in a proposal item, such as but not limited to construction staking, etc., shall be deemed incidental to the items of work in the proposal and no separate compensation shall be made. 1.10 . SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made for the materials specified in this section. The Contractor shall furnish four (4) sets of submittals to the Engineer for review. 1.11 FIELD APPROVAL OF WORK A. All construction shall be field approved by the Engineer, Jerome W. Morrissette & Associates Inc., P.S. 1.12 SYSTEM INSPECTIONS A. The water system shall be inspected by the City of Yelm as required. Coordinate with the City for all required testing and inspections. The Design Engineer shall be notified 24-hour for testing, inspections and backfilling. 2.01 PVC PIPE & FITTINGS A. PVC gravity sewer pipe shall conform to ASTM b3034 (SDR 35) with gasket or solvent or solvent weld joints and fittings. [yrms] 02530-2 SANITARYSEWERAGE SYSTEMS 02530-2 r 1 B. PVC Pressure sewer pipe, 2 inches and above shall be Class 200 PVC IPS 1120 2 (SDR 21) with rubber gasketed joints in conformance with ASTMD 1784 and 3 have a working pressure of 200 PSI. 4 C. PVC pressure pipe, less than 2-inches shall be Schedule 40, solvent weld joints 5 and comply with ASTMD 1785. 6 D. .Solvent Weld Joints -Solvent cements and primer for joining 7 PVC pipe and fittings shall comply with ASTMD 2564 and be 8 as recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturers. 9 ~ E. Rubber Ring Gaskets shall comply with ASTMD 1869 and 10 ASTMD 3139 and shall be supplied by the pipe or fitting ' 11 manufacturer with a sufficient amount of lubricant. The 12 lubricant shall be water soluble, non toxic, non supportive of 13 bacterial growth and have no deteriorating effect on the PVC ' 14 or gasket. I S F. Bedding -Bedding shall be crushed or granular material as 16 Per Section 9-03.12(3) of the Standard Specifications. 17 Bedding shall be installed as shown on the Standard Details. 18 G. PVC Gravity sewer pipe in the Service Yard shall AWWA C900, Class 150. 19 20 2.02 DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE 21 22 A. Pipe detection tape shall be 14-gauge coated copper wire meeting City of Yelm 23 Standards. All costs to furnish and install complete detectable marking tape shall 24 be included in the contract bid price. ' 25 26 2.03 CLEAN OUTS 27 28 A. Clean outs shall conform to the detail as shown on the Contract Plans. All costs 29 to furnish, install a complete clean out shall be included in the contract bid price. 30 31 32 2.04 STEP TANK 33 A. The septic tank shall be a Xerxes single wall of the size noted on the 34 plans and details. 35 36 Fiberglass STEP tanks shall be in conformance with City of Yelm 37 Development Guidelines, Chapter 7 -Sanitary Sewer Requirements 38 39 for Fiberglass Tanks. Loading criteria for fiberglass Step tanks shall be as noted in Chapter 7. The contractor shall obtain City of Yelm 40 approval for the fiberglass tank proposed for installation prior to 41 installation. The tank installation must meet the City of Yelm 42 Development Guidelines and have all City of Yelm required 43 inspections and testing prior to being accepted by the owner. 44 45 2.05 STEP PUMP ASSEMBLIES 46 47 A. In accordance with City of Yeim Development Guidelines, STEP pumps shall be 48 Orenco P20 05 11, rated at 20 gpm at 105 feet T.D.H., and with ashut-off head. 49 of not less than 160 feet. A 1/8" bypass orifice shall be drilled in the discharge 50 head of the pump to allow for cooling pump motor during periods of no discharge. 51 B. Internal Vaults shall be as Orenco Biotube as noted on the plans and details. 52 C. Float switch assembly shall be Orenco MF-A3GT or equal subject to City of Yelm S3 approval. 54 D. Pump Control and alarm panel shall be Orenco TA 1 I R3 RO ETM CT or equal 55 subject to City of Yelm approval. [yrms] 02530-3 SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS 02530-3 1 E. Hose and valve assemblies shall be Orenco HV 125 BASX _11/4" diameter, PVC 2 hose with PVC union and ball valve and anti-siphon valve or equal subject to City 3 of Yelm approval. 4 F. Risers for step tanks shall be ribbed PVC or FRP as noted on the plans and 5 details and shall be in accordance with City of Yelm Development Guidelines 6 Chapter 7 Requirements. 7 G. Traffic bearing lids shall be as noted on the plans and details. 8 H. Additional material requirements -all equipment including but not limited to pump 9 vaults, risers, bonding epoxy, splice boxes, discharge piping, float assemblies, 10 pump control and alarm panel, etc. shall be in conformance with City of Yelm 11 Development Guidelines Requirements. 12 13 2.06 VALVES, SADDLES AND VALVE BOXES ' 14 15 A. Ball valves shall meet the City of Yelm Development Guidelines. 16 B. Gate valves shall meet the City of Yelm Development Guidelines. 17 C. Check valves shalV meet the City of Yelm Development Guidelines. 18 D. .Valves Boxes shall meet the City of Yelm Development Guidelines. 19 E. Saddles shall meet the City of Yelm Development Guidelines. , 20 F. Standard Service Boxes shall meet the City of Yelm Development Guidelines. 21 22 23 PART 3 -E XECUTION 24 25 3.01 GRAVITY SEWER LINES 26~ 27 A. INSTALLATION 28 ' Gravity sanitary sewer construction shall conform to the requirements of Section 29 7-17.3 of the Standard Specifications. Foundation stabilization, preparation of ~. 30 bedding and initial and subsequent backfill shall be in,accordance with the 31 requirements of Section 02315 and as shown on the Contract Drawings. All 32 gravity sewers shall be cleaned and low pressure air tested in accordance with 33 Section 7-17.3 (2). 34 B. CONNECTION TO BUILDING SANITARY SEWER 35 The site contractor shall make the final connections to the building sanitary I' 36 sewers at the points shown on the Contract drawings. The site contractor shall 37 confirm the exact location of building stubouts and shall adapt as required. 38 C. ' CLEANOUT INSTALLATION 39 , Cleanouts shall be installed where shown on the Contract drawings and where 40 required for bends as provided by the Uniform Plumbing Code and as amended ' 41 by the local government: All clean-outs shall be extended to finished grade in '42 conformance with the detail shown on the Contract Drawings. `' 43 D. MANHOLE ! 44 Manhole and construction shall be as noted on the plans and details and shall be 45 as in conformance with section 7-05 of the Standard Specifications except as ~ 46 ' herein modified. 47 ` 48 3.02 PRESSURE SEWER LINES 49 50 'A; INSTALLATION ~ i 51 Installation of pressure sewer lines shall be in conformance with Chapter 7E of 52 the City of Yelm Development Guidelines. Installation of solvent weld pipe shall 53 ' be in accordance with ASTM D 2855 and the manufacturer's recommendations. 54 A double bell, rubber ring coupling shall be installed on solvent weld piping runs 55 longer than 100 feet. Spacing of rubber ring coupling shall be at 100 foot 56 spacing. ~' I [yrms] 02530-4 . SANITARY SEWERAGE~SYSTEMS ~ 02530-4 _ ~;' '~ U ~] r T B. CLEARANCE FROM WATER MAINS 2 At locations where pressure sewer mains or services cross water mains the 3 pressure sewer main or pressure sewer service shall be installed below the 4 .waterline so as to provide a minimum clearance of 18 inches. !n addition, the 5 length of sewer pipe shall be centered at the point of crossing so that the joints 6 will be equidistant and as far as possible from the waterline. The. sewer pipe shall 7 be the longest standard length available from the manufacturer, with a minimum 8. acceptable length of 18 feet. 9 10 3.03 DETECTION WIRE 11 I2 A: The Contractor shall install a continuous strand of 14-gauge coated copper wire 13 taped to the crown of all PVC sanitary sewer effluent pressure service lines. In 14 addition, wire shall be spliced to provide electrical continuity by looping into valve 15 boxes so as to be accessible. 16 17 3.04 TRACER TAPE 18 19 A. Tracer tape for sanitary sewer lines shall be installed identically as shown on the 20 contract plans for watermain installatiori. Tape shall be installed over all sanitary 21 sewer gravity collection lines and pressure effluent lines per the City of Yelm 22 Standards... 23 24 3.05 CLEANING AND'TESTING 25 26 A. Cleaning and testing of the Gravity sewers shall be in accordance with Section 7- 27 17.3(2) of the Standard Specifications.. ~ ' 28 B. Cleaning and testing of STEP sewer lines shall be in conformance with the City of 29 Yelm Development Guidelines and shall obtain City of Yelm approval. 30 31 3.06 STEP TANK AND VALVE BOX INSTALLATION . 32 33 ~ A. Install tanks in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the City of 34 Yelm Development Guidelines. Tanks'with cracks or other surtace imperfections 35 will be rejected and immediately removed from the site. 36 B. Earthwork shall be in accordance with Section 02300. , 37. C. ~ ,Shoring and dewatering where required, shall be in accordance with Sections 38 02345 and 02215. Backfill shall be placed and compacted in 8-inch maximum 39 ,lifts. Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's recommendations regarding 40 backfilling.` ' 4T D. The backfill under and around the point'of piping connections (both inlet and 42 outlet) to the tank shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum density as 43 °- determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 to prevent differential. settlement 44 and separation of the piping #rom the tank. 45 E. Contractor, shall remove excess excavated material after tank installation and 46 shall grade the site. so that a gentle slope exists,away from the access cover and 47 blends with the surrounding grourid. 48 F. Piping and conduits to tank, access holes-and openings shall be watertight. 49 50 3.07 AS-BU[LT DRAWING - .51 ~ ' 52 A. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with an as-built drawing of the 53 improvements. 54 55 [yrms] 02530-5 SANITARYSEWERAGE SYSTEMS 02530-5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31' 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 3.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shalt be made for the materials specified in this section. The t Contractor shall furnish four (8) sets of submittals to the Engineer for review. 3.09 ELECTRICAL FACILITIES A. All electrical installation shall comply with the current editions of the National Electrical Code, the Washington State Safety Code, and county codes and ordinances. 3.10 STEP TANK TEST A. Step tank shall be tested in accordance with the City of Yelm Development Guidelines and shall obtain City of Yelm approval. 3.11 .PUMPS AND CONTROLS A. Pumps and controls shall be installed and tested as noted on the plans and details, as noted herein, in conformance with Washington Safety Code requirements, with the manufacturers recommendations, and in accordance with the City of Yelm Development Guidelines. Pumps and controls shall obtain Washington State Labor and Industries approval and shall obtain city of Yelm approval. Submit copies of approvals. 1. Components shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's prihted instructions. . 2, Control panels shall be mounted at the location shown on the Contract drawings. 3. Contractor shall install pump control panel and shall provide electrical power to the control panel. 4. Electrical conduit shall be installed at least 18 inches below grade. Install conduit with a minimum of 24 inches cover in paved or gravel areas or deeper if required by code. 5. Backfill for electrical conduit shall be native materials unless installed in gravel or asphalt areas. Backfill shall be placed and compacted in 6-inch maximum lifts. Backfill shall be structural material used in pavement section and shall be as shown on the contract plans for the respective sections. Trench bottom shall be uniform so that conduit is supported along entire length. Native materials shall be compacted by wheel rolling. Use mechanical compaction to compact granular materials. 6. Excavations shall not be left open for more than 48 hours. B. Testing and Acceptance _ . 1. After completion of the water tightness test, the Contractor shall demonstrate the workability of the pump assembly and the various electrical and alarm features with clean-water prior to connection of the septic tank to the building sewer. 49 END OF SECTION 02530 [yrmsl 02530-6 SANITARYSEYVERAGE SYSTEMS 02530-6 n C' t~l~ n C I 1 i 1 r 1 SECTION 02535 -INFIELD SKIN 2 3 4 5 PART1-GENERAL 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 9 Note: Prior to bidding the work of this Section, Contractors shall visit the site to generally 10 familiarize themselves with existing conditions, soils, slope, access, and other readily apparent 11 site conditions. 12 13 Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and 14 Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section. 15 16 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 17 18 Note: Work described in this section is affected by bid alternates. See section 01030 for alternate 19 descriptions. 20 21 . Include all labor, material, equipment, transportation, and services to install infield skin mix as shown on 22 the drawings and herein specified, including but not limited to: 23 24 Placement and compaction of infield skin mix 25 Fine grading 26 27 SUBMITTALS 28 29 General: 30 Submit sieve analysis and 2 pound sample from supplier for infield skin mix, for approval. 31 32 Submit written name of supplier of surfacing materials and sales receipts for quantity of materials 33 delivered to the job site. 34 35 Submit proposed haul route. 36 37 REQUIRED INSPECTIONS 38 39 Owner's representative must approve subgrade before skin mix is imported. Subgrades will be reviewed 40 with contractor provided laser transit. 41 42 Owner's representative must approve finish depth and grade of skin mix after compaction. Finish grades 43 will be reviewed with contractor provided laser transit. 44 45 46 47 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 48 49 MATERIALS 50 51 INFIELD SKIN MIX: 52 Infield skin mix shall conform to the following gradation: 53 54 US Standard Sieve % Passing by weight (wet sieve) [ridgeiineJ02535 - 1 INFIELD SKIN 02535 - 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 #10 100 #20 85-100 #50 40-60 #100 30-50 ' #200 10-22 #270 5-15 It is intended that a blend of different native soils and an efficient soil mixing machine be necessary to .obtain infield mix meeting tf~e above gradation. Blending must be performed off-site and materials shall be uniformly mixed to a homogenous mixture. Submit source, sample and sieve analysis for approval. QUALITY CONTROL During the course of importation, the Contractor shalt be responsible for continually checking the materials to insure that they continue to meet the specifications. Failure to do so may require that the Contractor remove non-qualifying material from the site at his own cost. The Architect will have the option to take random samples for testing at their own laboratory. In the event that any sample taken and tested by the Architect reveals that non-qualifying material is being imported, the Contractor shall cease all importation until the Architect is assured that the Contractor is meeting the specifications. In the event that the Architect's sieve analysis and the Contractor's sieve analysis are at variance, and either analysis reveals the material to be non-complying, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the services of a third party professional testing laboratory, which in turn shall analyze samples selected by the Architect. Such analysis shall be turned over to the Architect for resolution. PART 3 -EXECUTION SUBGRADE Subgrade tolerance is +0.00' and -0.10' relative to grading plan. Obtain Owner approval of subgrade prior to import of skin mix. Subgrade will be reviewed with contractor provided laser transit. SKIN MIX PLACEMENT Material is to be spread and bladed to an even finish utilizing tracked equipment of minimum 12' blade width: Water settle and box drag to achieve consolidated settled depth shown on the drawings necessary or directed. Add material as necessary to achieve finish grade. Apply moisture as necessary to settle for stabilization. Finish grade tolerance is +0.10' and -0.00' relative to grading plan. Drag surface again to create finished surface. In all cases, relative surface slope is to be maintained with no ponding. END OF SECTION 02535 jridgelineJ02535 - 2 INFIELD SKIN Roll if 02535 - 2 1 1 SECTION 02630 - STORMWATER SYSTEM 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 1.01 DESCRIPTION ~ 7 . 8 A. Work of this Section is bound by the Condition of the Contract and Division 1 Specifications 9 sections, bound herein, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.' ' 10 11 1.02 WORK INCLUDED 12 13 A. Work under this section included all labor, supervision, equipment, tools, materials, service ' 14 and incidentals necessary for providing and installing roof drain piping, cleanouts and fittings; . 15 sidewalk/plaza drains; yard drain system, and vehicle traffic area drain system. 16 B. Work under this section includes all labor, supervision; equipment, tools, materials, service 17 and incidentals necessary to install stormwater pipelines, cleanouts, catch basins, including 18 trenching, bedding, backfilling, compacting and dewatering as required by the plans and 19 details. 20 ' 21 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS 22 23 A. Section 02220 -Site Demolition and Clearing & Preparation ' 24 B. Section 02300 -Earthwork 25 C. Section 02315 -Trenching, Backfilfing arid Compaction for Utilities 26 D. Section 02740 -Asphalt Concrete Pavement 27 E. Section 02750 -Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, Curbs and Sidewalks '; 28 F. Section 02721 -Catch .Basins and Inlets 29 G. Section 02630 -stormwater System 30 31 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 32 33 A. PERMITS & LICENSES 34 1. Obtain and pay for any required permits. ' 35 2. Contractor shall be licensed for any work required under this item. ~ 36 B. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 37 1. The work under this section shall be governed by the most current version of the WSDOT ' 38 "Standard. Specifications" for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction published by the ' 39 Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT). 40 2. All references in the Standard Specifications to measurement and paymerit shall be 41 deleted from consideration, and the terms agreed to in the Contract substituted therefore. 42 43 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS 44 45 A. CONDITION OF SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION ' 46 ~ 47 1. Accept premises on an "as-is" condition; Owner assumes no responsibility for site 48 condition now, at time of bidding, nor thereafter. ' 49 2. Assume all risks from damage or loss to premises by means of fire, theft, and .all other 50 causes. 51 3. Damage or loss resulting from any cause to buildings persons and/or property shall not 62 relieve Contractor from his obligation to complete all work under the contract. ' ~ 53 B. PROTECTION ' S4 1. General: Conduct all operations in such a manner as to prevent damage to existing 55 structures grid surfaces and adjacent property. Keep free of damage those portions of 56 existing site building, and appurtenance that are to remain. Repair any damage incurred 57 because of the work of this section to the satisfaction of the Owner. 58 ~ [yrms] 02630-1 STORMWATER SYSTEM 02630-7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 -19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 2. Reference benchmarks and monuments: a. Maintain benchmarks, monuments, and all other reference points. b. If disturbed or destroyed, monuments and benchmarks shall be replaced by a registered Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer. 3. Utilities: a. Where existing utilities exist at site, either overhead or underground, take care not to cause damage thereto; keep building drains,. street drains and sewers open, for free drainage at all times. b. The Contractor shall be responsible for, and shall immediately repair, all damage to existing sewers, watermains, and building service connections to the same, operated by the Owner, which is caused by the construction work; repair such damage at no cost to Owner in manner approved by the applicable utility. Contractor shall contact the underground utility locating service a 1-800-424-5555 a minimum of 48 hours prior to construction. 4. Landscape plantings to remain: Save and protect trees as designated on applicable Architectural, Landscape and Civil Drawings or as designated in the field. 5. Adjacent building: Provide protection required by the General Conditions. Such protection includes occupants of said adjacent buildings, visitors, and passers-by from damage, injury and discomfort caused by dust. 6. Street blockage: Coordinate with the Owner should blockage of any streets be contemplated due to site prep work of this project; provide all necessary signs, lights and barricades required for any said blockage. 7. Traffic control plan: Contractor shall provide a traffic control, plan for any work that will interfere with the normal traffic flow. Contractor shall refer to WSDOT Standard Plans Section K for traffic control plans. 1.06 REFERENCE BENCHMARKS, MONUMENTS & PROPERTY CORNERS A. Maintain benchmarks, monuments, property corners, and all other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, benchmarks, monuments, and property corners shall be replaced by a registered Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer at the sole expense of the Contractor. 1.07 SYSTEM INSPECTIONS ~ A. The stormwater system shall be inspected by the City of Yelm as required. Coordinate with \ the City prior to starting any work on the stormwater system. The Design Engineer shall be notified prior to starting work on the stormwater system to coordinate required inspections for certification. A 24-hour notification shall be given to the Engineer prior backfilling any stormwater gallery. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Sizes and strength classifications of storm drain pipe to be used in all locations are indicated. 2.02 PIPE FOR STORM SEWERS A. Pipe for storm sewers shall be installed in accordance with the sizes, lines and grades shown on the plans and details. ~~-__--~ ,- ~j- o~,,i z (~) , B. Pipe for storm sewers shall be SDR 35 PVC, or SDR 26 where less than 3 feet of cover ' ~ C. Pipe materials shall meet the requirements of WSDOT~Standard Specification 7-04-2. 2.03 BEEHIVE GRATES A. Beehive grates shall be a MH30 as manufactured by Olympic Foundry, Inc. [yrmsj 02630-2 STORMWATER SYSTEM 02630-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 2.04 AREA DRAINS A. Area drains shall be DURA-DRAIN Model P-4 or approved equal. Shall include a bolt down galvanized steel grate connected to the 4-inch roof drain system with fittings as required. All costs to install a complete area drain are included in the unit price. 2.05 STORMWATER TREATMENT UNIT A. Stormwater treatment system unit be completely housed within one rectangular structure. B. The completed stormwater unit shall be capable of removing 80% or the net annual Total Suspended Solids (TSS) load based on a 50-micron particle size. C. Stormwater treatment system shall have a usable sediment storage capacity of not less than 0.7 cubic yards. D. Stormwater treatment system shall include awater-lock to prevent the release of trapped oil and floatable contaminants into the downstream piping during routine maintenance and to ensure that no oil escapes the system during the ensuing rain event. E. Direct access shall be provided to the sediment and floatable contaminant storage chambers to facilitate maintenance. F. Pipe materials shall meet the requirements of Section 7-04.2 of the Standard Specification. G. The Contractor, and/or a manufacturer selected by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to install and connect apre-cast concrete stormwater treatment systems, consisting of a Vortechnics Model 5000 or approved equal. H. Concrete for pre-cast stormwater treatment systems shall conform to ASTM C 857 and C 858. I. The wall thickness shall not be less than 6 inches (152 mm) or as shown on the dimensional drawings. In all cases the wall thickness shall be no less than the minimum thickness necessary to sustain HS20-44 (MS18) loading requirements as determined by a Licensed Professional Engineer. J. Sections shall have tongue and groove or ship-lap joints with a butyl mastic sealant conforming to ASTM C 990. K. Cement shall be Type 11 Portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150. L. All sections shall be cured by an approved method. Sections shall not be shipped until the concrete has attained a compressive strength of 4,000 psi (28 MPa) or until 5 days after fabrication and/or repair, whichever is the longer. M. Pipe openings shall be sized to accept pipes of the specified size(s) and material(s), and shall be sealed by the Contractor with a hydraulic cement conforming to ASTM C 595M N. Internal aluminum plate components shall be aluminum alloy 5052-H32 in accordance with ASTM B 209. O. Sealant to be utilized at the base of the swirl chamber shall be extruded EPDM. P. Brick or masonry used to build the manhole frame to grade shall conform to ASTM C 32 or ASTM C 139 and shall be installed in conformance with all local requirements. Q. Casting for manhole frames and covers shall be in accordance with ASTM A48, CL.30B and AASHTO M105. The manhole frame and cover shall be equivalent to Campbell Foundry Pattern #1009A or #1012D custom cast with the Vortechnics logo and the words Vortechnics Stormwater Treatment System". R. A bitumen sealant in conformance with ASTM C 990 shall be utilized in affixing the aluminum swirl chamber to the concrete vault. S. Stormwater system shall have a minimum certifiable successful performance record of 5 years. T. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall provide dimensional drawings of the stormwater treatment system as provided by the supplier and shall utilize these drawings as the basis for preparation of shop drawings showing details for construction, reinforcing, joints and any cast-in-place appurtenances, in accordance with Section 01330. Shop drawings shall be annotated to indicate all materials to be used and all applicable standards for materials, required tests of materials and design assumptions for structural analysis. Structural design calculations and shop drawings shall be certified by a Professional Engineer retained by the system manufacturer or Contractor and licensed in the state where the system is to be [yrmsj 02630-3 STORMWATER SYSTEM 02630-3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 installed. Shop drawings shall be prepared at a scale of not less than 3/16-inches per foot (1:75). Six (6) hard copies of said shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval 2.06 INFILTRATION GALLERY PIPE AND APPURTENANCES A. The perforated pipe material shall be in accordance with the manufacturers specifications and shall meet the requirements of Section 9-05-2(8) of the WSDOT Specifications. B. Washed drain rock shall meet Section~9-03.12(5) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. C. The drywell geotextile shall meet Section 9-33, Non-woven Moderate Survivability, Class A of the WSDOT Standard Specifications PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION A. Trench excavation; backfill, and compaction shall conform to the requirements of Section 02315, Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction For Utilities. 3.02 PIPE A. Storm pipe shall be installed in the sizes, material types and to the lines and grades shown on the plans. B. Storm pipe shall be installed in accordance with Section 7-04 of the Standard Specifications. C. Leakage/pressure tests shall be pertormed on installed pipelines, and shall consist of a low pressure air test in accordance with Section 7-04.3(1)F of the Standard Specifications. 3.03 CATCH BASINS A. Catch basins shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with Section 7-05 of the Standard Specifications. B. Catch basin frames shall be installed with the flanges in the down position. C. Catch basin grates shall be installed in accordance with Standard Plan B-2a or B-2b of the Standard and with the instructions embossed on the finish surface of the grate. 3.04 PRECAST CONCRETE VAULT A. Vault floor shall slope'/<-inch maximum across the width and slope downstream 1-inch per 12 floor of length. Vault top finish grade shall be even with surrounding finish grade surface unless otherwise noted on plans. B. Contractor shall grout all inlet and outlet pipes flush with vault interior wall. C. Sanded PVC fittings shall be used on all PVC inlet and outlet pipes. D. Contractor responsible for inspecting and/or completing installation of flow spreaders and energy dissipaters. 3.05 BEEHIVE GRATE A. Beehive grates shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.06 AREA DRAINS A. Area drains shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. [yrms] 02630-4 STORMWATER SYSTEM 02630-4 1 2 3.07 CLEAN UP 3 4 A. Remove all excess materials, rocks, .roots, or foreign material, leaving the site in a clean, 5 complete condition approved by the engineer. All filter components shall be free of any 6 foreign materials including concrete and excess sealant. 8 9 END OF SECTION 02630 [yrms] 02630-5 STORMWATER SYSTEM 02630-5 e~ 1 2 a' 3 4 5 8 6 8. 9 10 11 12 13 O, 14 15 16 17 j 18 19 20 a; 21 22 23 24 25 26 ~ 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 i 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 ~. 57 SECTION 02721= CATCH BASINS AND INLETS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this section.is bound by the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specifications sections, bound herein, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.02 .WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers the work necessary for the catch basins and inlets, complete. B. In general, work specified herein shall be included in the Bid. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02215 - Subgrade Preparation B. Sectiori 02315 =Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction for Utilities C. Section 02300 -Earthwork D. Section 02630 - Stormwater System 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. PERMITS & LICENSES 1. Obtain and pay for any required permits. 2. Contractor to be licensed for any work in the locality of the project. B. REFERENCES 1. the work under this section shall be governed by the following defined references except as modified herein: 2. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS: The most current version of the WSDOT "Standard Specifications" for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction published by the Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT). All references in the Standard Specifications to measurement and payment shall be deleted from consideration, and the terms agreed to in the Contract substituted therefore. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS . A. CONDITION OF SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION ' 1. Accept premises on an "as-is" condition; Owner assumes ~ no responsibility for site condition now, at time of bidding, nor thereafter. 2. Assume all risks from damage or loss to premises by means of fire; theft, and all other causes. 3. Damage or loss resulting from any cause to buildings, persons, and/or property shal- not relieve Contractor from his obligation to complete all work under the contract. B. PROTECTION 1. General: a. Conduct all operations in such a manner as to prevent damage to existing structures and surtaces and adjacent property. Keep free of damage those portions of existing site buildings and appurtenances that are to remain. .Repair any damage incurred because of the work of this section to the satisfaction of the Owner. 2. Reference benchmarks and monuments: a. Maintain benchmarks, monuments, and all other reference points.. i (yrms] 02721-1 CATCH BASINS AND INLETS 02721-1 1 b. If disturbed or destroyed, monuments and benchmarks shall be replaced by a . 2 registered Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer. 3 3. Utilities: 4 a. Where existing utilities exist at site, either overhead or underground, take care not to 5 cause damage thereto; keep building drains, street drains and sewers open, for free 6 drainage at all times. 7 b. The Contractor shall be responsible for, and shall immediately repair, all damage to 8 ~ existing sewers, watermains, and building service connections to the same, operated 9 by the Owner, which is caused by the construction work; repair such damage at no 10 . cost to Owner in manner approved by the applicable utility. Contractor shall contact 11 the underground utility locating service at 1-800-424-5555 a minimum of 48 hours 12 prior to construction. 13 4. Landscape plantings to remain: Save and protect trees as designated on applicable 14 Architectural, Landscape and Civil Drawings or as designated in the field. 15 5. Adjacent buildings: Provide protection required by the General Conditions. Such 16 protection includes occupants of said adjacent buildings, visitors, and passers-by from 17 damage, injury and discomfort caused by dust. 18 6. Street blockage: Coordinate with the Owner should blockage of any streets be 19 contemplated due to site prep work of this project; provide all necessary signs, lights, and 20 barricades required for any said blockage. 21 7. Traffic control plan: Contractor shall provide a traffic control plan for any work that will 22 interfere with the normal traffic flow. Contractor shall refer to WSDOT Standard Plans 23 Section K for traffic control plans. 24 25 26 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 27 28 2.01 CONCRETE 29 30 ~ A. Concrete shall be ready-mixed, conforming to ASTM C94, Alternate 2. Compressive field 31 strength shall be less than 2,500 psi at 28 days. Maximum size of aggregate shall be 1 '/z 32 ~ inches. Slump shall be between 2 and 4 inches. Field strength shall be assumed as equal to 33 85 percent of the strength of laboratory-cured cylinders. 34 35 2.02 FORMS 36 37 A. Exposed surfaces shall be plywood, others shall be steel, matched boards, plywood, or other 38 acceptable material. Form all vertical surfaces. Provide fillets on reentrant angles. Trench 39 walls, large rock, or earth will not be acceptable form material. 40 41 2.03 REINFORCING STEEL 42 43 A. Reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM A615, Grade 40, deformed bars. 44 45, 2.04 PRECAST UNITS 46 47 A. At the option of Contractor, approved precast units may be substituted for cast-in-place units. 48 Precast units shall conform to ASTM C478 except that the dimensions shall be as shown. 49 Submit details of proposed units to the Engineer for review. 50 51 2.05 MORTAR 52 ' 53 A. Standard premixed mortar conforming to ASTM C387, Type S, or proportion 1 part Portland 54 cement to 2 parts clean, well-graded sand which will pass a 1/8 inch screen. Admixtures may 55 be used not exceeding the following percentages of weight of cement: Hydrated lime, 10 56 percent; diatomaceous earth or other inert materials, 5 percent. Consistency of mortar shall 57 6e such that it will readily adhere to the concrete. 58 [yrms) 02721-2 CATCH BASINS AND INLETS 02721-2 a D 1 2.06 FRAMES AND GRATES 2 3 A. Frames and grates for catch basins and storm drain inlets shall be fabricated of steel 4 conforming to ASTM A48, Class 30 in accordance with the details shown. All connections 5 shall be welded. Welding shall conform to requirements of current Code For Welding in 6 Building Construction of the American Welding Society. Bearing surfaces shall be clean and 7 shall provide uniform contact. Castings shall be tough, close-grained gray iron, sound, 8 smooth, clean, free from blisters, blowholes, shrinkage, cold shuts, and all defects. 9 - 10 11 0 PART 3 -EXECUTION 12 13 3.01 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 14 15 A. Excavation as required to accomplish the construction. Backfill shall be as specified for the 16 adjoining pipe trench. . 17 18 3.02 CONSTRUCTION OF CATCH BASINS AND INLETS 19 20 A. Construct inlets and catch basins at the locations shown and in accordance with the 21 drawings. .Construct forms to the dimensions and elevations required. Forms shall be tight 22 and well braced. Chamfer corners of forms. 23 B. Prior to placing the concrete, remove all water and debris from the forms. Moisten forms just 24 prior to placing concrete. Handle concrete from the transporting vehicle to the forms in a '~ 25 continuous manner as rapidly as practical without segregation or loss of ingredients. 26 Immediately after placing, compact concrete with a mechanical vibrator. Limit the duration of 27 vibration to the time .necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation without causing. 28 segregation: 29 C. Screed the top surface of exposed slabs and walls. When the initial water has been 30 absorbed, float the surfaces with a wood float and lightly trowel with a .steel trowel to a 31 smooth finish free from marks or irregularities. Finish exposed edges with steel edging tool. ' 32 Remove forms and patch any defects in the concrete with mortar mixed in the same 33 proportions as the original concrete mix. 34 D. Cure concrete by preventing the loss of moisture for a period of 7 days. Accomplish with a 35 membrane-forming curing compound. Apply the curing compound immediately after removal 36 of forms or finishing of the slabs. Protect concrete from damage during the 7-day cure 37 period. 38 ~ 39 3.03 PLACING PRECAST UNITS 40 41 A. If material in bottom of trench is unsuitable. for supporting unit, excavate and backfill to ' 42 r ~ required grade with 3-inch minus, clean, pit-run material. Set units to grade at locations ; 43 shown. 44 45 3.04 EXTENSIONS ' 46 47 A. Install extensions to height determined by Engineer. Lay risers in mortar with sides plumb 48 and tops to grade. Joints shall be sealed with mortar, with interior and exterior troweled ~ 49 ' smooth. Prevent mortar from drying out and cure by applying a curing compound. S0 Extensions shall be watertight. 51 52 3.05 INSTALLATION OF FRAMES AND GRATES ~ 53 . 54 A.. 'Set frames and grates at elevations indicated on the. plans, or as determined in the field and 55 in conformance with the drawings. 56 B. Frames may be cast in, or shall be set in mortar. ' ~ 57 58 1 [yrmsJ 02721-3 CATCH BASINS AND INLETS 02721-3 1 3.06 CLEANING 2 3 A. Upon completion, clean each structure of silt, debris, and foreign matter. 4 5 6 END OF SECTION 02721 [yrms] 02721-4 CATCH BASINS AND INLETS 02721-4 ,' 1 SECTION 02740 -ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 1.01 DESCRIPTION '' 7 . 8 A. Work of this Section is bound by the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specifications 9 sections, bound herein, in.addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 10 11 1.02 WORK INCLUDED 12 13 A. All subgrade preparation as specified-herein or otherwise required for installation of new work ' 14 shown or specified. 15 B. In general, work specified herein shall be included in the Bid. Work under this section 16 includes labor, supervision, equipment, tools, materials, service and incidentals necessary for ' 17 subgrade preparation. 18 19 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS , . 20 ~' 21 A.' Section 02300 -Earthwork 22 , 23 1.04 :QUALITY ASSURANCE ~ 24 , 25 A. Standard Specifications-, 26 1. For materials and- installation procedures, used on the paving- portion of the project, 27 conform to the provisions of the "Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal 28 Construction", as prepared by the Washington State Chapter of American Public Works 29 Association and the Washington State Department of Transportation (APWA7WSDOT) 30 latest edition, except as modified hereinafter, and. hereinafter called .the "Standard 31 Specifications". 32 2. All references in Standard Specifications to Measurement and Payment shall be deleted 33 from consideration; and terms agreed to in the Contract substituted therefore. 34 35 -. B. Inspections & Tests 1. Covered hereinafter in this Section, Paragraph 3.5A, and in Section 01400. . 36 _ 37 1:05 JOB CONDITIONS 38 39 A. Weather Conditions 40 1. Do no paving work when raining or when subgrade or base has free water on the surface 41 or does not meet compaction requirements; suspend operations until surfaces are ~i 42 . adequately dry. 43 2. Apply no bituminous materials when ambient temperature is below 45 degrees F. 44 B. Grade & Slopes '+ 45 1. Provide even slopes, minimum 1/8" per foot, consistent. with existing abutting paving ~ 46 surfaces. 47 2. Standing water on surfaces will not be permitted. 48 3. Contractor shall fine grade all areas to be paved to subgrade elevations shown on I 49 Drawings. Areas to be paved shall be prepared, compacted and protected in accordance 50 with the Standard Specifications, except that the pavement subgrade shall be compacted 51 to a depth of 12 inches to 98 percent standard density. i - 52 C. Defective Work ' 53 1. Remove and replace defective pavement work, when directed by Engineer, including 54 surfaces without proper drainage; patching of new surfaces not permitted. 55 D. Construction Survey Control 56 1. Contractor shall provide all construction survey control for the approval of the Engineer 57 prior to construction of work under this section. 58 ~~ [yrms) 02740-1 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 02740-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Soil Sterilization Material 1. Similar to U.S. Borax "Monobar-Chlorate (Granular)", or approved, containing 30% sodium chlorate and 68% sodium metaborate, dry, free flowing. B. Base Course Surfacing (Ballast) 1. Furnish under new vehicular asphalt pavement areas, placed over compacted subgrade, crushed, partially crushed, or naturally occurring granular "Ballast" material meeting the requirements of Section 9-03.9(1), Ballast, of the Standard Specifications; 4-inch minimum compacted thickness unless otherwise shown on drawings. C. Crushed Surface Top Course 1. Furnish Crushed Surfacing material over all base course surfacing, beneath all asphalt walking paths and concrete sidewalks, meeting the requirements of Section 9-03.9(3), Crushed Surfacing of Standard Specifications; 2-inch minimum compacted thickness unless otherwise shown on drawings. D. Pavement Wearing Course 1. Asphalt concrete pavement surface course shall be HMA CL1/2 PG 58-22. The mixing and proportioning of aggregates for the asphalt concrete shall meet the requirements of Section 9-03.8, Aggregate for Asphalt Concrete of the Standard Specifications. Paving asphalt shall meet the requirements of Section 9-02.1(4), Paving Asphalt of the Standard Specifications. The grade of asphalt binder shall be as required by the contract. Prior to the submittal of the mix design, the Contractor shall provide a written designation of the grade of PG asphalt binder to be used. The Contractor may propose the substitution of alternate grades of performance grade (PG) asphalt binder at no cost to the Contracting Agency.. The proposal will be approved if the proposed alternate asphalt binder has an average 7-day maximum pavement design temperature that is equal to or higher than the specified asphalt binder and has a minimum pavement design temperature that is equal to or lower than the specified asphalt binder. The substituted alternate grade of asphalt binder shall be used in all HMA contract items of the same class and originally specified grade of asphalt binder. Blending of asphalt binder from different sources is not permitted. Production of aggregates shall comply with the requirements of Section 3-01. 2. Minimum compacted thickness for al vehicular paving shall be as noted on the plans. E. Tack Oil 1. Asphalt for tack coat shall be CRS-1 meeting the requirements of Section 9-02.1(6), Cationic Emulsified Asphalt of the Standard Specifications. Tack oil shall be applied to all asphalt surfaces on which any course of asphalt concrete is to be placed or abutted. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Paving Equipment 1. Shall be spreading, self-propelled machine capable of maintaining line, grade and course thickness indicated. Spreader box or manual methods may be used in small patch areas. B. Compacting Equipment 1. Shall be steel wheel, pneumatic tired or vibrating roller. Use hand operated mechanical vibrators in small patch areas. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspection of Prior Work 1. Carefully inspect the installed work of-all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. [yrms] 02740-2 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 02740-2 ' ~ 1 2. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Engineer. 2 3.. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have 3 been fully resolved. '. 4 5 3.02 PREPARATION ' 6 7 A. Protection , 8 1. Protect existing site improvements from damage by paving work. 9 2. Install barricades to keep traffic away from paving work. 10 B. Existing Pavement 11 1. All cut edges of existing pavement where new pavement is to abut shall be saw-cut so 12 edges are neat and straight, as approved by Engineer. ~~ 13 14 C. Excavation 1. Areas for asphalt concrete paving shall be excavated as necessary to the grade 15 established for the bottom of the ballast base and the excess material shall be disposed 16 of off site as directed. 17 D. Subgrade Preparation 18 1. Prepare the subgrade in accordance with Section 2-06.3(1), Subgrade for Surfacing of 19 the Standard Specifications. ~~ 20 21 2. Compaction shall achieve 98% of the maximum density to a depth of 12 inches determined under the tests described in Section 2-03.3(14)D, Compaction Control Tests 22 of the Standard Specifications. 23 E. Application of Soil Sterilization Solution ' 24 1. Apply in water solution over all subgrade areas to receive ballast base for asphalt 25 pavement; solution mix shall be 1 pound per gallon of water and spread on at rate of 2 26 gallons of solution per 100 square feet. ' 27 28 3.03 ASPHALT PAVEMENT PLACEMENT 29 A. Base Course Surfacing (Ballast) 30 1. The gravel ballast course shall be placed to the minimum compacted depth specified on 31 the plans, placed over the full areas shown on the Drawings for new work conform to 32 above requirements of paragraph 2.01 B. 33 2. Spread and compact to ninety-five percent (95%) of the maximum density all in ~. 34 35 conformance with Section 4-02, Gravel Base of the Standard Specifications. B. Crushed Surface Top Course 36 1. The crushed rock coursing shall be placed to the minimum compacted depth specified on 37 the plans, placed over all base course surfacing areas and over proof rolled and 38 compacted native surfaces that will receive asphalt pathways and concrete sidewalks; ' 39 conform to above requirements of paragraph 2.01C. 40 2. Spread and compact to ninety-five (95%) of the maximum density all in conformance with 41 Section 4-04, Ballasting and Crushed Surfacing of the Standard Specifications. 42 C. Tack Oil 43 1. Apply tack coat asphalt at the rate of 0.02 to 0.06 gallons per square yard to in-place 44 asphalt and concrete contact surfaces where new pavement joins existing and along 45 curbs and gutters. 46 D. Asphalt Concrete Pavement 47 1. The asphalt concrete pavement wearing course shall be constructed in accordance with 48 Section 5-04, Asphalt Concrete Pavement of the Standard Specifications. Section 5- 49 04.3(9), Spreading and Finishing of the Standard Specifications shall apply except that 50 the nominal compacted depth for paving areas shall be 2 inches or as otherwise 51 indicated on Civil drawings. 52 2. Slope all paving smoothly to catch basins and to elevations or grades shown on 53 Drawings and consistent with existing adjacent pavement surface grades. Pre-level any 54 depressed areas as required to produce a finished surface that does not vary by more 55 than .%<" in 10ft. Standing water will not be permitted on any paved surface and any 56 corrective measures will be the responsibility of the Contractor using methods approved 57 in advance by the engineer.. 58 i (yrms) 02740-3 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 02740-3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 3. Contractor shall feather the asphalt concrete pavement overlay in a manner to produce a smooth riding connection to the existing pavement. All feathered joints and saw cut joints shall be sealed with AR-4000 and topped with sand as directed by the Engineer. Asphalt concrete pavement Class B utilized in the construction of feathered connections to existing pavement shall be modified by eliminating the coarse aggregate from the mix at the Contractor's plant or the commercial source from which the Contractor obtains the mix or by raking the joint on the roadway, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 4. where utility trenches require pavement patching, the pavement restoration shall be performed in accordance with the Washington Department of Transportation. 3.04 Tolerances A. General 1. Surface Smoothness for Vehicular and Pedestrian Paving: Maximum variation from the lower edge of a 10-foot straight edge shall be as follows: a. Parallel to centerline: 1/8-inch b. Transverse slope: %4-inch 2. Section Thickness: Section thickness shall not deviate more than '/4 inch from the design section. 3. Correction of Defective Work: Conform to applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall correct defective work to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections & Tests 1. General: Field inspection and testing shall be performed under provisions of Section 01400. Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Owner's testing and inspection agency. 2. Inspections: Owner may employ the services of an independent inspection services to inspect work of this Section for conformance with the Contract Documents and may conduct tests as follows: a. Conduct nuclear density gauge testing in conformance with Section 5-04.1(10)B, Control of the Standard Specifications. b. Frequency of Testing: As required for testing laboratory to certify compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.06 PROTECTION A. General 1. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury. 2. Erect barriers and warning signs as necessary to prevent vehicular traffic on new pavement until pavement can support loads and movement without damage. END OF SECTION 02740 [yrms] 02740-4 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 02740-4 1 SECTION 02750 -. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT CURBS AND 2 3 4 ' S PART 1 -GENERAL 6 7 1.1 DESCRlPT10N OF WORK 8 9 A. This Section includes exterior Cement Concrete Pavement and Cement Concrete Curb 10 construction and all related pavement and curb construction materials and methods where 11 shown on the Contract Drawings. 12 13 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 14 15 A. Section 02220 -Site Demolition and Clearing & Preparation 16 B. Section 02300 -Earthwork 17 C. Section 02315 -Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities ' 18 D. .Section 02740- Asphalt Concrete Pavement 19 E. Section 02750 -Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, Curbs, and Sidewalks 20 F.Section 02721 -Catch Basins and Inlets 1 21 G. Section 02630 - Stormwater System 22 ~` 23 1.3 REFERENCES 24 25 A. The most current version of the Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal 26 Construction as published by the Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT), '! 27 hereby referred to as The WSDOT Standard Specifications. Note that Division 1 of the 28 WSDOT Standard Specifications shall not apply to this project. 29 B. The Standard Plans for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, most recent edition, as 30 published by the Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT), hereby referred ': 31 to as the WSDOT Standard Plans. 32 C. The American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM. 33 D. ACI 301, Specification for Structural Concrete. ';, 34 35 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 36 37 A. All Cement Concrete Pavement construction shall conform to the requirements of Section 5- 38 05 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, except as noted herein. All references to 39 measurement and payment shall be deleted, and the terms agreed to in the Contract shall be 40 substituted therefore. 41 B. All Cement Concrete Curb construction shall conform to the requirements of Section 8-04 of 42 .the WSDOT Standard Specifications, except as noted herein. All references to measurement 43 and payment shall be deleted, and the terms agreed to in the Contract shall be substituted 44 therefore. 45 C. All Cement Concrete Sidewalk construction shall conform to the requirements of Section 8-14 ' 46 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, except as noted herein, and except that all 47 references to measurement and payment shall be deleted, and the terms agreed to in the ' . 48 Contract shall be substituted therefore. 49 D: Manufacturer Qualifications:.. Manufacturers of ready-mixed concrete products for this project 50 shall comply with ASTM C94-98 {Standard Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete) for all 51 concrete materials and concrete production facilities. ~~ [yrms] 02750-1 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT,. CURBS AND SIDEWALKS 02750-1 '~ 1 2 3 4 5 6 ,7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40- 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 E. This project shall use only materials which are listed in the most recent edition of the Washington State Qualified Products List (QPL) published by the WSDOT Materials Laboratory, if the QPL contains an entry for such materials. F. Testing Agency Qualifications: The Contractor's testing agency shall be an independent agency qualified in accordance with, and meeting the requirements of, ASTM C 1077-98 and ASTM E 329-98 for the testing indicated, as documented in accordance with ASTM E 548-94. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's material and product data: Submit all manufacturer's printed material and product data which the manufacturer provides for review purposes for all materials to be incorporated into the finished work. B. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Submit all MSDS information, highlighting VOC limits if available. C. Design Mixtures: Submit mix designs for all concrete mixtures furnished, including alternate mix designs which may be required to adjust for weather, project conditions, and test results. The Contractor shall propose any modifications to the design mix required to prevent shrinkage cracking and excessive edge slump. D. Material Test Reports: Submit test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials. 1. Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity, including alkali-silica reactivity. 2. Compressive and flexural strength testing for all concrete mix designs for concrete to be used in Cement Concrete Pavement. E. Material Certificates: Submit material certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Joint Fillers. 4. Joint Sealants. F. Field quality control test reports: Submit test reports showing the results of compressive strength testing, slump testing, and air content for all Portland Cement Concrete tests specified. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION SURVEY CONTROL A. The Contractor shall supply construction survey control for approval of the Engineer prior to construction. The Contractor shall coordinate to obtain the Engineer's inspection of all formwork grades and alignment at least 24 hours prior to the placement of concrete at each location where concrete is to be placed. 1.7 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Cracked pavement and cracked curbs will be rejected. The Contractor shall determine and shall implement methods for protecting the completed pavement and curbs and preventing cracking of the completed work. The Contractor shall remove and replace cracked and defective pavement panels and curbs as described in this specification, and no additional payment will be allowed therefore. B. Pavement without positive drainage will not be acceptable. The Contractor shall maintain a minimum slope to drain as shown on the Contract Drawings, or a minimum slope of 1:100 where there is no slope shown. The Contractor shall remove and replace pavement panels which are flatter than 1:100 to the nearest point of drainage as described in this specification, and no additional payment will be allowed therefore. [yrms] 02750-2 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT, CURBS AND SIDEWALKS 02750-2 1 C. Cracked sidewalks will be rejected. The Contractor shall determine a method for protecting ' 2 the completed sidewalks and preventing cracking of the completed work. -The Contractor 3 shall remove and replace cracked or otherwise defective Cement Concrete Sidewalk panels 4 5 D. as described in this specification, and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore. Cement Concrete Sidewalks without positive drainage will be rejected. The Contractor shall 6 maintain a minimum slope to drain as shown on the Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall 7 remove and replace Cement Concrete Sidewalk panels which do not meet the minimum slope 8 requirements, and' no additional compensation will be allowed therefore. '` 9 E. Cement Concrete Sidewalks which do not meet the requirements for finished color and 10 texture will be rejected. The acceptable color and texture will be established by matching the I 1 12 existing sidewalk as described herein. 13 1.8 .FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 14 15 A. The Contractor's Testing Agency shall conduct Field Quality Control Testing in accordance 16 with the test methods specified in Section 6-02.3(5)D of the Standard Specifications. 17 B... The Contractor's Testing Agency shall conduct one set of quality control tests of concrete 18 placed at the jobsite for Cement Concrete Pavement, for Cement Concrete Curbs, and for ' 19 Cement Concrete Sidewalk for each day Concrete is placed at the jobsite. One set of tests 20 shall consist of the following: 21 a. Three (3) cylinders for compression strength testing at seven.(7) days. 22 b. Three (3) cylinders for compression strength testing at twenty-eight (28) days. '~ 23 c: One tesfifor Concrete slump. 24 d. One test for entrained air. 25 ' 26 ' 27 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 28 29 2.1 BAL LAST AND CRUSHED SURFACING 30 31 A. Ballast (if shown on the Contract Drawings) shall conform to the requirements of Section 9- 32 03.9(1] of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. 33 34 B. Crushed Surfacing Top Course shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-03.9(3) of the 35 WSDOT Standard Specifications. 36 'I 37 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS 38 39 40 A. All materials shall be products listed on the WSDOT Qualified Products List,(QPL) unless alternative materials are specified. i 41 B. Concrete for Cement Concrete Pavement shall provide a minimum flexural (beam) strength of 42 650 psi at 14 days based on statistically analyzed results of 5 beam specimens and shall 43 meet ail requirements of Section 5-05.2 and Section 5-05.3(1) of the WSDOT Standard ', 44 Specifications. The Engineer will determine a conversion between compressive strength and 45 flexural (beam) strength, which shall then be used to determine an acceptable minimum 46 compressive strength... 47 C. Concrete for Cement Concrete Curbs shat( beair-entrained Class 3000 concrete meeting the 48 requirements of Section 8-04.2 and 8-04.3(1) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. 49 D. Concrete for Cement Concrete Sidewalks shall be air-entrained Class 3000 concrete meeting 50 the requirements of Section 6-02 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. 51 E. Portland Cement Materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-01 of the WSDOT 52 Standard Specifications. 53 F. .Aggregates for Cement Concrete Pavement and Cement Concrete Curbs shall conform to the '~ 54 requirements of Section 9-03 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. '~ [yrms] 02750-3 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT, CURBSAND SIDEWALKS 02750-3 1 G. Pre-molded Joint Filler shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-04.1 of the WSDOT 2 Standard Specifications. 3 H. Dowel bars (smooth bars) shall be 18-inches long and shall be furnished and installed where 4 shown on the Contract Drawings. Dowel Bars shall be installed in bar cages with each cage 5 containing a minimum of four (4) bars and minimum cage length of 6 feet. Bent, short, or 6 otherwise defective cages will be rejected. 7 I. Tie bars (deformed bars) shall be 30-inches long and shall be furnished and installed where , 8 shown on the Contract Drawings. 9 J. Joint sealant for Cement Concrete Pavement shall be two-component poured rubber joint 10 sealer as specified in Section 9-04.2(2) of the Standard Specifications. Furnish sealant in , 11 gray color. 12 K. Concrete Curing Materials and admixtures shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-23 13 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, except that the only acceptable method of curing 14 shall be by the use of white or clear 8-mil polyethylene sheeting as described below. ' 15 16 2.3 FORMS 17 , 18 A. Forms for Cement Concrete Pavement shall meet the requirements of Section 5-05.3(7)6 of 19 the WSDOT Standard Specifications, except that wood forms will not be allowed. All forms 20 shall be free of warping and dents. 21 B. Formsfor Cement Concrete Curbs shall meet the requirements of Section 8-04.3(1) of the ' 22 WSDOT Standard Specifications, except that wood forms will not be allowed. All forms shall 23 be free of warping and dents. ` 24 C. Forms for Cement Concrete Sidewalks sha{{ meet the requirements of Section 8-14.3(2) of f, 25 the WSDOT Standard Specifications. All forms shall be free of warping and dents. 26 ; 27 2.4 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS 28 29 A. Concrete Curing Material shall be white, 8-mil polyethylene sheeting. ~.' 30 ' 31 2.5 JOINT SEALANT FOR SIDEWALKS 32 33 A. Joint Sealant for Cement Concrete Sidewalks shall be two-component poured rubberjoint 34 sealant as specified in Section 9-04.2(2) of the Standard Specifications. Furnish sealant in a 35 light or dark gray color which matches the color of the finished walkway, or as directed by the I' 36 Owner. ~ 37 38 39 PART 3 -.EXECUTION ~' 40 41 3.1 EXAMINATION ' 42 ' 43 A. Verify that subgrade is firmly compacted, smooth, and thoroughly watered but not saturated 44 with moisture, and that forms are correctly aligned prior to placing concrete. Proceed to place ~ 45 concrete only after all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, and all access 46 structures have been raised to grade. ' 47 48 3.2 PROTECTION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS ' 49 50 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting. existing utilities and shall be responsible for !' 51 any damage to existing utilities where such utilities are not shown to be removed, demolished, 52 or abandoned. The Contractor shall contact the underground utility locating service at least 53 48 hours prior to construction. The Contractor shall coordinate with the owners of adjacent 54 utilities regarding the exact location of utility lines. ~' [yrms] 02750-4 ~ PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT, CURBS AND SIDEWALKS 02750-4 1 3.3 REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT AND CURBS 2 3 A. The Contractor shall sawcut full depth, remove and dispose of existing concrete pavement 4 and curbs as waste. materials where existing pavement and curbs are in conflict with the 5 proposed construction. The Contractor shall manage waste materials in accordance with 6 Section 01575 of the Contract Documents. 7 8 3.4 REMOVAL OF EXISTING CONGRETE SIDEWALKS 9 10 A. The Contractor shall sawcut, remove and dispose of existing sidewalk materials as waste 11 12 materials where such sidewalks conflict with the proposed improvements. Waste materials shall be disposed of in accordance with waste management procedures specified in Section 13 01575 of the Contract Documents. 14 15 3.5 ROADWAY EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT AND HAUL ' 16 17 A. The Contractor shall complete Roadway Excavation and Embankment in conformance with 18 Section 8-14.3(1) and Section 2-03 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, except that the ' 19 provisions of Section 2-03.3(2) shall not apply. 20 B. Excavate to the lines, grades, and dimensions shown and as necessary to accomplish the 21 work. Excavate to within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.1 foot. Aliow for forms, working 22 space, and base materials. 23 C. Embankment Compaction shall be completed in accordance with Method B of Section 2- 24 03.3(14)C of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. 25 D. The Contractor shall complete Haul in conformance with Section 2-04 of the WSDOT 26 Standard Specifications for all soil materials which are not required for the completed 27 installation. 28 29 3.6 SUBGRADE PREPARATION ' 30 31 A. The Contractor shall complete Subgrade Preparation in conformance with Section 2-06 of the 32 WSDOT Standard Specifications. ' 33 34 3.7 BALLAST AND CRUSHED SURFACING 35 36 A. The Contractor shall construct Ballast (if shown on the Contract Drawings) and Crushed 37 Surfacing for pavement construction in accordance with Section 4-04 of the WSDOT 38 Standard Specifications, and to the lines, grades, and depths shown on the Contract 39 40 Drawings. 8. The Contractor shall place and compact Crushed Surfacing Base Material for Cement 41 Concrete Curb and Cement Concrete Sidewalk construction in accordance with Section 4-04 42 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, and to the lines, grades, and depths shown on the 43 Contract Drawings. 44 C. The Contractor shall insure that the final lift of Crushed Surfacing is placed in accordance with 45 Section 4-04.3(5) of the Standard Specifications. The final lift of surfacing material shall be 46 compacted to a smooth surface with a maximum allowed deviation of/4-inch from straight- ' 47 grade prior to concrete placement. 48 49 3.8 ACCESS STRUCTURES EMBEDDED IN PAVEMENT S0 51 A. The Contractor shall adjust to grade all access structures to be embedded in pavement and 52 sidewalks. Access structures shall include, but will not be limited to valve cans, meter boxes, t [yrms] 02750-5 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT, CURBS AND SIDEWALKS 02750-5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 junction and splice boxes, and manhole rims and lids. Such items shall be adjusted to be set flush with the finished surface. 3.9 FORMING FOR CONCRETE A. Forming for Cement Concrete Pavement shall meet the requirements of Section 5-05.3(7)6 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. B. Forming for Cement Concrete Curbs shall meet the requirements of Section 8-04.3(1) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. C. Forming for Cement Concrete Sidewalks shall meet the requirements of Section 8-14.3(2) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. ,. D. Wherever4 concrete is to be placed against an existing structure, the Contractor shall place pre-molded expansion joint filler against the existing structure to the full depth of either the existing structure, the pavement, the sidewalk, or the curb, whichever is less. The pavement, sidewalk, or curb will be formed against the expansion joint filler material. The joint filler shall be cut and warped as required to tigY-tly conform to the irregularities of the existing structure. 3.10 DOWEL BARS AND DOWEL BAR CAGES A. Dowel bars (smooth bars) shall be installed at all transverse construction and contraction joints, except where directed otherwise by the Engineer. B. Dowel bar,cages -shall be used to support all dowel (smooth) bars. Dowel bars shall be firmly welded or wired into the cages, such that the entire cage can be lifted by lifting up one bar. Cages which are bent or deformed. shall not be used and will be rejected by .the Engineer in ,the field. Rejected bar cages shall be removed from the project site by the end of the same day they are rejected. Attempting to straighten bar cages in the field will not be acceptable. C. Dowel bars shall receive a heavy coating of axle grease around their full circumference and length on the same day they are to be incorporated into the finished pavement. D. Dowel bar cages shall be correctly designed to provide support for the dowel bars at the correct depth within the finished concrete pavement slab. All dowel bars shall be installed approximately parallel with the street centerline, and exactly parallel.to the finished pavement surface. E. Workers shall not step on dowel bars or dowel bar cages after they have been placed on the prepared base materials. 3.11 TIE BARS AND SUPPORT OF TIE BARS A. Tie bars (deformed bars) shall be installed at all longitudinal construction and contraction pavement joints, except where directed otherwise by the Engineer. When the Engineer directs tie bars not to be installed, those bars shall remain onsite for installation at other _ miscellaneous .locations, where directed by the Engineer. . B. Tie bars shall be installed by one of three methods: 1. By attaching them to the construction forms at longitudinal construction joints. 2. By attaching them to supporting tie bar cages or chairs at longitudinal contraction joints, or 3. By drilling and grouting them into place. Tie bars shall not be drilled into concrete which is less than 48 hours old, as measured from the time the final finish was applied. 3.12 PLACING AND FINSHING CONCRETE A. The Contractor shall place and finish Cement Concrete Pavement in accordance with Section 5-05 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, except that the final roadway pavement finish shall be a light broom finish in the transverse direction. B. The Contractor shall place and finish Cement Concrete.Curbs in accordance with Section 8- 04 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. iyrms] 02750-6 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT, CURBS AND SIDEWALKS 02750-6 1 B. The Contractor shall place and shall finish Cement Concrete Sidewalks in accordance with 2 Section 8-14.3(3) of the. WSDOT Standard Specifications. 3.13 JOINTS FOR CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBS 6 A. Construction and Contraction joints for Cement Concrete Pavement shall be constructed in ,; 7 accordance with Section 5-05 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications and as shown on the 8 Contract Drawings, except where directed otherwise by the Engineer. When joint spacing is 9 not shown on the Contract Drawings, the Contractor shall space the joints on a maximum of 10 15-foot centers at the locations directed by the Engineer in the field at the time of ' 11 ~ construction. 12 B. Joints in Cement Concrete Curb. shall be spaced on approximately 15-foot centers and where 13 shown on the Contract Drawings. All joints shall be constructed to the full cross section 14 height and width of the curb. Joints in the curb shall be as shown on the plans (if shown) and 15 shall be coincident with the joints in the pavement, except where the Engineer directs ~ 16 otherwise. . ', 17 C. All joints shall be tooled smooth and thoroughly cleaned of loose debris and concrete prior to 18 : ~ applying sealant. 19 D. Expansion joints for Cement Concrete Sidewalk shall be constructed as shown on the 20 ~ Contract Drawings, except where changes are required to match the existing joints: 21 E.; The Contractor shall use the details shown on the Contract Drawings for estimation purposes 22 only. The exact location of expansion joints and score lines shall be as directed by the Owner 23 at the time of construction. The Contractor shall request such direction at least 48 hours prior 24 to concrete placement. 25 ' 26 3.14 CU RING 27 28 A. The Contractor shall perform curing of Cement Concrete Pavement in accordance with 29 Section 5-05.3(13)8 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, except that the curing period 30 shall be for at least six (6) days, regardless of the compressive strength obtained. The only 3.1 acceptable curing method shall utilize polyethylene sheeting. Polyethylene sheeting shall be 32 placed and secured within one (1) hour of obtaining the final concrete finish. Polyethylene 33 sheeting shall completely cover all exposed concrete surfaces, including the sides, and shall 34 be. weighted with sandbags, tires, or other means to seal the edges, prevent lifting by wind, 35 and retain moisture. Polyethylene sheeting shall remain in place during the entire curing 36 period. The Contractor shall perform daily maintenance of the sheeting to prevent lifting and ' 37 exposure of the concrete. . 38 B. The Contractor shall perform curing of the Cement Concrete Sidewalk in accordance with 39 Section 8-14.3(4) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, except that the curing period shall 40 be for at least four (4) days, and except that the only acceptable curing method shall utilize 41 polyethylene sheeting. Polyethylene sheeting shall be placed within one (1) hour of obtaining 42 the final concrete finish. 43 C. The Contractor .shall perform curing of Cement Concrete Curbs utilizing the same method 44 described above, except that the curing period shall be for at least three (3) days. 45 Polyethylene sheeting shall remain in place during the entire curing period. 46 D. Polyethylene sheeting shall completely cover all exposed concrete surfaces, including the 47 sides, and shall be weighted with sandbags or other means to seal the edges, prevent lifting 48 by wind, and retain moisture. The sheeting shall be arranged without flat and flush with the 49. '' concrete to be cured, without wrinkles or folds. ~ [yrms] 02750-7 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT, CURBS AND SIDEWALKS 02750-7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 IS 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 E. During the curing period for both Concrete Pavement and Concrete Curbs, all pedestrian and vehicular traffic shall be positively excluded from access to the pavement .and curbs. The Contractor shall erect WSDOT Type III barricades and cones, and use any other means as required to insure that traffic of all types is excluded from travel on the completed work for the specified curing period. Type III barricades across roadways shall be furnished in sufficient quantity to leave no more than a two foot gap between barricades and to completely block all vehicular and pedestrian traffic. 3.15 PAVEMENT REPAIRS A. Where contractor-furnished repairs are required, such repair shall require the complete removal and replacement of the damaged Cement Concrete Curb or Cement Concrete Sidewalk section(s) to the nearest joint. Patching of curb or sidewalk sections will not be acceptable. Where required for a straight match line, the Contractor shall sawcut sidewalk sections to accomplish the complete removal of the damaged sections. B. Where pavement repairs are required due to defective pavement, such repair shall require the complete removal and replacement of the damaged panel(s) to the nearest longitudinal and transverse joint, and no additional payment will be allowed therefore. Patching of panels will not be acceptable. Where required. for a straight match line, the Contractor shall sawcut pavement panels to accomplish the complete removal of the damaged panels. 3.16 JOINT SEALANT A. Prior to the application of joint sealant, the Contractor shall pressure-wash and thoroughly dry all joints. B. The Contractor shall apply joint sealant where specified on the Contract Drawings in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation instructions. END OF SECTION 02750 [yn„sl 02750-8 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT, CURBS AND SIDEWALKS 02750-8 ii t 1 "2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45: 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 SECTION 02765 -SIGNS AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01. DESCRIPTION ' ' A. General Requirements 1. Drawings and general provisions of'the Contract Documents including General, Special and other Conditions and Division 1, "Genera! Requirements" Sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A.. All subgrade preparation as specified herein or otherwise required for installation of new work shown or specified. B. In general, work specified herein shall be included in the Bid. Work. under this section includes all labor, supervision, equipment, tools, materials, services and incidentals necessary for signs and pavement markings. 1.03 RELATEDSEC:TIONS . A. Section 02220 -Site Demolition and Clearing & Preparation .. B. Section.02300 -Earthwork C. Section 02315 -Trenching, Backfilling and' Compaction for. Utilities D, Section 02740 - Asphalf Concrete Pavement E. Section 02750 -Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, Curbs and Sidewalks F. Section 02721, -Catch Basins and Inlets G. Section 02630 - Stormwater .System ' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard Specifications 1. MUTCD: Except as otherwise specified, the work under this Section shall conform to the ',provisions and details of the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Conform Devices", latest Edition, hereinafter, called "MUTCD" 2. Provide approved stencils for arrows, lettering and symbols in accordance with applicable City, State and r=ederal Regulations. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A: Delivery' & Storage ofi Materials ' 1: Deliver paints and. solvents in unopened. original containers with original labels thereon; keep sealed until containers and materials have been approved by Engineer. 2. Store materials in approved safe area; mix and thin only. as recommended by manufacturer: 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection 1. Erect barriers so that paint is not driven over or walked upon until paint incompletely dry and fully cured. [yrrris] 02765-1 SIGNS AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS 02765-1 ,` 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Traffic Line Paint 1. Material: Furnish chlorinated rubber base traffic paint, conforming to Federal Specifications TT-P-115E, M-E-I solvent type, colors as specified herein for each type. 2. Approved Manufacturers/Products: a. General: Tru-Test Supreme Zone Marking Paint b. Glidden: Traffic Zone Paint c. Miller. Traffic Line Paint d. P.P.G. Industries: Pittsburgh Traffic and Zone Marking Paint e. Rodda: Traffic Paint B. Street, Traffic, Warning and. Information Signs 1, Alf street, traffic, warning and information signs shall be configured in accordance with MUTCD and the plans. 2. All signs shall be supported on sign posts .constructed in accordance with City of Yelm Zoning Code. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Spray Equipment 1. Use only approved pneumatic spraying machine, manufactured for pavement paint striping, fitted with an atomizing nozzle capable of applying stripes of widths shown. 2. Operate spraying equipment by.means of quick opening valves and pressure regulators and gauges located in reach and view of operator. B. Stencils 1. Use plywood, hardboard or metal stencils, neatly .formed, of size as approved by the Engineer. 2. Provide approved stencils for arrows, symbols and lettering. 3. Provided approved stencils for handicapped symbols in accordance with .State and Federal Regulations. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Preparation of Surfaces 1. Clean all surfaces to receive striping or marking to be free of dirt;. oil and loose material; surfaces to be thoroughly dry. B. Striping Layout • 1. Adequately mark on pavement with chalk or other material that may be easily brushed or washed off. 2. Obtain approval of Engineer before applying paint. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Paint Application -General 1. All straight lines to be straight, in locations shown, curved lines to true radii. Stripe widths shall not vary more than plus or minus % inch. 2. Paint shall be applied at a rate of 80 square feet per gallon (approximately 20 mils wet thickness). An allowable tolerance not to exceed minus 10% shall be permitted for film thickness or yield in paint application. 3. All painted surfaces free of holidays with neat, clean edges and ends. 4. Perform all work by mechanics skilled in operation of spraying equipment. [yrms] 02765-2 SIGNS AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS 02765-2 1 1 2 B. Striping. 3 1. Striping shall be applied in the locations and to the dimensions shown on Drawings, 4 except as otherwise noted, and shall consist of straight solid lines of white traffic paint. 5 2. Crosswalk stripes shall be in accordance with City of Yelm Zoning Code. 6 3. Pedestrian drop-off area stripes shall consist of solid white warning stripes 12 inches in 7 width and spaced at 36 inches center to center, oriented at 15 degrees to the curb face 8 and in lengths indicated on the plans. 9 4. Fire lane curb striping shall be in accordance with .City of Yelm Fire Department 10 Standards. 11 C. Lettering 12 1. Provide drop-off area and fire lane painted lettering as shown on the plans, consisting of 13 white color traffic paint, 12 inches high using 2 inch brush strokes. 14 2. Lettering shall be places so that it is aligned parallel.with'the pavement edge. 15 16 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 17 18 A. Defective Work 19 1. Replace, in manner approved by Engineer and without damage to surface and at no 20 additional cost to Owner, all work considered defective by Engineer; defective work to 21 include mis-painted lines, checking, cracking, peeling, discoloration, and lack of bonding 22 of paint. 23 2. Normal traffic wear.will not be considered a defect in the work. 24 25 26 END OF SECTION 02765 l [yrms] 02765-3 SIGNS AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS 02765-3 . '' 1 SECTION 02810 -IRRIGATION ,I 2 3 ' 4 5 PART 1 -GENERAL . 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 9 .Note: Prior to bidding the work of this Section, Contractors shall visit the site to generally ' 10 familiarize themselves with existing conditions, soils, slope,. access, and otfier readily apparent 11 site conditions. 12 13 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and ' 14 Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 15 ' 16 17 Refer to Section 02900 Planting and Seeding 18 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 19. 20 Note: Work described in this section is affected by bid alternates. See section 01030 for alternate ' 21 descriptions. 22 23 24 The work of this Section includes-but is not limited to the following: 25 Furnishing and installing automatic irrigation system complete including complete point of connection to 26 water line, booster pump, trenching. and backfill, and furnishing and installing all labor equipment and 27 items noted on drawings and specified herein, and balancing and testing of system. t 28 29 QUALITY ASSURANCE 30 ' 31 Codes and Ordinances: All local, municipal and State laws, rules, and regulation governing or relating to 32 any portion of this work.are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications. Anything 33 contained in these specifications shall not be construed to conflict with the above-mentioned rules, 34 regulations or requirements, and where a conflict may occur, the rules regulations, or requirements of the 35 governing code shall be adhered to. However, when these specifications and/or drawings call for or 36 describe materials, workmanship or construction of a better quality, higher standard or larger size, these 37 specifications and/or drawings shall take precedence over the requirements of said rules, regulations, or ' 38 codes. 39 40 . SUBMITTALS 41 42 Products and Materials: Immediately after award of contract, provide sufficient descriptive 43 literature/information as to all operating characteristics, „including operating pressures, pressure losses, 44 materials used in product, test certificates, special features, etc., for those products not specified by 45 manufacturer or those submitted for approval as equal. Only the Landscape Architect can accept an item 46 as "equal". Approval must be in writing. 47 48 PERMITS AND FEES 49 50 Obtain all permits and pay required fees to any governmental agency having jurisdiction over the work. 51 Arrange inspections if required by local agencies and ordinances during the course of construction. 52 53 APPROVAL 54 ~' (ridgelineJ02810 - 1 IRRIGATION 02810 - 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 Whenever the terms "approve" "approval" or "approved" are used in the Specification, they mean approval of Landscape Architect in writing. Record Irrigation Drawings Contractor shall furnish record drawings of the complete irrigation system in accordance with the General and Special Conditions. The Landscape Architect shall provide two sets of full-size prints showing all irrigation work required under this contact. One set of prints is to be on site at all times during the construction so that Contractor can make a daily record of all work installed. Actual location of hidden items including valves, stub cuts, manual drains shut-off valves shall be shown on the prints by dimensions from easily identified permanent features such as buildings curbs fences walks or property lines. Drawings shall show approved manufacturer's name and catalog number. The drawings shall be to scale and all indications shall be neat. These prints will be observed by the Landscape Architect throughout the course of work. After testing and approval of mainlines and laterals for cover-up all information noted on the job site prints shall be transferred to the final drawings with all indications recorded in a neat orderly way by Contractor. The record drawings shall be turned over to the Landscape Architect for review at or before the Provisional Acceptance (punch list) of the Project. Operations Manual: One manual, bound in a hardback cover, shall be submitted to the architect for approval at the time of mainline testing. It shall include as a minimum the following information for all items used on the system: • List of authorized distributors and service representatives for each piece of irrigation equipment, including names, addresses, and phone numbers. • Guarantee/warranty certificates. • Instruction manuals. • Parts lists for each item with exploded views of each item showing part numbers. • .Complete trouble-shooting guide to common irrigation problems. • DCVA Test Certification. Contractor shall arrange and pay for test by a Washington State certified backflow assembly tester. • Winterization and spring start-up procedures. At the time of fihal inspection of the completed installation, the Contractor shall have completed revisions to the Landscape Architect's satisfaction of the "as-built" drawings and operations manual (indicating all changes) ready to turn over to the Owners for recording purposes; this shall be accomplished prior to final payment. JOB CONDITIONS Coordination with Others: Water Source: Refer to Drawings, connect to stub out as shown on civil plans. Power Source: 120 V.A.C. power for two controllers, as provided in electrical drawings. Mechanical/Electrical: A. Provide 3" diameter sleeve for control wiring from each new controller location to outside planting area as shown on drawings. B. 460 v/3 phase power to booster, pump location, see drawings. Sleeving: Sleeve under all paved areas, with PVC class 200 sleeves, size as shown on drawings. (ridgelineJ02810 - 2 IRRIGATION 02810 - 2 r L ii L 1 2 Other Trades: Coordinate all work with that of other trades.. 3 4 Available Water Pressure: Verify available water pressure at point of connection prior to beginning work. 5 6 'PROTECTION 7 8 Protect work, adjacent property, public, and be• responsible for any damage or injury arising from this. 9 contract. - 10 11 Confine work to areas designated. Do not disturb natural vegetation outside of project limit lines. Protect 12 all trees and shrubs within project limits not designated to be removed per Detail D Sheet L2.1. Repair. or 13 replace vegetation damaged as a result of Contractor's' operation to satisfaction of Owners at Contractor's 14 expense. 15 16 Be cognizant of all utility lines and underground obstruction. Be familiar with all utility, irrigation, 17 mechanical, and electrical plans, so that digging/drilling operations do not damage lines. Replace or repair 18 at Contractor's expense any existing buildings,. equipment, underground utilities, walks, stairs, and/or 19 forms damaged as a result of Contractor's .operations in a manner satisfactory to the Owners before final 20 payment is made. 21 22 GUARANTEE 23 24 Guarantee the .satisfactory operation of equipment, materials and workmanship, including restoration of 25 the area for a period of one year from the date of its acceptance. Repair or replace any defect in 26 equipment or workmanship occurring within that year.at Contractor's expense.\ 27 28 29 30 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 31 32 GENERAL ' 33 34 Materials: All materials to be incorporated in this system shall be new and without flaws or defects and of 35. quality and performance as specified, and meeting the requirements of the system. All pipe damaged or 36 rejected because of defects shall be removed from the site at the time of rejections. 37 38 Substitutions: No substitutions of smaller pipe sizes will be permitted but substitutions of larger sizes of 39 same type at no extra cost with approval are acceptable. 40 41 Whenever any material is specified by name or number, such specifications shall be used for the purpose 42 of facilitating a description of the materials and establishing quality and shall be deemed and construed to 43 be followed by the words "or approved equal." No substitutions will be permitted which have not been 44 submitted for prior written approval of the Landscape Architect. 45 46 PIPE AND FITTINGS 47 48 Polyvinyl Chloride. Pipe and Fittings: 49 50 PVC Pipe and Fittings: PVC compound Type 1, Grade 1, or Type 1, Grade 2, conforming to ASTM D 51 1784 specifications and approved and certified, by the National Sanitation Foundation, all fittings Schedule 52 40 unless otherwise noted. Each length of PVC pipe is to be marked with an identifying extrusion "run" 53 number and the manufacturer's name or trade name, the pipe size and schedule or class. 54 ' (ridgelineJ02810 - 3 IRRIGATION 02810 - 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 PVC Solvent Weld Pipe: PVC 1120 and 1220 material, and shall have 200 psi minimum pressure rating unless otherwise indicated, with SDR 21 walls which conform to ASTM D 2241. PVC pipe with walls heavier than SDR 21 shall be installed when noted. PVC Threaded Pipe PVC 1120 or PVC 1220 materials, Schedule 80 conforming to ASTM D 1785. Plastic Pipe Fittings: Conform to ASTM D 2466, Type 1, Grades 1 or 2. Pipe may be belled on one end with the dimensions. of the tapered bell conforming to ASTM D 2672. Molded fittings manufactured of the same materials as the pipe, suitable for solvent weld, unless otherwise specified. Slip fitting socket taper shall be so sized that a dry, unsoftened pipe end can be inserted no more than halfway into the socket. Plastic saddle and flange fittings not permitted. Solvent Weld Compound: Two-step application, with primer and solvent compounds. PIPE BEDDING 8~ BACKFILL Bedding and backfill of irrigation trenches to subgrade elevation shall be with imported sand (maximum particle size 1/4"). Submit source and sample for approval. IRRIGATION HEADS As shown on drawings. VALVES Quick Coupler Valves: Brass, one-or two-piece with spring-loaded locking rubber cover. As shown on drawings. Manual Drain. Valves: Brass, 3/4" size, commercial quality, non-rising stem type, as shown on drawings: Zone Valves: Electric remote control valve as shown on drawings. ~ VALVE BOXES AND PROTECTIVE SLEEVES General: Enclose all valves and quick couplers in valve boxes, at depth of pipe. Provide extensions to finish grade as required. Valve Boxes: As shown on drawings. Field Connection: As shown on drawings. PROTECTIVE SLEEVE WITH LOCKING CAPS 2"-diameter Class 160 PVC, length as required. Caps, Rainbird #63100. All drain- valves and manual control valves to be enclosed in protective sleeves/locking caps. Color: purple and permanently marked to warn public that the water system is rioln-potable. VALVE KEYS AND VALVE BOX COVER KEYS Provide two complete sets of all keys required for opening or operation of valves, valve box covers, and protective sleeve cap.covers. CONTROLLERS (ridgelineJ02810 - 4 IRRIGATION 02810 - 4 ~ ,' C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 ~49 50 51 52 53 54 Mount at 60" off floor in location shown on drawings and as verified with architect. Provide weatherproof locking covers and 2 sets of keys. MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT Control Wire: Insulated single-strand copper, minimum AWG No. 14, 600 V UL-approved as Type UF. Copper conductor meet or exceed ASTM B-3. Red, white, orange, and black colors must be available. Sufficient quantities must be supplied to meet splice and extra-wire requirements listed under control wire installation. Control wire size must meet or exceed Rainbird and Toro irrigation control wire specifications including length of run/size ratio. Provide tracer tape attached to control wire at 10'-0" o.c. Booster Pump: FloBoy Fixed Speed Booster Pumping System, mode- FBSBF10ASH7D46R3AC rated 100 gpm at 53 psi boost. Minimum suction pressure to be 17. Discharge pressure to be 70 psi. Motor is 7.5 HP, 3600 RPM full voltage, horizontal NEMA face ODP. Pumps shall have stainless steel casing, stainless steel enclosed impeller and mechanical seal. A schedule 40 full-flow bypass line with check valve will be provided. Electrical power shall be 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz. Standard Construction will include: • Marine grade aluminum enclosure. • Lockable access cover. • Enclosed ventilation fan. • Electrical fusible disconnect. • 3" flanged suction and discharge connections with zinc plated piping. • 2-5/8" silicone filled pressure gauges with isolation valve. • Factory run testing using actual suction pressure, discharge pressure and flow conditions. • U.L. listed NEMA 12 control/starter panel. • Suction pressure gauge. • Programmable "Smart Relay" industrial grade controller with operator interface. • Power Monitor -Under/Overload, Under/Overvoltage protection. • On/Off/Auto selector switches. • Low/High discharge pressure shutdown and alarm. • Soiid State overload/single phase/phase imbalance/low voltage protection. • 7.5 hp across the line NEMA starter. • 24 volt AC relay for starting and stopping. • 3" pump suction and discharge isolation valves and a station discharge isolation valve. • Full flow bypass system. • 1 CD -FloBoy operation and maintenance manual. • 1 printed copy of the FloBoy operator and maintenance manual. • 1 year limited warranty. Splice: Make watertight electrical wire splices with either 3-M, Scott's Lock Seal tack 3576-78 or Pen-Tite PVC socket and sealing plug or Rainbird PT-100 series. Electrical Tape: Black plastic, 3/4" wide, minimum of 0.007" thick, and all-weather type. Duct Tape: All-weather cloth tape. Trace Wire: Bare #10 solid copper. DRAIN ROCK Unfractured rock; 100" passing 1-1/2" square sieve and 0% passing 3/4" square sieve. (ridgelineJ02810 - 5 IRRIGATION 02810 - 5 i 2 PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3 4 INSPECTION 5 6 Discrepancies: Upon initiation of work or at earliest time discovered, report to the Architect any deviations 7 between the irrigation drawings and the site. Failure to do so prior to the installing of equipment, and 8 resulting in replacing, and/or relocating, or additional equipment, shall be done at Contractor's expense. 9 10 ;Installation of piping prior to establishment of correct subgrade elevations is strongly discouraged. 11 Contractor must attain specified bury depths. 12 13 Available Pressure Verification: Prior to the start of .work, verify the assumed static pressure at point 14 . of connection.. Notify Architect in writing of pressure available for approval to proceed. 15 16 Plant Materials: Locate irrigation lines to avoid proposed plant material locations and any existing trees. 17 Minor field adjustments may be made by the Architect to shrubs to avoid equipment. If conflict occurs with 18 tree pit, relocate irrigation line at no additional cost. 19 20 PERFORMANCE 21 22 Stake the sprinkler irrigation system head locations following the schematic design shown on the plans for 23 approval before the construction begins. Alterations and changes in the layout may be expected in order 24 to conform to the ground conditions and to obtain full and adequate coverage of water. It is understood 25 that corrective measures may become necessary but no changes or alteration in the system as planned 26 shall be made without the prior authorization of the Landscape Architect. 27 28 Where connections to existing stub-outs are required make necessary adjustments in layout to connect 29 should stubs not be located exactly as shown. Adjust layout as necessary to install around existing work. 30 Where piping is shown to be under paved areas, but running parallel and adjacent to planted area, 31 intention is to install piping in planted areas. Do not install directly over another line in same trench. 32 . 33 Water service connections shall conform to the requirements set forth by the supplying agency, and all 34 codes and ordinance. 35 36 Trenching: 37 Trenches shall be excavated for all pipe to provide a minimum depth of cover below finish grade. as 38 follows: 39 40 Mainlines 18" 41 Laterals 12" 42 ' 43 Excavate no wider at any point than is necessary to lay the pipe or installation equipment. Excavate with 44 vertical sides and provide bracing and shoring as required. 45 4b Excavate to depth required in any material encountered with rio extra compensation. Materials unsuitable 47 for bedding of pipe to be removed to depth 4" below trench as directed by Landscape Architect. Suitable 48 bedding material shall be import sand as specified. 49 50 Exercise care when excavating trenches near existing trees. Where roots are 2" grid greater in diameter, 51 except in the direct path of the pipe, hand-excavate and tunnel. When large roots are exposed, wrap with 52 heavy burlap for protection and to prevent excessive drying. Trenches dug by machiries shall have the 53 sides hand-trimmed, making a clean cut of the roots. All roots 1/2" and greater in diameter that are cut (ridgelineJ02810 - 6 IRRIGATION 02810 - 6 ,, ~ . - 1 and trimmed shall be treated with an approved tree wound dressing.- Trenches having exposed tree roots 2 3. shall be backfilled within 24 hours unless adequately protected by moist burlap or canvas. 4 The top 6" of topsoil, when such exists, shall be kept separate from subsoil and shall be replaced as the 5 top layer when backfill is made. 6 7 Piping: .. 8. Drain Valves: Installed at Point of Connection only. ?Each drain to have 1/2 cu. yd. drain rock sump. 9. Install valves as per detail. Locate sumps outside of paved areas, use off-sets if necessary. System will ' 10 be winterized. by compressed-air blowout throughout quick coupler. • . 11 . 12 ~ Pipe Placement: Plastic pipe shall be installed• in a manner. so as to provide for expansion and contraction 13 ~ as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide tracer tape attached to pipe 10'-0" o.c./mainlines only. 14 15 Sleeves: Where sleeves are required, extend sleeve 12" beyond edge of pavement. 16 17 Jointing: 18 General: All. ,threaded joints (PVC or galv.) shall be sealed with Teflon tape or Rectorseal "Heavy Duty" 19 ~ 20 #100 virgin Teflon thread sealing paste only (no substitutes): 21 .Care shall be taken to not over=tighten fittings. ` 22 23 Keep interior of pipes clean and free from dirt, debris, excess solvent, pipe cuttings or burrs, and ream to 24 full diameter. When pipe laying is not in progress, close ends of pipe. 25 26 27 PVC. Pipe: Use two-step solvent weld process only, apply as per mahufacturer's recommendations. 28 No water shall, be permitted in pipe. until a period of at least 10 hours has elapsed for solvent weld-setting 29 .and curbing. 3q ` 31 The joints shall be allowed to cure at.least 24 hours before pressure is applied to the system. 32 33 34 Only factory-threaded schedule 80 PVC pipe may be connected to a threaded. fitting without an adapter. 35 No male PVC adapters permitted. -Use only female PVC adapters with galvanized steel pipe nipples. (3" 36 min. length). Street. ells permitted,only~for triple swing joints, and only "Marlex" Schedule 40 high-density 37 polyethylene (no substitutes). , . ' 38 . 39 Installation: 40 41 General: See details for general installation requirements.:.Provide sufficient clearance for materials requiring maintenance. Install all materials as per manufacturer's recommendations. 42 43 Sprinkler HeadJQuick Coupler. Risers for all sprinkler heads and quick-coupler valves shall 6e standard ', 44 triple-swing joining type as detailed; made with Schedule $0. PVC threaded fittings. 45 ' 46 Minimum riser size shall be the iron pipe size of the sprinkler head or quick coupler. 47 48 • All sprinkler heads .and quick coupling valves shall be set perpendicular and flush to finished grades. •49 Heads in lawn areas must be slightly depressed to avoid mower damage. . 50 ~ .. , 51 Spray pattern shall not overthrow onto structures, glass,; parking lots, walkways, or public right-of-ways. 52 53 Locate heads to avoid ..possible damage by cars. 54 _ ' 'f (ridgelineJ02810 = 7 IRRIGATION 02810 - 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 Heads must be within 6" of edge of paving or curbs. After Fine grading/mulching adjust all head heights as necessary. Valves:.Enclose all valves (including automatic control valves and PRV's) in valve .boxes except manual or drain valves which are to be enclosed in protective sleeves with locking caps. Valve box extension may be required. Install as per detail and locate precisely by dimensions to two fixes objects on as-built drawings. Valve bonnet packings and bolts shall be checked and tightened before backfill. Control Wiring Installation: Wiring between automatic controller and automatic .control valves shall conform with. national Electrical Code, latest edition, and shall have a common neutral, white; and separate control conductor for each valve. Splices will be permitted only at junction boxes, valve boxes, or at control equipment. A minimum of 2 ft. or excess conductor shall be left at all splices, terminal, and control valves to facilitate inspection and future splicing. Encapsulate all splices with approved sealants. Run a bare copper trace wire from the controller along. all mainlines to the furthest zones. Tape wire to top of main at 5' maximum intervals: Provide 3 spare wires looped through entire system -labeled at each J-box and valve box. Clean-Up: Keep the premises free from rubbish and debris at all times, and arrange material so as not to interfere with other operations on the job site. Remove all unused material, rubbish, and debris from the site. INSPECTIONS AND TESTING General: To be valid, the pressure tests must be performed, under the direction of the Landscape Architect. The Contractor must give 48 hours notice to the Landscape Architect when inspection is required. The location, inspection and testing provisions for these specifications will b,e strictly adhered to. If, for any reason, any part of the sprinkler system is backfilled before location, testing, or inspection; it must be completely uncovered and exposed until approved for backfilling by Architect. The Architect reserves the right to direct the removal and replacement of any items which, in his opinion, do not present an orderly, reasonably neat, or workmanlike appearance, provided such items can be properly installed in such orderly way by the usual methods in.such work. Such removal and replacement shall be done, when directed in writing, at the Contractor's expense without additional cost to the Owner. Preliminary Inspection/Pressure Testing: Prior to request for preliminary inspection of arrival of Architect, accomplish the following: • All .pipe and valves (including drain valves and quick couplers) and all other equipment except sprinkler heads in place. • Cap all risers except first riser from valve on each lateral (one uncapped riser per lateral), typical. • Purge all air from main lines. Test of Mains and Valves: With all valves in place and closed, test at 150 psi minimum for 30 minutes without introduction of additional service or pumping pressure. Testing shall be done with one pressure gauge installed on the line where directed by Architect. Lines which show loss of pressure exceeding 5 psi at the end of specified test periods shall be rejected. The Contractor shall correct installations rejects, and retesting will be performed as specified herein. . Test of Laterals: Purge all air from laterals and cap all risers. Open: valves and bring. system to .line pressure. Lateral lines will be inspected visually. Lines which evidence visible leakage shall be rejected. (ridgeline]02810 - 8 IRRIGATION 02810 - 8 1 2 Rejected Systems: Rejected systems or portions of systems requiring repair and. retesting in the manner 3 specified. - 4 5 Final Inspection/Operations and Coverage Check: Prior to request for final inspection or arrival of 6 Architect accomplish the following: 8 Complete all work, including balancing, adjusting the system (pressure reducing valves, flow adjustment 9 keys, nozzles, etc.) to provide optimum coverage without fogging. Backfill all except valve boxes. 10 11 Coverage Check: Operate each zone of the system for the Architect's inspection. 12 13 SYSTEMS OPERATION ORIENTATION 14 15 At time of and as part of the final inspection, conduct a training and orientation session for the Owner 16 covering the operation, adjustment and maintenance of the irrigation system. The "as-built" plans and 17 operations manual shall be reviewed and all features explained. The Contractor shall notify the Architect 18 in writing two weeks prior to the training and orientation session. The date and time of the session shall 19 be subject to approval of the Architect. 20 21 END OF SECTION 02810 22 (ridgeline]02810 - 9 IRRIGATION 02810 - 9 1 SECTION 02821 -RUBBERIZED SURFACING 2 3 4 5 PART 1-GENERAL 6 ' 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS . ~ 8 9 Note: Prior to bidding the vuork of this Section, Contractors shall visit the site to generally 10 11 .familiarize themselves with existing conditions, soils, slope, access, and other readily apparent site conditions. 12 13 Drawings and General Requirements of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, 14 Special Provisions, Division 1 Specifications, and Technical Specifications applicable to this Section. 15 . 16 DESCRIPTION OF WORK i 17 18 Note: Work described in this section is affected by bid alternates. See section 01030 for alternate 19 descriptions... 20 '' 21 This Section includes the following: 22 23 Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for installation, as indicated on the drawings and in 24 these specifications, for rubberized surfacing of field event areas, including high jump fan and long jump. 25 runways. 26 27 Coordinate with Contractors performing related and adjacent work on this project. 28 29 Provide a warranty as specified. 30 31 32 SUBMITTALS ' 33 A. Submit product data in the form of manufacturer's technical data, specifications, and installation 34 instructions, including rubber granule sieve analysis. 35 ' 36 B. Samples: Submit 4" square sample. of product. 37 38 39 C. Warranty: Submit within 14 days after Notice to Proceed. 40 D. Maintenance Data: Submit all information the Owner.:must know to care for the surface to prolong 41 its life and maintain the warranty, including repair procedures and precautions. 42 t,f 43 E. References from all manufacturers and installers who are not pre-approved shall be submitted a 44 minimum of 10 days prior to bid opening for approval prior to bid. The references shall include a ' 45 minimum of three successful projects similar to this one, using the same materials and installation 46 procedures described in this specification and a minimum of two years experience. List clients 47 and contacts, project locations, and when the projects were installed. Submit names and resumes 48 of foremen .and key personnel to be used on this project. The same data must be submitted and 49 pre-approved for the proposed track/field event marking subcontractor and surveyor. 50 . 51 QUALITY ASSURANCE 52 53 Standard Specifications: Track and Field rules, latest editions, of the National Federation of State High 54 School Associations (NFSHSA), (816) 464-5400. 55 I ~' ' (ridgelineJ02821 - 1 RUBBARIZED SURFACING 02821 - 1 Acceptance of Related Work: Beginning work in this Section indicates acceptance by the Contractor of all other previously installed related work. Testing: The Owner reserves the right to test the surfacing system to determine if it meets the minimum requirements of this Specification and the submitted manufacturer's specifications. The Contractor shall remove and replace any surfacing that does not meet specification at no additional cost to the Owner. WARRANTY Provide a warranty for the rubberized surfacing for five years total from the date of final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner. Coverage: The warranty shall protect the Owner from all installation, manufacturing, and material defects related to work in this Section. The warranty shall ensure the suitable usability of the surface for the following functions: general pedestrian traffic, track and field events, physical education activities and exercises, wheelchair traffic, access by service vehicles with pneumatic rubber tires, and other similar uses. Use of spiked shoes for track shall be covered. Conditions: The warranty shall ensure prompt repair or replacement of work that undergoes excessive deterioration or does not perform as required because of failures in workmanship and materials. The warrantor shall make the repairs/replacement within 20 days of receipt of complaint in writing, except if adverse weather conditions prevent it. The term "excessive deterioration" means loss of 20% or more from the spray coat/wearing surface, or granular loss from the spray coat/wearing surface. Performance failure shall include, but not be limited to, any de-lamination between the rubberized surfacing and asphalt or between rubberized surfacing layers, and dissolving and percolation of binders and other surfacing elements. If repairs/replacements do not occur within the 20 days of complaint receipt, the Owner reserves the right to have the work performed by others and to be reimbursed by the warrantor for the costs of this work. Warrantor: The warranty shall be promulgated by the parent company of the installer, and shall be signed by an authorized individual in the parent company. PART 2-PRODUCTS BASE BID Impermeable surfacing system, 13 mm thickness. Mechanically applied base mat of SBR rubber with polyurethane binder. Wearing layers of EPDM granules, fully saturated color (red color), with polyurethane structural spray binder. Atlas BMSS - or approved equal. PART 3- EXECUTION GENERAL Installation Conditions: Materials shall not be placed when ambient air temperature is below. 50 degrees F, materials temperatures are below 50 degrees F, surfaces are wet or damp, precipitation is falling or pending, wind conditions are unsuitable for spray coating, and if any other conditions exist or are pending that would make it unsuitable for surfacing system installation. (ridgelineJ02821 - 2 RUBBARIZED SURFACING 02821 - 2 ii i 1 Order of Construction: Contractor shall complete installation of adjacent storm drainage,,adjacent. 2 concrete work, asphalt pavement, adjacent rough and fine-grading prior to installing rubberized surfacing. 3 4 Qualifications of Installers: Use only experience personnel familiar with the design and specialized in 5 installing the materials specified in this Section. The superintendent, supervisory personnel and technical 6 personnel must be employees of the approved manufacturer or installation company. 7 8 Equipment: The equipment used to blend and install the material components shall be clean, dry, 9 specifically designed for the purpose they will be used for, and have automatic controls that allow 1 10 11 adjustment of material proportions in relationship to various climatic conditions during installation. 12 PREPARATION 13 14 Asphalt pavement acceptance: Review and accept asphalt pavement upon which rubberized surfacing. 15 will be applied. Review procedure shall include verification of adequate compaction and surface slope 16 and grades within the specified tolerances. 17 18 Cleaning: Thoroughly clean asphalt pavement surface, removing all substances detrimental to rubberize 19 surfacing installation.. 20 21 Protection: Use all measures necessary to protect adjacent work from contamination by rubberized 22 surfacing installation procedure. Contractor shall replace, at no cost to the Owner, all adjacent work that 23 is irreparably damaged or discolored as a result of the surfacing installation.. 24 25 BASE LAYER INSTALLATION - 26 27 General: Install surfacing in accordance with manufacturer's specifications, and these contract 28. documents. 29 30 Procedure: Apply primer as necessary to ensure complete. bond between asphalt pavement base surface 31 and base layer material: Place base layer material using a mechanically operated paver with an 32 electrically heated, oscillating finishing screed bar that will place the material at a minimum thickness of 33 12mm. 34 35 Mixer: Only continuous-mix mixers are allowed. No batch-mixing allowed. ~: 36 37 - Gradients: The finished surface of the base layer shall not deviate from the specified gradient by more 38 than +0.05' in 10'0" measured in any direction with a straight edge.. 39 40 Coordinate with other trades to ensure flush/level relationship of track surface to takeoff boards, and no 41 gaps. 42 ' 43 TOP LAYER INSTALLATION 44 45 General: Install top layer in accordance with manufacturer's specifications, and these contract 46 documents. 47 48 ,Procedure: Apply to top layer using a specialized structural sprayer with an internal mixer to prevent 49 segregation of the EPDM granulate and pigmented polyurethane. 50 51 Gradients: The finished surface shall not deviate more than +3 mm and -0 mm in three meters measured 52 in any direction with a straight edge. 53 54 Finish: The surface texture shall be uniform and shall not have any defects, gaps, or grade transitions. 55 ' '. 56 Stri in :Provide runway striping as shown on plans and as specified herein. (ridgelineJ02821 - 3 RUBBARIZED SURFACING - 02821 - 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 CLEANING Remove all extraneous debris, materials, and equipment from the site within 24 hours of work completion All paint stains and other blemishes shall be removed from finished surface.. PROTECTION The installer shall be responsible for protection of the work during installation and until acceptance of the work by the Owner. The General Contractor will be responsible for projection of the work after~Owner acceptance until Final Acceptance of the entire project. All damage work shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 02821 (ridgelineJ02821 - 4 ~~ RUBBARIZED SURFACING 02821 - 4 ~' ~; 1 SECTION 02830 -CHAIN LINK FENCE & GATES 2 3 '~ 4 5 PART 1 -GENERAL 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 ' 9 Note: Prior to bidding the work of this Section, Contractors shall visit the site to generally 10 familiarize themselves with existing conditions, soils, slope, access, and other readily apparent 11 site conditions. 12 ' 13 Drawings and general provisions; of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions' and 14 Division I specification sections, apply to work of this section. 15 16 DESCRIPTION OF WORK. 17 18 Note: Work described in this section is affected by bid alternates. See section 01030 for alternate 19 descriptions. ' 20 21 Include all labor, materials, equipment, transportation, and services to complete chain link fencing and 2 2 gates, including storage units at rooms A016, A039, and A041, and elsewhere as shown on the drawings 2 3 :and herein specified. ,~: 2 4 ' ~25 SUBMITTALS 26 2 7 PRODUCT DATA 2 8 Submit .manufacturer's literature including details of all component parts and shop drawings for each type 2 9 of fence and gate. 30. t 31 STANDARDS , 32 33 INDUSTRY STANDARDS 34 Standards for Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric; Standard for Industrial Steel; Specifications for 3 5 Fence Posts, Gates and. Accessories; Standards.for Chain Lirik Fence Installation; as published by Chain 3 6 Link Fence Manufacturer's Institute (CLFMI). 37 3 8 American Society for Testing & Materials (ASTM) 39 40 '~ 41 42 PART2-PRODUCTS . 43 44 MATERIALS ' 45 4 6 General: 4 7 All new steel and iron parts; zinc-coated after fabrication. In accordance with CLFMI, ASTM, and herein ' ~ 4 8 specified. 49 5 0 Fabric: 51 Hot-dip process after fabrication or fabricated-from wire zinc-coated by the electrolytic or hot-dip process. 52 Weight of zinc coating minimum average of 1.2 ounces per square foot complying with ASTM A392. 53 (ridgelineJ02830 - 1 CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES 02830 - 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ,10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 Posts; rails, braces: Tubular members in accordance with ASTM A120 - 1.8 oz. Accessories: In accordance with ASTM A153. FABRIC Chain-Link: ' No. 9 gauge, 8,000 psi tensile strength steel wire woven in a 2 inch mesh. One piece fabric in height, no splices, heights as noted on the drawings, except for backstop fence. Provide green plastic sight obscuring pickets where noted on plans. Selvage: Shall be knuckled on both selvages for all fabric. Backstop: Chain Link No. 9 gauge steel wire woven in a 2 inch mesh. POSTS End Corner: Steel pipe, 2-7/8 inch O.D., 5.79 lbs. Line: Steel pipe, 2-3/8 inch O.D., 3.65 lbs. Gate: Steel pipe. 1. Single or one leaf of double gate width: a) 5 feet or less: 2-7/8" O.D., 5.79 lbs. b) 6 feet to 11 feet: 4" O.D.; 9.1 lbs. c) 12 feet to 18 feet: 6-5/8" O.D., 18.97 lbs. Backstop: 4 inch O.D. posts. Posts: All posts shall have standard pressed steel tops designed to fit posts and carry top rail; standard of manufacturer, ASTM F626. TOP. MIDDLE AND BOTTOM RAILS AND BRACES Steel pipe, 1-5/8 inch O.D., 2.30 lbs. Couplings: 6 inch length each joint. Spring couplings, 1 coupling in 5. Form continuous brace, end-to-end of fence run. GATE FRAMES (for all openings) Galvanized Steel Pipe. Spray galvanize on weld. 1-7/8" O.D., 2.72 lb. per foot. Welding or fittings and rivets. Provide horizontal and vertical members as required for rigidity. Provide truss rods where necessary. Gate shall support 300 lbs. imposed load at extreme and throughout entire range of operation without sag or damage. (ridgelineJ02830 - 2 CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES 02830 - 2 0 ti 0 I Ci 1 STRETCHER BARS 2 3 Steel: 4 Galvanized. Minimum size 3/16 x 3/4 inch. Provide one at each gate, end post, and gate frames end. 5 Provide two at each corner and pull post. Bars not required for posts where mesh is woven into lock 6 loops. 7 8 Stretcher Bar Bands: 9 Regular pressed steel, galvanized, spaced evenly, 12 inch center maximum. 10 11 WIRE TIES 12 13 Wire: 14 9 gauge steel, with minimum of three (3) full wraps around each connection. 15 16 Application: 17 Line posts: 14 inch centers 18 Rails and braces: 24 inch centers 19 Tension Wire: 7 gauge hog rings, 24 inch centers 20 21 TENSION WIRE 22 23 7 gauge coil spring wire. Galvanized, minimum 0.80 oz. coating per ASTM A392 or aluminum coated, 2 4 class 110.4 oz. ASTM A491. 25 2 6 CONCRETE 27 2 8 Refer to Section 03300, Concrete. 29 30 31 3 2 PART 3 -EXECUTION 33 34 GENERAL 35 3 6 Stake layout and obtain approval. 37 3 8 Coordinate with other trades to ensure proper relationship of fence to finish grades. 39 4 0 Set posts uniform in horizontal and vertical alignment, equally spaced, as indicated on drawings. Hold 41 tops of all concrete footings at least 6" below finish grade. 42 43 Where new fence is shown connecting to or extending from existing fence, provide and install new end 44 and/or corner posts as necessary to connect or extend fencing. 45 4 6 Where fence is integral with concrete curbs, hold dimensioned top of footing at bottom of curb as detailed. 47 4 8 No post holes are to be left open or unguarded during installation. 49 50 Contractor shall familiarize himself with locations of all underground utilities including irrigation and 51 subdrainage. Notify landscape architect of any conflict encountered. 52 53 Do not contaminate fields with soil from post excavations. Use plastic sheeting or other measures to 54 keep materials separated. Dispose of excess soils where directed. (ridgelineJ02830 - 3 CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES 02830 - 3 1 , 2 POST FOUNDATIONS 3 4 Concrete: 5 End, Corner (6' fencing): 6 12 inch hole diameter, 36 inches deep, 36 inches post embedment. 7 8 End, Corner (8' and 1D' fencing): 9 12 inch hole diameter 42 inches deep, 42 iriches post embedment. ~ ' 10 11 Line (6' fencing): 12 12 inch hole diameter, 30 inches deep, 24 inches post embedment. 13 14 Line (8' and 10' fencing): 15 12 inch hole diameter, 36 inches deep, 30 inch. embedment. 16 17 Backstop: . 18 12" hole diameter, 42 inches deep, 42 inch post embedment. 19 2 0 PLACING CONCRETE 21 22 Place around posts in a continuous pour. Compact concrete by hand rodding. 23 ~ ' 24 Finish tops of concrete by hand trowel to provide a sloped dome 6" below finish grade unless noted 2 5 otherwise; 1 inch slope from post. 26 2 7 Set keepers, stops, sleeves in concrete; minimum concrete coverage of items - 6 inches each side and 6 2 8 inches deeper than item. 29 3 0 FABRIC 31 3 2 Stretch fabric taut and tie to posts, braces, rails and frames. Fastenings to terminal posts shall be with 3 3 stretcher bars and fabric bands. Fastenings to line posts shall be with tie wire. Fabric rolls shall be joined 3 4 only at posts and by weaving a single strand of wire into the ends of the fabric to form a continuous mesh. 3 5 Mesh shall have bottom tension wire. 36 3 7 Place fabric and tension wire so that maximum gap at bottom of fence is 1" in any location. 38 39 Place fence fabric on project or field side of posts. Request direction from landscape architect where 4 0 necessary. 41 ~ ' 42 Bend all wire ties away from field of play. Ensure no sharp or dangerous protrusions. 43 44 CLEAN UP, ADJUSTMENTS ~ ' 45 4 6 General. 4 7 Remove excess earth resulting from post installations. Spread where directed. 48 4 9 Clean up all concrete spills,. splatter from adjacent paving, earth. 50 51 Clean. all parts of concrete splatter, other handling and installation contaminates. 52 53 54 END OF SECTION 02830 (ridgelineJ02830 - 4 CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES 02830 - 4 i 'I 1 2 ... ~ ., . SECTION 02870 -SITE IMPROVEMENTS 3 4 5 6 PART 1 -GENERAL , 7 - - ' 8 RELATED DOCUMENTS . . 9 - 10 Drawings and General.Requirements of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, '; 11 Special Provisions and. Technical Specifications applicable to this. section. 12 , 13 14 Note: Prior to bidding the work of this Section, Contractors. shall visit the site to .generally familiarize themselves with existing, conditions, soils, slope, access, and other readily apparent 15 site conditions.. 16 ' 17 SCOPE OF WORK : 18 • 19 Include all labor, material, equipment, transportation, and services required to complete iristallation of 20 equipment as shown on the drawings and herein specified. 2l 22 . SUBMITTALS • 23 24 Shop Drawings:. Complete showing materials, catalog numbers, .parts, fabrication and installation 25 requirements for all assemblies herein specified. 26 , • 27 . 28 . 29 PART 2 -PRODUCTS :. 30 31 ~ • WOOD PLAYCHIP SURFACING (BID ALT. A3) 32 33 Zeager Woodcarpet Safety Surfacing or approved equal, 12" compacted depth, virgin wood -cedar. 34 Provide Duraliner filter- fabric between woodsurfacing and underlying drainage rock. Provide (4) pvc swing 35 mats with anchor kits 42"x78". Locate at swings per manufacturer's recommendations. 36 37 SHOT PUT TOE BOARD (BID ALT. A4) 38 .. 39 - (1) AAE #ATB aluminum toe board ~ ~ . 40 41 FOOTBALL GOAL POSTS (.BID ALT. A4) '~ 42 43 (2) Sportsfield Specialties GP 4300-6' offset goalposts. •Install per manufacturer's recommendations in . 44 locations shown on plans. ' 45 46 ~ CLAY BRICKS (BID ALTS. A3 AND A4) 47 48 - "MHP" Clay brick kits, including "Diamond Pro" clay bricks and home plate clay. Available through 49 Sunmark Sports, tel. (253) 847-9762.. Provide and install kits at (2) infields in Bid Alt. A3 and (1) infield in 50 Bid Alt. A4. - 51 '~ 52 TRACK (BID ALT. A4) 53 , 54 Cinders: (ridgelineJ02870. - 1 ~ 5lTE IMPROVEMENT 02870 - 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Provide clean red cinders, 3/8" minus, and 3/4", in locations shown on drawings. Drag, compact and level to owner's satisfaction, to provide a smooth, level surface. Available thru Palmer Coking Coal; tel. 425- 432-4700. Event Marking Plates: Brass plates, min. 1/8" thickness, engraved with event layout information. 300 plates required. MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS All bolts, nuts, washers, nails and other connectors or fittings.to be stainless steel. BASEBALL BASES (BID ALTS. A3 AND A4) Bolco Base and Base Anchor sets or approved equal. Install per detail H/L4.2 and per manufacturer's specifications. Provide and install (2) sets in Bid Alt. A3 and (1) set in Bid Alt. A4. (1) Bolco 205BA -Base Anchor Set (1) Bolco 100 - ML Base Set (1) Bolco 300 - AS Home Plate (1) Bolco 450 - C1 Pitcher's Plate . DUGOUT BENCHES (BID ALTS. A3 AND A4) Provide and install (8) benches in Bid Alt. A3 and (4) benches in Bid Alt. A4. 15' length permanent aluminum players bench without back. Patterson Williams, Model #1119-15. SOCCER GOALS (BID ALT. A4) Patterson Williams #2231-OOA, aluminum goal with end frames, powder coated white, with net supports and #8366 nets, 1 set. , 5 ROW PORTABLE BLEACHERS (BID ALTS. A3 AND A4) Provide and install (4) in Bid Alt. A3 and (6) in Bid Att. A4. (10) 5-row x 21' length aluminum bleacher units. Welded aluminum understructure. Outdoor aluminum #DLW-D-21 or approved equal. FOUL POLE (BID ALT. A4) (2) Patterson-Williams #1273 -provide at softball field only. CRUSHED ROCK SURFACING 5/8" minus fractured rock. Submit source and sample for approval. DRAIN ROCK AT PLAY AREA (BID ALT. A3) 7/8" fractured rock, free of fines. Submit source and sample for approval. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION GENERAL [ridge/ine]02870 - 2 SITE IMPROVEMENT Ir I' I 02870 - 2 ~, ' 1 Refer to applicable details and plans for layout and installation. 2 ' 3 4 Install rigid, plumb and true to lines and, levels shown. Stake out all elements called for in this section for approval by Owner or authorized representative. All work of highest quality. 5 6 Unless otherwise indicated, install all equipment specified byname/manufacturer as .per manufacturer's 7 recommendations; submit installation procedure to Owner or authorized representative for approval prior 8 to installation. 9 10 .TRACK CONSTRUCTION I1 12 Begin placement of track surfacing components after completion and inspection of the curbing, and after 13 all underground utilities crossing the track have been installed. Materials shall be placed in lifts. Sterilize 14 base prior to placement of first lift. Each lift shall.. be rolled to achieve specified compaction prior to ' 15 placement of subsequent lifts. Finished surface shall be finish graded to specified tolerance using a road 16 grader or other suitable equipment. Drag finished surface to owner's satisfaction. 17' 18 TRACK MARKINGS 19 20 Have the finished track construction surveyed by a licensed surveyor to verify the track dimensions. and to 21 accurately locate event markings on the inside and outside curbs in accordance with the current National ' 22 Federation of State High School Associations Standards for the following events: 23 Contact: Computomarx (573) 445-6675 (voice and FAX). 24 25 1. Common finish line for all events 26 2. 100 Meter Dash start 27 3. 110 Meter Hurdles start and hurdle locations 28 29 4. 200 Meter Start (1 turn stagger) 5. 300 Meter Hurdles start (1 turn stagger) and hurdle locations .30 6. 400 Meter start (2 turn stagger) 31 7. 800/1600 Meter break line 32 8. 400/800/1600 Meter exchange zone. ' 33. . 34 Provide stamped surveyors drawing of finish-track and field dimensions allowable tolerance+/- 0.05'. 35 . ~ 36 Provide and install engraved brass plates ~on inside and outside curbs for the events listed above. : 3 7 38 OTHER INSTALLATION 39 40 Install handrails, vehicle gates, and other miscellaneous site items as indicated and as recommended by 41 the manufacturer. 42 - 43 END OF SECTION 02870 ~ . r : 44 '~ f ', ,' , (ridgelinej02870_- 3 SITE IMPROVEMENT 02870 - 3 '; 1 SECTION 02900 -PLANTING & SEEDING 2~ 3 4 5 PART 1 -GENERAL 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 9~ Note: Prior to bidding the work of this Section, Contractors shall visit the site to generally '. 10 familiarize themselves with existing conditions, soils, slope, access, and other readily apparent 11 site conditions. 12 ~; ~ 13 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 14 Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 15 16 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ~'. 17 18 - 19 Note: Work described in this section is affected by bid alternates. See section 01030 for alternate 20 descriptions: . 21 - 22 Work includes all materials, equipment and labor necessary for: placing topsoil, finish grading, planting of 23 trees, shrubs and ground covers; seeding, protection, maintenance, g"uarantee and replacement; and '' 24 related items necessary to complete the work indicated on the drawings and/or specified. ' 25 26 QUALITY ASSURANCE z7 _ 28 Plant Material: All plant. material, Washington grade No. 1 as per State of Washington Department of 29 agriculture Order Numbers 1229, 1230 and 1322. Quality, size and conditiori as determined by standards 30 set forth in the aforementioned Standards and the American Association of Nurserymen Standard ANSI 31 260.1-1973. Plant names shall conform to latest edition of "Standardized Plant Names" as adopted by 32 American Joint Committee of Horticulture Nomenclature. 33 '; 34 Fertilizer: Conform' to Washington State Department of Agriculture Laws and Federal Specification O-F- 35 241 D pertaining to commercial fertilizers... 36 37 , Soil: Conform to USDA soil textural class. i 38 39 Seed: Conform to Washington State Department of Agriculture Rules for Seed Certification. 40 41 SUBMITTALS 42 43 1. Plant Materials:- 44 ' All plant material shall be ordered immediately following the award of contract. Contractor . 45 responsible for assuring that plants of specified sizes and quantities will, in fact, be as specified at 46 the time of planting. 47 t 48 ' ~ Within 30 days after award of contract, submit documentation that all plant. material and seed has 49 been ordered. 50 51 2. Soils Test: 52 Have representative samples of import topsoil, tested for pH, N, P, K, and trace minerals, ;and 53 recommendations for amendments. Amend soils as recommended in the reports. 54 S 55 (ridgelineJ02900 - 1 PLANTING 02900 - 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 PROTECTION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS Protect work, adjacent property, public, and be responsible for any damage or injury arising from this contract due to actions or neglect. SCHEDULING Upan commencing work, the General Contractor shall examine the site and protect all trees, shrubs and other areas designated to remain in, a manner substantial enough to resist the forces of construction equipment that will be on site. Confine work to areas designated. Do not disturb existing. vegetation outside of project limit lines. Protect . all trees within project limits not designated to be removed. Repair or replace vegetation damaged as a result of Contractor's operation to satisfaction of Owner at Contractor's expense. Contractor shall install temporary fencing at dripline of trees to remain prior to grading. Contractor shall be cognizant of all utility fines and underground obstructions. He shall familiarize himself with all utility, irrigation, mechanical, and electrical plans so that his digging/drilling operations do not damage lines. Repair or replacement by original installer shall be made at Contractor's expense for all existing buildings, equipment, underground utilities, irrigation equipment, paving, surfacing, stairs, and/or forms damaged as a result of Contractor's operations in a manner satisfactory to the Owner before final payment is made.. Protect plants, roots, balls and tips at all times from injury in handling, from sun or drying winds from beginning of digging operations, during transportation and on site until final planting. Provide all necessary safeguards, as approved and/or required by the Landscape Architect, for the protection of all planted areas until provisional inspection/acceptance is accomplished, or for such time as it requires to assure vigorous establishment of the plant material. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND REVIEW Notification: The Contractor shall give 48 hours notice to the Landscape Architect when an inspection is desired. Inspections: 1. Rough Grades: Landscape Architect will review subgrades prior to placement of topsoil. 2. Finish Grades: Landscape Architect will review finish grade prior to any planting or seeding. 3. Plant Material: Landscape Architect will review all plant material at the site prior to installation. Remove unsatisfactory material from site immediately. 4. Plant Locations: Landscape Architect will review and adjust plant locations prior to installation. PROVISIONAL REVIEW (Punch List) Upon completion of all planting, seeding, and all other work (if any) required under the contract, the Contractor shall request a provisional inspection. No partial approvals will be given. FINAL REVIEW/ACCEPTANCE (ridgelineJ02900 - 2 PLANTING 02900 - 2 ~. 1 The Contractor shall request a final inspection upon satisfactory completion of all punch list items and any 2 other work required under this contract. Final inspection and acceptance of the work shall establish the '' 3 beginning of the guarantee period. 4 5 GUARANTEE REPLACEMENT 6 7 Plant Material: 8 Guarantee in a healthy, thriving condition all trees and shrubs for one year from date of final acceptance; ' 9 all ground cover until active, vigorous growth is evident.. During the guarantee period, all dead diseased, 10 dying, broken or disappeared plant materials from any cause except those noted below shall be replaced 11 immediately by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. Use specified plants and plant as 12 specified; guarantee until active, healthy growth is evident. 13 14 Seeded Areas: 15 Guarantee a relatively uniform, acceptable stand of grass with no bare spots whatsoever in seeded areas. 16 at time of provisional review (Punchlist). Reseed with the seed and in the manner originally specified any '. 17 seeded area which fails to vigorously establish a uniform stand for any reason whatsoever. Fill to finish 18 grade with approved topsoil and seed as specified all seeded areas which evidence settlement or erosion. 19 Repeat all such reseeding until final acceptance at Contractor's expense. 20 21 Contractor's Responsibility: 22 During guarantee period, Contractor shall not be responsible for replacing plants destroyed or damaged 23 by vandalism or accidents caused by vehicles other than the Contractor's, or Acts of God, or severe cold 24 as substantiated by 25 year low temperature records (exceeding 25 year low), provided that Contractor 25 has exercised due care to protect work. Should replacement fall due during non-planting season, 26 contractor may request Owner's permission to defer planting until proper season. If permission is granted, 27 immediately remove and dispose of dead plants, including all roots. Holes shall be backfilled properly with ', 28 planting mix and finish graded until proper planting season occur. Plants used for replacement shall be of 29 same kind and size originally planted and they shall be planted as originally specified. 30 31 Watering: 32 In non-irrigated areas, provide temporary irrigation and water as required to germinate seed and create a 33 healthy vigorous stand of turf. Water all areas to final acceptance. Contractor's temporary irrigation 34 measures must be sufficient to water all areas once daily. 35 36 37 ,~ 38 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 39 40 SOIL 41 ~. 42 Planting Mix: 43 Import topsoil amended with 10% by weight fully composted steer manure. Blend thoroughly. 44 ' 45 Imported Topsoil: 46 Screened, sandy loam, weed-free, min. 6% organic material, free of sticks & rocks over 1" in diameter, 47 needs, sod clumps, any other deleterious materials, as approved by Landscape Architect. Have import 48 tested for pH, trace minerals, N, P & K and recommendations for amendments. Amend as recommended 49 in report. 50 51 PLANTS '~ 52 53 Quantities, species and varieties, size and condition as shown on planting plan and plant list. Plants to be r, 54 Washington Grade No. 1 and- fresh, well foliaged, in prime condition when in leaf, exhibiting normal habit (ridgelineJ02900 - 3 PL,4NTING .02900 - 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 of growth; having all buds intact and free of disease, injury, insects, insect eggs, larva, indication of strawberry root weevil, all seeds and weed roots. All plants shall be from stock which has been acclimated to conditions prevailing at the project and which has been consistently cultivated and grown in these conditions. No cold storage plants; all grafted trees to be grafted at ground level. Ball and burlapped (B&B) stock to have a natural ball sufficient to insure survival and healthy growth; bare root (BR) materials to have sufficient root system to insure survival and healthy growth. Substitutions are strongly discouraged. No substitutions shall be made without the written approval of the Landscape Architect. Requests for substitutions must be made at the time that documentation of ordered plant material is provided. The substitution request must be accompanied by written proof from at least five sources (major suppliers of the plant) that any plant is not available. SEED MIXES Lawn Seed Mix: Minimum three Cultivars (1/3 of each) as approved. Seeds at minimum rate of 8 lbs./1000 s.f. or greater if recommended by Supplier. Mix is available from D.F. Marks Company, Woodinville, WA (360) 668-3802. Proportions Percent Percent by Weight Purity Germination Perennial Rye ("Triumph" 3-way blend) 70% 98% 90% Fine Fescue 20% 98% 90% Kentucky Bluegrass 10% 98% 90% Hydromulch: Silva-fiber or approved at minimum rate of 2000 Ibs/acre. Tackifier: Use on all sloped areas at manufacturers suggested rate. Refer to civil for seeding at biofiltration swale and detention pond. FERTILIZERS AND SOIL AMENDMENTS General: Approved brands conforming to applicable State fertilizer laws. Uniform in composition, dry, free- flowing, delivered to the site in original unopened containers, each bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. All fertilizers must be EPA approved. Trees, Shrubs and Ground Cover: Formula 4.2.2 "Transplanter" as manufactured by Pacific Agro Co., with Hercules Nitroform and W.R. Grace's "Magamp" and trace elements. Apply at rate of: Trees: 8 oz. Shrubs: 4 oz. Ground Cover: 2 oz. Agriform Tablets: Planting tablets, 21-gram size, as manufactured by Agriform International Chemicals, Inc., 20-10-5 analysis. Apply at the rate of: Trees: 4 tablets Shrubs: 2 tablets Ground Cover: 1 tablet Seeded Lawn Areas: (ridgelineJ02900 - 4 PLANTING 02900 - 4 ,I ,1 1 1. Installation Fertilizer (Fertilizer'A'): 2 Total available Nitrogen: 16%.by weight (of which 50% is derived from controlled release sources 3 including Nutralene.) 4 Total available phosphorous: 16% by weight. 5 Total available potassium: 16%. by weight. , 6 ~ .. 7 2. Maintenance Fertilizer: + 8 9 ~ Initial Fertilizer (Fertilizer 'B'): 10 Tota( available Nitrogen: 21 % by weight; (of which 50% is derived from controlled release ~ it '~ sources.) 12 Total available Phosphorous: 12% by weight. 13 Total available Potassium: 12% by weight. 14 15 Follow-up Fertilizer (Fertilizer'C'): 16 Nitrogen: 19% by weight: 17 Phosphorous: 4% by weight. 18. ~ Potassium: 16% by weight. 19 20 21 3_. Dolomitic Limestone at minimum rate of 50 lbs. per 1,000 square foot. Gypsum to counteract salinity as recommended in report. 22 23 4. Other amendments as recommended iri report; adjust the basic quantities of the following 24 micronutrients as recommended in the report: `'. iron, manganese, molybdenum, copper, zinc and ~. 25 boron. . 26 27 5. See also Fertilizer Requirements under Maintenance. . 28 ,I 29 STAKES AND GUYS 30 ~' 31 32 Material as per standard detail .. 33 MULCH 34 35 Ground fir or hemlock bark of uniform color, free from weed, seeds, sawdust, and splinters and shall not 36 contain resin, tahnin, wood fiber, salts, or other compounds detrimental to plant life. Size range of 1/2" to 37 1-1/4" with maximum of 30% passing a 1/2" screen. Submit sample to Landscape Architect for approval. 38 39 SELECTIVE HERBICIDE 40 41 Treat all planting beds with a selective pre-emergent' herbicide and remove all foreign weeds prior to 42 acceptance. 43. 44 45 46 PART 3 -EXECUTION 47 48 PREPARATION 49 S0 Subgrade shall be reviewed by Landscape Architect and .approved by the Owner's representative prior to 51 topsoil placement and finish grading. 52 ' 53 FINISH GRADING (GENERAL) ; 54 55 Finish grade all planting areas and fine grade as may be necessary or .incidental to all planting operations. ~' 56 Establish finish grades in accordance with elevations shown in the drawings, insuring that no pockets nor . (ridgeline]02900 - 5 - PLANTING ~ ~ 02900 - 5 ~ . 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 any other surface obstructions to positive drainage are present. Insure positive drainage away from . building. Obtain approval of finish grades prior to seeding or planting. Subgrades, unless otherwise indicated, shall be 6" below finish grade in all planting and seeded areas. Prior to placing topsoil, use rock picker in all lawn and planting areas to remove rocks and sticks over 1" diameter to a depth of 4".from subgrade. Take care not to damage existing tree and shrub roots. Subgrades shall be free of construction debris, including excess crushed rock and quarry spalls. The following amounts of topsoil and mulch shall be applied: o Lawn areas - 6"import topsoil. _ v All on grade planting beds - 4"import topsoil, 2" mulch. • Rough seed areas - no topsoil. Place specified amount of import topsoil uniformly over entire planting and seeded areas, and thoroughly roto-till to incorporate subsoil with topsoil, paying special attention to thoroughly mix and loosen soil in areas compacted by construction. Rake, float, drag, roll and perform all necessary operations to remove surface irregularities and to provide a firm, smooth surface with positive surface drainage. Remove all rocks, sticks and other debris 1" and larger in all areas. Box drag and hand rake all seeded areas. Finish grade as after installation of topsoil and mulch shall be 1/2" below adjacent paved surfaces unless otherwise specified or detailed. PERFORMANCE Planting and Plant Relocation Time: Plant trees, shrubs, groundcover and lawn during periods which are normal for such work, as determined by season, weather conditions, and accepted practice. At the option and on the full responsibility of the subcontractor, planting operations may be conducted under unseasonable conditions without additional compensation. Plant Locations: After placement of topsoil, stake tree {ocations and position shrubs above ground as per drawings for approval of Landscape Architect. Make field adjustments to avoid obstructions to planting such as irrigation equipment. Landscape Architect reserves the right to field adjust plant locations prior to planting. Planting Trees: Excavate tree pits 6" deeper grid twice the diameter of the root ball. Excavated soil shall be removed from the site. Thoroughly scarify bottom of pits by shovel cutting to a depth of 12". Sides of pits shall also be shovel cut to help root penetration. Place tree in upright position in center of pit, release root covering or spread roots. Roots of trees shall be so placed as to have a natural spread and distribution and planting mix shall be carefully, thoroughly packed and puddled around them. Take care not injure root system while backfilling and compacting. After water settles, fill again with planting mix and water compact to a grade of not more than 1/2" higher than the original ball. -Leave soil dished around the tree for watering purposes for trees which are watered by bubblers only. In seeded areas, finish grade smooth with surrounding area. Provide 3' diameter mulched circle around all trees in seeded areas. (ridgelineJ02900 - 6 PLANTING 02900 - 6 '~ 1 2 ' 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ~~ 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 ~' 35 36 37 ~38 39 40 41 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 1 ~ 57 Fertilize trees at the specified rate applied uniformly around circumference of root spread under a cover of 2" of planting mix. Apply Agriform tablets per manufacturer's recommendations. Stake and guy trees immediately after planting as per standard detail. All supports and trees shall stand vertical. Planting Shrubs and Ground Covers: After topsoil placement and approval of finish grade, excavate planting pockets at locations- shown on' drawings and as directed ao a diameter of twice the root spread -and to a depth that will insure a 3-inch cushion of compacted. planting mix below the root ball. Dispose of excavated soil on site as directed. ' Set plants upright in center of hole flush with finish grade, release root covering or spread roots: The roots of the plant shall be placed as to have a natural spread and distribution. Backfill with .planting mix to compact backfill and provide slight depression as watering saucer. Care shall. be taken not to injure the root system while backfilling and compacting the planting: mix. , Fertilize at the specified rate applied uniformly around the circumference. of, the roof spread under a cover of 2" of planting mix. Apply Agriform tablets per manufacturer's recommendatiohs. Plant ground cover plants at spacing indicated in straight, evenly spaced rows. Seeding: Note: Seeding limits shown on plans are approximate. Contractor shall hydroseed and establish turf to the limits of all areas disturbed by construction. Soil Preparation: As per "Preparation" section. Seed Bed Preparations: .. Apply Installation Fertilizer `A' at the rate of 10 lbs. per 1,000 square feet, and dolomite limestone at the rate of 50 lbs. per 1,000 square feet. Add other fertilizers as recommended in soils .report. Rake to incorporate. Finish surfaces by raking smooth and even; lightly compact with roller. Level out surface undulations and irregularities. to tolerances specified in Section 02300 and recompact as necessary. Lawn Seeding:. After approval of finish grade, seed at the rate specified. Seed all areas using hydroseeder and hydromulch at rate specified under Hydromulch Section. Timing: Seed only from March 15 to October 15, or as approved by Landscape Architect. See phasing requirements for seeding deadline. , Protection: Protect against harm from wind, storrn water and trespassing. Treat and reseed damaged portions as required. Reseed as many times as necessary to achieve Guaranteed Replacement. Post signage indicating new seeding as necessary to prevent trespassing. Initial Maintenance Fertilization (Fertilization 'B'): Apply fertilizer at the rate of 2-1/2 lbs. per 1,000 square feet after the first mowing. Apply once each week through the third mowing, minimum three applications. Follow-up Maintenance Fertilization (Fertilizer 'C'): Apply fertilizer at the rate of 8 lbs. per 1,000 square feet on week after the last application of Fertilizer `B'. Reseeding: In areas which were.seeded in the fall, reseed and refertilize seeded areas where coverage is weak or sparse, as directed in spring, and repair any settlement and/or erosion channels. (ridgelineJ02900 - 7 PLANTING 02900 - 7 Ongoing Maintenance: Contractor shall continue to maintain turf areas until final acceptance. See additional requirements under Maintenance. 10 11 12 13 14 IS ]6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 Mulching: Immediately after completion of all planting, mulch all new planted areas to a minimum compacted depth of 2". Refer to site details for proper relationship of firiished grade to adjacent paved areas, 1/2" below curbs/walks unless indicated otherwise. Pruning, Repair and Weeding: Upon completion of the work under this contract, all trees shall be .pruned as directed by Landscape Architect and any injuries repaired. Pruning shall be done in such a manner as not to change the natural habits or shape of the plant: All cuts shall be made flush, leaving no stubs. On all cuts over 3/4" in diameter and bruises or scars on the bark; the injured cambium shall be traced back to living tissue and removed. Wounds shall be smoothed and shaped so as not to retain water, and the treated area shall be coated with approved tree wound compound. Maintenance: It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to continuously and vigorously maintain all the landscaped and seeded areas of this contract from time of installation until final acceptance. Sweep pavement clean and remove dead plants as directed by the Landscape Architect, who shall record plants removed. All plants shall be watered by thorough sprinkling as needed to keep the ground moist, the plants healthy, and to prevent wilting, including hand watering in areas not fully covered by an automatic irrigation system. Care shall be exercised to prevent soil erosion. Provide temporary irrigation as rieeded. .Temporary irrigation provisions shall be sufficient to water all areas at least once daily. Seeded Areas: Maintain by watering, weekly mowing (remove all clippings) continuous weeding, reseeding, fertilizing, herbicide treatment, rolling and top dressing, and other necessary operations to establish and maintain an even, dark green, deep rooted, thick and vigorous stand of grass. Hand water any areas (including rough grass) that are not irrigated, until establishment. Replace any ,seeded areas which fail to show vigorous growth. Fill and seed. all areas which settle, as specified. At the end of the maintenance period and prior to acceptance, the seeded areas shall be a flourishing, dense, vigorous, uniform, deeply rooted thick stand. of specified grass with no bare spots whatsoever, and no weeds whatsoever. There shall be no foot or vehicle traffic on the seeded area whatsoever. Maintain barriers around seeded areas until established, then remove from site. Trees: Maintain in a vigorous, thriving condition by watering, pruning, cultivating, fertilizing, spraying, and other necessary operations. Spraying shall be done only as required. and as approved by the Landscape Architect. Plants will not be accepted until active growth is evident. All tree supports, guys, tree wrap, etc., shall be kept intact and adjusted as required and effect in maintaining firm support throughout the guarantee period. Clean-up: A general clean-up shall be made immediately after and as part of all work done in the area. The clean-up shall include the entire area under this contract. Adjacent areas shall be cleaned to the extent that the work done under the contract may scatter litter. Such clean-up shall include pick-up and removal from the (ridgelineJ02900 - 8 PLANTING 02900 - 8 '': , '' ` 1 contract area of all clippings, trimmings, leaves, and all other litter and debris originating from any source 2 3 whatsoever. Remove flag labels from all plant material. 4 ~ END OF SECTION 02900 5. '' '' ~ , (ridgelineJ02900 - 9 - PLANTING ~ 02900 - 9 •' ` 1 SECTION 02995 -- DIVISION 2 -COMMISSIONING 2 ' 3 : 4 PART 1 GENERAL ~ 5 " 6 1.1 DESCRIPTION '~ 7 . 8 A. The purpose of this section is to describe the commissioning process specific for: ' 9 10 ^ Site Improvements • 11 ^ Chain. Link Fencing and Gates 12 ^ .Landscaping and athletic fields ' 13 ~ ^ Underground Sprinkler system . 14 15 1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES _ 16 17 A. General Responsibilities: The Contractor's commissioning responsibilities applicable to each of the site 18 improvements, chain link fencing and gates, landscaping. and athletic fields, underground sprinkler 19 system, and audio/visual contractors are as follows: 20 i ~ 21 1. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements .for submittal data, 22 commissioning documentation, O&M data and training. 23 24 2. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other meetings necessary to facilitate the 25 Commissioning process. 26 27 3. .Contractors shall assist in clarifying. the installation, operation,. maintenance, and control of '' 28 commissioned equipment if requested by the Commissioning Authority. 29 30 1.3 COORDINATION ` , 31 . 32 A. Refer.to Section- 01810 for a listing of all sections where commissioning requirements are found, 33 for systems: to be commissioned. and for functional testing requirements. 34 35 36 PART2-PRODUCTS . 37 38 Not Used 39 40 41 PART 3 -EXECUTION : 42 43 3.1 SUBMITTALS 44 45 A. General Submittals: Contractor shall provide to the.Commissioning Authority, through established 46 channels, normal cut sheets and shop drawing submittals for all commissioned equipment. 47 .. 48 B. Installation Checklists: The Contractor shall complete the checklist(s) provided with this Section. 49 50 1. The completion, of these checklists does not limit the Contractor's responsibilities for quality control 51 and scheduling as indicated elsewhere in the ,documents, nor does this checklist include all 52 submittal, inspection, or quality assurance requirements. for the work of this Section. 53 .; CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP . - SPc~ialis-hS in 5~hool Pwildin~S. _ . '~ [ridge(ine ms] 02995 - 1 DIVISION 2 COMMISSIONING ~. 02995-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 C. Functional Performance Testing: The Contractor shall complete the tests indicated in this Section with the consultant/AHJ present. D. Trainin :The Owner personnel shall be trained on procedures related to the following: ^ Landscaping and athletic fields . ^ Underground Sprinkler system 3.2 CONSTRUCTION .OBSERVATION A. Obtain and review design documents for overall design intent and the overall required system configurations. B. Obtain and review shop drawings and submittals for installation criteria and the required construction details, as they support and further define the systems features. C. The Contractor shall make general inspections at the job site and shall review the above for configuration, quality of construction, adherence to design requirements, and the conformance with shop drawings and submittal information: END OF SECTION 02995 COI~ISTRYJCTIOhI SERVICES GROUP ~ - SPc~ialiS~hS ih Sr~hoo( F$vi(din~S [ridgeline msl 02995 - 2 DIVISION 2 COMMISSIONING 02995-2 1 INSTALLATION CHECKLIST FOR SITE IMPROVEMENTS 2 3 A. DOCUMENTATION 4 Required submittals, tests, and product samples for work of this Section have. been reviewed and 5 approved as noted below. 6 Date By 7 8 Product submittals for goal posts approved. 9 10 Product submittals for synthetic sports surfacing. 11 12 ~ Product submittals for signage 13 . 14 15 16 17 B. RELATED WORK 18 Work by other trades is complete and approved or property coordinated as noted below. 19 20 Date By 21 22 Work properly coordinated with paving/curbs 23 24 Conflicts with underground utilitieslirrigation resolved 25 26 Subgrade/Finish grade established prior to installation 27 28 29 C. INSTALLATION . 30 . 31 1. Track - 32 ' 33 Date By 34 Curb approved ` 35 36 Sub-grade approved 37 38 Crushed rock placement approved 39 40 Asphalt lifts approved 41 42 Synthetic surface placement approved 43 44 D. COMMENTS /NOTES 45 46 Date By 47 48 49 50 51 52 ~~ ~~k S• CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP SPc~ialiSi'S in S~hooi E3vildin~S (ndgelne ms] 02995 - 3 DIVISION 2 COMMISSIONING 02995-3 1 INSTALLATION CHECKLIST FOR LANDSCAPING AND ATHLETIC FIELDS 2 3 A. DOCUMENTATION 4 Required submittals, tests,' and product samples for work of this Section have been reviewed and 5 approved as noted below. 6 7 -Date By 8 Documentation that all specified plants have been ordered 9 /procured. 10 11 Sieve/sample approved for import field topsoil. 12 13 Fertility test for import field topsoil. 14 15 16 B. RELATED WORK 17 Work by other trades is complete and approved or properly coordinated as noted below. 18 19 Date By 20 21 Topsoil haul from off site location coordinated. 22 23 24 C. INSTALLATION 25 26 1. General 27 28 Date By 29 Plant material reviewed and approved prior to installation. 30 Contractor is properly heeling inlcaring 31 for nursery stock on site 32 ' 33 Pre-emergent applied. 34 35 Fertilizer tabs 36 37 Planting pots are sized properly and drain well. 38 39 Contractor is handling material properly. Specifically; 40 Do not handle plants by stems 41 Burlap turned down/removed at planting 42 Root ball scored prior to planting 43 Plants watered in 44 45 n)fw^°yY: ~;~~ CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP ,Spat-+aliSfiS in S~ hool ~vildin$S {ridgeline ms] 02995 - 4 DIVISION 2 COMMISSIONING 02995-4 '~' 1 2 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 '' ~ 22 23 24 25 26 ' 27 28 29 30 ' 31 32 33 34 ' 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 i 42 43 44 ' 45 46 47 48 49 50 2. Sub-grades/Topsoil Placement Date By Sub-grades approved/debris removed Topsoil .placed and tilled All areas slope away from buildings Finish grade detailed to top of catch basin No settlement or low spots evident/properly compacted Smooth even transitions No water dams at edges, curbs, etc. Mulch placed to specified depth and pulled away from base of plants 3. .Trees Date By Layout reviewed and approved Setbacks from buildings Setbacks from roads, walks, or trees Sizes as per plan Varieties Verified Correct planting depth Properly Staked No broken leaders Trees set plumb, vertical /correct depth Plant tabs present? Lawn edging around tree base COWSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP SPa~ialiSfS in S~hooi PJVi~clin$S [ridgeline ms] 02995 - 5 DIVISION 2 COMMISSIONING 02995-5 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 4. Shrubs Date By Sized as per plan Spacing as per plan Spacing in even, regular rows Shrubs best side out Correct planting depth Plant tabs present? 5. Groundcover Date By All areas filled Groundcover sized as per plan Planted at correct depth (not buried in bark) Spacing as per plans Spacing in even regular rows 6. Lawns Date By All areas completely germinated Edges smooth and detailed Flush with finished grade Weed free Detailed well next to curbs, etc. Seed certificates received `, CONSTRUCTIOiV SERVICES GROUP SPoualis¢S in S~hooi F~vildin$S [ridgeline ms] 02995 - 6 DIVISION 2 COMMISSIONING 02995-6 '~ '~ 1 2 D. COMMENTS INOTES - 3 Date Notes ~~ 4 5 6 ' 7 : 8 9 10 '~ 11 12 13 ' 14 ~ 15 - 16 ~~ ~~ '~ '' '~ '' ''~ ~~ '~ CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP Sic-ialiS'fS in School Pwildin$S ~' _ [ridgeline ms} 02995 - 7: ~ DIVISION 2 COMMISSIONING 02995-7 ~ ~. 1 INSTALLTION CHECKLIST FOR CHAIN LINK FENCE AN® GATES 2 3 A. DOCUMENTATION 4 Required submittals, tests, and product samples for work of this Section have been reviewed and 5 approved as noted below. 6 7 Date By ' 8 9 Product data submitted and approved. 10 11 B. RELATED WORK 12 Work by other trades is complete and approved or properly coordinated as noted below. 13 14 Date By 15 16 Work properly coordinated with paving/curbs 17 18 Conflicts with underground utilities/irrigation resolved 19 20 Sub-grade/Finish grade established prior to installation 21 22 23 C. INSTALLATION 24 25 1. Fencing 26 _ 27 Date By ' 28 Layout staked and approved 29 30 Footings proper size and depth 31 Tops of footings held down as specified and coordinated 32 with surrounding finishes 33 34 Post installed straight and true 35 36 Midrails and bottom rails provided where specified. 37 38 Fabric installed on project or playing side of post. 39 40 Clearance at bottom of fence is within specified tolerance 41 ~ Fabric ties/hog rings properly installed (ties have minimum 3 42 wraps) and bent away from field of play 43 44 Stretcher bars/tension rods properly installed 45 46 All welds adequately painted 47 48 49 ~ ~~ R CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP SPc~iaP~tS in Sr~hool ('wildin~S [ridgeline ms] 02995 - 8 DIVISION 2 COMMISSIONING 02995-8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 2. Gates Date By D. COMMENTS /NOTES Date By Gates installed in correct locations with swing direction as shown on plan Gates properly aligned, closure forks operational Gates swing freely Keepers/stops installed, with surrounding finishes patched if necessary Notes a , CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP SPuialiSfiS in School P~vildinr~S [ridgeline ms] 02995 - 9 DIVISION 2 COMMISSIONING 02995-9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Zone INSTALLATION CHECKLIST FOR UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. DOCUMENTATION Required submittals, tests, and product samples for .work of this Section have been reviewed and approved as noted below. Date By Submittals reviewed and approved: Bedding and backfill material approved. B. RELATED WORK . Work by other trades is complete and approved or properly coordinated as noted below. Date By Properly coordinated with sub-drainage Sleeving coordinated and installed C. INSTALLATION Work of this Section is properly installed. Where noted, pre-functional and / or functional tests are also required. 1. Point of Connection / Backflow Preventor Date By Components have been shown in detail Point of Connection allows servicing for units Location is shown on plan Proper clearance to.gravel Vault has adequate drainage Vault top is flush with finish grade. 2. Valves Date By t~~~ CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP SPwialiSfS in School 13vildin~S [ridgeline msJ. 02995 - 10 Mainline appears at correct depth in valve box No soil sloughing into box Soil removed so valves visible DIVISION 2 COMMISSIONING 02995-10 ~, 1 ~' 1 '1 1 1 1 1 ~~ 1 1 2 2 '' 2 2 2 2 2 ~2 2 2 3 '! 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 ~ 4 ' 4 4 4 4 4 r '' 1 2 Spare wires visible and tagged at remote end and valve box .. ~ Splicing using approved connectors ' Valve box extensions 'if needed .. Valve box not resting on lateral or main line ~ Proper type and size as specified and detailed Valves open and close properly ;This checklist will be used to verify each valve installation~in each zone:. Number the checklists to correspond to the Zone being checked. 3. IRRIGATION CONTR OLS ,. Date By - . Installed in accordance to specifications, details, and local code. Wide runs to locations as shown on plans with each wire tagged. EMS correctly programmed to meet design requirements ~ Staff has been informed on how to program and operate the . ~. irrigation controls. 9 4. PIPING 0 Date By 2 3 Pipe is type and size as specified and listed on plan 4 ~ ~ Pipe installed to required depths and in location as indicated 5 on plan. 6 7 Trenches are properly compacted, no settlement is evident. 9 0` D. COMMENTS /NOTES 1 2 Date By Notes 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 ~t:~ . CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP S~iaiis-~' in Sr~hool. P~uildin~S [ridgeline ms] 02995.- 11 DIVISION 2 COMMISSIONING 02995-11 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Zone PRE-FUNCTIONAL TESTING -UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEM Prior to backfill of irrigation lines and setting of heads, three pre-functional tests must be completed. A. MAINLINE PRESSURE TEST Date By Mainline installation complete Trenches (fittings) exposed for visual observation Wiring bundles properly installed Valves Installed Trace wire installed Pressure test performed per specifications. ~ Report results below. Results: B. Lateral Line Static Pressure Test Check when approved and list each zone separately. (Use additional sheets as necessary) Zone # Zone # Zone # Zone # Zone # _ Zone # _ -Zone # _ Zone # _ Zone # Zone # Zone # Zone # Zone # Zone # Zone # Zone # Zone # .Zone # Zone # Zone # Zone # _ Zone # _ Zone # _ Zone # Zone # Zone # Zone # Zone # k,+ x`a i FTt'1 CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP SPc~ialiStS in School P~uildin$S [ridgeline ms] 02995 - 12 DIVISION 2 COMMISSIONING 02995-12 ' s 1 Zone 2 3 FUNCTIONAL TEST FOR UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEM 4 5 A. GENERAL 6 7 Date By 8 9 System operated from test cycle on controller 10 11 Zones actuate in proper order (as shown on As Built) 12 13 B. HEADS/COVERAGE 14 15 Date By 16 17 All heads operating correctly 18 19 ~ ~ Heads flush with finish grade (or below grade as detailed) 20 21 Heads plumb vertical 22 23 Heads nozzled correctly 24 Heads throw pattern and radius adjusted to minimize 25 over-spray 26 27 ~ Adequate coverage 28 ' 29 Each zone properly pressure balanced 30 31 Heads have adequate pressure without misting. 32 33 C. COMMENTS /NOTES 34 35 Date Notes 36 37 38 ~ ' 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 CONSTRUCTION SERVICES GROUP _ Spc~aGs-ts in S~ hool P~vildinr~S [ridgeiine ms] 02995 - 13 DIVISION 2 COMMISSIONING 02995-13 t ~~' SECTION 03300 -CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART1-GENERAL 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5. 6 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 7 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 8 9 10 11 SUMMARY 12 This Section specifies cast=in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement 13 procedures, and finishes. 14 15 Slab base course for support of building slabs is included as part of this work.. 16 17 Colored Concrete: See Drawings for location. 18 19 Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 20 21 Division 2 Section 02750 - "Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, Curbs & Sidewalks." 22 23 Division 5 Section "Handrails and Railings" for handrail pipe sleeves. 24 25 Division 7 Section "Water Repellents" for miscellaneous cast-in-place concrete items. 26 ` 27 Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint fillers and sealants. 28 . 29 Division 9 Section "Flooring Preparation." t;~ 30 31 Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring." 32 33 Division 9 Section "Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering." '34 35 Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories." ~ 36 37 Division 9 Section "Carpeting." ~ 38 39 Division 10 Section 10900 - "Miscellaneous Specialties" for stair nosings. ~' 42 SUBMITTALS 43 44 General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification 45 Sections: ~ 46 47 Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, 48 admixtures, fibrous reinforcement, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, 49 dry-shake finish materials, and others as requested by Architect. 50 51 Shop drawings shaA befurnished by Ownerforfabrication, bending, and placementofconcrete reinforcement. 52 Comply with ACI SP-66 (88), "ACI Detailing Manual," showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of . i 53 bent bars, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings 54 through concrete structures. ~ 55 '~ 56 Samples of materials as requested by Architect, including names, sources, and descriptions. [ridgeline ms] 03300 - 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1 ~! Materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect. Materials certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: ACI 301-89, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". ACI SP-16-89, "Field Reference Manual". ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice." PART2-PRODUCTS FORM MATERIALS Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel-type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, orotheracceptablernaterial. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds with a maximum VOC of 350 g/I that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable orsnap-off metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to exposed surface. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1-inch diameter in concrete surface. REINFORCING MATERIALS Reinforcing~ Bars by Owner: The Owner, under a separate contract, will provide the concrete reinforcing steel bars for the concrete footings, footing walls, spread footings, and floor slabs for the main building and the gym building as specified and detailed on the Structural Drawings. To insure a smooth and timely installation by the Contractor, the Owner's steel supplier shall coordinate with the General Contractor to set a delivery schedule for the fabricated rebars. These dates shall be included in the Contractor's CPM schedule. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, welded steel wire fabric. [ridgeiine ms] 03300 - 2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 i' 1 Su orts for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs,. spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and 2 fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire-bar-type supports complying with CRSI 3 specifications. '~, 4 5 For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not 6 support chair legs. 7 8. 9 CONCRETE MATERIALS ® 11 Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I I or Type I-I I. 12 . 13 Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise acceptable~to Architect. ' 14 15 Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source 16 for exposed concrete. 17 '' 18 For exterior exposed surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing spalling-causing 19 deleterious substances. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 but that special tests or actual service have shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable to Architect. Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330. ~' 26 Water: Clean and potable 27 28 Admixture, General: Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. ~~ 29 31 RELATED MATERIALS '; 32 33 Slab Base Course: Use well graded 3/8 inch crushed rock. Level base material between screeds to 1/4 inch 34 in 10 feet then compact to specified density. Keep smooth and level during all operations including concrete 35 placement. 36 37 Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder cover over granular base material, below all interior concrete slabs 38 on grade. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, 39 as follows: 40 41 Water-resistant barrier consisting of heavy Kraft papers laminated together with glass-fiber 42 reinforcement and overcoated with black polyethylehe on each side. ' 43 44 Product: "Moistop #395," Sisalkraft by Fortifiber Corp. "Moistop", White Cap "Ply-Bar Plus II," Glas-Kraft Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. Always shall be covered with Moisture-Retaining Cover. ~' [ridgeline ms] 03300 - 3 CAST-IN-PL,4CE CONCRETE 03300 - 3 Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. Waterproof paper. Polyethylene film. Polyethylene-coated burlap. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid-type membrane-forming curing compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A, and 20% min. Solids. Provide one of the following or approved: Sonneborn: Kure-N-Seal 0800 W.R. Meadows: Sealtight CS-309 Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881,two-component material suitable for bonding. new concrete to old and for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide "Concresive LPL" by Master Builders or approved. Epoxy Resin: Provide material in conformance with WSDOT Section 9-26 Type II and especially manufactured for bonding extruded concrete curb to asphalt pavement. PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES See Structural Notes on Structural Drawings. ADMIXTURE Colored Concrete Admixtures: All concrete designated as colored in the plans and specifications shall contain the proper proportion of CHROMIX® Admixture for Color-Conditioned Cohcrete, Quarry Red #C-32, manufactured.by L.M. Scofield Company, (800) 800-9900, Los Angeles, CA. The color-conditioning admixture shall be asingle-component, colored, water-reducing, set-controlling admixture, factory formulated and packaged in cubic yard dosage increments, not multiple additives and pigments added separately into the mix. It shall comply with ASTM C 494. The concrete shall contain 5-1/2 to 6 sacks of cement per cubic yard. No calcium chloride shall be used. The slump shall. not exceed four inches. All surfaces shall be finished uniformly. All colored concrete shall be cured (optional: and finished) with LITHOCHROME®ColorwaxT"^ and the joints sealed with LITHOCHROME® ColorcalkT"" in the matching color. The concrete shall never be covered with plastic sheeting. All mix design, batching, placing, finishing, curing, joint sealing, and patching shall be in accordance with the Scofield T"^ Tech-Data Bulletins A-304 CHROMIX® Admixtures for Color- Conditioned Concrete, A-514 LITHOCHROME® ColorwaxT"" and S-104 LITHOCHROME® ColorcalkT"". See Structural Notes on Structural Drawings for other admixtures. CONCRETE MIXING Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified. Add all ingredients including all admixtures at the batch plant during the mixing time with the weights recorded on the delivery ticket. This includes all Cement, Aggregate, Water, and Admixtures. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. [ridgeline ms] 03300 - 4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4 ~" ~' 1 PRE-CAST CONCRETE UNITS 2 3 Provide the following pre-cast concrete units: D 4 5 Outdoor Seating - 6 . Q 7 The concrete mix shall be a 4,000 P:S.I., 3 to 5 inches slump, 5% water reducer, and a light acid etch finish. 8 9 Produce precast units of shapes as shown on drawings. Provide in lengths as long as practical, unless O 10 lengths are indicated on drawings, taking into consideration the ease.of installation, handling, weight, and 11 breakage. Provide shop drawings for Architect's approval. 12 13 Forming material for all exposed surfaces shall be a resin-faced high density overlay plywood. All surfaces a 14 shall be true flat surfaces within their own planes. Ease all edges, corners and chamfers. Final concrete 15 texture to be smooth,.continuous and uniform with no visible form work lines. Minimal sacking allowed. Apply 16 water repellent per Division 7, Section"WATER REPELLENTS." '° 19 PART 3 -EXECUTION 20 ~ , 21 22 GENERAL 23 e 24 Mix Place, Vibrate, Finish and Cure concrete per ACI 301. 25 26 Coordinate the installation of joint materials and vapor retarders/barrier, and other related materials with 27 placement of forms and reinforcing steel. a 28 29 30 FORMS 31 32 General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral, static and 33 dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so 34 concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain O 35 formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with ACI 347. 36 37 Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, 38 grades, level, and plumb. work in finished structures. Provide for openings; offsets, sinkages, keyways, 39 recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds,- bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, 40 and other features required.in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly buttjoints and 41 provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste. 42 a 43 Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying.. against. concrete surfaces. Provide crush 44 plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined 45 surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming 46 keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like,-for easy removal.. 47 48 Provide temporaN openings for clean-outs and inspections where interior area of formwork is inaccessible 49, before and during concrete placement: Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent ~; 50 .loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings. in forms at inconspicuous. locations. 51 52 Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips 53 fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. 54 55 Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. 56 Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately n 57 place and securely support items built into forms. [ridgeiine ms] 03300 -. 5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5 Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt; or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using, strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. SLAB BASE COURSE General: Drainage course consists of placement of crushed gravel material, in layer of 4" thickness, over subgrade surface to support concrete building slabs. Placing: Place base course material on prepared subgrade in.layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting material during placement operations. Compact to 95 percent maximum dry density. VAPOR RETARDER/BARRIER INSTALLATION General: Following leveling and tamping of drainage course for slabs on grade place vapor retarder/barrier sheeting with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. Lap joints 6 inches and seal vapor barrier joints with manufacturers' recommended mastic and pressure- sensitive tape. Carry up vertical surfaces a minimum of 4". PLACING REINFORCEMENT General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as herein specified. Avoid cutting or puncturing vapor retarder barrier during reinforcement placement and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcementagainstdisplacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange,'space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. [ridgeline msj 03300 - 6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6 ,+ - ' , ` 1 JOINTS 2. 3 Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated or, if not indicated, locate so as not to 4 .impair strength and. appearance of the structure, as acceptable fo Architect. 5 6 Provide keyways of least 1-1/2 inches deep iri construction joints between walls and footings. Bulkheads 7 designed and accepted for this purpose may. be used for slabs. ' 8 9 Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction 10 ~ joints except as otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through, sides of strip placements. 11 12 Use bonding agenton existing concrete surtacesthatwill bejoined with fresh concrete. Follow manufacturer's 13 directions on mixing and timing of placement. 14 15 IsotationJoints inSlabs-on-Ground: Construct isolation joints inslabs-on-ground at points of contact between 16 slabs-on-ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other 17 locations as indicated. 18 . 19 Joint filler and sealant materials are specified in Divisiori 7 Section "Joint-Sealants". 20 , 21 Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Construct contraction joints in slabs-on=ground in square ,; 22. pattern spaced at 16` o.c. maximum in 4" thick slabs or to pattern as shown on drawings. If joint pattern not. 23 .'shown, provide Drawings for Architect's. approval; showing joints not exceeding 16 feet.in either direction and . 24 ;located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at.column centerlines, half bays, third bays). 25 26 Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard strip into fresh 2T concrete in straight lines until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. Tool slab edges round 28 on each side of insert. After concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris. , ', 29 Zip Strips are not allowed. 30 . 31 Saw cut joints in concrete, at each control joint location, as soon as the slab will support the weight ' 32 of the saw and operator. without disturbing the final finish. Normally 2.hours .maximum after final 33 finishing. or 1.50 psi. Joints to be 1/8 inch wide and 1/4 slab depth saw cut. 34 35 Joint fillers and sealarifs are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants". . ', 36 37 - .. 38 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS 39 , 40 General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work 41 that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and 42 directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto. ' ': 43 44 Pipe Sleeves for Steel Pipe Handrails: Set pipe sleeves in locations as required for handrail verticals. Set . 45 . sleeves plumb with top of sleeve.'/z' below top of finished concrete surface. (Sleeves furnished by "Section , 46 05521.") : 47 _. 48 Pipe Sleeves for Chain Link Fence Posts in Concrete Slabs: Set pipe sleeves.in concrete with locations and 49 spacings as directed by fencing contractor. Set sleeves plumb with~top of sleeve'/z: below top of finished '; 50 concrete surface. Schedule, 40 PVC pipe sleeves to be furnished by chain link fence contractor. Section 51 02831. ~ . 52 53 Safety Stair Nosings: Center nosing on tread width with noses flush with riser faces and tread surfaces. Allow , i 54 3 inches from end of safety nosing to end of concrete tread unless noted otherwise on drawings. Provide with.- . . 55 anchorage system indicated to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. . 56 ' 57 . . , 'i (ridgeline msj 03300 - 7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form-coating compound before placing reinforcement. , Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply. in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable CONCRETE PLACEMENT Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel; and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permiYinstallation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as specified. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit.concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, ortamping. Use equipment and procedures for cohsolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6~ inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. ' Consolidate slab concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked. around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement. Cold-Weather Placing: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work. from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not-less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27deg C) at point of placement. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. [ridgeline ms] 03300 - 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 8 1 i ' . 1 ~ . Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical 2 accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. 3 4 Hot-Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of 5 concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as specified. , '~ 6' 7 Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg 8 F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may. be used to control temperature 9 provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Use of liquid nitrogen ,10 to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 11 12 Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will 13 not exceed.the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. . 14 15 Cool placing environment as follows: Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before 16 concrete is placed. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas. 17 ~. ' 18 Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other ` 1.9 adverse placing conditions, when acceptable to Architect: 20 - , ~ . ~ 21 '~ 22 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES 23 24 Rough-Formed Finish: Provide arough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed'to view in 25 the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted 26 by form-facing material used, with tie. holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other 27 projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. . 28 ~; 29 Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide asmooth-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces exposed to view or to 30 be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to 31 32 concrete, such. as waterproofing; darripproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or another similar system. This is an as-cast concrete surface. obtained with- selected form-facing .material, arranged in an orderly and 33 symmetrical mariner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other 34 projections completely.removed and smoothed. 35 1' 36 Related Unformed Surfaces: At.tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to 37 formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue 38 formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise final. surface treatment of 39 . indicated. 40 41 42 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES ~; 43 44 Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic stab surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar 45 setting beds for tile,.portland cement terrazzo, and other borided applied cementitious finish flooring material, ~, 46 -and as otherwise indicated. : 47 48 After placing slabs, plane surface to 1/4" in 2 feet for floor flatness. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains 49 where required. After. leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes, brooms,. or rakes. 50 .. . ~ . . 51 Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as 52 specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, 53 or sand-bed terrazzo; and as otherwise indicated. 54 55 After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not-work surface until, ready for' 56 floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, 57 or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats., or both. ~ (ridgeline ms] 03300 - 9 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 = 9 _. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4 inch in 10 feet when checked with a 10-foot straightedge, ACI 301 Class B. Cut down .high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or other thin film finish coating system. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using apower-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with surface leveled to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4 inch in 10 feet when checked with a 10-foot straightedge, ACI 301 Class B. Grind smooth surface defects that would telegraph, through applied floor covering system. - In the Gym 222, the recessed concrete slab shall be troweled smooth and level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in a 10 foot radius. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic the is to be installed with thin-set mortar, apply trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface with a fine broom. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. Detectable Warning Surface: Provide symmetrical pattern of diamond shapes by use of stamping tools in freshly placed concrete. Pattern and contrasting color of warning .surface shall meet color contrast requirements of Section 4.29.2 of the Americans with Disabilities Act, Accessibility Guidelines. After concrete has been floated apply an even coat of color hardener to concrete surface using standard dry-shake method. Two applications shall be required with float after each application. Before stamping tool is applied to concrete, apply release agent in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. While concrete is still in its plastic state, apply the stamping tool to the surface of the concrete. Tools shall be properly stamped into the surface to achieve the desired texture. 24 hours after the stamping operation apply a sealer coat in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS Fillin In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. [ridgeline ms] 03300 - 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ~ 03300 - 10 1 Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide 3-1/2-inch concrete housekeeping pads for electrical switch 2 boards, pumps, compressor, other rotating mechanical machinery, boilers, and for equipment shown on 3 mechanical and electrical Drawings. Extend pads 6 inches beyond machine base in all directions with 3/4-inch 4 top edge chamfered. Install concrete pad over 15 lbs. building paper and '/z-inch diameter by 7-inch 5 galvanized lag screws projecting 2 inches into concrete at 24 inches on-center at each joists. Submit shop 6 drawings of pads to Architect for approval. Coordinate location with mechanical and electrical subcontractors. 7 8 9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION - 10 11 General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In 12 hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations 13 with an evaporation-control material. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions after screeding e 14 and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling. 15 16 Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. 17 Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days. 18 19 Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing compound, by moist curing, by 20 moisture-retaining cover curing, or by combining these methods , as specified. 21 22 Provide moisture curing by following methods. 24 Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. 25 26 Use continuous water-fog spray. 27 a 28 Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water, and 29 keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, 30 with 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. D 31 32 Provide moisture-retaining cover curing as follows: 33 34 Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest 35 practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or 36 adhesive. Immediately repair. any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and 37 waterproof tape. 38 39 Provide curing and sealing compound to exposed interior slabs and to exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as 40 follows: D 42 Apply curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are 43 complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in 44 continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat 45 areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating 46 and repair damage during curing period. 47 48 Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials D 49 applied directly to concrete. 50 51 Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, 52 and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. 8 53 If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. 54 55 Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces, D 56 by application of appropriate curing method. 57 [ridgeline ms] 03300 - 11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 11 Final cure concrete surfaces to receive, finish flooring with amoisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. REMOVING FORMS General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and sCmilar parts of the work,. may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and. until concrete has attained at least 75 percent of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal ofform-facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. REUSE OF FORMS Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork. . When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and taitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and securejoint to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect. CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removing forms, when acceptable to Architect. Mix dn/-pack mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Cut out honevcomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. For surfaces exposed-to-view, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface. Repair Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry-pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. If.defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete. (ridgeline ms] 03300- 12 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 12 '; ~ d if ; 1 ver y Re air Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness an 2 surface tolerances specified for each surtace and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified. Test 3 unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having required ~' 4 slope. 5 6 Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. surtace 7 defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or 8 completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts; honeycomb, rock 9 pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 10 11 Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 12 13 Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface finishing ~ 14 operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend ' 15 ~ into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used wheri acceptable to 16 Architect. 17 '°; 18 Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by 19 cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and 20 expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in 21 contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials 22 to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend 23 with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 24 25 .Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter by dry-pack method. Groove top 26 of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned 27 concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place dry-pack before bonding agent has dried. Compact 28 dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for 29 at least 72 hours. 30 '. 31 32 Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. 33 34 Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect. 35 ~i 36 37 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION ~, 38 39 General: The Owner will employ a testing agency to, perform tests and to submit test reports. Testing 40 laboratory shall furnish all equipment for taking samples and testing. 41 42 Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the following, as directed ' 43 by Architect. 44 45 Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C'94. 46 47 Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of 48 concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. 49 ' S0 Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; 51 ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each 52 type of air-entrained concrete. ®: 54 Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064.Test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F 55 (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of 56 compressive strength specimens. ® 57 [ridgeline ms] 03300 - 13 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 13 Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cure test specimens are required. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yds. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. more than the first 25 cu. yds. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.. When freauency of testinq will provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given. class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, Ready Mix Producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and.other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests when unacceptable concrete is verified. END OF SECTION 03300 [ridgeline ms] 03300 - 14 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 14 i 7 0 SECTION 04200 -- UNIT MASONRY ~. 1 PART1-GENERAL 2 3 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 7 Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. a~ 8 9 10 SUMMARY 11 12 This Section includes the following: 13 14 Concrete unit masonry. 15 16 -Brick unit masonry. 17 O; 18 Reinforced unit masonry. 19 20 Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 21 22 Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for exposed sheet-metal flashing installed in 23 masonry. 24 25 Division 7 Section "Water Repellents" 26 27 Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joint in mockup. 28 29 Products installed but not furnished under this Section include the following: 30 31 Steel lintels for unit masonry specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications:" D 32 33 Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing specified in Division 7 Section "Flashing 34 and Sheet Metal." 35 36 Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings specified in Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors 37 and Frames." 38 39 40 SUBMITTALS 41 i 42 General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 43 Specification Sections. 44 45 Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified. 46 47 Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. 48 Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement" showing bar schedules, stirrup 49 spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry reinforcement. . 50 51 Samples for verification of the following: 52 53 Accessories embedded in the masonry. [ridgeiine ms] 04200 - 1 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 1 Material certificates for the following, signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material complies with requirements. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer, brand, type, and, weight slips at time of delivery. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars. Each type and size of joint reinforcement. Each type and size of anchors, ties, and metal accessories. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE Unit Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6 "Specifications for Masonry Structures," except as otherwise indicated. Revise ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 to exclude Sections 1.4 and 1.7; Parts 2.1.2, 3.1.2, and 4.1.2; and Articles 1.5.1.2, 1.5.1.3, 2.1.1.1, 2.1.1.2, and 2.3.3.9 and to modify Article 2.1.1.4 by deleting requirement for installing vent pipes and conduits built into masonry. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one source and by a single manufacturer for each different product required. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store masonry units on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not install until they are in an air-dried condition. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. PROJECT CONDITIONS Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. [ridgeline ms] 04200 - 2 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 2 ,' ' h 1 er wythes; secure Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of ot 2 cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in 3 place. 4 5 Do not apply uniform flooror roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after 6 building masonry walls or columns. O ~CF ~r.~.i 4' Dr~~in.,+ grout, mortar, and soi! from staining the face of mason ;~ to be Jeff, PYp~CPd Qr ..~a~n ~ ~~~en,~on: ~ ~,.~~~„ , 9' painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil. that come in contact with such masonry. 10 '; 11 Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground 12 and over wall surface. 13 14 Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.. 15 16 Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral 17 finishes, from mortar droppings. 18 19 Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing 20 ~ .mortar and dirt on completed masonry. ~ 22 Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. 23 Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or 24 freezing conditions. Comply with the following' requirements: t 25. 26 Cold-Weather Construction: When the ambient temperature is within the limits indicated, use the 27 following procedures: ,' 28 ' 29 . 40 to 32 deg F (4 to 0 deg C): Heat mixing water or sand to produce mortar temperatures 30 ~ between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). 32 to 25 deg F (0 to -4 deg C): Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120.deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Heat grout~materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg. C). Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry. Cold-Weather Protection: When the mean daily temperature is within the limits indicated, provide the following protection: 40 to 25 deg F (4 to -4 deg C): Cover masonry with aweather-resistant membrane for 48 hours after construction. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg. F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried out, but not less than 7 days after completion of cleaning. 47 Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonryworkwhen temperature and humidity conditions produce 48 excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use . 49 cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F-(38 deg C) 50 and above. 51 52 . 53 ~, [ridgeline ms] 04200 - 3 1: . UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 3 PART2-PRODUCTS CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of concrete masonry unit required. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, except where indicated as bullnose. Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90, Grade N and as follows: Exposed Faces:. Split face Ground face Scored face Standard face Note: See Drawing A8.04 -Exterior Details for CMU Schedule. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength indicated below: 1900 psi (13.1 MPa). Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete unit masonry construction of compressive strength indicated. Weight Classification: Medium weight (half and half) Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units. Size: Provide concrete masonry units complying with requirements indicated below for size that are manufactured to specified face dimensions within tolerances specified in the applicable referenced ASTM specification for concrete masonry units. Concrete Masonry Units: Manufactured to specified dimensions of 3/8 inch less than nominal widths by nominal heights by nominal lengths indicated on drawings. Integral Water Repellent: (Dry-Block to be added to exterior CMU only)Provide units produced with liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested as a wall assembly madewith mortar contairiing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive according to ASTM E 514, with test period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of the test specimen. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide units made with "Dry-Block" by W.R. Grace & Co. BRICK General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of brick required. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces. [ridgeline ms] `04200 - 4 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 4 1 Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces 2 that cannot be produced by sawing. 3 4 Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed 5 surfaces being exposed to view. O 6 7 Chamfer brick. U 9 Face Brick: ASTM C 216 and as follows: ' 10 0 11 Grade and Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with grade and minimum average net-area 12 compressive strength indicated below: 13 14 Grade: SW. 15 16 8000 psi (55.2 MPa). 17 18 Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce clay masonry construction 19 of compressive strength indicated. 20 21 Type: FBS. (For general use in exposed masonry requiring wider variations in size and color 22 ranges than Type FBX) ' 24 Size: Bricks manufactured to the following actual dimensions within tolerances specified in 25 ASTM C 216: 27 Standard: 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) thick by 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) high by 7-1/2 inches (190 28 mm) long. 29 30 Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated. 31 32 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or 33 approved: 34 35 Mutual Materials 36 Interpace Corp. 37 Interstate Brick ' 38 Acme Manufacturing 39 41 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS 42 43 Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. 44 Provide natural color cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 45 46 Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 48 Aggreqatefor Mortar: ASTM C 144; exceptforjointstess than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm), use aggregate graded with 49 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18 mm) sieve. 50 51 Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. 52 53 Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar 54 mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. 55 56 Water: Clean and potable. [ridgeline ms] 04200 - 5 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved: Mortar Pigments: , True Tone Mortar Colors; Davis Colors. Centurion Pigments; Lafarge Corporation. SGS Mortar Colors; Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc. REINFORCING STEEL See Structural Notes on Structural Drawings. JOINT REINFORCEMENT See Structural Notes on Structural Drawings. TIES AND ANCHORS. GENERAL See Structural Notes on Structural Drawings. RIGID ANCHORS See Structural Notes on Structural Drawings. BENT WIRE TIES See Structural Notes on Structural Drawings. ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO STRUCTURAL FRAME See Structural Notes on Structural Drawings. EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS Vinyl Sheet Flashing: Flexible sheet flashing especially formulated from virgin polyvinyl chloride with plasticizers and other modifiers to remain flexible and waterproof in concealed masonry applications, black in color, and of thickness indicated below: .. Thickness: 20 mils (0.5 mm). Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved: V.inyl Sheet Flashing: , "Nervastrol," Nervastrol, Inc. "Type 20," Wascoseal [ridgeline ms] 04200 - 6 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 6 1 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES . 2 3 Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1; ' 4 compressible up to 35 percent of width and thickness indicated; formulated from the following material: 5 6 Neoprene. 7 $ Preformed Control-,!Dint Gaskets: Mates! as indica±ed below, designed to fit Standard sash block and to 9 maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. _ 10 11 Styrene-Butadiene Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805. 12 13 Polyvinyl Chloride: ASTM D 2287, General Purpose Grade, Type PVC-65406. a 14 15 Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 16 asphalt felt). 17 18 Weep Holes: Provide the following: 19 20 Round Plastic Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/8-inch (9-mm) outside diameter by 4 inches 21 (100 mm) long. ~~ MASONRY CLEANERS 26 Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of/z-cup (0.14-L) dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and'/z- 27 cup (0.14-L) dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of water. a 28 29 Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength, general-purpose cleaner designed for 30 removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry surfaces a 31 of type indicated belowwithout discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended 32 use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 34 For masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a concentrated 35 blend of surface-acting acids, chelating, and wetting agents. 36 37 For dark-colored masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a 38 liquid blend of surface-acting acids and special inhibitors. a 39 40 For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of 41 organic and inorganic acids and special inhibitors. 42 43 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved: 45 Fabrichem 46 ProSoCo 49 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES 50 51 General: Do not use admixtures, including pigmerits, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water- 52 repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.. 53 54 Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 55 [ridgeline ms] 04200 - 7 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 7 Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar indicated below: - Limit cementitious materials in mortar to Portland cement and lime. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use type S. Dry-Block: Walls comprised of Dry-Block CMU shall have mortar that contains the manufacturer's recommended amount of Dry-Block Mortar Admixture. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Mix to match Architect's sample. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with UBC Table 21-C for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar manufacturer's directions. PART 3 -EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections priorto installation. INSTALLATION. GENERAL Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of thickness indicated. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped.edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without cutting, where possible. Allow units cut with vvater-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry. [ridgeline ms] 04200 - 8 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 8 a' 1 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES 2 3 Comply with construction tolerances of referenced unit masoriry standard listed under Part 1, Quality a~ 4 Assurance. 5 6 ~- - ~. 7 LAYING MASONRY WALLS e 9 Lav out walls iri advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for 10 accurate locating of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half- ~. 11 size units at corners; jambs, and where possible at other locations. 12 13 Lav walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated . 14 with .other construction. 15 16 Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry:. Lay exposed masonry i^ the following bond pattern; do not use units 17 with less than nominal 4-inch.(10.0-mm) horizontal face dimensipns at corners orjambs. ~; 18 19 One-half running bond with vertical joirit in each course centered on units in courses .above and 20 below. Q; 21 . 22 Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches 23 (50 mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 24 4-inch (100-mm), horizontal face. dimensions at corners orjambs. D~ 25 . 26 Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back %-unit length for one-half cunning bond; do not 27 tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose a 28 masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. 29 30 Built-in Work: As construction progresses, 'build-in items specified under this and other. Sections of the 31 Specifications., Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. a ! 32 33 Solid grout the perimeter head and jambs of all newly installed hollow metal door frame assemblies 34 in all exterior walls, and all new interior masonry and masonry veneer walls. Provide wood or 35 styrofoam filler materials iri "door stop" recess to promofe easier drilling forweatherstrip installation. 36 Seal all joints between frame and wall surface to prevent loss of grout, bulging, uneven or exposed 37 '. .grout surfaces. Grout. both jambs and head at perimeter of door frames and integral sidelights. 38 Stand-alorie hollow metal relites do not require grouting. Door frames in framed walls covered in 39 another Division 8 section: ~ ~ . 40 41 Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the ~. ~ 42 joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 43 44 Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with. grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, 45 lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 46 47 . Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height~of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above 48 and as follows: 49 - e 50 Install com ressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. P 51 52 53. [ridgeline msj 04200 _ 9 UNlT MASONRY 04200 - 9 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING Lay hollow. concrete masonry units as follows: With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. (Double butter on vertical.) Sod webs in mortar in Starting Course on footings and in all Courses of piers, columns, and pilas±ers, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 3/8-inch (10-mm) joints. Tool exposedjoints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using ajointer largerthan joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Cut Loints flush for masonry walls that are to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE MASONRY See Structural Notes on Structural Drawings. r_evrTiFc Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strikejoints facing cavities flush. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity. Provide temporary opening by omitting 1 brick every 48 inches (1200 mm) at bottom of cavity and in first course above flashing. After wall has been built to top of cavity and mortar has set, flush out cavity with a hose, a{low to dry, and then close temporary opening. HORIZONTAL-JOINT REINFORCEMENT See Structural Notes on Structural Drawings. ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS See .Structural Notes on Structural Drawings. ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS See Structural Notes on Structural Drawings. [ridgefine ms] 04200 - 10 UNlT MASONRY 04200 - 10 i 1 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS 2 3 General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in related items as the 4 masonry progresses. Do not forma continuous span through movementjoints unless provisions are made 5 to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 9 Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 10 ' 11 Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows: ' 13 Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm) for installation of sealant and 14 backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Maintain joint free and clear of mortar. ~~ LINTELS Install steel lintels where indicated. 21 Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for brick size 22 units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting 23 lintels. 24 25 Provide prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam units with 26 reinforcement bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before ~ 27 handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. ' 31 32 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer before covering with mortar. 41 Install flashing as follows: 42 43 At composite masonry walls, including cavitywalls, extend flashing from exterior face of outerwythe 44 of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm), and through the 45 inner wythe to within '/ inch (13 mm) of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. Where 46 ihterior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner 47 wythe and turn up approximately 2 inches (50 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 48 '! 49 Atmasonry-veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through the veneer, up face 50 of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm), and behind air-infiltration barrier/building paper. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches. (100 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form a pan. 55 ' 56 Cut off flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. (ridgeline ms] 04200 - 11 ~ UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 11 Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: Form weep holes with product specified in Part 2 of this Section. Space weep holes 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. In cavities, place pea gravel to a height equal to height of first course, but not less than 2 inches (50 mm), immediately above top offlashing embedded in the wall, as masonry construction progresses, to splatter mortar droppings and to maintain drainage. Place cavity.drainage material immediately above flashing in cavities. Install reglets and Hailers for flashing and other related construction where shown to be built into masonry. INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY General: Install reinforced unit masonry to comply with requirements of ACI 530.1, "Specifications for Masonry Structures". TemporaN Formwork and Shores: ConstructformworkaHd shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. Grout pour heights shall be as listed in ACI 530.1 "Specifications for Masonry Structures". Provide cleanout holes. at least 3 inches (76 mm) in least dimension for grout pours over 60 inches (1524 mm) in height. Provide cleanout holes at each vertical reinforcing bar. At solid grouted masonry, provide cleanout holes at not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL The Owner will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform the following testing for field quality control. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. Testing laboratory shall furnish all equipment for taking samples and testing. See "Section 01400" for testing report distribution. Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in thisArticlewill be performed during construction foreach 5000 sq. ft. (460 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof. Mortar composition and properties will be evaluated per ASTM C 780. [ridgeline ms] 04200 - 12 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 12 Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019. Prism-Test Method: For each type of wall construction indicated, masonry prisms will be tested per ASTM E 447, Method B, and as follows: Prepare 1 set of prisms for testing at 7 days and 1 set for testing at 28 days. REPAIRING. POINTING. AND CLEANING Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for application of sealants. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears prior to tooling joints. Final Cleaning:. After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. ~ Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonn/ surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. Clean brick by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20 Revised, using the following masonry cleaner: Job-mixed detergent solution. Proprietary acidic cleaner, applied in compliance with directions of acidic cleaner manufacturer. Do not use muriatic acid. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure unit masonry is withoutdamage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 04200 [ridgeline ms] 04200 - 13 ~ UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 13 ~~ SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL ,' 1 2 4 ' S 6 8 9 10 '~ 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 ,~ 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 i 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 ' S1 52 53 54 PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. .SUMMARY This Section includes fabrication and erection of structural steel work, as shown on drawings including schedules, notes, and details showing size and location of members, typical connections, and types of steel required. Structural steel is that work defined in American Institute of Steel Construction {AISC) "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on drawings. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications are specified elsewhere in Division 5. Refer to Division 3 for anchor bolt installation in concrete, Division 4 for anchor bolt installation in masonry. Refer to Division 7 for sprayed-on fireproofing. (Omit primer paint on members to be fireproofed.) SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for following products. Include laboratory test reports and otherdata to show compliance with specifications (including specified standards). Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports covering chemical and physical properties . High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers Include Direct Tension Indicators if used. Structural steel primer paint Shrinkage-resistarit grout Shop drawings: Including complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members,. procedures, and diagrams. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols and-show size, length, and type of each weld. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed as work of other sections. [ridgeline ms] 05120'- 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1 Certification: Submit written confirmation of qualifications, including names of fabricator (firm) and detailers, years of experience, list of projects with names and phone numbers of related Owners and Contractors as references. Submit certification with complete list of Subcontractors. QUALITY ASSURANCE Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following, ,except as otherwise indicated: American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following sentence: "This approval constitutes the owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any detail configuration of connections developed by the fabricator as apart of his preparation of these shop drawings." AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings," including "Commentary." "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 "Structural Welding Code -Steel" and the Uniform Building Code. ' ' ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use." Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure." Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. Have welders retested if recertification of welders is required, retesting will be contractor's responsibility. Qualifications for Detailer: Engage detailer with minimum of five (5) years experience in structural steel detailing, including involvement in not less~than.three (3) projects of similar, or greater, size and complexity. Qualifications for Fabricators: Engage fabricator with minimum of five (5) years experience in structural steel fabrication, including involvement in not less than three (3) projects of similar, or greater, size and complexity. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not delay work. Store materials to' permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. If bolts and nuts become dry or rusty, clean and relubricate before use. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. [ridgeline ms] 05120 - 2 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2 ,i ~` 1 PART2-PRODUCTS 2 3 4 MATERIALS. 5 ' 6 7 Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication.of work that will be exposed to view, use only materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust and scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled-trade 8 9~ f Idlll@S,clIIU IUUy1JlICS$. RCII IUVC, jUlal UICf111DlleJ Uy lJ. l II IUing, Vr uy vvciuu iy and grinding, pr iGr w Cicaiiiii ig, treating, and. applying surface finishes. 10 r 11 Structural Steel Wide Flange Shapes: ASTM A 572 12 •~ 13 ~ 14 Other Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars:°-ASTM A 36 15 Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM.. A.500, Grade,B , 16 17 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B; or ASTM A 501 • 18 19 ~ Finish: Black, except.whe~e indicated to be galvanized. , 20 21 Steel Castings: ASTM A 27, Grade 65-35, medium-strength carbon steel , 22 . 23 Headed Stud-Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 or•1020, cold-finished carbon steel with 24 25 dimensions complying with AISC Specifications . 26 Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated ~ 27 28 Unfihished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low-carbon steel bolts and nuts ~ 29 , 30. Provide hexagonal heads and nuts for all connections. ~ ~ f ; 31 32 . Provide either hexagonal or square heads and nuts, except use only hexagonal units. for exposed 33. connections. • ' 34 35 Electrodes for Welding: _ Comply with AWS Code , . ' 36 37 Structural Steel Primer Paint: SSPC -Paint 2; red, lead-iron oxide,, oil. alkyd 38 39 Cement Grout: Portland cement, (ASTM C 150; Type I or Type I I I) and clean, uniformly graded, natural sand 40 (ASTM C 404,-Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0; parts sand, by volume, with minimum water• 41 required for placement and hydration. 42 - - , ,~ 43 Nonmetallic Shrinkage-ResistantGrout: Premixed; nonmetallic; noncorrosive, noristaihing productcontaining 44 selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing 45 46 agents, complying:with CE-CRD-C621. .... 47 Products: Subject to compliance. with requirements, provide one of the following or approved: 48 49 100 Non-Shrink Grout (Non-Metallic);. Conspec, Inc. - . '` 50 - Crystex; L & M.Construction Chemicals, Inc. 51 Euco N.S.; Euclid Chemical Co. ' 52 53 Five Star.Grout; U.S. Grout Corp. Masterflow 713; Master Builders .• ' ~ 54 Propak; Protex Industries, Inc. 55 Sealtight 588 Grout; W. R. Meadows '~ 56 , , '~ [ridgeline ms] 05120 - 3 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3 , Set Non-Shrink; Set Products, Inc. Supreme Grout; Cormix, Inc. Sure Grip Grout; Dayton Superior FABRICATION Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with A~SC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. Where framing is noted as "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel," fabricate in accordance with AISC "Specification for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel." Connections:.Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are ihdicated. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only bolted connections of secondary framing members to primary members (including purlins, girts, and other framing members taking only nominal stresses) and for temporary bracing to facilitate erection. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS~Code for procedures, appearance and quality ofwelds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will produce true alignment of axes without warp. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and. for passage of other work through steel framing members, as'shown on final shop drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces: Do not flame-cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints in steel shelf angles when part of structural steel frame;. locate at vertical brick expansion joints as indicated on drawings. SHOP PAINTING General: Shop-paint structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel that is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2 inches of embedded areas only. Do not paint surfaces to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction-type connections. Do. not paint surfaces scheduled to receive sprayed-on fireproofing., [ridgeline ms] 05120 - 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL ~ 05120 - 4 [1 ,~ 1 2 '! 4. 5 6 7 9 10 ` 1,1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 ~' 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 '', Apply 2 coats of.paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or.erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first: Paintin Provide aone-coat, shop-applied paint system complying with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Paint System Guide No. 7.00. CCII lIR[_F l]I_IAI_ITY f:nNTRC11 Design of Members and Conliections: Details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. Promptly notify Architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of structure ,are not clearly indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION ERECTION Surveys: Check elevations of concrete and- masonry bearing surtaces,-and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices, .before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Architect. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made or until compensating adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with Architect. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and fina6 connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve ;proper. alignment of structures as erection proceeds. . Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces ofbond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing. plates for structural members on~wedges or other adjusting .devices. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surtaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. . Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. Where framing is noted as "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel," erect in accordance with AISC "Specification for Architecturally Exposed. Structural Steel." Splice members only vvhere indicated and accepted on shop drawings. (ridgeline ms] 05120.- 5 STRUCTURAL STEEL ', 05120 - 5 Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds, and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. Comply with AISC Specifications forbearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Keam holes that must be enlarged to admit boils. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that are not under stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. - Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. QUALITY CONTROL Owner will engage an independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high-strength bolted connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports. See "Section 01400" for test report distribution.. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests, state in each report whether test specimens comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations therefrom. Provide access for testing agency to places where structural steel work is being fabricated or produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished. Testing agency may inspect structural steel at plant before shipment. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections and laboratory test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor's expense, as necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of original work and to show compliance of corrected work. END OF SECTION 05120 [ridgeline ms] 05120 - 6 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 6. I '! SECTION 05300 -METAL DECKING ~' 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 3 ~ DCI I~TC~11'1!1!`1111NCAITC 5 ' 6 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 7 Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 10 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 11 12 Extent of metal decking is indicated on drawings, including basic layout and type of deck units required. 13 ' 14 15 QUALITY ASSURANCES 16 17 Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise 18 indicated or specified: 20 1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members". t 21 2. AWS "Structural Welding Code". 22 3. SDI "Design Manual for Floor Decks and Roof Decks." ' 23 24 Qualification of Field Welding: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS 25 "Standard Qualification Procedure." 27 Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing and replacing portions 28 of decking for testing purposes will be borne by Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove 29 work found to be defective and replace with new acceptable work. 30 31 Underwriters' Label: Provide metal floor deck units listed in Underwriters' Laboratories "Fire Resistance 32 Directory", with each deck unit bearing the UL label and marking for specific system detailed. 34 '' 35 ~ SUBMITTALS 36 37 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of decking ~. 38 and accessories. Include manufacturer's certification as may be required to show compliance with these 39 specifications. 41 Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, 42 and conditions requiring closure panels, supplementary framing, cut openings, special jointing or other 43 accessories. 45 46 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 49 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 50 51 Manufacturer: Shall be "Formlok" by Verco Manufacturing, or"2W" by BHP. 52 [ridgeline ms] 05300 - 7 METAL DECKING 05300 - 7 MATERIALS Steel for Galvanized Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 653, Grade A (G-60) ASTM A 525 Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 526, commercial quality, galvanized. Type: Type and gauge as indicated on structural drawings. Composite decking shill be provided with vent tabs. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc-dust content paint for repair of damaged galvanized surfaces complying with Military Specifications MIL-P-21035 (Ships). Flexible Closure Strips: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber. FABRICATION General: Form deck units in lengths to span 3 or more supports, with nested 2" laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and final shop drawings, and as specified herein. Place deck units on supporting metal beams and ledger angles and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. Place deck units in straight alignment for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between cells at ends of abutting units. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or excessive deflection. Fastening Deck Units: Tack weld or use self-tapping No. 8 or larger machine screws at 4'-0" o.c.'for fastening end closures. Fasten deck units to steel supporting members as indicated on the structura! drawings. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Use welding washers where recommended by deck manufacturer. Button punch side laps of adjacent deck units between supports, at spacing shown on structural drawings. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking as shown. [ridgeline ms] 05300 - 2 METAL DECKING 05300 - 2 ' ' . 1 Reinforcement at O enin s: Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure feces as re wired for p ~ P q 2 strength, continuity of decking and support of other work shown. 3 4 Provide flexible closure strips instead of metal closures, at Contractor's option, wherever their use will 5 ensure complete closure. Install with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ' 6 ~. CICI .~.. ~Ir1AI ITV lv~A~TD~II 9. 10 Tesfin :Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. 1 11 12 Field welds will be subject to inspection. 13 14 Shear connector stud welds will be inspected and tested according to AWS 01.1 for stud welding and as 15 follows: 16 17 Shear connector stud welds will be visually inspected. t; 18 19 Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal less than a full 360-degree .flash or 20 welding repairs to any shear connector stud. 21 22 Tests will be conducted on additional shear connector studs if weld fracture occurs on shear 23 connector studs already tested according to AWS 01.1. 24 j 25 Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. 26 27 Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. . 28 29 Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of 30 , corrected work with specified requirements. 31 32 33 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION 34 35 Touch-Up Painting: After decking installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds and rust ~ 36 spots on-top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members, according to ASTM A 37 780. 38 - 39 with manufacturer's Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance 40 instructions. 41 ~ 42 Touch-up painted surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces. ~ 43 44 ',` 45 END OF SECTION 05300 t [ridgeline ms) 05300 - 3 METAL DECKING 05300 - 3 ''~ '' SECTION 05500 -METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 ® 7 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 10 SUMMARY 11 12 _ This Section includes the following metal fabrications: 13 14 Rough Hardware 15 16 ~ Ladders Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates Loose Steel Lintels Miscellaneous Framing and Supports Removable Pipe Bollard " Pipe Bollards Steel Cap -Entry Glu-Lams Gate Security Gate /Hold-Open Post Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural steel framing system components. Division 9 Section "Painting" for finish coatings. over primer; specified. in this section. 41 SUBMITTALS 42 43 General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 44 Specification Sections. 46 Product data for nonslip aggregates and nonslip aggregate surface finishes, prefabricated building columns, 47 cast nosings, treads and thresholds, steel floor plate, paint products, and grout. 48 - 49 Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, ' 50 sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. ' S1 Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 52 53 Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by Architect. 54 [ridgeline ms] 05500 - 1 METAL .FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1 ,I Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include a list of completed projects with project name, addresses, names of architects and owners, and other information specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project with a record ofsuccessful in-service performance, and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. This fabrication firm shall meet all applicable provisions of the Welding Standards as listed in the following paragraph. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel," AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code -Aluminum," AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel," WABO and ICBO. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabricating products without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting. PART 2 -PRODUCTS FERROUS METALS Metal Surfaces. General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows: Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.. For exterior installations and where indicated, provide tubing with hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 53. [ridge~ine ms] 05500 - 2 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 ~~ 1 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated,. or another weight 2 required by structural loads. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. \Alolrlinn Rnrlc ~nrl Rnro Rler+rnr+ee• Cclen+ ~nrnrrlinn +n ~\/\/C enenifiratinnc fnr tha mortal allnv to hP U/PI/t P(t PAINT 13 Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer 14 complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664, selected for good resistance to normal 15 atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound 16 foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. 17 ';' 18 Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry 19 film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or _ 20 SSPC-Paint 20. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers. FASTENERS General: Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating, for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required. Bolts and'Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6), with heX nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M), and, where indicated, flat washers. Machine Screws: ANSI 818.6.3. Lag Bolts: ANSI 618.2.1 (ANSI B18.2.3.8M). Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ANSI 818.6.1. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ANSI 818.22.1. (ANSI B18.22M). Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ANSI 618.21.1. 45 Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, ' 46 without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times 47 the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a 48 qualified independent testing agency. 49 . 50 Material: Carbon steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 51 52 Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as required. 53 '' . [ridgeline ms] 05500 - 3 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 1' GROUT Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved Nonshrink, Metallic Grouts: Supreme Plus; Cormix Construction Chemicals. Hi Mod Grout; Euclid Chemical Co. Embeco 885 and 636; Master Builders Technologies, Inc. Ferrolith G Redi-Mix and G-NC; Sonneborn Building Products--ChemRex, Inc. Met-ox; The Spray-Cure Company. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grouts: B-6 Construction Grout; W. R. Bonsal Co. Diamond-Crete Grout; Concrete Service Materials Co. Supreme; Cormix Construction Chemicals. Sure-grip High Performance Grout; Dayton Superior Corp. Euco N-S Grout; Euclid Chemical Co. Five Star Grout; Five Star Products. Vibropruf #11; Lambert Corp: Crystex; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. Masterflow 928 and 713; Master Builders Technologies, Inc. Sealtight 588 Grout; W. R. Meadows, Inc. Sonogrout 14; Sonneborn Building Products--ChemRex, Inc. Kemset; The Spray-Cure Company. CONCRETE FILL Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements of Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless higher strengths are indicated. FABRICATION, GENERAL Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. [ridgeline ms] 05500 - 4 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4 1 Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 2 3 Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance 4 of base metals. 5 6 Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Q Remove ::~e~din^y flux immed~uwly. 9 10 At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surtaces smooth and blended so that no 11 roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. 12 13 Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever ' 14 possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws 15 or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 17 Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring ' 18 devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 19 20 Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and 21 assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that 22 maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 24 Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar 25 items. 26 27 Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where 28 water may accumulate. 29 ' 31 ROUGH HARDWARE 32 33 Furnish bent, or otherwise custom-fabricated, bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other 34 miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or 35 .securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are 36 specified in Division 6 Sections. ' 38 Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Furnish malleable-iron washers for heads and 39 nuts that bear on wood structural connections, and furnish steel washers elsewhere. nn 42 STEEL LADDERS 43 44 General: Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and anchorages as 45 indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3. 46 47 Siderails: Continuous, steel, 3/8-by-2-inch (10-by-51-mm) flat bars, with eased edges, spaced 18 inches (460 48 mm) apart. ' 49 50 Bar Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bars, spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. 51 52 Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 53 54 Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than 5 feet (1.5 m) o.c. 55 with welded or bolted steel brackets. 56 [ridgeline ms] 05500 - 5 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5 Size brackets to support design dead and live loads indicated and to hold centerline of ladder ruhgs clear of the wall surface by not less than 7 inches (180 mm). Extend side rails 42 inches (1.1 m) above top rung, and return rails to wall or structure unless other secure handholds are provided. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung; either by coating the rung. with aluminum-oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive, or by using a type.of manufactured rung that is filled with aluminum-oxide grout. Galvanize ladders, including brackets and fasteners, in the following locations: Exterior locations. Interior locations where indicated. Shop Prime: Prepare and shop prime per following paragraph STEEL AND IRON FINISHES. LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of the required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize after fabrication. LOOSE STEEL LINTELS Fabricate loose structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. Size loose lintels for equal bearing of 1 inch per foot (85 mm per meter) of clear span but not less than 8 inches (200 mm) bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise,indicated. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated that are not a part of structural steel framework as required to complete the Work. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive other adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes,' plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. (Items I:E., connections and seats for Glu-Lam Beams.) ' Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports in the following locations: Exterior locations. Interior locations where indicated. [ridgeiine ms] 05500 - 6 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 6 ~' 1 REMOVABLE PIPE BOLLARD 2 3 Fabricate removable bollard from materials as indicated on drawings. All connections are to be welded and 4 ground smooth to blend in with adjacent surfaces. Porosity, cracks or blow holes not allowed. Bollard and 5 `' in=ground receiver shall be hot dip galvanize after fabrication. Prime paint removable bollard: 6 U c•TCCI rnD CAITDV /'_1 II_I A11AC J 1 VL~L VI11 - LI\ 1 I\ 1 VVV-~/"~~~~v 9 , 10 Fabricate end caps from end caps and of sizes as indicated on drawings. Hot dip galvanize after fabrication. ' ~1 , ; 12 13 PIPE BOLLARD '. ~ 14 ~ 15. .Pipe bollard to be furnished from' nominal 6" schedule 40 galvanized pipe by 5'-0" length. 16 17 -, 'i 18 GATE 19 20 Fabricate gate from the following as indicated on drawings. Perimeter frame and interior vertical members 21 from structural tubing, square-bar spacers, flat bar diagonal braces, steel angle closures at top andbottom 22 of cedar boards, and latching hardware. All connections are to be welded and ground smooth to blend in with 23 . adjacent surfaces. Porosity, cracks or blow holes not allowed. Gate to be fabricated to a flat plane with 24 maximum surface variation of 1/4" total. Hot dip galvanize after fabrication. Prime paint. Cedar fence boards r 25 are specified in Section 06200. 26' 27 - . 28 SECURITY GATE '' 29 ' 30 Fabricate gate from materials as detailed on drawings and specified in Part 2 of this Section. Where any 2 31 pipes meet to form a joint, cut radius in end of pipe to match contour of other. Weld with a continuous fillet 32 weld,.chip slag and grind smooth. Weld in gussets where indicated on details. Weld gate so all parts conform 33 as a unit true to a single line of plane. Grind all welds smooth. Shop prime after fabrication. Paint per Section 34 09900. During installation apply liberal amounts of grease to all wearing surfaces. 35 :. - ' 36 Hold-open Post: Fabricate from nominal 4"diameter galvanized steel pipe by 6'-0" long as detailed ~ 37 on~drawing5. Weld chain bracket onto side of post and 1/4" plate cover to top ofpost. Grind all 38 welds smooth and paint with galvanize repair paint. Set post in 16" diameter hole at a height as 39 required to align with gate, and fill with concrete. Slope top ofconcrete %" from post down to grade. ,' 40 41 42 43' FINISHES, GENERAL 44 Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designing 45. finishes. 46 ' '' 47 Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 48 49 ~ 50 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES 51 . 52 Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by~the hot-dip process complying 53 with the following requirements: 54 . 55 ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 56 ' ~° [rdgeline ms] .05500 - 7 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 7 ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch (0.76 mm) thick or thicker. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning." Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes.or to 6e embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA 1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 -EXECUTION PREPARATION Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting dravvings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installing anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. INSTALLATION. GENERAL Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete-and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot beshop-welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. [ridgeiine ms] 05500 - 8 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 8 u ' 1 At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no 2 roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. ' 3 4 5 SETTING LOOSE PLATES 6 7 Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to 8 surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates. 9 10 Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have 11 been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, 12 cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. 14 Use nonshrink, metallicgrout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, 15 nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. 16 17 Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 18 19 20 INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS 21 22 Set pipe bollard in concrete footing. Fill pipe with non-shrink grout and weld 1/4" steel plate cap to top. Grind 23 weld smooth and repair paint as described in this section. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 28 Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of ' 29 shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 30 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 31 32 Apply by brush or spray to provide a 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) minimum dry film thickness. 33 34 Touch-up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of 35 the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." 36 37 For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair 38 paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 39 40 41 END OF SECTION 05500 n 1 (ridgeline ms] 05500 - 9 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 9 n SECTION 05510 -METAL STAIRS PART 1 -GENERAL 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS '~ Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Tvpe: This Section includes the following: Prefabricated stairs. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ~ 19 Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and install steel stairs to withstand following structural loads 20 without exceeding allowable design working stress of materials involved, including anchors and connections. 21 Apply each load to produce maximum stress in each component of steel stairs. 22 23 Treads of Steel Stairs: Capable of withstanding uniform load of 100 Ibf per sq. ft. or concentrated load of 300 24 Ibf on area of 4 sq. inches (26 sq. cm) located in center of tread, whichever produces greater stress. 25 26 Platform of Steel Stairs: Capable of withstanding uniform load of 100 lbs. per sq. ft. (4.8 KN/sq. m). 27 28 Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from loads specified above as well as stresses 29 resulting from railing system loads. 32 SUBMITTALS 33 34 Product Data: Submit for metal stairs, prefilled metal pan stair treads, nonslip aggregates and nonslip 35 aggregate surface finishes, cast nosings, extruded nosings, steel floor plate, paint products, and grout. 36 37 Shop Drawings: Submit, detailing fabrication and installation of steel stairs. Include plans, elevations, 38 sections, and details of steel stairs and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide 39 templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. For installed steel stairs 40 indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural analysis data sealed and signed by 41 qualified professional engineer licensed to practice in the jurisdiction where stairs will, be installed and who 42 was responsible for their preparation. 43 44 Welder Certificates: Submit signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified 45 under "Quality Assurance" Article. ' 46 47 48 QUALITY ASSURANCE ® 50 Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing steel stairs similarto those indicated forthis Project 51 with a record ofsuccessful in-service performance, and with sufficient production capacity to produce required 52 units without delaying the Work. 53 [ridgefine ms] 05510 - 1 METAL STAIRS 0551.0 - 1 Installer Qualifications: Arrange for steel stair installation specified in this Section by same firm that fabricated them. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer legally authorized to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of kind indicated that have resulted in installation of metal stairs (including handrails and railing systems) similar to this Project in material, design, and extent and that have record of successful in-service performance. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code-Steel,"AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel." Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. Testing: By Owner, similar to 01400. PART 2 -PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide preassembled stair units by one of following American Stair Corp. with Mesh Rail, or comparable by Alfab, Inc. The Sharon Companies, Ltd. Wagner: R&B Wagner, Inc. FERROUS METALS Metal Surfaces General: For surfaces exposed to view in completed Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, or, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by referenced standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows: Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated, or another weight required by structural loads. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated. Cold-Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611, Grade A, unless otherwise indicated or required by design loading. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for the metal alloy to be welded. FASTENERS General: Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating, for exterior use orwhere built into exteriorwalls. Selectfasteners fortype,grade, and class required. (ridgeline msj 05510 - 2 METAL STAIRS 05510 - 2 1 Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6), with 2 hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M), and, where indicated, flat washers. 3 4 Machine Screws: ANSI B18.6.3 (ANSI B 18.6.7M}. 5 6 Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ANSI 618.22.1 (ANSI B 18.22M). 7 8 Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ANSI B 18.21.1. 9 10 Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt an,d sleeve assemblies of material indicated below with capability to sustain, 11 without failure, load equal to 6 times load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times load 12 imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by qualified 13 independent testing agency. 14 15 Material: Carbon steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5. PAINT 20 Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer 21 complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664, selected for good resistance to normal 22 atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and- capability to provide a sound 23 foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. 24 25 Bituminous Paint: Cold=applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos 26 fibers. 27 ' 28 29 CONCRETE FILL AND REINFORCING MATERIALS 30 31 Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements of Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" 32 for normal-weight, ready-mixed concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,500 psi (17 MPa), 33 unless higher strengths indicated. 34 . 35 Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 (ASTM A 615M), Grade 60 (Grade 400), un-less otherwise indicated. 36 38 39 FABRICATION. MISCELLANEOUS 40 General: Form steel stairs from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that 41 needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on 42 Shop Drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. ' 43 44 Exposed Work: Form true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. 45 Shear and punch metals- cleanly and accurately. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. Ease 46 exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal 47 corners to smallest radius possible, without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. 48 49 Corners and Seams: Weld continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop ' 50 strength and corrosion resistance „of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove 51 welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended 52 so that no roughness shows after finishing; and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces S3 . ' 54 Exposed Connections: Form with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever 55 possible. 'Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws 56 or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 57 [ridgeline ms] 05510 - 3 METAL STAIRS ~ 05510 - 3 Shoo Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for field assembly and coordinated installation. STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS General: Construct stairs to conform to sizes and arrangements indicated. Join pieces together by welding, unless otherwise indicated. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, columns, handrails, railing systems, newels, balusters, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates, or other components necessary for the support of stairs and platforms, and as required to anchor and contain stairs on supporting structure. Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM "Metal Stair Manual" for commercial class of stair, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of structural steel channels, plates, or combination thereof, as indicated. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers. Construct platforms of structural steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as indicated. Bolt orweld headers to stringers; and bolt orweld newels and framing members to stringers and headers. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finish surfaces. Where masonrywallssupportsteelstairs,providetemporarysupportingstrutsdesignedforerecting steel stair components before installing masonry. Metal Pan Risers, subtreads, and Subplatforms: Shape metal pans for risers and subtreads to conform to configuration indicated. Provide thicknesses of structural steel sheet for metal pans indicated, but not less than that required, to support total design loading. Form metal pans of uncoated hot-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting. Provide subplatforms of configuration and construction indicated; if not indicated, of same metal as risers and subtreads, in thicknesses required to support design loading. Attach subplatform to platform framing members with welds. Treads and Platforms (Stairs at Storage 314 & 209): Treads and platforms to be Grip Strut by McNichols or approved. Weld risers and treads to stringers. Provide platforms of configuration and construction indicated and of same profile as treads. Thicknesses to be as required to support design loading. Attach platform to platform framing members with welds. No paint on treads, risers or platform. FINISHES General: Finish metal stairs after assembly. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes. Manual" for recommendations on application and designations of finishes. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC. surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed units: Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning." Primer: Apply shop primer to urcoated surfaces, except those with galvanized finish or those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA 1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. [ridgeline ms] 05510 - 4 METAL STAIRS 05510 - 4 :: 1 PART 3 -EXECUTION 2 3 4 PREPARATION 6 General: Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and 7 directions for installing anchorages, including concrete inserts, weld. plates, and anchor bolts. Coordinate 8 delivery of such items to Project site. 9 10 11 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 13 Fastening to In-Place Construction:: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing 14 steel stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and. masonry inserts, 15 through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors as required. 16 17 Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing steel stairs. Set 18 units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free 19 of rack; and measured from established fines and levels. Stairs: Install steel stairs as detailed. on structural drawings. Built-Ins: Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. Connections: Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted field connections. Field Welding: Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. 37 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 38 39 'Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of 40 shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 41 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film 42 thickness of 2.0-mils (0.05-mm). 43 ` 44 Touch-up damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to 45 ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 05510 [ridgeline ms] 05510 - 5 ~ METAL STAIRS 05510 - 5 r ' 1 2 3 ' 4 5 6 ' 8 9 10 11 1'2 13 14 ' 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 ': 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 1' 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 ,~ 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 ' 43 44 45 46 47 48 49- 50 51 52 53 'I 54 SECTION 05521- HANDRAIL AND RAILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS :Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Steel pipe handrails Fabricated steel railing system Related Sections:.Requirements to this Section are contained in the following Sections: Division 3 Section "Concrete" for casting in pipe sleeves furnished by this section. DEFINITIONS Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing-related terms apply to this Section. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Design, fabricate, and install handrails and railing systems to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials for handrails, railing systems, anchors, and connections. Apply each -load to produce the maximum stress in each of the respective components comprising handrails and railing systems. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems.: Uniform load of 50 Ibs per linear foot applied horizontally. Handrails Not Serving as Too Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: Concentrated load•of 200 Ibs applied at any point and in any direction Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding a horizontal load of 25 Ibs per square foot over the entire area, including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, or other elements composing the infill area. Above load need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails of railing systems in determining stress on guard. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. ' [ridgeiine ms] 05521 - 1 HANDRAIL AND RAILINGS 05521 - 1 1 ~ 1 SUBMITTALS ' General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 ' Specification Sections. Product data for mechanically connected handrails and railing systems, each kind of fitting, grout, anchoring ' cement, and paint products. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of handrails and railing systems including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. ' QUALITY ASSURANCE ' Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain handrails and railing systems of each type and material from a single manufacturer. '' STORAGE Store handrails and railing systems inside awell-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and masonry and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity. PROJECT CONDITIONS ~ II Field Measurements: Where handrails and railing systems are indicated to fit to other construction, check I' actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid , delaying the Work. it Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabricating handrails and railing systems without field measurements. Coordinate other construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. '' l SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Sequence and coordinate installation of wall handrails as follows: ~' Mount handrails only on completed walls. Do not support handrails temporarily by any means not satisfying structural performance requirements. ~ ;' i Mount handrails on plaster orgypsum board assemblies only where reinforced to receive anchors and where the location of concealed reinforcements has been clearly marked for benefit of Installer. , ~ [ridgeline ms] 05521 - 2 HANDRAIL AND RAILINGS ~' I' ~I 05521 - 2 r PART2-PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide handrails and railing systems by one of the following or approved: Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: r Wagner: R & B Wagner, Inc. METALS General: Provide metals free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the finished unit. Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks,- stains, discolorations, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. Steel: Provide steel in the form indicated, complying with the following requirements: Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; finish, type, and weight class as follows: Black finish, unless otherwise indicated for all interior rails. Galvanized finish for:exterior installations and where indicated. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. r WELDING MATERIALS. FASTENERS. AND.ANCHORS Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of the type, grade, and class required to produce connections that are suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loadings. For steel railings and fittings, use plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Use fasteners of same basic metal as the fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and their attachment to other work, except where otherwise indicated. 53 'I 54 55 56 'I 57 PAINT Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer, selected forgood resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibilitywith finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation forfield-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure, complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664. [ridgeline ms) 05521 - 3 HANDRAIL'AND RAILINGS 05521 - 3 Shoo Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer formulated for priming zinc-coated steel and -- compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, complying with SSPC-Paint 5. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry ' film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, complying with DOD-P-21035 orSSPC-Paint 20. GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout ' complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. FABRICATION General: Fabricate handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of hollow members, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than those required to support structural loads. Handrail Pipe: 1-1/4 inches nominal (1.660 inches) O.D. Schedule 40. Assemble handrails and railing systems in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Form changes in direction of members as follows: By insertion of prefabricated fittings. By bending. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross-section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking; or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe. Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railing systems for connection of members by welding. For connections made during fabrication, weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At tee and cross intersections, cope ends of intersecting members to fit contour of pipe to which end is joined, and weld all around. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. Brackets Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide manufacturer's standard wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect handrail.and railing system members to otherconstruction. . Handrail Brackets and Anchors: Cast metal of the same material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. [ridgeline msj 05521 - 4 HANDRAIL AND RAILINGS ~ 05521 - 4 '' 1 For all wall mounted handrails use malleable iron cast brackets with handrail bracket filler as 2 manufactured by H & B Wagner, Inc. or approved. For handrail'bracket (Model No. 1765) 3 provide a hole in center of 2-3/4"dia. flange for lagscrew anchor. Distance from face of wall 4 to centerline of handrail shall be 2-1/2" .For handrail bracket filler (Style F, Part No. 3545 B) 5 .provide 1-5/8 x 5/8 high with 3/8 dia. hole in center. 6 ' 7 Fillers: Provide steel sheet or plate fillers, of thickness and size indicated or required to 8 support structural loads of handrails, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through 9 _ wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses to produce 10 adequate bearing to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing substrate. 11 12 Pipe Sleeves: Provide Schedule 40 galvanized pipe sleeves to Section 03300 to be cast into concrete 13 for handrail/guardrail post anchorage. Interior sleeve diameter to be 3/4" larger than 14 handrail/guardrail pipe outside diameter. Length of 6 inches minimum or as shown on drawings. 15 Provide welded plug in bottom. 16 17 Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. ' 18 19 Provide wall returns at ends. of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. 20 21 . 22 FINISHES. GENERAL 23 ' 24 25 ~ Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. 26 27 Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they 28 are within one half of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not 29 acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of 30 approved samples and they are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. ' 31 32 Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of handrails and 33 railing systems. 34 35 ' 36 STEEL FINISHES 37 38 Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc-coating by the hot-dip process compliance 39 with the following requirements: 40 41 ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 42 ' ,' 43 ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel products made of 44 uncoated rolled, pressed, and forges shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch thick and heavier. 45 . 46 For nongalvanized steel handrails and railing svstems, provide nongalvanized ferrous metal fittings, brackets, 47 fasteners, and sleeves. 48 49 Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum 50 requirements indicated .below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure 51 conditions of installed railings: 52 ' 53 Iriteriors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3 "Wheel-abrade and Prime Cleaning." ; 54 ' 55 ; ', [ridgeline ms] 05521 - 5 HANDRAIL AND RAILINGS 05521 - 5 Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of handrails and railing components, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA 1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1"for shop painting. Stripe paint all edges, corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 -EXECUTION PREPARATION ' Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installing anchorages, such as anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete as ' masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing handrails and railing systems. Set hahdrails and railing systems accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established tines and levels and free from rack. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrails and railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 12 feet. Align rails so that variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance . of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. 1~ At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing, and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. Adjust handrails and railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated but not less than that required by design loadings. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing handrails and railing systems and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. RAILING CONNECTIONS Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components by welding. , Cope or butt components to provide 100 percent contact, or use fittings designed for this purpose. [ridgeline ms] 05521 - 6 HANDRAIL AND RAILINGS 05521 - 6 1 ANCHORING POSTS Anchor posts in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, solidly fill annular space between post and sleeve with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions. Leave anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring material, and leave 1/8-inch (3-mm) buildup, sloped away from post. ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface. . Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shield and either concealed hanger bolt or exposed lag bolt, as applicable. For wood stud partitions, use, lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to accurately locate backing members. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same primer material. For Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780. PROTECTION Protect finishes of handrails and railing systems from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION 05521 [ridgeline ms] 05521 - 7 HANDRAIL AND RAILINGS 05521- 7 t ~, 2 4 5 6 ' 8 9 10 ,' 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 '' 25 26 27 1 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 ~' 36 37 38 '~ 39 40 41 42 ,~ 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Framing with dimension lumber. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. Wood Hailers, blocking and sleepers. Sheathing. Subflooring. Caulking and sealant to limit infiltration. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 6 Section "Finish Caroentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for sealant materials and application. DEFINITIONS Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise specified. Exposed Framing: Dimension lumber not concealed by other construction and indicated to receive a stained or natural finish. SUBMITTALS General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product Data for the following products: Underlayment. Air-infiltration barriers. Metal framing anchors. [ridgeline ms] 06100 -.1 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1 Material certificates for dimension lumberspecified to complywith minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated materials: For each type ofpreservative-treated wood product, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. For waterborne-treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site. Material test reports from a qualified independenttesting agency indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood products with requirements indicated. Warran of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment. Research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence the following products' compliance with building code in effect for Project. Air-infiltration barriers. Metal framing anchors. DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. PART2-PRODUCTS LUMBER, GENERAL Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: WCLIB -West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. WWPA -Western Wood Products Association. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. [ridgeline ms] 06100 - 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2 u 1 For exposed, lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, or omit 2 grade stamps and provide grade-compliance certificates issued by inspection agency. 3 4 Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content 5 specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 6 7 Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 8 9 Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal ~ 10 (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 13 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS '. 14 15 General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated, comply 16 with applicable requiremerits of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with 17 .the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1; 18 . 19 Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic. For exposed items indicated to receive stained finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 Ib/cu. ft. (4.0 kg/cu. m). After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: ' All wood members exposed to view requiring a preservative treatment shall receive anon-incised pressure treatment to refusal. 31 Wood cants, Hailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in 32 connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 33 . 34 Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with 35 masonry or concrete. 36 37 Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. ' 38 39 Pressure treat wood members in contact with ground or freshwater with waterborne preservatives to a 40 minimum retention of 0.40 Ib/cu. ft. (6.4 kg/cu. m). Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. DIMENSION LUMBER General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the ALSC National Grading Rule (NGR) provisions of the inspection agency indicated. 52 For light framing (2 to 4 inches thick, 2 to 4 inches wide) provide the following grade and species: 53 54 "Standard" grade [ridgeline ms] 06100 - 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3 For structural light framing (2 to 4 inches thick, 2 to 4 inches wide), provide the following grade and species: See Structural Notes For structural framing (2 to 4 inches thick, 5 inches and wider), provide the following grade and species: See Structural Notes For exposed framing lumber provide material complying with the following requirements: Definition: Exposed framing refers to dimension lumber that is not concealed by other construction and is indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, i.e. exposed backing for fascia and rake boards. Gradin :Material hand-selected at factory from lumber of species and grade indicated below that complies with "Appearance" grade requirements of ALSC National Grading Rule; issue inspection certificate of inspection agency for selected material. For exposed decking, 3 x 6 Hem-Fir, Select Structural Grade per WCLIB Std. Grading Rules No. 17, Pg. 77, Par. 124-a. Run thru tongue and groove decking pattern. End matched. For miscellaneous wood trim not included as standing or running trim use Douglas Fir Industrial Clear "C Industrial" MG per WCLIB No. 17, Pg. 111, Par. 151-c. MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, Hailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NGRs of any species. For board-size lumber, provide No. 3 Common grade per NELMA, NLGA, or WWPA; No. 2 grade per SPIB; or Standard grade per NLGA, WCLIB or WWPA of any species. BLOCKING AND BACKING FOR WALL-MOUNTED AND RECESSED ITEMS Provide nominal 2-inch thickness of same material as studs, placed and nailed as required for nailing, bolting wall-mounted and recessed items, including for wall-mounted items noted as "N.I.C." on the Drawings. The following is a list of probable items requiring solid blocking. Please note that this list is not intended as a total inclusive list of all possible items and does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish all required blocking. Handrails/Guardrails Acoustic Wall Panels Toilet Partitions & Screens Metal Lockers Wire Mesh Partitions Operable Partitions. Toilet Accessories Basketball Backstops Casework [ridgeline ms] 06100 - 4 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 4 1 Shelf Standards 2 ~ Horizontal Blinds 3 Telescopic Bleachers 4 Markerboards/Tackboards 5 Wall Mounted Signs ^ 8 WOOD-BASED STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS, GENERAL 9 10 Structural-Use Panel Standards: Shall be plywood or Oriented Strand Board. Shall comply with PS 1 "U.S. 11 Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood panels and, for products not 12 manufactured under PS1 provisions, with APA-The Engineered Wood Association "Performance Standard 13 and Policies for Structural Use Panels," Form No. E445. 14 15 Trademark: Furnish construction panels that are each factory- marked with APA trademark evidencing 16 compliance with grade requirements. '~ 19 CONCEALED, PERFORMANCE-RATED STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS 20 21 General: Where structural use panels are indicated for the following concealed types of applications, provide 22 APA Performance-Rated Panels of Exposure Durability Classification and Span Rating per Structural Notes 23 on Drawings. • 24 ~ ! 25 Subflooring: (Plywood Only) Wall Sheathing: (Plywood or OSB) Roof Sheathing: (Plywood Only) 32 WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER 33 34 Building Wrap: 35 ~' 36 Polyethylene sheet, 0.0061 inch thick, formed by spinning continuous strands of fine high density 37 polyethylehe interconnected fibers and bonding them together by heat and pressure; with a moisture 38 vapor transmission rate of 400 grams/sq. meter/24 hrs. per ASTM E 96, procedure B; flame spread 39 and smoke developed ratings of 5 and 10 per ASTM E 84. 40 41 Woven polyolefin sheet, 01005 inch thick, with a moisture vapor transmission rate of 70 grams/sq. 42 meter/24 hours per ASTM'E 96, Procedure A and a flame spread not exceeding 25 per ASTM E 84. 43 44 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved: 45 ~ 46 "Tyvek Housewrag," Fibers Department, Du Pont Company. 47 48 "R-Wrap," Simplex Products Division, Anthony Industries, Inc. 49 t ~ 50 Door and Window Penetration Flashing: . 51 52 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved: 53 54 Lek Flex Wrap: Is made from a synthetic rubber adhesive and a laminate of polyethylene 55 film, elastic fiber, synthetic rubber adhesive, polyurethane adhesive, and a top sheet of flash t 56 spunbonded high density polyethylene fibers. 57 [ridgeline ms] 06100 - 5 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 5 ~' - _ Vycor Plus: As manufactured by Grace Construction Products provide Vycor Plus, a self- adhered flashing composed of two waterproofing materials -rubberized asphalt and cross- laminafed polyethylene. FASTENERS General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact; or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with ahot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless steel: Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. Lag Bolts: ASME 618.2.1. (ASME 618.2.3.8M) Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. METAL FRAMING ANCHORS General: Provide galvanized steel framing anchors of structural capacity, type, and size indicated and as follows: Research or Evaluation Reports: Provide products for which model code research or evaluation reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidence compliance of metal framing anchors for application indicated with building code in effect for Project. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined. from 'empirical data or by rational engineering analysis, and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60 (ASTM A 653M, 2180) coating designation; structural, commercial, orlock-forming quality, as standard with manufacturerfor type of anchor indicated. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation coritaining 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbonate (IPBC) as its active ingredient. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION. GENERAL Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. [ridgeiine ms] 06100 - 6 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 6 I 1 .Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. 2 3 Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of ' ~' 4 furring, Hailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. 5 6 Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. 7 8 Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with 9 the following: 11 CABO NER-272 for power-driven staples, P-nails, and allied fasteners. 12 13 Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 14 15 "Table 23-II-B-1 -Nailing Schedule" of the Uniform Building Code. 16 17 Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of 18 size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish 19 materials. Make tight connections. between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as . 20 required. 21 22 Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground 23 contact, or in area of high relative humidity. 24 25 Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler. ~a WOOD NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS Install wood Hailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. 34 Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise 35 indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonrywork. Where possible, anchorto formwork before i 36 concrete placement. 39 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING . 40 41 General: Arrange studs so that wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow 42 face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm 43 actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs; except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing 44 partitions. Nail or anchor plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated. 45 46 Construct corners and intersections with 3 or more studs. Provide miscellaneous blocking and framing as 47 shown and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs. 52 For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs with headers not less than 4-inch nominal 53 (89-mm actual) depth for openings 36 inches (900 mm) and less in width, and not less than 6-inch 54 .nominal (140-mm actual) depth for wider openings. 55 [ridgeline ms) 06100 - 7 ~ ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 7 1 For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 72 inches (1800 mm) and less in 2 width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth shown or, if not shown, as 3 recommended by AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction." 4 5 For all mechanical openings within framed walls, the General Contractor shall frame in such openings and 6 shall coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor to determine all sizes and locations. `' 7 8 Fire Blocking: Provide from materials and thickness, as required in Chapter 7 of the Uniform Building Code, 9 members of same width as wall or partition at the following locations: 10 11 In concealed spaces of stud walls and partitions, including furred spaces, at the ceiling and floor 12 levels and at 10-foot intervals both vertical and horizontal. See also Section 803, Item 1 of Uniform 13 Building Code. 14 15 At all interconnections between concealed vertical and horizontal spaces such as occur at soffits, 16 drop ceilings and cove ceilings. 17 18 In concealed spaces between stair stringers at the top and bottom of the run and between studs along 19 and in line with the run of stairs if the walls under the stairs are unfinished. 20 21 In openings around vents, pipes, ducts, chimneys, fireplaces and similar openings which afford a 22 passage for fire at ceiling and floor levels, with noncombustible materials. 23 24 At openings between attic spaces and chimney chases for factory-built chimneys. 25 26 27 STAIR FRAMING 28 29 Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, to 30 ~ comply with the following requirements: 31 32 Stringer Size: 2-by-12-inch nominal- (38-by-286-mm actual-) size minimum. 33 34 ~ Notching: Notch stringers to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at least 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) 35 of effective depth. 36 37 Stringer Spacing: At least 3 stringers for each 36-inch (914-mm) clear width of stair. 38 39 Provide stairframinq that does not exceed the following variations between treads and riserswithin each flight: 40 41 Adjacent Treads and Risers: 3/16 inch (4.7 mm). 42 43 Between Largest and Smallest Treads and Risers: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 44 45 46 WOOD STRIPPING 47 48 In locations where ceilirgs or soffits are to receive a finish material (i.e. GWB, plywood, etc.) applied directly 49 to underside of the framing system, and such framing spacing is greater than 16" o.c., apply 2x stripping at 50 16" o.c. maximum as indicated or as required to support applied finish materials without visible sagging. Also 51 apply solid blocking at all opening, i.e. vents, access panels, lights, etc. 52 53 54 ATTIC DRAFT STOP WALLS 55 56 At contractor's option provide either'/2' gypsum board or 3/8"min. plywood panel with Exposure 1, Grade "C- 57 D"and exterior glue, or 3/8" Type 2-M particleboard, overwood stud framing at 16 in. o.c. Nail tight to framing [ridgeline ms] 06100 - 8 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 8 ~, 2 t 4 5 ' 6 8 9 10 ', 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 ': 18 19 20 ' 21 ' 22 23 ' 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 ' 40 41 42 i 43 ' 44 45 i 46 47 48 49 50 ' 51 52 53 54' 55 members, tight around pipes, ducts, etc. Doors shall be fabricated from the same wood panel materials as specified above for either the GWB or wood panel wall system. Doors to be fitted with spring hinges and automatic latch. Latch shall be operable from each side of door. Provide two hinges for doors up to 48" high and three hinges for all doors over 48" high.. Hardware shall be of adequate size and operate properly to completely close door and latch into closed position: INSTALLATION OF STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS General: Comply with applicable .recommendations contained in APA Form. No. E30, "APA DesignlConstruction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: Subflooring: Nail to framing. Sheathing: Nail to framing. WEATHER-RESISTIVE BARRIER Cover sheathing with building wrap as follows: APgIV to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. APpIV to cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch (100-mm) overlap. Door and Window Penetration Flashing: AppIV as detailed on drawings and as recommended by flashing manufacturer. CAULKING AND SEALING The following openings in the building shall be caulked or otherwise sealed to limit infiltration: Around door and window casings and rough openings. Between exterior wall soleplates and structural floor. At openings for plumbing, electricity, gas lines and ductwork in exterior walls, floor and ceiling. Where walls and ceiling meet exposed beams and masonry facing. Around interior attic access panels. At the mudsill and in addition to normal sill sealer in conditioned basements. At all other openings in exterior building envelope. See Section 07900 for the.appropriate sealers [ridgeline ms] 06100 - 9 ~ ~. ROUGH'CARPENFRY 06100 - 9 ~: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION General: The Owner will employ a testing agency to preform tests and observations and to submit reports as required per Section 01400 -Quality Control Services. Observation for quality control will include the following: Nailing of plywood diaphragms: Periodic observations. Nailing of plywood shear walls: Periodic observations. END OF SECTION 06100 [ridgeline ms] 06100 - 10 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 10 SECTION 06151-PREFABRICATED WOOD/METAL TRUSSES ~. 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 3 '; 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY This work includes the complete furnishing and installation of all Trus Joistjoists as shown on the Structural Drawings; herein specified and necessary to complete the work. DEFINITIONS ,~ 18 Prefabricated open web trusses include planar structural units consisting of tubular steel webs, true pin 19 connections and structural wood chords. 20 21 22 SUBMITTALS 23 24 Product Data: Submit fabricator's technical data covering lumber, steel web members, hardware, fabrication ' 25 process, treatment (if any), handling and erection. 26 27 Shog Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing species, sizes and stress grades of lumber to be used; pitch, ' 28 span, camber, configuration and spacing for each type of truss required; steel web members showing size, 29 configuration, location and minimum yield strengths; and bearing and anchorage details. 30 ' 31 32 . To the extent engineering design considerations are indicated as fabricator's responsibility, submit design analysis and test reports indicating loading section modules assumed allow bl t 33 , , a e s ress, stress diagrams and calculations, and similar information needed for analysis and to ensure that 34 trusses comply with requirements. 35 ' 36 Shop drawings will be signed and stamped by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the 37 jurisdiction where trusses will be installed. ^ 39 Provide Certificate of Conformance from anindependenttestinglaboratoryoralicensedprofessionalengineer ^ 40 certifying that they have inspected the finished trusses and that all trusses are constructed in conformance 41 with the truss design drawings. ' 42 43 44 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' 45 46 Design ~ Manufacturer: Trusses shall be designed by manufacturer to support all superimposed dead and 47 live loads indicated, with design approved and certified by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the 48 jurisdiction where trusses will be installed. ' 49 50 Materials shall comply with NES Report No. NER-148 or ICBO ES Report No. PFC-4354. 51 52 Fabricator's Qualifications: Provide trusses by a firm which has a record of successfully fabricating trusses 53 similar to type indicated and practices a quality control program and which involves inspection by an 54 independent inspection and testing agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. (ridgeline msl 06151 - 1 ~ PREFABRICATED WOOD/METAL TRUSSES 06151.- 1 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING Handle and store trusses with care, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to avoid damage from bending, overturning or other cause for which truss is not designed to resist or endure. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying work of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. PROJECT CLOSEOUT Warranty: The manufacturer warrants its trusses to be free from manufacturing errors or defects in workmanship and materials. These products, correctly installed and used, shall be guaranteed to preform to their specifications for the normal and expected life of the structure. PART2-PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following or approved: Trus Joist Corporation FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES Provide size, type, material and finish indicated for nails, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and other anchoring devices. FABRICATION Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated using jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with close fitting joints. Position members to produce design camber indicated. Connect truss members by means of tubular steel webs accurately located and securely fastened to wood members by means indicated or approved. PART 3 -EXECUTION . INSTALLATION General: Erect and brace trusses to comply with recommendations of manufacturer. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs vertical (plumb) and parallel to each other, located accurately at design spacings indicated. Hoist units in place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, applied at designated lift points as recommended by fabricator, exercising care not to damage truss members orjoints by out-of-plane bending or other causes. [ridgeline ms] 06151 - 2 ~ PREFABRICATED WOOD/METAL TRUSSES 06151 - 2 ,.' i 'I 1 2 3 '; 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Provide temporary bracing as required to maintain trusses plumb, parallel and in location indicated, until permanent bracing is installed. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and details indicated. Install permanent bracing and related components to enable trusses to maintain design spacing, withstand live and dead loads including lateral loads, and to comply with other indicated requirements. Do not cut or remove truss members. - END OF SECTION 06151 ' [ridgeline ms]. 06151 - 3 PREFABRICATED WOOD/METAL TRUSSES 06151 - 3 ~~ SECTION 06170 -STRUCTURAL GLUED LAMINATED UNITS PART 1 -GENERAL " - 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, iricluding,General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 ' 7 Specification sections, apply to this section. 8 9 10 SUMMARY 11 12 Glued laminated (glu-lam) timber is defined to include wood members fabricated from 1 inch or Z inch nominal _ 13 - thickness lumber, glued face-to-face to a depth of four or more laminations. ' Provide ,connectors, anchors, and accessories necessary to interconnect and secure glu-lam members to building structure, and their installation. The types of structural glued laminated units specified in this section include: Straight beams. 23 SUBMITTALS 24 1 25 Product data including specifications and installation instructions covering lumber, adhesives, fabrication 26 process, preservative treatment, accessories and protection. 27 28 Submit certification indicating glued laminated timbers comply with requirements of ANSI/AITC ' 29 A190.1. 30 31 Submit certification by treating plant that required treatments. comply with specified standards. 32 33 Submit necessary limitations on heating, ventilation and air conditioning in buildings, in order to avoid 34 damage or deterioration of glu-lam work. ~'35 1 36 Shop Drawings showing full dimensions of each member and layout ofentire-structural system. Show large 37 scale details ofconnectioris, connectors and otheraccessories. Indicate species and laminating combination,. 38 adhesive type, and other variables in required work. 39 40 . 41 QUALITY ASSURANCE 42 - 43 Standards: Comply with ANSI/AITC A 190.1 "Structural Glued Laminated Timber". 44 45 Manufacturer Qualification: Provide factory-glued structural units, produced by an AITC-licensed firm or an 46 AWS-licensed firm which is qualified to apply the AITC "Quality Inspected" mark or the APA-EWS trademark. 47 48 Each piece of glued laminated structural uriits shall have either the AITC Quality Inspected mark or the APA 49 EWS Inspected mark. ~ ' S0 51 Place AITC or APA EWS mark on timber surfaces which will not be exposed in completed work. 52 S3 Installer: Firm which has demonstrated competence specializing in installation of glued laminated timber for 54 at least 5 years. . [ridgeiine ms] 06170 - 1 STRUCTURAL GLUED LAMINATED UNITS 06170 - 1 Design by Manufacturer: Where portions of final design for glued laminated timber members are indicated as manufacturer's responsibility (any element of design consideration), comply with applicable provisions of ' AITC 117 - "DESIGN, Standard Specifications for Structural Glued Laminated Timber of Softwood Species". DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Keep glued laminated structural units drV during delivery, storage, handling, and erection, by maintaining factory-applied protective covering in weathertight and light-proof condition, or by applying otherweathertight ~' protection. Maintain protective covering until building enclosure is completed to extent necessary for protection of interior glu-lam work, and until final finishing of exterior work is ready to proceed. Do not store glu-lam units in areas of either excessively high or excessively low relative humidity; comply with manufacturer's instructions. Time deliveN and installation of glu-lams to avoid extended on-site storage, and to avoid delaying other trades whose work must follow erection of glu-lams. If laminated units are to be stored before erection, place individual units or bundle wrapped units on blocks ;, well off ground with individual members separated for air circulation. Leave wrappings intact, but slit or puncture lower side to permit drainage of water which may accumulate. PART2-PRODUCTS STRUCTURAL GLUED LAMINATED UNITS Lumber: Complywith ANSI/AITC A190.1 and applicable lumber association standards cited therein forgrades required to achieve glu-lam requirements for design values, appearance, fabrication limitations and species (if any). . Stress Values for Beams: Provide glued laminated members sized as shown on drawings with laminating combination 24 F-V4 or 24 F-V8. Douglas Fir. Lumber Species: Douglas Fir (Coastal region). Adhesive: ANSI/AITC A190.1, "wet-use" type. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard transparent, colorless wood sealer, effective in retarding transmission of moisture at cross- grain cuts. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard translucent penetrating wood sealer, which will not interfere with application of wood stain and transparent finish, or paint finish, as indicated. Refer to Division 9 sections for required field-applied finishes. FABRICATION General: Comply with ANSI/AITC A190.1 in providing units indicated; where dimensions are not completely documented, provide manufacturer's standard sizes and shapes required to fulfill indicated performances. Shop-fabricate for connections and connecting hardware to greatest extent feasible, including drilling of bolt holes. Appearance Grade: Provide Architectural Grade units, complying with AITC 110 for exposed members: [ridgeline ms] 06170 - 2 STRUCTURAL GLUED LAMINATED UNITS 06170 - 2 1 A_ ppearance Grade: Provide Industrial Grade units, complying with AITC 110 for units not exposed to view. 2 3 Camber: The required camber for fabrication of each member is shown on drawings, and may be either 4 circular or parabolic, at manufacturer's option. 5 . 6 End-Cut Sealing: Immediately after end-cutting each member to final length,-and after wood treatment (if 7 any), apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces, keeping surfaces 8 "flood-coated" for not less than 10 minutes. 9 10 Seal Coat: After fabrication and sanding of each unit, and end- coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation coat 11 of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit, except for treated wood where treatment has included a water 12 repellent. PART 3 -EXECUTION ~. INSTALLATION General: Install miscellaneous steel connectors, anchors, and accessories. Plan and execute erection procedures so that close fit and neat appearance ofjoints and structure as a whole will not be impaired. When hoisting members into place, use padded or non-marring slings, and protect corners with wood blocking. Adequately brace members as they are placed to maintain safe position until full stability is provided. Cutting: Avoid cutting glu-lam members during erection, to greatest extent possible. Except for fastener drilling and other minor cutting, coat cuts with end sealer as specified for "Fabrication". Where treated members must be cut during erection, apply a heavy brush .coat of the same preservative treatment, complying with AWPA Standard M4. Handle and temporarily support members to prevent visible surface damage. Do not remove wrapping on individually wrapped members until it will serve no useful purpose, including protection from weather, soiling and damage from work of other trades. Coordinate removal of wrapping with finishing work specified in Division 9. Retain wrapping wherever it can serve as a painting shield. O, 46 8 a '~ Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completion of erection and removal of wrappings, or replace damaged members as directed where damage is beyond acceptable repair. END OF SECTION 06170 [ridgeiine ms] 06170 - 3 . STRUCTURAL GLUED LAMINATED UNITS 06170 - 3 n SECTION 06190 -FABRICATED WOOD JOISTS PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. SCOPE This work includes the complete furnishing and installation of all Trus Joist joists as shown on the Structural Drawings, herein specified and necessary to complete the work. CODE APPROVALS These products shall be designed and manufactured to the standards set forth in the NER-200 report. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Rough carpentry :.Glue-laminated members t r QUALITY~ASSURANCE Design:. The Trus Joist Corporation products shall be. custom designed to fit the dimensions and loads indicated on the plans or engineer's calculations and any additional loads.that may be required. all designs shall be in accordance with .allowable values and section properties assigned and approved by the Building Code. Verification of design of the Trus Joist joist by complete calculations is to be available upon request. Manufacturer's registered Structural Engineer shall supervise and be responsible for joist design. Lumber grading: In conformance with I.C.B.O. accepted manufacturer's mechanical stress rating system. Fabricating plant: Approved by I.C.B.O. certified testing agency. SUBMITTALS. General: Do not proceed with fabrication until Shop Drawings and Design Analysis have been reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. Shop drawings: Shop drawings showing layout and detail necessary for determining fit and placement in the building may be provided by the manufacturer. PERFORMANCE Products shall be proven by testing as demonstrated either by I.C.B.O. and NER acceptance. [ridgeline mss 06190 - 1 FABRICATED WOOD JOISTS 06190 - 1 '' FIRE RATINGS/SOUND RATINGS In accordance with tested assemblies as detailed in NER-200. ' CAMBER ' Trus Joist joists may be cambered to a 2250' radius in accordance with the Trus Joist camber option. C ' PROJECT LOSEOUT Warran The manufacturer agrees to repair or replace any joists that may prove to be defective in its ' workmanship or material or fail to carry the loads specified by the purchaser for the normal and expected life of the building. PART2-PRODUCTS ' MATERIALS ' Flanges: MICRO=LAM®Laminated Veneer Lumber, manufactured according to the manufacturing standards of Trus Joist Corporation as specified in Report No. NER 126. Moisture content shall be between 7 and 16 percent. Webs: Web material is either plywood complying with PS 1-83 or Sturdiwood oriented strand board manufactured by Weyerhaeuser Canada, Edmonton, Alberta, Canada, or other recognized equal which complies with APA and Trus Joist Corporation applicable standards as substantiated by performance verification testing data and verified by an independent recognized testing agency. The Sturdiwood panels are produced under a quality control program with inspections by the American Plywood Association (NER- 108). Blocking and Stiffeners: Joist manufacturer shall furnish all solid blocking and fire blocking from same material and cross section as joists. Include also web stiffeners and any other blocking or miscellaneous materials as necessary for a complete engineered assembly. FABRICATION The Trus Joist joists shall be manufactured in a plant approved for fabrication by the building code and under the supervision of a third party inspection agency. Identification: Each of the joists shall be identified by a stamp indicating the joist type, NER report number, manufacturer's name, plant number, and PFS Corporation logo (NER-251). SUBSTITUTE MANUFACTURERS Other truss manufacturers' may submit for approval. All detailing, location plans and calculations for the ~ alternate are to be provided upon request. Substitution requests will be reviewed by the architect and engineer for structural performance, possible conflicts with related trades, and compatibility with the overall ;' building requirements and building code. Alternate products will only be allowed if written approval and acceptance is obtained by both architect and owner at least 10 days prior to the bid date: ;' [ridgeline ms] 06190 - 2 FABRICATED WOOD JOISTS OB190 - 2 I n 1 PART 3 -EXECUTION 2 ~ 3 . 4 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION 5 6 The Trus Joist joist, if stored prior to erection, shall be stored in a vertical position and protected from the 1 7 weather. They shall be handled with care so they are not damaged. The Truss Joist joists are to be erected 8 and installed in accordance with the„plans, any Truss Joist Corporation drawings and installation suggestions. 9 Temporary construction loads which cause stresses beyond design limits are not permitted. Erection bracing, 10 in addition to that specified is to be provided to keep the Truss Joistjoists straight and plumb as required and ' 11 to assure ,adequate lateral support for the individual Truss Joist joists and the entire system, until the 12 sheathing material has been applied. ,: 13 14 15 VENTILATION 16 17 In areas indicated on roof framing plans, set joists with knock-out holes to top of joists with knock-outs 18 removed for cross ventilation. 19 ' 20 21 INSPECTION 22 23 The Contractor shall give notification prior to enclosing the Truss Joist joists to provide" opportunity for 24 inspection of the installation. ' 25 26 ';~ 27 END OF SECTION 06190 '. (ridge~ine ms] 06190 - 3 FABRICATED WOOD JOISTS 06190 - 3 ', _ SECTION 06132 -PREFABRICATED. WOOD TRUSSES 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 , 6 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions aril Division-1 7 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 8 10 SUMMARY 1 11. 12 Extent and configuration of prefabricated wood trusses is indicated on drawings. 13 14 Wipes of prefabricated wood trusses include: 15 . 16 See Drawings. 17 18 19 DEFINITIONS 20 21 Prefabricated wood trusses include~planar structural units consisting of metal plate connected members which 22 are fabricated from dimension lumber and which have been cut and assembled prior to delivery to the project 23 site. 24 25 26 SUBMITTALS 27 ~ , 28 Product Data: Submitfabricator'stechnicaI data covering lumber, metal plates, hardware, fabrication process, 29 treatment (if any), handling and erection. 30 31 32 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing species, sizes and stress grades of lumber to be used; pitch, span, camber, configuration and spacing for each type of truss required; type, size, .material, finish, design 33 values, location of metal connector plates; and bearing and anchorage details. 34 35 To the extent engineering design considerations are indicated as fabricator's responsibility, submit 36 design analysis and test reports indicating loading, section modulus, assumed allowable stress, 37 stress diagrams and calculations, and similar information needed for analysis and to ensure that 38 trusses comply with requirements. 39 40 Shop drawings will be signed and stamped by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the 41 jurisdiction where trusses will be installed. 42 43 Provide Certificate ofConformance from an independenttesting laboratoryora licensed professional.engineer 44 certifying that they have inspected the finished trusses and that all trusses are constructed in conformance ,_ 45: with the truss design drawings. QUALITY ASSURANCE TPI Standards: Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations .of the following Truss Plate Institute (TPI) publications: 53 "Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses". 54 [ridgeline ms] 06192 - 1 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES ~ 06192 - 1 Desi n ~ Manufacturer: Trusses shall be designed by Connector- plate manufacturer to support all superimposed dead and live loads indicated, with design approved and certified by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the jurisdiction where trusses will be installed. Fabricator's Qualifications: Provide trusses by a firm which has a record of successfully fabricating trusses similar to type indicated and which complies with the following requirements for quality control: Fabricator participates in TPI "Quality Assurahce Inspection Program" as a licensee authorized to apply TPI marks to trusses. Sin {e Source Responsibility for Connector Plates: manufacturer. Provide metal connector plates from a single DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING Handle and store trusses with care, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TPI recommendations to avoid damage from bending, overturning or other cause for which truss is not designed to resist or endure. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying work of other trades whose wo"rk must follow erection of trusses. PART2-PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering metal connector plates which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. Clary Corporation. Gang Nail Systems, Inc. Hydro-Air Engineering, Inc. Inter-Lock Steel Co., Inc. Link-Wood Construction Systems. Lumbermate Company. Robbins Manufacturing Co. The Panel-Clip Company. Tee-Lok Corp. Truss Connectors of America. Truswal Systems Corp. FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES Provide size, type, material and finish indicated for nails, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and other anchoring devices. FABRICATION Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles and sizes to produce close fitting joints with wood-to-wood bearing in assembled units. [ridgeline ms] 06192 - 2 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06192 - 2 1 Fabricate metal connector Ip ates to size, configuration, thickness and anchorage details required for types 2 of joint designs indicated. 3 ' 4 Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated using jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and 5 accuracy of assembly with close fitting joints. Position members to produce design camber indicated. 6 7 Connect truss members by means of metal connector plates accurately located and securelyfastened to each 8 side of wood members by means indicated or approved. 9 10 ® 11 PART 3 -EXECUTION 14 INSTALLATION 15 16 General: Erect and brace trusses to comply with recommendations of manufacturer and the Truss Plate 17 Institute. 18 19 Erect trusses with plane of truss webs vertical (plumb) and parallel to each other, located accurately at design _ 20 spacings indicated. L n Hoist units in place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, applied at designated lift points as recommended by fabricator, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bendirig or other causes. Provide temporary bracing as required to maintain trusses plumb, parallel and in location indicated, until permanent bracing is installed. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and details indicated.. Install permanent bracin and related components to enable trusses to maintain design spacing, withstand lire and dead loads including lateral loads, and to comply with other indicated requirements. END OF SECTION 06192 Do not cut or remove truss members. ': [ridgeline ms] 06192 - 3 ,;. PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06192 - 3 {' " SECTION 06200 -FINISH :CARPENTRY 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 2 3 ' ` 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 7 , Specification sections, apply to work of this section. ~~ 8 9 10 11 SUMMARY 12 This Section includes the following; 13 14 Exterior standing and running trim. i 1' S 16 Interior standing and running trim. 17 18 Cementitious type board siding. 19 20 Cementitious soffit. ~ 21 22 Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 23 24 Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed ` 25 to view. ~ , 26 27 Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for structural wood decking and framing exposed to view. 28 . ~ 29 _Division 9 Section "Painting" for priming and back priming of finish carpentry.. ~ 1 30 ' 31 Definition: Finish carpentry includes carpentry work which is exposed to view, is non-structural, and which 32 33 is not specified as part of other sections. _. 34 " 35 SUBMITTALS ' 36 ', 37 General: Submit -each item in' this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 38 Specification Sections. . . 39 ~ 40 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each item of 41 factory-fabricated siding and paneling. 42 I 43 44 Samples: Submit the following samples for each species and cut or pattern of .finish carpentry. ' 45 Standing and Running Trim, Fascia and Rake Boards: Two foot long by full board width or molding 46 width, finished on one side and one edge. I 47 ~ 48 Sidin 2'-0" long, finished on one side and one edge. " 49 50 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings with large scale details of all required trim and all Architectural ! 51 Woodwork. 1 52 53 , ~~ 54 '' [ridgeline ms] 06200 - 1 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200- 7 QUALITY ASSURANCE Factory-mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency identification; except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill certificate that material has been inspected and graded in accordance with requirements if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact ' with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and , around stacks and under temporary coverings. Do not deliver interior finish carpentry until environmental conditions meet requirements specified for ~ installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas,- store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas: PRIMING Work of this Section shall be primed prior to installation as work of Section 09900 -Painting. Coating with specified materials and under specified conditions may be applied either on site or off site, at Contractor's option. Provide space and heat for priming and storage while prime coats are drying. Painter subcontractor shall make an adequate quantity of priming material, of applicable types, available to carpenters for priming job site cut ends and/or edges as the installation work proceeds. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels through the remainder of construction period. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installing exterior finish carpentry only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. PROJECT CLOSEOUT Warrantv: Special Proiect Warrantv for Siding: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace siding that fails in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but .are not limited to, deformation or deterioration of siding beyond normal weathering. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. Warrantv Period for Siding (Excluding Finish): 25 years after date of Final Completion. [ridgeline ms] 06200 - 2 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 2 '~ ~' 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2 3 4 MATERIAL STANDARDS 5 6 Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," for lumber and with 7 ' applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee Board . 8,. of Review. 9 ;• 10 Woodworking Standard: -Where indicated for a specific product comply with specified provision of the ' 11 following: . 12 13 Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality, Standards". 1 14 ' 15 Inspection. Agencies: Inspection -agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the 16 following: 17 '~ 18 NHLA-National Hardwood Lumber Association. 19 20 . ~ WCLIB -West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 21 '; 22 WWPA -Western Wood~.Products Association. 23 24 25. .Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked, with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and iden4ifying grading agency, grade, species, 26 moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill 27 .. ; 28 For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or-back of each piece, or ' 29 omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection . 30 agency. . . t 31 32 Glued-up Lumber Standard: Comply with PS56. . 33 34 Softwood Plywood: Comply with DOCPS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Constructionsnd Industrial Plywood ." 35 _ ' 36 Medium-Density Fiberboard (Medite FR): Product made without formaldehyde'and complying with UL 723 37 for Class 1 flame spread. ' 38 39 40 MATERIALS 41 42 General 1' 43 44 Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide dressed or worked and 45 dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured to the actual sizes as required by PS 20 or to actual sizes and 1 46 pattern as shown, unless otherwise indicated. 47 48 Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and manufacturer's 49 recommendations for moisture content offinish carpentry and relative humidity conditions existing during time 1' . 50 .. of fabrication and in installation areas. , 51 . 52 Lumber for Transparent Finish Stained or Clear ; Use pieces made of solid lumber stock.. 53 54 Lumber for Painted Finish: At Contractor's option, use pieces which are either glued-up lumber or.made of 55 solid lumber stock. 56 _ . , ' [ridgeline ms] 06200 - 3 FINISH CARPENTRY 0,6200 - 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 For exterior finish carpentry work use glued-up lumber complying with PS 56 for "wet use" and certified so by respective grading and inspecting agency for species and product indicated. Exterior Finish Carpentry: Fascia/Rake Boards: For trim in form of boards and worked products, provide lumber complying with the following requirements including those of the grading agency listed with species. Species: Western Red Cedar; WWPA or WCLIB Grade: Select Knotty KD (WCLIB No. 17, Pg. 46, Par. 111-e) Textured: One face and 2 edges smooth, other face resawn. Exposed surfaces resawn,. Standing and Runnin Trim: For trim in form of boards ahd worked products, provide lumber complying with the following requirements including those of the grading agency listed with species. Species: Western Red Cedar, WWPA or WCLIB Grade: Industrial Clears KD/MG "B and Better" (WCLIB No. 17, Pg. 104, Par. 149-b) Textured: One face and 2 edges smooth, other face resawn. (Install resawn side out.) Hardiplank "Cedarmill" Lap Siding: (Fiber-Reinforced Cement) ~ . ~ Manufacturer: James Hardie or approved . Size: 7-114" width for 6" exposure Thickness: 5/16" 2.3 lbs. per s.f. Burning Characteristics: - Flame Spread: 0 Fuel Contribution: 0 Smoke Developed: 5 Warranty: 50 Year Limited Warranty. Fiber-Reinforced Cement Hardisoffit: (Fiber-Reinforced Cement) ..Manufacturer: James Hardie or approved Thickness: 1/4" Weight: 1.9 Ibs/sq ft Size: As required per drawings Warranty: 50 Year Limited Warranty. Fence: Provide cedar material as follows. and in locations as shown on Drawings. S,~ecies: Western Red Cedar, WWPA or WCLIB [ridg'eline ms] 06200 - 4 FINISH.CARPENTRY 06200 - 4 '' 1 Grade: No. 1 Fencing (WCLIB No. 17, Pg. 51, Par. 117a) 2 3 Textured: S 1 S 4 .. 5 Hardware: Hinges -Stanley Lifespan Extra-Heavy T-Hinges #Sc 908 BP 6 Slide Action Bolt -Stanley No. SP 1271 7. 8 . Interior Finish Carpentry: 9 10 Standing and Running Trim for Transparent Finish: Manufactured to sizes and patterns (profile) shown from ' 11 selected first Grade Lumber(NHLA); complying with following grade requirements of referenced woodworking 12 .standard, for qualit of materials and manufacture. Fin er 'oints not ermi Y g ) p tted. 13 ' 14 S ecies: Eastern Hard Maple (Select. and Better) 15 16 Grade: Select and Better '. 17 18 Moisture Content: 8 - 10 19 ~20 Standing and Running Trim for Painted Finish: Any Western softwood species graded and inspected by ' 21 WWPA complying with following requirements. 22 23 Grade for Standard Sizes and Patterns: Finish Grade, KD, "C and Better" (WCLIB No. 17, Pg. 26, 24 Par. 101-c) ' 25 ; 26 MDF Wainscot: Provide industrial grade medium density fiberboard meeting an Underwriters Laboratories 27 (UL) 723 Class 1 flame spread rating test. 28 ,; 29 Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or.approved: 30 ~ 31 "Medite FR" by Medite Corp. Architectural Woodwork: ' 35 Mouldings: ' 36 37 Manufacturer: Boise Moulding and' Lumber Company, (1-208/322-6066) or approved. ' 38 39 S ecies: Any Western softwood species graded and inspected by WWPA complying with the 40 following requirements: 41 42 Grade for Standard Sizes and Patterns: Finish Grade, KD, "C and Better" (WCLIB No. 17, Pg. ' 43 26, Para. 101-C). 45 Light Valance: Moulding numbers 1002, 1098, 1468. ' 46 47 Chair Rail:. Moulding number 1314. ' 49 .Base:. Moulding number 1516. 50 51 Wood Acoustic Panel: Apply to ceiling of Entry 500 factory fabricated paneling Series Q 10 20 S as 52 manufactured by PRAGO or approved. After acoustic insulation (see Section 07200) is in place and backing ' 53 supports are painted flat black, apply panels as recommended by manufacturer's most recent instructions. 54 Distributed by Kenneth Huber at (1-206/789-9404. Color is Beech CPL. 55 ' 56 [ridgeline ms) 06200 - 5 FINISH. CARPENTRY ~ 06200 - 5 Miscellaneous Materials: Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide nails, screws and other anchoring devices of the type, size, material and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible, and complying with applicable Federal Specifications. Where finish carpentry is exposed on exterior or in areas of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with ahot-dipped zinc coating (ASTM A 153). Soffit Vents: Provide the following as manufactured by Tamlyn & Sons Building Materials, (1-800/334-1676), or approved. Soffit Louver Strips: Tamlyn Brand Snapvent #SV516. Extruded vinyl with 1/8" wall thickness. Overall width 3-1/2 inches x 12.7 sq. inches of net free ventilation per lin. foot. Color is white. Flashin Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing materials installed in finish carpentry. Horizontal Joint Flashing for Siding: Preformed and preprimed galvanized steel Z-shaped flashing. Sealants: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials required for sealing siding work. FABRICATION Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in finished work: Exterior standing and running trim wider than 5 inches (125 mm). Interior standing and running trim, except shoe mold and crown mold. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) radius Ease edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch (3-mm) radius PART 3 -EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation, for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. [ridgeline msJ 06200 - 6 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 6 1 Prime and backprime, prior to installation, as work of Division 9 -Section 09900, lumber on the exterior of the 2 building which is to be left exposed. 4 5 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 6 ' 7 Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately 8 seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 9 ~ 10 Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. -' 12 "Install finish carpentry plumb, level,. true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where 13 required for alignment: ' 14 15 Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by 16 manufacturer. 17 ~ ' 18 Anchor finish carpentry work with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required 19 for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fasteners heads are required, use 20 fine finishing nail for exposed nailings, countersunk and filled flush with colored caulking compound, ' 21 and matching final finish where transparent is indicated. 22 23 Install to tolerance of.1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) for plumb and level. Install adjoining ' 24 25 finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch (1.5- mm) maximum offset for reveal installation. 26 27 Coordinate finish carpenfry with materials and systems in or adjacent to standing and running trim 28 and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exposed surfaces of 29 trim and rails. 30 31 Finish according to specified requirements. ' 32 33 Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of finish carpentry. 34 35 ' 36 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION 37 38 Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber ' 39 available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where necessary. Staggerjoints in 40 adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting 41 joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarfjoints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs ~ 42 of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, if required. 44 Match color and grain pattern across joints. 45 ' 46 Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed. 47 48 Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or 49 warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. ,, 50 51 Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. 52 " 53 54 SIDING INSTALLATION t 56 General: Install siding to comply with manufacturer's warranty requirements. 57 [ridgeline mss 06200 - 7 . FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 7 FIBER-REINFORCED CEMENT SIDING AND SOFFITS Install Hardiplank siding and Hardipanel soffit materials as recommended by manufacturer's latest printed product literature, with the exception of the following requirements. Siding shall be installed over weather resistive barrier. All end joints in the siding and soffit panel joints shall occur at stud locations or locations of solid wood framing. All joint sizes to be 1/8" wide and caulked with material and method per manufacturer's recommendations. The siding shall be blind nailed and soffit panels shall be face nailed using hot dipped galvanized nails of size and spacing as recommended by manufacturer. Siding and soffits to be painted per Division 9 Section -Painting. Soffit nails shall be finish Waits with holes caulked to appear smooth. WAINSCOT MDF Wainscot: Panels shall be secured by nailing following the recommendations as provided on the manufacturer's latest product literature. ADJUSTING Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. CLEANING Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch upfactory-applied finishes.to restore damaged or soiled areas. PROTECTION Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure finish carpentry is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 06200 [ridgeline ms] 06200 - 8 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 8 SECTION 06240 -- PLASTIC LAMINATE '' 1 PART 1 -GENERAL . 2 3 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of'Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 7 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 8 9 10 APPLICABLE STANDARDS ' 11 - 12 .Shall conform to all requirements of NEMA.Publication LD 3-1980 and Fed. Standard LP508H. 13 14 15 SUMMARY 16 17 18 Extent of plastic laminate cladding is indicated on drawings and schedules. 19 Types of work in this section include: 20 21 Wainscot t', 22 Window Wrap (Head, Jambs & Sill) and Face Trim 23 24 ' 25 SUBMITTALS 26 27 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each product and process specified as work of this 28 section and incorporated into items of fabrication, finishing, and installation. 29 30 Quality Certification: Submit plastic laminate manufacturer's certification, stating that .plastic laminate 31 complies with quality grades and other requirements indicated. 32 33 Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit chain of plastic laminate samples of each specified manufacturer, 34 color and texture. 35 36 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of fabricated items showing locations, elevations, large scale details, 37 attachment devices and other components. 38 39 ~' 40 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 41 42 ~ 43 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS , : 44 45 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high pressure decorative laminates of one 46 of the following: ' 4T - 48 Pionite - 49 Wilsonart 50 Nevamar ,i 51 Formica 52 , 53 54 I ~` [ridgeline ms] - 06240 - 1 PLASTIC LAMINATE 06240 - 1 FABRICATION Wainscot: Provide plastic laminate wainscot of height as indicated on drawings and in locations as shown on drawings and called out in finish schedule. Plastic Laminate Manufacturer: As selected by Architect from acceptable manufacturers Thickness: 0.055" Finish: Matte Color: As selected by Architect Window Wrap (Head, Jambs and Sill) and Face Trim: Fabricate from 3/4" B-B Exterior grade Douglas Fir Plywood. Glue attach plastic laminate to plywood. Plastic Laminate Manufacturer: As selected by Architect from acceptable manufacturers. Plastic Laminate Thickness: 0.055 inches Plastic Laminate Finish:. Matte Plastic Laminate Color: As selected by Architect 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 PART 3 -EXECUTION GENERAL Care should be taken to assure that excessive moisture imbalance between the laminate and the substrate does not exist. Laminate should be stored under drier conditions than the substrate when possible. Prior to fabrication, the face, substrate and back should be conditioned in the same environment for 48 hours. Square-cut inside corners should be avoided. All inside corner cutouts should have a minimum of 1/8" radius and all edges should be routed smooth. Fabrication should be made using approved methods. Assembled pieces shall meet specifications of NAPF (National Association of Plastic Fabricators) and ANSI-A-161.2-1979 where applicable. INSTALLATION Plastic Laminate Wainscot: Secure to substrate using an adhesive and application technique recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. Adhesive to be selected by installer. Install with aluminum edge bead at top and all exposed ends. Provide a full bead of clear silicone sealant at top joint of wainscot between metal bead and wall. Lay-out vertical joints so as not to align behind wall mounted fixtures, accessories, etc. Use.sheets of maximum lengths to minimize joints. Joints less than 2'-6" apart will not be accepted. Installer will be responsible to make sure that the adhesive used does not exceed the VOC level allowed within the local controlling jurisdiction. Window Wrap (Head Jambs and Sillsl and Face Trim: Secure plastic laminate to plywood in a full bed of solvent type contact adhesive. Application of plastic laminate per adhesive manufacturer's recommendation. Use sheets of maximum lengths to minimize joints. No joints allowed in individual members which are less than 8'-0" long. END .OF SECTION 06240 [ridgeline ms] 06240 - 2 PLASTIC LAMINATE 06240 - 2 '~~ SECTION 07160 -BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ~ . . SUMMARY This Section includes the following:. Cold-applied, asphalt emulsion dampproofing. SUBMITTALS ~' 19 General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 20 Specification Sections. 21 22 Product data for each type of product'specified, including data substantiating that materials comply with 23 requirements for each dampproofing material specified. Include recommended method of application, ~ 24 recommended primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and recommended protection course. Certification by dampproofing manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). QUALITY ASSURANCE 32 Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installerwho has completed bituminous dampproofing similar 'I 33 in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service 34 performance. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from one source and by a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. - 41 PROJECT CONDITIONS 42 43 Substrate: Proceed with dampproofing only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been 44 completed, 46 Weather Limitations: Proceed with dampproofing only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will ~; 47 permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application'of dampproofing in enclosed spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has horoughly cured. [ridgeline ms] 07160 - 1 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160 - 1 ~` PART 2 -PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved: Cold-Applied, Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofinq: ChemRex, Inc.; Sonneborn Building Products Div. Euclid Chemical Co. Karnak Chemical Corporation. Koppers Industries, Inc. Meadows: W.R. Meadows, Inc. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING General: Provide products recommended by manufacturer for designated application. Odor Elimination: For interior and concealed-in-wall uses, provide type of bituminous dampproofing material warranted by manufacturer to be substantially odor free after drying for 24 hours under normal conditions. Cold-Applied, Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofinq: Asphalt-based emulsions recommended by the manufacturer for dampproofing use when applied according to the manufacturer`s instructions. Spray Grade: Emulsified asphalt, prepared with mineral-colloid emulsifying agents without fibrous reinforcement, complying with ASTM D 1227, Type III. PART 3 -EXECUTION PREPARATION Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to work; comply with recommendations of prime materials manufacturer. Install cant strips and similar accessories as shown and as recommended by prime materials manufacturer even though not shown. Protection of Other Work: Do not allow liquid and mastic compounds to enter and clog drains and conductors. Prevent spillage and migration onto other surfaces of work by masking or otherwise protecting adjoining work. [ridgeline ms] 07160 - 2 BITUMINOUS bAMPPROOFING 07160 - 2 ~ . ,~ 1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL Comply with manufacturer's recommendations except where more stringent requirements are indicated and where Project conditions require extra precautions to ensure satisfactory performance of work. Application: Apply dampproofing to the following surfaces. Exterior, below-grade surtaces of exterior concrete or masonry walls in contact with earth or other backfill. Outside surface of interior concrete walls which are enclosing interior space. Dampproof to height of adjacent earth. 14 Back side of concrete or masonry retaining walls to prevent percolating of water through the wall 15 16 Where indicated on the Drawings. 17 18 Cold-Applied Asphalt DampproofinQ: For exterior surtaces, provide emulsified asphalt dampproofing 19 materials. 21 Bituminous Cant Strips: Install 2-by-2-inch (50-by-50-mm) cant strip of bituminous grout at base of vertical 22 dampproofing where it meets.horizontal surface, 23 24 Apply vertical dampproofing down walls from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top'of footing, 25 and down a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) over outside face of footing. Extend 12 inches (300 mm) onto L~ . 26 intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when the Project is 27 completed. 28 29 30 COLD-APPLIED, ASPHALT EMULSION DAMPPROOFING 32 Spray Grade: Brush or spray apply a coat of asphalt emulsion dampproofing at a rate of 4 to 5 gal./100 sq. 31 ~ _ . 33 ft.', depending on substrate texture,. to produce a uniform, dry film thickness of not less than 15 mils. Apply 34 in 2 coats, if necessary, to obtain required thickness, allowing time for complete drying between. coats. 35 . 36 37 PROTECTION AND. CLEANING 38 ` t 39 Protect exterior, below-grade dampproofing membrane from damage until backfill is completed. Remove 40 overspray and spilled materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing. END OF SECTION 07160 [ridgeline ms] 07160 - 3 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING '.' 07160 - 3 ~, 2 ' 4 5 6 8 9 ' 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ' 17 18 19 20 ' 21 22 23 ' 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 1 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 '' S0 S1 52 SECTION 07175 - V1%ATER REPELLENTS PART1-GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract; including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Extent of surfaces to receive water repellent is indicated on drawings and by provisions of this .section. Following applications of water repellent are required: Exterior unit masonry surfaces. Cast-in-place concrete. (i.e., benches, signs) Precast concrete units. QUALITY ASSURANCE Application: A firm with not less than 3 years of successful experience in application of water repellents of types required on substrates similar to those of this project. SUBMITTALS Product Data; Submit manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and general recommendations for water repellents. Include data substantiating that materials are recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated and comply with requirements, including VOC compliance. JOB CONDITIONS Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent (except with written recommendation of manufacturer), when. ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C); when substrate surfaces have cured for less than a period of 2 months; when rain or temperatures below 40 degrees F (4 degrees C), are predicted for a period of 24 hours, or earlier than 3 days after surfaces became wet; when substrate is frozen; at surface temperature of less than 40 degrees F (4 degrees C). PROJECT CLOSEOUT Warran Upon completion of the job the owner shall receive a written 10-year warranty signed by the Manufacturer and the General Contractor. ' (ridgeline ms] 07175 - 1 WATER REPELLENTS 07175 - 1 PART2-PRODUCTS SILANE/SILOXANE SEALER Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following or approved: Note: Manufacturer's product must meet the VOC compliance requirements of the 600 grams per leader (max.). Manufacturer Brick & Pre-Cast Concrete Block (CMUI Chem-Trete Hyd rozo CONCRETE SLAB SEALER BSM-40 VOC (Silane) Clear 40 VOC (Silane) Chem-Trete P.B.-VOC (Silane) Clear 40 VOC (Silane) Water Repellent: Provide DYNASYLAN BH-N PLUS, 100% active silane treatment with oleophobic additive,. as manufactured by Sivento, or approved, and represented by Saleeco, Inc. (253/841-2849). Application: In addition to the specified curing compound, apply water repellent to concrete floor slabs scheduled for sealer coat, in Finish Schedule, a minimum of 28 days after the floors have been poured. Application shall be as recommended by repellent manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION PREPARATION Clean substrate of substances which might interfere with penetration/adhesion of water repellents. Test for moisture content, in accordance with repellent manufacturer's instructions, to ensure that surface is sufficiently dry. Coordination with Sealants: Where feasible, delay application of water repellents until installation of sealants has been completed in joints adjoining surfaces to be coated with repellent. Protect adioining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage orblow-over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and, glass where there is possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plant materials with drop cloths. Clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces immediately after spillage. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning. INSTALLATION Water Repellent: Apply a heavy saturation spray coating on surfaces indicated for treatment using low pressure spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, using airless spraying procedure unless otherwise indicated. Apply a second saturation spray coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if printed recommendations are not applicable to project conditions. END OF SECTION 07175 [ridgeiine ms] 07175 - 2 WATER REPELLENTS 07175 - 2 ;' SECTION 07200 -INSULATION 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 7 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 9 10 SUMMARY 11 12 This section includes the following: 14 Perimeter insulation (foundation wall insulation) 15 16 Batt-type building insulation 17 18 Acoustical insulation 19 20 Acoustic sound board 21 ' 22 Cavity wall insulation 23 24 Firestopping insulation 25 26 27 QUALITY ASSURANCE 28 ' 29 Fire Pertormance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials which are identical to those whose fire 30 performance characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a part, have been 31 determined by testing, per methods indicated below, by tJL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable 32 to authorities having jurisdiction. 33 34 Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. ' 35 36 Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 37 38 Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 39 40 Maximum Allowable Asbestos Content of Inorganic Insulations: Provide insulations composed of mineral 41 fibers or mineral ores which contain 0% asbestos of any type. 42 1 43 44 SUBMITTALS 1 46 .Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each type of insulation, 47 vapor retarder material, and insulation holder assembly. 48 49 Certified Test Re orts: With product data, submit copies of certified test reports showing compliance with 50 specified performance values, including r-values (aged values for plastic insulations), densities, compression 51 strengths, fire performance characteristics, perm ratings, water absorption ratings and similar properties. 52 53 Insulation Holder: Submit sample of all components of each type of insulation holder to be used on job. 1 54 [riageiine ms] 07200 - 7 INSULATION 07200 - 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING General Protection: Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation. PART2-PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following or approved: Manufacturers of Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Amoco Foam Products Co. Dow Chemical U.S.A. Minnesota Diversified Products, Inc. UC industries. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation: CertainTeed Corp. Manville Corp. United States Gypsum Manufacturers of Acoustical Insulation Blankets/Batts (Rock Wool United States Gypsum Manville Manufacturers of Polvisocvanurate Lnsulation: Celotex American Western Atlas Energy Products Rmax, Inc. Firestopoina Insulation United States Gypsum INSULATING MATERIALS General: Provide insulating materials which complywith requirements indicated for materials, compliance with referenced standards, and other characteristics. . Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications, indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths and lengths. Batt Insulation Options: The Contractor has, the option of using either the faced or unfaced fiberglass Batts-as listed below. If the unfaced Batts are used, the Contractor must apply one of the two listed vapor retarders, Type A -polyethylene or Type 6 -reinforced, depending upon whether the vapor retarder is exposed or unexposed. See the following paragraph VAPOR RETARDERS. [ridgeline ms] 07200 - 2 INSULATION ~ 07200 - 2 ~, 2 4 5 6 ' 8 9 10 t 11 12 13 14 15 - 16 ' 17: 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 1 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 i 47 48 49 50 51 . 52 53 54 55 56 '. Ceilings: The Contractor has the option of using either the faced or unfaced fiberglass batt insulation as listed. below. If the unlaced batts are used,. the Contractor must use the "Insulation Holder. Assemblies"'as listed below under AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS: . Vapor retarder required only on warm side of exterior walls and ceilings that are a part of the building envelope. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation (Foundation Wall Insulation): Rigid, cellular thermal in§utation with closed-cells and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion. process to comply with ASTM C 578 for Type !V, 1.60-Ib/cu. ft. minimum density; with 5-year aged r-values of 5.4 and 5 at 40 and 75 deg.F (4.4 and 23.9 deg.C), respectively; and as follows: 2" thick - R=.10.8 @ 40 degrees F. ~ • Surface Burnin Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 5 and. 165, respectively. Unfaced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt. Insulation (Not to be left exposed in anV location):. Thermal insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins.to comply with ASTM, C 665 for Type I (blankets vrithout membrane~facing); and as follows: •• Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass. ~~ Surface. Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 50, respectively.. ASTM E-84.. ~ ~- :rt Width: Provide ih full width to accommodate friction fit between metal studs. ' Faced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation (To be used when exposed in any location): 'Thermal insulation . produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type III, Class A (blankets with reflective vapor-retarder membrane facing with flame spread of 25 or less); foil-scrim-kraft vapor-retarder membrane on one face, respectively; .and as follows: Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread.and smoke developed values of 25 and 50, respectively. ASTM. E-84. Acoustical Insulation Blanket/Batts~ (Rock Wool):Acoustical insulatiori produced by combining mineral.fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 and ASTM E 119 and of a type I Class A product. Unfaced and unbacked, square cut edges. Provide 2" thickness (2.5 pounds density) in walls grid 3" thickness (4 pounds density) at ceilings. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from molten slag. Surface Burning Characteristics: Max. flame spread and smoke developed values of 15 and 0, respectively. _ . Acoustic Sound Board (Located under the Prago Panels at Entry 500): Provide 1"thick Select Sound Theater Board as manufactured by Owens. Corning or approved. It is a resilient board composed of inorganic glass fibers with a deep black mat finish. Has a nominal density of 3.0 pcf per ASTM C 1338. and a compressive strength of 25 Ibs/sf at 10% deformation per $TM C 165. Also has an NRC'of .70 per ASTM-C 423 and a surface burriing characteristic with a Flame Spread of 25 and Smoke Development of 50 per ASTM E 84. Installation shall be as recommentled by manufacturer. [ridgeline msl 07200 - 3 INSULATION ~ 07200 - 3 .. Polyisocyanurate Foam Board Insulation (Rigid Cavity Wall Insulation): Rigid boards of minimum 2.0 lbs./cu. ft. density polyisocyanurate based and fiberglass reinforced foam core, permanently bonded to reflective foi{ facer sheets on both sides. Provide product with "R" value of 5.6 per inch @ 75~ F, mean temperature per ASTM C 236. Flame spread of 25 and smoke development of 90 per ASTM E 84. SEE DRAWINGS FOR TOTAL REQUIRED R-VALUE. Federal Standard: FS HH-1-1972/1, Class 2 ASTM Standard: ASTM C1289, Type I, Class 2. Firestopping Insulation: Consists of noncombustible inorganic, asbestos-free, mineral fibers formed into blankets or semirigid mats. Nominal 4pound-per-cubic foot density mineral rock wool 4"thick. Flame spread classification of 15, a smoke developed rating of 0 and will resist temperatures up to 2000° F. ICBO Report No. 2331, Dec. 1989, Par. 6-D. VAPOR RETARDERS Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397 6-mil polyethylene film, with laboratory-tested vaportransmission rating of 0.2 perms, natural color. Seal to door and window frames. All mechanical and electrical penetrations shall be properly sealed. To be used only when covered by GWB or other fire resistant material. Reinforced Vapor Retarder (FSK): Laminated .00035" aluminum foil with Tri-Directional Fiberglass Scrim and 30 Ib. Natural Kraft paper. Vapor transmission rating of .02 Perms as tested by ASTM E-96. Seal to door and windowframes. All mechanical and electrical penetrations shall be properly sealed. To be used when vapor retarder is exposed to inside atmosphere and not covered by GWB or other finish material. This shall include insulated but unfinished spaces which are planned for future development. Flame spread classification of 25. Vapor:Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by~vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS Adhesive for Bondin Insulation: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer, to bond insulation securely to substrate, and complying with requirements for fire performance characteristics. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by insulation manufacturer for type of application and condition of substrate. Insulation Holder Assembly.: Use galvanized wire. Use Dualfast Staples No. 5010 into trusses. Use Ace 700 staples. Verify with insulation holder for all installation procedures. Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joihts between units and filling voids in work. E-Z Hang-Ups: Provide E-Z Hang-Ups as manufactured by E-Z Wire Products at Rogue River, Oregon or equal. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets desigried and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. [ridgeiine ms] 07200 - 4 INSULATION 07200 - 4 0 ~' 1 PART 3 -EXECUTION ,~ 4 EXAMINATION 5 6 Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in 7 which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance 8 of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been 9 corrected. 10 11 12 PREPARATION 13 14 Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections 15 capable of puncturing vapor retarders or that interfere with insulation attachment. 18 INSTALLATION. GENERAL 19 20 Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice and snow. 21 22 Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. If printed 23 instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical 24 25 representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with work. 26 Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around 27 obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections which interfere with placement. 28 29 AppIV a sin le laver of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up total 30 thickness. 31 32 Ventilation -Roof/ceiling Joists: 33 34 General: When installing batt insulation between roof/ceiling joists, exercise care not to encroach 35 into the specified ventilation space between the top of the insulation and underside of roof ' 36 sheathing. Where wood blocking is required at sheathing panel edges, provide "E-Z Hang-Ups" 37 (bent wire devices) to hold baits away from blocking to maintain minimum ventilation space. At 38 lower end of roof slope where insulation space is at a minimum, provide baffles between joists to 39 maintain the minimum ventilation space between insulation and roof sheathing. 40 41 AtPre-Manufactured Trusses and Joists: Provide a ventilation space of 6 inches clear (maximum) 42 and 2 inches (minimum) between insulation and roof sheathing. When cross ventilating the ' 43 maximum shall be 6" and the minimum shall be 5". 44 45 Solid Wood Joists: Provide a ventilation space of 6 inches clear (maximum) and 2 inches clear ' 46 (minimum). 47 ' 49 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION 50 51 Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 52 If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to 53 provide permanent placement and support of units. 54 55 Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to ' 56 edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with 57 adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. ' [ridgeline ms] 07200 - 5 INSULATION 07200 - 5 Tape ~o~ ints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure air-tight installation. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. Set reflective, foil-faced units with riot less than 0.75-inch (19-mm) air space in front of foil as indicated. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: Use blanket widths and lengths that fi11 cavities formed by framing members. Where more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. For wood-framed construction with faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to produce airtight installation after concealing finish material is in place. Stuff loose Ig_ass fiber insulation into all miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces in all walls which receive insulation. Compact to approximately 40% of normal maximum volume (to a density of approximately 2.5 lbs. per cu. ft,). Installation of Perimeter Insulation: On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use type of adhesive recommended by manufacturer of insulation. Exercise care so as not to damage insulation during backfilling operation or concrete pouring. For horizontal insulation provide smooth, flat surface for insulation bearing surface. Tape joint between horizontal ahd vertical pieces continuously. Recess horizontal insulation into subgrade so as not to encroach into slab thickness. Cavity Wall Insulation: On units of plastic insulation, install small pads of adhesive spaced approximately 1'-0" o.c. both ways on inside face. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown. Fill all cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and masonry Cathedral Ceiling Insulation: Installation method of unfaced batt insulation shall be the responsibility of the installer. Exercise care so as not to extend bottom of insulation past bottom of ceiling joists and also maintain an upper ventilation space. Method of holding insulation in place shall not create ah uneven base for gypsum wallboard installation. Acoustical Insulation: Provide insulation of thickness as indicated in Part 2 of this section and in walls and ceilings where shown on Drawings. Friction fit securely between studs. Butt ends of blanketslbatts closely together and fill all voids. At operable partition installations, install 3-inch thick insulation as necessary or as detailed, to eliminate the possibility of sound.transmission through the flanking paths around the doors. INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission:.Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated: Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose fiber-type insulation. [ridge~ine ms] 07200 - 6 ~ INSULATION 07200 - 6 1 ~, 3 4 5 6 ', 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 ': 22 23 24 25 26 Seal vertical 'oints in vapor retarders over framing by ;lapping not less than. 2 wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end and bottom edges, at perimeter of wall openings and at lap joints; space fasteners 16" o.c. Seal overlapping 'oI ints in.vapor retarders with adhesives orvapor-retarder tape according to vapor retarder , manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners~or adhesives as.recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer. Seal'oi ints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes and similar items penetrating vapor retarderswith vapor retarder tape to create an air-tight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. Repair ~ tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with . vapor retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. PROTECTION General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07200 [ridgeline ms] 07200 - 7 ' INSULATION 07200 - 7 SECTION 07311- ASPHALT SHINGLES ~' 1 PART1-GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS 6 Drawings ahd general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 7 Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 8 9 10 SUMMARY, This Section includes asphalt shingles for steep roofs Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: .Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood sheathing and framing. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal valley flashing, step flashing, drip edges, and other sheet metal work. 21 Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for smoke vents, hatches, and roof penetrations. 22 23 24 SUBMITTALS 25 26 General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 27 Specification Sections. ' 28 29 Product data for each type of product specified, including details of construction relative to materials, 30 dimensions of individual components, profiles, textures, and colors. 31 32 Samples for verification in the form of 2 full-size units of each type of asphalt shingle indicated showing the 33 full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 36 QUALITY ASSURANCE 37 38 .Fire-Test-Response Classification: Where products with afire-test-response classification are specified, 39 provide asphalt shingles identical to those tested according to ASTM E 108 or UL 790 and listed by UL or 40 another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify each bundle of 41 asphaltshingles vvithappropriate markings indicating fire-test-response classification ofapplicable testing and 42 inspecting agency. 43 44 Wind-Resistance-Test Characteristics: Wherewind-resistant asphaltshinglesareindicated,provideproducts 45 identical to those tested according to ASTM D 3161 or UL 997 and passed. Identify each bundle of asphalt 46 shingles with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. ' 47 48 Comply with the National Roofing Contractors Association "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" 49 unless indicated otherwise. 50 51 Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer ("Roofer") to perform shingle roofing work who has 52 specialized in the installation of roofing systems similar to that required for this project. Installer must also be 53 a member in good standing with the State and National Roofing Contractors Association. 54 [ridgeline ms] 07311 - 1 ~ ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -`1 DELIVERY STORAGE. AND HANDLING Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's unopened bundles, rolls or containers, with labels intact. Handle and store materials at Project site to preventwater damage, staining, or other physical damage. Store roll goods on end. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for job-site storage, handling, and protection. PROJECT CONDITIONS Substrate: Proceed with shingle work only after substrate construction- and penetrating work have been completed. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installing asphalt shingles only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturers' recommendations and warranty requirements, and when substrate is completely dry. PROJECT CLOSEOUT Warrantv: General Warrantv: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other.warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. Warrantv Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 40 years after date of Substantial Completion. Installation Warrantv: Contractor shall provide a signed 2-year warranty on installation. Extra Materials: Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents. Furnish 4 squares (37.16 sq. m) coverage of asphalt shingles, identical to those to be installed, in unbroken bundles. PART2-PRODUCTS ASPHALT SHINGLES Three Dimensional Fiberglass Laminated Strip Shingles UL Class A: Mineral-surfaced, self-sealing, laminated, multi-ply overlay construction, fiberglass-based, strip asphalt shingles, complying with ASTM D 3462. Provide shingles with a Class Afire-test-response classification that pass the wind-resistance-test requirements of ASTM D 3161. H~ and Ridge Shingles: At typical hip and ridge, provide manufacturer's standard factory pre-cut units to match shingles. At ridge vents, provide units of proper size to cover top surface of vent units and of color to match shingles. [ridgeline ms] 07311 - 2 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 2 ~, 2 3 ,' 4 5 6 7 9 10 '~ 11 12 13 14 ' '15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26. 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: Timberline Select 40; GAF Corp. Premier 40; Pabco .Landmark 40; Certain Teed, Northwest 40; Malarkey Color: As selected by Architect.. ACCESSORIES Ice and Water Guard: Provide SBS modified rubberized asphalt material reinforced to withstand puncture and severe stress. Membrane to be tacky on one side (with release film)~to provide good bonding to the substrate. Locate as shown on Drawings. Manufacturer: Protecto Wrap's "Rainproof' Mirafi Miradri WIP 100 Grace "Ice and Water Shield" SBS Underlayment: SBS fiberglass base sheet, complying with ASTM D 4601 - 91 Type II, 39-378" wide, approximately 36 lbs./square. Parting agent both sides. Manufacturer similar to Malarkey 501, UDL. Asphalt Plastic Cement: For hand tabbing shingles provide nonasbestos fibrated. asphalt plastic cement (flashing cement),- complying with ASTM D 4586, Type II.. Nails; Hot-dip galvanized steel, 11 gage, 0.120-inch- (3-mm-) diameter barbed shank, sharp-pointed, conventional roofing nails with a minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch (19 mm) into solid decking or at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) through plywood sheathing. Use electroplated galvanized nails when nailing shingles through the ice and water guard. Where nails are in contact with flashing, prevent galvanic action by providing nails made from the same metal as that of the flashing. Nails (For Nailing SBS Base Sheetl: Provide (simplex) round cap roofing nails similar to GRIP TITE as manufactured by Hoffler Wire Products Co., Inc. 11 gauge annular threaded nails with 1"diameter 20 gauge flat cap. . Ridge Vent: Provide "Premier" as manufactured by Northwest Building Products or approved. Phone 1-800- 521-9920. Made from polypropylene and will provide 18 sq. in./lin. foot of net-free ventilation. It will have multi-sets of horizontal interior baffles. ~ ; Use same product for venting top of clerestory and shed roof at vertical wall. Roof Vent: Provide "Apcor" Model RV-61 or approved. Polypropylene, 8" x 9" roof opening with 61 square inches net free ventilation. Profile 4-1/8 inches high. [ridgeline msj 07391 - 3 ASPHALT SHWGLES 07391- 3 PART 3 -EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrate for compliance with requirements for substrates, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of asphalt shingles. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Coordinate ihstallation with flashings and other adjoining work to ensure proper sequencing. Do not install roofing materials until all vent stacks and other penetrations through roof sheathing have been installed and are securely fastened against movement. INSTALLATION General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations but not less than those recommended by "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual." Fasten asphalt shingles to roof sheathing by hand nailing. Ice and Water Guard: Preparation: Remove all dirt, dust or foreign substances that would be detrimental to the adhesion of the membrane to the roof deck. Installation: Pull release paper from bottom of membrane while rolling out on deck. Press and roll membrane in place to assure full adherence to the deck. When joints occur, provide 6" laps at ends and 3'%' laps at sides. Lay lap joints in shingle fashion to shed water. SBS Base Sheet Underlayment on Roof Sheathing: When roof pitch is 4 inches per foot or more, apply one layer of SBS base sheet horizontally over entire surface of roof sheathing, lapping succeeding courses a minimum of 2 inches, end laps a minimum of 4 inches, and hips and valleys a minimum of 6 inches. Fasten felt with sufficient number of roofing nails or noncorrosive staples to hold underlayment in place until application of shingles. SBS Base Sheet Underlayment On Roof Sheathing: When roof pitch is less than 4 inches per foot, apply a double layer of fiberglass SBS base sheet in the horizontal direction. A 19-inch wide starter sheet should be applied to the eaves. A full-width sheet should then be applied covering the starter sheet. Succeeding sheets should be lapped 20-7/8 inches (18-1/2-inch exposure) over the preceding sheets. End laps should be a minimum of 6 inches. Backnail or use noncorrosive staples under laps only as necessary to hold the felts in place until application of shingles. Flashin :Install metal flashing and trim. as indicated and according to details and recommendations of the "Asphalt Roofing" section of "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual." Install asphalt shingles, beginning at roof's lower edge, with a starter strip of roll roofing or inverted asphalt shingles with tabs removed and overhanging the eaves 3/4". Fasten asphalt shingles in the desired weather exposure pattern; use number of fasteners per shingle as recommended by manufacturer. Use vertical and horizontal chalk lines to ensure straight coursing. Cut and fit asphalt shingles at valleys, ridges, and edges to provide maximum weather protection. Provide same weather exposure at ridges as specified for roof. Lap asphalt shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing wind. [ridgeline ms] 07311 - 4 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 4 I I 1 Use fasteners at ridges of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing as specified. 2 ' 3 Comply with installation details and recommendations of shingle manufacturer and NRCA Steep Roofing 4 Manual. 5 6 Ridge Vents: Install ridge vents according to manufacturer's instructions. 8 9 ADJUSTING , ' 10 11 Replace any damaged materials installed under this Section with new materials that meet specified 12 requirements. 13 14 15 END OF SECTION 07319 I 1 C [ridgeline ms] 07311 - 5 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 5 ' ~ ' SECTION 07411= PREFORMED MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS ( ) 1 .PART 4 -GENERAL 2 ~3 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general.provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 7 Specification'sections, apply to work of this section. ,; 8 9. 10 11 ` SUMMARY ~' 12 The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, furnishing and installation of all metal roofing and a 13 accessories as indicted on the drawings and specified herein. 14 ' 15 . 16 RELATED SECTIONS 17 18 . The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 19 20 Sectiori 05120 - Structural Steel. 21 ; '': 22 Section 05300 -Metal Decking. 23 , 24 25 ..Section 05500 -Miscellaneous Fabricated Steel ' ' 26 .Section 061.00 - Rough Carpentry. 27 , 28 Section 07620 -Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim. 29 30 Section 07900 -Joint Sealers (not specified herein)':- ~ . 31 . '' 32 Section 09900 - Painting for Painting Underside of Metal Roofing (not specified herein). 33 34 ' 35 SUBMITTALS 36 37 . Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions and recorrimendations 38 for each-type of roofing /siding required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. . ' 39 40 Samples: Prior to ordering products, submit manufacturer's standard color samples for Architect's / 41 Engineer's selection. ' 42 43 Prior to starting work, submit 12".long panel samples showing shape and' a representative color chip 44 for Architect's / Engineer's approval. 45 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~i 46 Shop Drawings: Show panel layout, trim installation, and panel attachment. 1; 47 48 Site Conditions: Provide completed site condition form for the specified finish to. suit project conditions. 49 50 , 51 QUALITY ASSURANCE 52 53 Installer's Qualifications: Installation of panels and accessories by installers with a minimum of 5 years i 54 experience in panel projects of this nature. ~ t [ridgeline.ms) 07411x1. PREFORMED (MANUFACTURED),ROOF PANELS • ' 07411-1 . Manufacturer's Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience supplying metal roofing /siding to the region where the work is to be done. Manufacturer shall provide proof of $2,000,000 liability insurance for their metal roof system and comply the current independent testing and certification as specified. ' Panel manufacturers without full supporting literature, flashings and details guides, guide specifications and technical support shall not be considered equal to the specified product. Regulatory Ag_ency Requirements: Comply wit IBC and local Building Code requirements if more than those. specified. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ~ ' Protect.againstdgmage and discoloration. Handle panels with non-marring slings. Do not bend panels. Store panels above ground, with one end elevated for drainage. ;, Protect panels against standing water and condensation between adjacent surfaces. If'panels become wet, ,, immediately separate sheets, wipe dry and allow to air dry. Remove any strippable film prior to installation and do not allow to remain on panels in extreme cold, heat or in direct sunlight. ;~ WARRANTY Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Manufacturer's standard coating performance warranty, as available for specified installation and environmental conditions (15 years). Contractor's Warranty: Warrant panels, flashings, sealants, fasteners and accessories against defective materials and / or workmanship, to remain watertight and weatherproof with normal usage for two (2) years following project substantial completion date. PART2-PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER IMSA BUILDING PRODUCTS INC., 2110 Enterprise Boulevard, West Sacramento, California 95691, 800- 726-2727 (corporate office), or approved equal. Manufacturing Locations: Los Angeles: 10905 Beech Avenue, Fontana, California 92337, 909-823-0401. Tacoma: 2141 Milwaukee Way, Tacoma, Washington 98421, 253-383-4955. Panel Designation: Mini-V-Beam. Net coverage 32", rib depth 1-3/8" @ 4-9/16" o.c. [ridgeiine ms] 07411-2 PREFORMED (MANUFACTURED) ROOF PANELS 07411-2 1 MATERIALS 3 Panels: 4 5 Base Metal: 6 7 Material: 8 9 Steel conforming to ASTM A-924/ASTM A-792 (formerly ASTM A792) Zincalume®, 10 minimum yield 40,000 psi, thickness 22 gauge. 11 12 SteelconformingtoASTMA653(formerlyASTMA446). G-90 Galvanized, minimum 13 yield 40,000 psi, thickness 22 gauge. ' 14 15 Protective Coating: Conform to ASTM A924/A792 (formerly ASTM A792), AZ50 16 (Zincalume®) ' 17 18 Finish: DuraTechT"" 5000 exterior finish includes a 0.2 mil thick corrosion-resistant primer and a 0.8 19 mil thick finish coat of polyvinylidene fluoride (PVFZ), full 70% Kynar 5000 / Hylar 5000® for a total 20 1.0 dry film thickness. 21 22 Color: Manufacturer's standard selection of not less than 12 colors. ' 24 25 Fabrication: Unless otherwise shown on drawings or specified herein, fabricate panels in continuous one- piece lengths and fabricate flashings and accessories in longest practical lengths. 26 27 Roofing panels shall be factory formed. Field formed panels are not acceptable. 28 ' 29 30 PART 3 -EXECUTION 31 32 33 EXAMINATION 34 35 Existing Conditions: Inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to a point 36 where this work may continue. 37 38 39 Verify that installation maybe made in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. an 42 PREPARATION 43 44 Field Measurements: Verify prior to installation. If field measurements differ from drawing dimensions, notify 45 Architect /Engineer prior to fabrication. ' 46 47 Protection: Treat, or isolate with protective material, any contacting surfaces of dissimilar materials to prevent 48 electrolytic corrosion. 49 ' 50 Require workmen who will be walking on roofing panels to wear clean, soft-soled shoes that will not 51 pick up stones or other abrasive material which could cause damage and discoloration. 52 S3 Protect work of other trades against damage and discoloration. 54 55 Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces prior to applying sealant. 56 57 [ridgeline ms) 07411-3 PREFORMED (MANUFACTURED) ROOF PANELS 07411-3 1 INSTALLATION 2 3 Panels: Follow roof panel manufacturer's directions. 4 5 Lap panels away from prevailing wind direction. 6 7 Do not stretch or compress panel side-lap interlocks. 8 9 Secure panels without warp or deflection: 10 11 Allowable Erection Tolerance: Maximum Alignment Variation 1/4 inch in 40_feet. 12 13 Flashing: Follow manufacturer's directions and architect-approved shop drawings. 14 15 Overlap roof panels at least 6 inches. 16 17 Install flashings to allow for thermal movement. 18 . 19 Remove any strippable protective film, if used, immediately preceding flashing installation. 20 ~ i 21 Cutting and Fitting: Neat, square and true. Torch cutting is prohibited where cut is exposed to final view. 22 23 Openings 6 inches and larger in any direct[on: Shop fabricate and reinforce to maintain original Toad 24 capacity. 25 26 Where necessary to saw cut panels, debur grid treat with galvanic paint. 27 28 29 CLEAN UP AND CLOSE OUT 30 31 Panel Damage and Finish Scratches: Do not apply touch-up paint to damaged paint areas that involve minor 32 scratches. 33 34 Panels or flashings that have severe paint and / or substrate damage shall be replaced as directed 35 by the Architect's or Owner's representative. 36 37 Cleaning and Repairing: At completion of each day's work and at work completion, sweep panels, flashings, 38 and gutters clean. Do not allow fasteners, cuttings, filings, or scraps to accumulate. 39 40 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed. 41 42 43 END OF SECTION 07411 [ridgeline ms] 07411-4 PREFORMED (MANUFACTURED) ROOF PANELS i~ ~' 07411-4 ,' t ~, 2 4 5 6 ,' 8 9 10 ~; 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 k 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 '~ 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 SECTION 07412 - PREFORMED ROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisionsofContract,including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division-1. Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY Extent of preformed roofing is indicated on the drawings and by provisions of this section. Preformed roofing is hereby defined to include panels which are structurally capable of spanning between supports spaced as indicated. Types of panels required include'the following: Formed sheet panels, intended for standing seam installation: Related Sections include the following: Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural-steel framing. Division 9 Section "Painting" for painting underside of roof panels. REFERENCES AISI Specifications for the Design of Light Gauge Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. SMACNA: Architectural Sheet Metal Manual UL: Building Material Directory This specification is also inclusive of the printed specifications of the individual listed roofing manufacturers even though they are not bound into this section. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Provide manufactured roof panel assemblies complying with performance requirements indicated and capable of withstanding structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide roof panel assemblies that meet requirements of UL 580 for Class 90 wind- uplift resistance. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications, standard details, certified product test results, installation instructions and general recommendations, as applicable to materials and finishes for each component and for total system of preformed panels. Samples: Submit 2 samples 12" square, of each exposed finish material. [ridgeiine ms) 07412 - 1 PREFORMED ROOFING' 07412 - 1 . - nd lar - ale details of ed a conditions ~' Shop Drawings: Submit small scale layouts of panels on roofs a ge sc g , joints, corners, custom profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings; closures, and special details. , Distinguish between factory and field assembly work. Samples for Verification: Provide sample panels 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual panel width, in the profile, style, color, and texture indicated. Include clips, caps, battens, fasteners, closures, and other exposed panel accessories. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has a minimum of 5 years experience in the installation of metal roof panel projects similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. Field Measurements: Where possible, prior to fabrication of prefabricated panels, take,field measurements of structure or substrates to receive panel system. Allow for trimming panel units where final dimensions cannot be established prior to fabrication. DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING Deliver panels and other components so they will not be damaged or deformed. Package panels for protection against damage during transportation or handling. '~ Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting roof panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. ,' Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight and ventilated ' covering. Store panels to ensure dryness.. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. PROJECT CLOSEOUT 1 Warranty: Installer to provide a signed two-year warranty to cover the installation and water tightness integrity ;,, of metal panels and associated flashings. i Manufacturer to provide a signed twenty-year warranty to cover for degradation of metal finish. Includes panels and associated prefinished pieces. PART2-PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide preformed roofing products by one of the following or approved: Steel Roofing: AEP Span (HR-36 ) MBCI (Supra-Rib ) [~idge~ine ms] 07412 - 2 ~ ~ PREFORMED ROOFING 07412 - 2 'I 1 SHEET MATERIALS Steel for Painting/Coating: Pre-coated Gaivalume steel sheet, ASTM A 792, 22,and 24 gauge as indicated on Structural Drawings. Grade C/40,000 psi minimum. S' 7 METAL FINISHES 8 9 General: Apply coatings either before or after forming and fabricating panels, as required by coating process 10 and as required for maximum coating performance capability. Inner-leaf between panels during shipmentwith 11 a 3-mil polyurethane sheet. Protect coating promptly after application and cure, by application of strippable 12 film or removable adhesive cover, and retain until installation has been completed. 13 ~. 14 Fluorogolymer Coating: Full-strength 70% "Kynar 500" coating baked-on with a dry film thickness of 1.0 mils, 15 30% reflective gloss (ASTM D 523), over mih. 0.2 mil baked-on modified epoxy primer. 16 17 Durabili :Provide coating which has been field tested under normal range of weathering conditions '. 18 for minimum of 20 years without significant peel, blister, flake, chip, crack or check in finish, and 19 without chalking in excess of 8 (ASTM D 659), and without fading in excess of 5 NBS units. Color: Provide- custom .colors or color matches as indicated or, if not otherwise. indicated, as selected by Architect. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard. Accessories: Except as indicated as work of another specification section, provide components required for a complete roofing. system, including trim, copings, fascias, gravel stops, :ridge closures, clips, flashings, gutters, louvers, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips and similar items. Match materials/finishes of preformed panels. 34 Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC paint 12, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness '. 35 per coat. 36 37 38 PANEL FABRICATION: PERFORMANCES 39 40 General: Fabricate, and finish panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by 41 manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, and as required to fulfill indicated performance 42 requirements which have been demonstrated by factory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and 43 dimensional requirements, and with structural requirements. 44 45 Metal Gauges: Thicknesses required for structural performances, but not less than manufacturer's 46 recommended minimums for profiles and applications indicated. Provide 22 and 24 gauge at i 47 locations as indicated on Structural Drawings. 48 49 Amply bituminous coating or other permanent separation materials on concealed panel surfaces where panels ~~ 50 would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials which are noncompatible or could result in 51 corrosion or deterioration of either material or finishes. 52 53 Fabricate panel ~oi ints with captive gaskets or separator strips, which provide a tight seal and prevent ' ~ 54 metal-to-metal contact ih a manner which will minimize noise from movements within. panel system: 56 57 [ridgeline ms] 07412 - 3 PREFORMED ROOFING 07412 - 3 ,! INSULATION Expanded Polystyrene (EPS): Provide expanded polystyrene, Type II rigid roof insulation complying with ASTM C 578 and having a calculated R-value of R 4.0/inch. Provide in two layers to a tota- R-value thickness of 30.00 unless noted or shown otherwise on drawings. Bottom layer to be 4 inches thick and top layer to be 3-1 /4 inches of insulation with a 7/16 inch thick oriented strand board (OSB) nailbase glued to top side. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION General: Comply with panel fabricator's and material manufacturers' instructions and recommendations for installation, as applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates. Anchor panels and other components of the work securely in place, with provisions for thermal/structural movement. Insulation: Install insulation in two layers. Loose lay 4 inches thick first layer of insulation directly over wood decking, butted to wood edge Hailers and to each other. Run long joints of insulation in continuous straight lines perpendicular to roof slope with end joints staggered between rows. Lay 3-1/4 inches thick second layer, with nailbase, same as first but also offsetjoints between the first and second layers a minimum of 12 inches. Screw attach insulation through OSB into the wood decking below using screws of length that will not penetrate through bottom face of decking. Number of screws and locations to. be as recommended by insulation manufacturer. Metal roofing shall be attached to the steel structural supports and shall comply to the uplift wind pressure requirements as listed in Structural General Notes on Sheets S0.1and S0.2. An ICBO approved assembly for the uplift requirement ]ncluding attachment to supporting structure or a connection assembly design by a professional engineer licensed as such by the State of Washington shall be submitted to the Architect prior to fabrication of the roof. Installation tolerances: Shim and align panel units within installed tolerance of 1/8" in 20'-0" on level/plumb/slope and location/line as indicated, and within 1/8" offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers and sealant where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of panel systems. Provide types of gaskets and sealants/fillers indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, types recommended by manufacturer. Refer to other sections of these specifications for product and installation requirements applicable to indicated joint sealers. . Joint. Sealers: Refer to other sections of these specifications for post-installation requirements on joint sealers; not work of this section. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Damaged Units: Replace panels and other components of the work which have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by means of finish touch-up or similar minor repair procedures. Cleaning: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films (if any) as each panel is installed. Upon completion of panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer, and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 07412 [ridgeline ms] 07412 - 4 PREFORMED ROOFING 07412 - 4 ~' 1 2 3 4 '' 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 ~ 48 ~ 49 50 51 52 53 54 I 55 56 SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and .general .provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This .Section ihcludes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories: .Roof-drainage systems. Copings. Metal flashing. Reglets. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 4 Sections for through-wall flashing and other integral masonry flashings specified as part of masonry work. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories"forset-on-type curbs, equipmentsupports,.roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured. roof accessory units. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric sealants. . . PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS _ General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing. i SUBMITTALS General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1' Specification Sections. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining,. and anchorage details. Include afl flashing and sheet metal units and others as required for a complete watertight and weathertight building. Provide layouts at 1/4 inch scale and details at 3 inch scale. Samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified finish. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected. , 8-inch- (200-mm-)square Samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces. [ridgeline ms] 07620,- 1 ..SHEET"METAL.FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 1 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples offactory-fabricated products exposed as finished Work. Provide complete with specified factory finish. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installerwho has completed sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. PROJECT CONDITIONS Coordinate Work ofthis Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each installation Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes. PROJECT CLOSEOUT Guarantee: Guarantee exterior work watertight and weathertight for two years from date of final completion. PART2-PRODUCTS METALS Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653 CS Type B, G 90, or ASTM A 653 FS Type B, G 90,, hot-dip galvanized steel sheetwith 0.20 percent copper, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; not less than 0.0276 inch (24 gage) thick, unless otherwise indicated. Pre-Primed Zinc-Coated Steel: Same as zinc-coated steel except for primer coating. Provide abaked-on epoxy-based primer of .2 mils on each side of metal. REGLETS General: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces and compatible with flashing indicated. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge. MasonN Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved. Fry Reglet Corporation. Hickman: W.P. Hickman Co. Keystone Flashing Company. [ridgeiine ms] 07620 - 2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 2 ,~ 1 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES ' 2 .. 3 Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, used with rosin flux. 4 ' 5 Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal 6 manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. . 7 '' 8 Asphalt Mastic:' SSPC-Paint .12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no 9 asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. 10 11 Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; no~nhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. 12 13 Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of components ' 14 being sealed- and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint 15 Sealants." 16 17 Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and.weather-resistant 18 seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal. ~: 19 20 Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory' units as 21 required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed; noncorrosive; size and 22 thickness required for performance. 23 24 Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based. 25 26 Downspout Strainers: Provide "beehive" type fabricated downspout strainer at each downspout location. 27 Select materials for compatibility with, gutters and downspouts. ' 28 29 30 FABRICATION, GENERAL 31 ~ ' 32 Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Fabricate sheet metal 33 flashing and trim to complywith recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" thatapply 34 to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. Comply with material 35 .manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material: ~ ~ ' ' 36 . 37 Fabricate sheet metal flashing and. trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather-resistant 38 performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet 39 metal.:. 40 41 Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is 42 true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. , 43 ~ , ' 44 Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form 45 .seams, and solder. 47 Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 i 48 inches-(610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work 49 cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of 50 intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within ' 51 , joints). 52 53 Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to 54 complywith SMACNA standards. 55 56 Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations 57 of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. .. 58 [ridgeline ms) -07620 - 3 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 3 Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secured. Step Flashing: Fabricate from an 8 inch square by 24 gage galvanized sheet metal, bent to forma 4 inch by 4 inch angle by 8 inches long. Gutters: Shall be fabricated from 22 gauge galvanized steel with abaked-on fluoropolymer finish in 10'_long sections or in continuous roll formed sections of 50' maximum lengths. Shape to be Style "I" as shown on Plate 2 of SMACNA manual with size as detailed on drawings. Shall be of free floating design supported without penetrations by suspension from- galvanized support brackets at 3'-0" o.c. maximum. Reinforce top of gutter with galvanized~tie-straps at 3'-0" o.c., staggered with support brackets. Secure as detailed on drawings. Finish support bracket and top reinforcing with abaked-on fluoropolymer finish. Provide for expansion at.ends of gutter runs.. Joints of 10' sections of gutters shall be lapped a minimum of 2 inches, sealed and riveted. Seal with elastomeric rubber sealant "Flexable Seal" as manufactured by A.C. Products, or approved. (253) 843-1577. Furnish end caps, corner units, downspout outlets, support brackets, spacers, joint covers, baffles and other necessary accessories as required. Downspouts: Provide at locations shown on drawings 3" nominal (3-1/2" O.D.) PVC schedule 40 .pipe downspouts and related elbows and fittings. Furnish 12 ga. x 1'/2' downspout hangers, not less than one top and bottom and one each ten feet (maximum) of vertical run. Furnish screws, of type approved for wall material behind hanger. To be painted. Flexible PVC Coupling/Cleanout: Provide at bottom of each tightlined downspout one flexible PVC coupling as manufactured by Fernco, Part #1056-33 with (2) Series 316 stainless steel clamps at each location. Conforming to ASTM D5926, C1173 and applicable portions of ASTM C443, C425, C569 and D 1869. Fernco telephone number: 1(800) 521-1283. Splash Pan: Shall be fabricated from 22 gauge pre-primed galvanized sheet metal similar to Plate 36 of the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual with the following dimensions. Back height: 4" Back width: 8" .Sides: taper from 4" down to 1" Front width: 18" Length: 24" Provide three corrugations equally.spaced four inches apart starting four inches from outer lip with length one inch short of the pan width. Corrugations to be '/" x '/" angles, with both legs down, and fabricated from same material as' pan. . Color: As selected by Architect to match roof color FINISH Factory Finish, Sheet Metal: Provide manufacturer's standard baked-on factory finish on sheet metal flashing units. Metal Counter Flashing; and Base Flashing (If Any) Valley Flashing Rake Flashing Eave Flashing [ridgeline ms] 07620 - 4 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 4 ,' 1 Gutters 2 Step Flashing 3 Miscellaneous Wall Flashing 4 .Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Accessories Finish as listed below: Fluoropolymer Coating: Exterior coating to be full-strength 70% "IZynar 500" coating baked-on with a dry film thickness of 1.0 mil, 30% reflective glass (ASTM D 523), over minimum 0.2 mil baked-on modified epoxy primer. . Back-side coating to consist of .15 mil epoxy primer and .35 mil off-white backer. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. PART 3 -EXECUTION 24 EXAMINATION 25 ~L, 26 Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify 27 that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been 28 corrected. 29 30 31 INSTALLATION 32 33 General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance 34 requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 35 Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; 36 conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, 37 joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. 38 39 Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is 40 true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing 41 and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.. Verify shapes and 42 dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 43 44 Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints 45 at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. 46 Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or. would not be sufficiently 47 weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 48 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). 49 50 Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to 51 be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. 52 53 Do 'not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint 54 completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. ^. 56 Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to 57 comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely seal joint. . 58 59 Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered. ~ [ridgeline ms] 07620 - 5' SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 5 Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges. to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. Counterflashings: Coordinate .installation of counterflashingstyith installation of assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and bed with sealant. Roof-Drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal, with straps, adhesives, and anchors recommended by SMACNA's Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof in the most efficient manner. Coordinate roof-drain flashing installationwith roof-drainage system installation. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal items for steep-sloped roofs with roofing installation. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate equipment support flashing installation with roofing and equipment installation. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support member. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation with roofing. and installation of items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: Turn lead flashing down inside -vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead flashing on vent piping. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low-sloped roofs, unless otherwise shown. Set in roof cement or sealant compatible with roofing membrane. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during construction:is without, damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07620 [ridgeline ms] 07620 - 6 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TF?IM 07620 - 6 SECTION 07700 -ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES ^ 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 2 3 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS . 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 7 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 8 9 10 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ~ 11 12 Extent and locations of roof accessories is indicated on the drawings and by provisions of this section: 13 14 .Types of units specified in this section include the following: ~~ 15 16 Roof smoke hatches. 17 ~ Roof scuttle. . 18 , 19 Refer to roofino system sections of these specifications for roofing accessories to be built into roofing system 20 (not work of this section). 21 22 23 SUBMITTALS 24 ,, 25 Product Data; Roof Accessories: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, rough-in diagrams, details, 26 installation instructions and general product recommendations. 27 28 '' 29 QUALITY ASSURANCE 30 31 Standards: Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including 32 flanges and cap- flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated., Comply with "NRCA Roofing and 33 Waterproofing Manual" details for installation of units. 34 35 '' 36 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 37 38 39 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS I 40 41 Provide manufacturers' standard units, modified as necessary to comply with requirements. Shop fabricate ~ 42 each unit to greatest extent possible. 43 44 45 MATERIALS, GENERAL 46 47 Aluminum Sheet:. ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper as required for forming and performance; AA-C22A41 48 clear anodized finish, except mill finish prepared for painting where indicated for field painting. 49 '~ 50 Extruded Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard extrusions of sizes and general profiles indicated, .alloy 51 6063-T52; 0.078 minimum thickness for primary framing and curb member legs, 0.062 for secondary.legs; 52 AA-C22A41 clear anodized finish on exposed members, except as otherwise. indicated. ' 53 ; [ridgeline ms] 07700 - 1 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 07700 - 1 '~ Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners affords access to building, provide nonremovable fastener heads. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. Roofin Cement: ASTM D.2822, asphaltic. ROOF SMOKE HATCHES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide smoke hatch from one of the following: Bilco Babcock-Davis Furnish and install where indicated on the plans, Automatic Smoke Hatch Type DSH 4896, Size 5' x 7', as manufactured by the Bilco Company or approved. Covers shall be 14 gauge paint bond galvanized steel with 3" beaded flange neatly welded. Insulation shall be of glass fiber, 1" in thickness fully covered and protected by a 22 gauge galvanized paint bond steel cover liner. Curb shall be of 14 gauge galvanized paint bond steel, 12" in height oh hinge sides with a 5 degree pitch to the fixed center channel. Curb shall be formed with a 3- 1 /2" flange with holes for securing to the roof deck and with an integral metal capflashing of the same gauge and material as the curb. Full welded for weathertightness. Insulation on the exterior of the curb shall be rigid fiberboard 1" in thickness. All hardware shall be zinc plated and chromate sealed. Factory finish shall be red oxide primer on steel Hatch shall be completely assembled with a Thermolatch positive hold/release mechanism, heavy pintle hinges, compression spring operators, thermoplastic rubber gasket, heavy duty shock absorbers and pull handles for inside and outside operation. It shall open automatically when heat breaks the 165 degree fusible link and shall be labeled as being FM Approved or UL Listed. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Manufacturer shall guarantee against defects in material or workmanship for a period of five years. Contractor shall test for proper operation after installation by fusing this link, and a replacement fusible link shall be furnished with the hatch. The electric thermolatch mechanism shall be furnished by the hatch manufacturer and shall consist of the fusible link, which is a basic part of the smoke hatch, in conjunction with a 24 volt DC solenoid. This solenoid .shall be normally closed and shall control the mechanical linkage of the fusible link to the smoke hatch frame. When the solenoid is energized by an alarm signal, it shall release the mechanical linkage, thereby allowing the hatch covers to open. The smoke hatch shall be wired to the alarm system so that it will not receive the signal during the alarm test or fire drill phases. ROOF SCUTTLE Furnish and install where indicated on plans metal roof scuttle Type S (2'-6" x 3'-0") as manufactured by the Bilco Company, New Haven, Connecticut. Cover shall be 14 gauge with 3" beaded flange, neatly welded. Insulation shall be glass fiber 1"thickness, fully covered and protected by a metal line 22 gauge. Curb shall be 12" in height and of 14 gauge. It shall be formed with a 3-1/2" flange with holes provided for securing to the roof deck. -Curb shall be equipped with an integral metal capflashing of the same gauge and material as the. curb, full welded at the corners for weathertightness. Insulation on the exterior of the curb shall be rigid fiberboard 1 "in thickness. Scuttle shall be completely assembled with heavy pintle hinges, compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes, positive snap latch with turn handles and padlock hasps inside and outside, and thermoplastic rubbergasket. Cover shall be equipped with an automatic hold-open arm complete (ridgeline ms] 07700 - 2 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 07700 - 2 I 1 with red vinyl grip handle to permit easy one hand release. All hardware shall be zinc plated and chromate 2 sealed, and factory finish shall be red oxide primer. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's 3 instructions.- Manufacturer shall guarantee against defects in material or workmanship for a period of five ' ; 4 .years. 5 6 ', 7 PART 3 -EXECUTION 8 9 10 INSTALLATION ~. 11 12 General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Coordinate with installation of roof 13 deck and other substrates to receive accessory units, and vapor barriers, roof insulation, roofing and flashing; 14 as required to ensure that each element of the work performs properly, and that combined elements are 15 waterproof and weathertight. Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates, adequate to withstand 16 lateral and thermal stresses as well as inward and outward loading pressures. 17 ' 18 Except as otherwise indicated install roof accessory items in accordance with construction details of 19 "NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual". 20 21 Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be installed in,contact with noncompatible metal or corrosive 22 substrates, including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other 23 permanent separation. 24 1 25 Flange Seals: Except as otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement; 26 to form a seal 27 28 29 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ~ , 30 31 Clean exposed metal and plastic surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Touch up damaged /~ 32 metal coatings. 33 34 ~. 35 END OF SECTION 07700 ' (ridgeline ms] 07700- 3 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 07700 - 3 '' SECTION 07840 - FIRESTOPP/NG 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 2 3 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 7 Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 8 9 10 SUMMARY 11 12 This Section includes firestopping for the following: 1; 13 14 Only tested firestop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows:. 15 '~ 16 Penetrations for the passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping, electrical busways and 17 raceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling 18 assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions. 19 ' 20 Openings between structurally separate sections of wall or floors. 21 22 Gaps between the top of walls and ceilings or roof assemblies. ' 23 24 Openings and penetrations in fire-rated partitions or walls containing fire doors. 25 ' 26 Openings around structural members which penetrate floors or walls. 27 28 Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 29 ' ' 30 Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete." 31 32 Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for joint fillers for non-fire-resistive-rated masonry construction. 33 34 Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for non-fire-resistive-rated joint sealants. 35 36 Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall:" 37 38 Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." 39 40 Division 15 Section "Pipe & Pipe Fittings." 41 42 Division 16 Section "Electrical General Conditions." 43 ' 44 45 REFERENCES 46 47 American Society for Testing and Materials Standards (ASTM): ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for 48 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 49 50 ASTM E814: Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 51 ' S2 Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: UL 723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. UL 1479 Fire 53 Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 54 ' S5 ' [ridgeline ms] 07840- 1 FIRESTOPPING 07840 - 7 UL Fire Resistance Directory: Through Penetration Firestop Devices (XHJI) Fire Resistive Ratings (BXUV) Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) Fill, Void, ~or Cavity Material (XHHW) DEFINITIONS Firestopping: The use of a material or combination of materials in a fire-rated structure (wall or floor) where it has been breached, so as to restore the integrity of the fire rating on that wall or floor. System: The use of a specific Firestop material or combination of materials in conjunction with a specific wall or floor construction type and a specific penetrant(s), constitutes a "System." Barrier: Any bearing ornon-bearing wall or floor that has an hourly fire and smoke rating. Through-Penetration: Any penetration of a fire-rated wall or floor that completely breaches the barrier. Membrane-Penetration: Any penetration in a fire-rated wall that breaches only one side of the barrier. Construction Gaps: Any gap, joint, or opening, whether static or dynamic, where the top of a wall may meet a floor; wall to wall applications; edge to edge floor configurations; floor to exterior wall; or any linear breach in a rated barrier. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire, according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases. Through-Penetration Firestop: ASTM E-814 "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops" Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined per UL 2079, "Tests for Resistance of Building Joint Systems", but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the construction.in which the joint occurs. Firestopping systems (materials and design): Shall conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings. The F rating must be a minimum of one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. T rating, when required by code authority, shall be based on measurement of the temperature rise on penetrating item(s). Firestopping. materials and systems must be capable of closing or filling through-openings created by 1) the burning or melting of combustible pipes, cable jacketing, or pipe insulation materials, or 2) deflection of sheet metal due to thermal expansion (electrical and mechanical duct work). Firestop sealants upon curing, shall not re-emulsify, dissolve, leach, breakdown or otherwise be damaged over time from exposure to atmospheric moisture, sweating pipes, ponding water or other forms of moisture characteristic in a building's normal operating life. [ridgeline ms] 07840 - 2 FIRESTOPP(NG 07840 - 2 Firestop sealant shall be properly tooled to insure that both the proper sealant depth is maintained in the annular space, and that the adhesive bond to both the penetrating item, and the surrounding construction is achieved. Pipe insulation shall not be removed, cut away, or otherwise interrupted through wall or floor openings. Firestop systems selected shall be appropriately tested for the thickness and type of insulation being sealed. All high-traffic openings (defined below) shall be firestopped with materials specifically designed for retrofit, such as intumescent firestop putty or pillows. All high-traffic openings (defined below) shall be labeled with warning stickers to alert future trades that the firestop materials must be replaced after removal. High-traffic openings include: All cable tray penetrations. All voice, data and communications cabling. All sleeved cabling openings. Other conditions when noted in drawings. Intumescent firestop materials shall not be installed around the perimeter of HVAC dampers to effect a smoke seal. Non-intumescent firestop sealants are permitted for this purpose. All electrical, mechanical, and other service items (such as ABS DWV stacks) inside interior walls that penetrate through hourly rated wood-floor assemblies shall be firestopped with materials that have both a one hour F and a one hour T rating, in accordance with ASTM E814 (UL1479). One manufacturer shall supply all firestopping materials. Material used shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation instructions. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS All work shall be done by a firm experienced in the installation of systems similar in complexity to those required of this project. One contractor shall do all.of the firestopping on this entire project. No "splitting up" of this section will be allowed. This contractor must be experienced in the firestopping industry and must be a "Specialist" in this line of work, meaning that they currently employ persons who regularly perform this type of work. Manufacturer. listed in Part 2 shall certify their acceptance of the installer firm for installation of their products and systems. SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data for each type of product specified. Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and are nontoxic to building occupants. [ridgeiine ms] 07840 - 3 FIRESTOPPING 07840 - 3 1 Shop drawings detailing materials, installation methods, and relationships to adjoining construction for each 2 through-penetration firestop system, and each kind of construction condition penetrated and kind of 3 penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing 4 compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 5 6 Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is 7 applicable to each through-penetration firestop configuration for construction and penetrating items. 8 9 Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration 10 to suit a particular through-penetration firestop condition; submit illustration approved by firestopping 11 manufacturer's fire protection engineer with modifications marked. 12 13 Forthose firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available through any manufacturer, 14 a manufacturer's engineering judgement derived from similar UL system designs or other tests will be 15. submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineer 16 judgement drawings must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council (September 7, 17 1994). 18 19 Product certificates signed by manufacturer of firestopping products certifying that their product complies with 20 specified requirements. Manufacturer to also submit certification of acceptance of installation firm per 21 "Installer Qualifications." 22 23 Product test reports from, and based on tests performed by, a qualified testing and inspecting agency 24 evidencing compliance offirestopping with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products. 25 26 27 QUALITY ASSURANCE 28 29 Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping that complies with the following requirements and 30 those specified under the "System Performance Requirements" article: 31 32 Firestoppinq tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and 33 inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency performing testing and follow-up 34 inspection services for firestop systems that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 35 36 Fire-resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested for fire-response characteristics per 37 UL 2079 under conditions where the positive furnace pressure differential is at least 0.01 inch of 38 water, as measured 0.78 inch from the face exposed to furnace fire. Provide systems complying with 39 the following requirements: 40 41 Fire-Resistance Ratings of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to design designations 42 listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory" or by another qualified testing and inspecting 43 agency. 44 45 Joint sealants, including backing materials, bear classification marking of qualified testing 46 and inspection agency. 47 48 Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified in 49 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy." 50 51 Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that designated 52 through-penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements. 53 54 Owner will employ and pay a qualified inspection agency to check installed firestopping systems for 55 compliance with requirements. 56 57 A manufacturer's direct representative (not distributor or agent) to be on-site during initial installation of 58 firestop systems to train appropriate contractor personnel in proper selection and installation procedures. This 59 will be done per manufacturer's written recommendations published in their literature and drawing details. 60 [ridgeline ms] 07840 - 4 FIRESTOPPING 07840 - 4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers'~labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. . Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping perfirestopping manufacturers' instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Notify Owner's inspection agency at least 1 week in advance of firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations. Do not cover up those firestopping installations that will become concealed beinind other construction until Owner's inspection agency and authorities having jurisdiction, if required, have examined each installation. PART2-PRODUCTS FIRESTOPPING. GENERAL Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and, the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Accessories: Provide.components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1. Use.only components. specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. Accessories include but are not limited to the following items: Permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the following: Joint fillers for joint,sealants. Applications: Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this Section that comply with system performance and other requirements. ~ . [ridgeline ms] 07840.- 5 ~ FIRESTOPPING 07840 - 5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems (XHEZ) listed in Volume II of the UL Fire Resistance Directory, provide products of the following manufacturers as identified below: Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, Oklahoma (918) 252-6901 Tremco Sealants & Coatings, Beachwood, Ohio (216) 292-5000 3M Fire Protection Products, St. Paul, Minnesota (800) 328-1687 Provide products from one of the three acceptable manufacturers; no substitutions will be accepted. , MATERIALS Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E-814, or UL 2079 tested for specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular, space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance. Cast-in place firestop devices for use with non-combustible and combustible plastic pipe (closed and open piping systems) penetrating concrete floors, the following products are acceptable: Hilti CP 680 Cast-In Place Firestop Device For penetrations bVnnn-combustible items including steel pipe, copper pipe, rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT), the following materials are acceptable: Hilti FS 601 Elastomeric Firestop Sealant Hilti FS-ONE High Performance Intumescent Firestop Sealant 3M Fire Stop Sealant 2000 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB Tremco Tremstop Fyre-Sil Sealant For fire-rated construction joints and other paps, the following materials are acceptable: Hilti FS 601 Elastomeric Firestop Sealant Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant Hilti CP 672 Firestop Joint Spray 3M Firestop Sealant 2000 Tremco Tremstop Fyre-Sil Sealant For penetrations by combustible items (penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe (closed piping systems), the following materials are acceptable: Hilti FS-ONE High Performance Intumescent Firestop Sealant Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Hilti CP 642 Firestop Jacket Hilti CP 643 Firestop Jacket 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB 3M Fire Barrier FS-195 Wrap/Strip Tremco Tremstop WBM Intumescent Firestop Sealant For penetrations by combustible plastic pipe (open piping systems), the following materials are acceptable: Hilti CP 642 Firestop Jacket Hilti CP 643 Firestop Jacket Hilti FS-ONE High Performance Intumescent Firestop Sealant 3M Fire Barrier PPD Plastic Pipe Device [ridgeline ms) 07840 - 6 . FIRESTOPPING 07840 - 6 1 For large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, '; 2 electrical busways in raceways, the following materials are acceptable: 4 Hilti FS 635 Trowelable Firestop Compound 5 Hilti FIRE BLOCK ' 6 3M Firestop Foam 2001 7 3M Fire Barrier CS-195 Composite Sheet For openings between structurally separate sections of wall and floors. Top-of-walls, the following materials are acceptable: 12 ' Hilti FS 601 Elastomeric Firestop Sealant 13 Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant 14 Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant 15 Hilti FS-ONE High Performance Intumescent Firestop Sealant ' 16 3M Fire Barrier CP 25 WB 17 Provide a Firestop system with a "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or ASTM E814 which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated. Provide a Firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by UL 2079 which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 28 EXAMINATION 29 - 30 Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening 31 configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Do 32 -not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 33 34 35 PREPARATION 36 ' 37 Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply with 38 recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements: 39 ' 40 Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from penetrating 41 items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping. 42 43 Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable 44 of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning 45 operation. 47 Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 48 49 Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that manufacturer's 50 recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration ' 51 onto exposed surfaces. 52 ' [ridgeline ms] 07840 - 7 FIRESTOPPING 07840 - 7 INSTALLING FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1, with ASTM C 1193, and with the sealant manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealahts relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire-resistance rating required. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed. Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or curing begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to produce fire-resistance rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealants with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspecting agency employed and paid by Ownerwill examine completed firestopping to determine, in general, if it is being installed in compliance with requirements. Inspecting agency will report observations promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. Do not proceed to enclose firestopping with other construction until reports of examinations are issued. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace firestopping so that it complies with requirements. CLEANING Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and of products in which opening and joints occur. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to produce firestopping complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07840 [ridgeline ms] 07840 - 8 FIRESTOPPING 07840 - 8 ' SECTION 07900 -JOINT SEALERS ' 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 2 3 4 RELATED DOCUMENT 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 ' 7 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 8 9 10 SUMMARY '• 11 ~ - 12 Extent of each form and, type ofjoint sealer is indicated on drawings. If not indicated, provide the properjoint 13 sealer from the selection below. 14 15 This Section includes joint sealers for the following locations: 16 17 Exterior joints in vertical surtaces and nontraffic horizontal surtaces as indicated below. 18 19 Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete 20 Joints between architectural precast concrete units 21 Control and expansion joints in unit masonry 22 Joints between different materials listed above 23 Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows 24 ~ Other joints as indicated 25 26 Exterior ioints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below: 27 28 Control, expansion, and .isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs for floors and paving ', 29 Tile control and expansion joints 30 Joints between different materials listed above 31 Other joints as indicated 32 '' 33 Interior ioints inverfical _surtaces and horizontal-nontraffic surfaces as indicated below: 34 35 Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated '~ 36 Tile control and expansion joints 37 Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and 38 partitions 39 Perimeter joints between interior wall surtaces and frames of interior doors and windows 40 Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures 41 Other joints as indicated 42 ' 43. Interior ioints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below: 44 ,~.. .. 45 Control and expansion joints in. cast-in-place concrete slabs ' 46 Control and expansion joints in the flooring 47 Otherjoints as indicated 48 49 Related Sections: ' S0 51 Sealing of expansion ioints in concrete slabs is specified in Division 3 Section - "Cast-In-Place 52 -Concrete." ^ 53 54 Sealing of ioints to limit infiltration is specified in Division 6 Section = "Rough Carpentry. [ridgeline ms] 07900 - 7 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 1 Sealing ioints related to flashing and sheet metal for roofing is specified in Division 7 Section - "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." Sealants for glazing purposes are specified in Division 8 Section = "Glass and Glazing." Sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum drywall partitions to reduce sound transmission characteristics is specified in Division 9 Section - "Gypsum Drywall." Sealing the ioints is specified in Division 9 Section - "Tile." SYSTEM PERFORMANCES Provide joint sealers that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seal without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates. SUBMITTALS Product Data from manufacturers for each joint sealer product required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint sealer application. QUALITY ASSURANCE Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING Deliver materials to project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. Store and handle materials in compliancewith manufacturers' recommendations to preventtheirdeterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the following conditions: When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealer manufacturers. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other causes. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint, sealers where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. [ridgeline ms) 07900 - 2 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 2 i 1 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Sequence installation of joint sealers to occur not less than 21 nor more than 30 days after completion of waterproofing, unless otherwise indicated. 7 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 8 9 Guarantee: ~ • 11 Contractor shall guarantee his sealant installation to provide a watertight and weathertight application 12 for a period of two years. 13 14 Contractor shall also provide a written warranty signed by sealant manufacturer guaranteeing his/her 15 product against defects or failures for a period of five years from date of Final Completion. 16 ' 17 , 18 PART 2 -PRODUCTS ~~ 21 MATERIALS, GENERAL . 22 23 Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one 24 another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant 25 manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 26 27 Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealers indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect 28 from manufacturer's standard colors. 31 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS ~ 32 ' 33 Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of 34 base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referenced for Type, 35 Grade, Class, and Uses. 36 37 Multi-Part Nonsaq Urethane Sealant for Use NT: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, and complying with the ~ 38 . following requirements for Uses: ~ 40 Uses NT, M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 41 42 Multi-Part Nonsaq Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, and complying with the 43 following requirements for Uses: 44 45 Uses T, M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 46 47 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved. 49 Multi-Part Nonsaq Urethane Sealant for Use NT:. 1 50 51 "Chem-Calk 500"; Bostik Findley 52 "Vutkem 922"; Tremco ' 53 "Sikaflex-2c NS TG"; Sika Corp. 54 "NP 2"; Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex, Inc. an '': [ridgeline ms] 07900 - 3 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 3 '; Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use T: "Vulkem 227"; Tremco "Dynatred"; Pecora Corp. "PSI 270"; Polymeric Systems Inc. "THC-901"; Tremco Inc. "SL-2"; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc. MISCELLANEOUS JOINT SEALANTS Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved: Acoustical Sealants for Concealed Joints: "BA-98"; Pecora Corp. "Tremco Acoustical Sealant"; Tremco Inc. JOINT SEALANT BACKING General: Provide sealant backings of material and type which are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. Plastic Foam Joint-Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible, nongassing plastic foam of material indicated below; nonabsorbent to water and gas; and of size, shape and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, unless otherwise indicated, subject to approval of sealant manufacturer, for cold-applied sealants only. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstructionfoint sealer-substrate tests and field tests. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide nonstaining, chemical cleaners of type which are acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials, and which do not leave oily residues or.otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-service performance. Masking Tape: Provide nonstaining, nonabsorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to surfaces adjacent to joints. [ridgeline msl 07900 - 4 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 4 ~~ 1 JOINT FILLERS FOR CONCRETE PAVING 3 General: Provide joint fillers of/z inch thickness. 4 5 Bituminous Fiber Joint Filler: Preformed strips of composition below, complying with ASTM D 1751: 6 7 Asphalt saturated fiberboard. 8 9 10 PART 3 -EXECUTION 11 12 13 EXAMINATION ' 14 15 Examine 'toints indicated to receive joint sealers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 16 joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not 17 proceed with installation of joint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 18 19 20 PREPARATION Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements: Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint sealer, including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility bysealantmanufacturer; oldjointsealers; oil; grease; waterproofing; water repellents; water; surface dirt; and frost. 30 Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic the and similar porous joint substrate 31 surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these ' 32 methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers. 33 Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing outjoints 34 with oil-free compressed air. 35 36 Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 37 38 Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile; and other nonporous surfaces ' 39 by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or 40 leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers. 41 42 Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer ' 43 based on preconstruction joint sealer-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint 44 sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage 45 or migration onto adjoining surfaces. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 52 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS 53 54 General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed installation instructions applicable to products and 55 applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. 56 ~~ [ridgeline ms] 07900 - 5 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 5 ~' Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: Install joint-fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to jointwidths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. Do not leave gaps between ends ofjoint-fillers. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear joint-fillers. Remove absorbent joint-fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. Install bond breakertape between sealants and joint-fillers, compression seals or back ofjoints where adhesion of sealant to surfaces at back ofjoints would result in sealant failure. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning of curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 6A in ASTM C 962, unless otherwise indicated. CLEANING Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints occur. PROTECTION Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with new materials to product joint sealer installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 07900 (ridgeline ms] 07900 - 6 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 6 SECTION 08111- STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following products manufactured in accordance with SDI Recommended Standards: Doors: Flush, hollow or composite construction standard steel doors for interior and exterior locations. Frames: Pressed steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, mullions, interior glazed panels, and other interior and exterior openings of following type: Welded unit type. Assemblies: Provide standard steel door and frame assemblies as required for the following: Labeled and fire rated. Thermal rated (insulated). Provide factory primed doors and frames to be field painted. Painting primed doors and frames is specified in Division 9 Section -Painting. Wood doors are specified in another Division 8 Section. Door hardware is specified in another Division 8 Section. Glass and Glazing are specified in another Division 8 Section. Building in of anchors and grouting of frames in masonry construction is specified in Division 4. SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, profiles, and finishes. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. [ridgeline ms] 08111 - 1 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 1 1 Provide schedule of .doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as 2 those on contract drawings. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door, Institute "Recommended Specifications Standard Steel Doors and Frames" ANSI A 250.8/SDI-100-98 and as herein specified. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies whose fire resistance characteristics have been determined per NFPA 252-95 or UBC Std. 7- 2 and which are labeled on both the door and frame and listed by UL, Factory Mutual, Warnock Hersey, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Glazed openings, other than doors or ducts, in one-hour rated corridors, shall be labeled for a fire protection rating of at least three-fourths hours and shall include an affixed label on frame. The total area of all openings, other than doors, in any portion of an interior corridor shall not exceed 25 percent of the area of the corridor wall of the room which it is separating from the corridor. DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish offactory-finished doors and frames. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inches high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic.or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide '/4-inches spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PROJECT CLOSEOUT Warran Submit door manufacturer's two-year warranty, from date of final completion, signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors or doors that do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards. [ridgeline ms] 08111 - 2 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111- 2 ' 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ' S - 6 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements., provide standard steel doors and frames by one ' 7 of the following: 8 9 Standard Steel Doors and Frames: 10 1 i Ceco Corp 12 Curries Company 13 North Central Supply, Inc. 14 Stiles ~15 Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. ' 18 MATERIALS 19 2 o Hot=Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with 1 21 ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568. 22 23 Cold-Rolled .Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and 2 4 ASTM A 568. 25 2 6 Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with 27 ASTM A 653, or drawing quality, ASTM A 642,. hot-dipped galvanized. in accordance with ASTM A 653, 2 8 with G60 coating designation, mill phosphatized. 1~ 29 3 o Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18-gage sheet steel; G60 galvanized where used with 31 galvanized frames. ' 32 . 33 Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's stardard units. Where items are to be built into exterior 34 walls, hot-dip galvanize in compliance with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. 35 3 6 Shop Applied Paint: Apply after fabrication. 38 Primer: Clean, etch-pretreat and apply one coat, minimum one, mil dry film thickness, of rust- 39 inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints 4o complying with ANSI A224.1, "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel 41 Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames." Apply to both exposed and concealed surfaces and their 42 accessories. Accessories, i.e., metal frame for light openirig indoor. ' 43 4 4 Plastic Filler: Two-part fiberglass reinforced filler similar to Bondo or approved. 45 4 6 Structo-Cite Gypsum Door Frame Packing: (Interior door frames only) Provide Sfructo-Cite gypsum plaster 4 7 or approved which complies with ASTM-C28. 48 4 9 Grout for Exterior Frames: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use grout of consistency .indicated or, if not 50 otherwise indicated, of fine consistency, at time of placement that will completely fill spaces intended to 51 receive grout. , . 52 [ridgeline ms] 08111 - 3 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ~ 08111 - 3 'i . DOORS Provide metal doors of SDI grades and models specified below or as indicated on drawings or schedules: Interior/Exterior Doors: ANSI/SDI-100, Grade III, extra heavy-duty,' Model 1, full flush -with seam edge. Minimum 16-gage cold-rolled sheet steel faces. Insulate exterior doors. FRAMES Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames with full mitered and welded corners. Fabricate interior frames of 16-gage cold-rolled furniture steel. Form exterior frames from 14-gage hot-dipped galvanized steel. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 26-gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at -back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. FABRICATION Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to .assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI-100 requirements. Joints: The width of all exposed joints at the intersection of frame members shall not exceed 1/64" (.015") maximum. Joints exceeding this limit shall be filled with the specified plastic filler and sanded smooth to flush out with surface of frame. Internal Construction: Manufacturer's standard honeycomb, polyurethane, polystyrene, unitized steel grid, vertical steel stiffeners, or rigid mineral fiber core with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets where appropriate in accordance with SDI standards. (Exterior doors insulated). Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads except between non-fire-rated pairs of doors not more than 1/4 inch. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and' rails of nonflush units, from only cold- rolled steel Fabricate door edges~with exposed hairline seam of uniform width located on center of.door edge. Lioht Openings in .Doors: For interior doors provide the required frame to accommodate one thickness of 1/4 inch wired glass where indicated and for exterior doors provide the required frame to accommodate a minimum of 1 inch thick insulated glass. Provide frame with returns on both sides of door. Door skin is not acceptable as glass stop. [ridgeline ms] 08111 - 4 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES .08111 - 4 t 1 Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from either 2 cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel. (Fabricator's option.) 3 ' 4 Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel in accordance with SDI-112. 5 Provide top flush edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 6 16-gage inverted steel channels. Recessed space between faces, at top of door, not acceptable. ~ 8 Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed 9 screws and bolts. 10 ,' l1 Thermal Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as,shown or scheduled, 12 provide doors fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame assemblies and tested in accordance with 13 ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies. 14 15 Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U factor of 0.50 Btu/(hr x sq ft 16 x deg F.) or better. 17 . ' 18 Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware in 19 accordance with final Door Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply 20 with applicable .requirements of ANSI A115 Series Specifications for door and frame preparation for ' 21 hardware. 22 . 23 Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied 2 4 hardware may be done at project site. Provide 10-gage reinforcement for all hardware; include 25 reinforcement for closers on frames whether closers are scheduled or not, and plasterguards of strike 2 6 pockets. Welding of hinges to frames or doors not permitted. 27 ' 28 Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in locations listed in SECTION 2 9 08700 -FINISH HARDWARE. If not indicated in the Finish Hardware then, in accordance with 30 "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware on Standard Steel Doors and Frames," published by 31 Door and Hardware Institute. 32 33 Shop Painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including 34 galvanized surfaces. 35 36 Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before 37 application of paint. 38 1 39 Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready 4 0 to receive finish paint. 41 ' 42 After welding of galvanized steel, clean and grind welds as necessary, and apply high zinc dust 43 content paint for regalvanizing welds, complying with the Military Spec. MIL-P-21035 (Ships) or 4 4 SSPC-Paint-20. ' 45 4 6 Apply asphalt emulsion undiluted, to all concealed surfaces of frames in shower and drying areas 4 7 and exterior frames. This is in addition to the prime coat. 4 9 Glazing Stops: Minimum 20-gage steel 50 51 Provide non-removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for 52 glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 53 54 Provide screw applied removable glazing beads on side opposite of stops for glass, louvers, and 55 other panels in doors. Screws shall be of tamper-proof type. ' 56 ' [ridgeline ms] 08111 - 5 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 5 Locate glazing stops on opposite side of relite from horizontal blinds. See Specification Section 12500 for horizontal blind locations. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION General: Install standard steel doors,. frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions For Steel Frames," unless otherwise indicated. Interior Frames: In all interior wood and steel stud walls, pack solid the head and jambs of all newly installed hollow metal door frames with Structo-Cite Gypsum. When integral sidelites are a part of the door frame assembly creating mullions, pack only the perimeter framework of the overall frame assembly. Do not pack the enclosed interior mullions. Relites alone do not receive packing. In gypsum wallboard walls, protect the exposed wallboard from excess moisture. Exterior Frames: Solid grout the perimeter head and jambs of all newly installed hollow metal door frame assemblies at all exterior walls. Provide wood or styrofoam filler materials in "door stop" recess to promote easier drilling for weatherstrip installation. Seal all joints between frame and wall surface to prevent loss of grout, bulging, uneven or exposed grout surfaces. Hollow metal frames in new unit masonry walls and masonry veneer walls are solid grouted in another Division 4 section. In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Apply plastic filler over all anchor screw heads in all hollow metal frames and grind smooth. Grinding marks will not be permitted. Install fire-rated frames in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80 Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI- 100. Install fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80 ADJUST AND CLEAN Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime .coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware .items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. END OF SECTION 08111 [ridgeline ms] 08111 - 6 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 6 ' SECTION 08211- FLUSH WOOD DOORS ~' 1 PART .1 -GENERAL ... 2 3 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 , 6 Drawings and general ,provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions. and 7 Division-1 Specification sections,-apply to work of this section. 8 9 '! 10 SUMMARY 11 12 Extent and location of each type of flush wood door is indicated on drawings and in schedules. 13 14 Types of doors required include the following: 15 16 Solid core flush wood doors with wood veneer faces. ' 17 18 All doors shall be 1-3/4"thick unless noted otherwise. 19 20 Metal door frames for flush wood doors are specified in another Division-8 section. 21 22 ~ ~ . 23 SUBMITTALS 24 25 Product Data: Door manufacturer's technical data for each type of door, including details of core and 26 edge construction, trim for openings and louvers, and factory-finishing specifications. 27 '; 28 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind 29 of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for 30 factory finishing and other pertinent data. . ' 31 32 For factory-premachined doors, indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts for locksets and 33 other cutouts adjacent to light and louver openings. 34 ' 35 Samples: Submit 3 samples each, 1-0" square or as indicated, for the following: 36 . 37 Doors for Transparent Finish: Door faces with solid wood edging representing typical range of ~ 38 color and grain for each species of veneerand solid lumber required. ~ 39 40 Metal Frames for Light Openings: Metal light frames in 6" lengths; for each material, type and , 41 finish required. ': 42 43 44 QUALITY ASSURANCE 45 ,~ 46 Quali Standards: Comply with the current edition of the following standards: 47 48 WDMA Quali Standard: I.S.1-A "Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors", of Window and 49 Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA). 50. 51 AWI Quali Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"; including Section 1300 52 - "Architectural Flush Doors", of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) for grade of door, core ,! 53 construction, finish and other requirements exceeding.those of WDMA quality standard. [ridgeline mss 08211 - 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1 WDMA Quali Marking: Mark each wood door with WDMA Wood Flush Door Certification Hallmark certifying compliance with applicable requirements of WDMA I.S. 1 Series. For manufacturers not participating in WDMA Hallmark Program, a certification' of compliance may be substituted for marking of individual doors. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors which are identical in materials and construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies per NFPA 252 or.UBC Std. 7-2-97 and which are labeled and listed for ratings indicated by UL, Warnock Hersey or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Note: All fire-rated doors are required to be "Positive Pressure Fire Test Compliant." Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of WDMA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors", as well as with manufacturer's instructions. Identi each door with individual.opening numbers which correlate with designation system used on shop drawings for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary, removable or concealed markings. PROJECT CONDITIONS Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and ihstallation areas during remainder of construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to project's geographical location: Referenced AWI quality standard including.Section 100-S-3 "Moisture Content". PROJECT CLOSEOUT Warran General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards. Warranty shall also include reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of Substantial Completion. Solid Core Interior Doors: Life of installation [ridgeline ms] 08211 - 2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2 ', 1 Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where Contractor's work contributed to 2 rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's warranty. PART2-PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: ~ 12 Solid Core Doors with Wood Veneer Faces: 13 ' 14 Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division ! 15 Haley Architectural Doors 16 Pacific Architectural Wood 17 18 ~ V.T. Industries Vancouver Door Company 19 Weyerhaeuser Company INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements: Faces: Eastern Hard Maple, plain sliced. AWI Grade: Premium. Construction: PC-5 or PC-7 (Edges and core glue-bonded and sanded to a uniform thickness prior to application of faces.) Fire-Rated Solid Core Doors: Comply with the following requirements: Faces and AWI Grade: Provide faces and grade to match non-rated doors in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. Positive Pressure Fire Doors: Doors shall meet the requirements of ICBO Uniform Building Code (UBC) Standard 7-2 1997. Provide door construction per Category "A" guidelines as published by ITS/Warnock Hersey. Intumescent surface applied to the door vertical stile and rails, or door frame is unacceptable. Positive Pressure 20 minute rated smoke and draft control "S" label doors that have been tested with fire treated stiles and rails without built-in intumescent are also acceptable. .Edge Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated edge construction for improved screw-holding capability and split resistance as compared to edges composed of a single layer of treated lumber. Hardware Blocking: Provide solid. blocking for all door hardware. To be compatible with applicable fire rating requirements. [ridgeline ms] 08211 - 3 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211- 3 LIGHT FRAMES Metal Frames for Light Openings in All Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard frame formed of 18- gauge cold-rolled steel, factory-primed, and approved for use in non-rated doors as well as in doors with fire ratings indicated. To be painted per Section 09900. Interior doors to accommodate 1/4" glass. and exterior doors to accommodate 1" thick insulated glass assembly. See Section 08800 for glass. The "size" as indicated on the door types (in Door schedule) is the clear vision space between the glass stops. - FABRICATION Fabricate flush wood doors to produce doors complying with following requirements: In sizes indicated for job-site fitting. FACTORY FINISHING General: Comply with referenced AWI quality standard including Section 1500 "Factory Finishing". Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, finish system, staining effect and sheen. AWI Grade: Premium Finish: AWI System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane Staining: As selected by Architect Sheen: Semi-gloss PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door: Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. Reject doors with defects. Do not rop teed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. [ridgeline ms] 08211 - 4 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211- 4 1 INSTALLATION 2 3 Hardware: For installation see Division 8 - "Finish Hardware" section of these specifications. 4 5 Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and of 6 referenced AWI standard and as indicated. 7 8 Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames in accordance with requirements of 9 NFPA No. 80. 10 11 Job-Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do 12 not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine 13 doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 14 15 Fittin Clearances for Non-Rated Doors: Provide 1/8" at jambs and heads; 1/16" per leaf at 16 meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/8" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or 17 covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4" clearance from bottom of door to 18 top of threshold. 19 20 Fitting Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: Complying with NFPA 80. 21 22 Bevel non-rated doors 1/8" in 2" at lock and hinge edges. 23 24 Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8" in 2" at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by 25 labeling agency. 26 ' 27 28 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION 29 30 Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely. 31 ' 32 Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. 33 34 Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be without damage 35 or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 36 37 38 END OFSECTION 08211 [ridgeline ms] 08211 - 5' FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 5 'I' SECTION 08305 - ACCESS DOORS '! 1 2 3 4 5 6 ' 7 9 10 '' 11 12 13 14 15 16 -17 ,, 18 19 20 ' 21 22 23 24 ~' 25 26 27 ' 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 ' 35 36 37 38 ' 39 40 41 42 PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including .General and Supplementary Conditions. and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following types of access doors: Wall access doors. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall" for gypsum board walls and ceilings. SUBMITTALS General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data for each type of access door assembly specified, including details of construction relative to materials, individual components, profiles, finishes, and fire-protection ratings (if required). Include complete schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, wall and ceiling construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of customized access doors and frames, including details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, anchorage, and accessory items. QUALITY ASSURANCE Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for entire Project from one source and by a single manufacturer. [ridgeline msi 08305 - 1 ACCESS DOORS 08305 - 1 PART2-PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved: Bilco Elmdor Manufacturing Co. J.L. Industries. Karp Associates, Inc. Milcor, Inc. Nystrom, Inc. MATERIALS Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M commercial-quality, cold-rolled steel sheet with baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. ACCESS DOORS Flush Access Doors with Exposed Trim: Units consisting of frame with exposed trim, door, hardware, and complying-with the following requirements: Frame: 0.0598-inch- (1.52-mm-) thick steel sheet. Door: 0.0747-inch- (1.90-mm-) thick steel sheet. Trim: Flange integral with frame, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, overlapping surrounding finished surface. Hinge: Continuous type Latches: Bolt type, operated by ring turn FABRICATION General: Manufacture each access door assembly as an integral unit ready for installation. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Continuous welded construction. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. Exposed Flange: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25.4 to 38.1 mm) wide around perimeter of frame. [ridgeline ms] 08305 - 2 ACCESS DOORS 08305 - 2 ,'' 1 PART 3 -EXECUTION 2 3 ' 4 PREPARATION 5 6 Advise Installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door installation, including sizes 7 of openings to receive access door and. frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring 8 devices. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for access doors that must be built into other construction. 9 Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 10 ,' 11 12 INSTALLATION 13 14 Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing access doors. ' 15 16 Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with 17 adjacent finished surfaces. 18 19 20 ADJUST AND CLEAN ' 21 22 Adiust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. 23 24 Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. ~~ 25 26 27 . END OF SECTION 08305 ' 28 ... '~ [ridgeline ms] 08305 - 3 ACCESS DOORS I i 08305- 3 i i SECTION 08330 -OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART1-GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 8nd Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following types of overhead coiling doors. See schedule on last page. Fire-rated counter doors. Related Sections include the following: Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware" for control station key switch cylinder core. Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables and Motor Controllers" for electrical service and connections for powered operators, and accessories. Division 16 Section "Disconnects and Fused Switches"'for disconnect switches and circuit breakers for powered operators. Provide complete operating door assemblies including door curtains, guides, counterbalance mechanisms, hardware, operators and installation accessories. Door manufacturerto furnish the following dependent upon dooroperation and rating: Motoroperator including brake and reversing switch, limit switches, all electrical controls and devices including control release device as required for automatic operation and key operated control station. (Coordinate with Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware" for cylinder keyed to building system.) Electrical contractor shall provide the following dependent upon door operation and rating: Line fuses and main line disconnect if motor operated, and smoke detectors. All wire, conduit and boxes for the aforesaid items and also for the motor operator, key operated control station, limit switches and accessory items, i.e., automatic reversing control, electrical controls and devices for automatic operation and any other as may be specified. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door components: 46 47 SUBMITTALS Prior to placing order for coiling doors, Contractor shall submit ordering information to Architect forverification of power requirements and door operation systems. [ridgeline ms] 08330-7 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08330-7 Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. Provide roughing-in diagrams, operating instructions, and maintenance information. Include the following: Setting drawings, templates, and installation instructions for built-in or embedded anchor devices. Motors: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting arrangements; size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding lug; and coatings. Fire-Rated Doors: Information describing fire-release system, including testing and resetting instructions. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned ordetailed in manufacturer's data sheets. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring and between components provided by door manufacturer and those provided by others. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the overhead coiling door manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. Furnish each overhead coiling door as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer, including hardware, accessories, mounting and installation components. Unless otherwise acceptable to Architect, furnish overhead coiling door units by one manufacturer for entire project. Fire-Rated Door. Assemblies: Provide assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per UL 10b, and that are labeled and listed for fire ratings indicated by UL, FM, ITS/Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Furnish each door with a metal UL label as evidence of rating, with label indicating rating in hours of duration of exposure to fire. . Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed and labeled The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled" as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. PART 2 -PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Atlas Door Corp.; Div. of Clopay Building Products Co. The Cookson Company. Cornell Iron Works Inc. [ridgeline ms] 08330-2 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08330-2 1 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION 2 3 Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling doorcurtain of interlocking slats, designed to withstand wind loadirig 4 indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated,. provide.slats 5 of material thickness recommended by door manufacturer for pertormance, size, and type of door indicated, 6 and as follows: 7 8 Stainless-Steel Door Curtain Slats: Type 300 series, ASTM A 240 (ASTM A 240M or ASTM A 666): 9 10 Stainless-Steel Sheet Thickness: Not less than 0.025 inch (0.65 mm). 11 12 Endlocks (Counter Doors): Manufacturer's standard locks on not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain 13 alignment and resistance against- lateral movement. 14 " 15 Bottom Bar (Counter Doors):, Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape stainless-steel 16 to suit type of curtain slats. 18 Automatic Reversing Control: Provide motor operated doors with combination bottom astragal and sensor 19 edge. 20 21 Curtain Jamb Guides (Counter Doorsl: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of angles, or channels and angles of 22 material and finish to match curtain slats, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain 23 to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent ' 24 metal-to-metal contact and minimize noise of travel and removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of 25 curtain. ~a HOODS AND ACCESSORIES 30 Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating. mechanism at opening head and act as 31 weatherseal. Contour to suit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom 32 edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods. Provide intermediate support brackets 33 as required to prevent sag. 34 35 Fabricate hoods of stainless-steel sheet, Type 300 series, complying with ASTM A 240 36 (ASTM A 240M) or ASTM A 666, and not.less than 0.025-inch (0.65-mm) thick, for stainless-steel 37 doors. 38 39 Include automatic drop baffle to guard against passage of smoke or flame at all fire rated doors. 40 41 Fire-Rated Counter: Provide at all fire rated counter shutters, manufacturer's- high-pressure decorative 42 laminate covered countertop, UL.tested and labeled for 1-1/2-hour fire. rating for approved use with fire-door 43 assembly. 44 45 ~ High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range 46 of colors; patterns, and finishes of type used in fire-door assembly tested by UL. 47 48 Smoke Seals: Provide UL-listed and -tested smoke-seal perimeter gaskets. . ' 49 50 Push/Pull Handles: 'For push-up-operated or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized steel lifting 51 handles on inside bottom bar of door. 52 ~ .. . 53 Provide pull-down straps or pole hooks for doors more than 84 inches (2130 mm) high. . 54 ~~ r ' [ridgeline ms1.08330-3 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08330-3 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM General: Counterbalance doors by means ofadjustable-tension steel helical torsion spring, mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with required barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. (2.5 mm/m) of span under full load. Provide spring balance of one or more oil=tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends grid carry torsional load. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast-iron orcold-rolled steel plate with bell-mouth guide groove for curtain. FINISHES General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Stainless-Steel Finishes: General: Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. Bright. Directional Polish: No. 4 finish. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS Provide auxiliary operators on motor operated doors as indicated ih following schedule. Manual Push-Up Operation: Design counterbalance mechanism so that required lift or pull for door operation does not exceed 25 lbs. Adjust operating mechanism so that curtain can be easily stopped at any point in its travel and remain in position until movement is reactivated. ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. Comply with NFPA 70. [ridgeline ms] 08330-4 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08330-4 1 Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting 2 emergency auxiliary operator. 3 4 Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 5 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V, ac or dc. 6 7 Door-Operator Type: Provide wall-, hood-, orbracket-mounted, jackshaft, gear-head type door operator unit 8 consisting of electric motor, enclosed worm-gear running-in-oil primary drive, chain and sprocket secondary 9 drive solenoid operated brake, and quick disconnect-release for manual operation. 10 !; 11 Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque,. reversible, continuous-duty, Class A insulated, electric motors, 12 complying with NEMA MG 1, with overload protection, sized to start, accelerate, and operate door in either 13 direction, from any position, at not less than 2/3 fps (0.2 m/s) or more than 1 fps (0.3 m/s), without exceeding 14 nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 15 16 Type: Polyphase, medium-induction type. . . 17 18 Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated. 19 20 Coordinate wiring requirements and electric characteristics of motors with building electrical system. 21 ~; 22 Provide open dripproof-type motor, and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. 23 24 Provide totally enclosed, nonventilated orfan-cooled motors, fitted with plugged drain, and controller 25 with NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure where indicated. i 26 27 Remote-Control Station: Provide keyed lockout, momentary-contact, 3-button control station with push-button 28 controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop." ' ~ 29 30 Provide interior units, .full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-.purpose 31 NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. 32 33 Coordinate with Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware" for cylinder keyed to building system. 34 35 Automatic Reversing Control: Provide each motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor I 36 able to protect full width of door opening. Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door 37 travel to fully open position. 38 39 Sensor Edge: Provide each motorized door with an automatic safety sensor edge, located within i 40 astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor immediately stops and 41 reverses downward doortravel, Connecttocontrol circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel 42 orself-coiling cable. ' 43 44 Provide electrically actuated automatic bottom bar. 46 Self-Monitoring Type: Provide self-monitoring, 4-wire configured device. 47 48 Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door 49 at fully opened and fully closed positions. ' 50 51 Fire Rated Electric Door Operation: . 53 General: By means of a control /release device the rated fire doors shall be connected to the fire alarm ~ 54 system through smoke detectors located on each side of the door. These detectors will not receive 55 emergency fire signals from the rest of the system, but will send alarm monitoring signals back to the main i 56 alarm panel. Within the control /release device will be a battery backup system to maintain these doors in [ridgeline ms] 08330-5 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08330-5 fully operational status in the event of a power failure to the main alarm system. Batteries shall be continuously maintained at full-charged capacity throughout the building electrical system.. Control /Release Device: Similar to Atlas "Fire Scout" Model B2 with the following function /features: Power down thru motor operation. Provide device continuously energized fail safe unit. Time delayed 10 seconds in signal mode. Time delayed 30 seconds in power toss mode. Activation eliminated if door already in closed position. Internal battery to independently power peripheral devices. Governor: Oscillating type or viscous speed type as required to control speed of descent. Door shall close at a controlled rate of descent having an average velocity of 6 inches per second minimum. Fusible Link: Manufacturer's standard 165°. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION General: Install doorand operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified. Install fire-rated doors to comply with NFPA 80. ADJUSTING Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter. DEMONSTRATION Startup Services: Engage afactory-authorized service representative to perform startup services and to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below: Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm connected fire-release system. Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, preventive maintenance, and procedures for testing and resetting release devices. [ridgeline ms] 08330-6 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08330-6 1 2 3 ' 4 5 ' 6 8 9 10 ' 11 12 13 14 ' 15 16 ' 17 18 19 '~ 20 21 ' 22 ' 23 24 ' 25 26 27 28 29 Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice. SCHEDULE OVERHEAD COILING DOORS ITEM DOOR NUMBER 114A 115 312A 3128 Counter Door / / / / Service Door Fire Rated Motor Operated Manual Operated / / / / Chain Hoist / / / / Crank Hoist S.S. Slats / / / / Overhead Grille / / Insulated Galvanized Hood S.S. Hood / / / / Cylinder Lock Slide Bolt Locking Bar END OF SECTION 08330 [ridgeline ms] 08330-7 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08330-7 'I ' SECTION 08340 -OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES PART 1 -GENERAL 3 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions ofContract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 ' 7 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. R 10 SUMMARY 11 12 Extent of overhead coiling grilles is shown on drawings. 14 Provide complete operating grille assemblies including curtains, guides, counterbalance mechanism, 15 hardware, operators, and installation accessories as indicated. 16 17 Grille manufacturer to furnish the following for power operated units: Motor operator including brake, 18 reversing switch and limit switches. 19 20 Electrical contractor to furnish the following for power operated units: Line fuses and main line disconnect. 21 All wire, conduit and boxes for the aforesaid items and also for the motor operator, key operated control 22 station, limit switches and accessory items, i.e. Automatic Reversing Control, and/or any other as may be 23 specified. 24 ', 25 Finish Hardware shall furnish key-operated control switch. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, roughing-in diagrams, and installation instructions for each type and size of overhead coiling grille. Include operating instructions arid maintenance data. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for special components and installations which are not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. QUALITY ASSURANCE Provide each overhead coiling grille as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer, including hardware, accessories, mounting and installation components. Unless otherwise acceptable to Architect, furnish overhead coiling grille units by one manufacturer for entire project. PROJECT CLOSEOUT 48 Warran 49 ,', 50 Provide aone-year warranty signed by the manufacturer for the installation ahd materials of the 51 door. Warranty period to commence on day of Substantial Completion. 52 . 53 54 [ridgeline ms) .08340 - 1 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08340 - 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one ofthe following or approved. The Cookson Company. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. Kinnear Div., Harsco Corp. North American Door, Div. of Jim Walters. Overhead Door Corp. Atlas Door Corp. GRILLE CURTAIN General: Fabricate grille curtain consisting of a network of 5/16" minimum diameter horizontal rods spaced approximately 2" o.c. Interconnect rods by vertical links approximately 5/8" wide, spaced approximately 9" apart and rotating on the rods. Aluminum Grilles: ASTM B 221, with clear, satin anodized finish. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard extruded shape or two angles, finished to match grille Provide replaceable flexible vinyl or neoprene continuous floor bumper at underside of bar. End Locks: Continuous end links or other devices at ends of rods, locking and retaining grille curtain in guides against excessive pressures, maintaining curtain alignment and preventing lateral movement. Guides: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum shape having curtain groove with return lips or bars to retain curtain. Furnish pile strips, rigid vinyl liner, or other nonmetallic inserts to prevent metal-to-metal contact and minimize noise of travel. Furnish removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain. Finish guides to match grille. COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM Counterbalance grille by means of steel helical torsion spring, mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel, connected to curtain. Use grease-sealed ball bearings orself- lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. Counterbalance: Hot-formed structural quality carbon steel, welded or seamless pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support the roll-up curtain without distortion and limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03" per foot of span under full load. Furnish spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustmentaccessible from outside barrel. Provide cast steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of case-hardened steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron orcold-rolled steel plate. [ridgeline ms] 08340 - 2 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08340 - 2 1 Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to suit 2 end of brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide 3 closed ends for surface-mounted hoods, and any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall '. 4 face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sag. 5 6 Fabricate hoods for aluminum grilles of alloy 3003 aluminum sheet not less than 0.032" thick, ' 7 finished to match curtain. R ELECTRIC GRILLE OPERATORS General: Furnish electric operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by grille manufacturer; complete with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, gear reduction unit, and solenoid operated brake. 16 Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for automatically releasing brake for emergency manual 17 operation. Mount disconnect and operator so that they are accessible from floor level. Include an interlock '. 18 device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. 19 20 Design operator so that motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting 21 - emergency auxiliary operator. 22 23 Operator Type: Furnish wall orbracket-mounted operator units consisting of electric motor, worm gear drive 24 from motor to reduction gear box, chain or worm gear drive from reduction box to a gear wheel mounted on ' 25 counterbalance shaft, and disconnect- release for manual operation. Provide motor, .and drive assembly of 26 horsepower and design as determined by manufacturer for size of unit required. 27. ' 28 Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, constant duty, Class A insulated electric motors with ~ 29 overload protection, sized to move grille in either direction, from any position, at not less than 2/3' nor more 30 than 1' per second. '; 31 32 Coordinate wiringrcquirements and currentcharacteristics of motors with building electrical system. 33 34 Provide open-drip-proof type motor, and controller with NEMA Type I enclosure.. Key-Operated Control: Furnished by Section 08700 -Finish Hardware. 39 PART 3 -EXECUTION '; an 42 INSTALLATION 43 44 Install grilles and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, in accordance with final shop ~ 45 drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and as specified herein. Upon completion of installation including work by other~.trades, lubricate, test and adjust grilles to operate easily, free from warp, twist or distortion. END OF SECTION 08340 ' [ridgeline ms] 08340 - 3 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08340 - 3 ' SECTION 08360 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS ~, 2 1 4 5 6 ' 8 9 10 11 12 ' 13 14 15 16 17 ,. 18 19 20 21 22 23 ' 24 25 26 27 ' 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 ,35 36 37 ' 38 39 40 41 ' 42 43 44 ' 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 ' 53 PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Extent of sectional overhead doors is shown on drawings. Manual operation. QUALITY ASSURANCE Provide each sectional overhead door as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer, including frames, sections, brackets, guides, tracks, counterbalance mechanisms, hardware, operators and installation accessories, to suit the openings and head room allowable. Unless otherwise acceptable to Architect, furnish sectional overhead door units by one manufacturerforevtire project. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into masonry for installation of units. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. Wind Loading: Design and reinforce sectional overhead doors to withstand a 20 Ib. per sq. ft. wind loading pressure. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, roughing-in diagrams, and installation instructions for each type and size of overhead door. Include manufacturer's operating instructions and maintenance data. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for special components and installations which are not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's data. PART 2 -PRODUCTS MANUFACTURER Subject to compliahce with requirements, provide products of one of the following: Kinnear, Div. Harsco Overhead Door Co. Raynor Manufacturing Co. [ridgeline ms] 08360 - 1 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360 - 1 DOOR SECTIONS All door sections shall be roll-formed from 20-gauge hot-dipped galvanized steel with integral reinforcing ribs , consisting of six longitudinal ribs and two flat bottom V-grooves. Meeting rails shall have double-rabbeted interlocking joints to provide weathertight closure. Interlocked rails shall function as integral struts and sure alignment with the full width of each section. When required, applied steel struts shall be bolted to the inside ' of sections. All end and intermediate stiles shall be cut, shaped, and welded to the contour of the door sections and provide a total of 2" thickness. Doors shall have 16-gauge stiles. STEEL SECTIONS t Construct door sections from galvanized structural quality carbon steel sheets complying with ASTM A 446, Grade A, or ASTM A 526, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, and a minimum G90 zinc coating complying with ASTM A 525. Steel Sheet Thickness: 20-gauge. Exterior Section Face: Eight longitudinal ribs. Fabricate sections from a single sheet to provide units not more than 24" high, and nominal 2"deep. Meeting ',, rails shall have double-rabbeted interlocking joints to provide weathertight closure. Interlocking rails shall function as integral struts and assure alignment with the full width of each section. Enclose open section with 16 ga. galvanized steel channel end stiles welded in place. Provide intermediate ~' stiles, cut to door section profile, spaced at not more than 48" o.c. and welded in place. Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom section profile. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcing, as required by doorwidth and design wind loading. Provide galvanized steel bars, struts, trusses or strip steel, formed to depth, and bolted or ,' welded in place. Finish door sections as follows: Steel sections shall be chemically treated for paint adhesion PRIOR to application of factory applied white primer finish on inside faces. All door edges and stiles shall be prime painted. Finish painting shall be as noted in Section 09900. TRACKS SUPPORTS. AND ACCESSORIES Tracks: Provide manufacturer's standard galvanized 3" steel track system. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing and reinforcing for rigid support of ball bearing roller guides, for required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track at 2" o.c. for door drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical, or otherwise design to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed. Weld or bolt to track supports. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Provide galvanized steel track reinforcement and. support members. Secure, reinforce and support tracks as required for size and weight of door to provide strength and rigidity, and to ensure against sag, sway, and detrimental vibration during opening and closing of doors: Support and attach tracks at opening jambs with brackets or continuous angle welded to tracks and attached ! I to wall. Support horizontal (ceiling tracks) with continuous angle welded to track and supported by laterally-braced attachments to overhead structural members at curve and end of tracks. i [ridgeline ms] 08360 - 2 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360 - 2 ' 1 Weather Seals: Provide continuous rubber, neoprene, or flexible vinyl adjustable weatherstrip gasket at tops 2 and compressible astragal on bottoms of each overhead door. 3 ' 4 In addition, provide continuous flexible seals at doorjamb edges for a fully weathertight installation. 5 6 ' 7 HARDWARE 8 9 Provide heavy-duty, rust=resistant hardware, with galvanized orcadmium-plated orstainless steel fasteners, 10 to suit type of door. '. 11 12 Rollers: Provide heavy-duty rollers, with steel ball bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with 13 varying projections to suit slope of track. Provide roller tires to suit size of track (3"diameter for 3" track) and ~. 14 as follows: Case-hardened steel tires; for normal installations. 17 18 Locking: Fabricate locking device assembly with lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bar to engage through slots in tracks. Locking Bars: Full-disc Cremone type, both jamb sides, operable from inside and outside. Z4 ': 25 Lock cylinder is specified in another Division 8 Section 28 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISMS 29 30 Torsion Spring: Hang door assembly for operation by torsion spring counterbalance mechanism, consisting 31 of adjustable tension tempered steel torsion springs mounted on acase-hardened steel shaft, and connected 32 to door with galvanized aircraft type lift cable. 33 34 Provide cast aluminum or grey iron casting cable drums, grooved to receive cable. Mount counterbalance ' 35 mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of shaft with one additional 36 mid-point bracket for shafts up to 16' long and 2 additional brackets at 1/3-points to support shafts over 16' 37 long, unless closer spacing recommended by door manufacturer. ' 38 39 Include aspring-loaded steel or bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side, designed 40 to stop door automatically if either cable breaks. Provide either a compression spring or leaf spring bumper 41 installed at end of each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation. ' 42 43 44 PART 3 -EXECUTION 45 ' 46 47 INSTALLATION 48 49 Install door, track, and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold stops, ' 50 anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports in accordance with final. shop drawings, manufacturer's 51 instructions and as herein specified. 52 53 Fasten vertical track assembly to framing at not less. than 24" o.c. Hang horizontal track from structural 54 overhead framing with angle or channel hangers, welded and bolt-fastened. in place. Provide sway bracing, 55 diagonal bracing, and reinforcing as required for rigid installation of track and door operating equipment. ' S6 ' [ridgeline ms] 08360 - 3 ~ SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360 - 3 1 Upon completion of installation, including work by other trades, lubricate, test and adjust doors to operate 2 easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter. 3 4 5 END OF SECTION 08360 [ridgeline ms] 08360 - 4 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360 - 4 ~1 SECTION 08525 -VINYL W/NDOWS PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division=1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. SUMMARY Extent of each type, grade and pertormance class of vinyl window units required is indicated on the drawings and schedules. Vinyl window units required are commercial grade of the pertormance class indicated. Minimum depth of frame section: 3-7/16" from front to back of frame: Types of vinyl window units required include the following: Awning Fixed windows ' ~ 41 4' 4; ' 4~ 4: ' ; 4E 4; 4E 4S . 5E 5' 5: 5: Glass thickness and type for windows is as specified in Section 08800. Applications of vinyl windows on the project include individual units set in conventional wall construction. DEFINITIONS Performance class number included as a part of the window designation system is the actual design pressure in pounds per sq. ft. used to determine the structural test pressure and water test pressure. Structural test pressure, windload test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure Water leakage resistance test pressure is equivalent to 15 percent of the design pressure with 2.86 psf as a minimum. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Provide vinyl windows engineered, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, . wind loading, and impact loading without failure, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's standard window assemblies representing types, grades, classes, and sizes required for Project according to test methods indicated. Test Criteria: Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency based on the following criteria: Design Wind Velocity at Project site is 70 mi./h [ridgeline ms] 08525 - 1 VINYL WINDOWS 08525 - 1 Performance Requirements: Testing shall demonstrate compliance with requirements indicated in AAMA 101 for air infiltration, water penetration, and structural performance for type, grade, and performance class of window units required. Where required design pressure exceeds the minimum for the specified window grade, comply with requirements of AAMA 101, Section 3, "Optional Performance Classes", for higher than minimum performance class. Thermal Transmittance: Provide window units with a U-value maximum of 0.49 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.9 W/sq. m x K) at 15 mi./h exterior wind velocity, when tested according to AAMA 1503.1. SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each type of window including information not fully detailed in the manufacturer's standard product data and the following: Elevations of continuous work at 1/4" scale Typical unit elevations at 3/4" scale Full size section details of every typical composite member Anchors Hardware Operators Accessories Glazing details Samples: Submit 3 samples each of the specified finishes on 12" length of window members. Certification: Provide certification by the manufacturer showing that each type, grade and size of window unit complies with requirements where the manufacturer's standard window units have been tested in accordance with specified tests and meet performance requirements specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE Standards: Requirements for vinyl windows, terminology and standards of performance,- and fabrication workmanship are those specified .and recommended in AAMA 101-93 and applicable general recommendation published by AAMA. Single Source Responsibility: Provide vinyl windows produced by a single manufacturer capable of showing prior production of units similar to those required. Energy Code: All window manufacturers' products shall comply with State of Washington Energy Code. PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Where possible, check actual window openings in construction work by accurate field measurement before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress as directed by the Contractor to avoid delay of work. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit of window units. [ridgeline ms] 08525 - 2 VINYL WINDOWS 08525 - 2 ~, 1 PROJECT CLOSEOUT Warran 5 . Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Contractor, Installer and vinyl 6 7 window manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace vinyl window units which fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited 8 to structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air infiltration, faulty 9 operation of sash and hardware, and deterioration of vinyl, vinyl finishes and other materials beyond 10 normal weathering: This warranty shall be in .addition to and not a limitation of other rights the 1 11 Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 12 13 14 Warran eriod for vinyl windows is for ten years after the date of final completion. 15 16 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 17 18 19 MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: ' 24 Fixed Windows 25 26 Best Built 27 Insulate Industries Inc. 28 Milgard Mfg. Co. 30 Awning Windows 31 ' 32 Best Built 33 Insulate Industries Inc. 34 Milgard Mfg. Co. ' 35 36 37 MATERIALS 38 39 General: Comply with requirements of AAMA 101-93. 40 41 PVC: Windows shall be extruded, high impact resistant, rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Windows shall be ' 42 constructed in a neat workmanlike manner. All corners of the frame and sash shall be mitered and fusion 43 welded. All welds are to be dressed and finished to match the surrounding frame area. 44 ,; 45 46 Fasteners: Provide materials warranted by the manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with vinyl window members, trim, hardware, anchors and other components of window units. 48 Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into vinyl, reinforce the interior with aluminum or 49 non- magnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard non-corrosive 50 pressed-in splined grommet nuts.. (For lock attachment on horizontal sliders and single hung 51 windows.) 52 53 Exposed Fastehers: Except where unavoidable for application of hardware, do not use exposed 54 fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match the finish of the member or 55 hardware being fastened, as appropriate. ^. 56 [ridgeline ms] 08525 - 3 VINYL WINDOWS 08525 - 3 Anchors, Clips and Window Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips and window accessories of aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or hot-dip zinc coated steel or iron complying with the requirements of ASTM A 386; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. Glazing: Provide manufacturers clear, sealed insulating units of 1"overall thickness that complies with ASTM E-774-81 Class A, exterior glazed using a closed cell foam tape and applied PVC glazing bead. Compression Type Glazing Strips and Weather-Stripping: Unless otherwise indicated, and at the manufacturer's option, provide compressible stripping for glazing and weather-stripping such as molded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with AAMA SG-1 or with ASTM D 2000 Designation 26C415 to 3BC620, or molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287, or molded expanded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Grade 4. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated window units, provide type recommended by the manufacturer for joint size and movement. Sealant shall remain permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and non-migrating. WINDOW GRADES AND PERFORMANCE CLASSIFICATION Commercial Windows: Provide window units complying with requirements of AAMA Grade and Performance Class indicated: Fixed C35 Awning C30 WINDOW TYPES General: The following paragraphs define the operating arrangement for the types of sash required in window units and specify minimum provisions for each type. The drawings indicate which panels of each window unit are operable sash and which are fixed. ALL EXTERIOR WINDOWS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RECEIVING 1"THICK INSULATING GLASS PANELS. Awning windows are window units containing one or more swing-out, top-hinged or projected sash, arranged in a vertical stack within a common frame and operated by a common control device that swings the bottom edges of ventilators outward. The control device shall operate ventilators simultaneously, securely closing them at both jambs without use of additional manually-controlled locking devices. Sash operation shall permit inside cleaning of outside glass faces. Fixed windows are window units consisting of a glazed frame installed into one opening and are not operable HARDWARE General: Except to the extent that more specific or stringent requirements are indicated, provide the manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with vinyl and of sufficient strength to perform the function for which it is intended. Awning Windows: Provide the following equipment and operating hardware: Operating Device: Combination lever handle and cam-type lock. Pivots: Balance-support arms with sliding pivots attached to the vertical slide bars (2 per sash). [ridgeline ms] 08525 - 4 VINYL WINDOWS ~ 08525 - 4 ~,. 1 FABRICATION I ,, General: Except to the extent that more specific or stringent requirements are indicated, provide manufacturer's standard fabrication that complies with indicated standards and that produces units that are reglazable without dismantling sash framing. Include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units preglazed at the factory. Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for window units and profile requirements are indicated on the drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated along with maximum and minimum dimensions as required to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. Details shown are based upon standard details by one or more manufacturers. Similar details by other approved manufacturers will be acceptable, .provided they comply with size requirements, minimum/maximum profile requirements, and performance standards as indicated or specified. Provide weepholes and internal water passages to conduct infiltrating water to the exterior. Glazin Stops: Provide vinyl snap-on glazing stops, coordinated with glass selection and glazing system indicated. Finish glazing stops to match window units. Preglazed Fabrication: Preglaze window units at the factory where possible and practical for applications indicated. Comply with .glass and glazing requirements of the "Glass and Glazing" sections of these specifications, and AAMA 101V-86. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSPECTION Inspect openings before beginning installation. Verify that rough or masonry opening is correct and the sill plate is level. Wood frame walls shall be dry, clean, sound and well-nailed, free of voids and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in the opening and within 3 inches of the opening. INSTALLATION Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installation of window units, hardware, operators, and other components of the work. Set units Ip umb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. Do not anchor window to header. Set sill members and other members in a bed of compound or with joint fillers or gaskets, to provide weathertight construction. Fill any remaining cavities between new window frame and existing frame with fiberglass or foam insulation to maintain thermal break of new window. [ridgeline ms] 08525 - 5 VINYL WINDOWS 08525 - 5 CLEANING Clean vinyl surfaces promptly after installation of windows. Exercise care to avoid damage to finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. Clean Ig ass of preglazed units promptly after installation of windows; comply with requirements of the "Glass an,d Glazing" section for cleaning and maintenance. PROTECTION Initiate and maintain protection and other precautions required through the remainder of the construction period to ensure that, except for normal weathering,. window units will be free of damage or deterioration at the time. of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 08525 (ridgeiine ms] 08525 - 6 VINYL WINDOWS 08525 - 6 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 SECTION 08700 -- FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 =GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and. general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work :under this section includes the complete finish hardware requirements for .the project. Quantities listed are for the Contractor's convenience only and are not guaranteed. Items not specifically mentioned, but necessary to complete the work shall be furnished, matching the items specified in quality and finish. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" 2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" . .3.. Division 8 Section "Overhead Coiling Doors" 4. .Division 1.2 Section "Stock Factory Built Casework" 5. Division 16 "Electrical" C. Electronic Hardware Coordination: Coordiriate Work of this Section with the requirements of systems specified under Division 16, as required to provide materials, rough-in, fabrication, and installation for complete grid operating system tomeet the operational requirements stated. 1.3 REFERENCES . A. Standards 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.18 - 2000 Materials and, Finishes 2.. NFPA 80 - 1999 -Standard for Fire Doors and Windows 3. Underwriters Laboratories -Building Materials Directory 4. UL 10C -Underwriters Laboratories, "Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies" 5. NFPA 252 -1999 -Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies B. Codes 1. IBC International Building Code (IBC) 2003 2. ADAAG -Americans with Disabilities Act, "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings arid Facilities" [ridgeline ms] 08700-1 ...FINISH HARDWARE . 08700 - 1 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS 2 A. General Requirements: All Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal 3 Procedures. 4 B. Product Data: Submit six copies of manufacturer's data for each item of finish hardware 5 C. Hardware Schedule: Submit six copies of a detailed Finish Hardware Schedule. 6 1. The submitted Finish Hardware Schedule shall indicate the complete designation of every 7 item required for each .door or opening. 8 2. Furnish cover sheet listing title of project as shown on the Contract Documents, name, 9 address, phone grid fax numbers of Owner, Architect, Contractor, and Supplier, name of 10 Certified Hardware Consultant, and date of submittal. 11 3. List each. opening individually under separate headings in the same order as the Door !' 12 Schedule. Do not group like or similar Doors under the same heading. Do not continue 13 individual headings on separate pages. ~~ 14 4. Each heading shall indicate opening location, handing, degree of opening, door size, type, fire 15 rating, and Door and Frame material. 16 5. Indicate product Manufacturer and incorporate cross-reference to symbols used in Article 2.4 ~~ 17 .Hardware Schedule. ~ ~ 18 6. Include with Schedule, an Index indicating door number, heading, page, and locking function 19 of each opening. 20 7. Across reference for any abbreviations or symbols used shall be included 21 8. Schedules in coded or horizontal format are unacceptable. 22 9. Submittals not conforming to these requirements will be returned without review, for re- 23 submittal. Following is an example of the required format: 24 1 Sgl. Door #503A -Corridor 501 from Classroom 503 LHR 90° 25 3-0 x 7-0 x 1-3/4" x 20 Minute x Type B SC WD x HMF 26 3 Each Butts (B2) MC TA714 US26D (652) 4.5 x 4.5 x 1/2MS , 27 1 Lockset (L4) CR ML2055 NSM 630 LHR x C6 x CT6 x SA114 x M17 28 1 Door Closer (C2) NO PR7500-BF~AIum/689 x STB 29 1 Kick Plate (K2) TI B4EKP - 10 x 34.5 - US32D x B4E x CTSK 30 1 Wall Stop (S1) TR 1270CX-SV 626 (US26D) 31 1 .Set Smoke Gasket (W1) PE S88D - 17' per Set 32 D. Processing and Revisions: Hardware schedules will not be reviewed by the Architect until they , 33 have been reviewed and approved by Contractor. The Finish Hardware Submittal shall be -kept 34 current throughout the project duration. All revisions incorporated shall be .submitted in 35 accordance with the above requirements. Submit only cover sheet and revised pages. All 36 revisions shall clearly identify changes from previous submittal content.. 37 E. Samples: If requested by the Architect, submit one sample of each exposed hardware category, . 38 finished as required, and tagged with full description for.coordination with the hardware schedule. [ridgeline ms] 08700-2 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 2 I i ~~ 1 Samples will be reviewed, by the Architect, for design and finish only, compliance with other 2 requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor. Units which are acceptable and remain ' 3 undamaged through submittal procedures may be used on the project. 4 F. Color Samples: Submit six sets of color charts and physical samples of each product requiring ' S color selection. 6 G. Key Schedule: Upon completion of the Key meeting indicated under Paragraph 2.2 C., submit four 7 copies of a key schedule indicating the complete project key system for approval. Obtain approval ' 8 prior to proceeding with lock portion of the project. 9 H. Wiring Diagrams. Submit Six (6) copies of electronic hardware system riser and terminal-to- 10 terminal wiring diagrams for each Electronic Hardware application, cross-.referenced to the Finish 11 Hardware Submittal and Door Schedule. Include voltage requirements along with product data 12 and installation instructions. Indicate connection points to equipment provided under Division 16. ~'` 13 I. Operations and Maintenance Data. 14 1. Submit Maintenance and Operations Manuals under the provisions of Sections 01700, Project 15 Close Out and 01730, Operation and Maintenance Data, 16 2. Manuals shall contain final copy of the Finish Hardware Submittal, Product Data, Templates, ' 17 Key Schedule, Installation Instructions, Wiring Diagrams, and Warrantees. ~ 18 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ': 19 A. Supplier: Finish hardware shall be supplied by a recognized builders' hardware supplier who has 20 been furnishing hardware in the same area as the project for a period of not less than five years. 21 They shall be a factory direct, authorized distributor of the Exit Devices, Locksets and Door 22 Closers. The supplier's organization shall include an Architectural Hardware Consultant, certified 23 by the Door and Hardware Institute, who is available at all reasonable times during the course of 24 the work to meet with the Owner, Architect or Contractor for project hardware consultation. t: 25 B. Approved Suppliers: The below listed suppliers are approved for use on this project. Alternative 26 suppliers must be pre-approved by procedure for "substitutions" described in Section 00120, 27 ~ Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. Other proposed suppliers must. submit a resume of similar ,` 28 completed projects for prior approval 29 Benson Industries. Tacoma, WA (253) 474-5356 30 Builders Hardware & Supply Co. Inc. Seattle, WA (206) 281-3700 31 Contract Hardware, Inc. Seattle, WA ~ (206) 298-4770 32 Evergreen Construction Specialties Auburn, WA (253) 395-9933 33 C. Manufacturer: Obtain each kind of Hardware (Butts, Locksets, Exit Devices, Door Closers, etc.) ` 34 from only one manufacturer. 35 D. Installer: Finish hardware shall be installed only by experienced tradesmen in compliance with . 36 trade union jurisdictions, either at the door and frame fabrication plant or at the project site. ~I 37 E. Automatic Operators: 38 1. The Operators and Accessories shall be installed by factory authorized and trained personnel, ~' 39 certified by American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM). ' [ridgeline ms] 08700-3 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 3 2. The below listed installers are approved for use on this project. Alternative installers must be pre-approved by procedure for "substitutions" described in Section 00120, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. Other proposed installers must submit a resume of similar successfully completed projects for prior approval: 5 C-4 Products Puyallup, WA 1-800-383-1650 6 Commercial Hardware Services Auburn, WA (253) 638-8684 7 Western Entrance Technology Monroe, WA (360) 863-9382 8 3. Pre-installation Conference: Prior to .commencement of electrical work, provide for local 9 factory representatives of the Automatic Operators to attend apre-installation conference to 10 review rough in and installation requirements with representatives of the General Contractor, 11 Electrical Contractor, Finish Hardware Supplier, Automatic Operator and Finish Hardware 12 Installers. 13 4. Certificates: Prior to substantial completion, provide certification from the local manufacturers 14 representative of the Automatic Operators that all Operator applications .are installed in 15 accordance with manufacturer recommendations. Submit certification in writing to the Owner 16 in care of the Architect. 17 F. Electrified Exit Devices: Provide for Exit Device Manufacturer's local Factory Representative to 18 consult and instruct General Contractor and Electrical sub-contractor in rough-in and installation 19 requirements for Electrified Exit Devices and Accessories. Include substantial completion 20 inspection and written acceptance of installation. Include two (2) separate visits, up to eight hours 21 each. 22 G. Templates: Furnish hardware templates for each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be 23 factory prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check the shop drawings of such 24 other work to confirm that provisions will be made for the proper installation of hardware. 25 H._ Regulatory Requirements: 26 1. All finish hardware shall comply with applicable local and state building codes. 27 2. Fire Rated Door and Frame Assemblies: Provide only hardware which has been tested and 28 listed by a recognized testing agency for the types and sizes of. doors required, and which 29 complies with the requirements of the door and door frame labels. Provide Door Closers, 30 Automatic self latching bolts, coordinators, gasketing, astragals, or other components if 31 required to conform to label requirements. 32 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE 33 A: Packaging: Each item or package is to be separately tagged with identification related to the final 34 hardware schedule. Basic installation instructions shall be included in the packages. 35 B. Storage: Provide a locked room at the jobsite for the storage of the hardware. 36 1.7 WARRANTY 37 A. Finish hardware shall be guaranteed against defects iri workmanship and operation for a period of 38 one year, backed by a factory guarantee of the hardware manufacturer. The following. products 39 shall be guaranteed for periods beyond one Year: 40 1. Lockset and Latchsets: Two Years [ridgeline ms] 08700-4 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 4 ,? 1 2. Door Closers: Ten Years 2 3. Panic Devices: Three Years 3 1.8 MAINTENANCE 4 A. Furnish the following extra materials, which shall be delivered directly to the Owner prior to 5 substantial completion. 6 1'. Provide one Set of Special Tools required for Installation and Adjustment 7 2. Extra Hardware: 8 Quantity Description Factory Number 9 Six Padlocks PL5080 212 10 Two Locksets ML2055 11 Two Door Closers PR7500 12 PART2-PRODUCTS 13 2.1 MATERIALS 14 A. Products may be furnished by the manufacturers listed under "As Specified" below, or equivalent 15 products of type, grade, design, and function, from manufacturers listed under "Acceptable 16 Substitutions". Requests for products not listed shall be made in .accordance with Section 00120, 17 Supplementary Instructionsto Bidd ers. , 18 Product As Specified Acceptable Substitutions 19 Butt Hinges ~ McKinney Bommer, Hager 20 Continuous Gear Hinges Pemko Roton, Select Products 21 Locksets Corbin/Russwin None 22 Exit Devices Corbin/Russwin - None 23 Door Closers Norton None 24 Electronic Lock and Exit Device Architectural Control Systems None 25 Modifications 26 Power Supplies, Key Switches Architectural Control Systems None 27 Power Transfers. Von Duprin None . 28 Automatic Operators Keane Monroe None 29 Auto. Flush Bolts, Coordinators Door Controls None 30 Kick & Mop Plates Tice Industries Rockwood, Trimco 31 Wall and Floor Stops Trimco Rockwood 32 Overhead Stop and, Holders Glynn Johnson Rixson, ABH 33 Electro-Magnetic Door Release Rixson-Firemark .None 34 Weatherstrip & Thresholds Pemko National Guard, Reese 35 Key Cabinet Telkee Lund 36~ B. Finish: 37 Finish in general- shall be:.US26D, Satin Chrome Plated, except: 38 1. Locksets, Exit Devices, Push Plates, Door Pulls, Overhead Stops, Kick and Mop Plates, and 39 Exterior Butts: US32D, Satin Stainless Steel (BHMA 630). 40 2. Interior Hinges: US26D, Satin Chrome over Steel Base (BHMA 652). [ridgeline ms] 08700-5 FINISH-'HARDWARE 08700 - 5 '' 1 3. Removable Mullions: Painted Aluminum (BHMA 689). 2 4. Door Closers: Painted Aluminum (BHMA 689). 3 5. Smoke Gasketing: As Selected. 4 6. Threshold, Weatherstrip & Door Bottoms: As listed 5 C. Butts and Continuous Gear Hinges: ' 6 Types required are indicated as B1, B2 etc. under Hardware Schedule, Article 2.4, Column B, and 7. as described below. 8 1. Quantity (per Leaf): 9 a. Door openings up to 60": 2 each. 10 b. Door openings 60 to 90": 3 each. 11 c. Doors over 90": Furnish one additional for each 30" increment or fraction thereof. 12 2. Width of Hinges shall be as required to clear projecting trim or other conditions to allow 13 maximum degree of opening. 14 3. All hinges shall have non-removable pins (NRP -Set Screw in Barrel) 15 4. Hinges shall have Flat Button Tips. 16 5. For unusual size or weight doors, furnish type, size and quantity recommended by the hinge 17 manufacturer. 18 Symbol Function Description Factory Number and Size 19 B2 Full Mortise, Standard Weight TA2714 4-1/2 x 4-1/2" 20 63 Full Mortise, Heavy Weight T4A3786 4-1/2 x 4-1/2" 21 B4 Full Mortise, Standard Wt, Non-Ferrous TA2314 4-1/2 x 4-1/2" 22 B5 Full Mortise, Heavy Wt, Non Ferrous T4A3386 5 x 4-1/2" 23 66 Full Mortise, Heavy Weight T4A3786 5 x 4-1/2" 24 67 Continuous Gear Hinge CFM_SLIHD 25 68 Full Mortise, Heavy Weight, Wide Throw T4A3786 5 x 5" 26 B9 Continuous Gear Hinge, Short Leaf Inset CFM_SLIHD-PT 27 Power Transfer Preparation 28 D. Locksets and Cylinders 29 Types required are indicated as L1, L2 etc. under Hardware Schedule, Article 2.4, Column L, and 30 as described below. 31 1. Furnish all Mortise Lever Handle Locksets and Latches in NSR Design 32 2. Backset:2-3/4" 33 3. Cylinders: Furnish all Locksets and Cylinders with Key Removable Interchangeable Cores. 34 4. All Locksets and Latchsets shall be listed with Underwriters Laboratories for A label and 35 lesser class doors. 36 5. Provide Knurled Lever where Lock Symbol is suffixed with "K" in the. Hardware Schedule. [ridgeline ms] 08700-6 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 6 ' 1 6. Provide Curved Lip Strikes with adequate projection to protect door trim. Provide flat, flush lip 2 strikes for pairs of doors with overlapping Astragals. ' lastic:strike boxes d w ht or d f t s t P id 7 3 . p an ar roug ac urer s rov e manu . 4 ~mbol Function Description Factory Number ' S L1 Latchset ML2010 6 L2 Privacy Lock ML2030 7 L3 Entrance or Office Lockset ML2065 ' 8 L4 Classroom Lock ML2055 9 L5 Storeroom Lockset ML2057 10 L6 Communicating Lock ML2022 11 L7 All Hardware by Door Manufacturer ' 12 L8 Entrance Lockset ML2042 13 Lock Astragal 5000 14 L9 Push Plate 1001-11 - 8 x 16" 15 Pull Plate 1014-3 - 4 x 16" 16 L10 Classroom Lockset ML2055 17 Flush Bolts (2) 3917 - 12" ' 18 Dust Proof Strikes 3911 19 L11 Cylinder (s) Type and Quantity as required 20 Coordinate with Door Manufacturer 21 ~ L12 Push Plates (2) 1001-9 - 6 x 16" '' 22 Pull Plates (2) 1014-3 - 4 x 16" 23 L13 Storeroom Lockset ML2057 24 25 Flush Bolts (2) 3917 - 12" or 3913 Dust Proof Strikes 3911 26 L14 Classroom Lockset ML2055 27 Set Automatic Flush Bolts ~ 842 (HM) or 962 (Wood) 28 Dust Proof Strike 80 29 Coordinator 600 Series x Filler Bar x 30 2/601 Brackets 31 L15 Staff Privacy ML2029 t, 32 Occupancy Indicator Tice Type C 33 L16 Exit Lockset ML2057 x Less Outside Cylinder 34 (Blank Escutcheon, Lever Only) 35 Electronic.Lock Modification ML1520C-1-ML2057-24VDC ' 36 Key Switch 1310-1604640 37 Mortise Cylinder (Key Switch) 1080 38 Power Supply 1400-6100 ' 39 Power Transfer EPT-10 40 See Paragraph 2.3 C for additional components ' 41 System Wiring Riser and Diagram ACSI 42 Functional description for L16: To place Lockset in unlocked mode and power Electronic Door 43 Closer, turn Key Switch fully clockwise and release. Green LED on Key Switch will indicate 44 that power has been applied to the Lockset and Door Closer. Tuning Key to fully 45 counterclockwise position will remove power from Lockset and Door Closer. Red LED on Key 46 switch will indicate that the Lockset is latched and the entry side of the doors is locked. 47 Depressing and releasing the Red Mushroom "Dogging Override" Switch specified under ' 48 paragraph 2.3 C. will reset Lockset to the latched and locked mode and release the Door 49 Closer from hold open by removing power. It will require using the key switch to re-enable •50 unlocking and hold open. 51 1 [ridgeline ms] 08700-7 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 7 1 L17 Deadlocks (2) DL4017 2 (Lock into Header) 3 Roller Latches (2) ' 1559 x 15596 4 Flush Pulls (2) 1115 5 L18 Classroom Lockset ML2055 NSA x Less Outside Lever 6 and Rose t 7 .Flush Turn 1066SM x Adapted for ML2055 8 - Flush Bolts (2) 3917 - 12" 9 Dust Proof Strikes 3911 10 L19 Roller Latches (2) ' 1559 x 15598 11 ~ Door Pulls (2) 1150 12 L20 Privacy Lock ML2065 13 Occupancy Indicator t Tice Type C x Security Spindle. 14 L21 Classroom Locksets (2) ML2055 15 L22 Deadlock DL4017 16 Push Plate 1001-11 x Cut for Cylinder - 17 Pull Plate ' 1001-3 x Cut for Thumb Turn 18 L23 Exit Lock ML2057 x Less Outside Trim and 19 Cylinder 20 L24 Bi-fold Track and Hardware ' Lawrence HD640 Series 21 Door Pulls (2) 562-4 22 E. Panic and Fire Exit Hardware 23 Types required are indicated as ED1, ED2 etc. under Hardware Schedule, Article 2.4, Column L, 24 and as described below. ' 25 1. i Furnish two Exit Devices for Pair openings. 26 2. Rated Openings: Provide UL listed Fire Exit Devices at rated openings. ~;' I 27 3. Sizes: Provide Exit Devices sized in accordance with the manufacturer manufacturers 28 recommendations. ,~ i 29 4. Furnish Sex Nuts and Bolts at all Wood Doors. 30 5. Lever Handle Trim shall match Lockset Designs listed in 2.1 D. '' 31 6. Provide Spacer Block for Mullions applied narrow stop frames. 32 7. Provide Glass Bead Kits where interference with Vision Frames occurs. ~~,' 33 8. Submit Wiring Diagrams in accordance with paragraph 1.4 H. One (1) each System Wiring 34 ' Diagram for each application. 35 ymbol Function Description Factory Number 36 ' ED1 Exit Device ED5200S x T1357 ; 37 Rim Cylinder 3080 38 Exit Device ED5200S x T1350 39 ~ Key Removable Mullion KM707 x M57 ~ 40 ,' Mortise Cylinder (Mullion) 1080 , 41 ED2 Exit Device ED5200S x T1357 42 Rim Cylinder 3080 43 ' [ridgeline ms] 08700-8 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 8 ' 1 ED3 Exit Devices (2) ED5200A x N955 2 Rim Cylinders (2) 3080 3 Removable Mullion KM707A 4 Mortise Cylinder (Mullion) 1080 5 ED4 Exit Device ED5200A x N955 6 Rim Cylinder 3080 7 ED5 Exit Device ED54706 x N955 x LBR (M55) 8 Rim Cylinder 3080 9 Exit Device ED54706 x LBR (M55) 10 ED6 Exit Devices (2) ED5200S x T1350 1.1 Key Removable Mullion KM707 12 Mortise Cylinder (Mullion) 1080 13 ED7 Exit Device ED5600A x N9M55 14 .Mortise Cylinder 1080 15 ED8 Exit Devices (2) ED5400A 16 ED9 Exit Device ED5200 x N955 , 17 Rim Cylinder 3080 18 ED10 Exit Device with Battery Alarm ED5200 x M61 19 Mortise Cylinder 1080 20 ED11 Exit Devices (2) ED5200 x N955 21 Rim Cylinders (2) 3080 22 Removable Mullion KM707A 23 Mortise Cylinder (Mullion) 1080 24 ED12 Exit Device ED5200 x N957 25 Rim Cylinder 3080 26 ED13 Exit Device ED5200A x N910 27 ED14 Exit Device ED5200S x T1357 28 Rim Cylinder 3080 29 Exit Device ED5200S x T1350 30 Key Removable Mullion KM707 x M57 31 Mortise Cylinder (Mullion) 1080 32 Electrified Dogging Modifications (2) RE-1540-C-ED5200S-24VDC 33 Key Switch 1310-1604640 34 Mortise Cylinder (Key Switch) 1080 35 Power Supply 1400-6100 36 Power Transfers (2) EPT-10 37 See Paragraph 2.3 C for additional components 38 System Wiring Riser and Diagram ACSI 39 Functional description for ED14: To dog Exit Devices, turn Key Switch fully clockwise and 40 release. Green LED on Key Switch will indicate that power has been applied to the Exit 41 Devices, and they will dog down when their touch pads are depressed. Tuning Key to fully 42 counterclockwise position will release devices, Red LED on Key switch will indicate that the 43 Exit Devices are latched and the entry side of the doors is Iocked..Depressing and releasing 44 the Red Mushroom "Dogging Override" Switch specified under paragraph 2.3 C. will reset 45 Devices to the latched and locked mode by removing power from each device. It will require 46 using the key switch at each opening to re-enable do gging. 47 [ridgeline ms] 08700-9 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 9 1 ED15 Exit Devices (2) ED5200S x T1350 2 Key Removable Mullion KM707 x M57 3 Mortise Cylinder (Mullion) 1080 4 Electrified Dogging Modifications (2) RE-1540-C-ED5200S-24VDC 5 Power Transfers (2) EPT-10 6 Power Supply 1400-6100 7 Key Switch 1310-1604640 8 Mortise Cylinder (Key Switch) 1080 9 See Paragraph 2.3 C for additional components 10 System Wiring Riser and Diagram ACSI 11 Functional description for ED15: To dog Exit Devices, turn Key Switch fully clockwise and 12 release. Green LED on Key Switch will indicate that power has been applied to the Exit 13 Devices, and they will dog down when their touch pads are depressed. Tuning Key to fully 14 counterclockwise position will release devices, Red LED on Key switch will indicate that the 15 Exit Devices are latched and the entry side of the doors is locked. Depressing and releasing 16 .the Red Mushroom "Dogging Override" Switch specified under paragraph 2.3 C. will reset 17 Devices to the latched and locked mode by removing power from each device. It will require 18 using the key switch at each opening to re-enable dogging. 19 ED16 Exit Device ED5200S x T1357 20 Rim Cylinder 3080 21 Exit Device ED5200S x T1350 22 Key Removable Mullion KM707 x M57 23 Mortise Cylinder (Mullion) 1080 24 Electric Latch Retraction Modifications (2) RE-1550-C-ED5200S-24VDC 25 Key Switch 1310-1604640 26 Mortise Cylinder (Key Switch) 1080 27 Electric Latch Retraction Controller 1426-04-AO 28 Relay Interface Box 1420-1606AP1-1 29 Power Supply 1400-6100 30 Power Transfers (2) EPT-10 31 See Paragraph 2.3 C for additional components 32 System Wiring Riser and Diagram ACSI 33 Card Reader by Division 16 34 Functional description for ED16: 35 Day Operation: To place Door in unsecured mode, to clockwise position (Green LED on Key 36 Switch Lights). In this mode, both Latchbolts are retracted, and inside/outside Automatic 37 Operator Wall Switches are enabled for activation the Automatic Operator. 38 Night Operation: To place doors in secured mode, turn key switch to counter-clockwise 39 position (Red LED on Key Switch Lights). In this mode, both door leaves are latched. Pressing 40 the inside Wall Switch will cause the Latchbolts to retract and will initiate Automatic Operator 41 opening cycle. Outside Wall Switch is disabled. Valid Card will retract Latchbolts and 42 momentarily enable the outside Wall Switch for initiating Automatic Operator opening cycle. 43 Exit Device Latchbolts are projected and outside Wall Switch is disabled at end of opening 44 cycle. 45 When Doors are in daytime mode of operation, depressing and releasing the red mushroom 46 "dogging override switch specified under paragraph 2.3 C will place the system back into night 47 operation mode as described above. It will require using the key switch at each opening to 48 return the system back to daytime operation. [ridgeline ms] 08700-10 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 10 1 1 ED17 Exit Device ED5200S x T1357 2 Rim Cylinder 3080 3 Electrified Dogging Modification RE-1540-C-ED5200S-24VDC 4 Key Switch 1310-1604640 5 Mortise Cylinder (Key Switch) 1080 6 7 Power Supply 1400-6100 Power Transfer EPT-10 8 .See Paragraph 2.3 C for additional components 9 ~ System Wiring Riser and Diagram ACSI ' ' 10 Functional description for ED17: To dog Exit Device, turn Key Switch fully clockwise and 11 release. Green LED on Key Switch will indicate that power has been applied. to the Exit 12 Device, and it will dog down when the touch pad is depressed. Turning Key to fully 13 counterclockwise position will release device, Red LED on Key switch will indicate that the 14 Exit Device is latched and the entry side of the door is locked. Depressing and releasing the 15 16 Red Mushroom "Dogging Override" Switch specified under paragraph 2.3 C. will reset Device to the latched and locked mode by removing power from the device. It will require using the 17 key switch at each opening to re-enable dogging. ' 18 ED18 Exit Device ED5200S x T1357 ' 19 Rim Cylinder 3080 20 Exit Device ED5200S x T1350 21 Key Removable Mullion KM707 x M57 ': 22 Mortise Cylinder (Mullion) 1080 23 ~ Electric Latch Retraction Modifications (2) RE-1550-C-ED5200S-24VDC 24 25 Key Switch 1310-1604640 Mortise Cylinder (Key Switch) 1080 26 Electric Latch Retraction Controller 1426-04-AO 27 Relay Interface Box 1420-1606AP1-1 28 Power Supply ACSI 1400-6100 ,, 29 Power Transfers (2) Von Duprin EPT-10 30 System Wiring Riser and .Diagram ACSI 31 See Paragraph 2.3 C for additional components 1' 32 Card Reader - By Division 16 33 Functional description for ED18: ' ; 34 Daytime: To place system in unsecured mode, turn key switch to clockwise position (Green 35 LED on Key Switch lights). In this mode Exit Device latches are retracted. Depressing and 36 releasing the Red Mushroom "Dogging Override" Switch specified under paragraph 2.3 C. will 37 reset Devices to the latched and locked mode by removing power from the device. It will 38 require using the key switch at each opening to reset devices to retracted mode. 39 Nighttime: To place system in unsecured mode, turn key switch to counterclockwise position 40 (Red LED on Key Switch lights). In this, mode, doors are latched and locked. Valid Card will 41 retract latches (time determined by Card Reader system). Doors latch and lock end of 42 opening/closing cycle. 43 ED19 Exit Device ED5200S 44 ED20 Exit Devices (2) ED5200S 45 Key Removable Mullion KM707 46 Mortise Cylinder (Mullion) 1080 47 '~ [ridgeline ms] 08700-11 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 11 1 F. Door Closers 2 Types required are indicated as C1, C2 etc. under Hardware Schedule, Article 2.4; Column C, and 3 as described below. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 1. Furnish two Door Closers for Pair openings. 2. Provide Door Closers at Rated openings. 3. Furnish drop plates where doors have insufficient height top rails, or where Regular Arm Door Closers are used in conjunction with Concealed Overhead Stops. 4. Fluid: Furnish cold weather fluid, at exterior & vestibule doors. Furnish non-flammable fluid at fire rated openings in conformance with UL Test Standard 10C. 5. Spacer Blocks: Furnish Spacer Blocks and/or shoe supports where frame stop does not provide for adequate support for the parallel arm soffit shoe 6. Provide special closer mounting as required where interference with weatherstrip or sound seals occurs. 7. Furnish Shoulder Through Bolts for all Wood Doors ~mbol Function Description Factory Number C1 Regular Arm 7500 C2 Parallel Arm PR7500 C3 Parallel Arm with Spring Cushion Stop, UN17500 C4 Track Arm, Hinge Side Mourit 7500ST x Less Spring Stop C5 Parallel Arm, Hold Open PR7500H C6 Parallel Arm with Spring Cushion Stop, UN17500H Hold Open Arm C7 Parallel Arm, Offset Shoe PRO7500 C8 Electronic Hold Open, Track Arm, Push P7700PT x 7786 Side Mounted G. Automatic Operators and Accessories Types required are indicated as AO1, AO2 etc. under Hardware Schedule, Article 2.4, Column C, and as described below. 1. Locate Wall Plate Actuators and Key Switch as noted in the Architectural Drawings or as directed by Architect. 2. All System Wiring shall be concealed in the Wall and Door Frame. 3. Coordinate Wiring requirements with Electrical sub-contractor. 4. Submit Wiring Diagrams in accordance with paragraph 1.4 H. One (1) each System Wiring Diagram for each application. [ridgeline ms) 08700-12 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 12 '., ' ~ 1 Symbol Function Description Factory Number 2 A01 Automatic Operator/Door Closer 2100, Push Side Mounted 3 Full Width Housing '~ 4 Wall Plate Actuator (Outside) REES 01371-412 5 Wall Plate Actuators (Inside) Larco 212266 ' 6 System Wiring Diagram 7 Function: See ED16 functional description ', 8 H. Kick & Mop Plates 9 Types required are indicated as K1, K2 etc. under Hardware Schedule, Article 2.4, Column K, and 10 . as described below. 11 1. Furnish two Kick Plates for Pair openings. . ~ 12 2. Kick Plates shall be applied to the Push Side of the Door, Mop Plate applied to the Pull Side. : 13 , 3. Provide stainless steel Phillips oval/undercut head, full tread type sheet meal screws for , 14 - fastening not more, than 5 inches on center. - . :~ 15 4. Plates shall be .050 Stainless Steel, beveled four edges (B4E) with satin finish. ' 16 5. All plates shall be furnished with width as required to provide 1/4" clearance at sides of doors 17 frame sto s, Mullions, Astra als, or Stop and Mullion applied seals. P 9 , 18 ~ Symbol Function Description Factory Number ~ 19 K1 6" High Mop Plate 64EMP . 20 K2 10" High Kick Plate 64EKP 21 K3 34" High Armor Plate 64EAP ': 22 K4 10" High Mop Plate B4EMP ,' 23 I: Stops & Holders 24 Types required are indicated as S1, S2 etc. under Hardware Schedule, Article 2.4, Column S, and - 25 as described below ~ ~ i P i f i h t St ; 26 ngs. a r open ops or 1. Furn s wo 27 2. Furnish Overhead Stop and Holders sized as recommended by Manufacturer. 28 3. Furnish Overhead Stop and Holders.. with shims, brackets, or special template mounting ' 29 ~ .where required. El i l C t t i 30 ectr ca on rac or. 4. Coordinate Voltage location requirements for Magnetic Holders with 31 5. Where wall stops are riot applicable, furnish floor stops 1215CKU Series, or Overhead Stops 32 if required. . 33 Symbol Function Description - Factory Number 34 S1 Cohvex Wall Stop, 3 each 1-3/4" Screws 1270CX-SV ' 35 S2 Floor Stop 1215CKU 36 S3 Pipe .Stop and Holder Specware C1000M ~' 37 S4 Concealed Heavy Duty Overhead Stop 6-_36 Series [ridgeline ms] 08700-13 FINISH HARDWARE ~ 08.700 - 13 1 S5 Concealed Medium Duty Overhead Stop 5-_36 Series 2 S6 Electro-Magnetic Door Release FM998 3 S7 Surface Heavy Duty Overhead Stop 9- 36 Series 4 S8 Wall Stop & Holder 1260W 5 S9 Concealed Heavy Duty Overhead Holder 6- 26 Series 6 S10 Floor Stop 1209HA x 3" Rubber, 7" US32D 7 S11 Surface Medium Duty Overhead Stop 10-_36 Series 8 J. Thresholds 9 Types required are indicated as T1, T2 etc. under Hardware Schedule, Article 2.4, Column T, and 10 as described below 11 1. Fasteners: Furnish Thresholds with FHSL14200, %<-20 x 2" Phillips Flat Head Sleeve 12 Anchors. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 K. 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 2. Wood Floors: . a. Width: At door side, align top of bevel with door face, inside edge to align with edge of vented base. b. Length: Furnish extended straight ends for Threshold assemblies at Wood Floors full Frame width including frame faces. Symbol Function Description Factory Number T1 Saddle Threshold, 1/4" High x 6" Wide 272A T2 Saddle Threshold, 1/2" High x 5" Wide 154A T3 Saddle Threshold, 1/2" High x 6" Wide 172A T4 Cover Plate Threshold, %4' High x cut 14/1A x Pemkote to width indicated in details. T5 Threshold Assembly, '/4' High x %<" Offset 195A x 228A x 193A x 196A x Outside x cut Assembly to width indicated Pemkote x Welded in details. T6 Carpet Separator, 3/8" High x 4" Wide 2364A Weatherstrip and Smoke Gasketing Types required are indicated as W1, W2 etc. under Hardware Schedule, Article 2.4, Column W, and as described below 1. Furnish weatherstrip and gaskets for complete perimeter of opening, including mullions, and astragals. 2. Provide Rain Drips full frame width including frame faces. ~mbol Function Description Factory Number W1 Self Adhesive Smoke Gasketing S88 W2 Rigid Jamb Weatherstrip 290AS W3 Door Bottom Sweep 18100CP x SS/SMS W4 Overlapping Astragal (Pull Side Mount) 355CS W5 Meeting Stile Weatherstrip (2) 18041 CP W6 Adjustable Jamb Sound Seal 379CPK W7 Concealed Heavy Duty Automatic Door 434ARL Bottom W8 Overlapping Astragal 357SS x S88D W9 Hot Smoke Seal HSS2000 [ridgeline ms) 08700-14 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - .14 ,~ ' ; 1 W10 Mullion Weatherstrip 319CN 2 W11 Rain Drip 346C x SS/SMS 3 W12 Overlapping Astragal 357SP x S88D 4 _ W13 ~Door'Bottom 222AV 5 L. Door Silencers 6 1. Furnish Rubber Door Silencers for all openings not specified to have Smoke Gasketing or 7 Weatherstrip. ~` 8 i fr d f f h f d e 2 Q tit i h th f h i l d f F rame, an our or eac pa r o oor am s. . uan urn ree or eac ng e oor y: s s 9 3. Type:1229A. ~ ' 10 M. Key Cabinet . '; 11 1. Locate as Directed by the Architect 12 2. Type: RWC-125S 13 2 2 ~ KEYING . 14 A. All Locksets and Cylinders specified under this Section shall be keyed to the existing 15 Corbin/Russwin Grand Master Key System for the Yelm School District. 16 B. Provide Brass Construction Cores and Keys for all interchangeable core type cylinders during the 17 construction period. Plastic Construction Cores are unacceptable. 18 C. The Finish Hardware Supplier shall .meet with the Owner to prepare the permanent keying 19 schedule. Submit for approval in accordance with paragraph 1.4 G. 20 D. The Permanent Cores, Change Keys, Master Keys, and Control Keys, prepared according to the 21 22 approved .keying schedule, shall be transmitted directly from the manufacturer to the Owner, prior to substantial completion. The General Contractor shall remove the construction cores and install . 23 the permanent cores. All construction cores shall be returned to the Finish Hardware Supplier. 24 E. All Permanent Cores and Keys shall be sent direct from the lock manufacturer via Registered 25 Mail, Return Receipt Requested. 26 F. Provide a key transcript list of all cylinders, including 25% additional change combinations. 27 G. Stamp all Keys "Do not Duplicate" and with change designation as directed. ~ ,~ 28 H. Furnish: 29 1. Six Building Grand Master Keys s 30 er Set Si Master Ke s 2 x y p . ' 31 3. Four change keys per Lockset or Cylinder. 32 4. Six Construction Keys 33 ,~ [ridgeiine ms] 08700-15 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 15 1 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 2 A. Provide Cylinders, type as required, keyed to System for Motorized- Projections Screen Controls. 3 quantities as required. Locate as indicated on Drawings, or as directed. 4 B. Teacher Wardrobes: Provide Cylinder Cores, Model 8000, keyed to system, for Cabinet Locks 5 furnished by the Casework manufacturer. Coordinate requirements with Section 12345. Quantities 6 and locations are indicated on the interior elevations. 7 C. Electronic Exit Device Locking System: 8 1. Provide one (1) each ACSI 1420-1606AP1-22 Relay Interface Box for connection to Exit 9 Device Types ED14 through ED17. Coordinate with Electrical. 10 2. Provide one (1) each ACSI Red Mushroom "Dogging Override" Switch, 1320-5MOM-NC, 11 Normally Open Contacts, Momentary Action at Principal 125. Locate as further directed by the 12 Architect. To release Lockset Type L16 and Exit Devices Types ED14 through ED18. 13 3. Provide one (1) each ACSI Red Mushroom "Dogging Override" Switch, 1320-5MOM-NO, 14 Normally Open Contacts, Momentary Action, at Security 502. Locate as further directed by the 15 Architect. To release Lockset Type L16 and Exit Devices Types ED14 through ED18. 16 2.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE 17 Hardware Schedule Notes: 18 Note 1: Door Closer Active Leaf Only. 19 Note 2: Coordinate location, rough-in, and voltage requirements for electronic hardware items 20 with electrical contractor. 21 Note 3: Balance of Hardware by Door Manufacturer Door Butts B Locks L Closers C Kick Plate K Stops S Threshold T Weatherstrip W Remarks 100 69 ED16 C2,AO1 K2 S4 T1 W2,3,10 Note 2 100A B9 ED15 C2 K2 S4 T1 W2,3,10 . Note 2 101 B2 L4 C5 K2 S2 101A B2 L4 C5 K2 S2 101 B 62 L4 S 1 101 C L24 102 62 L4 S5 103 B2 L4 S1 W1 104 B2 L4 S1 W1 105 B2 L4 S1 106 B2 L4 S1 107 62 L4 S1 108 B2 L4 C1 K2 S7 109 B2 L4 S1 110 62 L4 C1 K2 S1 111 B2 L2 K1 ~ S1 112 B2 L2 K1 S1 113 62 L4 ~ C2 K2 S1 114 B2 L4 S1 114A L11 Note 3 [ridgeline ms] 08700-76 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 16 ,I ' oor Butts B Locks 1 Closers C Kick Plate K Stops S Threshold T Weatherstrip W Remarks 115 L11 Note 3 116 62 L2 K1 S1 117 B2 L4 ~ S1 118 B2 L4 S1 W1 118A B2 L23 C1 K2 'S2 T3 W2,13 '; 119 120 B2 B2 L4 L4 S2 S1 121 B2 L2 K1 S5 122 B2 L4 S1 123 B2 L4 S1 W1 124 62 L4 S 1 W 1 125 62 ~ L4 S5 W1 ~: 125A B5 L23 C3 K2 T3 W2,3 200 B9 ED16 C2,AO1 K2 S4 T1 W2,3,10 Note 2 200A B9 ED15 C2 K2 S4 T1 W2,3,10 Note 2 ~' 201 B3 L22 C2 K1,2. S1 202 B3 ED9 C2 K2 S1 202A B3 L9 C2 K2 S1 ,' 203 B9 ED17 C2 K2 S10 T1 W2,3 Note 2 205 B3 L10 S7 W12 207 62 L4 K2 S1 '~ 208 B2 L2 S5 209 B2 L4. K2 S1 209A B2 L18 S7 W8 2098 B2 L5 S7 213 B3 L22 C2 K1,2 S1 215 B9 ED17 C2 K2~ S10 T1 W2,3 Note 2 217 62 L2 S5 218 B2 L4 K2 S1 219 B2 L4 K2 S7 220 62 L13 K4 S7 W8 221 B3 ED9 C2 K2 S1 221A 63 L9 C2 K2 S1 222 67 ED11 C2,3 K2 S1 T4 222A B7 ED11 C2,3 K2 S1 T4 ` 2226 B9. ED14 C2 K2 S4,10 T5 .: W2,3,10 Note 2 222C 67 ED20 C2 K2 S4 T5 W2,3,10 222D- B7 ED20 C2 K2 S4 T5 W2,3,10 223 B9 ED17 C2 K2 S10 T1 W2,3 Note 2 223A 67 ED19 C3 K2 T1 W2,3 224. 62 L18 S7 W8 , 300 B9 ED18 C2 K2 ~ S4 'T1 W2,3,10 Note2 ~ 300A 69 ED15 C2 K2 S4 T1 ~ W2,3,10 Note 2 ' 3006 69 ED15 C2 K2 S4 T1 . W2,3,10 Note 2 301 67 ED8 C2 K2,4 S6 W1,4 Note 2 301A, B2 ED7 C7 ~ K2 S1 T2 W6,7 '' [ridgeline ms] 08700-17 , 'FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 17 Kick Butts Locks Closers Plate Stops Threshold Weatherstrip Remarks Door B L C K S T W 302 69 ED14 C2 K2 S10 T1 W2,3,10 Note 2 302A L11 Note 3 3026 B9 ED14 C2 K2 S4 T1 W2,3,10 Note 2 303 B9 ED18 C2 K2 S10 T1 W2,3,10 Note 2 303A 63 ED11 C5 K2 S1 , 3038 B3 ED11 C5 K2 S1 303C B9 ED14 C2 K2 S10 T1 W2,3,10 Note 2 303D B3 L17 303E B3 L17 303E B3 L17 303G B3 L17 303H 63 L17 3031 B3 L17 30.4 B2 L21 S1,2 305 L~11 Note 3 305A B5 ED19 C2 K2 S10 T1 W2,3 3058 B2 L4 C7 K2 S1 T2 W6,7 306 62 L4 S1 307 62 L4 S1 T2 W6,7 308 B2 L4 S1 309 B3 L22 C2 K1,2 S1 310 B3 L22 C2 K1,2 S1 312 62 L4 C1 K1,2 S1 312A L11 Note 3 .3128 L11 ~ Note 3 313 62 L18 S7 W8 313A 62 L4 S7 314 B8 L5-K C1 K2 S2 W1 314A B5 ED19 C3 K2 T1 W2,3 3148 B5 ED19 C3 K2 T1 W2,3 316 B5 L16 C8 K3 S4 T1 W2,3,12 Notes1,2 3168 62 L4 K2 S1 316C 62 L2 C1 K1,2 S1 316D 62 L4 K3 S2 316E 65 L23 C6 K3 T1 W2,3 316E B2 L4, K4 S7 400 67 ED8 C2 K2 S6 W1,4 Note 2 401 B9 ED14 C2 K2 S4 T1 W2,3,10 Note 2 401A 69 ED14 C2 K2 S4 T1 W2,3,10 Note 2 402 62 L4 S2 403 B2 L20 S7 404 62 L4 C1 K2 S1 W1 404A B2 L4 S1 4046 B2 L4 K2 S1 W1 405 B2 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 405A B5 L23 C2 K2 S10 T3 W2,3 408 B2 L4 S1 [ridgeline ms] 08700-18 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 18 ~. ' oor Butts B Locks L Closers C Kick Plate K Stops S Threshold T Weatherstrip W .Remarks ~ 409 B2 L15 C1 K1,2 S1 411 62 L5 K2 S1 412 62 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 ' 412A L11 Note 3 413 B2 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 413A 414 B2 B2 L6 L4 C5 K2 S1 S1 T2 W1,7 W1 415 62 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 415A L11 Note 3 .416 B2 L4 C1 K2 S7 417 62 L15 C1 K1,2 S1 418 62 ~ L4 S7 419 62 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 419A B5 L23 C2 K2 S10 T3 W2,3 420 B2 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 420A B5 L23 C3 K2 T3 W2,3. 421 B2 L4 S1 422 B2 L4 S1 423 62 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 '~ 424 62 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 500 B7 ED8 C2 K2 S6 W1,4 Note 2 ,' 501 B9 ED14 C2 K2 S4 T1 W2,3,10 Note 2 501A B9 ED14 C2 K2 S4 T1 W2,3,10 Note 2 ' 502 503 62 62 L4 L4 K2 K2 S1 S7 504 B2 L4 K2 S1 W1 504A 62 L4 S5 505 B2 L4 K2 S1 W1 506 B2 L4 S5 507 B3 ED9 C5 K2 S2 W1 ~ ; 507A B3 ED9 C5 K2 S2 W1 , 5078 B5 ED10 C2 K2 S10 T1 W2,3 507C 62 L6 S1 508 62 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 508A B5 L23 C2 K2 S10 T3 W2,3 ' 509 B2 L4 C1 K2 S7 510 B2 L15 C1 K1,2 S1 511 B2 L4 S7 512 62 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 512A L11 Note 3 513 62 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 514 62 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 514A 62 L6 S1 T2 W1,7 515 62 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 ' S15A L11 Note 3 517 62 L5 K2 S1 '' 520 62 L4 S1 '~ [ridgeline m s] 08700-19 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 ---19 Kick Butts Locks Closers Plate Stops Threshold Weatherstrip Remarks Door B L C K S T W 521 B2 L15 C1 K1,2 S1 522 B2 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 522A B5 L23 C2 K2 S10 T3. W2,3 523 B2 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 523A B2 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 524 B2 L4 S1 525 B2 L4 S1 526 62 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 527 B2 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 600 67 ED8 C2 K2 S6 W1,4 Note 2 601 69 ED14 C2 K2 S4 T1 W2,3,10 Note 2 601A 69 ED14 C2 K2 S4 T1 W2,3,10 Note 2 602 B2 L4 S1 603 B2 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 603A 65 L23 C3 K2 T3 W2,3 6036 62 L6 S7 T2 W1,7 604 62 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 605 62 L5 K2 S1 606 62 L5 S1 607 62 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 607A B5 L23 C2 K2 S10 T3 W2,3 608 62 L15 C1 K1,2 S1 609A 62 L4 S1 612 B2 L5 K2 S1 ' 613 B2 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 613A L11 Note 3 614 62 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 614A 62 L6 S1 T2 W1,7 615 62 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 615A L11 Note 3 616 B2 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 617 62 L4 C1 K2 S7 618 62 L15 C1 K1,2 S1 619 B2 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 619A B5 L23 C2 K2 S10 T3 W2,3 620 B2 L4 S7 621 62 ED7 C7 K2 S1 T2 W6,7 621A 62 ED7 C7 K2 S1 T2 W6,7 622 62 L4 S5 T2 W6,7 623 B2 L4 S4 T2 W6,7 623A 62 L4 S4 T2 W6,7 624 62 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 625 62 L4 C5 K2 S1 W1 704 62 L1 C3 K2 W1 705 B2 L1 C3 K2 W1 706 62 L1 C3 K2 W1 [ridgeline m sJ 08700-20 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 20 '~. ~: Butts Locks Closers Door B L C FH1 B5 FH2 B5 FH3 FH4 ' 1 PART 3 -EXECUTION 2 3.1 PREPARATION 3 A. Examine Doors, Frames, and related items for conditions that would prevent .the proper 4 application of the Finish Hardware. Do not proceed until defects are corrected. 5 B. Provide solid blocking for all Wall Stops, Magnetic Holders, Wall Plate Actuators, and Automatic 6 Operators. ' 7 C. Fasteners: Check all conditions and use fastening devices as needed to securely anchor all ` 8 hardware as per manufacturer's published templates. Self-tapping sheet metal screws are not 9 acceptable. All Door Closers, Exit Devices, and Surface Mounted Overhead Stops on wood. doors ' 10 shall be through bolted. , 11 3.2 INSTALLATION '' 12 A. Mounting Heights: Mount units at heights as recommended in "Recommended Locations for 13 Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (2001)" by Doors and Hardware 14 15 Institute, except as indicated below. Products not specifically covered shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's templates and instructions. 16 1. Hinges: 17 a. Top Hinge: 7-1/4", Top of frame rabbet to centerline of hinge. 18 b. Bottom Hinge: 12-1/4", Bottom of Frame to centerline of hinge 19 c. Intermediate Hinges: Centered, equal spacing between top, and bottom hinges. ~~, 20 2. Lock Strikes: 40", bottom of frame to centerline of Strike. 21 3. Locate Deadlocks at 48", Bottom of Frame to Centerline of Cylinder. r it i h fl t t li f h " f fi 22 n oor o cen er ne o sw c . rom s 4. Automatic Operator Wall Plate Actuators: 36 23 5. Key Switches: 48" from finish floor to centerline of switch. 24 B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 25 1. Wherever cutting and fitting are required to install hardware surfaces which will be painted or 26 finished at a later time, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure 27 place. After completion of the finishes, re-install each item. 28 2. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. 29 3. Install Fire Rated Openings to comply with NFPA 80. ~' [ridgeline ms] 08700-21 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 21 '; Kick Plate Stops Threshold Weatherstrip Remarks K S T _ W L8 C6 K2 T3 W2,3 L8 C6 K2 T3 W2,3 L7 L7 1 4. Door shall swing to the maximum degree that project conditions will allow. The swings 2 indicated on the floor plan are intended to depict direction and do not indicate full degree of 3 opening. 4 5. Trim Exit Devices to provide 1-1/2" clearance between End Cap and hinge jamb stop face 5 and/or stop applied weatherstrip. 6 6. Door Closers shall be located to allow maximum degree of opening that project conditions will 7 allow. Door Closers shall not be used to stop the door, except for models equipped with an 8 integral stop-on-the-arm feature. 9 7. Locate Overhead Stop and Holders with maximum degree of opening that project conditions to will allow. 11 8. Locate Floors Stops at maximum degree of opening that project conditions will allow. Do not 12 locate Floor Stops where they create a hazardous condition. Stops shall be located no more 13 than 1/3 Door width from the latch edge of the Door. 14 9. Set all Exterior Thresholds in a bed of butyl rubber sealant. Remove all excess sealant. Caulk 15 all Edges and Joints to exclude moisture. 16 10. Mount and Adjust Rigid Jamb Weatherstrip prior to mounting Parallel Arm Door Closers. 17 Weatherstrip shall be installed to provide a continuous seal at head and jambs. Do not notch 18 Weatherstrip for Door Closer shoe. Provide Parallel Arm 5th hole spacer of increased 19 thickness to allow for revised location. 20 11. Mount Astragals on the pull side of active leaf our out-swinging applications, inactive leaf for 21 in-swinging. 22 12. Smoke Gasket 23 a. Completely clean frame and apply gasket in accordance with manufacturer's 24 instructions. 25 b. Mount Gasket to stop face of Strike Jambs and Headers, Door Rabbet of Hinge Jamb. If 26 the Gasket is required to be mounted on the door rabbet of the Strike Jambs due to fire 27 labeling requirements, provide Silencers. 28 C. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to insure proper operation or 29 function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. 30 3.3 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 31 A. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one (1) month prior to 32 acceptance or occupancy, make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items during the 33 week prior to acceptance or occupancy. Clean and lubricate operating items as necessary to 34 restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to 35 compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. 36 B. Door Closer Adjustment: After mechanical systems have been balanced, adjust Door Closers to 37 comply with following ICC/ANSI A117.1 - 1998 requirements. 38 1. Closing Speed: With the door open 70 degrees, the door closer shall be adjusted so that the 39 door will take at least three (3) seconds to move to a point where the leading edge of the door 40 is three inches from latching. [ridgeline ms] 08700-22 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 22 ~ h ll b f ll . 1 ows: a e as o 2. Opening Force: The maximum force for pushing or pulling a door open s 2 (these forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other 3 devices securing the door). ' 4 a. Fire Doors: The minimum opening force allowable by the appropriate administrative 5 authority. 6 b. Exterior Doors: 8.5 Ibf. ' 7 c. Interior Doors: 5.0 Ibf. 8 C. Door Closer Backcheck. Adjust backcheck to prevent damage to the closer, hardware, door and ' 9 . frame, and wall. 10 D. Instruction: Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and 11 hardware finishes 12 END OF SECTION 08700 '' . '! '' '~ '~ '' 1 [ridgeline ms) 08700-23 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 23 r ~, 2 4 ' S 6 7 8 9 ' 10 11 12 13 ' 14 15 16 17 ~; 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 'i 32 33 34 35 ~; 36 37 38 39 40 • 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 ' 48 4.9 50 51 52 53 SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS.- Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work ofthis-section. SUMMARY Extent of glass and glazing work is indicated on drawings and schedules. Types of work in this section include glass and glazing for: . Window units. Interior relites. Entrances and other doors. Display case accessories. Sliding glass window. . Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" Division 10 Section "Toilet Accessories" for mirror glass SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Provide Ig ass and lag zing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading and impact loading.(where applicable), without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain. watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials and other defects in the work. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from an ambient temperature range of 120 deg. F (67 deg. C) and from a consequent temperature range within glass and glass framing members of 180 deg. F (100 deg. C). Deterioration of insulating Ig ass is defined as failure of.hermetic seal due to other causes than breakage which results in intrusion of dirt ormoisture,internaI condensation orfogging, deterioration of protected internal glass coating, if any, resulting from seal failure, and any other visual evidence of seal failure or pertormance. • [ridgeline ms] 08800 - 1 GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 1 SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each glazing material and fabricated glass product required, including installation and maintenance instructions. Certificate: Submit certificates from respective manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements. Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. QUALITY ASSURANCE Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards. Safety Glazing: Each light of safety glazing material installed in hazardous locations shall be permanently identified by the manufacturer. The identification shall be etched or ceramic fired on the glass and be visible when the unit is glazed. Fire Resistance Rated Wire Glass: Provide wire glass products that are identical to those tested per ASTM E 163 (UL 9) and are labeled and listed by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked eitheron spacers or at least one component pane of units with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing organization indicated below: Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI). Sin le Source Responsibility for Glass: To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source for each type and class required. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect Ig ass and lazin materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with manufacturer's directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, of temperature changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other causes. . PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when joint substrates are w_et due to rain, frost, condensation or other causes. [ridgeline ms] 08800 - 2 GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 2 r PROJECT CLOSEOUT Warrantv: General: Warranties shall be in a_ ddition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. Warrantv Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 4 years after date of final completion: Manufacturer's SS~ecial Project Warrantv on Insulating Glass: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed project site, within specified warranty period indicated below, replacements for those insulating glass units developing manufacturing defects. Manufacturing defects are defined as failure or hermetic seal of air space (beyond that due to glass breakage) as evidenced by intrusion of dirt or moisture, internal condensation or fogging, deterioration of protected internal glass coatings, if any, and other visual indications of seal failure or performance; provided the manufacturer's instructions for handling„installing, protecting and maintaining units have been complied with during the warranty period. Warran Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of final completion.. PART2-PRODUCTS 28 MANUFACTURERS 29 30 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: ' 31 32 Mississippi Glass Company 33 Amerada Glass Company 34 Dearborn Glass Company: 35 Hartung Glass Industries ,; 36 LOF Glass, Inc. 37 PPG Industries, Inc. 38 39 _ Saint-Gobain/Euroglass. 40 41 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL 42 ' ~ 43 Primary Glass Standard: Provide primary glass which complies with ASTM C 1036 requirements, including 44 those indicated by reference to type, class, quality, and, if applicable, form, finish, mesh and pattern. 45 46 Heat-Treated Glass Standard: Provide heat-treated glass which complies with ASTM C 1048 requirements, 47 including those indicated by reference to kind, condition, type, quality, class, and, if applicable, form, finish, 48 and. pattern. 49 ' 50 Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge clearances and tolerances ; 51 complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer. Provide thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise _ 52 indicated,'as recommended by glass manufacturer for application indicated. [ridgeline ms] , 08800 - 3 GLASS AND GLAZING. 08800 - 3 '; PRIMARY GLASS PRODUCTS Clear Float Glass: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select). Wired Glass: Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1 (translucent), Quality q8 (glazing); complying with ANSI 297.1; of form and mesh pattern indicated below: Polished Wire Glass: Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), Mesh m1 (diamond). 1/4" thick. Location: Provide in doors and relites in fire-rated corridors, occupancy and area separation walls and other locations where noted. HEAT-TREATED GLASS PRODUCTS Manufacturing Process: Manufacture heat-treated glass as follows: By horizontal (roller hearth) process with roll wave distortion parallel with bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. By vertical (tong-held) or horizontal (roller hearth) process, at manufacturer's option, except provide horizontal process where indicated as "tongless" or "free of tong marks". Uncoated Clear Heat-Treated Float Glass: Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), kind as indicated below. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated. Heat Treated Glass Locations: Refer to UBC, 1997 Edition, Section 2406.4, Hazardous Locations. SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS General: Provide preassembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass enclosing a_hermetically sealed dehydrated air space and complying with ASTM E 774 for performance classification indicated as well as with other requirements specified for glass characteristics, air space, sealing system, sealant, spacer material, corner design and desiccant. Location: Provide insulated glass units in all new exterior windows and doors unless noted otherwise. For properties of individual Ig ass panes making up units, refer to product requirements specified elsewhere in this section applicable to types, classes, kinds and conditions of glass products indicated. U-values indicated are expressed in the number of Btu's per hour per sq. ft. per degree F difference. Performance Classification der ASTM E 774: Class A. Thickness of Each Pane: 1/4". Air Space Thickness: '/z' Spacer Color: Aluminum. Sealing System: Manufacturer's standard. [ridgeline ms] 08800 - 4 GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 4 ~ i' 1 Uncoated Insulating Glass Units: Manufacturers standard units complying with the following requirements: ' 3 Exterior Pane: Clear float glass. 4 5 Interior Pane of Glass: Clear float glass. U-value of 0.49 for insulated glass unit. 9 Shading Coefficient of 0.80. 10 '; 11 Solar Heat Gain Coefficient of 0.65. ,~ 14 GLAZING TAPES ~ . 15 . 16 General: Provide products of type indicated and complying with the following requirements: 17 18 Compatibility: Select glazing tapes of proven compatibility with other materials with which they will 19 come into contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel 20 substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field ' 21 experience. 22 23 Suitability: Comply with recommendations of glass manufacturers for selection of glazing tapes ', 24 25 which have performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated and conditions at time of installation. ~~ 27 Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazin Tape Without Spacer Rod: 28 29 "Chem-Tape 40"; Bostik Construction Products Div. 30 ~ "Extru-Seal"; Pecora Corp. 31 "PTI 303" Glazing Tape; Protective Treatments, Iric. ~: 32 "Tremco 440 Tape"; Tremco Inc. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazin Tape With Spacer Rod: "Chem-Tape 60"; Bostik Construction Products Div. "Shim-Seal"; Pecora Corp. "PTI 303" Shim Tape; Protective Treatments, Inc. "Pre-shimmed Tremco 440 Tape"; Tremco Inc. 42 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS . ' 43 44 Compatibility: Provide. materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. 45 46 Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. 47 48 Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealants, 80 to 49 90 Shore A durometer hardness. . ~ 51 Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks, or continuous extrusions, as required for compatibility with 52 glazing sealant, of size, shape. and hardness recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers for ' 53 application indicated. 54 55 Edge Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size 56 and hardness required to limit lateral movement (side-walking) of glass. 57 [ridgeline ms] 08800 - 5 - GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 5 '~ Compressible Filler Rods: Closed-cell orwaterproof-jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, flexible and resilient, with 5-10 psi compression strength for 25 percent deflection. SLIDING GLASS WINDOWS (Between 111 and 311) Track: Provide Knape and Vogt No. P992 Assembly or approved. Include Upper Channel #993; Shoe #995; Ball Bearing Carrier #997; Lower Track #999. i Glass: %4' full tempered. Machine prior to tempering. PART 3 -EXECUTION EXAMINATION Require Glazier to inspect work of glass framing erector for compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners; for presence and functioning of weep system; for existence of minimum required face or edge clearances; and for effective sealing of joinery. Obtain Glazier's written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of glazing work. Do not allow glazing work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Clean Ig azing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use. GLAZING, GENERAL Comply with combined rip nted recommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufacturers of sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are intended to provide for necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation. Protect Ig ass from edge dama a during handling and installation; use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not. raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass with flares or bevels along one horizontal edge which would occur in vicinity of setting blocks so that these are located at top of opening. Remove from project and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other impertections of kind that, when installed, weakens glass and impairs performance and appearance. GLAZING Install settin blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width from each corner, but with edge nearest corner not closer than 6" from corner, unless otherwise required. Set blocks in thin course of sealant which is acceptable for heel bead use. [ridgeline ms] 08800 - 6 GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 6 ' 1 Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, for glass 2 sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height), except where gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous 3 spacer rods are used for glazing. Provide 1/8"minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to 4 sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. 5 6 Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard, except where otherwise ' 7 required by glass unit manufacturer. 8 9' Set units of Ig ass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics. 10 ' 11 12 PROTECTION AND CLEANING ' 13 14 Protect exterior Iq ass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed streamers attached to 15 framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass. Remove nonpermanent labels 16 and clean surfaces. 17 ' 18 Protect Ig ass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations: If, despite 19 such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove immediately by method 20 recommended by glass manufacturer. 21 22 Examine Ig ass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent 23 intervals during construction, but not less often than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits 24 or staining. When examination reveals presence of these forms of residue, remove by method recommended ' 25 by glass manufacturer. 26 27 Remove and replace Ig ass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during 1 28 construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. : 29 30 ' 31 ~ END OF SECTION 08800 r ' [ridgeline ms] 08800 - 7 GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 7 ' SECTION 08920 -TRANSLUCENT WINDOW PANELS ,I 1 GENERAL 2 3 4 Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with the Supplementary General Conditions. Indicate anchorages, hardware data, material, finish data, U Factor and Light Transmittance Factor. 5 6 Samples: Upon request, submit samples of frames, panels, materials and finishes,. connection of members 7 and anchorage members. Architect shall select paneling colors from standard colors. Submit color samples 8 of assembly and trim for Architect's color selection. 9 10 Provisions of Thermal Movement: Detail and install to provide for expansion and contraction of panels and . , 11 frames caused by ambient and metal temperature range normal to the job site location, without causing ; 12 damage to work. 13 14 Protective Covering: Cover all surfaces which at completion, will be left exposed, in an adequate manner to ' 15 protect surfaces from all scratches, stains and other damage. Remove covers just prior to substantial 16 completion, leaving clean, unblemished surfaces. 17 18 19 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 20 21 Guarantee: The panel manufacturer shall guarantee for a period of 2 years from the date of acceptance that ' . 22 the panels will be free of defects in materials and factory workmanship and that defective materials will be 23 repaired or replaced immediately, after proper notification, at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall . 24 guarantee for a period of 2 years against faulty installation workmanship, sealant failure or water leakage.- 25 Submit written warranty with bidding submittals. 26 PRODUCTS 30 Manufacturer: Kalwall Corporation. 31 Skywall Translucent Systems. ' 32 33 Translucent Faces: Standard fiberglass reinforced polymer faces. 35 Exterior Face 0.070" thick ' ; 36 37 Interior Face 0.045" thick Grid Core: Grid core shall be 6063-T6 aluminum I-beam, 7/16" flange width, mechanically interlocked to insure even muntin/mullion intersection. Use vertical in-line rectangle pattern. 42 Panels: Provide 2-3/4"-thick panels of dimensions required by the contract documents. All panels shall be 43 factoryassembled. Panels shall consistoffiberglassreinforced faces permanently bonded undera controlled 44 heat and pressure process to a mechanically interlocked extruded aluminum grid core with a thickness 45 tolerance of +/-.003". 47 Faces shall be fiberglass reinforced with the following minimum performance characteristics: 48 49 Color stability such that the exterior face will not change more than 3 units (Delta E by ASTM D2244) 50 after 5 years of outdoor weathering in South Florida at 7 degrees facing south. 51 52 Exterior face impact resistance minimum 60 ft. lbs. 53 54 Interior flame spread.maximum 20 and Smoke Development maximum 200, by ASTM E84 (77a). [ridgeline ms] 08920 - 1 TRANSLUCENT WINDOW PANELS 08920 - 1 '! .Bond strength shall be designed to insure maximum physical integrity of panels over time, and shall have an initial bond strength of at (east 750 psi (ASTM C297) with no decrease after aging (12 cycles ofASTM D1037). Exterior face of panels shall have special erosion-protective surfacing applied under factory-controlled conditions during manufacturing. The surfacing shall be fully field repairable and refinishable if required. Face Sheet Combination: Exterior "Crystal"....Interior "White." Heat and Light Transmission: Minimum 35% light transmission; maximum U Factor of 0.53 by N.F.R.C., shading coefficient .41. Assembly & Trim for Translucent Paneling: Head, sill, jamb and vertical closures shall be an integral system, with corrosion-resistant finish. Closures shall maintain continuous clamping action on sealing tapes. Sealing tapes shall be factory applied to system. All screws to be stainless steel. Provide corrosion-resistant color- anodized aluminum. EXECUTION General: All components shall be pre-assembled and sealed into panel-units by manufacturer. Panel-units shall be shipped to the jobsite in rigid structural units (except for removable components) and shall be ready for erection as units. Install all work according to manufacturer's written directions and approved shop drawings. Place panels plumb and level in alignment with wall or roof construction; securely anchor them to wall construction or roof curb. Pack joints tight with mineral fiber insulation. END OF SECTION 08920 [ridgeline ms] 08920 - 2 TRANSLUCENT WINDOW PANELS 08920 - 2 ~, 2 ' 4 5 6' ' 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21_ 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ' 31 32 33 34 35 ' 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 ' : 50 51 52 f SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Extent of each type of gypsum drywall construction required is indicated on Drawings. This Section includes the following types of gypsum board construction: Gypsum board screw-attached to wood framing and furring members. Cementitious backing board for shower room ceilings and walls. Drywall. finishing Qointtspe-and-compound treatment). Texture finishing (coordinate with SECTION 09900 for primer painting). Related Sections: Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring. Division 9 Section "Painting" for stipple finish on gypsum wall board. CODES AND STANDARDS Comply with provisions of the "Northwest Wall.and Ceiling Bureau" except as otherwise indicated. SUBMITTALS Product data, including installation information from manufacturers for each type. of product specified. Provide.24" x 24" GWB panel showing rough, medium and fine texture for Architect's selection. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction which. are identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment materials from a single manufacturer. ' [ridgeline ms] 09250 - 1 GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - .7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and othercauses. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging. Handle pygsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. Minimum Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials form drying too rapidly. PART2-PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or approved: Gypsum Boards and Related Products: Georgia Pacific Gypsum Co. U.S.G. Interiors Celotex James Hardie Gypsum GYPSUM BOARD General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end joints. Thickness: Provide gypsum board in thicknesses indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, 5/8 inch thicknesses to comply with ASTM C 840 for application system and support spacing indicated. Gygsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, and as follows: Type: Type X. Edges: Tapered. Thickness: 5/8 inch unless noted otherwise. [ridgeline ms] 09250 - 2 GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 2 ' t 1 he following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of . 2 3 "Fire-Shield"; Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. 4 "Fi-Rock Gypsum Panels"; Celotex . 5 "GyProc Fireguard"; Georgia Pacific Gypsum Co,~ 6 "SHEETROCK Brand FIRECODE Gypsum Panels"; U.S.G. Interiors 7 "518 FIRE X"; James Hardie Gypsum 8 9 Abuse Resistant "'Gypsum Fiber Panels"" 10 ' 11 Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or approved: 12 13 United States Gypsum Co.; Fiberock Brand VHI (Very High Impact Abuse Resistant). 14 15 Location: Where indicated on drawings. 16 17 Type: Type X. 18 19 Long Edges: Tapered. 20 ~ 21 Thickness: 5/8" ; 22 23 Panels are UL classified for noncombustability (ASTM E 136), and have a flame spread of 5 and 24 25 smoke developed of 0 (ASTM E 84). 26 Water-Resistant Backing Board: Gypsum product meeting ASTM C 630, with tapered edges and of type and 27 thickness indicated below; in maximum lengths available to minimize end=to-end butt joints. 28 29 Location: Tile backing for all locations except in shower rooms. 30 31 32 Do not use on ceilings. 33 Do not install over vapor retarder. 34 35 Type: Type X for fire-resistant rated assemblies and where indicated. 36 37 Thickness: 5/8", unless otherwise indicated. 1 38 39 ' 40 CEMENTITIOUS BACKING BOARD 41 42 Core formed in a continuous process from aggregated Portland cement slurry and reinforced with vinyl-coated ' 43 woven glass fiber mesh embedded in both surfaces, with one face smooth and the other textured. Ends cut 44 square, edges formed smooth;: 45 _ ~ 46 Location: Backing for acrylic finish on Shower Room ceilings #205 and #212 and ceramic the walls ! 47 in Room 113.. 48 - . 49 ~ Thickness: '/" ' 50 : 51 Code: NRB 259 - 52 53 MortarUnitFinishingMaterials: Tape andjointcompoundsasrecommendedbymanufacturerofcementitious 54 backer units. 55 ~~ 56 [ridgeline ms] 09250 - 3 GYPSUM DRYWALL ~' 09250 - 3 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products or approved: "Durock Cement Board"; U.S.G. Corporation. "Wonderboard"; Custom Building Products TRIM ACCESSORIES Cornerbead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide corner beads, edge trim and control joints which comply with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: Manufacturer: Beadex Mfg. Co., Inc., or approved. Material: Formed metal faced with paper tape as manufactured by Beadex, or approved, and complying with the following requirement: Sheet steel zinc-coated by hot-dip process. Fed. Spec. QQ-S-775-d, Type 1, Class E. Edge trim shapes indicated below by reference to designations of Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047: "J" Trim: U-shaped channel, unless otherwise indicated, use at exposed panel edges. "L" Trim: L-shaped angle edge trim without back flange. One-Piece Control Joint: Formed with vee-shaped slot per Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047, with slot opening covered with removable strip. Metal Cornerbead and Edge Trim for Exterior Ceilings: Comply with the following requirements: Edge trim complying_with ASTM C 1047, formed from rolled zinc, shape "LC" Bead per Fig. 1 unless otherwise indicated. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat-shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows: Depth: 7/8 inch Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS General: Provide materials complying with ASTM C 475, ASTM C 840, and recommendations of manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint treatment materials for the application indicated. Joirit Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. Drying-Type Joint Compounds: Factory-prepackaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. Ready-Mix Formulation: Factory-premixed product. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and flanges of corner beads and edge trim. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. [ridgeiine mss 09250 - 4 GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 4 i ,~ 1 Setting-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged, job-mixed, chemical-hardening powder 2 products formulated for uses indicated. 3 ~! 4 For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing board behind base for 5 ceramic tile, use. formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. 6 7 8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 9 10 General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction which comply with referenced standards 11 and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum board. 13 Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C 1002. ' ' 14 15 Concealed Acoustical Sealant: See SECTION 07900. 16 17 Sound Attenuation Blankets: See SECTION 07200. ~. 18 . 19 Thermal.lnsulation: See SECTION 07200. 20 21 Vapor Retarder: See SECTION 07200. ': 22 23 24 TEXTURE FINISH MATERIALS is 25 26 Finish for Walls: Manufacturer's standard proprietary product formulated for spray application, with surface 27 burning characteristics of 25 per ASTM E 84, and in texture indicated. 28 29 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products or approved: 30 31 "U.S.G. Spray Texture"; United States Gypsum Co. ,' 32 "Multi-Spray"; Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. ~~ PART 3 -EXECUTION 38 EXAMINATION 39 40 Examine substrates to which .,drywall construction attaches or abuts, preset hollow metal frames, 41 cast-in-anchors, and structural framing, with Installerpresent, forcompliancewith requirements forinstallation ~ 42 tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of drywall construction. Do not proceed with installation '' 43 until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ~ 46 APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL 47 48 Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C ^ ; 49 840. 51 Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated, prior to gypsum board unless readily installed after board 52 has been installed. (See SECTION 07200.) 53 54 .Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger. all vertical 55 and horizontal joints not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board,and opposite sides of wall. 56 [ridgeline ms] 09250 - 5 GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250,- 5 Install ceiling boards across framing in the mannerwhich minimizes the number ofend-buttjoints, and which avoids end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 24 inches. Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints or avoids them entirely where possible. At stairwells and similar high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs. Install exposed gvpsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch open space between boards. Do not force into place. Locate either edge or end ioints over supports, except in horizontal applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. Apply gypsum board to walls leaving a space of 1/2 inch minimum between bottom of GWB and floor. Attach gvpsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cutouts. For grouting of hollow metal door frames see SECTION 08111. Form control ioints and expansion joints at locations indicated, with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4 inch to '/ inch space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by`manufacturer, install gypsum board over wood framing, with "floating" internal corner construction. Where sound-rated drywall construction is indicated, seal construction at perimeters, control and expansion joints, openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both.faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim, and close off sound-flanking paths around orthrough construction., including sealing of partitions above acoustical ceilings. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. CEMENTITIOUS BACKING BOARD (SHOWER ROOM CEILINGS AND WALLS) Installation: Precut board to required sizes and make necessary cutouts. Fir ends and edges closely but not forced together. Stagger end joints in successive courses. Install board over 5/8" GWB ceiling and fasten to ceiling joists and blocking with Durock Wood Screws, Wafer Head. Space fasteners around perimeter and in field at 6 inches on center with perimeter fasteners at least 3/8 inches and less than 5/8 inches from ends and edges. Apply field fasteners first. Drive screwheads flush with surface of board. Finish: Reinforcement of joints and corners shall be by 4 inch wide Dryvit Exterior Tape. "Basecoat" finish shall be Dryvit Exterior Basecoat, gray, ready-to-mix Portland cement mortar containing dry latex polymers. "Finish Coat" finish shall be Dryvit Exterior Finish, ready mixed acrylic coating with fine finish. Color shall be as selected from manufacturer's 33 standard colors. [ridgeline ms] 09250 - 6 GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 6 f n f, 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 /. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 '' 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 ~ 43 ~'~ 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 5~3 54 55 56 57 1 Install base coat and finish coat in accordance with recommendations per manufacturer's.tatest installation instructions.. .. METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION Single-Laver Application: Install gypsum wallboard, as follows: On ceilings apply gypsum: board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible. On partitions/walls.apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints. On partitions/walls 8'-1" or less in height apply gypsum board horizontally (perpendicular to framing); use maximum length sheets possible to minimize end' joints. INSTALLATION OF .DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES General: Where feasible; 'use joint compound to anchor trim accessory flanges to gypsum wall board Otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Install corner beads at external corners. Install edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise beexposed orsemi-exposed. Provide type. with .face flange to receive joint compound except where "U" bead (semi-finishing type) is indicated. fnstall "J" trim to completely surround the rough edge of drywall Ihstall~"L" trim where drywall abuts suspended ceilings, beams, plaster, masonry, and concrete surfaces. , Install control joints at locations indicated, or if not indicated, at spacings grid locations required by referenced gypsum board application and finish standard, and approved by the Architect for visual effect. FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES General: Treat .gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of corner•bead, edge trim, control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using' setting-type. joint compound: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish as presented by Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau, Seattle, WA Phone 1-206 / 524-4243. "' Level 2 (For ceramic the and plastic laminate wainscot backing board) :All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and one separate coat of joint compound~applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable: ~ . Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels specified: Embedding and First Coat: Light weight setting compound. [ridgeiine ms] 09250 - 7 GYPSUM DRYWALL - 09250 - 7 Fill (Second) Coat: All purpose lightweight ready-mix compound Level4 : Alljoints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound ahd three separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints,, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for decoration. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of. tool marks and ridges. Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels specified: Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, taping compound. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, topping compound. Finish1Third) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, topping compound. Base for Acoustical Tile: Where gypsum board is indicated as a base for.adhesively-applied acoustical tile, firetape joints of gypsum board below tile. - Partial Finishing: Omit third coat and sanding on concealed drywall construction which is indicated for drywall finishing or which requires finishing to achieve fire-resistance rating, sound rating or to act as air or smoke barrier. SURFACE TEXTURE LOCATIONS AND APPLICATIONS Sprayed-On Texture Finish (Requires Level 4 GWB Finish): Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare drywall and other surfaces in strict accordance with texture finish manufacturer's instructions. All surfaces to be textured shall be primerpainted both priorto and after the texture application. Coordinate with SECTION 09900 for primer application. Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to drywall and other surfaces indicated to receive -finish in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to produce a uniform texture matching Architect's sample without starved spots or other evidence of thin application,.and free of application patterns. If locations have not been indicated, provide texture to all gypsum wallboard walls and ceiling unless .otherwise indicated. In the area of patching and repair of existing textured walls, apply texture finish to match existing adjacent surface. Feather new into existing to hide repairs. Provide texture as approved by Architect from approved sample. Remove any texture drippings or .over spray from door frames, windows and other adjoining construction. In locations where walls are scheduled to receive vinyl wall covering, do not apply stipple or texture finish PROTECTION Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer,.which ensures gypsum drywall.construction being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial .Completion. END OF SECTION 09250 [ridgeline ms] 09250 - 8 GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 8 1, 2 4 5 6 t' 8 9 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 '. 18 19 20 21 ', 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 1; 29 30 31 ' 32 33 34 ' 35 36 37 38 39 ' 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 . 51 52 SECTION 09300 - TILE PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. ' SUMMARY " This Section includes the following: Unglazed ceramic mosaic the Glazed wall the " Elastomeric joint sealers Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 3 Section "Cast in Place Concrete" for monolithic slab finishes specified for the substrates. . .SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data for each type of product specified, Shop drawings indicating the patterns and locations and widths of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in the substrates and finished the surfaces. Locate precisely each joint and crack in the substrates by measuring, record measurements on shop drawings, and coordinate them with the joint locations, in consultation with Architect. Tile Manufacturer shall submit a letter of Certification that their products specified and installed do in .fact either meet or exceed the static coefficient of friction of 0.5 for walking surfaces, 0.6.for accessible routes and 0.8 for ramps. QUALITY ASSURANCE Single-Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of the from a single source, with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. Single-Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturerforesch cementitious and admixture component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. [ridgeline rims) 09300 - 1 Tli_E 09300 - 1 Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has a minimum of five years experience and has successfully completed the installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project. Provide proof of experience if required by Architect. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed the packages. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. PROJECT CONDITIONS Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to the work from carbon dioxide buildup. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions. PROJECT CLOSEOUT Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. .Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent.of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size. PART2-PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS See schedule at end of section. PRODUCTS, GENERAL ANSI Standard:for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, and grades of the indicated. Furnish the complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwise indicated. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced with products and materials indicated for setting and grouting. [ridgeline ms] 09300 - 2 TILE 09300 - 2 I I '~ ' 1 s standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer 2 other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, 3 provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: ' 4 5 Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors, textures, and 6 patterns for products of type indicated. . 7 8 Mounting: Where factory-mounted the is required, provide back- oredge-mounted the assemblies as standard 9 with manufacturer unless another mounting method is indicated. ' 10 11 12 TILE PRODUCTS 13 ' 14 See schedule at end of section. 15 16 Trim Units: Provide the trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat the and to comply with following ' 17 18 requirements: 19 Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat the where applicable. 20 21 Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: ' 22 23 Base for Thinset Mortar Installations: ' 24 25 Coved wall base where ceramic mosaic floor the is used. 26 27 Height: 2" 28 ' 29 All base color same as wall the color. 30 _ 31 Wainscot Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose External Corners for Thinset Installations: Surface bullnose ' 35 Internal Corners: Miter cut base.for inside corner. 36 37 ' 38 SETTING MATERIALS 39 40 Ceramic Mosaic Floor Tile 42 Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4 43 44 When using with porcelain impervious bodied tiles, provide a minimum of 400 PSI bond _ 45 strength. Ceramic Wall Tile: 49 Dry Wall(Typical Wall): Organic Adhesive -ANSI 136.1 Type 1 / 2. '; 50 51 Wet Wall(Shower Wall): Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4 52 53 When using with porcelain impervious bodied tiles, provide a minimum of 400 PSI bond ' . 54 strength. 55 _ 56 57 {ridgeline ms] 09300 - 3 TILE 09300 - 3 ~~ GROUTING MATERIALS Ceramic Tile: Latex-Portland Cement Grout: For all mosaic floor the and wall tile,.provide product complying with ANSI A118.6, color indicated. Manufacturer: Provide one of the following or approved: Bostik Hydroment Ceramic Tile Grout. (To be gauged with Hydromentrnulti-purpose acrylic No. 425 per manufacturer's direction.) TEC AccuColor Ceramic Tile Grout Color: As selected by Architect ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that comply with requirements of ASTM C 920 as referenced by Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in the adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated. One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic the joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved: One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: "Dow Corning 786"; Dow Corning Corp. "SCS 1702"; General Electric Co. "863; Pecora Corp. "Rhodorsil"; Rhone-Poulenc Inc. "Proglaze"; Tremco Corp. MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additive. content; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. [ridgeline ms] 09300 - 4 TILE 09300 - 4 ~1 '' 1 PART 3 -EXECUTION 4 EXAMINATION 5 6 Examine substrates and areas where file will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with ' 7 requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 8 9 Verify that substrates for setting file are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing ' 10 compounds. 11 12 Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units ofwork, 13 and similar items located in or behind file has been completed before installing tile. ' 14 15 Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A /~ 18 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 19 20 ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series of file installation standards included ' 21 under "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of. Ceramic Tile" that apply to type of 22 setting and grouting materials and methods indicated. 23 24 TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA installation ^ 25 methods indicated. Extend file work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. Apply ceramic file wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures (i.e. lockers) in rooms or areas where ceramic base is required. 34 Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of the without marring visible surfaces. 35 Carefully grind cut edges of the abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit file closely ' 36 to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. 37 38 Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay file in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, ' 39 base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out file work and center file fields in both directions in each space 40 or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize file cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown. 41 42 For file mounted in sheets, make joints between file sheets same width as joints within file sheets so ~: 43 that extent of each sheet is not apparent in finished work. Lay out file wainscots to next full file beyond dimensions indicated. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles. Locate joints in file surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 53 Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." 54 55 Metal Edge Strip: Where ceramic floor file edges run adjacent to another flooring material and are 56 unprotected, provide stainless steel angular strips with vertical leg 1/8-inch wide at top edge with integral 57 provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate unless otherwise indicated. Provide in height to align flush ' 58 with top of tile. Manufactured by Schluter Systems or approved. [ridgeline ms] 09300 - 5 TILE 09300 - 5 FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Install the to comply with requirements indicated below for setting bed methods, TCA installation methods related to types of subfloor construction, and grout types: Portland Cement Mortar Bed: ANSI A108.1 B Bond Coat: Latex-Portland cement mortar on cured bed, ANSI A108.5 Concrete Subfloors, Interior: TCA F112-2K (bonded) Grout: Latex Portland cement ANSI 108.10 WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHODS Install types of the designated for wall application to comply with requirements indicated below for thin-set methods, TCA installation methods related to subsurface wall conditions, and grout types: Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5 Concrete Masonry Units, Interior: TCA W202-2K Grout: Latex-Portland cement ANSI A108.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic the surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. , Remove latex-Portland cement grout residue from the as soon as possible. Unglazed the may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by the and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective the work. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures that the is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. When recommended by the manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed the walls and floors. Protect installed the work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed. Before final insoection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from the surfaces. [ridgeline ms) 09300 - 6 TILE 09300 - 6 ~, 2 ' 3 4 ' S SCHEDULE UNGLAZED CERAMIC MOSAIC FLOOR TILE CT-1 CT-2 ~ CT-3 CT-4 MANUFACTURER Dal Tile baf Tile Dal Tile Da[ Tile As selected by As selected by As selected by As selected by Architect from Architect from Architect from COLOR Architect from Price Group Price Group Price Group Price Group 1 1-4 1-4 ~ 1-4 COMPOSITION . Porcelain Porcelain Porcelain Porcelain WEARING SURFACE Unglazed Unglazed Unglazed Unglazed NOMINAL FACIAL 2" X 2" 2" X 2" 2" X 2" 2" X 2" DIMENSION , NOMINAL 1 /4" 1 /4" ~ 1 /4" 1 /4" THICKNESS Face SrvLE .Cushion Edge Cushion Edge Cushion Edge Cushion Edge REMARKS Field Border Accent Accent ' 6 ' 7 9 ,, 10 11 12 '. 13 14 15 16 17 '~ 18 19 '~ 20 21 ' 22 23 24 25 26 27 '~. 28 29 30 31 GLAZED WALL TILE CT-1 CT-2 CT-3 FIELD MANUFACTURER Dal The Dal Tile Dal Tile Dal Tile As selected by As selected by As selected by As selected by COLOR Architect from Architect from Architect from Architect from Price Group Price Group Price Group Price Group 1 for 2 1-4 1-4 COMPOSITION Porcelain Porcelain Porcelain Porcelain WEARING GIOSS Gloss Gloss GIOSS SURFACE NOMINAL FACIAL 2" X 2" ~ 2" X~2n 2n X 2" 2" X 2" DIMENSION NOMINAL 5/16" 5/1'6" 5/16" 5/16" THICKNESS FACE STYLE Cushiori Edge Cushion Edge Cushion Edge Cushion Edge REMARKS Field Accent Accent Field 32 END OF SECTION 09300 [ridgeline ms] 09300 - 7 TILE 09300 - 7 ,. ,; SECTION 09511- ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART1-GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 10 SUMMARY 11 ' 12 This Section includes acoustical panel ceilings installed with exposed suspension systems. 13 14 Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 15 ~~ 16 Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for concealed acoustical sealant at edge moulding. Division 15 Section "Air Terminals" for grilles, registers, and diffusers in acoustical ceilings. Division 16 Section "Lighting Fixtures" for lighting fixtures in acoustical ceilings. 23 SUBMITTALS 24 25 General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification 26 Sections. 27 28 Product data for each type of product specified. ~~ 29 ~ 30 Coordination drawings for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations 31 and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 32 ' 33 Ceiling suspension members. 34 35 Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 36 37 Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets; speakers; sprinkler heads; 38 and special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures- with adjoining 39 construction. 40 41 Scale: 1/8 inch = 1'-0". 42 43 Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed, finish required, prepared on samples of size 44 indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work: Where finishes 45 involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected. 46 47 6-inch-square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color. ' 48 49 Full-size samples of each panel pattern and color required. '• 50 51 Set of 12-inch-long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for 52 each color and-system type required. 53 54 Certificates: Submit certificates from manufacturers of acoustical ceiling units and suspension systems. 55 attesting that their products comply with specification requirements. ~: 58 QUALITY ASSURANCE 59 60 Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed acoustical 61 ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for Project. 62 [ridgeline ms] 09511 - 1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1 '. .. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical ceilings that are identical to those tested for the following fire-performance characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A products. Flame Spread: 25 or less. Smoke Developed: 50 or less. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory," for types of assemblies in which acoustical ceilings function as afire-protective membrane and tested per ASTM E 119. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for rated assembly. Single-Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. Coordination of Work:. Coordinate layout and installation of .acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components (if any), and partition system (if any). DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING . Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. PROJECT CONDITIONS Space Enclosure:- Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and. weatherproof, wet- work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity wi-I be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. PROJECT CLOSEOUT Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate labels. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. [ridgeline ms] 09511 - 2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511- 2 ' 1 PART2-PRODUCTS ' 4 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS, GENERAL . 5 6 Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide manufacturers' standard units of configuration indicated 7 that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by reference to types, patterns, acoustical ' 8 ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. 9 10. Mounting Method for Measuring. NRC: Type E-400 (plenum mounting in which face of test 11 specimen is 15-3/4 inches [400 mm] away from the test surface) per ASTM E 795. 12 ' 13 Colors and Patterns: Provide products to match appearance characteristics indicated under each product 14 type. • 15 16 Sound Attenuation Performance: Provide acoustical ceiling units with ratings for ceiling sound ' 17 transmission class CSTC of range indicated as determined according to AMA 1-II "Ceiling Sound 18 Transmission Test by Two-Room Method" with ceilings continuous at partitions and supported by a metal 19 suspension system of type appropriate for ceiling unit of configuration indicated (concealed for tile, , 20 exposed for panels). ' 21 22 23 ACOUSTICAL PANELS 24 25 Mineral Composition Panels -Water Felted, with Standard Washable Painted Finish: Provide Type III, 26 Form 2 units, per ASTM E 1264 and complying with the following requirements: 27 28 Ceiling Panel: ACP-A• 29 30 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or 31 approved: 32 ' 33 Armstrong, Fine Fissured High NRC, #1830 • . 34 USG, Radar ClimaPlus High NRC, #22311 35 Or like product 36 '; 37 Color/Light Reflectance: White/LR .084 38 39 Grader NRC 0.70 . 41 CAC Range: 35 42 43 Edge Detail: Square ,, 44 45 Size: 24" x 48" x 5/8" 46 47 Ceiling Panel: ACP-B 48 49 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or 50 approved: ~~ 52 Armstrong, Fine Fissured High NRC/High CAC #1811 53 USG, Aspen Illusion 54 Or like product 55 56 Color/Light Reflectance: .82 57 58 Grade: NRC 0.50 59 60 CAC Range: 40 ' 61 62 Edge Detail: Square. 63 64 Size: 24" x 48" x 3/4" 65 66 [ridgeline ms] 09511 - 3 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS. 09511 - 3 Ceiling Panel: ACP-C Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved: USG, Sheetrock Brand Lay-1n Ceiling Panel ClimaPlus Or like product Color/Light Reflectance: .82 Grade: NRC 0.70 CAC Range: 38 Edge Detail: Square. Size: 24" x 24" x 3/4" Ceiling Panel: ACP-D Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved: Armstrong, Optima Open Plan #3153 USG Halcyon ClimaPlus #98241 Or like product Color/Light Reflectance:.88 Grade: NRC 0.95 CAC Range: 20 Edge Detail: Square. Size: 24" x 48" x 1" Ceiling Panel: ACP-E Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved: Armstrong, Fine Fissured Ceramaguard #608 Or like product Color/Light Reflectance: White/LR .082 . Grade: NRC 0.55 CAC Range: 35 Edge Detail: Square Size: 24" x 48" x 5/8" METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: BPB Metal U.S.G. Interiors -Donn Systems Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. [ridgeline ms) 09511 - 4 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 4 '; 1 Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. 2 3 Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct-Hung unless 4 otherwise indicated. " 5 6 . Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 7 8 Gauge: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, 9 Direct-Hung), will be' less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch diameter 10' (12 gauge). . 11 • 12 Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, 13 manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit type of edge detail and suspension • 14 system indicated. Angle of 15/16" x 15/16". THICKNESS SHALL BE :024 INCHES. 15 . 16 17 NON-FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED DIRECT-HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 18 19 Wide-Face Capped Double-Web Steel Suspension System: Main and cross-runners roll-formed from pre- 20 painted cold-rolled steel sheet, with pre-finished 15/16-inch-wide metal .caps on flanges; other 21 characteristics as follows: 22 23 Structural Classification: Intermediate-Duty System. 24 1 25 End Condition of Cros'S=Runners: Override {stepped) type. 26 27 „~ Cap Material and Finish: Stee! sheet painted white. ~. 30 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ' 31 ". 32 Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-staining, non-bleeding, 33 gunnable sealant complying, with requirement specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." ~~ 36 ;PART 3 -EXECUTION 37 38 39 .EXAMINATION '. 40 41 Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts, with Installer 42 present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect .installation and 43 system. Do not proceed with installation•until unsatisfactory conditions have been anchorage of ceiling 44 , corrected. 45 46 47 PREPARATION ,, 48 49 Coordination: Furnish layouts .for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is 50 specified in other sections. 51 52 53 Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination of other work. 54 55 Measure each ceilin~c area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite 56 57 edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half-width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. 58 59 60 INSTALLATION . . , 61 , 62 General: Install acoustical ceiling systems to comply with installation standard referenced below; Per 63 manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 64 ' 65 Standards for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems: ..Comply with ASTM C 636,. ASTM E ; 66 580 and Uniform Building Code (Vol. 3) Standards 25-2. '~ [ridgeline ms] 09511 - 5 ~ ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 5 Final installation of suspension system shall be leveled and flat to a tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally patterned units in a manner shown by reflected ceiling plans. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows: Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Spiay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension rmembers and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or~~other devices that are secure and appropriate for structure to which hangers are attached as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due'to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. Space hangers not more than Q'-0" o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise shown, and provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. See Uniform Building Code (Vol. 3) Standards Section 25.212.1 and 25.212.2. Horizontal Restraint of Ceiling: Shall be effected by four No. 12 gauge wires secured to the main runner within 2 inches of the cross runner intersection and splayed 90 degrees from each other at an angle not exceeding 45 degrees from the plane of the ceiling. A strut fastened to the main runner shall be extended to and fastened to the structural members supporting the roof or floor above. The strut shall be adequate to resist the vertical component induced by the bracing wires. These horizontal restraint points shall not exceed 12 feet in either direction with the first point within 6 feet from each wall. No. 12 gauge hanger wires shall be attached to the grid members within 3 inches of each corner of each light fixture. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. Sealant Bed: Apply continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant, concealed on back of vertical leg before installing moldings. Screw-attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1!8 inch in 12 feed. Corners: Miter all corners accurately and connect securely. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations. CLEANING Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09511 [ridgeline ms] 09511- 6 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 6 I I SECTION. 09512 -ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 7 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Acoustical the ceilings, adhered to substrate. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for mineral-base acoustical panel ceilings. Division 15 Section "Air Terminals" for grilles, registers, and diffusers in acoustical ceilings. Division 16 Section. "Lighting" for lighting fixtures in acoustical ceilings. fl SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data for each type of product specified. Coordination drawings for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets; speakers; sprinkler heads;. and special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures with adjoining construction. Scale: 1/8 inch = 1'-0". Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include .sample sets showing full range of variations expected. 6-inch-square samples of each acoustical the type, pattern, and color. i C .QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed acoustical ceilings. similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical ceilings that are identical to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and [ridgeline ms] 09512 - 1 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09512 - 1 '' inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested perASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A products. Flame Spread: 25 or less. Smoke Developed: 50 or less. Single-Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties withoutdelaying progress of the Work. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components, and partition system. DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING DeliveracousticalceiIing units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way PROJECT CONDITIONS Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wetwork in space is completed and nominally dry, work above `ceilings is complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. PROJECT CLOSEOUT Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate labels. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS, GENERAL Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide manufacturers' standard units of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by reference to types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectance, unless otherwise indicated. [ridgeline ms] 0951.2 - 2 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS . 09512 - 2 0 1~ 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400 (plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches [400 mm] away from the test surface) per ASTM E 795. Colors and Patterns: Provide products to match appearance characteristics indicated under each product tYPe. MINERAL-BASE TILES -WATER FELTED Type, Form, and Finish: Provide type II I, Form 2 units, per ASTM E 1264 with painted finish that comply with pattern and other requirements indicated. Typical Ceiling Tile: Tvpe: Similar to Armstrong, Cortega or USG Interiors; Radar #2990 or Celotex, Baroque 412: Designation per FS SS-S 118: Pattern "c - d". Color/Light Reflectance: White/LR 0.75. Grade: NRC .50. CSTC Range: 35 - 39. Edge Detail: Bevel, K4C4. Size: 12" x 12'` x 5/8". Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: Armstrong, Celotex and USG Interiors MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Tile Adhesive: ASTM D 1779, type as recommended by the manufacturer, bearing UL label for Class 0 - 25 flame spread. Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, nonbleeding, gunnable sealant complying with requirement specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." PART 3 -EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect installation and anchorage of ceiling system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have- been corrected. [ridgeline ms] 09512 - 3 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09512 - 3 S PREPARATION Testing Substrates: Before installing adhesively applied the on wet-placed substrates such as cast-in-place ' concrete or plaster, test and verify that moisture level is below the manufacturer's recommended limits. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges t of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half-width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. INSTALLATION General: Install acoustical ceiling systems to comply with installation standard below per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook." Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally patterned units (if any) in manner shown by reflected ceiling plans. Install the with pattern running in alternating directions to form checkerboard layout. Install acoustical the by cementing to substrate, using amount of adhesive and procedure recommended by the manufacturer including removal of loose dust from backs of tiles by brushing and then priming them with thin coat of adhesive. Install splines in joints between tiles and level to 1/8 inch in 12'-0" tolerance. Maintain tight butt joints, aligned both directions, and coordinated with ceiling fixtures. Scribe and cut the to fit accurately at ceiling edges and penetrations. CLEANING . Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minorfinish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09512 '' [ridgeline ms] 09512 - 4 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09512 - 4 ;, r ' SECTION 09515 -ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILING AND WALL PANELS 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 2 3 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 7 Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 8 10 SUMMARY 11 12 Extent of acoustical metal ceiling and wall panels is shown on drawings or as required by Contract 13 Documents. 14 15 Contractor shall allow in his bid for unknown miscellaneous cutouts within the field of the system for mounting 16 of speakers, clocks, lights, electrical boxes, etc. as they may occur. 17 18 Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 19 20 Division 5 Section "Light-Gage Metal Framing" for metal stud furring. 21 22 Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wall blocking for panel support backing. 23 ' 24 25 Division 15 Section "Wet Pipe Automatic Sprinkler System" for sprinkler heads in linear metal ceilings. 26 Division 15 Section "Air Terminals" for grilles, registers, and diffusers in linear metal ceilings. 27 28 Division 16 Section "Lighting Fixtures" for lighting fixtures in linear metal ceilings. 29 30 31 SUBMITTALS 32 33 General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 34 35 Product data for each type of product specified. Include installation methods for each type of substrate. ' 36 37 Coordination drawings for reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn accurately to scale and 38 coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted or wall mounted items. Show the following: ,: 39 40 Panel furring members. 42 Method of attaching furring members to building structure. 43 44 Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, air outlets and inlets, speakers, sprinkler heads, and 45 access panels. 46 47 Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size 48 indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for.final unit of Work. Where finishes involve 1 49 color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected. 50 51 12-inch-square samples of metal panel. ' S3 Certificates: Submit certificates from manufacturers of acoustical metal panels attesting that their products 54 comply with specified requirements including those for fire performance characteristics. [ridgeline ms) 09515 - 1 ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILING AND WALL PANELS 09515 - 1 UALITY ASSURANCE Q Installer Qualifications: Engage a manufacturer approved installer with a minimum of 3=years experience in the installation of acoustical metal ceiling and wall panels similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical metal panels with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or other testing and inspecting agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ' Flame Spread: 25 or less. Smoke Developed: 50 or less. ' Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain acoustical metal panels from a single manufacturer. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical metal panels and furring components with other work penetrating through panels, including fight fixtures, HVAC equipment; and fire-suppression system components. - Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site to comply with requirements of Division 1 ~~ Section "Project Meetings." PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Conditions: Do not install acoustical metal panels until space is enclosed. and weatherproof and wet work in space is completed and dry. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, during, and after installation. PROJECT CLOSEOUT Extra Materials Furnish from same production run as.`metal panels installed. Package materials with protective cdvering and identity with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Acoustical Metal Panels: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 5 percent of each amount installed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS ACOUSTICAL METAL PANELS I' Panels. General: Pre-finished modular panels as specified, attached to wall by means of steel angle brackets provided by panel manufacturer. i1 I [ridgeline ms) 09515. - 2 ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILING AND WALL PANELS 09515 - 2 ', ~' 1 Acoustic Panel No. 1: 2 3 Location: Practice'Rooms 307,'623 & 623A and Video 306. ~` 4 5 „ Model /Manufacturer: "Eckoustic Functional Panel (EFP) manufactured by. Eckel Noise Control 6 Technologies, or approved. ~ ~~ 7 8 'Specificat'ions' 9 10 30 inch standard width. 'I 11 . , . • 12 22 gauge galvanized perforated panel.. • 13 14 ~ White polyurethane'enamel finish. 15 . 16 20 gauge transverse framing members. 17 ~. 18 Poly-wrapped acoustic fill. 2" thick. 19 20 11 gauge wall mounting brackets. Anchor into wall blocking as supplied by General ~ 21 ~ Contractor. Bracket spacing as recommended by manufacturer. : 22 23 Acoustic Panel No. 2: , 24 25~ Location: Leadership, Choral /Drama 305. - . 26 27 Model /Manufacturer: Pattern C manufactured by Alpro Acoustical Systems, or approved. 28 29 Specifications: 30 ~ 31 32 Standard panel. width of 46-1/2" covers 43" when lapped: . 33 .032 aluminum, perforated and formed arises. 34 35 Arises on 6" centers by 3/4" deep. , 36 , 37 Manufacturer's standard 1.5 Ib. x 1.5" fiberglass in poly wrapping. 38 39 Mount on manufacturer's standard Z-furring. Located 3" in from top and bottom edges and 40 at 24" o.c. maximum horizontally. 41 42 Finish to be manufacturer's standard brushed aluminum. ~ 43 . 44 45 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS AND MATERIALS ~ 46 ; 47 Insulation: Provide similarto Owens-Corning Select Sound Black Acoustic Board (unfaced) rockwool, ASTM 48 C 612, 1. inch thick and 3 pounds per cubic foot density. Locations of use to include, but. not be limited to, the 49 following: ' 50 51 Attached to floor /ceiling above suspended grid in Practice Rooms. 52 53 Attached to metal deck in Auditorium 197 and Band Room 176. 54 55 Attached to metal deck in Lecture Rooms 197A and 197B. • 56 -. '. [ridgeline ms] 09515 - 3 ACOUSTICAL METAL"CEILING AND WALL PANELS 09515 - 3 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Attachment shall be TACTOO Insul-Hangers as manufactured by AGM. Industries, Inc., or approved. Secure with General Purpose Adhesive as supplied by hanger manufacturer. , FINISHES, GENERAL Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual": for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes for acoustical metal panel and exposed trim. The panels shall receive a conversion coat prior to receiving an electrostatica,llyappIied epoxy powder paint . finish. All cut.edges including perforated holes must be coated. Finish shall be cured and bake-dried. Color: Shall be custom color as selected by Ai-chitect. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent ceiling units are not acceptable. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION Installation of Acoustical Panels: Screw-attach metal panels to wall blocking with screws, type, size, metal type and spacing as recommended by the panel manufacturer. See elevations on drawings for panel sizes. Insulation: Furnished by panel manufacturer. Scribe and cut metal acoustic panel units for accurate fit at edges and at penetrations by other work. END OF SECTION 09515 [ridgeline ms] 09515 - 4 ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILING AND WALL PANELS ~ 09515 - 4 ~, 2 ' 4 5 ~6 8 9 ' 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 ' 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 ', 25 26 '27 28 29 30 ' 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 '42 43 44 45 46 47 48 ' ~ 49 50 51 52 b3 54 '' SECTION 09517 - LINEAR METAL CEILING SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK , This Section includes lineal metal ceiling system clip attached to hidden support system. Related work specified elsewhere: Division 15 Mechanical Equipment. Division 16 Electrical. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Interior and exterior linear metal ceiling system (non-fire-rated) assemblies, consisting of prefinished aluminum mounted to a cai-riersystem and incorporating lighting fixtures as applicable to-the particular project design. QUALITY ASSURANCE Subcontractor Qualifications: Installer shall have not less than three years of successful experience in the installation of linear metal ceiling systems on projects with requirements similar to`requirement specified. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Codes and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. REFERENCES ASTM C635 or C636:.Manufactui-ing and Installation of Suspended Ceilings. SUBMITTALS . .Samples: Submit representative sample of color and finish of all exposed materials. Shop'Drawings: , Reflected Ceiling Plans: Contractor shall indicate layout arrangement of ceiling design, dimensions and locations• of related. integrated lighting. ~ , Installation Drawings: Detail complete installation including carrier system, connections between carriers and pans, details of level changes-.and/or changes in pattern and installation of related lighting. [ridgeline ms] 09517-1. LINEAR METAL CEILING SYSTEM 0951.7=1 Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts or standard drawings showing details of system with project conditions clearly identified and manufacturer's recommended installation instructions, including ' independent lab report on wind test. Maintenance Materials: Submit one percent of amount of linear metal ceiling components installed. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Delivery of Materials: Deliver materials in original, unopened packages clearly .labeled with manufacturer's ' name and identification numbers. Storage: Store in manner that will prevent warpage, scratches, or damage of any kind: Handling: Handle in such a mariner as to ensure against racking, distortion, or physical damage of any kind. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Building shall be enclosed with windows and exterior doors in place and glazed, and roof water-tight before installation of linear metal ceiling system and related ceiling components. Climatic condition range of 60°F (16°C) to 85°F (29°C) and relative humidity of not more than 70%. Coordination with Other Work: Mechanical Work: Ductwork above ceiling shall be complete, and permanent heating and cooling systems operating to climate conditions prior to installation of linear metal ceiling components. ; ~' Electrical Work: lnstallation of conduit above ceiling shall be complete before installation of linear metal ceiling components. Fire Protection Work: Fire protection lines and/or equipment occurring above ceiling shall be j' completed and tested before linear metal ceiling components are installed. Protection: Protect completed work above ceiling system from damage during installation of linear metal ceiling components. PART2-PRODUCTS ~' MANUFACTURER ', Provide PARALINE Linear Metal Ceiling System as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved. MATERIALS Pans: ~, PARALINE II: 3-1/4" (83 mm) wide face, 3/4'` (19mm) vertical legs with carrier attachment edge and integral closure flange. Aluminum: Roll-formed aluminum sheet .024 (.61 mm) nominal for smooth unperforated; factory-finished; brushed with clear protective finish. Integral Closure Flange Finish: (Matte black) (Finish to match pans). [ridgeline ms] 09517-2 LINEAR METAL CEILING SYSTEM 09517-2 ~' ,~ 1 Support System: 3 Interior Carrier System: PARALOCK®main tee, 25-gauge commercial quality cold-rolled steel; face- 4 capped during forming; factory-finished in matte black, baked enamel paint finish. 5 6 7 Main Tees: Double-web design, 1-1/2" high (38 mm), 15/16" (24 mm) wide face; hook- shaped tabs punched into face for locating and attaching pans 4" (100 mm) o.c. and 3/4" (19 8 mm) apart; with integral reversible splice. 9 10 Interior or Horizontal Exterior Carrier System:.040" (1 mm) nominal aluminum alloy, roll-formed; t, 11 factory-finished in matte black, baked enamel paint finish. 12 13 Symmetrical Carrier: Inverted V-shaped carrier, 1-5/8" (41 mm) high by 1-3/4" (45 mm) wide; " " '. 14 each leg notched for locating and attaching pans 4 (100 mm) o.c. and 3/4 (19 mm) apart. 15 16 Splice Sections: Formed to match configuration of inside uppercarrier section - 6" long. Hanger Reinforcement Clip: Formed to configuration of carrier. Used in exterior applications to reinforce symmetrical carrier at hanger wire attachment points. Flat Channel Carrier: Aluminum channel shape, 7/8" (22 mm) high by 1-3/4" (45 mm) wide; each leg notched for locating and attaching pans 4" (100 mm) o.c. and 3/4" (19 mm} apart: Ceiling to be radiused full width of space. Lighting Components: Provide for can type fight fixtures as shown on reflected ceiling. 28 Accessories: 29 . 30 Trim Channel:.024" (.61 mm) nominal aluminum, roll-formed into channel shape. Finish to match 31 pans. ' 32 33 End Plugs: Size and configuration of pan design; material finish to match. pans. 34 35 Tee Converter Clip: Used to adapt standard main tee for PARALINE attachment or to space pans at 36 different modules. 37 ,' 38 ~ 39 Pan Retainer Clip: Spring steel clip used to prevent pans from being dislodged from PARALOCK main. tee due to impact. 40 41 Compression Post Adapter: Adapts standard 3/4" (19 mm) EMT conduit for use as compression 42 member for exterior application of PARALINE ceiling. • { '~ 43 44 Face Tee Cover: Used to convert tabs on PARALOGK main tees between NEMA Type G fixtures 45 when installed end to end; finished in standard matte black finish. 46 47 Mechanical Fasteners: Material and finish to match item to which installed; type and size as required 48 for particular installation. FABRICATION Pans: Edges formed to snap onto carrier members and provide positive locking mechanism with no additional fasteners; factory-finished to match approved samples. 56 Support System: Formed and fabricated for mechanical connection with adjoining section and prepunched 57 holes for direct suspension. ~ [ridgeline ms] 09517-3 LINEAR METAL CEILING SYSTEM 09517-3 - PART 3 -EXECUTION INSPECTION Examine areas to receive linear metal ceiling system for conditions that will adversely affect installation. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. , Work to be Concealed: Verify work above ceiling suspension system is complete, tested, and installed in manner that will not affect layout and installation of linear metal ceiling system. Exterior wind bracing to be approved by a registered professional engineer licensed by the state where the product is being installed. PREPARATION Field Dimensions: Installer must verify actual field dimensions prior to installation. Coordination: Coordinate and schedule installation of linear metal ceiling system with work of other trades affected by this installation, with particular attention given. to mechanical and electrical work required to be installed and operating before ceiling work can begin. INSTALLATION Reference: Install in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. Hanger Wires: Spacing: Space hanger wires maximum 48" (1200.mm) o.c. along length of carrier system, attached directly to structure above. ' Limitation: Do not support hangerwires from mechanical and/orelectrical equipment, piping, orother equipment occurring above ceiling. Provide additional fixture support as required in accordance with local building codes or other regulatory agencies. Carrier System: Space PARALOCK main tee 48" (1200 mm) o.c. and secure with hanger wires, or secure directly to structural supports. Adjustment: Align support system straight, level, and in required position. Mechanical Fasteners: Where required, install in manner that will provide completed assembly to conform to project design requirements. Pans: General: Snap metal pans into position. PARALINE II pans must be installed in alternate rows to ensure point access. Lighting Components: Refer to Division 16000. [ridgeline ms] 09517-4 LINEAR METAL CEILING SYSTEM 09517-4 '~.' i '~, ~'~ 1 2 3 '~ 4 5 6 '~ g 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ,~ '' ', ', ~' 'I. '~ ~~ ~' Exterior Installation: Install hanger reinforcements, compression posts and other structural components as required per structural engineer's evaluation. CLEANING PARALINE Pans: Clean painted pans with nonabrasive, non-solvent-based commercial cleaner. Clean polished finishes with nonabrasive, quick-drying glass cleaner. A soft cotton cloth is recommended. Touch-up all minor scratches and spots, as acceptable, or replace damaged sections when touch-up is not permitted. Removal of Debris: Remove all debris resulting from work of this section. END OF SECTION 09517 [ridgeline ms] 09517-5 LINEAR METAL CEILING SYSTEM 09517-5 ~. ~. t 1 SECTION 09520 -ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 2 PART 1 -GENERAL 3 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 4 A. Drawings and 9eneral provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 5 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 6 1.2 SUMMARY 7 A. This section includes the following: 8 1. Acoustical wall panels (Absorptive) 9 B. Key Abbreviations: The following abbreviations apply to this section: 10 1. AWP Acoustical Wall Panels 11 C. Refer to Section 01.030 for Alternatives that may affect.this work. 12 1.3 SUBMITTALS 13 A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Con ditions of the Contract and 14 _ Division 1 Specification Sections. 15 B. Product data for each type of acoustical wall panel specified.. 16 C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of acoustical wall panels including plans, 17 elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other construction. 18 D. Samples of verification in 12-inch square units of each type.of .acoustical wall panel required 19 and in each color, texture, and pattern indicated or selected for facing materials. Include 20 representative samples of installation devices and accessories. 21 E. Product certifications signed by manufacturers of acoustical wall panels certifying that their 22 products comply with specified requirements. 23 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 24 A. Fire-Test=Response Characteristics: Provide. acoustical wall panels with surface-burning 25 characteristics as indicated below, as determined by testing assembled materials composed of 26 facings and backings identical. to those required- in this Section, per ASTM E.84, by a testing 27 and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify acoustical wall 28 - panels with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting .agency. 29 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less 30 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less [ridgeline ms] 09520-1 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09520-1 1 B. Single-Source Responsibility for Acoustical Wall Panels: Obtain each type of acoustical wall 2 panel from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in 3 appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. 4 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 5 A. Protect acoustical wall panels from excessive moisture in shipment, storage, and handling. 6 Deliver in unopened bundles and store in a dry place with adequate air circulation. Do not , 7 deliver material to building until wet-work, such as concrete and plaster, has been completed 8 and cured to a condition of equilibrium. 9 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 10 A. Environmental Conditions: Do not begin installation until spaces for acoustical wall panels have 11 been enclosed and maintained at approximately the same humidity and temperature conditions 12 as planned for occupancy. Maintain temperature and humidity as recommended by panel 13 '~ manufacturer. 14 B. Field Measurements:.Check actual wall surfaces by accurate field measurements before 15 fabrication and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication i~ 16 schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 17 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee , 18 , opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating acoustical wall panels without field 19 measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions 20 correspond to guaranteed dimensions. 21 C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section !~ 22 with minimum ten years documented experience. 23 PART 2 -PRODUCTS ~' 24 2.1 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS, GENERAL i 25 A. Fabricate panels to sizes and configurations indicated; attach facing materials to cores to 26 produce installed panels with visible surfaces fully covered and free from waves in fabric weave, 27 wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive or other foreign matter. ,~ 28 1. Fabricate back-mounted panels in factory or at site to exact sizes required to fit wall 4 29 surfaces based on field measurements of completed substrates indicated to receive 30 acoustical wall panels. 31 2. Where radius corners are indicated, attach facing material so-there are no seams or 32 gathering of material. '~ 33 B. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Overall height and width of panels: Plus or minus 34 1 /16-inch. 35 C. Sound Absorption Performance: Provide acoustical wall panels with minimum noise.reduction 36 coefficients (NRC) indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM C.423 for mounting type 37 specified under individual product requirements. ;, 38 [ridgeline msj 09520-2 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09520-2 ~i~ 0 C ii u J 1 D. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard material is indicated, provide 2 acoustical wall panels faced with manufacturer's material complying with the following 3 requirements: 4 1. Colors as selected from Manufacturer's Standard range of colors 5 2.2 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 6 A. Acoustical Wall Panels shall be 1" thick - 6.0 to 7.0 Ib. per cubic foot fiberglass. Manufacturer's 7 standard panel construction, fully wrapped. 8 1. Edges: Square hardened 9 2. Thickness and NRC: Nominal overall panel thickness of 1" and NRC of not less than 10 0.80, mount directly to the wall with concealed fasteners. 11 3. Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard woven polyester fabric with all edges wrapped. 12 4. Panel Size: 4'-0" x 8'-0" or as otherwise shown on the drawings. 13 B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be 14 incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 15 1. Jasco -Quiet Touch Extreme series 16 2. Wall Technologies - IR series 17 3. Snap Tex 18 4. Sound Seal 19 C. Minimum acoustical performance per ASTM C.423 20 Frequency(Hz) 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Aloha 0.28 0.83 0.97 0.95 0.90 0.85 21 22 PART 3 -EXECUTION 23 3.1 EXAMINATION 24 A. Examine substrates, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation 25 tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical wall panels. Do not 26 proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 27 3.2 INSTALLATION 28 A. Install acoustical wall panels in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top 29 edges level and in alignment with other panels, scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at 30 borders and at penetrations. Comply with panel manufacturer's printed instructions for 31 installation of panels using type of mounting accessories indicated or, if none indicated, as 32 recommended by manufacturer. 33 1. Cut units to be at least 50 percent of unit width, with facing material extended over cut 34 edge to match uncut edge. Scribe acoustical wall panels to fit adjacent work. Butt joints 35 tightly. 36 ' [ridgeline ms] 09520-3 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09520-3 1 ~ B. Construction Tolerances: As follows: 2 1. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. 3 2. .Variation of Joints from Hairline: Not more than 1/16 inch.. 4 C. Remove and replace panels that are damaged and are unacceptable to Architect. 5 3.3 CLEANING - 6 A. Clean panels with fabric facing, upon completion of installation, to remove dust and other 7 foreign materials from the facing, using a dry bush, a vacuum, or both. 8 B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from acoustical wall panel installation, 9 upon completion of the Work, and leave areas of installation in a neat and clean condition. 10 3.4 PROTECTION 11 A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and 12 installer that ensures acoustical wall panels are without damage or deterioration at the time of 13 Substantia[ Completion. 14 B. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned. and repaired, in a manner acceptable to the Architect, 15 prior to the time of Substantial Completion. 16 END OF SECTION 09520 [r'idgeline ms) 09520-4 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09520-4 r 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ~ 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 ~' 19 20 21 22 ~:. 2 3 24 25 'i 26 27 28 29 ti, 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 ~ 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 ,~ 49 50 ' SECTION 09522 - THEATER BOARD CEILING PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS - Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY Section Includes: Furnish a system of sound-absorbing acoustical board of size and shape shown on the drawings for the auditorium ceiling. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer's offering substitute products must obtain approval prior to bidding. Requests must include test reports from accredited independent testing laboratory. Include one-third octave band sound absorption. coefficients of production run panels tested with installation specified mountings or Type A, whichever is applicable. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) data alone are. not acceptable. Octave band TL data are not acceptable_ REFERENCES American Society of Testing and Materials: ASTM C423 -Standard Test Method of Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. ASTM E795 -Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Tests. NFPA 225 -Test of Surface Burning Characteristics. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Furnish a system of sound-absorbing board for reducing sound energy levels and improving the hearing environment. within the auditorium. Absorber board: To provide absorption of sound within auditorium to control unwanted reflective noise with the space: Install using impaling pins and/or construction adhesives with approval of manufacturer. Acoustical Performance Requirements: Board shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 423, Type A mounting (material placed against a solid backing) to achieve the following absorption coefficients by Octave Band Center Frequencies: 125 Hz 250 Hz . 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000~Hz 4000 Hz .05 .25 ~ .60 ~ " .90 .90 .90 [ridgeline ms] 09522 - 1 THEATER BOARD CEILING ~ - 09522 - 1 1 SUBMITTALS 2 3 Product Data: Submit applicable reference standards and application recommendations and limitations. 4 5 Shop Drawings: Submit design and installation drawings showing product components in assembly with 6 adjacent materials and products. 7 8 Quality Control Submittals: Manufacturer's installation instructions. 9 10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 11 12 Pack and ship to avoid damage according to manufacturer's recommendations: 13 14 Factory finish and assemble all components before shipment. 15 Shop components in sealed, labeled cartons. • 16 Do no accept damaged products at the site. 17 18 ,PROJECT CONDITIONS 19 20 Field Measurements: Obtain from Contractor and indicate on Shop Drawings. 21 22 Environmental Requirements: Install panels after all mortar, wet- and dust-producing trades have 23 completed their work and wall and ceiling surfaces have been finished. 24 25 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 26 27 Contract Closeout Submittals: 28 29 Maintenance recommendations 30 Warranty 31 32 Warranty: Provide manufacturer's writteh warranty that products not in accordance with requirements of 33 Contract Documents within three years after date of commencement of warranties shall be corrected 34 promptly after receipt of written notice from Owner. 35 , 36 37 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 38 39 Leadership/Choral/Drama 305 Ceiling 40 41 Owens Corning, 32402 Riley Lane, Cottage Grove, OR 97424, (541) 942-7668 ~ ' 42 4 3 SelectSound Theater Board 44 45 Manufacturer's standard construction of 1", 3.0 pcf, glass fiberboard in 48" x 96" sheets. 46 47 Finishes: The product should be finished as a deep black mat finish with very low light 4 8 reflectivity. 49 5o Auxiliary Gvm 302 &Gvm 222 Ceilings 51 • 52 Owens Corning, 32402 Riley Lane, Cottage Grove, OR 97424, (541) 942-7668 53 54 SelectSound Theater Board 55' [ridgeline ms] 09522-2 THEATER BOARD CEILING 09522-2 ~, '! , ~' " " ' 1 x 96 sheets. s standard construction of 1" 3.0 cf lass fiber board in 48 Manufacturer P ,9 2 3 Finishes: The product. should be finished as a deep black mat finish: with very low night ' 4 reflectivity. 5 6 ~ Cover Theatre Board with the following product in the Auxiliary Gym: t 7 8 IMSA B-36 Acoustadek Total Perforated 9 , 10 11 PART 3 -EXECUTION 12 13 INSTALLATION • 14 ~ 15 -Wall mount: The product should be affixed to the wall using impaling pins and/orconstruction adhesive to 16 prevent separation. This. should be completed with.the black side out with edges contacting side wall of 17 frame or studs in wall construction in practice rooms. Perforated metal will be placed, over panels after ' 18 inspection of complete installation. 19 2 o Ceiling mount: The product should . be affixed to the ceiling using. impaling pins and/or construction ' 21 adhesive to prevent separation. 22 23 SCHEDULE . 24 25 This material is planned for use as an absorption ceiling treatment in .the auditorium, band and choral . 2 6 practice spaces, and,in the individual practice rooms. 27 28 , 2 9 END OF SECTION 09522 .' ,: ~' ~' 'i , ' - ~!1 , ' [ridgeline ms] 09522-3 ~ THEATER BOARD CEILING ~ ' 09522-3 ~.. ''' SECTION 09551-STAGE FLOOR SYSTEM ~~ 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 2 3 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and ~ 7 " Division 1 Specification Sections apply to work of this section. : 8 9 10 11 SUMMARY 12 This Section includes all labor, material, equipment, transportation and services for complete installation of 13 stage flooring. Extent of stage flooring is indicated on drawings. 14 15 16 RELATED SECTIONS , 17 18 . Coordinate work specified iri this section with other sections of the Project Manual including, but not limited ' ~ 19 to, the following: 20 " ', 21 Division 1 Section "Scope of"Work /Special Conditions" for sequence of work. . 22 23 Division 9 "Section "Flooring Preparation" for properly prepared subfloor. 24 25 26 QUALITY ASSURANCE 27 28 Subcontractor regularly engaged to install and finish type of floor specified. Subcontractor shall have ' 29 successfully completed similar installations and have at least three years experience. If directed, provide list 30 of completed projects, name of owner, a contact and telephone number. 31 32 , 33 PRODUCT HANDLING 34 35 Deliver materials to stage only when stage is clean, dry and protected from weather. Place in an area to allow 36 .for inspection. Store for a long. enough period to allow all materials to acclimate to room temperature and 37 humidity. Spread and separate materials to allow thorough acclimation. Do not stack in concentrated 38 amounts. • 39 40 41 JOB CONDITIONS 42 ' 43 Do not proceed with installation until stage is enclosed and approximate humidity and temperature of stage 44 is achieved. 45 ' 46 47 , i 1 ' [ridgeline ms] 09551-1 _ STAGE FLOOR SYSTEM ~ 09551-1 PART2-PRODUCTS STAGE FLOOR ASSEMBLY Moisture Barrier: 6 mil. carbonated polyethylene film. Sleepers: 2 x 4 Hem-Fir, construction grade, 12" o.c., pressure treated. Plywood: All plywood U.S. manufacture, APA standards with grade mark on back side. Specifically not allowed are sheets with Juan or mahogany face and inner plies. Sub-floor: 3/4" CDX 48/24. Building Paper: 15 Ib. building paper. Finish Floor: 3/4" MDO plywood, exterior, overlay one side, no voids. All sheets from same manufacturer and same lot. Fasteners: Use screws only for attachment of sub-floor and finish floor. No nails, staples, glue. Finish: Alkyd enamel, flat (not semi-gloss, not egg-shell), color black. Base: Wood base fabricated from 1" x 4" (net) with vent grooves cut into back side. See details on drawings. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install as shown and detailed. Stage area shall have been heated, dried out and normal temperature and humidity conditions shall have been in effect for at least one month. If moisture remains present, then work shall be stopped and remedies made. Transitions from finish floor to concrete floor shall be level, smooth and even. Concrete Slab: Depressed, level, troweled smooth, clean, free from all moisture Install polyethylene with joints lapped a minimum of 4"and mastic sealed. Turn up at walls and other vertical surfaces. Expansion Spaces: Provide'/2' maximum space atwalls and otherobstructions,interruptions and terminations of flooring. Cover spaces with bases, trim, saddles, and thresholds. Sleepers: Lay in direction shown parallel to wall between Drama and Commons at 12" o.c.. Stagger joints 24". Do not attach (nail or glue) to concrete. Shim under sleepers so top of sleeper is level. Provide at perimeter of stage and around floor pockets and access holes; no unsupported edges of sub-floor. Sub-Floor: Lay down with face grain perpendicular to sleepers with end joints staggered. Screw to sleepers, 12" o.c. on perimeter and in the interior, with countersunk Philips head (or Reed & Prince) screws. Screw heads below top surface ofsub-floor. Leave expansion space at all perimeters, approximately 1/32". Clean top surface of sub-floor; vacuum if directed. [ridgeline ms] 09551-2 STAGE FLOOR SYSTEM 09551-2 ' ` 1 Building Paper: Lay down over sub-floor. Do not overlap joints; butt joint the paper. Top of paper free of dirt 2 and debris. Vacuum clean. 3 ' 4 Finish Floor: Prior to laying down in place, drill screw holes at edges and interior as shown. Under side of 5 finish floor shall be free of excess material and splinters from hole drilling. Ease all top edges in order to 6 remove sharp corner of plywood approximately 1/32" chamfer. Lay down upper floor sheets perpendicular 7 to subflooring. Staggerjoints with sub-floor below. Leave expansion space at all perimeters. Allow end and 8 ,side gaps between sheets of up to 1/32". Screw finish floor to sub-floor, spacing of screws. as shown, with 9 countersunk screws; screw heads below the top surface. Smooth, level, even transition from top of one sheet ~. 10 to next. Where uneven, shim underneath to make even. Finish: Leave countersunk screw heads exposed; do not fill. Clean, prepare and paint finish floor with two coats of flat paint. See Section 09900 -Painting. Base: Provide in as long of lengths as practical with no lengths less than six feet for fill-in pieces. Glue to walls with industrial grade adhesive. 19 OTHER TRADES 20 21 Cooperate and assist other trades doing work around .the stage floor, including, but not limited to, the 22 electrician installing floor pockets and access holes. QUALITY OF WORK 27 All work shall be carried out as described and in good order. Should any work be found incorrect, that work 28 shall be re-done. The Architect shall be the sole judge as to what is correct and the acceptance of the work. 29 31 WARRANTY 32 33 Submit warranty agreeing to repair or replace the floor or any of its parts for a period of one year after the date 34 of Substantial Completion if the floor shrinks, warps, peels, deteriorates excessively, experiences paintfailure, 35 voids in the MDO appear, or otherwise fails. Said warranty shall not include normal wear and tear. 36 ' 38 END OF SECTION 09551 1 ' - [ridgeline mss 09551-3 STAGE FLOOR SYSTEM 09551-3 '~ ~ 1 2 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 .18 '19 20 ' 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 ~ 39 40 41 42 43 44 ~ 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 • 54 55 .SECTION 09563 - WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING • PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY Extent of wood athletic flooring is indicated on drawings and in_ schedules. . Types of wood athletic flooring required include the following: Flooring nailed to wood•subflooi-ing on sleepers with resilient pads: Related Sections: The. following sections contain requirements that relate to this section. Division 9 Section."Floor Preparation" for properly prepared subfloocs to receive new finish flooring, including acceptable slab moisture and alkalinity readings. QUALITY ASSURANCE ~ . Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in installation of athletic/gymnasium wood flooring, with not less than 3 years' successful experience in installation of the types of flooring required. Single Installer Responsibility: Entire wood athletic floor system of Gym A and Gym B inclusive shall be installed by a single firm (herein called the Installer),. for undivided 'responsibility. Include moisture barrier, if any, anchorage system, sleepers (or channels), subflooring or underlayment (if any), adhesives or mastics, resilient mounts (if any), flooring; trim, expansion provisions, finish, markings and other accessory items as indicated. • General Standards: Comply with Maple Flooring Manufacturing Association (MFMA) standards and recommendations for flooring including grading rules; and comply with Wood and Synthetic Flooring Institute (WSFI) standards and recommendations applicable to materials and methods of installation, except as otherwise indicated. CIIL~MITTAI C Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical product data and installation instructions for each athletic flooring system:. Include instructions forhandling,moisture protection, anchorage, finishing, protection and maintenance. Shop. Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating method of construction, relationships to surrounding construction, perimeter venting, base and trim details and other information and components not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include layout, colors, widths and dimensions of all courts' game lines, markings. and graphics. Samples: Submit samples of flooring finish together with color chips for game line markings. [ridgeline ms] 09563 - 1 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 09563 - 1 DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING Protect wood flooring from excessive moisture in shipment, storage and handling. Deliver in unopened bundles and store in a dry place, with adequate air circulation. Do not deliver material to building until "wet work" such as concrete and plaster have been completed and cured to a condition of equilibrium. Moisture Content: At time of delivery to project, limit average moisture content to 10%; 12% maximum for any piece. At time of installation, limit average moisture content to 6%°; 9% for any piece. JOB CONDITIONS Conditioning: Do not proceed with delivery and installation of wood flooring until after spaces to receive flooring are dry and maintained at approximately same humidity condition as planned for occupancy. Place wood flooring materials in spaces to be floored 7 days in advance of start of installation. Open packages of wood flooring which are sealed (if any) to permit natural adjustment of moisture content. Maintain ambient temperature in range of 65 deg.F (18 deg.C) to 75 deg.F.(22 deg.C) prior to, during, and after installation of wood flooring. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Do not install tiles over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive. Moisture Vapor Rate: The allowable amount of moisture vapor emission from the concrete slab substrate shall be acceptable up to, but not exceeding, 5 pounds per 1,000 sq. ft. per 24 hours. ..Alkali (pH) Factor: The maximum allowable pH reading shall be as required, by the manufacturer of the flooring adhesive. (See Part 2, Installation Accessories.) Readings which exceed either of the above listed test values shall become the responsibility of the general Contractorwho shall take corrective action, i.e., additional"heat, dehumidification, acid wash, etc. to bring the slab into the acceptable level. This action shall be accomplished with no additional cost to the Owner. PROJECT CLOSEOUT Extra Stock/Replacement Material: After completion of work, deliver to project site not less than 1.0% of the quantity of wood flooring installed on the project; in average size, uncut pieces. Warrantv: Special Project Warrantv: Submit copies of 3-year warranty for finished wood flooring and associated work, agreeing to repair or replace flooring which shrinks, warps, cracks or otherwise deteriorates excessively, or which buckles, delaminates or breaks its anchorage or bond with substrate or fails otherwise to perform as required or as represented by manufacturer, due to failures of materials and workmanship and not due to unusual exposure to moisture or other abusive forces and elements not anticipated for application. Warranty shall be signed by Installer and by Contractor, who shall assume responsibility for obtaining adequate warranties on materials from manufacturers. [ridgeline ms] 09563 - 2 WOOD ATHLETIC`FLOORING 09563 - 2 ;, 1 ' 1 PART2-PRODUCTS ~ 4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 5 6 7 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering wood athletic flooring systems which may be incorporated in the work include the following or approved: 8 9 Manufacturers of wood strip athletic flooring: 10 ' 11 Connor - AGA, Inc. 12 Horner Flooring Co. ' 13 14 Robbins, Inc. 1 ~, 16 WOOD STRIP ATHLETIC FLOORING 17 18 Grade, Cut, and Species: Comply with Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association grading rules for the 19 following: 20 21 Areas Normally Exposed to View: 22 23 Grade: Second and Better Grade. 24 25 Areas Under Stacked Portion of Rollin Bleachers: 26 27 Grade: Third and Better Grade. ' 28 29 Cut: Flat-Grain. 30 31 Species: Northern Hard Maple. 32 33 Lengths: Comply with Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association grading rules, except as otherwise indicated 34 for special patterns. 35 36 Matching: Tongued and grooved and end matched. 37 38 Back Channeling: Back channel each piece in accordance with manufacturer's standards, except when 39 specifically recommended by manufacturer to be plain backed for application indicated. 40 41 Thickness: 23/32". 42 ' 43 Face Width: 2-1/4" 44 ' 45 46 Seasoning: Kiln dried before milling. d7 48 ACCESSORY MATERIALS FOR WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING ' 49 50 Moisture Barrier: 6-mil carbonated polyethylene film. 51 ' 52 Resilient Pads: 3/8" x 2-1/4" x 3" resilient material. 53 54 Wood Sleepers/Resilient Pads: Wood sleepers of standard grade 2" x 3" x 4' tong fir or pine, KD and treated 55 with Woodlife. Resilient pads of 3/8" x 2-1/4 " x 3" resilient material properly stapled to bottom side of 56 sleepers. 57 [ridgeline ms) 09563 - 3 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 09563 - 3 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 PI ood Subfloorin Fir or southern ine APA Exterior Grade, C-D PLUGGED, 5/8" thick unless otherwise N indicated. Nails and Screws: Type and size recommended by mariufacturer, but not less than recommended by MFMA for each application. Floor Sealer: Valspar "WP-4" quick-dry polyurethane- sanding sealer. Gym Floor Finish: Valspar "WP-8" 450 VOC.Finish. - Expansion Base Trim: Vented, semi-rigid plastic angle molding; manufacturer's standard. Color as selected ' by Architect. (Black or brown) PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION General: Comply with flooring manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for applications indicated, but not less than Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association standards. Pattern Direction: -Lay flooring lengthwise with space to be floored, except as otherwise indicated. Tolerances: Level athletic wood flooring system to a tolerance.of 1/8" in 10'-0" radius. ~® Expansion Spaces: Provide space as indicated or required by instructions and standards, at walls and other obstructions, interruptions and terminations of flooring. Cover spaces with bases, trim, saddles, and !' thresholds, except fill flush with cork expansion strip when indicated to be uncovered. Check for Dryness: Before proceeding with installation of athletic wood flooring over concrete substrate, check for dryness. If not sufficiently dry, as determined by Installer, continue to dry substrate, or provide extra ', moisture protection for flooring. WOOD SUBFLOORING AND SLEEPER SYSTEM i~ Install polyethylene with joists lapped a minimum of 4" and mastic sealed. Turn up at walls and other vertical i, surfaces. ~ ~ ' Sleepers to be installed end to end at right angles to main playing court spaced at 12" o.c. with joints staggered 24". Maintain a minimum 2" expansion void at:,all walls and other permanent obstructions. j' Plywood Subfloor: Shall be nailed to the sleepers 12" o.c. with 1 /4"spacing provided between the joints of the plywood. Long axis of plywood perpendicular to sleepers. Provide 2" of clearance for expansion at walls and permanent obstructions. I' i Machine nail maple flooring running with end joints properly driven up and proper spacing provided for humidity conditions. Provide 2" expansion voids at the perimeter and at all vertical obstructions. ; . j SANDING AND FINISHING ~, Allow installed flooring to acclimate to ambient conditions for a minimum period of 10 days before sanding.. Machine sand with coarse, medium and fine grades of sandpaper, followed by disc sanding .with 000 i sandpaper. Clean with power vacuum and tack clean. Check to confirm that entire surface of each piece has i' been sanded and that floor is level and smooth, without ridges or cups. Proceed immediately with finish. [ridgeline ms] 09563 - 4 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING ~ 09563 - 4 ~' ~, 2 3 '~ 4 5 6 8 9 10 ~: 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 ~~ 25 Penetrating Sealer: Apply wood sealer (2 coats) in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, including machine buffing with steel wool, in=the-wet when recommended by manufacturer. Lines and Markers: Prior to application of first coat of floor finish, lay out ,lines, fields.and other markings as . indicated for colored enamel application. Mask flooring to provide sharp edge. Apply gym enamel in 1.0 mil thickness, in colors as indicated, or as selected by Architect. Where gamelines cross, break minor gameline at intersection; do not overlap lines. High-Build Gym Finish: Apply gym floor finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, including two.. coats of•sealer of type specified. Apply as many coats as needed to build a minimum dry film thickness as recommended by finish manufacturer. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for drying time between coats. Buff between each coat. Retain empty containers for confirmation of film thickness. Prevent traffic on finished floor for a minimum of 10 days. . Install expansion base trim and other cover trim as indicated for expansion. spaces at edges and interruptions. of flooring. PROTECTION Protect completed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with heavy Kraft paper or.other suitable covering, so that flooring and finish will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 09563 [ridgeline ms) 09563 - 5 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 09563 - 5 SECTION 09655 -FLOORING PREPARATION 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 7 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. ' 9 10 SUMMARY 11 12 Coordination for, and preparation of, concrete floor slabs to receive carpeting as furnished and installed by 13 Owner. 14 15 16 RELATED SECTIONS 17 18 Coordinate work specified in this section with other sections of the Project Manual including, but not limited ' 19 to, the following: 20 21 Division 1 Section "Summary of the Work/Special Conditions" for work under other contracts. 22 23 Division 3 Section "Cast in Place Concrete" for concrete floor finish and flatness. 24 25 Division 9 Section "Wood Athletic Flooring" for installation preparation requirements. 26 27 Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for installation preparation requirements. 28 29 Division 9 Section "Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering" for installation preparation requirements. 30 31 Division 9 Section "Resilient Athletic Flooring" for installation preparation requirements. 32 33 Division 9 Section "Carpet" for installation preparation requirements and coordination with Owner 1 34 for carpet delivery and installation. ' 37 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 38 39 Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland-cement-based formulation 40 provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated. 41 42 43 PART 3 -EXECUTION 44 45 46 PREPARATION 47 48 Concrete slabs shall be prepared by the General Contractor by steel troweling to a smooth surface free of 49 ridges, waves and irregularities and shall be flat to within %4 inch in a 10 foot radius unless noted or shown 50 otherwise. In Gym 222, slab to be flat to within 1/8" in a 10 foot radius. ' 51 52 Slab Moisture Content: Because the adhesives used to install the scheduled floor coverings over the concrete 53 floor slabs is sensitive to elevated moisture vapor emission and pH levels, the contractor shall as soon as 54 possible, take the actions necessary to bring these slabs into the acceptable levels, thereby avoiding 55 56 unnecessary delays in the installation of the floor finishes. 57 ~' [ridgeline ms] 09655 - 1 FLOORING PREPARATION 09655 - 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 All concrete slabs shall meet the following minimal requirements: Moisture Vapor Rate: The allowable amount of moisture vapor emission from the concrete slab substrate shall be acceptable up to, but not exceeding, 5 pounds per 1,000 sq. ft. per 24 hours. Alkali (pH) Factor: The maximum allowable pH reading shall be in the range of 7.0 to 9.0 as required by the manufacturer of the flooring adhesive. Readings which exceed either of the above listed test values shall become the responsibility of the General Contractorwho shall take corrective actions, i.e. additional heat, dehumidification, acid wash, etc. to bring the slab irito the acceptable level. This action shall be accomplished with no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 09655 [ridgeline ms] 09655 - 2 FLOORING PREPARATION 09655 = 2 C~ D SECTION 09660 -RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART1-GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Vinyl composition floor the Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories. Division 9 Section "Floor Preparation" for properly prepared subfloors to receive new finish flooring, including acceptable slab moisture and alkalinity readings. -_ 24 25 SUBMITTALS i 26 27 General: Submit the following in accordance with. Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification 28 Sections. 29 ,~ 30 Product data for each type of product specified. 31 . 32 Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect, signed by manufacturer 33 certifying that each product complies with requirements. 34 35 ~ Maintenance data for resilient floor tile, to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in 36 Division 1. - ~. 37 38 Resilient flooring manufacturer shall submit a Letter of Certification that the products specified and installed 39 do in fact either meet or exceed the static coefficient of friction of 0.5 for walking surfaces, 0.6 foraccessible 40 routes and .08 for ramps. 41 42 43 44 QUALITY ASSURANCE 45 Single-Source Responsibility for Floor Tile: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of the from a single source 46 with resources to provide products of consistentquality in appearance and physical propertieswithout delaying. 47 progress of the Work. 48 49 Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient floortile with the following fire performance characteristics 50 as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and 51 inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 52 53 Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E 648. 54 55 Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662. 56 .~ [ridgeline ms] 09660 -1 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver tiles and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of productand manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store tiles on flat surfaces. Move tiles and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. PROJECT CONDITIONS Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive tiles for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C). Do not install tiles until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. Close spaces to traffic during the installation. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Do not install tiles over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive Moisture Vapor. Rate: The allowable amount of moisture vapor emission from the concrete slab substrate shall be acceptable up to, but not exceeding, 5 pounds per 1,000 sq. ft. per 24 hours. Alkali (pH) Factor: The maximum allowable pH reading shall be as required by the manufacturer of the flooring adhesive. (See Part 2, Installation Accessories.) Readings which exceed either of the above listed test values shall become the responsibility of the General Contractorwho shalt take corrective actions, i.e. additional heat, dehumidification, acid wash, etc. to bring the slab into the acceptable level. This action shall be accomplished with no additional cost to the Owner. PROJECT CLOSEOUT Warren :The Application Contractor shall submit a written guarantee stating that all work and conditions ~, herein specified shall be guaranteed against any defects in materials and/orworkmanship (including adhesion) for a period of one (1) year from the date of "Final Completion" and defective work which develops during guarantee period shall be replaced at no additional cost to.the OWNER. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below; packaged -with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. Furnish not less than one box for each class, wearing surface, color, pattern and size of resilient floor the installed. ~~ [ridgeiine ms] 09660 - 2 RESILIENT TILE•FLOORING .09660 - 2 i; 2 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ~, 17 18 ~' 19 20 i 21 22 23 24 '' 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 PART 2 -PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products specified in the following schedule or approved. RESILIENT TILE Vinyl Composition Floor Tile (VCT): Products complying with ASTM F 1066, Composition 1 (nonasbestos formulated), and with requirements specified in the following schedule. Tile Detail at selected areas shall require borders or insets. See Drawing for all details. TILE SCHEDULE PRODUCT COLOR NAME KEY MFR COMMENTS NAME &/OR # VCT-1 ARMSTRONG STANDARD EXCELON AS SELECTED ACCENT COLOR 1 IMPERIAL TEXTURE BY ARCHITECT FROM FULL RANGE OF COLORS VCT-2 ARMSTRONG STANDARD EXCELON AS SELECTED ACCENT COLOR2 IMPERIAL TEXTURE BY ARCHITECT ' FROM FULL RANGE OF COLORS VCT-3 ARMSTRONG STANDARD EXCELON AS SELECTED ~ ACCENT COLOR3 IMPERIAL TEXTURE BY ARCHITECT FROM FULL RANGE OF COLORS VCT-4 ARMSTRONG STANDARD EXCELON AS SELECTED FIELD COLOR IMPERIAL TEXTURE BY ARCHITECT FROM BASIC COLORS Weight Room Flooring: Shall be "Gymtile FL-100" as manufactured by Pawling Corp. or approved. Size 24" x 24" x 7/16" thick. To be cut-resistant, reversible and have an etched anti-slip surface. Adhesive attachment not required. Flammability Test (Flooring, Radiant Panel NFPA 253; ASTM E-648). Provide border and corner tiles and all accessory pieces as required fora complete system. (By Owner) INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant type recommended by the manufacturer to suit resilient floor the products and substrate conditions indicated. Edge Guards and Reducer Strips:' See Division 9 Section, "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories." [ridge-ine rnsj 09660 - 3 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 3 PART 3 -EXECUTION EXAWIINATION General: Examine areas where installation of the will occur, with I nstaller present, to verify that substrates and conditions comply with requirements specified in this section and are satisfactory for the installation. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Perform tests to determine moisture vapor rate and alkali (pH) factor levels as noted in Sequencing and Scheduling paragraph of this Section. Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any kind. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Once the installation is commenced, the costs of corrections of any defects encountered that are detrimental to the proper installation or appearance of the resilient flooring will be the responsibility of the installer. PREPARATION Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by tiles immediately before the installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. INSTALLATION General: Comply with the manufacturer's installation directions that are applicable to each type of tiie installation included in Project. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths at perimeter that equal less than one-half of a tile. Install tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cuttiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, ordeformed tiles. Lay tiles in basket weave pattern with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installing on top of finished the floor, install the before these items are installed. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door jambs, thresholds, and nosings. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. (ridgeline ms] 09660 - 4 . RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 4 Use full spread of adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with the manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. Hand roll tiles where required by the manufacturer. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Pertorm the following operations immediately after completing the installation: Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by the manufacturers. ~i Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by, resilient floor the manufacturer. Damp-mop the to remove black marks and soil Protect flooringagainst mars, marks, indentations, and other damage- from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by the manufacturer. Apply protective floor polish to the surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surtace blemishes. Use commercially available, metal, cross-linked acrylic product acceptable to the manufacturer. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. ,! i Do not. move heavy and sharp objects directly over tiles. Place plywood or hardboard panels over tiles and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. Clean tiles not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean tiles using method recommended by manufacturer. Strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing installation prior to cleaning. Reapply floor polish after cleaning. END OF SECTION 09660 [ridgeline ms] 09660 - 5 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 5 '` . SECTION 09666 -SHEET V/NYL FLOOR COVERINGS ' 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 2 3 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 7 Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 8 ' 10 SUMMARY 11 12 This Section includes the following: 13 14 Sheet vinyl floor coverings 15 16 Related Sections: The following section contains requirements that relate to this section. 17 18 Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base reducer strips, and 19 other accessories. 21 Division 9 Section "Floor Preparation" for properly prepared subfloors to receive new finish flooring 22 including acceptable slab moisture and alkalinity readings. 25 SUBMITTALS 26 27 General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification. 28 Sections. 29 30 Product data for each type of product specified. 1 31 32 Shog drawings showing location of seams and edge strips. Indicate location of columns, doorways, enclosing 33 partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in flooring. 34 35 Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect, signed by manufacturer ' 36 certifying that each product complies with requirements. 37 38 Installer certificates signed by floor covering manufacturer certifying that Installers comply with requirements " " 39 specified under Quality Assurance article. 40 41 Maintenance data for sheet vinyl floor coverings, to include in the Operating and Maintenance Manual 42 specified in Division 1. 43 44 Resilient flooring manufacturer shall submit a Letter of Certification that the products specified and installed 45 do in fact either meet or exceed the static coefficient of friction of 0.5 for walking surfaces, 0.6 for accessible ' 46 routes and .08 for ramps. 47 ' 49 QUALITY ASSURANCE 50 51 Installer Qualifications: Installer of "abrasive sheet vinyl flooring" must be certified in writing by manufacturer 52 as qualified for the installation of the flooring material employing heat-welded seams, and also must have S3 completed a minimum of five projects of similar size and scope. 54 ' [ridgeline ms] 09666 - 1 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 1 Single-Source Responsibility for Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of sheet vinyl floorcovering from a single sourcewith resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide sheet vinyl floor coverings with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E 648. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver sheet vinyl floor coverings and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50-deg F (10 deg G) and 90 deg F (32--deg C). ~ ~ . Move sheet vinyl floor coverings and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. PROJECT CONDITIONS Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) ,in spaces to receive sheet vinyl floor coverings'for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, arid for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C). • , Do not install sheet vinyl floor coverings until they are at the same temperature as the space where they-are to be installed. ' Close spaces to traffic while installing sheet vinyl floor covering. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Install sheet vinyl floor coverings and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Do not install sheet vinyl floor coverings over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive. Moisture Vapor Rate: The allowable amount of moisture vapor emission from the concrete slab substrate shall be acceptable up to,'but not exceeding, 5 pounds per 1,000 sq.~ft. per 24 hours. Alkali (pH) Factor: The maximum allowable pH reading shall be as required by the manufacturer of the flooring adhesive. (See Part 2, Installation Accessories.) Readings which exceed either of the above fisted test values shall become the responsibility of the General Contractorwho shall take corrective actions, i.e. additional heat,~dehumidification; acid wash-etc. to bring the slab into the acceptable level. This action shall be accomplished with no additional cost to the Owner. [ridgeline ms] 09666 - 2 -SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS ~ 09666 - 2 1 f 37 38 ' 39 ' 40 41 42 ' 43 44 45 ' 46 47 48 49 ' 50 PROJECT CLOSEOUT Warran :The Application Contractor shall submit a written guarantee stating that all work and conditions herein specified shall be guaranteed against anydefects in materials and/orworkmanship (including adhesion) for a period of one (1) year from the date of "Final Completion" and defective work which develops during guarantee period shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form of each different composition, wearing surface, color, and pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering installed. PART2-PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products specified in the following schedule or approved. SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings (SV): Products complying with ASTM F 1303, and with requirements specified in the following schedule. Welded seams with thread to match flooring color and to be furnished by flooring manufacturer. _Abrasive Sheet Vinyl (ASV): Products complying with ASTM F 1303. Welded seams with thread to match flooring color and to be furnished by flooring manufacturer. Cemented seams are not acceptable. SHEET VINYL: FLOORING KEY MANUFACTURER PRODUCT NAME COLOR NAME &/OR # AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT SV-1 ARMSTRONG POSSIBILITIES FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL LINE OF STANDARD COLORS ASV-1 ALTRO D-25 DESIGNER INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant, stabilized type as recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering products and substrate conditions indicated. [ridgeiine ms] 09666 - 3 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 3 Rod for Heat-Welding Seams: Product of floor covering manufacturer in color complying with the following requirement. Match field color of sheet vinyl floor covering. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of sheet vinyl floor coverings, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.. Edge Guards and Reducer Strips: See Division 9 Section, "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories." PART 3 -EXECUTION EXAMINATION General: Examine areas where installation of sheet vinyl will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions comply with requirements specified in this section and are satisfactory for sheet vinyl installation. ~ ~ . Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: Sfab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Perform tests to determine moisture vapor rate and alkali (pH) factor levels as noted in Sequencing and. Scheduling paragraph at this Section. Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Division. 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions; scale; and foreign deposits of any kind. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Once the installation. is commenced, the costs of corrections of any defects encountered that are detrimental to the proper installation or appearance of the resilient flooring will be the responsibility of the installer. PREPARATION Broom. or vacuum clean substrates .to be covered by. sheet vinyl floor coverings immediately before installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates to determine if there is visually any evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. . (ridgeline ms] 09666 - 4 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 4 I r . l i I 1 INSTALLATION 3 General: Comply with sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer's installation instructions that are applicable to 4 each type of floor covering installation included in Project. 5 ' 6 Lav out sheet vinyl floor coverings to comply with the following requirements: 7 8 Maintain uniformity of sheet vinyl floor covering direction. 9 10 Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low traffic areas, but '. 11 in no case less than 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates. 12 13 Match edges of resilient floor coverings for color shading and pattern at seams. 14 15 Avoid cross seams. 17 Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installing on top of finished floor covering, 1 18 install floor covering before these items are installed. 19 20 Scribe, cut, and fit sheet vinyl floor coverings to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures and built-in 21 , furniture, including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. 22 23 Extend sheet vinyl floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. 24 25 Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by 26 repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. 27 28 Adhere sheet vinyl floor coverings to flooring substrates by method approved by floor covering manufacturer. 29 30 Produce completed installation without open cracks, voids,, raising and puckering at joints, ' 31 32 telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. 33 Comply with floor covering manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive 34 mixing, and adhesive open and working times. 35 36 Heat-weld seams in sheet vinyl floor coverings unless otherwise noted. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to 37 produce a surface flush with adjoining sheets. 38 39 Integral Flash Cove Base: At all scheduled sheet vinyl floors, provide cove sheet vinyl floor coverings up 40 vertical surfaces to form integral base of height indicated over cove support strip with top edge butted against 41 and covered by cap molding. 5 inch height, i.e., at columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent 42 fixtures. Provide continuous sealant at top of cove base between metal edge and finished wall. Provide at ' 43 all finished wall surfaces. 44 45 Hand roll sheet vinyl floor coverings in both directions from center out to embed floor coverings in adhesive ' 46 and eliminate trapped air. At walls, door casings, and other locations where access by roller is impractical, 47 press floor coverings firmly in place with flat-bladed instrument. i~ [ridgeline ms] 09666 - 5 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 5 1 2 4 5 6 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 ~~' CLEANING AND PROTECTION Perform the following operations immediately after installing sheet vinyl floor coverings: ~ ' Remove visible adhesive and.other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by floor covering manufacturers, Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. Do not wash floor until after period recommended by floor covering manufacturer. '1 Damp-mop floor to .remove black marks and soil. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by floor covering manufacturer. I' Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over sheet vinyl floor coverings. Place plywood or hardboard panels over floor coverings and under„objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. ,~ Clean resilient sheet flooring and a I olish if recommended b floorin manufacturer not more than 4 PP Y P ~~ Y . 9 ) days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended toestablish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Coordinate with Owner's Maintenance Department for type of polish or as recommended by 1 flooring manufacturer. ~ , END OF SECTION 09666 '' . ~~ [ridgeline ms] 09666 - 6 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 6 ~' ~, 2 4 '~ 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 ' 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 . 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 ', 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 ~~~ SECTION 09669 -- RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS ' Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY This section includes the following: The multipurpose gymnasium sport flooring shall include the furnishing of materials and complete installation including laying, gluing, welding and application of gamelines. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: Division 9 Section "Floor Preparation" for properly prepared subfloors to receive new finish flooring, including acceptable slab moisture and alkalinity readings. SUBMITTALS Manufacturer's product data. Maintenance instructions. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer: Provide athletic flooring materials, adhesives and gameline markings as required for complete flooring system. Installer qualifications: Installer of flooring must be approved in writing by manufacturer as qualified for the installation of the flooring materials. Installation shall be performed in accordance with the most recent installation instructions of the manufacturer. Also must have completed a minimum of five projects of similar size and scope. DELIVERY/ STORAGE AND HANDLING Flooring contractor shall not deliver to jobsite until the work of the other trades have been completed (especially overhead trades). Flooring materials must be stored in up-right position, never store in horizontal position. ' [ridgeline ms] 09669 -1 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING - 09669 - 1 PROJECT /SITE CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: The building shall be dry and enclosed. Permanent heat, light and ventilation , shall be.installed and operable. All work, which would cause damage, dirt, dust or interruption of normal installation pace, shall tie completed at least one week prior to and during the installation and the room temperature must be maintained at a minimum of 65° F. The installation area shall be closed to all traffic t activity for a period of time to be set by the flooring contractor. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Install sheet floor coverings and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. _Do not install sheet floor coverings over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive as determined by the installation contractor. Moisture Vapor Rate: The allowable amount of moisture vapor emission from the concrete slab substrate shall be acceptable up to, but not exceeding, 5 pounds per 1,000 sq. ft. per 24 hours. Alkali (pH) Factor: The maximum allowable pH reading shall be as required by the manufacturer of ~, the flooring adhesive. (See Part 2, Materials.) Readings which exceed either of the above listed test values shall become the responsibility of the General ;' Contractorwho shall take corrective actions, i.e. additional heat, dehumidification, acid wash, etc. to bring the slab into the acceptable level. This action shall be accomplished with no additional cost to the Owner. ~, PROJECT CLOSEOUT Warranty: Manufacturer expressly warrants that the specified flooring and accessories shall be free from ', manufacturing defects for a period of two (2)-years from date of final completion. This coverage is limited to the normal sports use and maintenance of the product. This warranty will become null and void if the subfloor conditions and installation procedures do not conform to those prescribed by the manufacturer. , ~~ Manufacturer further expressly warrants that the wear layer of their floor covering shall be free from defects in materials for 15 years from date of final completion, provided such floor coverings., are exclusively subject to normal sports use and receive proper maintenance. j This guarantee does not cover damage to nor failure of the flooring system due to moisture migration or hydrostatic pressure. , Manufacturer reserves the right to change design, material or specification to improve products or processing 1I at anytime without notice. PART 2 -PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following or approved: Mondo-West USA, Inc. 4208 198h Street SW, Suite 105 I' Lynnwood, WA 98036-6735 1-800/962-5334 F [ridgeline ms] 09669 - 2 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING 09669 - 2 y, i i 1 MATERIALS Product: Mondo Advance 5 Prefabricated athletic rubber flooring, calendared and vulcanized with a base of natural and synthetic rubber, 6 stabilizing agents and pigmentation, as manufactured by MONDO AMERICA, INC. or approved equal., 7 8 Thickness: '/2' (12 mm). Colors: As selected by Architect. Finish: Smooth /Mat. 14 Manufactured in three layers, which are vulcanized together. The shore hardhess of the top layer will be '~ 15 greater than that of the middle and bottom layer; shore hardness of layers to be recommended by the 16 manufacturer and the limits specified. Leveling compound: As approved by manufacturer to correct minor subfloor deviations. Adhesive: Shall be supplied by resilient flooring manufacturer and shall be specifically compounded to assure compatibility with the material and applicable subsurfaces. Game Line Markings: Shall be supplied by resilient flooring manufacturer. Provide one color for each game layout. Colors shall be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 30 EXAMINATION 31 '; 32 General: Examine areas where installation of resilient athletic flooring will occur, with Installer present, to 33 verify that substrates and conditions comply with requirements specified in this section and are satisfactory 34 for resilient athletic floor covering installation. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F. 710 and the. following: Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Pertorm tests to determine moisture vapor rate and alkali (pH) factor levels as noted in Sequencing and Scheduling paragraph of this Section. Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient athletic flooring. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any kind. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Once the installation is commenced, the costs of corrections of any defects encountered that are detrimental to the proper installation or appearance of the resilient athletic flooring will be the responsibility of the installer. PREPARATION 55 Use trowelable Ievelinc,Land patching compounds per floor covering manufacturer's direction fo fill cracks, ` 56 holes, and depressions, to provide smooth substrate for acceptance of finish flooring. '! 57 [ridgeline ms] 09669 - 3 ~ RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING ~ 09669 - 3 '` _ Remove coatings, including_curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with aheavy-duty wire brush. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient athletic floor coverings immediately before installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates to determine if there is visually any evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. In areas where existing flooring has been removed from the substrate, clean and repair substrate to such a degree that no materials will be left to telegraph through new resilient flooring. Any areas of telegraphing will be required to be repaired. ADHESIVES Only use adhesives approved by flooring manufacturer. Flooring manufacturer will not guarantee product performancewhen used with non-approved adhesives substitutes. Foradhesive performance questions, refer to adhesive manufacturer recommendations. INSTALLATION Slab temperature shall be maintained at a minimum of 65 degrees for 48 hours prior to the installation, during the installation, and 48 hours after the installation. The installation area shall be closed to all traffic and activity for a period to be set by the flooring contractor. Adequate electrical service, lighting and ventilation shall be provided; and safety precautions - i.e. no smoking, open flame or equipment that could cause sparks -shall be.observed. The installation of flooring should be done according to written instructions provided byflooring manufacturer. See the flooring manufacturer specifications and installation guide for further details. Chemically bond seams in resilient athletic floor coverings unless otherwise noted. Prepare seams and apply seam sealers to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps or overlaps. Scribe, cut, and fit resilient athletic floor coverings to butt tightly to vertical surfaces. Extend floor coverings into door reveals and similar openings. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. All game lines shall be applied using the compounded polyurethane paint as approved by flooring manufacturer. Colors to be selected from the flooring manufacturer's color chart. MAINTENANCE As recommended in the flooring manufacturer's maintenance instructions guide. The maintenance instructions will be delivered to the owner, the attendants or individual responsible for the upkeep of the facility. These instructions must be followed, any deviations or substitutions shall be submitted to flooring manufacturer and /or its distributors for approval. END OF SECTION 09669 (ridgeline msi 09669 - 4 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING _ 09669 - 4 ,I, SECTION 09678 -RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSOR/ES '' 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 2 3 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 1 7 Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 8 9 10 SUMMARY ~i 11 12 This Section includes the following:, 13 14 Resilient wall base. (Owner Furnish, Owner Install) 15 16 Resilient stair accessories. 17 '~ 18 Resilient flooring accessories. 19 20 Resilient carpet accessories. (Owner Furnish, Owner Install) 21 22 All rubber base shall be furnished and installed by the Owner's carpet supplier /installer. Owner's 23 supplier /installer shall coordinate with the General Contractor for delivery dates to job site and starting 24 and finishing dates for installation. ~ ' ~, 25 , 26 Special Conditions: When the scheduled carpeting is to be furnished and installed by the Owner, the following 27 conditions will prevail: ~ 28 , 29 When the resilient the and sheet vinyl flooring is not to be installed adjacent to the carpeting, these the . 30 and sheet vinyl flooring accessories will then be furnished and installed under this contract. 31 , 32 Resilient flooring accessories for carpeting, when, used only with carpet or when used at joint between 33 carpet and resilient flooring, shall be furnished and installed by the Owner's carpet supplier/installer. 34 - 35 All rubber base as required in the Contract Documents shall be furnished.and installed by the Owner's 36 carpet supplier/installer. Owner's supplier / installer shali~coordinate with the General Contractor for 37 delivery dates to job site and starting and finishing dates for installation. 38 39 Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 40 41 Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring." 42 43 Division 9 Section "Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering." 44 45 Division 9 Section °Caroeting." ' 46 47 Division 9 Section "Floor Preparation" for properly prepared subfloors to receive new finish flooring, 48 including acceptable slab moisture and alkalinity readings. 49 50 , 51 [ridgeline ms] 09678 - 1 RESILIENT WALL .BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 1 SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data for each type of product specified. Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect, signed by manufacturer certifying that each product complies with requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Single-Source Resporisibility for Products: Obtain each type and color of product specified from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products perASTM test method indicated below by UL oranothertesting and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E 648. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662. DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING Deliver products to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. PROJECT CONDITIONS Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive products specified in this Section for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C). Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as that of the space where they are to be installed. Close spaces to traffic during installation of products specified in this Section. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Sequence installing products specified in this Section with other construction to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. [ridgeline ms] 09678 - 2 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 2 1 2 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 PROJECT CLOSEOUT Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly describing contents. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof of each different type and color of resilient wall base installed. PART2-PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products specified in the following schedule or approved. RESILIENT WALL BASE (Owner Furnished, Owner Installed) Rubber Wall Base: Products complying with ASTM F-1861, Type TS, and FS SS-W-40, Type 1, and requirements specified in the following schedule. ;RUBBE'R BASE SCHEDULE KEY MFR/NUMBER STYLE ~ THICKNESS/ HT COLOR NAME &/OR # Ro a To Set Cove 4" As Selected b Architect Ro a To Set Cove 6" As Selected b Architect RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES Rubber Stair Treads: In the following Rubber Stair Treads Schedule provide products from manufacturer as indicated, or approved, and complying with FS RR-T-650, Composition A. Provide at all stair locations. Risers: Product of same manufacturer as stair treads and complying with requirements specified in the following Rubber Stair Treads Schedule. Provide at all stair locations. Stringers: Product of same manufacturer as stair treads and complying with requirements specified in the following Rubber Stair Treads Schedule. Provide at all stair locations. RUBBER STAIR TREADS SCHEDULE KEY MFR/NUMBER STYLE NOSING TYPE THICKNESS COLOR NAME &IOR # St-1 Ro a #30 S uare 3/16" As Selected b Architect [ridgeline ms] 09678 - 3 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES Rubber Accessories: Products complying with requirements specified in the following schedule or approved See "Special Conditions" under PART 1 -SUMMARY. RESILIENT ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE KEY DESCRIPTION MFRINUMBER SIZE COLOR NAME &/OR # Resilient Floorin to Concrete Ro a #168 1/8" Resilient Floorin to Car et Ro a #58 VCT to Sheet Vin I Ro e #61 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. Stair Tread Nose Filler: Two-partepoxycompound recommended by resilient treadmanufacturertofillnosing substrates not conforming to tread contours. Adhesives: Water-resistant type as manufactured by or recommended by manufacturer of resilient product to be installed. PART 3 -EXECUTION EXAMINATION General: Examine areas where installation of specified items will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions comply with requirements specified in this section and are satisfactory for installation. Once the installation is commenced, the costs of corrections of any defects encountered that are detrimental to the proper installation or appearance of the resilient flooring will be the responsibility of the installer. PREPARATION Use stair tread nose filler per tread manufacturer's directions to fill nosing substrates not conforming to tread contours. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing products specified in this Section. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. [ridgeline ms) 09678 - 4 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 4 ~~ , D ~ 1 INSTALLATION 2 3 General: ~ Install products specified in this Section using methods indicated according to manufacturer's 4 installation directions. 5 6 Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and otlier~permanent fixtures (i.e. lockers) in a 7 rooms and areas where base is required. Install wall base.from coil stock in lengths as long as practicable. 8 Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with 9 horizontal and vertical substrates. 10 11 On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base 12 with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 13 14 Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials of type indicated and bond to substrates ~! 15 -with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that otherwise would be exposed. 16 ~} 17 18 Apply resilient accessories to stairs as indicated and according to manufacturer's installation instructions. ^ 19 20 CLEANING.AND PROTECTION 21 a! 22 Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation: 23 24 25 Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by manufacturers of resilient product involved. 26 27 .Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 28 29 Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by mariUfacturer. 30 31 Damp-mop resilient accessories to remove black marks and soil. 32 33 -Protect wall base, stairtreads, risers, stringer and miscellaneous resilient accessories against mars, marks, 34 indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during 35 remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by manufacturer of 36 resilient product involved. 37 38 Clean products specified in this Section not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections a 39 intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products using method 40 recommended by manufacturer. 41 42 43 END OF SECTION 09678 0 a [ridgeline ms] 09678 - 5 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 5 ~~ - a SECTION .09680 -CARPETING . ~' 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 2 3 ~. ~' 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS ` 5 , 6 Drawings and generaCprovisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 7 Specification.sections, apply to the work of-this section. 8 9 .. 10 SUMMARY 11 . `. - 12 The Owner, under separate contract will supply and install the following: 13 - ~ 14 All carpeting which is scheduled in the Finish Schedule:. - ' ± 15 16 All rubber base. 17 a 18 19 RELATED SECTIONS 20 ~ 21 Coordinate work specified in-this section with other sections of the Project Manual including, but not limited ! 22 to, the following: ~ . 23 24 Division 1 .Section "Scope of Work/Special Conditions" for work under other contracts. ! ~ 25 - ' 26 Division.3 Section "Concrete" for concrete finish and flatness. ' 27 a 28 Division 9 Section"Floor Preparation" for properly prepared subfloors to receive new finish flooring, ' 29 including acceptable slab moisture and alkalinity readings. - 30 a 31 32 Division 9'Section "Resilient~Wall Base and`Accessories" for all resilient flooring accessories. 33 34 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND. HANDLING 35 36 General Contractor shall coordinate with Owner's separate carpet contractor for their delivery, storage, and 37 handling of carpet; installation materials and tools. , Q~ 38 39 40 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 41 42 The General Contractor shall coordinate carpet and rubber base installation with the Owner's supplierlinstaller 43 (carpeting contractor). The length of time required for carpet installation as estimated by installer shall be ` 44 included in the contractor's CPM schedule. Installation must be completed before the date of substantial 45 completion. The General Contractor shall allow access to the building during regular workday hours as 46 required by the carpeting contractor, 47 . 48 49 PART 2 -PRODUCTS ~~ 50 51 N/A - 52 ~ 53 ~ 54 [ridge(irie ms] 09680 - 1 - .CARPETING 09680- 1 1 2 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 PART 3 -EXECUTION ' PREPARATION ' It will be the responsibility of the Owner's carpet installer to test the concrete slabs to verify the readings of the two following tests: Moisture Vapor Rate: The allowable amount of moisture vapor emission from the concrete slab substrate shall be acceptable up to, but not exceeding, 5 pounds per.1,000 sq. ft. per 24 hours. Alkali (pH) Factor: The maximum allowable pH reading shall be in the range of 7.0 to 9.0 as required by the manufacturer of the flooring adhesive. t Readings which exceed either of the above listed test values shall become the responsibility of the General Contractor who shall take corrective actions, i.e. additional heat, dehumidification, acid wash, etc. to bring the slab into the acceptable level. This action shall be accomplished with no additional cost to the Owner. ~ CLEANING AND PROTECTION Owner's Supplier and Installer: Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation: Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by .manufacturers of resilient producYinvolved. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. ~^ Damp-mop resilient accessories to remove black marks and soil. Provide protective methods and materials needed to ensure that carpeting will be without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. General Contractor: ~;' Protect carpet wall base stair stringer and miscellaneous resilient accessories against stains, mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of j' equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated ; or recommended by manufacturer of resilient product involved. ' ', END OF SECTION 09680 ' ;' !'~ [ridgeline ms] 09680 - 2 CARPETING - 09680 - 2 ,' i ~~ 1 SECTION 09800 -INTERACTIVE ACOUSTICAL PANELS 2 a, 4 5 PART 1 GENERAL 6 O 7 ~. - 8 .1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 9 10 A. Furnish and install a system of sound-absorbing and sound-diffusing acoustical panels of a: 11 size and shape shown on the drawings, and tested to the acoustical performance 12 standards specified herein. - 13 a 14 1. Rooms 305 -Choral and 621 -Band. 15 2. As referred to acoustical panels on the Interior Elevation for Rooms 305 and 621. 16 17 1.02 REFERENCES ~;' 18 19 A. .American Society of Testing and Materials: . . 20 1. ASTM C423 -Standard Test Method of Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption 21 Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. 22 2. ASTM E90 -Standard Method of Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound 23 Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. 24 3. ASTM E413 -Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class. - 0' 25 4. ASTM E795 - Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound 26 Absorption Tests. 27 5. ASTM E84 -Test of Surface Burning Characteristics. a 28 ~ 29 . B. National Fire Protection Association: 30 1. NFPA 101 -Life Safety Code Requirements for Interior Finish. 31 32 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 33 34 A. Furnish a system of sound-absorbing and sound-diffusing panels for reducing sound 35 energy levels .and improving the hearing environment. 36 37 B. Small Diffuser Panels (Type I -less than 24 sq. ft. in size): Wall mounted; impact resistant 38 cylindrical section with two faceted ends; fabric wrapped. a 39 40 C. Mounting Hardware: 41 1. Wall mounting (absorbers and diffusers): Four. corner. support, designed to allow 42 panels of same size to be interchanged. NOTE: 2" clearance above top of absorbers 43 and diffusers needed for proper mounting. 44 -• 45 46 D. Acoustical Performance Requirements: 1. Sound absorption coefficients, measured with a l`ype A and.Type E-400 mounting, 47 according to ASTM. E795 (if .applicable) or according to application mounting method, 48 determined by ASTM C423. 49 2. Sound Transmission Class (STC), determined according to ASTM E90 and ASTM ~~ 50 E413: Type l ceiling diffuser panel, 4'x 4'; STC 23. 51 _, 52 [ridgeline ms] 09800-1 INTERACTI VE ACOUSTICAL PANELS. 09800-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit applicable reference standards and application recommendations and limitations. B. Shop Drawings: Submit design and installation drawings showing product components in assembly with adjacent materials and products. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. D. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Maintenance recommendations. 2. Warranty. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pack and .ship to avoid damage according to manufacturers recommendations: 1. Factory finish and assemble all components before shipment. 2. Ship components in sealed, labeled cartons. B. Do not accept damaged products at the site. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Obtain from Contractor and indicate on Shop Drawings. B. Environmental Requirements: Install panels after all mortar, wet and dust producing trades have completed. their work and wall and ceiling surfaces have been finished. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturers written warranty that products not in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents within three years after date of commencement of warranties shall be corrected promptly after receipt of written notice from Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS /PRODUCTS A. WENGER CORPORATION, Type II Diffusers. WALL TECHNOLOGY, Customline Diffusers. B. Finishes:. - 1. Wall-mounted panels: Manufacturer's standard woven plain weave 100% polyester 2- ply fabric wrapping entire core and frame and glued to back of frame, color selected from manufacturer's standard palette. (ridgeline ms] 09800-2 INTERACTIVE ACOUSTICAL PANELS 09800-2 ' ~. t t t t i 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 2 3 4 3.01 INSTALLATION 5 6 A. Install per manufacturer's recommended installation. 7 8 3.02 CLEANING 9 10 A. Manufacturer's appointed installer shall clean all surfaces upon installation. 11 12 B. Manufacturer's installer shall remove all packing materials and construction debris from 13 site. 14 15 16 END OF SECTION 09800 [ridgeline ms] 09800-3 INTERACTIVE ACOUSTICAL PANELS 09800-3 t a f SECTION 09900 -PAINTING 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS ~~ 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 7 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 8 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS Except as hereinafter specified, for materials and workmanship, conform to the "Architectural Specification Manual" hereinafter referred to as "ASM", as published by: Specification Services, Inc., 1001 SW Klickitat Way, Suite 204, Seattle, Washington 98134, Revised April 1996. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Accent: Approximately 5% or less of total area will consist of "medium to deep colors" which may require one additional coat above those specified for custom or premium finishes. This accent is in addition to any accent specified in graphics application. Surfaces To Be Painted: Unless otherwise noted ALL EXPOSED SURFACES AND MATERIALS ARE TO BE PAINTED whether or not surfaces or materials have been scheduled or noted for paint finish. Exceptions to this rule are .natural finishes of materials specifically noted below in paragraph "Surfaces Not To Be Painted." Where surfaces and materials have not been scheduled or noted for paint finish, paint with similar material and number of coats as on similarly scheduled or noted surface. ~! 29 Mechanical and Electrical: Shall be as specified in Division 15 and 16 with the exception of the ' 30 following items at the following locations: 31 32 Primary occupied spaces, i.e. classrooms, offices, corridors, toilets, assembly areas, etc. 33 34 Ductwork: All exposed ductwork and supports shall be painted to match ceiling ~ 35 unless noted otherwise. 1 prime and 2 finish coats. 37 Electric Panels, Fuse Boxes, Equipment Boxes: Shall. be heavily sanded to provide 38 tooth for application of 2 coats, of industrial enamel to match the adjoining wall color. 39 40 Miscellaneous Items: Conduit, plug mold, wire mold, vents, grilles, miscellaneous 41 pipe and any other miscellaneous mechanical or electrical items. Minimum of 2 42 coats of enamel or 1 primer and 1 finish. Color to match adjoining wall or ceiling '! 43 color. 44 45 Surfaces Not To Be Painted: Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory-finishing or installer-finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) roofing, brick, glass, plastic laminate toilet enclosures, acoustic materials, architectural woodwork and casework, and finish mechanical and electrical equipment, including sprinkler heads, light fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets. (ridgeline ms] 09900 - 1 PAINTING 09900 - 1 Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts. Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting. Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not require finish painting. Do not paint over any code-required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. Following categories of work are included under other sections of these specifications. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under various sections for structural steel, metal fabrications, hollow metal work and similar items. Unless otherwise specified; shop priming of fabricated components such as architectural woodwork, wood casework and shop-fabricated or factory-built mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories is included under other sections of these specifications. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 15 and 16, respectively. For ductwork and miscellaneous electrical items to be painted see "Surfaces to be Painted" in this specification section. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. Records of Paints Used: Contractor shall retain in good condition all paint schedules, marked plans and paint samples used forjob quality and color control. These are to be turned over to the Owner at the end of the job. COLOR SCHEDULES which are provided to the Contractor are frequently, due to the Contractor's preference of paint supplier, "crossed over" with colors being matched by another paint supplier (other than the supplier whose colors were specified). Since it is not possible to predict what supplier and therefore which product numbers will be used to complete a job, the color schedule (master) has extra blanks under each color for the insertion of product information which must be supplied by the paint contractorwhen a scheduled color may have to be mixed in more than one product type to paint different surfaces. For example: Walls are scheduled to be painted color "x". If metal louvers set in these walls require a different product type other than the type scheduled for the walls, use the blank space under "x" in the schedule to record the paint product and its number,;thereby facilitating the Owner's purchase of the proper product when maintenance is required. See sample at end of this section. QUALITY ASSURANCE Sin le Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings systems for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, [ridgeline ms) 09900 - 2 PAINTING 09900 - 2 ' I 1 furnish information or characteristics of finish materials provided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats 2 are used. 4 5 SUBMITTALS 6 7 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis and application 8 instructions for each material proposed for use. 10 Samples: Prior to beginning work, Architect will furnish color schedule for surfaces to be painted. Use 11 representative colors when preparing samples for review. Paint contractor shall allow adequate lead time for 12 aten-working-day approval process. This allows time for color adjustments, site approvals and required sign- 13 offs of submittals. 14 15 Submit samples on 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches index weight stock. Provide 3 samples of each color 16 and material. 17 18 Provide the following information on all brushouts sent: 19 20 JOB NAME 21 22 MANUFACTURER 24 COLOR # 25 26 COLOR NAME 28 MODIFICATIONS TO FORMULA (IF REQUIRED TO MATCH ANOTHER 29 MANUFACTURER'S PRODUCT) 30 31 PRODUCT # 32 33 Mail samples to be approved to: 35 ERICKSON McGOVERN, PLLC ' 36 Attn: Stan Zielinski 37 120 South 131st Street 38 Tacoma, WA 98444 39 (Telephone: 253-531-0206) 40 41 Samples for wood surfaces: Samples for surfaces to be stained or clear finished shall be submitted 42 on no less than 6 inch lengths of material representative of the surface to be stained and/or 43 clearcoated. Three samples required. 44 45 Provide the following information onto the backs of samples: ' 46 47 1) Paint manufacturer name 48 2) Stain color, type, product number 49 3) Percentage of modification if formula is decreased or increased to achieve a 50 specified level of transparency 51 Glulams and other large items shall receive small sample patches of color in inconspicuous areas 52 at the jobsite before coating of entire surface if approved, unless approval is waived in writing by the 53 Architect or consulting representative. 54 55 UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL PAINT APPLICATION BE PERMITTED WITHOUT 56 SPECIFIED SAMPLE APPROVAL. ANY PRODUCT APPLIED WHICH IS NOT ACCORDING TO [ridgeline ms] 09900 - 3 PAINTING 09900 - 3 SPECIFICATIONS AND SIGNED OFF FOR PROPER COLOR WILL BE SUBJECT TO REMOVAL. AND REPAINT AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. On concrete masonry, provide two 4-inch square samples of masonry for each type of finish and color, defining filler, prime and finish coat. DELIVERY AND STORAGE Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage bf paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Protect from freezing where necessary. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take all precautions to ensure that workmen and work areas are adequately protected from fire hazards and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and applicatioh of paints. JOB CONDITIONS AppIV water-base ap ints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. Apply solvent-thinned ap ints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and 95 degrees F (35 degrees C), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85%, or to damp or wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. Painting may be continued during inclementweather ifareas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer during application and drying periods. General contractor to supply adequate ventilation at all times during painting application. Electrical contractor to supply adequate lighting at all times.during painting applicatioh. PROJECT CLOSEOUT Extra Paint: Provide 1 gallon of each type and color of paint and finish used. Label and store where directed. Cans to be new and unopened. Extra material: Provide for owner aminimum ofone un-opened quart of each color for narrow stripes and one un-opened gallon for wide stripes. [ridgeline ms] 09900 - 4 PAINTING 09900 - 4 ~, 2 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 ~18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 ' 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 PART2-PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer:' Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one ofthe following or approved: Benjamin Moore ICI Dulux ' Sherwin-Williams MATERIALS/MANUFACTURERS Unless otherwise specified conform to.Standards ofASM, Chapter 7, for materials; this includes paint, varnish, stain, enamel, lacquer, fillers and related paint products and materials not specifically indicated, but required for prime, intermediate and fihish coats. MATERIALS LISTS Submit complete and detailed list by ASM Product No. with appropriate product trade name and number, of materials proposed- for use on. the .work; NO EXCEPTIONS. Submit- letter from manufacturer or manufacturer's representative accompanying list stating that proposed materials are first grade of types specified.and best of their respective.kinds and suitable for the intended purposes. No substitutions permitted .after approval of material list. Obtain Architect's, approval of:materials before ordering material. . Proprietary names used to designate colors oi- materials are not intended to imply that products of named manufacturers are required to exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSPECTION Applicator.mustexarnine areas and conditions underwhich painting work is to be applied and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to. proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Applicator.. Do not paint over dirt,- rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. • Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any particular area. SURFACE PREPARATION General: Perform preparation and cleaning. procedures to new and existing surfaces in accordance with ASM_ Section 3 and 3R and paint manufacturer's instructions. . . . Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or existing paint or remove and reprime as required.. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems with . substrates primed or painted by others. •, [ridgelirie ms) ' 09900 - 5 PAINTING 09900 - 5 Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish-painted, or provide surface-applied. protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, 'for complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall removed items. Remove oil, and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly-painted surfaces. MATERIALS PREPARATION Mix and rp epare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before. using. APPLICATION General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. Priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch-up painted, unless otherwise indicated. Prime Coats: Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted orfinished, and.which has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. Prime coat to be .applied prior to and after application of sprayed-on texture (see Section 09250). Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes, are indicated in "schedules" of the contract documents. Scheduling Painting: Apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, retreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after~preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give.special attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that offlat surfaces. [ridgeline ms] 09900 - 6 PAINTING 09900 - 6 ' 1 Spot Priming: Items that have been factor primed or shop primed and are damaged in shipment or during the 2 construction process may require spot priming where indicated in paint schedule..Paint contractor shall verify 3 that the spot primer specified is compatible with the shop primer applied during the fabrication process. 4 5 Pigmented O a ue Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, 6 color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or 7 other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. 8 9 For painting of cast concrete surfaces that may have areas of imperfection, (i:e.) form lines, rock 1 10 pockets, etc., either spray paint or brush out these rough areas to assure total surface coverage. 11 . 12 Vary color of successive paint and enamel coats to a distinguishable difference but similar to finish coat. 13 14 -Sand lightlx between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 15 16 Spray PaintApplication:Surfaces coated by spraying method shall be backrolled immediately after application 17 to redistribute paint film for a more consistent and even coverage. Leave no evidence of rolling; such as laps; 18 irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. 19 20 Completed Work: Painter responsible for improperworkmanship or misuse of finishing materials; refinish at 21 Painter's expense and leave. in first class condition, as approved by Architect. Surfaces damaged .after 22 painting and decorating is completed shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor and repaired at 23 General Contractor's expense to condition approved by Architect. . ' 24 25 Coating application prior to installation: For exterior wood siding, standing and running trim, i.e. fascia, rake 26 boards or other miscellaneous type of finish wood trim, apply a coat or primer or stain, dependent upon 27 specified finish, to all surfaces and cut ends which will be concealed after installation. 28 , 29 Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces 30 behind. permanently- fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment. 31 32 Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint. 33 34 Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 35 . 36 Finish exterior doors on tops,: bottoms and side edges same as exteriorfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 37 38 For surfaces receiving 2 coats of stain, apply as follows: Initial application method at contractor's discretion. ' 39 However, the stain is then to be back brushed with flat iron brushes to work stain well into the surface of the 40 material. No substitute methods. 42 Transparent Clear Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide 43 a finish free of laps, cloudiness; color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface 44 imperfections. 45 46 Provide satin finish for final coats, unless otherwise indicated. 47 49 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION 50 51 Clean-Up: ,During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at 52 end of each work day. 53 54 Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered 55 paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished 56 surfaces. 57 ' [ridgeiine ms] 09900 - `7 PAINTING 09900, - 7 Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 EXTERIOR PAINT AND FINISHING SCHEDULE General: Work specified herein is in ADDITION to shop coats called for under various other Divisions and Sections. SURFACE~OR FINISH N.O:.:OF 'PRODUCT NO. REMARKS MATERIAL . SYSTEM COATS CODE All Exterior Ext 1-C 2 coats (1st 7.1 Solid Body Stain/Solvent Base Cedar Ext 2-B coat prior to installation Exterior Non- Ext 1-B 1 coat 4.2 Waterborne Primer Cedar Wood 2 coats 6.2 Semi-Gloss Waterborne Exterior Decking Int 1-C 1 coat - •Uniforming Sealer 1 coat 26.1 Penetrating Semi-Transparent 2 coats 24.3 Stain Fast D Varnish Hardy Plank & Ext 16-A 1 coat Spot Prime 2.2 Alkali Resistant Primer Panel (Shop 2 coats 6.5 Flat Waterborne 100% Acrylic Primed Concrete Ext 6-A 1 coat 2.2 Alkali Resistant Primer 2 coats 6.5 Flat Waterborne Steel Doors & Ext 14-A 1 coat Spot Prime 12.1 Alkyd Galvanized Metal Primer Door Frames 2 coats 9.1 Alkyd Gloss Enamel sho rimed Ferrous Metal Ext 12-A 1 coat 12.1 Alkyd Metal Primer 2 coats 9.1 Alk d Gloss Enamel Preprimed Ext 14-A 1 coat Spot prime 12.2 Latex Galvanized Metal Primer Galvanized 2 coats 9.1 Alkyd Gloss Enamel Ferrous Metal Ferrous Metal Ext 14-A 1 coat 13.2 Latex Galvanized Primer Galvanized~k 2 coats 9.1 Afk d Gloss Enamel ~k Must be washed with lacquer to remove oils from surface prior to priming. •Uniforming Sealer: Three pounds cut clear shellac reduced nine parts denatured alcohol to one partshellac. After all wood surfaces to be stained are totally prepared, spread one uniform thin coat over all surfaces. (Do not over saturate surface.) [ridgeline ms] 09900 - 8 PAINTING 09900 - 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 NOTE THE FOLLOWING FOR EXTERIOR PAINT Downspouts: Shall be painted out same color as their background. PVC downspouts painting preparations: Fine sand to degloss and provide tooth. Provide one coat primer, ICI Devoe, Devguard #4160, or equivalent and two finish coats 100% acrylic satin enamel. (Tint primer coat similar to top coat for best hide). Paintout: All miscellaneous mechanical, vents, louvers, or other detail against brick will receive a brick matching paint; all similar items against neutral walls shall paint out as required USING APPROPRIATE PRODUCT FOR SURFACE TYPE. No metal or other surfaces requiring special paint will be accepted if painted with improper product (e.g. latex over unprimed metal). Spot prime all factory or shop primed items damaged in shipment or installation with primer compatible to existing primer and top coats. INTERIOR PAINT AND FINISH SCHEDULE SURFACE FINISH NO. OF PRODUCT' NO. REMARKS OR SYSTEM COATS MATERIAL CODE Gypsum Int 3-B 1 coat 19-2 Waterborne Primer Sealer Wallboard 2 coats ^23-4 (See Note 1) Ac lic - E shell Gypsum Per mfr. iEPT Waterborne Epoxy System Wallboard SC10.2 E ox Concrete Int 6-B 1 coat 3.2 - Block Filler -Latex Masonry Units 1 coat 19.2 Waterborne Primer Sealer all typ. 2 coats ^23.4 Acrylic Enamel -Eggshell Ac lic Concrete Int 5-D DEPT Masonry Units at all Toilet Rooms E ox Wood Trusses Int 1-C 1 coat - •Uniforming Sealer & Int/Ext 1 coat 26.1 Penetrating Semi-Transparent Stain Decking 2 coats 24.3 Fast D Varnish Steel Doors & Int 12-B 1 coat Spot prime 13.1 Solvent Base Corr. Resis. Primer Frames & 2 coats ^23.2 Acrylic Enamel -Semi-Gloss Mullions Standing & Int 1-C 1 coat 26.1 Solvent Base -Wood Stain Running Trim 1 coat 30.1 Solvent Base -Sealer Stain 2 coats ~k24.3 ~kQuick-D in -Varnish Standing & Int 1-B 1 coat 19.2 Waterborne Primer Sealer Running Trim 2 coats ^23.2 Acrylic Enamel -Semi-Gloss Paint ' [ridgeline ms] 09900 - 9 PAINTING 09900 - 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SURFACE FINISH NO. OF PRODUCT NO. R'REMARKS OR SYSTEM COATS MATERIAL CODE Medium Int 1-B 1 coat 2.2 Waterborne Primer Density 2 coats 23.4 Acrylic Enamel -Eggshell Fiberboard Galvanized Int 13-B 1 coat 13.2 Latex Galvanized Primer Steel 2 coats ^23.4 Acrylic Enamel -Eggshell Exposed Int 12-B 1 coat Spot prime 21 Alkyd Metal Primer Ferrous Metal 2 coats 22.1 Alkyd Enamel -Gloss Schedule Notes: 1) Two (2) coats of primer will be required if GWB is spray textured. One (1) coat before and one (1) coat after the texturing. ^ When product#23-2 or#23-4 is specified for use, provide ICI "Dulux Pro Acrylic Enamel", Kelly-Moore "1680 Series - Dura-Poxy Acrylic", or approved product equivalent in performance, i.e. excellent adhesion qualities, rapid curing and drying, scrubbability and exceptional stain and abrasion resistance. lEPT (Epoxy Paint) Provide Devoe "Tru-Glaze WB" No. 4408 Gloss or No. 4406 Semi-gloss, or approved. Shall be waterborne epoxy acrylic. Apply number of coats and to dry film thickness as recommended by coating manufacturer. Over CMU, apply 1 coat of Bloxfil 4000 prior to epoxy application. Over GWB, apply 1 coat of Waterborne Primer sealer as specified in the above paint schedule. •Uniforming Sealer: Three pounds cut clear shellac reduced nine parts denatured alcohol to one part shellac. After all wood surfaces to be stained are totally prepared, spread one uniform thin coat over all surfaces. (Do not over saturate surface.) NOTE THE FOLLOWING FOR INTERIOR PAINT Refinishing of Existing Lockers: Lockers are to be painted with solvent system Epoxy Polyamide Coating (electrostatic system) of custom color. Apply in two coats with a total dry film thickness of 2 to 2.5 mils per coat. Preparation: Clean with non-filming degreasing agent to remove any oil-born soil/film. Feather edges of any chipped paint areas. Fine sand to provide tooth for adhesion. Mask all numeric plates, hardware, surrounding wall and floor areas, and any adjoining lockers to be painted in contrasting colors. Locker Interiors are only required to be painted to the inner edges of the frame lip, and completely along all the edges of the locker door. THIS WORK IS TO BE DONE IN A CONSISTENT MANNER, WITH NO OVERSPRAY OR LAPPING OF COLOR FROM ONE PORTION OF DOORS AND FRAMES TO ANOTHER. There should be clean crisp definition of edges when the job is complete. Acceptable finish: All work is to be free of all orange peel, drips, runs, sags and holidays, with achievement of smooth even finish similar in appearance to that of automotive finishing, with color showing no surface or texture variations. [ridgeline ms] 09900 - 10 PAINTING 09900 - 10 ~, ~° Mixing: Follow manufacturer's directions for mixing, catalyzing, and induction times. Application Technique: Epoxy colors require special attention to time after catalyzing, and this time may vary somewhat according to the depth of color being used. CHECK WITH THE MANUFACTURER on recommended pot time before application, since this time after catalyzing can be critical to the successful application of the paint in order to produce a surface free of runs and sags. Inadequate preparation and insufficient time after catalyzing may make it difficult to obtain adequate adhesion due to paint "crawl" when painting. [ridgeline ms] 09900 - 11 PAINTING 09900 - 11 PAINT RECORDS REQUIREMENTS The painting contractor shall maintain, keep current and in good condition through the duration of the job, all drawings and schedules indicating specified products and their locations of application. These records shall be returned to the Owner, through the Architect, at the end of the job to facilitate future building maintenance. Because the painting contractor may prefer to use a different paint manufacturer (requiring the Architect's approval) from the one specified, he is required to fill out the PAINT PRODUCTS SCHEDULE to indicate the alternate manufacturer and product number. (See sample below.) Also, when a scheduled color is to be used in more than one paint type, i.e. on wood, metal or concrete, the requested information shall be filled in on the PAINT PRODUCTS SCHEDULE in the spaces provided below the "scheduled color/material" listed. (See sample below.) PAINT PROJECTS SCHEDULE Erickson McGovern, PLLC PAINTING CONTRACTOR PROJECT SAMPL ,rv ~~ PAFNT NO. ~ SPECIFIED COLOR PAINT, TYPE ,..SURFACE ~ CONTRACTOR S ALT ; ., REMARKS . ,; t L. ON MASTER' MFR. NAME ~ t ;. F Y , ~.. SCHEDULE ~ ~ !' ~ .MFR ~ ~ -COLOR ' '~` ~ ROD. NO. ~ PROD. NO. ' ~ ~ ~ _ r PRODUCT:NO:~ EP-A OTHER PRODUCTS USED /N ABOVE Glidden Blue Latex Plaster 3900 1234 EP-B OTHER PRODUCTS USED IN ABOVE EP-C OTHER PRODUCTS USED IN ABOVE [ridgeline ms) 09900 - 12 PAINTING 09900 - 12 PAINT PROJECTS SCHEDULE trickson McGovern, P«~ PROJECT PAINTING CONTRACTOR ' PAINT~NO. ON MASTER ,, ''li: ~~' .SPECIFIED MFR ' ' i '~~~~ ~ COLOR . ~ NAME ~ r~ -''~}7~` s i ,: PAINTtTYPE~ ~ r~~l . R'y ~ ~~~ SURFACES {i °,~~~i~? ~ ~'~ ~,}~~w"~}t;:"'> ..'.s '` F~ ~~r;~'~r,~CONTRACTOR SALT ,td'Q: j~ ~~1 ~ ~ f 1 S~` t~ '~ ' ~ r '~ ~ r. x+.~,t4 ns ~~,tj ~'~ 'REMARKS '~ J SCHEDULE c i r; r r ' ' ~ ~ ~4 tan ~,~~ ~ a ,t~ C~ ~ r, PROD NO ~ ~~ :' PROD NO ;~ ~r ~ ~ ~' ~ MFR '' ~ m~ `~ COLOR NO k ~` :+ ' ~ 'q ~~~ ,1;~=~ ~~,~,; ` ~ 'i Y,~, ,~R;~ a ..~"~~ ~a ~,~; ~ ~ ~PROD.UCT NO.;~ ~ '~; ;Y. ~ ~..anl ~~ ~_ OTHER PRODUCTS USED IN ABOVE COLOR OTHER PRODUCTS USED /N ABOVE COLOR OTHER PRODUCTS USED /N ABOVE COLOR OTHER PRODUCTS USED IN ABOVE COLOR OTHER PRODUCTS USED IN ABOVE COLOR I 'ND OF SECTION 09900 (ridgeline ms] 09900 - 13 PAINTING 09900 - 13 ~~ 2 ' 4 5 6 ' 7 8 9 ' 10 1.1 12 13 ' 14 15 16 ' 17 18 19 20 ' 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 ' 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 ' 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 ' 49 50 51 52 ' 53 54 SECTION 09950 - WALL COVERING PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. SUMMARY Types of Wall Covering required include the following: Vinyl-coated fabric wall covering SUBMITTALS Product data for each type of Wall covering material specified. Include technical information, installation instructions for each type of substrate and maintenance instructions. ' Include data on physical ~ characteristics, durability, fade resistance and flame resistance characteristics. Include manufacturer's recommendations for maximum permissible moisture content of substrates. Samples for verification purposes of each type of wall covering indicated and for each color, texture, pattern and molding accessory required for installation. Prepare samples from the same materials to be used on the project. Include the following: Full width sample of each wall covering required, not less than 36 inches long, showing complete pattern. 12-inch length of molding Product certificates signed by manufacturers of wall coverings certifying that materials furnished comply with specified requirements. Include certified test reports evidencing compliance with requirements :for fire performance characteristics and physical properties indicated. Maintenance data consisting of manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of each type of wall covering: Include methods and~frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated use conditions. Include precautions for use of cleaning materials and methods which could be detrimental to finishes and performance or might damage wall covering material.- [ridgeline msj 09950 - 1 WALL COVERING 09950 - 1 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has specialized in the installation of wall coverings similar to that required for. this project. Minimum of 5 years experience. DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver materials to project site in original factory, packages or containers, clearly labeled to identify manufacturer, brand name, lot number, quality or grade, and fire hazard classification. Store materials inside in original undamaged packaging, in a well- ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures and humidity. Do not store rolled goods upright; lay flat; blocked off the ground to prevent sagging and warping. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40 deg F (4 deg C). Comply with recommendations of the manufacturer for special delivery, storage and handling requirements. PROJECT CONDITIONS Maintain a constant minimum temperature of 60 deg F (16 deg C) in installation areas for at least 10 days before and 10 days after application of materials. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Schedule installation with other construction activities to minimize the possibility of damage and soiling during the remainder of the construction period. PROJECT CLOSEOUT Warran Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Insta-ler and Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace wall covering materials which fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. Warranty period is 2 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Maintenance: Replacement Materials: After completion of work, deliver to the project site the yardage as listed below, and in uncut lengths, for each wall covering type, and for each color and pattern installed, exclusive of material required to properly complete the installation. Furnish replacement materials from same production run as materials installed. Failure to supply material from same run will be considered grounds for non-acceptance of applied wall covering: In addition, roll, package and label all usable endcuts. Provide 2% of each type and color used. Package replacement materials with protective covering or wrapping, clearly identified with appropriate labels as replacement material. Furnish accessory components as required. [ridgeline ms) 09950 - 2 WALL COVERING 09950 - 2 '! 1 2 4 5 ' 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 '' 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 ,, 29 30 31 ' 32 33 34 ' 35 36 ' 37 ' 38 39 40 41 42 '; 43 44 45 46 47 48 ~ 49 '' 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 r PART2-PRODUCTS VINYL WALL COVERING Manufacturer: RJF International Type: KOROSEAL Pattern: Spellbound. Total weight: 21 oz./lin. yd. 14 oz./sq. yd. Fabric weight: 3 oz./lin. yd. Vinyl weight: 18 oz./lin. yd. Fabric: Osnaburg Thickness: 9 mils . UL Rating: Flame spread 15 Smoke developed 20 Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. Manufacturer: Type: Pattern: Total weight: Fabric weight: Vinyl weight:. Fabric: Average Total Thickness: UL Rating: Flame spread Smoke developed Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. Omnova Solutions, Inc. Bolta Wall Coverings Payson 20 oz./lin. yd. 13.3 oz./sq, yd. 8.7 oz./lin. yd. 11.3 oz./lin: yd. Osnaburg .022" 15 ACCESSORY ITEMS . Oil Base Primer: Supplied and installed in SPECIFICATION SECTION 09900. Provide primer type and coordinate installation requirement for wall coverings. Adhesives: Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's recommended adhesive produced expressly for use with selected wall covering on substrate as shown on drawings. Provide materials which are mildew- and vermin-resistant and nonstaining to wall covering. ~ Undercoat: Provide undercoat for previously painted gypsum wallboard and other substrates as recommended by wall covering manufacturer. , Metal Molding: Comply with ASTM B221, aluminum alloy 6063-T5 forextrusions, finish AA-M31A31, with one- piece cap and wall flange tapering to feather edge. PART 3 -EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine the substrates scheduled to receive wall coverings for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting performance of wall covering work: (ridgeline ms] 09950 - 3 WALL COVERING 09950 - 3 1 _ Make certain that wall surfaces are free from defects and imperfections that could show through the finished 2 surface. If surfaces are not acceptable, notify General Contractor in writing. 3 4 Do not install wall coverings over oil-based wood stains or felt-tip pen markings. 5 6 Check painted surfaces for possibility of pigment bleed-through. 7 ' 8 Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 9 10 11 PREPARATION 12 13 Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation area not less than 24 14 hours before application. _ 15 16 Remove switchplates, wall plates, and surface-mounted fixtures in areas where wall covering is to be applied. 17 Upon completion of wall covering installation. in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workmen 18 skilled in the trades involved. 19 20 Prime and seal substrates in accordance with the wall covering manufacturer's recommendations for type of 21 substrate. Wall surface to be painted with oil base primer, supplied and installed in SECTION 09900. 22 23 Existing texture and painted surfaces shall be prepared for acceptance of wall covering as recommended by 24 wall covering manufacturer. 25 26 27 INSTALLATION 28 29 Metal Moulding: Use metal edge moulding at all exposed ends of wall covering that doesn't die at inside 30 corners or other vertical abutments, such as door or relite frames. Provide also at top of wall covering which 31 discontinues short of ceiling line or other horizontal abutments. 32 33 Veri that colors and patterns of wall coverings are those specified before beginning installation. 34 35 Vinyl Wall Covering: Place panels consecutively in the order cut from rolls, including filling spaces above or 36 below openings. Hang by reversing alternate strips except on.match patterns. 37 38 Apply adhesive to the back of the-wall covering and place in accordance with the manufacturer's 39 instructions. Take special care to insure complete adhesion at joints, edges and corners. 40 41 Seams: Secure all seams with vinyl to vinyl adhesive, thoroughly cleaning after all seam-securing 42 to prevent staining from adhesive bleed-through. Install seams plumb, and at least 6 inches away 43 from corners. Horizontal seams will not be permitted. Overlap seams and double-cut to assure tight 44 closure. 45 46 Roll, brush or use a broad knife to remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. Cut wall 47 covering evenly to the edges of wall penetrations. 48 49 Trim salvages as required to assure color uniformity and pattern match. 50 51 Install wall covering continuously on wall surface behind chalkboards and tackboards. If these boards have 52 been previously mounted, remove from wall along with all mounting devices, install wall covering and reinstall 53 in original position. 54 55 56 (ridgeline ms] 09950 -~4 WALL COVERING 09950 - 4 ~, 4 ' 5 ~6 ' 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 '~ ~' ~' ~' ~' ':, ~i CLEANING Vinyl Wall Covering: Remove excess adhesive along finished seams and perimeter edges while still wet using warm water and a clean sponge; wipe dry. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from wall covering installation upon completion of work, and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition. PROTECTION Provide protective methods and materials needed to ensure that wall coverings will be without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 09950 [ridgeline ms] 09950 - 5 WALL COVERING 09950 - 5 SECTION 09955 -VINYL TACKBOARD PANELS 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 2 3 4 SECTION REQUIREMENTS 5 6 Submit product data, shop drawings, and fabric samples. 7 8 Materials with flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of 76 or less and 200. or less, respectively, when 9 tested according to ASTM E 84. 10 11 t , 12 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 13 14 15 VINYL TACKBOARD PANELS 16 17 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or approved: 18 19 Chatfield-Clark Company, Inc. ` 20 21 14614 Valley Boulevard 22 Fontana, CA 92335 23 Phone: (909) 823-4297 24 25 Jasco ' `. 26 ' 27 2001 N.W. 19"' Avenue 28 Portland, OR 97209 29 Phone: (800) 872-4160 30 3.1 Product Description: Vinyl shall be machine laminated to a lightweightwood fiber panel'/"thick, wrapped and 32 square cut edges. 33 ` 34 Size:'/" thick with panel size as required to accommodate installation without intermediate horizontal joints. 35 36 Vinyl: 37 38 Manufacturer: Koroseal 39 40 Pattern: Belair 41 42 Fabric Weight: 1.8 oz. PLY 43 ~' 44 Vinyl Weight: 13.2 oz. PLY 45 46 U.L. Rating: ASTM E 84 47 48 Flame Spread: 15 49 50 .Smoke Development: 5 f 51 52 Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. 53 54 Adhesive: Use construction adhesive which complies with the local V.O.C. requirements. 55 [ridgeline ms] 09955 - 1 VINYL TACKBOARD PANELS 09955 - 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install panels level and aligned at top and bottom. Vertical panel joints shall be true and plumb. END OF SECTION 09955 (ridgeline msl 09955 - 2 VINYL TACKBOARD PANELS 09955 - 2 ' SECTION 09986 -FIBERGLASS WALL PANELS PART1-GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY Extent of wall panels shall be as indicated on drawings, as indicated in schedules, and as specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE Single-Source Responsibility for Wall Panels: Obtain each color, class and finish of.panel from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has a minimum of five years experience and has successfully completed installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project. Provide proof of experience if required by Architect. 26 DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING ' 27 28 All materials shall be inspected immediately upon delivery and defects reported. Remove panels from 29 shipping skid and restack on a solid, flat, dry surface. Do not stack on fresh concrete floors or other surfaces 30 that may emit moisture. Lay panels flat. Do not store on edge. Panels should be acclimated at least 24 hours ' 31 in temperature and humidity conditions approximating the operating environment of the finished room. 32 Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the premises. PART 2 -PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved: Pyro Panl by Sequential Liner Board by Lasco FRP Panels by Glas Steel (ridgeline ms] 09986 - 1 FIBERGLASS WALL PANELS 09986 - 1 MATERIALS Note: The following list of requirements are from "Pyro Panl by Sequentia"and are used only to establish standard of design and quality of materials and are-not intended to preclude the use of any other approved manufacture-'s products. Fiberglass Reinforced Panels: Pyro Panl Fire Retardant (Class A) wall panels Series/Type: #1200 FR-25 Finish: Embossed One Side Thickness: 0.090 inches Sizes: 48 x 96 inches Moldings/Trim: All exposed panel edges shall be finished with appropriate Structogtas® one-piece or two- piece non-staining vinyl extruded moldings. Caulks and Adhesives: Use only high quality construction grade adhesives and clear silicone sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. Fasteners: Non-corroding mechanical. Truss head nylon drive rivets or stainless steel screws. Fastener holes must be pre-drilled slightly over size. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION Wall Preparation: Subwalls must be flat, clean, dry and free of all dirt, dust or grease. When applying panels over foam insulation, an approved thermal barrier system must be used. Consult architect. Expansion: Leave not less than 1/4" gap at ceiling and floor, 1/8" gap between wall panels for normal expansion and contraction. Allow not less than 1/8" gap around pipes, electrical fittings and other projection. Fill gaps with flexible, silicone based caulking to complete moisture seal. Fastener Positioning: Install fasteners no farther than 8 inches apart around outside edges and 12 inches apart on intermediate 16-inch centers. Staggerfasteners onopposing panel edges. Outside fasteners should be approximately 1 inch from panel edge. Sealing and Caulking: Caulk all corner seams, ceiling and base junctures, and fastener holes. END OF SECTION 09986 [ridgeline ms] 09986 - 2 F18ERGLASS WALL PANELS 09986 - 2 '' SECTION 10100 -VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS PART 1 -GENERAL l1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Extent of markerboards and tackboards is indicated on the drawings. Types of visual display boards specified in this section include the following: Porcelain enamel markerboards (M.B.) (for liquid chalk) Types of tackboards specified in this section include the following: Vinyl Covered Tackboards DEFINITION Markerboard: Manufacturer's standard porcelain enamel gloss finish over steel base sheet for writing on with special marking pen. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer: Furnish all markerboards and tackboards by a single manufacturer for the entire project. SUBMITTALS Shop DraWInCQS: Submit shop drawings for each type of markerboard and tackboard. Include sections of typical trim members and dimensioned elevations. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement, accessories, layout and installation details. Samples: Provide the following samples of each product for initial selection of colors, patterns, and textures, as required, and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each material and component part, including data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. Certification: Submit the manufacturer's certification that materials furnished for the project comply with the specified requirements. Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's recommended maintenance practices for each type of markerboard or tackboard specified. [ridgeline ms) 10100 - 1 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 1 1 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 2 3 Special Product Warranty: 4 5 Porcelain Enamel Markerboard Warranty: Furnish the manufacturer's written warranty, agreeing to 6 replace, for the lifetime of the building, porcelain enamel markerboards that do not retain their original 7 writing and erasing qualities, become slick and shiny, or exhibit crazing, cracking orflaking, provided 8 manufacturer's instructions with regard to handling, installation, protection and maintenance have 9 been followed. Replacement is limited to material replacement t~nly; labor for removal and 10 reinstallation is not included. 11 12 13 PART2-PRODUCTS 14 15 16 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 17 18 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or approved. 19 20 Manufacturers of Porcelain Enamel Markerboards (M.B.): 21 22 Claridge 23 P.B.S. 24 Tri-Adco Mfg. 25 Greensteel 26 Nelson Adams 27 Ghent Mfg. Co. 28 ~ Lemco 29 30 Manufacturers of Vinyl Covered Tackboards: 31 32 Claridge 33 P.B.S. 34 Tri-Adco Mfg. 35 Greensteel 36 Nelson Adams 37 Ghent Mfg. Co. 38 Lemco 39 40 41 MATERIALS 42 43 Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: Provide balanced, high pressure laminated porcelain enamel chalkboards 44 of 3-ply construction consisting of facing sheet, core material and backing. 45 46 Facing Sheet: Provide Alliancewall Corp. or approved. Facing sheet to be of enameling grade steel 47 sheet especially processed for temperatures used in coating porcelain on steel. Coat the exposed face 48 with a 3-coat process consisting of primer, ground coat and color cover coat, and the concealed face 49 with a 2-coat process consisting of primer and ground coat. Fuse cover and ground coats to the steel 50 at the manufacturer's standard firing temperatures, but not less than 1,200 deg.F (649 deg.C). 51 52 Note: Manufacturers otherthan "Alliancewall" shall receive approval from Architect, priorto bidding, 53 not only for product specifications but also for color compatibility with overall color scheme. 54 55 Proprietary Facin Sheet: Atthe Contractor's option provide 24-gage, "Vitracite", porcelain enamel clad, 56 type stretcher- leveled aluminized steel facing sheet, as manufactured by Claridge Products and [ridgeline ms] 10100 - 2 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 2 ~, 2 ' 4 5 ' 6 8 9 ' 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ' 17 18 19 20 ' 21 22 23 ' 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 ' 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 ' 49 50 51 52 ' 53 54 55 ' 56 57 Equipment, Inc.'in lieu of the facing sheet construction specified above. Fuse porcelain enamel coating to sheet facing steel. at approximately 1,000 deg.F (538 deg.C). - Cover Coat: Provide the manufacturer's standard light colored special writing surface with gloss finish intended for use with liquid felt tipped markers. (Markerboa~ds.) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color line. Special Markings: Music Lines: Provide white painted music lines on vertical sliding markerboards in Rooms 302 and 308 full length of board. Include ten lines to approved spacing. ' Core: Provide the manufacturer's standard particleboard core material complying with the requirements of ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-M-1. Use'/2 inch particleboard backing with 28 ga. steel face sheet. Use 3/8 inch particleboard backing with 24 ga. steel face sheet. Backing Sheet: Provide the manufacturer's standard 0.015 inch thick aluminum sheet backing. Laminating` Adhesive: Provide the manufacturer's standard moisture-resistant thermoplastic type adhesive. Vinyl-Fabric-Faced Tackboards: Mildew-resistant, washable vinyl fabric complying with FS CCC-W-408, Type II, weighing not less than13 oz./sq. yd. (440 g/sq. m), laminated to 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick cork sheet. Provide fabric with aflame-spread rating of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. Provide color and texture as scheduled or as selected from manufacturer's standards. Backing: Factory laminate cork face sheet under pressure to 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick fiberboard backing. Vinyl Fabric:' Vinyl Manufacturer: B.F. Goodrich Pattern: Koroseal "Harborweave II" Color:.Selected from manufacturer's full pattern colorline Note: The approval of other vinyl manufacturers shall include not only the meeting of the required specifications, but also the availability of acceptable patterns and. colors. SLIDING UNITS Vertical Sliding Panels: Provide two vertical sliding and a rear statioriary markerboard in each unit. Fabricate units and housing from standard components of the size, thickness, 'and design required to impart sufficient strength for support of panels independently of support from walls. Hardware: Equip each sliding panel with ball-bearing neoprene end rollers designed and fabricated to produce smooth and easy operation without rattles. Counterbalance each panel equally with lead counterweights on heavy-duty aircraft-type steel-cable over ball-bearing sheaves. Overall height of unit to be 7'-2"above floor. Sliding panels shall be of equal size allowing fora 1"overlap at center. Locate top of chalktray to align flush with top of lowered panel. See drawing for width dimensions. [ridgeline ms] 10100 - 3 :VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 3 1 ACCESSORIES 2 3 Metal Trim and Accessories: Fabricate frames and trim of not less than 0.062 inch thick aluminum alloy, size 4 and shape as indicated, to suit type.of installation. Provide straight, .single length units wherever possible; 5 keep joints to a minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline closure. 6 7 Clear Anodized Finish: Furnish exposed aluminum trim, accessories and fasteners with the 8 manufacturer's standard satin anodized finish with clearanodic coating complying with AA requirements 9 for Class II Architectural Coating (AA-A31). 10 11 Chalktray: Furnish the manufacturer's standard continuous, solid extrusion type aluminum chalktray 12 with ribbed section and smoothly curved exposed ends, for each markerboard. 13 14 Map Rail: Provide map rail with 1"wide continuous cork display rail at the top of each markerboard unit, 15 complete as follows: 16 17 End Stops: Provide one end stop at each end of map rail. 18 19 Map Hooks: Nystrom Co. chromium plated steel, and spring clip hook, or approved; extruded 20 aluminum map hooks not permitted. Provide a minimum of 6 map hooks for each classroom with 21 wall mounted markerboards or 1 map hook for each 2 feet of map rail, whichever is the greater 22 number. (1-800) 547-2635. 23 24 Flag Holder: Provide one each flag holder mounted onto map rail for each classroom with wall- 25 mounted markerboards. 26 27 • 28 FABRICATION 29 30 Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: Laminate facing sheet and backing sheet to core material under. pressure 31 with manufacturer's recommended flexible, waterproof adhesive. 32 33 Assembly: Provide factory assembled markerboard and tackboard units, exceptwhere field assembled units 34 are required. 35 36 Make joints only where the total length exceeds the maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with the 37 minimum number of joints, balanced around the center of the board, as acceptable to the Architect. 38 39 Provide the manufacturer's standard vertical joint system between abutting sections of markerboard 40 and of baked enamel finish to match porcelain-enamel markerboard finish. 41 42 Provide the manufacturer's standard mullion trim at joints between markerboard and tackboard. 43 44 45 FINISHES 46 47 General: -Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for 48 recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. 49 50 Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for 51 designating aluminum finishes. 52 53 Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical 54 Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) 55 complying with AAMA 607.1. 56 57 [ridgeline ms] 10100 - 4 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS ~ 10100 - 4 1 ~, 3 4 5 6 ' 8 10 11 12 13 14 `' '` 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 ' 22 23 24 25 26 27 ' 28 '' 29 30 31 32 33 34 ' 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 ' 46 PART 3 -EXECUTION EXAMINATION ' Examine wall surfaces, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting installation of visual display boards. Surfaces to receive markerboards and tackboards shall be free of dirt, scaling paint, and projections or depressions that would affect smooth, finished surfaces of markerboards and tackboards. Surfaces to receive tackboards shall be dry and free of substances that would impair the bond between tackboards and substrate. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditioris have been corrected. PREPARATION Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to the preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where possible, to ensure proper fitting of the work. Allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay work. INSTALLATION Deliver factory-built markerboard and tackboard units completely assembled in one piece without joints, wherever possible. Where dimensions exceed panel size, provide 2 or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to the Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery; and make final joints at the site: Use splines at joints to maintain surface alignment. Install units in locations and at mounting heights indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb and level. Provide all grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim and accessories necessary fora complete installation. ADJUST AND CLEAN Veri that accessories required for each unit have been properly installed and that operating units function properly. Clean units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 10100 [ridgeline ms] 10100 - 5 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 5 r ' ' SECTION 10160 - TOILET PARTITIONS ' 1 2 4 ~1 5 6 ,~ 8 9 10 11 ' 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 '~ 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 ' 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 ~, 44 45 46 1~ 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 '~ 54 PART1-GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY Extent of toilet partitions is indicated on drawings. Tyoes of toilet compartments include: Plastic laminate finish S les of toilet compartments include: Floor mounted (overhead braced) Styles of privacy screens include: Wall mounted with column brace Toilet accessories, such as toilet paper holders, grab bars, purse shelves, are specified elsewhere in Division 10. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data for materials, fabrication, and installation, including catalog cuts of anchors, hardware, fastenings, and accessories. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of toilet partition assemblies not fully described by product drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorage devices built into other work. Samples: Submit full range of color samples for each type of unit required. Submit 6" square samples of each color and finish on same substrate to be used in work, for color verification after selections have been made. QUALITY ASSURANCE Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, allow for adjustments within specified tolerances where ever taking field measurements before fabrication.mightdeIay work. Coordination: Furnish inserts and, anchorages which must be built into other work for installation of toilet partitions and related work;' coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. [ridgeline ms] 10160 - 1 TOILET PARTITIONS 10160 - 1 PROJECT CLOSEOUT Warran :Submit partition manufacturer's five yearwarrantysignedbyManufacturer,InstallerandContractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective partitions, doors, pilasters, screens or associated hardware which fail in materials or workmanship. Warranty period commences on date of final completion. PART2-PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or approved: AAMCO Accurate Partitions Div., United States Gypsum Co. American Sanitary Partition Corp. Am pco Global Steel Products Corp. Grand Metal Products National Partitions Sanymetal Products Co. MATERIALS General: Provide materials which have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. Plastic Laminate: NEMA Std. LD-3, minimum 0.050" thick. Manufacturer: Formica; Nevamar; Pionite; Wilsonart Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors and wood grains. Core Material for Plastic Laminate: Manufacturer's standard 45-Ib. density particleboard core. Pilaster Shoes: ASTM A 167, Type 302/304 stainless steel, not less than 3"high, 20 gauge, finished to match hardware. Shall fit tight to exposed pilaster surfaces with a maximum space of 1/16". Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching panels to walls and pilasters, either chromium-plated non-ferrous cast alloy ("Zamac'') or anodized- aluminum. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories of chromium-plated non-ferrous cast alloy ("Zamac"). Tube Steel Column: For privacy screens provide 2-1/2" x 1-1/2" x1/8" wall thickness galvanized tube steel column. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, chromium-plated steel, or brass finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant type heads and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized, cadmium-plated, or other rust-resistant protective-coated steel. [ridgeline ms] 10160 - 2 TOILET PARTITIONS 10160 - 2 ,' 1 FABRICATION 2 ' 3 4 General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for partition system, unless otherwise indicated. Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement to. receive 5 partition-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. 6 7 Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 24"wide in-swinging doors for ordinary toilet stalls and ' 8 32" wide (clear opening) out-swinging doors at stalls equipped for use by handicapped. 9 10 Plastic Laminate Partitions and Screens: ' 11 12 General: Apply plastic laminate to all edges of pilasters, doors or panels prior to skinning faces. Under heat 13 and pressure laminate one-piece face sheets to core material with no splices orjoints, and with edges straight 14 and sealed. Seal exposed core material at cutouts to protect against moisture. ' 15 16 Floor-Supported/Overhead-Braced Compartments: Furnish galvanized steel supports and leveling bolts at 17 pilasters as recommended by manufacturer to suit floor conditions. Make provisions forsetting and securing ' 18 continuous, extruded, aluminum, antigrip, overhead bracing at top of each pilaster and over the top of the 19 exposed end partition. Provide receiver for brace at wall and anchor per manufacturer's recommendations. 20 Provide shoe at each pilaster to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. 21 ' 22 Wall-Hung Privacy Screens: Furnish panel units in sizes indicated, of same construction and finish as 23 partition system panels. 24 25 Hardware: Furnish hardware for each compartment in partition system, as follows: 26 27 Hinges: Cutout inset type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. Provide 28 gravity type, spring-action cam type, or concealed torsion rod type, to suit manufacturer's standards. ' 29 30 Latch and Keeper: For the typical toilet partition doors, provide the manufacturer's standard 31 surface-mounted latch unit, designed for emergency access, with combination rubber-faced door ' 32 strike and keeper. 33 34 For doors into handicapped stalls, provide the manufacturer's standard ADA approved latch 35 units. 36 37 Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard unit, combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to 38 prevent door hitting mounted accessories. 39 ' 40 Door Pull: Manufacturer's ADA approved unit for out-swing doors. 41 ' 42 43 Wall Bumper: Manufacturer's standard for out-swinging doors against walls. 44 45 PART 3 -EXECUTION 46 47 48 INSTALLATION 49 50 General: Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. Install partitions ' 51 rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than'/2' between pilasters and panels and 52 , not more than 1" between panels and walls. Secure panels to walls with not less than two stirrup brackets 53 attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall anchorages occur in ' 54 masonry or the joints. Secure panels to pilasters with not less than two stirrup brackets located to align with 55 stirrup brackets at wall. Secure panels in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 56 57 [ridgeline ms] 10160 - 3 TOILET PARTITIONS 10160 - 3 Floor-Supported/Overhead-Braced Compartments: Set pilaster units with anchorages having not less than 2 inches penetration into structural floor, unless otherwise recommended by partition manufacturer. Level, plumb, and tighten installation with devices furnished. Secure overhead brace to each pilaster and to rearwall at end partition with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so that tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position. Privacy Screens: At outer edge of screen away from wall, provide tube steel column from floor to ceiling above. Above ceiling, provide all blocking and angular braces to structure above for rigid connection and lateral bracing. At floor provide anchorages for floor bracket, to be concealed inside tube, of not less than 2 inches penetration into structural floor. Secure screen to column with not less than two stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Fabricate stainless steel closure pieces around column at top and bottom. Column finish to be baked on fluropolymer paint of color to match the privacy screen color. ADJUST AND CLEAN Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors (and entrance swing doors) to return to fully closed position. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 10160 [ridgeline ms] 10160 - 4 TOILET PARTITIONS 10160 - 4 e SECTION 10190 -CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACK 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 2 3 , ~; 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 7 Specification sections, apply to this section. 8 ~ ~ ~ . 9 10 DESCRIPTION OF WORK _ 11 12 Extent of each type of cubicle curtain is indicated or shown on Drawings. , 13 14 15 QUALITY ASSURANCE 16 17 Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: Firm with not less than two years of successful experience in fabrication ,~ 18 and installation of cubicle curtains similar to those required for this project: 19 . 20 - , y 21 SUBMITTALS 22 23 Product~Data, installation instructions, and general recommendations, including data which substantiates that 24 materials comply with requirements. ~~ 25 26 Shop Drawings including plans, elevations, and track sections showing mounting. Include backing/blocking 27 required for track. Coordinate with General Contractor that he furnish and. install. 28 '~ 29 30 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 31 '' 32 33 CUBICLE CURTAIN 34 r 35 Furnish fabric of 100% Trevira Polyester, 10 to 10-1/2 oz. peryard, Scotchguard Fabric protected and meeting 36 N.F.P.A. large scale 701 test for fire resistance, U.F.A.C., Class A. 37 38 Manufacturer: Frankel 39 40 Fabric Pattern: Checkerboard 41 42 Fabric Line: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. 43 44 Where applicable, railroad fabric for seamless construction. 45 46 Provide for 25% fullness. ^' 47 48 Curtain to have 1 - 1-1/2 inch triple hem at top, including turned edges and a row of stitches at the 49 tops and bottoms of the hem. ' 50 ' 51 Bottom of curtain to be at 15 inches above finished floor. 52 , ~ 53 Provide bottom hem of 1-1/4 inch width, single turn. ~ 54 (ridgelinems] 10190 - 1 CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACK 10190 - 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Vertical seams to be double needle interlocked. Provide velcro strips as shown on drawings. Grommets: Provide rust-proof rolled edge metal grommets, machine installed into top hem neareach end and not over 6 inches o.c. between ends. CUBICLE CURTAIN TRACK Surface Track and Hardware: Furnish Kirsh Architrac #9046 track with Kirsh #9686 slide carrier with hook and #9688R stainless chain (length as required). PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION General: Install track in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. Track shall be secure and rigid, true and level with floor line~and shall support a vertical test load of 50 lbs. (23 kg) without visible defection of track or damage to supports. Install curtains on carriers ensuring smooth operation. Curtains Track-Hung: Secure curtains to track carriers with hook chains from curtain grommets to carriers. END OF SECTION 10190 [ridgeline msj 10190 - 2 CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACK 10190 - 2 . SECTION 10425 - S/GNS 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 2 3 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and. general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary' Conditions and 7 Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 8 9 10 11 SUMMARY , . 12 This Section includes the following types of signs: 13 14 Panel signs ' 15 16 Dimensional letters and numbers 17 18 Cast metal plaques 19 20 - 21 SUBMITTALS 22 23 General: Submit the following according to the .Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification 24 ~ Sections. ' 25 26 Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions 27. of individual components, profiles, and finishes. . 28 29 Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections 30 of typical members and other components. Show anchors and installation details. 31 32 Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and lettering layout. 33 34 For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings, templates, and 35 directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in other 36 Sections. 37 38 Templates:- Furnish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional letters and 39 numbers. 40 41 Furnish full-size rubbings for metal plaques. ' , ' 42 43 Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and 44 surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated. 45 46 ~ Samples for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected and compliance with requirements 47 indicated: 48 49 50 Plastic Laminate: Provide a sample panel not less than 6-1/2 inches by 6 inches for each material, color, texture, and pattern required. On each panel include a representative sample of the graphic 51 image process required, showing graphic style, and colors and finishes. of letters, numbers, and 52 other graphic devices. S3 [ridgeline ms] -10425 - 1 SIGNS 10425 - 1 Dimensional Letters: ' Provide full-size representative samples of each dimensional letter type required, showing letter style, color, and material finish and method of attachment. QUALITY ASSURANCE Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work. Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one source of a single manufacturer. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of signs and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Sign units by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. PART2-PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved: Manufacturers of Panel Signs: Mohawk Sign Systems Doty + Associates The Southwell Co. Manufacturers of Dimensional Letters: Andco Industries Corp. A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company, Inc. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. Gemini, Inc. Matthews International Corp. Metal Arts. Metallic Arts, Inc. The Southwell Company. Manufacturers of Cast Plaques: Andco Industries Corp. A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company, Inc. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. Best Manufacturing Company. [ridgeline ms] 10425 - 2 SIGNS 10425 - 2 ' 1 Gemini, Inc. 2 Matthews International Corp. 3 Metal Arts. ' 4 Metallic Arts, Inc. 5 The Southwell Company. 6 7 ' ~ 8 MATERIALS Plastic Laminate: Provide high-pressure plastic laminate engraving stock with face and core plies in contrasting colors, in finishes and color combinations indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from the manufacturer's standards. 14 Aluminum Castinos: (Letters and Numbers) Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper recommended 15 by the sign manufacturer for the casting process used and for the use and finish indicated. 16 17 Bronze Castings: (Dedication Plaque) Provide bronze castings,, copper alloy UNS C83600, complying with 1 18 the requirements of ASTM B 584. 19 20 Fasteners: (Panel Signs) Use nickel-plated tamperproof fasteners fabricated from metals that are not. 21 corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface. 22 - 23 Anchors and Inserts: (Cast letters and dedication plaque) Use. nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized 24 anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed - 25 steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, .to be set into 26 concrete or masonry work. PANEL SIGNS 31 Tactile/Braille: 32 33 Sign Face: Manufactured from 1/8 inch thick sand carved phenolic plastic with washable melamine 34 surface laminate and tough phenolic core. Shall comply with relevant ADA regulations and requirements 35 indicated for material, thickness, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes and details of construction. ' 36 Inside core shall be of contrasting color with letters and borders, sign face. Core colors of brown, red, 37 gray, white, tan and black shall be available to choose from. Painted signs not permitted. 38 39 Sign Description: Letters and numerals shall be raised 1/32 inch, upper case, sans serif type and shall ~'~ 40 be accompanied with Grade 2 Braille. Raised characters shall be 5/8 inch high. 41 42 Pictograms shall be accompanied by the equivalent verbal and Braille description placed directly below 43 the pictogram. The border dimensions of the pictogram shall be 6-inches minimum in width by 8 inches ' 44 iri height. 45 ~ 46 Sign Edges: - - r~ 47 48 Edge Condition: Square cut 49 ~~ 50 Edge Color for Plastic Laminate: Edge color same as background. 51 52 Corner Condition: Corners rounded to radius indicated. ' [ridgeline ms) 10425 - 3 S/GNS 10425,- 3 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND NUMBERS Cast Letters and Numbers: Form individual and steel letters and numbers by casting. Produce characters with smooth, flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Cast lugs into the back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Manufacturer to provide full size mounting template for, mounting to sign base material. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size. Manufacturer: Gemini, Inc. Metal: Cast steel Finish: Paint at job site Letter Style: Deep Ribbon Letter Height Message 4" MIDDLE SCHOOL 6" GYMNASIUM 8" OFFICE 8" LIBRARY 12" RIDGELINE 12" 10605 Location: As directed by Architect. CAST METAL PLAQUES Plaques: Castings shall be free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Comply with requirements specified for metal, border style, background texture, and finish and with requirements shown for thickness, size, shape, and copy. Hand-tool and buff borders and raised copy to produce the manufacturer's standard satin polished finish. Refer to the "Finishes" Article for other finish requirements. Metal: Bronze Border Style: Raised flat band Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard pebble texture Size: 18" x 24" [ridgeline ms] .10425 - 4 SIGNS 10425 - 4 0 C C OUTDOOR SIGNS Traffic Control Signs: General: Install traffic control signs to conform to standard practice as defined by the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices as modified by WSDOT. Material:.080 aluminum Size: 12" x 18" Finish: Enamel.- red lettering and red trim on white background Post: 2" nominal x .116 wall thickness galvanized steel pipe by 8' long Messaae: See Sign Schedule on Drawings Location: See Drawings FINISHES Panel Signs (Plastic Laminate) Tactile/Braille: The characters and background of signs shall be eggshell, non-glare finish. Characters and symbols shall contrast with their background. Room Designation Signs: Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors 1 ~I Pictogram Signs: Color: Blue face with white background per ADA requirements Aluminum Finishes: (Numbers and Letters) Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-M4xC12C42R1x (Mechanical Finish: Manufacturer's standard, other nondirectional textured; Chemical Finish: Chemical conversion coating, acid chromate fluoride phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel in compliance with paint manufacturer's specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. Organic Coating: Thermosetting-modified acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 603.8 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. Bronze Finishes: (Dedication Plaque) Finish designations prefixed by "CDA" conform to the system established by the Copper Development Association for designating finishes. Natural Satin Finish: (Raised surtaces) CDA-M31O6x (Mechanical Finish: Fine satin directional textured; Clear Organic Coating: Manufacturer's standard air-dry clear organic coating). Statuary Finish: (Background surtace} CDA-M31 C55O6x (Chemical Finish: Sulfide conversion coating of dark brown; Clear Organic Coating: Manufacturer's standard air-dry clear organic coating). [ridgeline ms) 10425 - 5 SIGNS 10425 - 5 PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated; using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. , Install signs level; plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated below: Mounting Position: -Mount signs on wall on strike side of door at 5'-0" from floor to horizontal centerline of sign. Shall be such that a person may approach within 3 inches of signage without encountering protruding objects or standing within the swing of a door. Screw and Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Predrill signs as shown. Apply silicone adhesive recommended by the sign manufacturer in method as recommended by silicone manufacturer. Install tamperproof screws of length to penetrate a minimum of 314" into wall blocking. ` For locations where there is no wall blocking, i.e., existing walls, use a silicone adhesive and a double-faced adhesive vinyl foam tape with application of each as recommended by sign manufacturer. Dimensional Letters and Numbers: Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening methods recommended by the manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy papertemplate to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. Flush Mounting: Mount letters with backs in contact with the wall surface. Projected Mounting: Mount letters at the projection distance from the wall surface indicated. Cast Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using the standard method recommended by the manufacturer for the type of wall surface indicated. Concealed Mounting: Mount the plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped lugs on the back of the plaque. Set in predrilled holes filled with quick-setting cement. CLEANING AND PROTECTION After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. [ridgeline ms] 10425 - 6 SIGNS 10425 - 6 1 - 2 SIGN SCHEDULE 3 4 PANEL SIGNS 5 6 Tactile/Braille: 7 8 (Room Designation Sign) 9 10 ~L ~ 1 , 12 13 ' 14 - 15 y~' R. 16 ' 17 18 . 19 20 •~ ' ~ /~ 22 ~®0'1111 24 -NAME - 25 _. 26 --~-...- - --- - -- 27 -- • .. ..... .... _-.. ...---- - 28 t 29 30 . bFU41u-~__-.- -. -. ' 31 32 33 (Occupancy Load Sign) 34 ' 35 g« 36 37 38 ' .39 40 41 42 43 44 45 1 46 47 48 Provide a quantity of 8_ signs. Text will be 49 provided at Shop Drawing stage. ' 50 51 52 ' [ridgeline msj 10425 - 7 :~ a r s SIGNS (Pictogram Signs) MAX~11{liM OCCUPANCY XXX Provide a quantity of 4 signs. Text will be Provided at Shop Drawing stage. 10425 - 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Tactile Exit Signs ' XIT • •• • o • •• a •• • TACTILE EXIT SIGNS LL. Q Location Wherever Exit light fixtures are located in exit passageways & at Exit doors, along side door on latch side of doors. At double doors sign may be located to the right side of the right door. Signs shall be on the nearest adjacent wall. Signs containing tactile characters shall have an 18" x 18 "square minimum space on the floor or ground centered on the sign, outside the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. [ridgeline ms] 10425 - 8 SIGNS !' 10425 - 8 i' f ~. 2 ' 3 4 5 6 ' 7 8 9 ' 10 11 12 13 1 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ' 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 ' 38 39 40 41 ' 42 43 44 ' 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 ' S2 53 54 55 56 ISIGN SCHEDULE RM ROOM QUANTITY REMARKS NO. NAME 101 Reception 1 103 Counselor 1 104 Counselor 1 106 Office 1 107 Office 1 108 Workroom _ 1 109- Storage 1 110 Staff Lounge 1 111 Toilet 1 see Toilet Signage 112 Toilet 1 see Toilet Signage 114 A.S.B. 1 116 Toilet 1 see Toilet Signage 117 ISS 1 118 Assist. Principal 1 119 Health 1 120 Office 1 121 Restroom 1 see Toilet Signage 122 Office 1 123 Conf. Room 1 125 Principal 1 ~ 201 Men 1 see Toilet Signage 203 Boys Locker Rm. 2 204 Boys 1 see Toilet Signage 205 Drying Room 1 207 Office 1 208 Restroom 1 see Toilet Signage 209 Storage 1 213 Women _ 1 see Toilet Signage 214 Girls 1 see Toilet Signage 215 Girls Locker Rm. 2 217 Restroom 1 218 Office 1 219 Storage 1 220 Custodial 1 222 Gym 1 223 Cardio Room 3 224 Storage 1 -~ - ..- - _ - -- . ~ - - - _ _ t 302 Auxiliary Gym - - 2 . _ 303 Commons 3 304 Storage __ 1 305 Leader./Choral 2 306 Video _ 1 307 Practice 1 308 Office _ 1 309 Boys 1 see Toilet Signage ' [ridgeline ms] 10425 - 9 SIGNS 10425 - 9 2 SIGN SCHEDULE 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 RM ROOM QUANTITY REMARKS NO. NAME 310 Girls 1 see Toilet Signage 313 Storage 1 314 Utility Room 1 314a Elec. Room 2 316B Office 1 316C Toilet 1 see Toilet Signage 316D Storage Food 1 316E Janitor Closet 1 402 Office 1 403 Toilet 1 see Toilet Signage 404 Funct. Skills 1 404A Office 1 405 Classroom 1 406 Boys 1 see Toilet Signage 407 Girls 1 see Toilet Signage 408 Storage 1 409 Toilet 1 see Toilet Signage 411 Janitor 1 412 Classroom 1 413 Classroom 1 414 Classroom 1 415 Classroom 1 416 Staff Room 1 417 Toilet 1 see Toilet Signage 418 Prep Room 1 419 Science 2 420 Arts 1 421 Kiln 1 422 Storage 1 423 Classroom 1 424 Classroom 1 502 Security Office 1 504 Office 1 505 Office 1 506 Office 1 507 Library 2 508 Science 2 509 Staff 1 510 Toilet 1 see Toilet Signage 511 Prep Room 1 512 Classroom 1 513 Classroom 1 514 Classroom 1 515 Classroom 1 516 Girls 1 see Toilet Signage 517 Janitor 1 56 [ridgeline ms] 10425 - 10 SIGNS 10425 - 10 ~, 2 ' 4 5 ' 6 8 9 ' 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 ' 24 25 26 ' 27 28 29 30 ' 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 ' 38 39 40 ' 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 ' 48 49 50 51 ' 52 53 54 ' 55 56 ISIGN SCHEDULE RM ROOM QUANTITY REMARKS NO. NAME 519 Boys 1 see Toilet Signage 520 Storage 1 521 Toilet 1 see Toilet Signage 522 Classroom 1 ' 523 Classroom 1 523A Classroom 1 524 Office 1 525 Office - - - - 1 - ~_ 602 _ -5- •- -,- Office --s--~r 1 603 Applied Tech. 1 604 Language Arts 1 605 Data Systems 1 606 Janitor 1 607 Classroom 1 608 Toilet 1 see Toilet Signage 609A Storage 1 610 Boys 1 see Toilet Signage 611 Girls 1 see Toilet Signage 612 Janitor 1 613 Classroom 1 614 Classroom 1 615 Classroom 1 616 Classroom 1 617 Staff 1 618 Toilet 1 see Toilet Signage 619 Science 2 620 Lab 1 621 Band 3 622 Office 1 623 Practice 1 624 Classroom 1 625 Classroom 1 Total 138 END OF SECTION 10425 [ridgeline ms] 10425 - 11 SIGNS 10425 - 11 C SECTION 10430 -ELECTRONIC READER BOARDS PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following types of signs: Electronic Reader Board Assembly. Upper portion of signs is internally illuminated school identification panel. Lower portion of signs is electronic message panel. (*Double-sided is two single-sided units mounted back to back.) Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 3 Section "Concrete" for footing. Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for reader board signs. ' L 25 29 SUBMITTALS .,~ 1 1 t General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data for each type of product indicated, including construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. Include manufacturer's written instructions for maintaining and cleaning sign surtaces. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation details for reader boards. Include plans, elevations, and at least 3/4 inch (1:20) scale sections of typical members and other components. Showsupporting structure, anchors, reinforcement, accessories, layout, and installation details. Show locations of electrical service connections. Include school name, address, and mascot drawing with details of wording and lettering layout, at least half size. Wiring Diagrams: For upper and lower panels power requirements. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, of size below: [ridgeline ms] 10430 - 1 ELECTRONIC READER BOARDS 10430 - 1 1 2 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 Aluminum: For each form, finish, and color, on 6 inch (150 mm) long sections of extrusions ' and squares of sheet at least 4 by 4 inches (100 by 100 mm). Red Matte Finish Plexiglass Sheet: 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm). ' Polycarbonate Sheet: 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for each color required. Include a sample of graphic image process. Show graphic style and colors [and finishes] of letters,.numbers, and other graphic devices. ~~ QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of sign manufacturer for installation of units required for ' this Project. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of panel sign and are based ,' on the specific type and model indicated. Electrical Components. Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. ~ ;, DELIVERY AND HANDLING Deliver panel sign in protective covering and crating to protect sign components and surfaces against damage. WARRANTY The following areas will be covered by a 20-year warranty against defects in workmanship and or materials. ~' Cabinet paint. Graphics and face construction. I' . The following areas are guaranteed for 20 years against breakage, excluding gunshots. Sign faces and vandal cover. ;' PART2-PRODUCTS. i~ MANUFACTURERS ;' Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,. provide products by one of the .following or approved: ;' i Daktronics, Inc. "Galaxy Series." J. M. Stewart Corp. . [ridgeline ms] 10430 - 2 ELECTRONIC READER BOARDS 10430 - 2 ~. 2 ' 3 4 5 '6 8 9 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 '' 18 19 20 21 '. 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 ,~ 29 30 31 32 33 34 ' 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 1 MATERIALS Concrete (Footing): Per Division 3 Section "Concrete. Steel Tubing: Legs: 4" x 4" x .250- wall . . Aluminum Extrusions {Perimeter Frame): ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), alloy ant! temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish, indicated, and with at least the strength and durability properties of alloy 6063-T5. Aluminum Sheet (Back Panel): ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability properties of alloy 5005-H15. Abrasion-Resistant, Monolith Acrylic Sheet: Of thickness indicated, manufactured by extrusion process, coated on both surfaces with abrasion-resistant coating: Physical Properties: Minirrium values; unless otherwise indicated: '. Impact Resistance: 16 ft-Ibf/in. (854 J/m) per ASTM D 256, Method A. Tensile Strength: 9000 Ib/sq. in, (62 MPa) per ASTM D 638: Flexural Modulcis of Elasticity: 340,000. Ibf/sq. in. (2345 MPa) per ASTM D 790. Heat Deflection: 265 deg F (129 deg C).at 264 Ibf/sq. in. (1.82 MPa) per ASTM D 648. . Abrasion Resistance: 1:5 percent maximum. haze increase for 1.00 revolutions of a Taber abraser• with a load of 500 g per ASTM D 1044. Transparent Sheet (Hinged Vandal Cover): Colorless polycarbonate sheet with a minimum luminous transmittance of 84 percent.for 0.236 inch (6 mm) thickness per'ASTM D 1003. Vinyl Film: Solid sheet of translucent Scotchprint in colors.as selected by Architect for application to side #2 of identification panel face. ~ , ACCESSORIES Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals .that are. noncorrosive. to sign material .and mounting surface. Anchors and- Inserts: Use stainless-steel or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts. F.urnisli inserts, as required, to be set into concrete: ~ - [ridgeline ms] 10430 - 3 ELECTRONIC READER BOARDS 90430 - 3 FABRICATION, GENERAL General: Provide manufacturer's standard panel signs of configurations indicated Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and contact surfaces. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for assembly grid installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly. Conceal fasteners, if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous. SIGN PANELS General: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured diagonally from corner to corner. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods to produce message panels with closelyfitting joints. Align edges and surfaces with one another in the relationship indicated. Edge Closure: At back to back units, provide 1/8" thick aluminum closure strip full height, each side. Paint to match frame. Supporting Structure: Two (2) each vertical 4" square tubing with welded flange at base for bolting to concrete footing Structure Enclosure: Provide.1/8" thick aluminum sheet enclosure around vertical supports for full height from foundation up to underside of reader board. Include intermediate backing between supports also. Framed Hollow-Box-Type Panels: Frame Material: Extruded aluminum fabricated to manufacturer's standard profile. Comply with the following: Frame Finish: High-performance organic coating. Corner Condition: Square corners. Back Panel 0.125" Aluminum Sheet: Continuously weld joints and seams to sign frame inside of box, unless other methods are indicated; grind and dress welds to produce smooth surfaces. Vandal Cover (Electronic Message Panel): 0.125 inch thick, clear polycarbonate sheet with three stainless steel hinges and two 1/4 turn locks. Equip with gas cylinders that automatically hold the cover-up. (ridgeline ms] 10430 - 4 ELECTRONIC READER BOARDS 10430 - 4 f ~ .. 1 Panel Types: 2 3 Electronic.Message Display Panel: ~ ~ - ~,1 4 5 Displav-face shall: Show text.messa es and ra hic ima es usin lower- owes LED, li ht , 9 9 P 9 9 P (9 6 . emitting diode) technology; be 16 pixels high by 64 pixels wide in a full matrix configuration; , 7 show a .nominal character height of 9" or 21 "; be capable of displaying up to two lines of ~. 8 sixteen 9" characters/line; if double sided be able to be controlled independently or as one; 9 have an approximate cabinet dimension'of 2'4" x 7'10" x 6". :. _ . , 10 11 . Construction:- Message display construction shall be all aluminum with 1.00% solid state ' 12 electronic operating circuitry. The display's entire matrix area shall be covered by_a red Matte 13 '• finish plexiglass sheet to provide maximum contrast and protection. Service access shall be ~ 14 gained from the front of each display face., Each display face shall "be equipped with an ; 15 internal light level detectorfoc64 levels of automatic dimming. Operating temperature of-each 16 display face shall from -40 degrees Fahrenheit to 120 degrees Fahrenheit (-40 degrees C 17 to 50 degrees C). The. display shall be ETL listed, CSA certified and FCC Class A Compliant. . 18 Ih addition to the red Matte finish plexiglass face above, a. vandal cover or clear lexan 19 ~ (Polycarbonate) face shall cover the entire matrix area to provide maximum protection. 20 21. Power: The two-sided display shall have a maximum power requirement of 488 watts, using " ,, 22 240 single phase power. The single sided unit shall have the same basic power requirements 23 as the two-sided display unit. ~~ 24 25 ".. ~ Equipment: One Daktronics AF-3010-16x64-9-2V two-sided monochrome redLED message 26 display, one Daktronics .Venusd 1500 control software package to be placed on end user 27 , provided personal computer ahd one RS/422 communication kit. ~ . 28 ~~ 29 ,Control Equipment: The message display control software shall be designed using the latest 30 ~ system software with flexibility as a primary consideration. The display control software shall 31 consist of one Venusd 1500 Windowsd-based software package and one RS/422 display ' 32 communication kit. The control software shall include the"following. parts: 33 34 (1) Venusd 1500 user's kit ' 35 (1) RS/422 communication kit to include serial computer cable, RS/232 to RS/422 36 signal converter and' cable tester.. 37 38 The end user will be responsible for providing a control computer on which to load,the 39 Venus 1500 control software. ' 40 41 School Identification Panel: ' 42 43 Displav Face: Display face to be pan formed .118" G5 SGC-1.00 abrasion resistant lexan 44 polycarbonate from. General Electric.. 45 , 46 Subsurface Copy: Digitally printed to back of face panel as required to produce i 47 precisely formed images. 48 ' 49 50 ~ Provide a solid sheet of translucent 3M Scofchprint in colors as selected by Architect. 51 ~ . 52 Panel Interior: Provide internal illumination using concealed, internally wired, fluorescent-strip 53 fixture system to illuminated message panels uniformlywith minimum halation and without light 54 leaks. Make provisions for serving and for concealed connection to electric service. 55 Coordinate electrical characteristics with those of powersupply provided. Provide photo-electric ~ 56 .57 cell to control the on/off time of the"panel. Cabinet size of 2'H x 7'-10.7"W x 9"D. ~ - [ridgeline ms] 10430 - 5 ELECTRONIC READER'BOARDS 10430 - 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 Fluorescent Tubes: Provide two 7 foot tubes, high output, instant-start. Ballasts: Energy-saving, high power factor, Class P, electromagnetic type, designed for use with high-output lamps, and with automatic reset thermal protection. Ballasts comply with ANSI C82.1, bear Certified Ballast Manufacturer Certification labels. 120V, 2.5Amps. ALUMINUM FINISHES Baked Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked- enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleahing, conversion coating, and paint. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylicenamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm), medium gloss. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION Set anchor bolts and other embedded items required for installation: Use templates furnished by suppliers of items to be attached. Install signs level, plumb, and at height indicated, with surfaces free from distortion or other ,defects in appearance. CLEANING AND PROTECTION At completion of installation, clean soiled surfaces of sign units according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 10430 [ridgeline ms] 10430 - 6 'ELECTRONIC READER BOARDS 10430 - 6 r ~, 2 4 r. 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 ' 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 ' 43 44 45 ~46 47 48 49 SECTION 10500 - METAL LOCKERS PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED. DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes metal lockers and related equipment as indicated on drawings. Types of products in this section include the following: Standard wardrobe lockers. Double-tier. 12" x 15" x 72" Three-tier. 12" x 15" x 72" Athletic lockers. Double-tier. 12" x 15" x 72". Six-tier. 12" x 15" x 72" Single-tier. 12" x 15" x 36" Three-tier. 12" x 15" x 36" Locker room benches. Concrete base for lockers is specified in Division 3. SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division Specification sections. Product data and installation instructions for metal locker units. Color Samples on squares of same metal to be used for fabrication of lockers. Shop Drawings that show metal lockers in dimensioned relation to adjacent surfaces. Show lockers in detail, method of installation, fillers, trim, base, and accessories. Include locker numbering sequence information. [ridgeline ms] 10500 - 1 METAL LOCKERS 10500 - 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of metal locker manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. Uniformi Provide metal lockers that are standard products of single manufacturer, with interchan_ geable like parts. Include necessary mounting accessories, fittings, and fastenings. JOB CONDITIONS Do not deliver metal lockers until building is enclosed and ready for locker installation. Protect from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation. PROJECT CLOSEOUT Touch-up Paint: Furnish (2) cans of spray paint for each color of locker used. Cans to be new with unbroken seals. PART2-PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the followingorapproved: Republic Storage System Lyon Metal Products Penco List Industries MATERIALS Sheet Steel: Mild cold-rolled and leveled furniture steel, free from buckle, scale, and surface imperfections. Diamond Plate: 118" aluminum diamond plate. Grade 3003. Tread Bright. Fasteners: Cadmium, zinc, ornickel-plated steel; exposed bolt heads, slotless type; self-locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts. Equipment: Hooks and hang rods of cadmium-plated orzinc-plated steel. FABRICATION, GENERAL Construction: Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch. Weld frame members together to form rigid, one-piece structure. Weld, bolt, or rivet other joints and connections. Grind exposed welds flush. Do not expose bolts or rivet heads on fronts of locker doors or frames. Frames: Fabricate of 16-gage channels or 12-gage angles, minimum, with continuous stop/strike formed on vertical members. (~ [ridgeline ms] 10500 - 2 METAL LOCKERS .10500 - 2 I' ': 1 Finishing: Chemically pretreat metal with degreasing and phosphatizing process. Apply baked-on enamel 2 finish to all surfaces, exposed and concealed, except plates and .nonferrous metal. Color: Provide custom color(s) as listed. Concealed parts may be manufacturer's standard neutral color. 7 Wardrobe Lockers: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's ful line of standard colors. 8 ,. 9 ~ Athletic Lockers: As selected by Architect from manufacturer'sfulline ofstandard colors. 10 11 . 12 WARDROBE LOCKERS 13 14 Body: Fabricate back and sides of minimum 24-gage steel, with double-flanged connections extending full 15 height. Form top and bottom of not less than 24-gage steel, with flanged edges.. 16 17 Provide 24-gage steel sheet hat shelf in single-tier units. 18 19 Form exposed ends of non-recessed lockers of minimum 16-gage steel. Door: One-piece, minimum 16-gage sheet steel, flanged at all edges, constructed to prevent springing when opening or closing. Fabricate to swing 180 degrees. Ventilation: Provide stamped, louvered vents in door face, as follows: Single-tier lockers:. Not fewer than 6 louver openings top and bottom. Double-tier lockers: Not fewer than 3 louver openings top and bottom. Multi-tier lockers: Not fewer than 2 louver openings top and bottom, or 3 louver openings top or bottom. ^ 33 Hinges: Heavy duty, not less than 0.050" thick steel, full-loop, 5-knuckle, tight pin. Weld to inside 34 of frame and secure to door with not fewer than 2factory-installed fasteners that are completely 35 concealed and tamperproof when door is closed. 36 37 Provide at least 3 hinges for each door over 42 inches high; at least 2 hinges for each door 42 38 inches high.or less. 39 40 Sloping Tops: Provide continuous sloping tops of not less than 16 gage sheet steel, approximately 25 41 degrees pitch, in lengths as long as practicable but not less than 4 lockers. Provide 16-gage closures at ends. ~,. 42 Finish to match lockers. Recessed Handle and Latch: Housing to form recess for latch lifter and locking devices; nonprotruding latch lifter containing strike and eye for padlock; and. automatic, prelocking, pry- resistant latch mechanism with latching action as follows: Single-tier lockers: Not less than 3-point latching. Double-tier lockers: Not less than 2-point latching. Multi-tier lockers: Not less than 1-point gravity or spring latch with padlock lugs. . ® 54 Acoustical Treatment: Provide construction treatment designed for significant reduction of noise of locker 55 operation, including protected sound-absorbing material; nylon or plastic coatings on operating components 56 to prevent metal-to-metal contact, and latching mechanism designed to operate without rattling. 57 [ridgeline ms] 10500 - 3 METAL LOCKERS 10500 - 3 ATHLETIC LOCKERS Body: Fabricate top, bottom and exposed end panel of not less than 16-gage steel sheet, and fabricate back of not less than 18-gage steel sheet. Construct intermediate partitions of 20-gage metal welded to steel hemming. Door: On single and double tier lockers provide same door, hardware and latching as on wardrobe lockers. On box lockers provide either spring latch or friction latch with appropriate padlock locking eye per manufacturer's standard. On all doors provide venting as listed under "Wardrobe Lockers". Ventilation: Diamond perforations 7/16" x 15/16" or 1/2" diameter holes on 7/16" staggered centers, Aluminum Diamond Plate Ends: Provide 1/8" aluminum diamond plate on all locker exposed ends. Fasten with appropriate pick-proof fasteners. File and buff to remove all sharp edges and burrs. Aluminum Diamond Plate Tops: Tops of 40" high athletic lockers (peninsula units) to be covered with an additional 1/8" thick aluminum diamond tread plate and fastened with appropriate pick-proof fasteners. File and buff to remove. all sharp edges and burrs. LOCKER ACCESSORIES Locking: Fabricate lockers to receive the following locking devices: Combination Lock: All locks furnished by Owner. Equipment: Furnish each locker with the following items, unless otherwise shown: Single-Tier Units: Hat shelf, one double-prong hook and not fewer than 2 single-prong wall hooks. Multiple-Tier Units: One double-prong hook and not fewer than 2 single-prong wall hooks. Number Plates: Manufacturer's standard etched, embossed, or stamped, nonferrous metal number plates with numerals not less than 3/8 inches high. Number lockers in sequence as directed by Architect. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least 2 fasteners of same finish as number plate. Horizontal Frame Member Between Doors: Provide horizontal member fabricated from not less than 16-gage sheet steel between doors of multiple-tier lockers to ensure rigidity and enhance security. Trim: Provide trim at jambs and head of recessed lockers, consisting of not less than 18-gage cold-rolled steel. Factory- finish trim to match lockers. Secure trim to lockers with concealed fastening clips. Filler Panels: Provide filler panels where indicated, of not less than 18-gage steel sheet, factory fabricated and finished to match locker units. Divide filler panels so that no panel is more than 8" wide. Base: Base under all lockers to be concrete LOCKER ROOM BENCHES Manufacturer's standard units with laminated hardwood seat approximately 9-1/2 inches wide by 1-1/4 inches thick, in lengths as indicated. Furnish steel pedestal supports not more than 6'-0" o.c., with provisions for fastening to floor and securing to bench. Furnish all anchorages: Apply manufacturer's standard transparent coating to bench seat and baked enamel finish to pedestals. . [ridgeline ms) 10500 - 4 METAL LOCKERS 10500 - 4 t e. 2 4 5 ' 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 ', 18 19: 20 21. 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 -~ u 1 PART 3 -EXECUTION PREPARATION Field Measurements: Take field, measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication of special components, when possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, allow for adjustment and fitting of trim and filler panels wherever taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay work. WSTALLATION Install metal lockers at locations shown in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for plumb, level, rigid, and flush installation.. Space fastenings about 48 inches o.c., unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, and apply through backup reinforcing plates where necessary to avoid metal distortion, using concealed fasteners. I nstall trim, sloping top units, and metal filler panels and end panels, using concealed fasteners. Provide flush, hairline joints against adjacent surfaces. Install benches in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. ADJUST AND CLEAN Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices are operating properly. Touch up marred finishes, but replace units that cannot be restored tofactory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10500 [ridgeline ms) 10500 - 5 METAL LOCKERS 10500 - 5 SECTION 10605 -WIRE MESH PARTITIONS ' 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 2 '~ 3 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 ' 7 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 8 9 10 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 11 12 Extent of wire mesh partitions is shown on drawings. 13 14 Lock cylinders are specified in Division 8 hardware section. 15 17 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' 18 19 Manufacturer: Provide wire mesh partitions as complete units produced by a single manufacturer, including 20 necessary mounting accessories, fittings, and fastenings. 21 22 Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where 23 possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, allow for adjustments and fitting wherever taking of field 24 measurements before fabrication might delay work. ' 25 26 Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into masonry for 27 installation of mesh partition work. Coordinate delivery of inserts and anchorages with other work to avoid 28 delay. 29 30 31 SUBMITTALS ' 32 33 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for materials required. 34 35 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of wire mesh partitions. Include plans, 36 elevations, and large scale details showing anchorage and accessory items. Provide location template 37 drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent construction. 38 39 40 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 43 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 44 45 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or approved: ' 46 47 Folding Guard ' [ridgeiine ms) 10605 - 1 WIRE MESH PART1T10NS 10605 - 1 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION General: Do not use components less than sizes indicated; use larger size components as recommended by partition component manufacturer. ~. Partition Height: Furnish partitions of stock 10'-0" height at Room 308 -Band. Mesh: 10-gage (0.135") crimped steel wire woven into 1-1/2" mesh, securely clinched to frame members. Frames: Provide cutouts necessary for partition installation. Finish edges ofcutouts to provide a neat, protective edge. Vertical Members: 1-1/4" x 5/8" cold-rolled steel C-Section channels with 1/4" bolt holes approximately 15" o:c. Horizontal Members: 1" x'/" x 1/8" cold-rolled steel channels, mortised and tenoned to vertical members. Horizontal Reinforcing Members: 1" x'/z' x 1/8"cold-rolled steel channel with vuire woven through, and secured to vertical members. Provide number of horizontal reinforcing members to suit panel height as recommended by partition manufacturer. Stiffening Bars: For free-standing partitions. over 8'-0" in height, provide fiat bar stiffener posts between abutting panel frames. Size as recommended by partition manufacturer for partition height required. lhcrease size of stiffening bars if required to maintain partition rigidity. Top Capping Bars: '2-5/8" x 1" cold-rolled steel channels, secured to top framing channel with.1/4" U-bolts spaced at 14" o.c. Corner' Posts: 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" x 1/8" angles with 1/4" bolt holes to align with bolt holes in vertical frame members, and floor plate. For otherthan 90 degree intersections, use manufacturer's recommended tubular corner posts and installation accessories. Floor Shoes: Cast iron, sized to suit vertical framing and to provide approximately 3" clear space between finished floor and bottom horizontal frame members. Furnish units with set screw for leveling adjustment. Sheet Metal Base: Panels formed of 16-gage steel'sheet, welded or bolted to frames. Double Slide Pair Doors (Full Height): Frame partition for 6'-0" clear door opening. Sliding doors to have two four-wheel roller bearing truck/hangers enclosed in a galvanized steel box track and one steel.channel bottom guide for each door. Provide vertical locking rod in dead leaf and cylinder mortise type lock in active leaf. Cylinder core for lock is specified in Division 8. Provide two (2) each wall clamp kits to connect wire partition to building wall. . Finish: Manufacturer's standard shop-applied enamel finish. Color grey. Provide bolts, hardware, and accessories for complete installation. Ceiling Components: Provide all components necessary for a complete, and secure, wire mesh ceiling assembly. [ridgeiine ms] 10605 - 2 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605 -.2 ,. , . 1 , 1 PART 3 -EXECUTION . 2 ' 3 4 INSTALLATION 5 , 6 7 Erect- artitions lumb; ri id, properly aligned, an ' d securely fastened in place, complying with drawings and manufacturer s recommendations. 8 9 Provide additional field bracing as shown or nec essary for rigid secure installation 10 , . ,' 11 12 .ADJUST AND CLEAN 13 ,~ 14 Adiust moving components for smooth operation without binding. 15 16 17 Touch-ug .damaged finish after completion of shop-applied finish. installation using field-applied paint to match color of 18 19 20 END OF SECTION 10605 21 . - 8 1 [ridgeline ms] 10605- 3 .WIRE MES H PARTITIONS 10605 - 3 ' SECTION 10650 -OPERABLE PARTITIONS r 1 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. SUMMARY Extent of operable partitions, including locations and details, are indicated on drawings and in schedules. T es of operable partitions required include the following: Manually-operated individual paired panel assemblies Electrically-operated continuously-hinged panel assemblies Punching of overhead structural support per template provided by operable partition installer is specified elsewhere m aDivision-5 Section. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each type of operable partition and installation accessory required. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading and flame resistance characteristics. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location and extent of operable partitions. Include plans, elevations, and large scale details of anchorages, and accessory items. Indicate location of each unit with building, conditions at openings, typical and special details, location and installation requirements for hardware and operators. If power operated include electrical requirements. Include methods of installation for each type of support structure and fastening condition. .Template Drawings: Submit location template drawings for items supported or anchored by permanent construction. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard color charts showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material exposed to view. Maintenance Data: Include data in Maintenance Manual specified in Division-1. Certification: Provide U.L. Certified Test Report of partition construction. [ridgeline ms] 90650 - 1 OPERABLE PARTITIONS 10650 - 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm (material producer) with not less than 3 years of production experience, whose published literature clearly indicates general compliance of products with requirements of this section. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in operable partition installation with not less than 2 years of experience ih installation of operable partitions similar to those required for this project. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide material produced by a single manufacturer partitions and mounting hardware. REFERENCE STANDARDS ASTM E557 -Standard Recommended Practice for Architectural Application and Installation of Operable Partitions. TESTING At the supplier's expense, operable walls will be tested within 60 days after the completion of installation, by an independent professional acoustical engineer .experienced in the field. of acoustical testing and analysis. Testing as follows in Part 3 -Execution. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials to project site in original. factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with . identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade,. fire .hazard classification, and lot number. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well=ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity; laid flat, blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer .for special delivery, storage, and handling requirements. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Sequence operable partition installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and .soiling during remainder of construction period. PROJECT CLOSEOUT Warranty: Special Project Warran Submit a written warranty, executed 6y the Contractor, Installer and the Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units which fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to' and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. , Warran ep riod is 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion.. Maintenance instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated use (~idgeline ms] 10650 - 2 OPERABLE PARTITIONS 10650 - 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 '' 8 9. 10 11 12 13 ' 14 ,,~ 15 16 . 17 18 ,~ 19 20 21 '~ .22 23 ' 24 25 26 27 ' 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 ' 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 .42 43 44 45 46 47 48 ' 49 5-0 51 52 ' S3 54 55 56 57 conditions. Include precautions against materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance. PART2-PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the following requirements, provide the following manufacturer or approved: Modernfold Advanced Equipment Corp. Hufcor Inc. The approval of any manufacturer shall not only require compliance with requirements of this section but also shall be contingent upon approval of compatible material colors. Approvals must be requested a minimum of ten days prior to the bid opening. MATERIALS Panels: Panel Grougings: Series of paired, hinged panels, center stacking Series of continuously hinged panels, center stacking OgeratlOn: Manually operated. Door 415A, 412A, 512A, 515A, 613A, 615A. Electrically operated. Door 302A, 305. Electrical Operation: Factory assembled electric operation system, electric motor,. speed reducer, chain drive, controls; and other accessories required for operation. Include wiring from motor control to motor and to remote control stations. Electric Motor: High starting torque; reversible, constant duty, NEMA Class A insulated electric motor with thermal overload protection. Provide motor size recommended by partition manufacturer for specified operable partition size and type indicated. Provide motor designed for use with following power supply: 208_volts, 3_phase, 60 Hertz 1 [ridgeline ms] 90650 - 3 Key-Operated Push Button Control Switch: Furnished by Section 08700 - Fm~sh Hardware. Limit Switches: Provide limit switches at both extremes of travel preventing over- travel. Emergencv Release: Provide emergency release mechanism to disengage electric motor drive system permitting manual operation ih event of power failure. OPERABLE PARTITIONS 90650 - 3 Construction: 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Tvpe S: Minimum 16-gage steel face sheets welded to minimum 16-gage steel channel frame, factory-fabricated panels, free of joints in faces. Top reinforcing as required to support hanging from suspension components; internal insulation, internal gasketed edge construction to achieve specified acoustical ratings. Tvpe H: Panel faces shall be 7/16 inch medium density fiberboard laminated to Y inch medium density particleboard. Panel core shall consist of glass fiber sound attenuating material. Panel perimeter framed in 1/8 inch thick 6063-T6 aluminum alloy thru-bolted. Entire perimeter of panel encased in aluminum alloy, overlapping face mat. 5/16 inch. No visible fasteners on panel face surfaces. STC 43. Panel Surface: Carpet: Panel finish shall be manufacturer's standard carpet. Carpet shall be 100% Herculon IV Olefin Pile, .1/flinch high, 3-ply with polypropylene and jute backing, flame spread 20. All carpet edges to be protected by aluminum trim. Color: Shall be selected by Architect from the carpet manufacturer's full color line for the standard carpet pattern used by the partition manufacturer. V nyl: Panel shall be overlaid with vinyl wallcovering. Vinyl weight 16 oz. PLY and. fabric weight 2 oz. PLY. Federal Spec. CCC-W-408A, Type 1, Class A. UL Rating ASTM E-84 Tunnel Test. Flame Spread A. Manufacturer: B. F. Goodrich ape: Koroseal Pattern: Harborweave Color: Shall be selected by Architect from the vinyl manufacturer's full color line for the standard vinyl pattern used by the partition manufacturer. 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 Markerboards: Install on face of partition over the vinyl wallcovering in locations where shown on drawings. Markerboard quality shall be as specified in Section 10100. Color shall be white. Suspension System: General: Track suspended from overhead supports by adjustable steel hanger rods; heavy-duty trolley system panel supports specifically designed for use with size and type operable partition assembly indicated. Attach trolleys to panels with adjustable pendant bolts. Type 1 Track: Similar to Advanced Equipment Type 1 or approved. Track shall be one piece 6063-T6 aluminum incorporating soffit trim and seal retainers. Track brackets shall be 6063-T6 interlocking with top flange of track. Space to limit deflection to 0:09 inches. Trolleys: Shall be 4-wheel with 1-1/2 inch tread diameter. Precision ground ball bearing, pre-tubed and double shie{ded. Individual trolley capacity 700 lbs. Type 2 Track: Similar to Advanced Equipment Type 2 or approved. Track shall be of continuous roll-formed 11-gage steel. Track brackets shall be 6063-T6 aluminum alloy which interlocks with track. Space to limit track deflection to 0.09 inch. Bracket. spacing over stacking area shall be 12 inches o.c. maximum. [ridgeline ms] 10650 - 4 OPERABLE PARTITIONS 10650 - 4 ~, 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ' 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 ' 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 t 49 50 51 52 Trolleys: Shall be 4-wheel of all-steel construction with 1-1/4 inch tread diameter. Precision ground ball bearings, pre-tubed and double shielded. Individual trolley capacity 500 lbs. RECESSED FLOOR TRACK Acoustic Requirements: Advanced Equipment Type FT3 floor track recessed into floor flush with top of thickest adjacent floor finish. Form recess with beveled 2 x 10. General Contractor to grout solid afterwards full width of opening. General: Provide operable wall assembly that has been tested by an NBS accredited acoustical laboratory in a full-scale (14 feet by 9 feet opening) laboratory sound.. transmission loss performance test, and has been rated for ari STC as listed in following schedule when tested in accordance with ASTM E 90. Sound Seals: Perimeter sound seals shall be multi-finger fixed-variable top seals and panel intersection seals shall be formed from flexible polyvinyl chloride. Retractable floor seals shall be spring loaded, internally guided and employ awaist-high pivoted lever handle. The seal shall have a vertical travel range greater than 1-1/2 inches capable of acting as a locking mechanism to fix the panel in any desired location in the opening with constant pressure serving to seal each panel. On individual 'suspended panels the seal system shall be completely self-contained within each panel and have no visible mechanism or fasteners on any panel face. All paired or continuous panel operation will have floor seal operation from face of panel. Portal panels hinged to full width panels shall have floor seals. The base of these panels shall match in appearance the base of all other panels. Other seals as necessary to achieve one hour fire rating. Hinges:. Semi-concealed, butt-type hinges, finished to match other exposed hardware. Provide minimum three hinges per joint for heights up to 8'-0"; one additional hinge for each additional 4'-0" increase in height. FINISHES Aluminum Finish: Aluminum shall be 6063-T5 alloy, having aluminum association finish AA-C22-A32, commercial medium bronze anodized. Painted or dyed aluminum will not be accepted. PART 3 -EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine location where partitions will be installed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. [ridgeline msJ 10650 - 5 OPERABLE PARTITIONS 10650 - 5 1 INSTALLATION 2 3 Install operable partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, having been 4 completed. 5 6 Review drawings for compliance with ASTM E 557, Standard Recommended Practice for Architectural 7 Application and Installation of Operable Partitions, and note any discrepancies in design that would 8 prevent achievement of the full measure of performance of specification required. 9 10 Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust to ensure smooth, easy operation. 11 12 Match operable partitions for color and pattern by using partitions from cartons in same sequence as 13 manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed partitions are not 14 acceptable. 15 16 17 FIELD TESTS 18 19 Testing: At the supplier's expense, operable walls will be tested within 60. days after the completion of. 20 installation, by an independent professional acoustical engineer experienced: in the field of acoustical 21 testing and analysis. Testing as follows: 22 23 Prior to testing the operable walls, the acoustical consultant will examine flanking paths .through 24 the surrounding building construction to determine that they will not significantly affect the 25 performance of the operable walls. The manufacturer or his representative shalt be on hand to 2 6 observe the field testing and make product adjustments as required. 27 28 Assuming that the construction surrounding is such that the operable walls are not significantly 2 9 flanked by sound through the surrounding building construction, noise reduction shall be 3o described as an NIC rating as listed in the following schedule. 31 32 Noise reduction requirements will be made in general conformance with ASTM E336-76 as it is 33 applied to measurement of. isolation in between rooms. The NIC rating will be calculated in 34 accordance with ASTM E413-73. 35 36 Should the system fail to attain minimum requirements, corrections shall be made by the 37 responsible subcontractor and the walls tested again at the expense of the subcontractor. This 38 procedure shall be repeated until all attain the required rating. All supporting data then shall be 39 supplied to the architectural firm within 10 days to substantiate compliance. 40 41 4 2 CLEANING 43 4 4 Clean all operable partition surfaces and clean adjacent surfaces soiled by work of this section. Avoid 4 5 use of abrasive cleaners or solutions containing corrosive solvents. 46 4 7 Remove debris created by operable partition work from work site. 48 4 9 Protect Partitions against damage during construction period. Ensure that partitions will be without 50 damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. 51 52 53 DEMONSTRATION 54 55 Demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to Owner's personnel. 56 q 57 Deliver keys and operation/maintenance manuals to Owner and obtain receipt. 58 [ridgeline ms] 10650- 6 OPERABLE PARTITIONS 10650 - 6 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OPERABLE PARTITION SCHEDULE PART OPERATION RECESSED N ~ L F TRACK PANEL PANEL PANEL STOR O. MAN ELEC RATED LOOR TRACK HEAD THICK. TYPE FIN. STC NIC PASS DOOR . PCKT. DOORS 302A / / FT3 1 3-1/2"~ S 53 41 / /NYL - 305 / / FT3 1 3.1/2. S VINYU 53 41 VINYL - / 412A / - FT3 2 3~, Fi VINYU V/NYL 45 38 - _ 415A / - FT3. 2 ~ 3» H VINYU 45 38 V/NYL - _ 512A / - . FT3 2 3» H V/NYU VINYL 45 38 - _ 515A / - FT3 2 3„ /../ VINYU VINYL 45 38 - - 613A / - FT3 2 3~. H V/NYU VINYL 45 38 - _ 615A / - FT3 2 3" H VINYU 45 38 VINYL - _ *PLUS CARPET END OF SECTION 10650 [ridgeline msJ 90650 - 7 OPERABLE PARTITIONS 10650 - '7 ~, 2 4 5 6 '~ 8 9 10 11 ~12 13 14 15 16 ' 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 ' 25 26 27 ' 28 29 30 31 ' 32 33 34 ' 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 ' 43 44 45 46 ' 47 48 49 ' 50 SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES " PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. , DESCRIPTION OF WORK Extent of each type of toilet accessory is indicated on drawings. Accessories may be used in locations other than toilet rooms, i.e. classrooms, janitor rooms, etc. The contractor shall provide solid blocking for accessories at.all locations. See also Section 06100. T es of toilet accessories required include the following: Soap dispenser, and dishes Paper towel dispenser Mirror Toilet tissue dispenser Toilet seat cover dispenser Toilet room grab bars Sanitary napkin dispenser Sanitary napkin receptacle unit Single robe hook Towel bar Mop & broom holder QUALITY ASSURANCE Inserts and Anchorages:. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into masonry; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. Accessor4 Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units. Products: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each toilet accessory. ' [ridgeline ms) 10800 - 1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1 PART2-PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or approved. (Product numbers listed herein are from the Bobrick line and are included to establish the level of quality and type of accessory desired. Other manufacturers listed~below which are of equal or better quality are acceptable.) Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Bradley Corp. ACCESSORIES Paper Towel Dispenser: Towelmaster, surface-mounted, hand-crank operation to accommodate 507A roll towels. Toilet .Tissue Dispenser: Fabricate of stainless steel for mounting indicated below, sized to store and dispense either 4-1/2" diameter or 5" diametercore tissue rolls, with reserve.roll placed in service by automatic release or by action of manual release bar. Hinge front of unit with pivot hinge and secure with tumbler lockset. Locate 36" in from plumbing wall and 30" clear offloor, or review with Architect if indicated elsewhere. Surface-mounted, conceal anchorage. Sea Chem. #1009, Jumbo Roll Dispenser. Toilet Room Grab Bars: Stainless Steel Type: Provide grab bars with wall thickness not less than 18-gauge (.050") and as follows: Mounting: Concealed, manufacturer's standard flanges and anchorages. Clearance: 1-1/2" clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar. Gripping Surfaces: Smooth, satin finish. :Medium-Duty-Size: Outside diameter 1-1/4". _ Configuration: As indicated, and required by Washington State rules.and regulations for barrier free design. Bobrick #818522 and #818521. Sanitary Napkin Dispenser: Fabricate cabinet of stainless steel, not less than 22-gauge (.034"), welded construction. Provide door of seamless stainless steel, minimum 18-gauge (.050"), with returned edges and equipped with two (2) tumbler lockset. Provide identification reading "Napkins" and "Tampons" at coin slots; brand name advertising is not allowed. Capacity not less than 15 napkins and 20 tampons. Mounting: Surface-mounted type. Operation: 25-cent coin operation, with locked coin box keyed separately from door and other accessory units. Bobrick #B-280025 or Bradley #426. [ridgeline ms] 10800 - 2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 2 ~. 2 3 '. 4 5 6 ' 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 ';~ 15 16 17 18 '' 19 20 21 22 23 24 ' 25 26 27 t 28 29 30 31 ' 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 ' 42 43 44 45 46 '. 47 48 ' 49 50 51 52 53 S4 55 56 ' S7 Sanitary Napkin Receptacle Unit: Partition-Mounted Dual-Access Type: Fabricate of stainless steel equipped with adjustable flanges to permit partition mounting to service two (2) toilet compartments. Provide self-closing door and all welded stainless steel receptacle removable from one side. Bobrick #B-354. Surface-Mounted Type: Fabricate of stainless steel with seamless exposed walls, tightly self- closing top cover and locking bottom panel with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Bobrick #B-254 or Bradley #4722-15. Soap Dispenser: Surface-Mounted Type: Fabricate for surtace mounting, sized for 40 fluid oz. minimum capacity. Provide stainless steel knobs, agitator spring, and discharge mechanism which is designed to dispense soap in measured quantity by pump action. Provide cover and container of Type 304 stainless steel in #4 finish with unbreakable window type refill indicator. Concealed mounting equipment with push-type valve for dispensing liquid soap. Bobrick #6-4112 (no exceptions) Soap Dish: Provide 7-gauge stainless steel formed dish, 5" w x 2" h x 3" d. Bobrick #B-973 or Bradley #900. .Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser: Surf, ace-Mounted Type: Fabricate of heavy gauge Type 304 stainless steel with exposed surfaces in architectural satin finish. One-piece flanges of welded construction with seamless corners; dispenses 500 standard single or half-fold paper toilet seat covers. Bobrick #B-221 or Bradley #583 Towel Bar: Stainless steel, round towel bar of 18-gauge with concealed mounting. Bradley #9065 18" wide or Bobrick #B-7674. Single Robe Hook: Heavy duty satin finished stainless steel single prong robe hook; rectangular wall bracket with back-plate for concealed mounting. ~ . Bradley #9114 or Bobrick #6717. Mirror: 3/4" x 3/4"satin finished stainless steel angle frame with welded corners and with first quality tempered glass mirror (See Section 08800). Bradley #780-2436 and 1830 or Bobrick #B-290. Bradley #740-2436 (tilt mirrors) or Bobrick #B-293. Mop & Broom Holder: Provide.18-gauge (.050"), 36"long, Type 304 stainless steel shelf with four (4) spring- loaded cam type holders and hooks of 16-gauge stainless steel. Bradley #9984 or Bobrick #B-239. ' [ridgeline ms] 10800 - 3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 3 FABRICATION General: Only an unobtrusive stamped logo of manufacturer, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath accessory units. On either interior surface not exposed to view or back surface, provide additional identification by means of either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate, indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with full-length stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage which is fully concealed when unit is closed. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners which are appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. Where toilet accessories overlap upper edge of wainscot, provide plywood spacer of thickness equal to wainscot thickness. Plywood to have hardwood edge band and shall be recessed from edge of accessory 3/8" on all exposed perimeter edges. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. END OF SECTION 10800 [ridgeiine ms] 10800 - 4 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 4 ' ' 1 2 4 '. 5 6 7 ,~ 8 9 10 ' 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 ' 25 26 27 ' 28-- ' 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 ' 40 41 42 43 ' 44 SECTION 10900 -MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of this contract, including General and- Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK The following items are included in this section: Entrance Floor Mats Bike Racks Flag Pole Key Box Litter Receptacles Extruded Safety Stair Nosing Fire Extinguisher Cabinets Fire Extinguishers Safe Corner Guards Disappearing Stairway Manual Projection Screen Electric Projection Screen Television Wall Bracket VCR Enclosure Music Library System Instrument Storage Cabinets Clocks Fume Hood Safety Cabinets Ship's Ladder SHOP DRAWINGS/BROCHURES Submit for approval, items, where specified or required by Architect, in accordance with the "Supplementary General Conditions." Submit brochures for all stock items specified herein not requiring special detail work, in accordance with the requirements for shop drawings specified herein above. ' [ridgeline ms] 10900 - 1 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10900 - 1 PART2-PRODUCTS ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS Provide CORAL BRUSH Clean off Zone as distributed by Pacific Mat Co. (1-253-395-6287) or approved. To be 100% polyamide, cut pile with primary backing of polyester fiber skin and backing of heavy PVC. At exposed edges install beveled edging. Glue down mat and beveled edge strips with an adhesive suitable for the PVC backing. Strictly follow adhesive manufacturer's instructions. Color: #3810 with Uni-plain #3890 Recessed frames to be manufacturer's standard design, of size and style to mate with adjacent finish floor or wall construction, complete with corner pins or reinforcing and anchorage. Material to be extruded 6063-T5 alloy aluminum. Frame surface which will contact cementitious material shall be coated with zinc chromate paint or manufacturer's standard protective coating. BIKE RACKS Shall be manufactured by Cora Bike Rack Inc., or approved. (1-800-354-8624.) Model W4506. Fabrication of main frame is from ASTM A53, 2-3/8" O.D. hollow round, cold rolled, structural pipe with a .125" wall thickness. Triangular intermediate supports are from 3/4"diameter hot-rolled steel bars and welded to main pipe frame. Installation shall be by'h" wedge anchors drilled into concrete slab. In asphalt paving cut clean 8" by 8" by 12" deep hole with bottom of hole 10" by 10". Pour concrete and allow to set. Install'/i' anchor into concrete. Finish shall be powder coated. Color shall be as selected by Architect. FLAG POLE Cone tapered aluminum ground-set, exposed height 35', 38-1/2' total length. Butt diameter 7", top 3-1/4". Pole design to withstand 90-mile-per-hour wind with flag flying in normal position. Manufacturer: Subjectto compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved: American Flagpole Eder Mfg. L. Ph. Bolander & Sons Morgan Francis Concord Ind. Color: Medium bronze anodized Equipment: Furnish pole with 6" diameter spun aluminum ball; revolving internal truck; flag attachment assembly of swivel, stainless steel snap and ball, stainless steel cable, coated weight, snap and sling; flush door with cylinder lock and key for access to internal winch assembly. Halyard shall be #10 (5/16") polypro with a wire core. Foundation includes a 10"diameter 16 gauge galvanized corrugated 3-1/2-foot length setting tube with full-welded 1/4" bottom plate and 12" length 3/4" diameter grounding rod. Furnish four centering wedges. Installation: Install to true vertical in accordance with manufacturer's directions and as indicated. Set in 2500 fc concrete foundation specified in Section 03300, as indicated, using 16 gauge corrugated galvanized foundation tube with self-centering bottomplate and lightning ground spike. Adjust rigging to operate to Architect's satisfaction. iridgeline msj 10900 - 2 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10900 - 2 ' 1 KEY BOX 2 3 Provide two (2) Series 3200, recessed key box as manufactured by The Knox Company. Keying for key box ' 4 shall match local Fire District key. Provide no keys with units. Install key box at location as shown or directed. ' 7 LITTER RECEPTACLES 8 9 Provide a quantity of six (6) "Scarborough Litter Receptacles" as manufactured by Landscape Forms, Inc. 10 11 (1-800/521-2546) or approved. 12 Fabrication: Three (3) support legs are 1 " sq. solid steel. Liner rests on 1 /4" x 3/4" steel straps welded to legs. 13 Side panels are 1-1/2" x 3/16" aluminum and are welded to 2-1/2" wide aluminum rings at top and bottom. 14 Top is formed of 14 gauge spun steel with 8"m opening in top. Liner is 30 gallon capacity and formed of ' ' 15 s full line polyethylene. Finishes to be powder coated with color as selected by Architect from manufacturer 16 of standard colors. Surface mounted with corrosion-resistant anchor bolts. 17~ ' 18 19 EXTRUDED SAFETY STAIR NOSINGS ' 20 21 22 Fabricate units of material, sizes, and configurations indicated for poured concrete stairs. Provide extruded aluminum units of 3" in depth with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum-oxide or silicon-carbide grits, or a 23 combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder. Length to be 3" short on each side of step. Units to have 24 integral anchor bar. '; 25 26 Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1/16" (1.5 mm),above the aluminum 27 extrusion. ' 28 29 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or 30 approved: 31 ' 32 33 American Safety Tread Co., Inc. Balco/Metalines, Inc. 34 Wooster Products Inc. 35 36 Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with the t 37 manufacturer. 38 39 ~~ Drill for mechanical anchors with countersunk holes located not more than 4 (100 mm) from ends and not 40 more than 12" (300 mm) o.c., evenly spaced between ends, unless otherwise indicated. Provide closer 41 spacing if recommended by the manufacturer. ' 44 FIRS EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 11 HOUR1 45 46 General: Provideonefireextinguishercabinetforsemi-recessedmountingorsurfacemountedwithaluminum 47 trim, white background with black vertical lettering at each location where fire extinguisher is shown. Provide ' 48 approved surface-mounted hanger holder with bracket to prevent accidental dislodgement for each surface= 49 mounted extinguisher. ' 50 51 ' Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be : 52 incorporated in the work include the following or approved: 53 ' , 54 55 Semi-Recessed Mounting: 56 J.L. Industries -Panorama Model 1027 Q 42 with aluminum trim door with black letters on 57. white background. Breakglass with lock. Fire FX option. 58 '' [ridgeline ms] 10900 - 3 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10900 - 3 Larson Mfg. - FS-G-AL-2409-6R -1/4" textured acrylic breakglass door with lock and black vertical letters on white background. Potter Roemer- Buena Series 7142-E-18-VW with aluminum trim doorwith black letters on white background. Breakglass with lock. FRC option. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS General: Provide one extinguisher for each fire extinguisher cabinet orsurface-mounted location as shown. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following or approved: Amerex Ansul Badger General Kidde J.L. Industries Larson Manufacturing Type: Dry Chemicals 5 Ib. U.L. Rated 3A-4OBC (typical through school unless otherwise noted or specified) Wet Chemicals U.L. Rated 2A:1 B:C:K (located in kitchen) CO-2 - 10 Ib. U.L. rated 10 BC SAFE Furnish and install one Stars Safe, Model No. C7 single compartment safe, as manufactured by American Security Products Co., or approved. Locate. in Room 102. Form and pour concrete container block as indicated. Keep door and face protected until building is ready for occupancy. Manufacturer's representative shall reset combination and adjust door to operate pertectly at time of final completion. CORNER GUARDS Provide from one of the following manufacturers at all 90° and 135° outside corners in corridors, and elsewhere as shown. Provide with 2" legs and caps and of height as shown on Drawings. Mount to a continuous aluminum retainer. If height not indicated, provide a minimum height of 84". Color: As selected by Architect Pawling Rubber Company CG-20 & CG-135 & CG-11 CSI, Acrovyn SSM-20 & SM-10M 135° &SSM-25 Institutional Products Corp. (IPC) 160 Series & 130 (135°) Series plus End Wall (160 Series) Korguard G-100 & G210 (135°) plus end wall G-110 [ridgeline ms] 10900 - 4 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES. 10900 - 4 1 i~ f 1 ii DISAPPEARING STAIRWAY Furnish Precision Ladders, LLC "SUPER SIMPLEX" or approved. Stairway shall be steel piano hinged in a steel frame fora 30" x 54" rough opening and shall have non-skid serrated treads with a 9-1 /2" riser height. Unit shall be tested to support 500 pounds. Unit shall be custom fabricated for floor to floor height and pan to accommodate the ceiling joist depth. Hardware shall be fabricated from heavy-duty galvanized steel. Stairway assembly to have anon-rated 1/8" aluminum door panel. MANUAL PROJECTION SCREEN Wall mounted 6' by 6' screen. Provide 30 ceiling mounted and 6 wall mounted. Projection surface will be glass beaded fiberglass. Enameled heavy gauge case and end caps. Provide all hardware for mounting. Manufacturer subject to compliance with requirements; provide product of one. of the following: Draper - Luma 2 Da-Cite -Model C ELECTRIC PROJECTION SCREEN Provide 14'-0" wide x 10'-6"high, with 4' extra drop, electrically operated and recessed into ceiling as detailed on drawings. 120 volt AC 60 HZ. Projection surface will be glass beaded fiberglass. Enameled heavy gauge case and end caps. Motor and transformers mounted in separate module. Screen shall bear U.L. label. Key operated control switch furnished by screen manufacturer. Key to building finish hardware system. Manufacturer subject to compliance with requirements; provide product of one of the following: Bretford Mfg., Inc. -Series 750 Draper - Rolleramic Da-Cite -Cosmopolitan Electrol TELEVISION WALL BRACKET (TWB) The mounting bracket shall be a Peerless Model No. JMW2650 and shall be mounted where indicated on the plans. The point of attachment must be able to accept a 1-1/2" NPS extension pipe. The bracket must be capable of accepting additional interface plate Model No. WSP 414. Construction should be heavy gauge cold rolled steel, MIG welded for maximum security and finished in Satin Black fused epoxy scratch resistant finish. (708) 865-8870. VCR ENCLOSURE VCR mount shall be a Peerless Model VPM 40J, or equivalent, which is constructed of 16 gauge steel. The VCR Mount shall be adjustable in both height and width, and shall be designed to interface with a Peerless wall or ceiling mount,. so that it can be combined with a monitor or TV mount. (708) 865-8870. MUSIC LIBRARY SYSTEM Provide retractable music library system as manufactured by Wenger Corporation, 555 Park Drive, Owatonna, MN 55060-0448 (toll free (800) 326-8373) (FAX (507) 455-1011). Furnish and install a four (4) section, seven (7) shelf high, space efficient storage system that will manually extend and retract without use of floor track, each unit supported by four (4) 8" diameter casters. The modular design allows for future expansion and/or relocation. Each shelf shall contain a metal music divider to separate and organize music. Label shall also be provided for each shelf. Provide top closure over entire assembly constructed of 3/4"plywood; cabinet end panels and doors constructed of 3/4" thick industrial grade particleboard (minimum 48 pcf); cabinet. [ridgeline ms] 10900 - 5 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10900 - 5. shelving constructed of 3/4" thick plywood fully adjustable on removable steel pin hardware; all finished both faces with thermofused polyester laminate; cabinet back panel 1/4" thick prefinished hardboard and able to mount on left or right hand side of cabinet end panels; color-oyster. All exposed particleboard or plywood edges include heat bonded 3mm beveled PVC edgebanding; color-oyster. Cabinet doors shall be provided with horizontally-mounted pull hardware, through-bolted, and includes surface mounted label holder. Each cabinet shall include steel guide frame, constructed of 1" square, 16 gauge plated steel tubing, including limiting cable and bumpers to control side and outward movement of cabinet. Installation shall include end panel at exposed end constructed of '/" thick industrial grade particleboard, with thermofused polyester laminate both faces and 3mm PVC edging, color-oyster. INSTRUMENT STORAGE CABINETS Provide storage cabinets as manufactured by Wenger Corporation or approved. Telephone (1-800-733- 0393). For wall panels, fabricate from 3/4" thick industrial grade particleboard (48 pcf) with thermoset polyester laminate on both sides. Shelves in cabinets up to 27" wide shall be one piece high molecular blow- molded polyethylene. In cabinets over 27" wide shall be one piece high molecular formed polyethylene. All shelves to have a 1-3/8" radius front edge. Heavy duty 5 knuckle institutional hinges through bolted to grille and side wall. Sliding lock-bar of 14 gauge steel through-belted to door. Provide cabinet edges with 3mm beveled PVC edge banding. Doors to be manufacturer's standard welded grille with powder coat finish. Back panel of 1/4"prefinished hardboard. See drawings for locations of instrument storage cabinets. Provide units as shown on drawings using standard Wenger unit numbering system. CLOCKS Provide one (1) each clocks. Manufacturer: Electric Time Co., Inc., Medfield, MA (1-800/531-2562) or approved. Type and Size: 8030 - 34-3/8" diameter Face: Acrylic (Back light) Hands arid Markers: Face Q and Hands IS -Both aluminum. Finish: Custom paint hands. and markers. Color as selected by Architect. Movement: HMI Automatic Reset Controller: Type 99-A-MI FUME HOOD j~ Provide Labconco No.48803-00 Laboratory Hood. Hood interior is molded, one piece, fire-resistantfiberglass. Hood exterior is epoxy coated steel, Glacier White in color, with removable front panel. Provide a removable sheet metal shroud on top of hood aligning with outer faces on the three open sides and extending up to finished ceiling, painted Glacier White. An air foil, automatic air by-pass system and counter-balanced tempered safety glass sash are included. Hood has built-in exhaust blower with 1/3 horsepower motor to overcome a maximum external static pressure of .17" HZO at 100 FPM face velocity (735 CFM) using 12.75" diameter duct. Hood size 48" wide, 33-1/4" deep, by 59" high. Operates on 115 volts, 60 Hz AC. Electrical: Unit includes two 30 watt fluorescent light fixtures, and one duplex receptacle located in the right ; hand fixture panel. Unit comes prewired internally for blower and light switches, and outlets, with a single point connection at rear of hood. [ridge~ine ms] 10900 - 6 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10900 - 6 1 Service Fixtures: Furnish 3 service fixture located in left hand fixture panel. One forwater (which includes wall 2 mounted gooseneck with vacuum breaker located over cup sink at left rear corner of hood), and one each for ' 3 gas and air. Fixture connections will be made at the valve base behind the fixture panel. 4 5 Provide Protector Standard Storage Cabinet No. 99000-00 with Spillstopper Work Surface. Cabinet 6 dimensions 48" wide by 36-3/4" high x 22" deep. Includes one 8" deep filler panel to increase cabinet depth t 7 to 30". 8 9 Furnish the following accessories: 10 11 #98471-01 Spillstopper Work Surface (Install in Field) 12 #40052 Cup Sink - 6" by 3" (Install in Field) 13 14 See Mechanical and Electrical drawings for all connections including electrical, water, drain, air and gas. 15 Divisions 15 and 16 to furnish conduit, boxes, wire, pipe, exhaust duct and [roof] [wall] cap as required for all 16 final connections . SAFETY CABINETS 21 Acceptable Manufacturers: Lab Safety Supply (1-800-543-9910) or equal. 22 23 Flammable Safety Cabinet: Model #4BW-97820 25 26 15 gallon capacity. 44" H x 23-1/4" W x 18" D. 27 Self closing. 28 Dual 2" vent openings -one high, one low for venting to exterior. 29 One adjustable shelf. ' 30 Sure-grip style locking handle. ~1 Self -closing /self-latching door with fusable link that melts at 165°F. 32 Leveling feet provided. 33 OSHA, UFC 79 and NFPA Code 30 spec compliant. 34 35 Acid /Corrosive Sorage Cabinet: Model #46W-13016 36 37 72 gallon capacity. . 38 60" H x 48" W x 18" D. 39 Shelves with 1" H raised perimeter and doorsill with 2" spill well to contain accidental spills. 40 Latching rod and all-propopylene handle and cabinet construction. '. 41 Acetal / plycarbonate hinges. 42 Dual 2" PVC vent openings -one high, one low for venting to exterior. SHIP'S LADDER 47 Ladder shall be Model #520 as manufactured by O'Keeffe's, Inc., San Francisco, CA, Phone (1-415-822- 48 4222), orapproved. Rungs shall be no less than 1-1/4" in section and 24"long, formed from tubularaluminum 49 extrusions, alloy 6063-T5, .squared and deeply serrated on all sides. (3 sections per steps.) Rungs shall be 50 able to withstand a 1000 loading: Channel side rails shall be no less than .125" wall thickness by 6" wide. 51 Handrails shall be formed from aluminum tubing, no less than 1.5" in diameterwith ends closed. Fabrication 52 shall be with self-locking stainless steel fasteners; full penetration inert-gas heliarc welds; clean, smooth, and 53 burr-free surtaces. Finish to be equal to PPG Duracron acrylic baked enamel in manufacturer's standard color 54 as selected by Architect. ' S5 56 57 END OF SECTION 10900 ~' [ridgeline ms] 10900 - 7 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 1.0900 - 7 '~ ,; 1 2 3 ,~ 4 5 6 7 '. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1'9 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 26 27 28 ' 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 . 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 ' 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 ' S1 n SECTION 11050 - BOOK DETECTION SYSTEM PART1-GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. SUMMARY This Section includes: -Exit detecfion system. Circulation equipment. REFERENCES Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): ADA Design Guidelines. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): OSHA Guidelines. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): UL A 1485. SUBMITTALS Manufacturer's product literature including product data, brochures, warranty information, installation requirements and procedures and limitations of use. Maintenance procedures. , . Service coritract and conditioris. r QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer: Experienced in producing materials specified for 15 year minimum. WARRANTY 3M warrants that the 3M Library Security Systems product will be free of defects in material and manufacture for a period of 1 year from the date of installation. Provided the system has been properly installed, operated, and maintained by purchaser, 3M will, at 3M's option, repair, replace or refund the purchase price of such quantity of product determined to be defective. ' [ridgeline ms] 11050-1 BOOK DETECTION SYSTEM 11050-1 PART2-PRODUCTS MANUFACTURER 3M Library Systems, 3M Center, 225 - 4N - 14, St. Paul, MN 55144-1000, (800) 328-0067, Internet www.mmm.com/library. EXIT DETECTION EQUIPMENT UL approved. OSHA and ADA compliant. Suitable for 110/120 VAC 60 Hz single phase circuit. 5.5 Amps. Unit having an internal switch to accommodate international electrical power supply. 3M TM Model 3803 Series Detection System, electronic photo cell, allowing detection up to six feet above floor level with protection against stray electronic noise to prevent false alarms. Three corridor model with 36 inch wide corridors and floor mounted. Digital electronics integrally mounted in panel suitable for continuous operation. Power cord: 14 feet with NEMA 5-15P plug type. Power consumption: 5.5 amps at 120 VAC. Corridor specific integral traffic and alarm counter. Internal self diagnostic system with indicator window. NON-MAGNETIC MEDIA CIRCULATION EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES Built-in Desensitizer/resensitizer: UL/CSA listed, electronic type device suitable for 110/120 VAC 60 Hz single phase circuit, with 6 foot power cord for under counter unit and 7 foot power cord for electronics unit, 3MT^^ Model 966 Incounter Bookcheck. MAGNETIC MEDIA CIRCULATION EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES 3MT"' Model 763 Magnetic Media Desensitizer, single pass desensitizer suitable for use on audio and video cassette tapes. 3M TM Model 2011 Hand-Held Magnetic Media Resensitizer, suitable for use on audio and video cassette tapes and continuous resensitizing. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in a manner required to meet referenced standards with manufacturer's instructions for buried power. END OF SECTION 11050 [ridgeiine ms] 11050-2 BOOK DETECTION SYSTEM 11050-2 ' ' SECTION 91062 -CURTAINS AND T RACKS ~, 2 ' 4 5 6 1 8 9 ' 10 11 12 13 ' 14 15 16 ' 17 18 19 20 ' 21 22 23 ' 24 25 26 27 ' 28 29. 30 31 32 33 34 ' 35 36 37 ' 38 39 40 41 ' 42 43 44 45 46 47. 48 49 1 50 PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. RELATED WORK BY OTHERS Stage ceiling rigging supports to be provided and located by others for support of the specified equipment as shown on shop drawings. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Extent of each type of stage curtain is indicated and scheduled on Drawings. T es of curtains specified in this section include the following: Front Setting: Front curtain Cyclorama Setting: Backdrop QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: Firm with not less than five years of successful experience in fabrication and installation of stage curtains similar to those required for this project. Flame Resistance Reauireinents: Provide stage curtain and lining which are certified to be inherently flameproof in accordance with requirements of NFPA 701. Permanently attach label to'each curtain indicating whether curtain is permanently and inherently flame resistant, or whether it will require retreatment after dry cleaning. SUBMITTALS Product Data, installation instructions, and general recommendations, including data which substantiates that materials comply with requirements. Certification that stage curtain and lining comply with requirements for flame resistance. Shop Drawings including plans, elevations, and detail sections of typical rigging elements. Show anchors, hardware, operating equipment, and othercomponents notincluded in manufacturer's standard productdata. Include backing/blocking required for track. Coordinate with General Contractor that he furnish and install. [ridgelne ms] 11062 - 1 CURTAINS AND' TRACKS 11062 - 1 1 PART2-PRODUCTS 2 3 4 FRONT SETTING 5 6 Front Curtain Fabric 7 8 Woven Cotton Velour: Napped fabric of 100% cotton; 54-inch width minimum; not less than 40 9 backing ends per inch, 40 pile ends per inch, and 32 picks per inch; 640 pile tufts per square inch. 10 Heavy Weight Fabricweighing not less than 25 ounces per linear yard before flameproofing, with pile 11 height of approximately 125 mils. 12 13 Subiect to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following heavy weight velour fabrics: 14 15 "Saluda"; Baxter-Kelley Mills 16 "Symphony"; Dazians, Inc. 17 "Memorable"; K & M Fabrics, Inc. 18 "Wilson"; Melfabco, Inc. 19 "Cortex"; Underdown Textiles 20 21 Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. 22 23 Lining: Yarn-dyed inherently flameproof denim cloth of 100 percent cotton, woven in a warp-faced twill; 54 24 inches minimum width. 25 26 Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. 27 28 29 CYCLORAMA SETTING 30 31 ~clorama Setting Fabric (Back Curtain) 32 33 Cotton Repp: Plain-woven heavy weight fabric of 100% cotton with raised, rounded chevron ribs 34 running from salvage to salvage; 48 inches minimum width. 35 36 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following cotton repp fabrics: 37 38 ~ "Atlas Oxford"; Melfabco, Inc. 39 "Atlas Oxford"; Valley Forge Fabrics 40 41 Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. 42 43 44 METAL PRODUCTS 45 46 Supports Clamps and Anchors: Sheet steel in manufacturer's standard gages, galvanized after fabrication 47 in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B. 48 49 Support Chain: Not less than 2/0 Blu-Chrome Passing line chain. 50 51 Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, unless otherwise indicated. 52 53 54 [ridgelne ms) 11062 - 2 CURTAINS AND TRACKS 11062 - 2 ' 1 FABRICATION 2 3 Front Setting: ' 4 5 Front Curtain: Shall consist of one pair made to traverse. 6 ' 7 Field verify stage opening sizes prior to fabrication.. Provide not less than 50 percen g additional fullness for curtains, unless otherwise indicated. Horizontal seams and fabric less 'g than half-width are not permitted. Allow sufficient time during manufacturing for hanging of 10 material prior to hemming to assure accurate hemming. ' 11 12 Vertical Hems: Provide vertical hems not less than 3 inches wide, double-stitched and 13 machine-sewn with no selvage material visible from front of curtain. 14 15 Turnbacks: Where specified, provide turnbacks, formed by folding 24 inches of face fabric 16 back at each end of panels and securing by sewing across top hem and grommeting through 17 both layers of fabric. Do not sew turnbacks vertically. '; 18 19 Top Hems: Reinforce top hems by double-stitching 3-1/2-inch wide heavy jute webbing to 20 top edge with minimum 1 inch of face fabric turned under. All strain shall be carried by jute 21 webbing with no strain on the curtain when in operation. 22 23 Pleats: Provide fullness in curtains by sewing 6 inches of additional material into box pleats 24 spaced at 12-inch centers along top hem reinforcing. Provide not less than #2 brass 25 grommets spaced at 12 inches and centered on box pleats, for tie lines or "S" hooks. 26 p g rovide bottom hems not less than 27 Bottom Hems: Exce t for curtains which han to floor, p 28 6 inches deep. For floor-length curtains, provide 6-inch hems with separate interior heavy ' ; 29 canvas chain pockets equipped with acadmium-plated jack chain weighing not less than one 30 pound to three feet of chain. Stitch chain pocket so chain rides 2 inches above bottom edge 31 of curtain. Lower edge of curtain no more than 2 inches above finish floor. 1 32 33 L:inin Provide 50 inches of lining at leading and trailing edges of each curtain in same 34 fullness as face fabric, and finished 2 inches shorter than face fabric. Attach lining to face 35 fabric along bottom line at seams with 4 inches long strips of heavy woven cotton tape. ' 36 37 Cyclorama Setting: 38 ' 39 Back Curtain: Shall be made with sufficient additional fabric to give 50% fullness, and shall be box 40 pleated to heavy jute webbing at the top so that when in operation all strain will be carried by the 41 webbing with no pull on the fabric. The webbing shall be of.proper length to fit specified track, and 42 set with #2 grommets 12 inches o.c. as a means of attaching to the traverse track. Side hems 3 ' 43 inches. Bottom hems shall be not less than 6 inches deep with a separate interior fabric chain pocket 44 with cadmium plated jack chain weighing no less than one pound to three feet of chain. Stitch chain 45 pocket so chain rides 2 inches above bottom edge of curtain. ' 46 47 4g CURTAIN TRACKS ' 49 50 Front Curtain Track: Light/medium duty track. Fabricate of not less than .050-inch thickness extrude 51 aluminum, with each half of track on one continuous piece. Provide curtain carriers for track spaced at 12 52 inches o.c. Equip track with adjustable pulley blocks containing sleeve-bearing wheels adequately guarded. 53 Provide curtain carriers of plated or rust-proof steel with pair of polyethylene wheels fastened parallel to body 1 54 by rust-proof steel rivet. Equip carriers with swivel eye for attachment of curtain snap or "S" hook. Provide 55 end stops for track and adjustable floor block for maintaining proper tension on 1/4 inch stretch-resistant 56 operating line of braided polypropylene or fiberglass center cord. 57 CURTAINS AND TRACKS 11062 - 3 [ridgelne ms] 11062 - 3 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved: Model #201; Atlas Silk Cyclorama Tracks: Curved Back Curtain Track: Provide curtain carriers of plated or rust-proof steel with pair of polyethylene wheels fastened parallel to body by rust-proof steel rivet. Equip carriers with swivel eye for,attachment of curtain snap or "S" hook. Provide end stops for track. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved: Automatic Devices Co.: Rig-I-Flex 142 Series, Walk Along #1400 Channel #4208 Hanging Clamp #4224 Splicing Clamp FRONT CURTAIN DRAW MACHINE Provide fully automatic 1/3 HP Atlas Silk Model No. 454 motor connected through V-belt drive to gear unit as manufactured by H & H Specialties, Inc., or Automatic Devices Co. Model 1454 with a curtain separation speed of 3 feet per second. Standard features are: instant reversing motor, Curler-Hammer rotary limit switch mounted integrally with gear unit, cable tension device disconnect switch, reset type circuit breaker, 10" x 5" grooved drum for 3/16" cable, temporary power supply cord and emergency hand crank for conversion to manual operation. Double pole-double throw key switch shall be furnished by manufacturer. Section 08700 - Finish Hardware to supply cylinder core keyed to building sysfem. PART 3 -EXECUTION PREPARATION Furnish layouts for support beams, inserts, clips and other supports required to be installed by other trades for support of tracks and battens. INSTALLATION General: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, and in compliance with governing regulations. Track: Front Curtain Ceiling-Mounted: Drill track at intervals not greaterthan manufacturer's recommended spacing and fasten either directly to structures or to inserts, eye-screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate to substrate, and which will not deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures. Back Curtain Suspension Mounted: Install tracks by suspending at proper heights with welded link steel chain attached to structures or to other devices which are secure and appropriate to substrate, and which will not fail with age or elevated temperatures. [ridgelne ms] 11062 - 4 CURTAINS AND TRACKS 11062 - 4 i ', 1 Curtains: 2 3 Track-Hung: Secure curtains to track carriers with track manufacturer's special heavy-duty "S"hooks 4 or snap hooks. 5 6 7 END OF SECTION 11062 1 1 1 [ridgelne ms] 11062 - 5 CURTAINS AND TRACKS 11062 - 5 r i n SECTION 11400 -FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 1 PART1-GENERAL 2 ' 3 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 : 6 Drawings and. general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 7 Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work'of this section. 8 9 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 10 11 RELATED WORK: ~ ' 12 13 Rough-ins and Final Connections: Service lines from rough-in to point of final connections under Divisions 14 15 and 16. 15 . 16 Electrical: Wiring, conduit, fuses, breakers, final disconnects, junction boxes, and other required electrical 17 apparatus not built-in or mounted on equipment by Division 16. 18 19 Plumbing: Controls, regulators, valves, stops traps, strainers, checks, grease traps, and fittings not mounted 20 on/in equipment by Division 15. 21 22 Mechanical: Exhaustfans, blowers; motors, and switches serving exhaust hoods including ductwork above 23 ceiling and supply fans by Divisions 15 and 16. 24 25 General Contractor: Support work in this section, including blocking and backing plates as required 26 27 All food service case work shall comply with Section 06400 Architectural Woodwork, except that all items 28 shall be constructed of cabinet grade 3/4-inch plywood suitable for plastic laminating. 29 ` 30 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: ~ ' 31 32 ~ Fabricated Equipment: Constructed to configuration, dimension, detail and design as shown with materials 33 and workmanship as required. 34 35 Manufactured Equipment: Mass produced and referenced by manufacturer's name and model number: 36 37 Each model number includes the code "H011 as a suffix. This code is knowri as the Specifier Identification 38 System. It is not to be removed by the bidders. Its purpose is to identify the Specifier to the vendors 39 providing equipment in the event it is necessary to communicate questions, clarificatiohs and comments, 40 from prior to bid award through the final purchase. It is to be used on all correspondence including fax and 41 a-mail when communicating with manufacturer representatives and factories. 42 43 SUBMITTALS: 44 ' 45 Samples: As requested during the shop drawing phase. 46 47 Shop Drawings: Required for manufactured and fabricated equipment including Owner and .Purveyor 48 furnished equipment. 49 50 ~ Include dimensioned rough-in locations for service, service characteristics, final connection 51 details, floor depressions, concrete • bases and concealed blocking and backing plates. 52 .Reference horizontal and vertical dimensions from finished floor or face of finished walls. Draw 53 floor plans at 1/4-inch scale including equipment 54 . [ridgeline msj 11400 - 1 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 1 2004-.0001 11400-2 1 schedule; additional plan views at 3/4-inch scale for complex counters, 3/4-inch scale for 2 elevations, and 1-1 /2-inch scale for sections. 3 4 Ventilating Hoods: Submit prior to manufacture. In addition, show location and sizes of ducts, 5 CFM, and other required data. 6 7 Walk-in Cold Storage Rooms: Submit priorto manufacture. Include pit dimensions and location. 8 9 Submit two sets of bluelines and one set of reproducibles for all shop drawings. 10 11 Product Data: Provide manufacturer's specifications sheets and installation data. Include factory drawings 12 for specialty equipment when required. 13 14 Submit Certifications of Compliance with requirements of regulatory agencies. Certificates will not be" 15 .returned unless an error is observed. 16 17 Maintenance and Operating Manuals: Provide bound sets for all Food Service Equipment including the 18 following information. Provide each item with a heavy duty Tab Index page. 19 20 Installing company's name, address, telephone number, and date of completed installation. 21 22 Service company's name, address, and telephone number. 23 24 Serial numbers of principal pieces of equipment. 25 26 Part numbers of all replaceable items. 27 28 L' ubrication data and belt sizes. . 29 30 Electrical characteristics including data for motors and heaters. 31 32 QUALITY ASSURANCE 33 . 34 Qualifications: Fabricated equipment provided by a National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved 35 fabricator. 36 37 Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions of following and as specified. 38 39 National Sanitation Foundation Standards. 40 41 All state and local codes. 42 43 Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 44 45 United States Department of Agriculture. 46 47 National Fire Protection Agency. 48 49 American with Disabilities Act. 50 51 Seismic bracing in accordance with The Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors 52 National Association (SMACA) and The Sheet Metal Industry Fund of Los Angeles 53 54 [ridgeline ms] 11400 - 2 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 2 ' 2004.0001 ~ 11400-3 1 2 Source Quality Control: Give notice 15 days prior to 90% completion of fabricated equipment so that they may be inspected prior to delivery. Failure to comply may result in rejection at th b 3 e jo site. . 4 PRODUCTHANDLING• ' 5 6 7 Protect products from damage during delivery and storage; replace damaged products. 8 JOB CONDITIONS: 9 10 11 Protection: Protect work until Substantial Completion. Repair or replace damaged work in an acceptable manner : 12 . 13 WARRANTIES: 14 ' 15 16 Provide as required underGeneral and Supplementary Conditions, Modifications to General Conditions, and Supplementary Conditions. In addition condensin u it h ll " 17 , g n s s a have a 5-year warra nty and ventilators a 2- year warranty standard with manufacturer. . 18 ' 19 PRODUCTS- 20 21 MATERIALS: 22 ~ . 23 Sealant: DOW 732 RTV, Sealant Specialty 100% RTV. 24 ' 25 26 Sheet Steel: ASTM A-526 G90 grade. 27 28 Sound Deadening Material: 3M#42NF Plus Bemford 3140waterbase, Mortell Sound Pack, 1/16"foil backed. 29 30 Stainless Steel: ASTM A-240, Type 304; gauge as required. 26 finish on totally concealed surfaces; polished 150 grit finish where exposed (Number 4 fini h 31 s ). 32 Steel Shapes and Angles: ASTM A-36. 33 34 Cutting Boards and Table Tops: 35 36 Wood: John Boos. 37 38 39 High density linear polyethylene:.U.S. Rubber, John Boos. 40 Food Guard Glass: 1!4" laminated safety glass. 41 ~ 42 FABRICATION: 43 r 44 Metal Work: 45 ' 46 47 General: All work shall be stainless steel except where work is completely concealed. Fabricate entirely concealed work from galvanized she t t l 48 e s ee in U.S. gauge, use galvanized or brass fastenings. After cleaning weld area, a coating or cold zinc s r r 49 S0 p ay o compound for this purpose shall be applied. Finish exposed fastenings to match adjacent surfaces, flush, and buffed smooth R ll 51 . o and polish lines and arises of extruded sections. Make finished work free of tool and construction marks, dents, and other imperfections; polish and dre 52 ss exposed surfaces to original finish after completion of fabricated work 53 . 54 ' [ridgeline ms) 11400 - 3 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 3 2004.0001 11400-4 Stainless Steel: Heliarc-type welded. Grind exposed area to finish matching adjacent surface. Raw edges shall be deburred and made smooth. All joints welded; soldered joints not permitted. FABRICATED EQUIPMENT: Pipe Stands and Frames: For open base tables; fabricate of 1-5/8" o.d. 16 gauge steel tubing, including cross bracing. Weld and finish joints between legs and braces. Flattened ends on tube stretchers not permitted. Table Tops: 14 gauge stainless steel unless otherwise shown, with shop seams and corners welded. Reinforce working tops of closed base fixtures on underside with framework of 1-1/2" angle or 14 gauge hat sections full perimeter on open pipe frames with a 4" channel at each pair of legs. Conceal any.galvanized framework from view. Weld leg sockets to this channel; stud weld channel to top. Provide one channel runner lengthwise for tops up through 30" wide, two channel runners for tops over 30" wide. Reinforce tops to eliminate any noticeable deflection; stud weld reinforcements to underside of top. Unless otherwise shown, turn down metal tops 2" at 90°, 1/2" back at a 15° angle, and a 3/4" hold back from framing. Tops with fountain edge shall turn up 1/2" at 30°, then down 2" at 90°, and 1/2" turn back at a 15° angle. Provide tops with backsplash and endsplash as specified. Flange top edge back 2" at a 30° angle. Close splash ends and attach to walls. Seal space between wall and backsplash with a verminproof angle and sealant in a neat and professional manner. Make free corners of tops spherical. Spray underside of tops with 1/8" thick sound deadening material Counter Bodies and Enclosed Bases:. On cabinet bodies; expose ends and sides as required. Exposed bodies and aprons of 16 gauge stainless steel. Unexposed bodies and aprons 16 gauge galvanized steel. Reinforce bases at tops with framework of 1-1 /2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" galvanized, angles; corners mitered and welded. Provide bottoms to reinforce shelves and to support tops. Make outside corners of enclosed bases, cabinet bodies and corners against walls and other fixtures square.- When fixtures fit against or between walls, set bodies 1"from wall line; extend tops back to wall line to permit adjustment to wall irregularities. Provide a matching flush fitting vertical trim strip at each end of body; extend 1" to wall line. [ridgeline ms] 11400 - 4 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 4 1 3 .,4 ' ' 5 7 9 ~, 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 ' 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 ' 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 ' 33 34 35 36 ' 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 . 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 ' 54 2004.0001 1.1400-5 Fabricate fixtures to set on channel legs or channel bases as specified with bases set in sealant. Entire perimeter of base to form a verminproof seal. ,Applying sealant after base is set will not be accepted. Doors: Double cases stainless steel unless otherwise noted. Weld, grind smooth, and olish corners of outer pans. Fill inner pan tightly-into outer pan with sound deadening materiapsuch as manufacturer's standard semi-rigid glass fiber board used for core. Tack weld pans together with seams solder filled.. Finish doors approximately 3/4" thick. Shelves, Mullions and Aprons: Fabricate flush with cabinet body; welded joints. Buttjoints not acceptable:. Shelving: .. Removable Interior Shelves: 16 gauge stainless steel. Provide ends and back with a 1-1/2: high turnup against fixture body. Turn down front edge 1-1/2" and back'1/2" at 30°. Install on stainless steel adjustable shelf supports with pilasters welded to fixture walls. Non-Removable Interior Shelves: 16 gauge stainless steel. Provide ends and back with a 1-1 /2" high turnup against fixture body; weld to body. Turn down front edge 1-1/2"and back 1/2" at 30°. Bottom shelf shall turn under at 90° with sheet metal closure to base to prevent sagging and vermin collection. Undershelves: On open base tables; 16 gauge stainless steel. Turn front and ends down 1-1 / " and back 1/12" at 30°. Locate 10" from floor; weld corner to legs. Turn back up 2". 2 Elevated Shelves: 16 gauge stainless steel. Turn front and ends down 1-1/2"and back 1/2" at 30°. Where adjacent to wall or other fixtures, turn back up 2". Make corners spherical. Sink and Drainboards: Fabricated of 14 gauge stainless steel. Provide working edges with 5/8" radius sanitary rolled edges in one piece with rounded corners. Drainboards to be integral with sinks. Determine depth of sink bowl from top of bowl Provide sinks with backsplash and endsplash as applicable; flange top edge back 2" at 30° angle; attach and seal to walls as required. Run grain of sink splash within same fixture in same direction. Provide cut-outs as required for water supply and waste outlets Fabricate sink bowls individually with four sides and bottom; weld together; cap front, bottom, and completely up the back; make verminproof by welding a 14.gauge by 2"wide flush stainless steel trim band around joint. Each sink cross breaked to center of drain. Manufactured sink bowl acceptable alternate. Round corners, including bottom .. Fit bottom of each sink bowl containing center drain connection with a rough chrome plated 2" lever type action waste valve with satin finish stainless steel lever as specified. Include a 14 gauge stainless steel lever support bracket and weld to underside of sink. Mount waste valve, make watertight, and leave bottom with a 2" male thread: [ridgeline ms] 19400 - 5 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 19400 - 5 i 2004.0001 11400-6 TOE SPACE Provide as shown for equipment set on bases PLUMBING TRIM: Vegetable and Potwashing Sinks: 14" deep sinks with center drains. Provide wall and splash mounted faucets as specified. Cooks and Pantry Sinks: 12" deep sinks with center drains. Provide wall and splash mounted faucets as specified. HARDWARE: . Elevated Shelf Brackets: 14 gauge stainless steel.- Metal.Door Hinges: Stainless steel piano hinges with pulls as specified. Enclosed Gussets: Minimum 3" diameter at top, 4" long, continuously welded to frame members or sink bottoms. United Showcase MG148. Tubular Table Legs: 1-5/8"diameter 16 gauge stainless steel throughout Feet: Fit bottom of legs at floor with sanitary stainless steel bullet type foot with not less than 2"adjustment. United Showcase BF158. REACH-IN REFRIGERATORS: General: Provide as specified with condensate evaporate built-in as an integral part of assembly. VENTILATING HOODS FOR EQUIPMENT: Seal to wall with sealant or stainless steel if space exceeds 1/8". Provide NFPA and lJL listed Fire Protection System as specified. Supply hood hanging rods as required. EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE: Item 1 LONG TERM WALK-IN COLD/DRY STORAGE ROOMS: 2 required Imperial Manufacturing Co., modular high density urethane sandwich panel two-compartment cold storage rooms complete in configuration shown oh~Sheet FS1.1. Refer to Factory Drawing #04-PN-3791.5-02. Each room shall incorporate the following items: Wall, ceiling, and floor panel (at freezer only) insulation shall be a full 5" Class I foamed in place urethane. Finished exterior height of 9'-0". 10'-0" exterior sloped shed roof. Exposed exterior shall be 26 gauge white stucco galvanized. Exposed interior shall be .040 stucco embossed aluminum except ceiling which shall be .040 stucco aluminum with baked- on white acrylic finish. Unexposed surfaces shall be 26 gauge galvanized steel. [ridgeline ms] 11400 - 6 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 6 i ' 2004.0001 1 11400-7 Include white corrugated metal-weather roof on top of sloped roof structure. 2 3 .Install on 6"high concrete curb with Class I insulation and vapor barrier in freezer section. 4 See Sheet FS1.2 for curb and floor depression location.and FS3.1 for depression details. 5 Refer to Architectural Room Finish Schedule for wearing floor and base material inside and 6 out by Division 9. 7 8 Include one 48" x 84" exterior freezer door with heater system and one 48" ~~ 9 cooler door. NO WOOD CONSTRUCTION. Doors to be stainless steel inside and out wit r 10 36" high 14 gauge stainless steel. diamond tread kickplates on the interior h 11 each door. Doors to have 20 gauge stainless steeljamb liners and magnetic gaskets rEa h 12 door to include one metal locking bar with inside release handles. Kas 13 closers and Kason #1248 chrome spring-assisted hin on #1097 door 14 ges. Hinge doors as shown on plans. 15 Include 60" x 96" R-Plus single horizontal electric sliding doors as manufactured b Im erial ' 16 ~ Manufacturing, Inc., Portland, Oregon. Y p 17 18 • Doors shall be electrically operated, single horizontal sliding. door. Doors eed ' 20 per second. p up to 42" 21 Doors to be 3-1/2" foamed in place urethane for dry storage and 5" foamed in place • 22 urethane for freezer. Door panels shall consist of four sided metal reinforced; stainless 23 steel, 22 gauge, Type 304-4 finish interior and exterior. Provide 14 au e 24 steel diamond tread kickplates 36" high, at interior and exterior of each door. Doors to 25 include stainless steel track and motor hoods, padlock provisions, and 3-button control ' 26 stations with 36" personnel entry openers at interior and exterior of doors. 27 28 Cam-locked panels from 3.5" to 5" thick to be filled with Class 1 CFC free, high densit 30 29 urethane foam insulation having a K factor of .12 at 75°F and R-values form 25 to 36. 31 Gasket on sides and head of frame to be adjustable, easily replaceable and r - 32 resistant with neoprene bulb-type seals. 33 g ease 34 Rail, single piece roller truck and hardware to be heav dut 35 wheels to be solid steel with factory sealed ball bear ngs y Complete drail and truck 36 hardware to be mounted on header. 37 . 39 38 Hardware to include recessed pull handles and heavy duty stay rollers at floor. 41 40 Provide. door pull-in device at the top of door and guide rollers at base of door 42 .Power drive system to be electrically operated and chain driven for smooth high speed 43 door operation. Travel limit switch to provide infinite external ad'ustment w' ' 44 tools. Manual drive chain disconnect to be provided internallylon .door ane ut special 45 motor to be 3/4 hp, UL-listed, 208/230,460 volt single or three phase 60 c cl' Electric 46 47 y le. 48 Electrical controls to be enclosed in NEMA 4 rated enclosures. 49 Freezer doors to be equipped with UL approved "Anti-sweat" asket f 51 50 cables to have self regulating thermostat. Heat cables to be single~loop,ralum naum , 52 braided around all four sides of panel. 53 54 ~ Door panels #o be equipped with air-activated instant reversing edge, effective full height and full travel of door panel. 1 [ridgeline ms] 11400 - 7 j ' FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT ,~ 11400-- 7 - ! 2004.0001 11400-8 Complete rail, track and operator assembly to be mounted and tested at factory. Complete system to be assembled and ready for connection (by others). Furnish one set of press type pilot light and switches with hypalon covers for exterior and interior of each room at each door as indicated on electrical plan. Provide 48" long x 2-tube fluorescent vapor proof light fixtures, as noted on electrical plan. Low temp ballasts are required in freezer. Medium temp ballasts for dry. Lights to be shipped loose for installation by electrical contractor. See Sheet FS1.3 for light quantity and locations. Include heated vacuum vent for freezer. Install surface mounted 4-1/2" diameter dial thermometers with actuated remote bulb; one above or next to each door. Provide 3/4 inch nylon coil hangers mounted on 3" x 3"aluminum plates with nuts and retainers to support evaporator hung from ceiling panel. Provide Chase Industries, TempSentry digital alarms, one for each room. Install on exterior face of walk-in next to respective dial thermometers. Include seismic tie-down angles at interior roof and floor of both chambers. Provide two openings for the Dry Storage Room air supply and return system provided and installed by General Contractor. System shall be wall hung on outside of room west of hinged door. Coordinate all system requirements with General Contractor. Interior roof support to be supplied for dry storage room. Include matching exterior closure trim (vertical and horizontal) at CMU Service Yard wall. Walk-ins shall be installed by this manufacturer or this manufacturer's certified installer only. Item 2 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS: 3 required System A: Outdoor Freezer @ -10°F to -5°F Evaporator: Larkin MLT6-430; 43,000 BTU at -20 ° F suction temperature. include expansion valve ,drier-strainer, liquid line solenoid, room thermostat, and electric defrost system. Condensing Unit: Larkin LZT1000L6C; 36,890 BTU at +95°F ambient air temperature. Include crank case heater.. System B: Indoor Freezer @ -5°F to +0°F Evaporator: Larkin LC.E6-94; 9,400 BTU at-20°F suction temperature. Include expansion valve, drier-strainer, liquid line solenoid, room thermostat, and electric defrost system. Condensing Unit: Larkin LZT025L6C; 11,850 BTU at +95°F ambient air temperature. Include crank case heater. [ridgeline ms] 11400 - 8 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 8 i 2004.0001 11400-9 1 System C: Cooler @ +35 ° F to +40 ° F 2 3 4 5 Evaporator: Larkin LCA6-135; 13,500 BTU at +25°F suction temperature. Include expansion valve, drier-strainer, liquid line solenoid and room therm t t f , os a . ' 6 7 Condensing Unit: Larkin LST015H2C; 12,230 BTU at +g5°F ambient air Include crank case heater. temperature. '. 8 9 Each system shall incorporate the following: 10 11 Flexible vibration eliminator in suction line 12 . t 13 14 Circuit breaker, automatic starting switch, motor rotector all enclosed with interconnecting wire installed i ' s 15 n a junction box eady fo li a connecttons ' 16 Liquid line sight glass. 17 18 Liquid line dehydrator filter of ample capacity ' 19 . 20 Suction line filter of ample capacity. 21 t . 22 23 Thermal expansion valve for evaporator. 24 Solenoid valve. 25 26 27 Thermostat set to cut-in at -7°F and cut-out at -11 °F for outdoor freezer; cut in at -3°F and cut-out at -6°F for indoor freezer; cut in at +38°F and t ° 28 cu -out at +34 F for refrigerator. 29 30 Suction pressure regulator. 31 Crank case heaters. 32 33 34 Refrigerant Lines:.Hard copper type "L"with "Silfos"brazed joints. Use refrigeration service tubing. 35 36 Full charge refrigerant and oil. ' 37 38 _ 39 Refer to Architectural plans for remote condensing unit locations. 40 41 Where refrigerant suction lines are trapped, use next size smaller pipe in vertical portion of the trap than that indicat d 42 e , so as to acquire sufficient gas velocity for proper oil return. 43 44 Provide anti-sweat pipe covering 3/4" Armstrong Armaflex or equivalent for suction lines from evaporator to.condensing unit 45 . 46 47 Provide painted 1" drain tubing from evaporator to nearest indirect drain as shown on Sheets FS1.2 and FS2.2. Trap at outlet end 48 . 49 50 Provide Raychem, model H611250 heating cable with H900 power connection to wrap all drain lines running through freezers. 51 52 53 Evaporators and condensing units as shown on the Contract Documents shall be installed under the supervision of a licensed R f i ' S4 e r geration Contractor subject to review by the Consultant. [ridgeline ms] 11400 - 9 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 9 2004.0001 11400-10 Provide testing, charging, adjusting, operational testing, and cleaning of equipment and lines. Item 3 WALK-IN FREEZER SHELVING: 1 lot required InterMetro, "Metroseal III", *HO11 Super Adjustable shelving. Shelf sections shall be four tier high using individual posts with adjustable feet, top caps, and joining clamps equally spaced over 74-5/8"plated posts with bottom shelf located 8"above finished floor. Shelving shall be in sizes and configuration as shown on Sheet FS1.1. Include four model HDP56K3 heavy-duty dunnage racks. Verify room size before ordering. Item 4 LONG TERM DRY STORAGE SHELVING: 1 lot required InterMetro, Super Erecta Super Adjustable Brite *HO11 ving. Shelf sections shall be five tier high using individual posts with adjustable feet, top caps, and joining clamps equally spaced over 86" plated posts with bottom shelf located 8" above finished floor. Shelving shall be in sizes and configuration as shown on Sheet FS1.1. Include six model HDP56C heavy-duty dunnage racks. Verify room size before ordering. Item 5 HAND WASHING SINKS: 4 required. Specified by Plumbing Division. Item 6 CORNER/CHANNEL/WALL GUARDS & CAPS: 1 lot required Fabricate as detailed and construct corner, channel, wall guards and low wall caps of 14 gauge stainless steel. Install in locations shown on Sheet FS2.1. Install with stainless steel screws. Seal guards to walls and at joints as required. Item 7 STAFF LOCKERS WITH COAT RACK: 1 required Lyon, model 5990-SU in dove gray. Item 8 WALK-IN COLD STORAGE ROOMS: 2 required Imperial Manufacturing Co., modular high density urethane sandwich panel two- compartment cold storage rooms complete in configuration shown on Sheet FS2.1. Each room shall incorporate the following items: Wall, ceiling, and floor panel insulation shall be a full 4" Class I foamed in place urethane. Finished exterior height of 8'-4". Interior height of rooms to be 8'-0". [ridgeline ms] 11400 - 10 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 10 t 2004,0001 r i ~~ n 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23. 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38. 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 11400-11 Exposed exterior, closure panels, and trim strips to adjacent walls shall be 20 gauge stainless steel #304-4. Exposed interior shall be .040 stucco embossed aluminum except ceiling which shall be .040 stucco aluminum with baked-on white acrylic finish. Unexposed surfaces shall be 26 gauge galvanized steel. Include matching trim strips and removable closure panels to ceiling and walls. Install into floor depression complete with Class I insulation and vapor barrier. See Sheet FS2.3 forfloordepression location and Sheet FS3.1 fordepression details. Refer to Architectural Room Finish Schedule for wearing floor and base material inside and out by Division 9. Include one 36" x 78" interior freezer door with heater system and one 36" x 78"interior cooler door. NO WOOD CONSTRUCTION. Doors to be stainless steel inside and out with 14" x 14" insulated glass windows (heated for freezer) and 36"high 14 gauge stainless steel #304-4 kickplates on the interior and exterior of each door. Doors to be flush mount with extruded PVC perimeters and magnetic gaskets. Include Kason #944 deadbolt mortise locksets with interior safety releases and Kason #1229 chrome pull handles. Kason #1095 door closers and Kason #11248 chrome spring-assisted hinges. Hinge doors ad shown on plans. Include one 48" x 84" exterior freezer door with heater system and one 48" x 84" exterior cooler door. NO WOOD CONSTRUCTION. Doors to be stainless steel inside and out with 36"high 14 gauge stainless steel diamond tread kickplates on the interior and exterior of each door. Doors to have 20 gauge stainless steel jamb liners and magnetic gaskets. Each door to include one metal locking bar with inside release handles. Kason #1097 door closers and Kason #1248 chrome spring-assisted hinges. Hinge doors as shown on plans. Furnish one set of flush mount press type pilot light and switches with hypalon covers for exterior and interior of each room at each door as indicated on electrical plan. Provide Marco Luminaire ceiling lights as shown on Sheet FS2.4 pre-wired to junction boxes for field connections under Division 16. Include 100 watt lamps. (Coordinate concealed conduit). Include heated vacuum vent for freezer. Install surface mounted 4-1/2" diameter dial thermometers with actuated remote bulb; one above each interior door. Provide 3/4 inch nylon coil hangers mounted on 3" x 3" aluminum plates with nut and retainers to support evaporator hung from ceiling panel. Provide Chase Industries, TempSentry digital alarms, one for each room. Install on exterior face of walk-in next to respective dial thermometers. Walk-ins shall be installed by this manufacturer or this manufacturer's certified installer only. ' [ridgeline ms] 11400.- 11 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT , '~ 11400 - 11 2004.0001 11400-12 Item 9 WALK-IN FREEZER SHELVING: 1 lot required InterMetro, "Metroseal III"Super Adjustable, "'HO11 shelving. Shelf sections shall befourtier high using individual posts with adjustable feet, top caps, and joining clamps equally spaced over 74-5/8" plated posts with bottom shelf located 8"above finished floor. Shelving shall be in sizes and configuration as shown on Sheet FS2.1: Include one model HP2248PDMB dunnage rack. Verify room size before ordering. Item 10 WALK-IN COLER SHELVING: I lot required InterMetro, "Metroseal III", "HO11 Super Adjustable shelving. Shelf sections shall be four tier high using individual posts with adjustable feet, top caps, and joining clamps equally spaced over 74-5/8"plated posts with bottom shelf located 8"above finished floor. Shelving shall be in sizes and configuration as shown on Sheet FS2.1 and in the following sizes: Include two model HP2248PDMB dunnage racks. Verify room size before ordering. Item 11 .UTILITY CART: 1 required SeFvolift Eastern, model 979-2 `HO11 with neoprene rotating bumpers. Item 12 SPARE NUMBER Item 13 SPARE NUMBER Item 14 20-QUART MIXER: 1 required Hobart, model A-200 "HO11. Item 15 MIXER CART: 1 required Servolift Eastern, model 707 *HO11 with neoprene rotating bumpers. Item 16 SHEET PAN RACKS: 6 required Servolift Eastern, model RIUW64-17 *HO11. Item 17 DRY STORAGE SHELVING: 1 lot required InterMetro, Super Erecta Super Adjustable Brite "HO11 Super Adjustable shelving. Shelf sections shall be five tier high using individual posts with adjustable feet, top caps, and joining clamps equally spaced over 86" plated posts with bottom shelf located 8" above finished floor. Shelving shall be in sizes and configuration as shown on Sheet FS1.1. Include four mode{ HDP56K3 heavy-duty dunnage racks. Verify room size before ordering. [ridgeline ms] 11400 - 12 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 12 ' 2004.0001 ' 2 3 4 Item 18 CUBE ICE MACHINE & BIN: 1 required 11400-13 ' 6 7 9 ' 10 11 12 13 ' 14 15 16 17 18 ' 19 20 21 ' 22 23 24 25 ' 26 27 28 ' 29 30 31 32 ' 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 ' 40 41 42 ' 43 44 45 46 ' 47 48 49 ' S0 51 52 53 ' 54 Manitowoc, model QY-0324A "H011. Include the following: Model S-320 ice storage bin. Model. TRI-L-15N primary filter with pre-filter water filtration system. Item 19 Install assembly complete. FLOOR TROUGH: 1 required Kevry, Drain-Tech model FWT-30" long x 12" wide '`H011 with standard stainless steel subway grate. Install in floor depression to be flush with the finished floor. Verify conditions. Coordinate exact location to best serve the equipment and verify rough-in size prior to slab pour. Item 20 BLAST CHILLER: 1 required Servolift Eastern, model HCM141-50'H011. Item 21 DISPOSER: 1 required Salvajor, model 300-CA-15" *H011 with MSS-3LD-PP control. Install assembly complete in right drainboard of Item 22. Item 22 VEGETABLE PREP SINK TABLE:.1 required Universal Stainless, model 2SL18-LD630-RDB36 fully welded sink table with the following accessories: One Chicago, model CF9831 P105LC spray rinse faucet with in-line dual check valve and #613A add-on faucet. Include #903 wall bracket. Two Component Hardware Group, model DSS-8000 rotary waste assemblies with 14 gauge stainless steel lever waste brackets welded to underside of sink. Sound deaden underside of top and sink compartments. Weld-in disposer cone furnished with Item 21. 14 gauge stainless steel disposer control mounting bracket welded to underside of table. Right end splash at wall. Install assembly complete. Clip and seal to walls. Item 23 SLICER: 1 required Hobart, model 2712 '`H011. ' [ridgeiine ms] -11400 -.13 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 13 2004.0001 11400-14 Item 24 ,SLICER CART: 1 required Servolift Eastern, model 705-1 "H011 with neoprene rotating bumpers. Item 25 SPARE NUMBER Item 26 UTILITY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM: 1 required Gaylord, model DB-IM-E3/E5-HC-G-11.75 *H011 two-tower utility distribution system per Factory File #04-0210. Assembly to provide all power and utilities for Items 29, 31, 32, 33, 43, 44, and 45 including receptacles with water proof covers, quick disconnect assemblies, shut-off valves, pressure regulators, water backflow preventers, relief valves, etc., for proper operation of all equipment connected to the system. Include electrical contactors and gas shut-off for fire protection system. Include stainless steel filler panel enclosing bottoms of back to back hoods. Furnish UDS in as few sections as necessary for field assembly. Coordinate field conditions and building access to install assembly complete. Item 27 CANOPY HOOD (TYPE II): 1 required Gaylord, model VH2-W-54 *H011, 14'-0"L x 2'-6"H 18 gauge stainless steel canopy hood. The hood shall incorporate the following: Four 100 watt incandescent lights. Furnish and install lamps. Include 18 gauge stainless steel removable closure panels and trim as required to seal hood to ceiling and wall. Verify ceiling height. Submit shop drawings prior to fabrication. Model 250-LS fan and light on/off switch. Furnish loose for installation by Division 16. Check-out and start-up by factory trained personnel. Exhaust duct work and fan furnished and connected under Division 15. Item 28 SPARE NUMBER Item 29 60-GALLON TILTING KETTLE: 1 required Cleveland, model KEL-60-T *H011 with the following accessories: Double pantry faucet. Spring assisted hinged cover. 2" tangent draw-off valve. Measuring strip. [ridgeline ms] 11400 - 14 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 14 2004.0001 11400-15 ' 1 2 Kettle brush kit. 3 Food strainer s. 4 '. 5 Install assembly complete. 6 7 Item 30 FLOOR TROUGHS: 3 required ' 8 9 10 Kevry, Drain-Tech model FT-AS-30" x 24" `H011 with standard stainless steel subwa ratin 11 g y g, 12 13 Install in floor depression to be flush with the finished floor. Verify conditions. 14 15 Coordinate exact location to best serve the equipment and verify rough-in size prior to slab pour. 16 17 Item 31 40-GALLON TILTING KETTLE: 1 required 18 19 20 Cleveland, model KEL-40-T "H011 with the following accessories: 21 Double pantry faucet. ' 22 23 S 24 pring assisted hinged cover: 25 26 2" tangent draw-off valve. 27 Measuring strip. 28 ' 29 30 Food strainers. 31 Install assembly complete. 32 ' 33 Item 32 20-QUART TILTING KETTLE: 1 required 34 35 36 Cleveland, model KET-6-T "H011 with the following accessories: 37 38 Model ST-28 stainless steel equipment stand. ' 39 40 Model DPK fill faucet. 41 42 Lift-off cover. 43 Install assembly complete. ' 44 45 46 Item 33 DOUBLE STACK CONVECTION OVENS: 1 required 47 Future equipment. 48 49 Item 34 60-QUART MIXER: 1 required 50 ' 51 52 Hobart, model HL600 "H011 with deluxe accesso ry package. 53 ' 54 [ridgeline ms] 11400 - 15 _ FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT ' ~ - 11400 - 15 2004.0001 11400-16 Item 35 BAKER'S TABLE WITH SINK: 1 required Universal Stainless, model 10"-0"L-SL-SLCB-36 *HO11 with the following accessories: Model TAC-1824 integral sink at left right of table. Chicago, model CF3511 G501 LC deck mount gooseneck faucet. Component Hardware Group, model DSS=8000 rotary waste assembly with 14 gauge stainless steel lever waste brackets. Model SO-19/SO-20 full length cantilever pot rack with shelf. Install with 18 inch clear from table top. Trim and seal openings in backsplash. Install assembly complete. Clip and seal to wall. Item 36 INGREDIENT BINS: 4 required Cambro, model IB36 *HO11. Item 37 SPARE NUMBER Item 38 SPARE NUMBER Item 39 ROLL-IN RACK OVEN: 1 required Baxter, model Advantage IB *HO11. Include the following: Ansul R-102 chemical Fire Protection System with Automan Regulated Release Assembly furnished and installed by Baxter. Install in accordance with NFPA Bulletin 96, including all current amendments to protect hood duct plenum. All piping and conduit shall be run concealed in walls or above ceiling, except where exposure is necessary fur functional reasons. Exposed piping shall be chrome plated or run in stainless steel sleeves. Include reset relays and manual remote pull station. System shall connect to mechanical gas shut-off valve furnished loose by Baxter. .All connections are furnished by the Electrical Division for shut down of electric supply to equipment in the event of system activation. System control cabinet shall be installed in location shown. Provide stainless steel exposed grease tight round duct work to 4" above finished ceiling Item 40 ROLL-ItV OVEN RACKS: 3 required Baxter, model BSRSB-20 *HO11 with ceramic wheels. Verify rack guide spacing before ordering. Item 41 MOBILE PROOFING CABINET: 1 requiredc Bevles, model PICA-70-321NS-S *HO11 with perimeter bumper. [ridgeline ms] 11400 - 16 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT .11400 - 16 ' 2004.0001 2 3 4 ' 6 7 9 10 11 12 ' 13 14 15 16 ' 17 18 19 20 21 22 '~ 23 24 25 ' 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 ' 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 . 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 Item 42 CANOPY HOOD WITH FIRE PROTECTIONS SYSTEM: 1 required Gaylord, model GX2-BDL-54, 14'-0"L x 2'-6"H *HO11 18 gauge stainless steel canopy hood. The hood shall in corporate the following: Flat bottom. U.L. listed damper assembly. Four 100 watt incandescent lights. Furnish and install lamps. GX extractor removal tool. Model 250-LS fan and light on/off switch. Furnish loose for installation by Division 16. Ansul R-102 Chemical Fire Protection System with Automan Regulated Release Assembly furnished and installed by Gaylord. Install in accordance with NFPA bulletin 96, including all current amendments to protect hood and surtace protection as required. All piping and conduit shall be run concealed in walls orabove ceiling, except where exposure is necessary for functional reasons. Exposed piping shall be chrome plated or run in stainless steel sleeves. Include reset relays and manual remote pull station. System shall connect to mechanical gas shut-off valve furnished loose by Gaylord. All contactors are furnished by the Electrical Division for shut down of electric supply to all equipment in the event of system activation. System control cabinet shall be installed in location shown. Include 18 gauge stainless steel removable closure panels and trim as required to seal hood to ceiling and wall. Verify ceiling height. Submit shop drawings prior to fabrication. Exhaust and supply duct work and fans furnished and installed by Division 15. Item 43 OPEN BURNER COOK TOP: 1 required Wolf Range, model FS-2J-0-18 *HO11 with the following accessories: Stainless steel sides and bottom shelf. Cap/cover both manifold ends. Rear gas connection. • 5"diameter caster set; two with brakes. Item 44 40-GALLON TILTING SKILLET: 1 required Cleveland, model SGL-40-TR*HO11 with the following accessories: Double pantry faucet.• Pan carrier. 11400-17 Install assembly complete. [ridgeline ms] 11400 - 17 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 2004.0001 Item 45 DOUBLE STACK CONVECTION OVENS: 2 required Lang, model 2G000-SII "HO11 with 6" heavy duty caster set. Item 46 FOOD PROCESSOR: 1 required Robot Coupe, model R6N *HO11. Item 47 SUPPORT TABLE WITH SINK: 1 required Universal Stainless; model 9SL-SLSB-30 *HO11 with the following accessories: 11400-18 Model TAC-1618 integral sink at left end of table. Chicago, model CF3511 G501 LC deck mount gooseneck faucet. Component Hardware Group, model DSS-8000 rotary waste assembly with 14 gauge stainless steel lever waste brackets. Model SO-19/SO-20 full length cantilever pot rack with shelf. Install with clearance required for Item 46. Trim and seal openings in backsptash. Model TAC-2020-S stainless steel drawer assembly at right end of table. Left end/splash at wall. Install assembly complete. Clip and seal to wall. Item 48 REFRIGERATED ROLL-THRU CABINETS: 2 required Victory, model RIS-1 D-S7-PT *HO11 with the following accessories: Hinged glass door on serving side. Doors hinged as shown on Sheet FS2.1 Stainless steel case back. Item 49 HEATED ROLL-THRU CABINETS: 2 required Victory, model HIS-1 D-7-PT "HO11 with the following accessories: Hinged glass door on serving side. Doors hinged as shown on Sheet FS2.1 Stainless steel case back. Item 50 STAINLESS STEEL WALL FLASHING: 1 lot required Fabricate 20 gauge stainless steel Number4 finish wall flashing bonded to gypsum board with heat resistant mastic beginning directly above base the on wall and terminating 2" above bottom edge of canopy hoods. Flashing shall run full length and width of wall at cook line. [ridgeline ms] 11400 - 18 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 18 2004.0001 ' 2 3 4 ' 5 6 7 ' 9 10 11 12 13 14 ' 15 16 17 18 ' 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 ' 29 30 31 32 ' 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 . 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 ' 47 48 49 ' 50 51 52 53 54 11400-19 Install flashing with no exposed fasteners or screws in interlocking sections of equal lengths. Verify that surfaces are flat and smooth with a maximum variation of 1/16" in 10 feet. Item 51 SPARE NUMBER Item 52 SUPPORT COUNTER: 1. required Fabricate as detailed and construct top and backsplash of one piece all welded 14 gauge stainless steel. Reinforce underside of top and install on a cabinet base constructed of steel sheets, stainless steel where exposed. Include the following: Fabricate stainless steel overshelf of all welded 16 gauge stainless steel. Install on 14 gauge stainless steel shelf brackets. Seal to wall. Install on 14 gauge galvanized channel base. Finished base material furnished and installed under Division 9. " Item 53 REFRIGERATED SANDWICH PREP TABLE: 1 required Delfield, model 4460N-24M'HO11 with door locks and 4"and 2" stainless steel backsplash. Item 54 SUPPORT COUNTER WITH PASS.WINDOW: 1 required Fabricate as detailed and construct top, backsplash, and pass-thru window trim of one piece all welded 14 gauge stainless steel. Reinforce underside of top and install on a cabinet base constructed of steel sheets, stainless steel where exposed. Include the following: Fabricate stainless steel overshelf of all welded 16 gauge stainless steel. Install on 14 gauge stainless steel shelf brackets. Seal to wall. Stainless steel drawer assembly with pull extension slides. Install on 14 gauge galvanized channel base. Finished base material furnished and installed under Division 15. Item 55 MEXI SERVING COUNTER: 1 required Servolift Eastern, model 501-3-MOD "HO11. Refer to Factory Drawing No. 05-0014-1-REVB for all accessories. Install assembly complete. Item 56 SALAD SERVING COUNTER: 1 required Servolift Eastern, model 502-4R-CW *HO11. Refer to Factory Drawing No..05-0014-1 REVB for all accessories. Install assembly complete. [ridgeiine ms] 11400 - 19 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 19 ~ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 2004.0001 11400-20 Item 57 SANDWICH SERVING COUNTER: 1 required Servolift Eastern, model 502-4R-CW *H011. Referto FactoryDrawing No. 05-0014-1-REVB for all accessories. Install assembly complete. Item 58 PIZZA SERVING COUNTER: 1_required Servolift Eastern, model 500-3 *H011 with drop-in pizza hot plate. Referto Factory Drawing No. 05-0014-1-REVB for all accessories. Install assembly complete. Item 59 SPARE NUMBER Item 60 SANDWICH SERVING COUNTER: 1 required Servolift Eastern, model 502-4R-CW "H011. Referto Factory Drawing No. 05-0014-1 REVB for all accessories. Install assembly complete. Item 61 GRILL SERVING COUNTER: 1 required Servolift Eastern, model 501-3-MOD *H011. Referto Factory Drawing Nol 05-0014-1 REVB for all accessories. Install assembly complete. Item 62 SPARE NUMBER Item 63 SPARE NUMBER Item 64 REFRIGERATED VARIETY BARS: 2 required Servolift Eastern, model 502-4R-CW'H011. Referto Factory Drawing Nol 05-0014-1 REVB for all accessories. Install assembly complete. Item 65 MOBILE MILK COOLERS: 2 required\ Beverage-Aire, model ST34N '`H011 with stainless steel finish. Item 66 PORTABLE TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEM: 1 lot required Brass Smith, Beltway Queing System, model 930/26/26-96 '`H011 consisting of the following Two posts in satin stainless steel finish including head and base. Black belts. Install assembly complete in configuration shown on Sheet FS2.1. [ridgeline ms] 11400 - 20 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 20 2004.0001 11400-21 1 Item 67 MOBILE CASHIER COUNTERS: 2 required 2 3 4 Servolift Eastern, model 503-1 RL "HO11. Refer to Refer to•Factory Drawing Nol 05-0014-1 REVB for all accessories 5 . 6 ~ Install assembly complete. 7 8 Item 68 POINT OF SALE SYSTEM: 1 required 9 10 Owner furnished and installed 11 . '' 12 Item 69 MOBILE KIOSK COUNTERS: 2 required 13 14 15 Cambro, model CVC724 "HO11 with black umbrella. ' 16 Verify locations in-Commons. 17 18 Item 70 BOOSTER HEATER:.1 required 19 ' 20 21 Hatco, model S-24 *HO11 with the following accessories: 22 23 Adjustable stainless steel leg set. 24 Shock absorber 25 . 26 Item 71 CLEAN DISHTABLE: 1 required 27 28 29 Fabricate as detailed and construct top and backsplash of one piece all welded 14 gauge stainless steel. Reinforce underside of top with stainl t ' 30 31 ess s eel enclosed hat sections. Sound deaden underside of top and install on a stainless steel leg stand consistin of ci l t 32 g rcu gusse ar s, tubular legs, and adjustable bullet feet. Reinforce legs with a 16 gauge stainless steel undershelf as shown 33 . 34 35 Install assembly complete. Clip and seal to wall. 36 Item 72 VAPOR EXHAUST DUCTS: 2 required 37. ~ 38 39 40 Fabricate two 18 gauge stainless steel steam tight exhaust ducts as detailed and connect to stainless steel vent stacks furnished with Warewasher Item 73 E t " 41 , . x end each duct 4 above finished ceiling and trim with stainless steel at ceilin g penetrations. Seal all gaps at trim. 42 43 Exhaust fan furnished and installed under Division 15. ' 44 Item 73 WAREWASHER: 1 required 45 ' 46 47 Meiko, model K-44E *HO11 for left to right operation. Include the following: 48 49 Electric tank heat. ' 50 51 Table limit switch. 52 53 .Vent cowl collars with adjustable bumpers. 54 ~ 20" vertical clearance through machine. [ridgeline ms) 11400 - 29 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 21 2004.0001 11400-22 1 Install assembly complete. 2 3 Item 74 DISPOSER: 1 required 4 5 Salvajor, model 300-S.A-6-1/2-MSS-3LD *HO11. 6 7 ~ Install assembly complete in sink of Item 75. 8 9 Item 75 SOILED DISHTABLE WITH POTWASHING SINKS: 1 required 10 11 Fabricate as detailed and construct top and back/end splashes of one piece all welded 14 12 gauge stainless steel. Include all welded integral stainless steel sinks and install 6-1/2" sink 13 adapterflange furnished with Disposer, Item 74 in sink as shown. Include 14 gauge stainless 14 steel removable rack guides held in place with stainless steel pins atpre-rinse sink. Reinforce 15 underside of top with enclosed stainless steel hat sections. Sound deaden underside of top 16 and mount on a stainless steel leg stand consisting of circular gussets, tubular legs, and 17 adjustable bullet feet. Reinforce legs with 16 .gauge stainless steel shelf and leg braces as 18 shown. Soiled Dishtable shall incorporate the following: 19 20 Fabricate a 16 gauge stainless steel mounting plate for the disposer switch welded to 21 the underside of table. 22 23 One Chicago, model CF9831 P105LC spray rinse faucet with 613A Adapta faucet. 24 Include 903M wall bracket: Install at disposer sink. 25 26 Three Component Hardware Group, model DSS-8000 rotary waste assemblies with 27 14 gauge stainless steel lever waste brackets. 28 . 29 Two Chicago, model CF2331 H901 LC splash mount faucets at triple sinks. 30 31 Install assembly complete. Clip and seal to walls. 32 33 Item 76 MOBILE WASTE RECEPTACLES: 2 required 34 35 Rubbermaid, model 2634 with matching lid. 36 37 Item 77 JANITOR SINK: 1 required 38 39 Specified by Division 15. 40 41 Item 78 MOBILE POT AND PAN SHELVING: 2 required 42 , 43 Intermetro, model X5566GX2 open grid stem caster 4-tier cart. 44 45 Item 79 AMBIENT TRANSPORTATION CARTS: 5 required 46 47. Existing equipment. 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 [ridgeline ms] 11400 - 22 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 22 ~~ 1 2 3 4 ', 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 ~' 13 14 ' 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 ' 36 37 38 ' 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 2004.0001 PART 3 EXECUTION PREPARATION: 11400-23 Field Measurements: verify drawings dimensions by taking field measurement; proper fit and attachment of all equipment is required. If necessary, fabricate equipment in manner to pass through finished door openings. Make arrangements for early installation of equipment larger than door openings. Verify finished ceiling height so that hoods area minimum of 6'-6" off of finished floor. INSTALLATION: General: Install equipment as shown. Make equipment conform where abutting curved or irregularly shaped angles and where projecting corners of walls occur. Where more than one piece of equipment is assembled in a group, complete group as a whole, with necessary filler or connecting pieces as may be required to make a complete, sanitary, and verminproof group. Where assembled equipment is too large for access into assigned area, assemble within area. Ventilating Hoods: Install hoods under supervision of a direct manufacturer's engineer. Secure legs of work tables, where specified, to floor with 1/2" diameter stainless steel rods, 5"long. Drill floor 4" deep and set rods with Por-Rok quick curing grout in oversized holes. Drill 1/2" hole in each foot of table leg to receive pin. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: General: Upon completion of work, submit a written statement indicating installation as per Contract Documents, proper and adequate for intended use and conforming to requirements of governing agencies and NSF. Statement signed by installer and manufacturer as applicable. Testing: Factory representative shall start up and test equipment after installation. Testing shall be completed at least two weeks prior to Owner instruction. Where test indicate defects, correct such defects and re-test to assure proper operation. INSTRUCTION: Factory representative shall instruct Owner's operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of equipment. Instructor shall be available during work hours convenient to the Owner after Substantial Completion. Allow a minimum of three (3) consecutive days of instruction. MAINTENANCE: General: Provide initial start-up and service fora period of 12 months after Substantial Completion. Service includes replacement of parts found defective during this period. Emergency Service:- Maintain in immediate vicinity a qualified source available to Owner on a 24 hour emergency basis fora period of 90 days after Substantial Completion. Service available to Owner at no cost, unless such service is required due to misuse of equipment. ' [ridgeline ms] 11400 - 23 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 23 2004.0001 CLEANING: 11400-24 At Substantial Completion, thoroughly clean equipment including all stains, paint spots, protective wrappings and coating tape, grease, oil, cementitious material, dust, and polishing compounds. Make ready for use by sanitizing equipment.. Follow Health Department guide lines using a cleaning solution containing at least 50 parts per million of available chlorine as hypochlorite at a temperature of at least 75° Fahrenheit. END OF SECTION [ridgeline ms] 11400 - 24 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 24 ii ' SECTION 11450 -RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 2 ' 3 4 ` RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 7 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. ' 9 10 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ~ 11 , 12 Extent of residential equipment required is indicated on drawings and in schedules 13 . ~ 14 T es of residential equipment required include the following: ' 15 16 Electric Range (30" freestanding) (N.I.C.) 17 1 Electric Range (30" slide=in) (N.I.C.) 8 Range Hoods 19 Refrigerator/Freezer (N.I.C.) 20 Dishwasher 21 Microwave Oven (Spacesaver) 22 23 Plumbing requirements are specified in Division 15. 24 25 Electrical services and .connections are specified in Division 16. 26 27 28 SUBMITTALS ' ' 29 30 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of residential 31 32 equipment, including data indicating compliance with requirements. Submit operating and .maintenance instructions f h it or eac em of residential equipment. 33 34 ' 35 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 36 37 Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's undamaged protective containers after spaces to receive 38 , them have been fully enclosed. 39 40 41 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 42 ' 43 Specified Product Warranties:.Submit manufacturer's standard written warranty for each item of residential 44 equipment. 45 46 ' 47 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 48 49 50 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION 51 52 Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard colors as shown or scheduled 'll~ 53 . ' ~' [ridgeline mss 11450 - 1 RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT 11450 - 1 Electric Ranges: 30 Inch Freestanding Tvpe: N.I.C. Electric Ranges: 30" Slide-In Tvpe: N.I.C. Range Hoods: Ventilating Type: 30"hood for mounting belowwall cabinets, with 2-speed fan, permanentwashable filter, built-in lighting, baked-on white enamel finish, rated at 180 cfm, minimum. 7"'~ duct. See Division 15000 for ductwork and roof cap. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or approved: General Electric JV 327 X Refrigerator/Freezer: Top-Freezer Type: N.I.C. Dishwasher: Built-in Tvpe: Undercounter automatic unit sized to replace 24" base cabinet. Turn-to-Start type control indicator. Power scrub wash system with food disposer. 5-cycle wash. Heated dry on/off. High temp wash. PermaTuf interior with ten-year warranty. Sound insulate tub and' motor compartment. 120V, 60 Hz, 6.2 amps. Color to be white. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or approved: General Electric Model GSD 3135 FWW Microwave Oven: 30" microwave for mounting over electric range..1.8 cu. ft. capacity; 1000 watts; Smart Control System; Convenience Controls; Express Cook; Cook Time I & II; 10 power levels; removable cooking rack; turntable on/off; 300 CFM exhaust fan; 29-7/8" W x 16-15/32" H x 15-1/16" D, 120V, 15 amps. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or approved: General Electric Model JVM 1840 WD PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Built-In Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinetry or countertops and concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper operation of equipment. Utilities: Refer to Division 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements. [ridgeline ms] 11450 - 2 RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT 11450 - 2 . 1 1 ADJUST AND CLEAN ' 2 3 4 Testino: Test each item of residential equipment to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments ,.1 5 6 . Accessories; Verify that accessory items required have been furnished. 7 8 Cleaning: Remove packing material from residential equipment items and leave units in clean condition for operation. ready 9 , 10 ' 11 END OF SECTION 11450 1 1 1 , ~ _ ' [ridgeline mss 11450 - 3 RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT 11450 - 3 SECTION 11480 -RECREATION EQUIPMENT ' 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 2 ' 3 4 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 5 . 6 7 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ' 8 9 10 Extent of athletic equipment required is indicated in this section and shown on drawin gs. ' 11 12 T es of athletic equipment required include the following: 13 Basketball Equipment 14 Wainscot Wall Padding ' 15 Gym Divider Curtain 16 Volleyball (Badminton) Inserts 17 .Mat Mover ' 18 19 20 Electrical services and connections are specified in Division 16. ' 21 22 SUBMITTALS 23 24 25 Product Data; Submit manufacturer's specification and installation instructions for each type of athletic equipment. Submit operating and maintenance instr ti 26 uc ons for each item of athletic equipment. 27 28 Shop Drawinos: Submit for approval in accordance with the "Supplementary General Conditions" 29 . 30 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 31 ' 32 33 Store Equipment inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather sunlight, surtace contamination direct c i 34 , , orros on, construction traffic and other causes. 35 ' 36 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 37 38 39 Specified Product Warranties: Submit manufacturer's standard written warranty for each item of residential equipment. 40 41 42 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 43 44 45 BASKETBALL EQUIPMENT 46 ' 47 48 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering roducts whi 'may be incorporated in the work include the following or approved: p ch 49 50 Porter Equipment Co. 51 ADP Inc. 52 Jaypro 53 ' S4 ' [ridgeline ms) 11480 - 1 RECREATION EQUIPMENT .11480 - 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Backboard, Goal, and Support: ROOM WALL QTY. TYPE BACKBOARD PADDING GOAL SUPPORT Side Fold** 222 N 1 RECT. Gv+ss 00208-000 00227-000 00245-500 Model 220 222 E 2 RECT. Wooo 00228-300 00229-000 00223-300 Side Fold"" Model 220 222 S 1 RECT. GLASS 00208-000 00227-000 00245-500 Side Fold"* Model 220 Side Fold* 222 W 2 RECT. WOOD 00228-300 00229-000 00223-300 Model 955 302 N 1 RECT. GLASS 00208-000 00227-000 00245-500 Side Fold** Model 220 Side Fold' 302 W 3 RECT. WOOD 00228-300 00229-000 00223-300 Model 220 302 S 1 RECT. Gwss 00208-000 00227-000 00245-500 Side Fold** Model 220 The numbers used are from Porter Athletic Equipment and are used only to establish standard of design and quality of materials and are not intended to preclude the use of any other approved manufacturer's products. * Power hoist: Installation: Install backstops, backstop safety devices, and power hoist complete in place in locations shown, plumb and level, with goal at official height. Installation shall be rigid, free of vibration and backboard chatter. Power Hoist (One Ton Capacityl: Provide Cassidy Mfg. Co. Model #2050 Electric Winch. Motor'/2 hp, single phase, 115 V capacitor start, instant reversing. Limit switches internally wired with a magnetic reversing contactor. Backboard Supplier -Shall furnish motor, gearbox, limit switches, reversing contactor, cable and miscellaneous operating mechanism. Electrical Subcontractor -Shall furnish all wiring conduit, boxes and connections for primary wiring and runs between hoist,unit and remote control station. Control Station: Double pole/double throw key switch keyed into building system. Constant pressure. Furnished by equipment manufacturer. Backstop Safety Device: Provide AUT-O-LOC Safety Belt as.manufactured by LynRus Corp. on all front or rear folding backstops. *'` Support Adjustment: Provide telescopic brace for operation from floor. [ridgeline ms] 11480 - 2 RECREATION EQUIPMENT 11480 - 2 1 WAINSCOT WALL PADDING 2 3 2 feet x 6 feet x 2 inch panels constructed of virgin urethane foam bonded to 3/8 inch (AC) thick plywood. 4 Foam is covered with 14 oz. Pro-Tec vinyl material which is mildew, rot and perspiration-proof. It is acid and 5 alkali resistant and has a Class III flame retardant. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full 6 color line. ' 7 8 Approval of manufacturers shall not only require their compliance with requirements but shall also be 9 contingent upon Architect's approval of available colors. 10 11 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which 12 may be incorporated in the work include the following or approved: 13 14 Jaypro ` 1 15 Pace 16 Porter 17 18 ' '. 19 GYM DIVIDER CURTAIN 20 21 Provide and install motorized gym divider curtain by "Porter Athletic Equipment No. 00670-000 Roll Fold 22 Curtain', 'Stagecraft Industries Fold Up Curtain", or "ADP Roll-Fold Curtain", or approved. Lower 10 feet 23 to be 18 oz. per sq. ft. solid vinyl, polyester reinforced. Upper net section shall be a polyester type interlocking 24 grid weave coated with polyvinyl chloride with an approximate 45% to 50% open area. Weight to be 6 oz. per ' 25 sq. yd. Lower part to be treated with antibacterial, fungi-resistant and flame retardant chemicals. Upper with 26 flame retardant chemical. Colors as selected by Architect. Include electric motor and all related electrical 27 devices and hook-ups. Control station shall be key-operated, constant pressure switch, which is to be keyed 28 into building system. Coordinate with Section 08700 -Finish Hardware for cylinder. 29 30 Divider curtain to mount directly to underside of glu-lam beam. Lag supports into glu-lam. Supports spaced 31 per manufacturer's recommendation. ' 32 . 33 Motor and head block assembly to mount where shown on Electrical Drawings. 34 ' 35 36 VOLLEYBALL (BADMINTON) INSERTS 37 38 Material: Furnish 3-1/2 inch diameter floor sleeves with cover plates. 39 40 Installation: Install complete with all miscellaneous items in strict accordance with manufacturer's written 41 instructions and as detailed. Take care to insure that concrete footing is poured and that perimeter mounting 42 collar and cover is flush mounted into wood floor system. 43 44 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be 45 incorporated in the work include the following or approved: ' 46 47 Porter Athletic Equipment; #872-200" sleeve with brass cover plate 48 49 Jaypro; "PVB-505" sleeve with bronze alloy cover plate ' 50 51 52 ' [ridgeiine ms) 91480 - 3 RECREATION EQUIPMENT 19480 - 3 MAT MOVER Provide mat mover as manufactured by Porter, Model 91102-200 or approved (1-206/592-0572). Shall include control enclosure, hanger rods, twin hoist units, three-piece load bar and standard vinyl fabric sling and control switches. Include all required miscellaneous brackets, hardware, etc. for a complete operational mat mover. Power requirements are 460 V, 3 phase. Two motors 1.5 HP each. Electrician shall provide all conduit, boxes and wire. General.ContractorshaIl provide miscellaneous structural members for mounting. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION General: As indicated with equipment listed in PART 2 - PRODUCTS or follow the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper operation of equipment. Utilities: Refer to Division 16 for electrical requirements. ADJUST AND CLEAN Testin :Test each item of operable equipment to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. Accessories: Verify that accessory items required have been furnished. Cleaning: Leave all athletic equipment in clean condition, ready for operation. END OF SECTION 11480 [ridgeline ms] 11480 - 4 RECREATION EQUIPMENT 11480 - 4 SE CTION 11500 - I NDUSTR/AL SAFETY ' 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 2 - 3 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS S 6 7 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification secti l 8 ons, app y to work of this section. 9 10 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ' 11 12 Includes steel roof top tie-down for worker fall protection. 13 14 Type: CB Raised Anchor (CB-12) 15 Ridge-It (Ridg-1) ' 16 17 See Roof Plan for locations. 18 19 ' 20 RELATED SECTIONS 21 ' 22 23 The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 24 25 Division 1 -General Requirements. 26 27 _Division 6 Section "Rough Caroentrv." 28 Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim " 29 . 30 31 REFERENCES AND DEFINITIONS 32 33 34 WAC296-155-2401 thru-25, Part C-1, Fall Restraintand Fall Arrest (WISHA), ANSI A10.14, 1991 OSHA 1926, 104 (B) and 1926 sub art M 11 25 86 35 p ( - - ). 36 ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Welded and Seamless 37 38 . ASTM A570 Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets and Strip Structural Quality 39 , . 40' 41 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ' 42 ~, 43 44 Design Requirements: Provide fall arrest for 1 (one) person when used in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and specifications. ' 45 ~ - 46 47 The steel tie-down shall be designed to be a permanent fixture attached to the roof,structure. The system shall allow any workman to safely perform any task needed h ' 48 49 , suc as roof covering application, roof maintenance, or any other roof top work. 50 51 Contractor shall verify compatibility of other safety components to assure their compliance with all current local, state, and federal safety STANDARDS re i 52 qu rements, (including WISHA). S3 54 - . SUBMITTALS 55 ' ' S6 57 Product.Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, and material description. Submit test reports. ' [yjnsi 11500-1 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY 11500-1 Shop DraWInQS: Show layout, details, and anchorage. Submit engineering calculations. Submit fasteners and fastener test data. PART 2 -PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, including but not limited to WISHA, OSHA, ANSI fall arrest and fall restraint, anchor point standards, provide products of one of the following: GUARDIAN FALL PROTECTION, INC. 4050 Auburn Way N. Suite 4 Auburn, WA 98373 Phone: (253) 854-5877 Fax: (253) 854-5980 CONTACT: "The Fall Guy" Phone: (253) 891-3983 Fax: (253) 891-4297 E-mail: thefallguy@foxinternet.net MATERIALS CB Raised Anchor: Steel Upright: ASTM A53; 2-1/2" I.D., Schedule 80 Steel Pipe. Steel Eyelet (D-Ring): ASTM F-887-84; Drop Forged, 5000 lbs. Proof load, 3/8" x 2" Steel. Steel Base Plate: ASTM A 570, 1/4", Hot-Rolled Steel. Ridge-It: Steel Strap: ASTM B-504 Stainless Steel. Steel Eyelet (D-Ring): ASTM F-887-84; Drop Forged, 5000 lbs. Proof load; 3/8" x 2" Steel. Accessories: Fasteners by Illinois Tool Works, Inc. (itw) BUILDEX, RAWL, by Rawl Plug Co., or approved equal. Provide anchors tested for substrate and structure assembly. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION Must be installed by manufacturer certified installer. Inspection: Examine framing and roof.surface for adequacy and compliance with structural requirements of this system design. Notify Architect/Engineer of any defects or improper coordination prior to commencing work. Commencing work constitutes acceptance of Substrate. Anchorage: Secure the CB Raised Anchor and Ridge-It as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 11500 ~yins~ 11500-2 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY. 11500-2 . 1 1 SECTION - 11995 - D/VISION 11-COMMISSIONING ` 2 ~ 3 4 PART1 GENERAL 5 6 1.1 DESCRIPTION 7 8' 9 A. The purpose of this section is to describe the commissioning process specific for: ' 10 ^ Food Services 11 ^ Fume Hood 12 ^ Other Specialties 13 14 1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES 15 16 17 A. General Responsibilities: The Contractor's commissioning responsibilities applicable to each of th 18 e site improvements, chain link fencing and gates, landscaping and athletic fields, underground sprinkler system, and audio/visual contractors are as follows: 19 ' 20 21 1. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, commissioning documentatio O&M d 22 n, ata and training. . ' 23 24 2. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other meetings necessary to facilitate the Commissioning process. 25 26 27 3. Contractors shall assist in clarifying the installation, operation, maintenance, and control of 28 commissioned equipment if requested by the Commissioning Authority. 29, 1.3 COORDINATION 30 31 32 A. Refer to Section 01810 for a listing of all sections where commissioning requirements are found , for systems to be commissioned and for functional testing requirements 33 . 1 34 35 PART2-PRODUCTS _ 36 37 Not Used 38 ' 39 40 PART 3 -EXECUTION 41 42 3.1 SUBMITTALS 43 44 45 A. General Submittals: Contractor shall provide to the Commissioning Authority, through established 46 channels, normal cut sheets and shop drawing submittals for all commissioned equipment. 47 48 B. Installation Checklists: The Contractor shall complete the checklist(s) provided with this Section. 49 50 1. The completion of these checklists does not limit the Contractor's responsibilities for quality 51 control and scheduling as indicated elsewhere in the documents, nor does this checklist include all submittal inspection or qualit assura i m 52 , , y nce requ re ents for the work of this Section. 53 40NS~RUCTION SERVICES GROUP S~ialiS~t in ScLaal fjuildin~g5 [ridgeline ms] 11995 -1 DIVISION 11 COMMISSIONING 11995-1 ~l C. Functional Performance Testing: The Contractor shall complete the tests indicated in this Section 2 with the consultant/AHJ present. 3 4 A. Food Services: Testing of the kitchen equipment will be done prior to training and with the 5 Food Services consultant present. 6 7 a. Grease Hood: The Kitchen grease hood will be tested with the fire alarm and 8 _ suppression. system and can run concurrent with the Fire Marshall's test if proper 9 notification is given to the Architect, C©mmissioning Authority, and Owner's 10 Representative. 11 12 b. Refrigeration: Operate refrigeration equipment over a continuous 5=day (120-hour) 13 period and test for full range of functions. Include Kitchen refrigeration testing on the 14 schedule for Functional Performance Tests. 15 16 D. Trainin :The Owner personnel shall be trained on procedures related to the following: 17' 18 ~ ^ Food Service Equipment .. 19 ^ Grease Hood 20 ^ Refrigeration equipment 21 22 3.2 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION 23 24 A. Obtain and review design documents for overall design intent and the overall required system 25 configurations. 26 27 B. Obtain and review shop drawings and submittals for installation criteria and the required 28 construction details, as they support and further define the systems features. 29 30 C. The Contractor shall make general inspections at the j.ob site and shall review the above for 31 configuration, quality of construction, adherence to design requirements, and the conformance 32 with shop drawings and submittal information. 33 34 35 END OF SECTION 11995 ..a'{'F. I CONSTRUCTION SERYICES GROUP SpwialiSh in Sclwol rSuilding5 [ridgeline ms] 11995 -2 DIVISION 11 COMMISSIONING 11995-2 SECTION 12345 -STOCK FACTORY-BUILT CASEWORK 1 PART1-GENERAL ~~ ~ 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5 6 Drawings and general provisions of Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisio '~ 7 8 , n 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 9 10 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 11 - 12 Extent of casework and fixtures is shown on drawings. 13 '~ 14 15 Work includes the fabrication and installation ofstandard components of base cabinets, wall cabinets, storage cabinets, tables, shelf units, and other units as indicated. 16 17 Provide miscellaneous plastic laminate fabrications as shown on drawings, scheduled, or specified. 18 ' 19 Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section. 20 21 Division 10 Section "Miscellaneous Specialties" for Wenger Storage Cabinets. ' 22 23 Division 15 Mechanical and Division 16 Electrical for rough-in of, furnishin and installation of and 9 , 24 ,connections to, mechanical. and electrical fixtures and fittings to be built into casework unless such 25 items are noted, specified, or scheduled to be furnished and/or installed under this section. 26 27 28 WORK BY OTHERS ' 29 30 Rough-in for, furnishing and installation of, and connections to, mechanical and electrical fixtures and fittings 31 to be built into casework unless such items are noted, specified, or scheduled to be furnished and/or installed 32 under this Section. t 33 34 35 36 QUALITY ASSURANCE 37 Single Source Responsibility: Provide all casework- as manufactured by same company for single 38 responsibility. 39 40 Manufacturer:. Minimum of 5 years experience in providing manufactured casework systems for similar types 41 of projects, produce evidence of financial stability, bonding capacity, and adequate facilities and personnel 42 required to perform on this project. 43 44 Catalog Standards: Manufacturer's catalog numbers may be shown on drawings for convenience in 45 identifying certain cabinetwork. Unless modified by notation on drawings or otherwise specified, catalog 46 description for indicated number constitutes requirements for each such cabinet. Letter "M" after number 47 ~o indicates modification. 49 The use of catalog numbers, and specific requirements set forth in drawings and specifications, are not 50 intended to preclude the use of any other acceptable manufacturer's product or procedures which may be 51 equivalent, but are given for purpose of establishing standard of design and quality for materials, construction 52 and workmanship. 53 54 [ridgeline ms] 12345-1 STOCK FACTORY-BUILT CASEWORK 12345-1 SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each product and process specified as work of this section and incorporated into items of fabrication, finish, and installation. Samples: Submit 6 inch x 6 inch samples of specified finishes, including top material. Architect will review samples for color, texture, and pattern only. Submit chips of plastic laminates for casework and other miscellaneous laminates of each specific manufacturer, color, and texture within this section. Compliancewith other specified requirements is exclusive responsibility of Contractor. Submit one full-size sample of finished base cabinet unit complete with hardware, doors and drawers. Acceptable sample unitswill be used forcomparison inspections at project. Unless otherwise directed, acceptable sample units may be incorporated in work. Notify Architect of their exact locations. If not incorporated in work, retain acceptable sample units in building until completion of work and remove sample units from premises when directed by Architect. Shop Drawings: Casework manufacturer shall submit shop drawings for casework, and miscellaneous plastic laminate fabrication work, showing plans, elevations, ends, cross-sections, service run spaces and locations of service fixtures. Show details and location of anchorages and fitting to floors, walls, and base. Include layout of units with relation to surrounding walls, doors, windows, and other building components. Drawings sha-I be done at appropriate architectural scale. Coordinate with the separate mechanical and electrical sub-contractors for location, number, size and shape of cutouts for mechanical and electrical fixtures and fittings installed under separate contracts. Coordinate with Contractor for location of backing between studs in walls required for casework installation and anchorage. Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated or exposed to view. PRODUCT HANDLING Deliver casework only afterwet operations in building are completed. Store completed casework in a ventilated place, protected from the weather, with relative humidity therein of 50% or less at 70 deg. F (22 deg. C). Protect finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation. Keep covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering. JOB CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Do not install casework until permanent HVAC systems are operating and temperature and humidity have been stabilized for at least 1, week. Manufacturer/Supplier shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for architectural casework installation areas. After installation, control temperature and humidity to maintain relative humidity between 25 percent and 55 percent. Conditions: Do not install casework until interior concrete work, masonry, plastering and other wet operations are complete. [ridgeline ms] 12345-2 -STOCK FACTORY-BUILT CASEWORK 12345-2 1 WARRANTY 2 3 4 Lifetime Guarantee and Limited Warranty to the original owner against defective material and fabrication for ' ~ 5 as long as they own the product. This is a warranty of replacement and repair only, casework manufacturer will correct defects in material and/or fabrication ith t h 6 w ou c arge. 7 8 PART 2 -PRODUCTS ' 9 , 10 ~ 11 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ' 12 13 14 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or approved: ', 15 Lemon . 16 Pacific Cabinets, Inc. 17 TMI Systems 18 Westmark ' 19 20 21 CASEWORK/MATERIALS/COMPONENTS ' 22 23 24 General: Fabricate all casework units complete in place, stations and mobile t detailed specifications issued by Westmark Produ t I l ~ 25 c s, nc., Series 00 complete with all f tt ngs, acce so iese and hardware described therein, along with the specific requirements as set forth in this s ecificati i 26 p on sect on. 27 28 Casework I.D. Numbering On Drawinos: Westmark Products catalog numbers are used to identify the individual casework units as shown on the drawin 29 gs. 30 Core Materials: 31_ 32 33 Particleboard up to 7/8 inch thick: Industrial Grade average 47-pound density particleboard, ANSI A 208 1-1999 M-3 34 . , . 35 36 MR Moisture Resistant Particleboard: Average 47-pound density particleboard ANSI A208 1 1-1999 , . , M-3. 37 38 39 Medium Density Fiberboard 1/4 inch thick: Average 54-pound density grade, ANSI A 208.2. 40 41 Medium Density Fiberboard 3/4 inch thick: Average 48-pound density grade, ANSI A 208.2. 42 Plastic Laminates: 43 ' 44 High-pressure plastic laminate VGS (.028), NEMA Test LD 3-1995 45 . . 46 Chemical-Resistant Plastic Laminate: NEMA Test LD 3-1995. (.036") 47 48 49 Laminate Color Selection: Maximum 1 color per unit face and 5 colors per project. (See Color Selection in PART 3 -EXECUTION.) 50 51 Edging Materials: 52 53 3mm PVC banding, machine profiled to 1/8 inch radius S4 . 55 Glass: 56 57 58 Wall Unit Full Sliding Glass Doors: 1/4 inch thick laminated safety glass. 1 [ridgeline ms] 12345-3 -STOCK FACTORY-BUILT CASEWORK _ 12345-3 Glass Insert Doors, Hinged or Sliding Tall or Base Cabinets: 1/4 inch thick laminate safety glass. Sliding doors mounted in aluminum track. Trim Glass Inserts: Provide extruded rigid PVC channel and self-locking insert retainer strip to hold and trim glass inserts in framed doors. Countertops: Plastic Laminate Countertops: Core: Manufacturer has choice of two following options: Option 1: 3/4 inch thick. Medium Density Fiberboard (Medite II)Product Class MD Option 2: 3/4 inch thick particleboard. 3/4 inch touch sanded Exterior AC Grade plywood. (Full width of sink cabinet or built-in dishwasher) Surface: HGS high-pressure decorative laminate with balanced backer sheeting. Edges Including Applied Backsplash: Self-edge Plastic Laminate Face and Top: HGS plastic laminate bonded to face and core. Front edges are the same countertop laminate applied before the top surface laminate is applied. 3mm PVC: Exposed edges and corners machine profiled tot/8 inch radius. Edges are machine applied with moisture curing polyurethane (PUR) for fast setting, high strength adhesion. Fully Postformed Countertops:. Postforming grade laminate (HGP 0.042").is applied to particleboard and/or plywood substrate. Backsplash shall be integrally coved to work surface deck. Front edge shall be rolled with aminimum'/z inch radius. Top edge of Backsplash shall be applied self-edge. Acid-Resistant Plastic Laminate Tops: Provide either high pressure plastic laminate "Chemguard by Pionite" or "Chemsurf by Wilsonart" or approved in the following rooms: 619, 508 and 419. Backsplash and tops of same material at all countertops. Shelving with Earthquake Lip: In Science Classrooms, apply on outer face of shelving a 3mm PVC banding material of height required to provide 'h inch high lip. above top of shelf and also align flush with bottom. Application of banding by hot melt gluing method. Shelves Standards and Brackets: Provide surface mounted or approved mounting standards, brackets and shelves. All library shelving shall be full depth of casework. Electric Cord Drops: Provide 1-'/2 inches dia. holes with flanged plastic linerin countertops where indicated on Drawings. Wire Manager: Provide "J" shaped Model #WM2 as manufactured from a pliable plastic by Dough-Mockett Co. (1-800/523-1269) or approved. Overall dimensions of 2-3/8" high x 1" depth x 12' maximum length. Install with as few joints as possible. Color to be light grey. Application to casework by double sided tape as recommended by wire manager manufacturer. Retractable Computer Keyboard: Provide fully articulated keyboard arm No. 6170 and keyboard shelf No. 6205 D, both as manufactured by Waterloo and distributed by E.B. Bradley Co. (1-206-767-3540). (ridgeline ms] 12345-4 STOCK FACTORY-BUILT CASEWORK 12345-4 1 Locks: Provide the following locks where shown or called for, keyed and master keyed as directed by Owner 2 through Architect. Include nylon spacers to align face of lock flush with face of door or drawer. 3 ' 4 Drawer Locks: National Lock 8179-26D 5-Pin Tumbler 5 Olympus Lock 200 DW 5-Pin Tumbler 6 7 Door Locks: National Lock 8173-26D 5-Pin Tumbler 8 Olympus Lock 100 DR 5-Pin Tumbler 1• 9 10 Wardrobe Locks: Provide Best Locks # 5L or Olympus #721 with #137A core where locks are shown 11 or called for, cored to match building system. Key to match room door lock or as directed by Owner '~ 12 through Architect. Cores to be furnished by Section 08700-Finish Hardware '~ 15 FABRICATION 16 Fabricate casework countertops and related products to dimensions, profiles, and details shown. Cabinet Body Construction: 21 Tops and bottoms are glued and doweled to cabinet sides and internal cabinet components such as 22 fixed horizontals, rails and verticals. Minimum 6 dowels each joint for 24 inch deep cabinets and a 23 minimum of 4 dowels each joint for 12 inch deep cabinets. 24 ' 25 Tops, bottoms and sides of all cabinets are particleboard core.- 26 27 Cabinet Backs: 1/4 inch thick prefinished medium density fiberboard. Wall and tall cabinets are 28 provided with a 1 inch x 1-314 inch PVC mounting strip used to secure the cabinet to the wall. 29 30 Exposed back on fixed or movable cabinets: 3/4 inch thick particleboard with the exterior 31 surface finished in VGS laminate as selected. ' 33 Cabinet bases shall consist of 3/4-inch exterior grade plywood stringers front and back.and sleepers 34 in-between at 24 inches o.c. Bases shall be leveled and anchored to floor in continuous lengths to 35 ensure straight, level and true lines of casework. ' 36 37 Base units, except sink base units: Full sub-top. Sink base units are provided with open top, a 38 welded steel/epoxy painted sink rail full width at top front edge concealed behind face rail/doors 39 40 . Side panels and vertical dividers shall receive adj t bl h lf h d us a e s e ar ware at 32mm line boring centers. 41 Mount door hinges, drawer slides and pull-out shelves in the line boring for consistent alignment. 42 ' 43 Exposed -and semi exposed edges. 44 45 Edging: 1 mm PVC. 46 ' 47 ~ Adjustable Shelf.Core: 3/4 inch thick particleboard up to 30 inches wide, 1 inch thick particleboard 48 over 30 inches wide. 49 • 50 Front Edge: 1 mm PVC. 51 , 52 Interior Finish, Units with Open Interiors: 53 54 Top, bottom, sides, horizontal and vertical members, and adjustable shelving faces with 55 thermally fused melamine laminate with matching prefinished back. 56 ' S7 [ridgeline ms] 12345-5 STOCK FACTORY-BUILT CASEWORK 12345-5 Interior Finish. Units with Closed Interiors: Top, bottom, sides, horizontal and vertical members, and adjustable shelving faces with . thermally fused melamine laminate with matching prefinished back. Exposed Cabinet Ends: All cabinets with ends exposed to view shall be finished with plastic laminate to match cabinet faces. This shall include knee spaces and spaces next to portable appliances or other portable items or equipment. Stationary cabinets which are not scribed to the side wall, or do not have a filter panel, shall be considered as an exposed end. Wall Unit Bottom: Faced with thermally fused melamine laminate Balanced construction of all laminated panels is mandatory. Unfinished core stock surfaces, even on concealed surfaces (excluding edges), not permitted. Drawers: Sides, Back and Sub Front: Minimum '/z inch thick particleboard, laminated with thermally fused melamine doweled and glued into sides. Top edge banded with 1 mm PVC. Drawer Bottom: Minimum '/z inch thick particleboard laminated with thermally fused melamine, screwed directly to the bottom edges of drawer box. Paper Storage Drawers: Minimum 3/4 inch thick particleboard sides, back, and sub front laminated with thermally fused melamine. Minimum'/z inch thick particleboard drawer bottoms screwed directly to the bottom edges of the drawer box. Provide PVC angle retaining bar at the rear of the drawer. Door/Drawer Fronts: Core: 3/4 inch thick particleboard. Provide double doors in opening in excess of 24 inches wide. Faces: Exterior: VGS High-pressure plastic laminate. Interior: High-pressure cabinet liner CLS. Door/Drawer Edges: 3mm PVC, external edges and outside corners machine profiled to 1/8 inch radius. Miscellaneous Shelving: Core Material: 3/4 inch or 1 inch thick particleboard. Exterior: VGS High-pressure plastic laminate. Edges: 3mm PVC, external edges and outside.corners machine profiled to 1/8 inch radius. [ridgeline ms] 12345-6 STOCK FACTORY-BUILT CASEWORK 12345-6 . i ' 1 ACCESSORIES 2 ' 3 4 Metal Safetv Cabinets: Cabinet shall be fabricated from reinforced 18-gage all-welded double wall construction with 1-1/2 inch air spaces. There shalt be double doors mounted on continuous piano hin es ith 5 g w three-point spark-proof keyed lock. Floor mounted cabinet shall be supported on zinc-plated leveling le s 6 7 g . The bottom of the cabinet shall be recessed 2 inches to provide leak-proof construction. There shall be ~ 8 furnished 5 each gafvanized steel shelves adjustable on half-inch centers. Provide static ground connectors i nside and out and two 2 inch vents with flash arresters ducted to exterior by Division 15 9 . 10 Cabinet shall be designed in accordance with the Standards of the National Board of Fire Underwriters NFPA 11 Code 30. ' 12 13 14 Flammable Storage Cabinets: Provide cabinet Model #A345 (67 inches H x 43 inches W x 18 inches ' 15 D) as manufactured by SE-CUR-ALL Cabinets, Inc. 1-800-356-0783 or a ( ) pproved manufacturer ' 16 . There shall be 5 each galvanized steel shelves adjustable on half-inch centers. Cabinet shall be 17 factory-painted with a minimum of 2 coats of ellow ena mel. On face of doors provide a large warning label reading, FLAMMABLE -KEEP FIRE AWAY 18 . 19 20 Corrosive/Acid Storage Cabinets: Provide cabinet Model #C345 (67 inches H x 43 inches W x 18 21 inches D) as manufactured by SE-CUR-ALL Cabinets, Inc. (1-800-356-0783) or approved manufacturer. There shall be 5 each galvanized steel shelves adjustable on half-inch t ' 22 cen ers. Cabinet shall be factory-painted with a minimum of 2 coats of blue corrosion resistant enamel O 23 . n face of doors provide a large warning label reading, CAUTION-CORROSIVES 24 . 25 26 Changing Pad: In Room 403, provide 2-inch thick pad constructed from 6 Ib. density bonded foam bonded 27 to 3/8 inch (AC) plywood. Wrap totally with 14 oz. Pro-Tec vinyl material, which is mildew, rot and perspiration-proof. Class III flame retardant. Cushion size to match counterto size S ' 28 29 p . ecure to countertop with Velcro at all four corners. Vinyl color as selected by Architect. 30 31 MISCELLANEOUS PLASTIC LAMINATE INSTALLATIONS 32 ' 33 General: Provide the following plastic laminate installations in locations as shown on drawings and called out 34 in finish schedule. 35 ' 36 T es of work in this section include: 37 38 Stage Storage Doors _ 39 Wainscot 40 Window Wrap (Head, Jambs & Sill) and Face Trim 41 Window Sills 42 Locker Tops ' 43 Wardrobe Locker Ends 44 45 Fabrication: 46 ' 47 48 Stage Storage Doors: Fabricate from 3/4" B-B Exterior Douglas Fir Plywood. Glue-attach Red Oak edge strip to all four edges and plastic laminate to both faces f d 49 o oors as detailed on Drawings. Oak trim and plastic laminate to be flush on door faces: 50 ' 51 52 Plastic Laminate Manufacturer: See "COLOR SELECTION" in PART 3 -EXECUTION. S3 Plastic Laminate Thickness:.055" ' 54 55 Plastic Laminate Finish: Matte. 56 57 Plastic Laminate Color: As selected by Architect. 58 [ridgeline ms].92345-7 STOCK FACTORY-BUILT CASEWORK 12345-7 Wainscot: Provide plastic laminate wainscot of height as indicated on drawings and in locations as shown on drawing and called out in finish schedule. Plastic Laminate Manufacturer: See "COLOR SELECTION" in PART 3 -EXECUTION. Plastic Laminate Thickness:.030" Plastic Laminate Finish: Matte. Plastic Laminate Color: As selected by Architect. Window Wrap (Head Jambs and Sill) and Face Trim: Fabricate from 3/4" B-B exterior grade Douglas Fir Plywood. Glue-attach plastic laminate to plywood. Plastic Laminate Manufacturer: See "COLOR SELECTION" in PART 3 -EXECUTION. Plastic Laminate Thickness: 0.055 inches Plastic Laminate Finish: Matte. Plastic Laminate Color: As selected by Architect. Window Sills and Locker Tops: Fabricate from 3/4" B-B exterior grade Douglas Fir Plywood. Glue-. attach plastic laminate to plywood. Plastic Laminate Manufacturer: See "COLOR SELECTION" in PART 3 -EXECUTION. Plastic Laminate Thickness:.055" Plastic Laminate Finish: Matte. Plastic Laminate Color: As selected by Architect. Window Sill Apron: Fabricate from 3/4" B-B exterior grade Douglas Fir Plywood. Glue-attach plastic laminate to plywood at all exposed surfaces. Window Sill Apron: Fabricate from Firwood, "D-Finish," mixed grain, kiln-dried per WCLIB No.16, Pg. 24, Par. 101 d. See drawings for sizes. Glue-attach plastic laminate to all exposed surfaces. Plastic Laminate Manufacturer: See "COLOR SELECTION" in PART 3 -EXECUTION. Plastic Laminate Thickness: 0.030" Plastic Laminate Finish: Matte. Plastic Laminate Color: As selected by Architect. Wardrobe Locker Ends: Fabricate from 3/4" standard 45-pound density particleboard cut to match locker profile. Glue-attach plastic laminate and 3 mm (1/8-inch) thick PVC edgebanding on total perimeter. Plastic Laminate Manufacturer: See "COLOR SELECTION" in PART 3 -EXECUTION. Plastic Laminate Thickness: 0.055" Plastic Laminate Finish: Matte. Plastic Laminate Color: As selected by Architect. [ridgeline mss 12345-8 STOCK FACTORY-BUILT CASEWORK 12345-8 'I 1 PART 3 -EXECUTION 2 ' 3 4 CASEWORK INSTALLATION 5 6 General: Except as otherwise specified herein, all work in this Section shall be installed under the control and 7 8 supervision ofthecasework manufacturerwithfactory-trained mechanics in his employ. Conform to governing codes and ordinances for all installation and anchorage requirements. 9 10 Preparation: Condition casework to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to 11 installing. 12 13 Install plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required, using concealed shims Where 14 . casework abuts other finished work, scribe and apply filler strips for accurate fit with fasteners concealed '~ 15 where practicable. 16 ' 17 Base Cabinets: Set cabinets straight, plumb, and level. Adjust sub-tops within 1/16 inch of a single plane. 18 Fasten each individual cabinet to floor at toe space, with fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. Bolt continuous 19 cabinets together. Secure individual cabinets with not less than 2 fasteners into floor where the do not ad i 20 , y jo n other cabinets. 21 '' 22 23 Wall Cabinets: Securely fasten to solid supporting material, not plaster, lath, or wallboard. Anchor, adjust, and align wall cabinets as specified for base cabinets. 24 25 Reinforcement of stud walls to support wall-mounted cabinets will be done during wall erection by ' 26 trade involved, but responsibility for accurate location and sizing of reinforcement is part of this work 27 . 28 Tall Cabinets: Where tall casework meets in the corner and adjacent walls, or similar circumstances thereby ' 29 , forming a vertical void space with an open top, provide a closure panel of similar materials as tops to align 30 flush with top of casework. 31 32 Scribe Moldings: -Provide factory-finished scribe moldings, plastic-faced, as applicable, to match casework ' 33 , where casework abuts uneven wall or soffit surfaces, carefully scribed, nailed. Set all nails and fill over nails 34 with putty colored to match adjacent surfaces. No filler panels, unless specifically shown otherwise in excess 35 , of 1-1/2 inches will be permitted. 36 37 Connection of Adioininp Units: Where several units are installed in-line, drill through end panels and secure 38 by bolting using "T"nuts, bolts and finishing washers or hex bolts with finishing washers, or approved system 39 . Countertops shall be continuous over units below. 40 41 Anchorage to Floor: Bolt units for file drawers, and units set out from wall to accommodate piping and/or 42 convectors, through bottom to blocking suitably anchored to floor. 43 44 Adiust casework and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate 45 operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. 46 47 ' 48 -INSTALLATION OF TOPS 49 50 Field Jointing: Where practicable, make in same manner as factoryjointing using dowels, splines, adhesives ' 51 , and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Locate field joints as shown on accepted shop drawings 52 , factory prepared so there is no job site processing of top,and edge surfaces. 53 54 Fastenings: Use concealed clamping devices for field joints, located within 6 inches of front, at back edges ' 55 and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Tighten in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to exert a 56 constant, heavy clamping pressure at joints. 57 [ridgeiine ms) 12345-9 STOCK FACTORY-BUILT CASEWORK 92345-9 Workmanship: Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent any deflection. Provide flush hairline joints in top units using clamping devices. Provide holes and cutouts as required for mechanical and electrical service fixtures. Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of top, curb and splash with walls as recommended by manufacturer for materials involved. Use chemical resistant, permanently elastic sealing compound where recommended by manufacturer. MISCELLANEOUS PLASTIC LAMINATE INSTALLATION Preparation: Care should be taken to assure that excessive moisture imbalance between the laminate and the substrate does not exist. Laminate should be stored under drier conditions than the substrate when possible. Prior to fabrication, the face, substrate and back should be conditioned in the same environment for 48 hours. Fabrication: Use .approved methods. Assembled pieces shall meet specifications of NAPF (National Association of Plastic Fabricators) and ANSI-A-161.2-1979 where applicable. Square cut inside corners should be avoided. All inside corner cutouts should have a minimum of 1l8" radius and all edges should be routed smooth. Plastic Laminate Wainscot: Secure to substrate using an adhesive and application technique recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. Adhesive to be selected by installer. Install with aluminum edge bead at top and all exposed ends. Provide a full bead of clear silicone sealant at top joint of wainscot between metal bead and wall. Lay-out vertical joints so as not to align behind wall mounted fixtures, accessories, etc. Use sheets of maximum lengths to minimize joints. Joints less than 2'-6" apart will not be accepted. Installer will be responsible to make sure that the adhesive used does not exceed the VOC level allowed within the local controlling jurisdiction. Window Wrap (Head Jambs and Sills) and Face Trim: Secure plastic laminate to plywood in a full bed of solvent type contact adhesive. Application of plastic laminate per adhesive manufacturer's recommendation. Use sheets of maximum lengths to minimize joints. No joints allowed in individual members which are less than 8'-0" long. Window Sills and Locker Tops: Secure to plywood in a full bed of solvent type contact adhesive. Application of plastic laminate per adhesive manufacturer's recommendation. Use sheets of maximum lengths to minimize joints. No joints allowed in sills less than 8'-0" long. Wardrobe Locker Ends: The exposed face of the particleboard shall have the plastic laminate bonded to it through heat and pressure. PVC edgebanding to be machine-applied with waterproof hot melt adhesive with all corners radiused 1/8-inch. Polish edges and corners smooth to eliminate any rough or sharp corners. COLOR SELECTION Laminate Color Selection: As selected by Architect from the full range of WilsonartC~, Nevamar®, Pionite®, and Formica®stock color charts for cabinet faces, exposed ends, open interiors, and countertops. Thermally fused melamine laminates available in Frosty White, Light Beige, Dove Grey colors (matched to Wilsonart®). Hinge and Pull Color Selection: Selectfrom your choice of stock colors (matched to Wilsonart®) Frosty White, Light Beige, Dove Grey, Slate Grey, Black and Chrome. Other colors are available. Special order colors may impact cost and lead times. Miscellaneous Hardware Color Selection (support brackets, table frames, rail): Select from your choice of stock colors (matched to Wilsonart®) Frosty White, Light Beige, Dove Grey, Slate Grey and Black. [ridgeline ms] 12345-10 STOCK FACTORY-BUILT CASEWORK 12345-10 ' 1 2 3 4 ,~ 5 6 8 '~ g 10 11 '' 12 13 14 15 ,~ 16 17 18 '! 19 20 21 'I 1 mm PVC Edae Banding Color Selection: Select from your choice of many 1 mm PVC edgings available in a variety of solid, pattern and woodgrains matching laminate colors"'. Special order colors may impact cost and lead times. 3mm PVC Edge Banding Color Selection: Select from your choice of 3mm PVC stock colors (matched to Wilsonartp) Frosty White, Light Beige, Dove Grey, Slate Grey, Black. Special order colors may impact cost and lead times. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Re air or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion of installation. Clean shop-finished surfaces, touch-up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas, as acceptable to Architect. Protection: Advise Contractor of procedures and precautions for protection of materials and installed laboratory furniture from damage by work of other trades. END OF SECTION 12345 0 [ridgeline ms] 12345-11 - STOCK FACTORY-BUILT CASEWORK 12345-11 SECTION 12500 - W/NDOW TREATMENT 1 ,PART 1 -GENERAL 2 3 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS t' S 6 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 7 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 8 9 10 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 11 12 The extent of window treatment is horizontal blinds at the following locations: 13 14 Exterior Windows: All exterior windows with the exception of the following: 15 16 Clerestory windows above Doors 100 and 100A into Entry 100. 17 Clerestory windows above Doors 200 and 200A into Foyer 200. 18 High translucent panels in west and south walls of Gymnasium 222. 1 19 High translucent panels in west wall of Auxiliary Gym 302. 20 . 21 Exterior Doors: There will be no horizontal blinds on any of the exterior doors or transom. ' 22 ' 23 Interior Relites: 24 25 104 (2 each) 306 (2 each) 509 26 27 117 524 28 307 525 122 (4 each) 308 617 1 29 402 622 30 123 404A (2 each) 623 31 125 (4 each) 416 623A 32 207 (2 each) 502 (3 each) 33 34 35 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' 36 37 General: Provide window treatment units which are complete assemblies produced by one manufacturer for 38 each type or function required, including hardware, accessory items, mounting brackets, and fastenings. 39 40 Furnish materials in colors and patterns as indicated, or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from 41 manufacturer's standard colors/patterns. 42 43 ' 44 SUBMITTALS 45 46 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of window 47 treatment unit required. Include methods of installation for each type of opening and supporting structure. ' 48 49 50 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 51 ' S2 Maintenance Stock: Deliverstock of maintenance material to Owner. Furnish maintenance m 53 products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropnateaabelsching 54 [ridgeline ms) 12500 - 1 WINDOW TREATMENT • 12500 - 1 Typical Window Treatment Units: Furnish quantity of typical window treatment units equal to 5% of amount installed. . PART 2 -PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or approved: Hunter Douglas, Inc. CE 80 (Atlantis) Levolor Lorentzen, Inc. (Riviera 1") Bali (Classics) Graber (Classics) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. HORIZONTAL BLINDS COMPONENTS Headrail: Manufacturer's standard .025 cold rolled steel, 1"x 1-1/2" headrail consisting of channel-shaped section complete with tilting mechanism, top and end braces, top cradles, cord lock, and accessory items required for type of blind and installation indicated. Bottom Rail: Manufacturer's standard .018" cold rolled sheet steel tubular bottom rail, designed to withstand twisting or sagging. Contour top surface to match slat curvature, with flat or slightly curved bottom. Close ends with manufacturer's standard metal or plastic end caps, of same color as rail. Finish rail in same color as slats, unless otherwise indicated. Slats: Manufacturer's standard, spring-tempered aluminum slats, nominal 0.008" thick, (louver blades), rounded corners with forming burrs removed, as follows: Slat Width: 1" (25mm) nominal slats, with other components sized to suit. Ladders: Manufacturer's standard ladder construction designed to support and maintain slats at proper spacing and alignment in open and closed positions, as follows: Braided polyester cord design consisting of vertical components of not less than 0.043" nor more than 0.068" in diameter and integrally braided ladder rungs of not less than 2 threads; space ladders not further than 24" apart and 6" from ends of slats. Tiltin Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard assembly including disengaging worm and gear mechanism to eliminate overdrive, low friction gear titter, drum and cradle at each ladder, tilt rod, tape clips, and grommet guides to prevent wear on ladder and cords; designed to hold slats at any angle and prevent movement of slats due to vibration, operated as follows: Wand Operation: Manufacturer's standard, detachable clear plastic wand, of proper length to suit blind installation, to provide convenient operation, and detachable without tools by raising locking sleeve. Liftin Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard including crash-proof cord locks with cord separators and braided polyester or nylon lift cords with tassels at ends. Size cord to suit blind type. Include cord equalizers of self-aligning type designed to maintain horizontal blind position. Installation Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets designed to facilitate removal of head channels. Provide intermediate brackets at spacing recommended by blind manufacturer. Include hardware necessary (ridgeline ms] 12500 - 2 WINDOW TREATMENT 12500 - 2 t 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 for secure attachment of brackets to adjoining construction and to head rails. Design brackets to support safely the weight of blind assemblies plus forces applied to operate blinds. Finish: Provide finishes indicated below. Finish exposed accessories and hardware to match rail color. Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant finish to concealed items of hardware. Steel Components: Galvanize and either phosphate coat or prime exposed steel surfaces, followed by manufacturer's standard baked-on synthetic resin enamel finish. Aluminum Slats: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish system consisting of chemical conversion coating followed by baked-on synthetic resin enamel finish coat. FABRICATION Prior to fabrication, verify actual opening dimensions by accurate site measurements. Adjust dimensions for proper fit at openings. Cooperate with other trades for securing tracks to substrates and other finished surfaces Fabricate window treatment components from non-corrosive, non-, staining, non-fading materials which are completely compatible with each other, and which do not require lubrication during normal expected life. Blinds are not to be mounted onto the face of the wall thereby totally covering the window recess area but shall be mounted within the recess area and be of sufficient width to overlap windowjambs and yet not contact side wall surfaces. All multiple areas of glass formed by major horizontal or vertical mullions within the same window recess shall be covered by individual blinds between the head, jambs, sills and mullions. Space supporting ladders to comply with manufacturer's standards, unless otherwise indicated. S ace louver blades to provide an overlap for light exclusion when in fully-closed position. Gear operating equipment for reduction of the ratio of hand-movement to louver position, so that blinds operate easily and can be set accurately and smoothly. E ui .horizontal blind units, unless otherwise indicated for the following operation: Full-tilting operation with slats rotating approximately 180 degrees. Place tilt operating controls on left-hand side of blind units, unless otherwise indicated. Full-height raising, to manufacturer's minimum stacking dimension, with lifting cord locks for stopping blind at any point of ascending or descending travel. Place pull cords on right-hand side of blind units, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION General: Install window treatment units in manner indicated to comply with manufacturer's instructions. Position units level, plumb, secure, at proper height and location relative to adjoining window units and other related work. Securely anchor units with proper clips, brackets, anchorages, suited to type of mounting indicated. Provide adequate clearance between sash and blinds to permit unencumbered operation of sash hardware. [ridgeline msj .12500 - 3 WINDOW TREATMENT 92500 - 3 D 1 Isolate metal parts from concrete and mortar to prevent galvanic action. Use tape or thick coating or other a 2 means recommended by manufacturer to effect separation. . 3 ~' 4 Protect installed units to ensure their being in operating condition, without damage, blemishes, or indication 5 of use at completion of project. Repair or replace damaged units as directed by Architect. 6 8 END OF SECTION 12500 [ridgeline ms] 12500 - 4 WINDOW TREATMENT 12500 - 4 t f 1 SECTION 92760 -TELESCOPING BLEACHERS 2 3 4 5 PART 1 -GENERAL 6 ' 7 8 ,RELATED DOCUMENTS 9 10 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 11 Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this section. ~~ 12 13 14 SUMMARY . 15 16 This section includes wall-attached telescoping bleachers. 17 18 Room 222: West Wall Bleachers: (11) rows -Power operated, wall attached. 19 20 Room 302: West Wall Bleachers:.(8) rows -Power operated, wall attached. '' 21 22 Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 23 24 Division 16 Electrical Sections for electrical wiring and connections of electrically operated . 25 bleachers. 26 27 28 REFERENCES 29 30 'Americans with Disability Act (ADA): 31 32 ADA -Standards for Accessible Design. 33 34 American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): ' 35 36 AISC -Design of Hot Rolled Steel Structural Members. 37 38 American Iron & Steel Institute (AISI): 39 40 AISI -Design Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. 41 42 American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 43 44 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 45 ' 46 ASTM -Standard Specification for Properties of Materials. 47 48 American Welding Society (AWS): 49 ' 50 AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code -Steel. 51 , 52 AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel. ' S3 54 National Bureau of Standards/Products Standard (NBS/PS): 55 56 PS1 -Construction and Industrial Plywood.. (ridgeline ms] 12760-1 TELESCOPING BLEACHERS 12760-1 1 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 2 3 NFPA 102 Standard for Assembly Seating, Tents and Membrane Structures. 4 5 National Forest Products Association (NFoPA): 6 7 NFoPA -National Design Specification for Wood Construction. 8 9 Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB): 10 11 SPIB -Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine. 12 13 International Building Code (IBC): 14 15 2003 Edition, Section 11008.2, Bleachers & Folding and Telescoping Seating. 16 17 18 DEFINITIONS 19 20 Telescoping bleachers are operable systems of multiple-tiered benches on interconnected, folding 21 platforms that close, without being dismantled, into a nested stack for storing or moving. 22 23 24 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 25 26 Structural performance Characteristics: Engineer, fabricate, and install telescoping bleachers to withstand 27 the design loads specified in NFPA 102, "Standard for Assembly Seating, Tents, -and Membrane 28 Structures," Chapter 5, "Folding and Telescopic Seating," without exceeding the allowable design working 29 stresses of the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the 30 maximum stress in each respective component of each telescoping bleacher unit. 31 32 Design Loads: Comply with IBC, 2003 Edition, for design loads. 33 34 ~ ` 35 SUBMITTALS 36 37 General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 38 Specification Sections. 39 ' 40 Product data for each type of telescoping bleacher specified, including details of construction relative to 41 materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. 42 43 Shop Drawings: Indicate telescoping gym seat assembly layout. Show seat heights, row spacing and 44 rise, aisle widths and locations, assembly dimensions, anchorage to supporting structure, material types 45 and finishes. 46 47 Wiring Diagrams: Indicate electrical wiring and connections. 48 49 Graphics Layout Drawings: Indicate pattern of contrasting or matching seat colors. 50 51 Manufacturer Qualifications: Certification of insurance coverage and manufacturing experience of 52 ~ manufacturer and copy of a telescopic load test observed by a qualified independent testing laboratory, 53 and certified by a registered professional structural engineer, verifying the integrity of the manufacturer's 54 geometry design and base structural assumptions. 55 56 [ridgeline ms] 12760-2 TELESCOPING BLEACHERS 12760-2 '~ 1 Installer Qualifications: Installer qualifications indicating capability, experience, and manufacturer 2 acceptance. 3 4 Engineer Qualifications: Certification by a professional engineer registered in the state of manufacturer 5 that the equipment to be supplied meets or exceeds the design criteria of this specification. 6 7 Sam~iles for verification of the following items, in the size indicated below. Prepare samples from the ' 8 same material to be used for the work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, 9 include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 10 11 Plywood: 12 inch (300 mm) square samples of finished material. 12 13 Molded-Plastic Benches: One end cap in each color indicated. ' 14 ~ 15 - 16 QUALITY ASSURANCE 17 ', 18 NFPA Standard: Comply with requirements of NFPA 102, "Standard for Assembly Seating, Tents, and 19 Membrane Structures," Chapter 5, "Folding and Telescopic Seating," except where more stringent 20 requirements are indicated or imposed by authorities having jurisdiction. 21 ';' 22 Insurance Qualifications: Mandatory that each bidder submits with his bid an insurance certificate from 23 the manufacturer evidencing the following insurance coverage: 24 25 Commercial General Liability, including premises/operations, independent contractors and 26 products completed operations liability. Limits of liability shall not be less than $5,000,000.00 27 (US). 28 29 Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer who has a minimum of ten seating projects of similar size and 30 complexity and a minimum of fifteen years of experience manufacturing telescoping gym seats. 31 ' 32 Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this .section who has 33 specialized in installing types of telescoping bleachers similar to those required for this project and who is 34 acceptable to, or certified by, manufacturer of telescoping bleachers. 35 36 Engineer Qualifications: Alicensed professional engineer experienced in providing engineering services 37 of the kind indicated that have resulted in the successful installation of telescoping bleachers similar in 38 material, design, fabrication, and extent to those types indicated for this project. ' 39 40 Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code -Steel" 41 and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel." 42 43 Engage certified welders that have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding 44 processes involved and, if pertinent, have undergone recertification. 45 46 ' 47 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND. HANDLING 48 49 Deliver telescopic gym seats. in manufacturer's packaging clearly labeled with manufacturer name and 50 content. 51 __ 52 Handle seating equipment in a manner to prevent damage. 53 54 Deliver the seating at a scheduled time for installation that will not interfere with other trades operating in 55 the building. ' S6 '. [ridgeline ms] 12760-3 TELESCOPING BLEACHERS ~ - 12760-3 1 PROJECT CONDITIONS 2 3 Field Measurements: Check actual dimensions of construction affecting telescoping bleachers by 4 accurate field measurements before fabrication and show recorded measurements on Shop Drawings. 5 Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work. 6 7 8 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 9 10 Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty form for telescoping 11 bleachers. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of other rights Owner may have under 12 Contract Documents. 13 14 Warranty Period: Five years from. date of Substantial Completion. 15 16 Operating/Maintenance Manuals: Provide to Owner maintenance manuals. Demonstrate operating 17 procedures, recommended maintenance and inspection program. 18 19 20 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 21 22 23 MANUFACTURERS 24 25 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or 26 approved: 27 28 Hussey Seating Co. with "Flex Row." 29 Interkal, Inc. with recoverable handicap first row. 30 31 32 MATERIALS 33 34 Plywood with Polyethylene Plastic Facing: Polyethylene plastic-overlay panel that complies with 35 requirements of DOC PS 1 and is fabricated with askid-resistant, textured, high-density polyethylene 36 plastic moisture barrier in manufacturer's standard color bonded to a 5/8" thick plywood substrate, 5-ply 37 construction, (APA) A-D Exterior, with solid crossbands, Group 1 veneer species for plies, exterior glue, 38 and complying with DOC PS 1 requirements. 39 40 Structural Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), except where higher strength steel 41 is indicated or standard with manufacturer. 42 43 Commercial-Quality Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M) cold-rolled steel sheet, or 44 ASTM A 569 (ASTM A 569M) hot-rolled steel sheet, stretcher leveled. 45 46 Structural-Quality Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 570 (ASTM A 570M) hot-rolled steel sheet, or ASTM A 47 611 cold-rolled steel sheet, stretcher leveled. 48 49 High-Strength Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 607 hot-,orcold-rolled steel sheet, stretcher leveled. 50 51 Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G60 (ASTM A, 653M, 2180) coating designation, phosphatized, 52 stretcher leveled. 53 54 Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold formed; or ASTM A 501, hot formed. 55 56 [ridgeline ms] 12760-4 TELESCOPING BLEACHERS 12760-4 II 1 Polyethylene Plastic: ASTM D 1248, Type III, Class B; molded, color-pigmented, textured, impact- 2 resistant, structural formulation (Bench Seat). 3 4 Fasteners: Vibration proof,- of size and material standard with manufacturer. 5 6 ~~ 7 COMPONENTS 8 9 General: Provide manufacturer's standard telescoping bleachers fabricated to comply with requirements 10 indicated. Smoothly round corners, edges, and exposed fasteners to eliminate snagging and pinching 11 hazards. Form exposed sheet metal with flat, flush surfaces, true to line and level, and without cracking 12 and grain separation. Perform welding by operators and processes complying with. AWS requirements. 13 14 ,Types of Telescoping Bleachers: Provide assemblies of the following types, .fabricated in lengths and 'I 15 number of rows indicated: 16 17 Wall-Attached Tvpe: Construct stands to provide for permanent attachment of rear of 18 understructure to wall construction. 19 20 Understructure: Fabricate understructure from structural steel members of size, spacing, and form 21 required to support design loads. 22 23. Cantilever bench seat supports to produce toe space uninterrupted by vertical bracing. 24 25 Support Column Wheels: Provide manufacturer's nonmarring, soft, rubber-face wheel assembly under 26 each support column: Include wheels of size, number, and design required to support stands and to 27 achieve smooth operation without damage to flooring surface; but not less than 4 per column or less than t 28 3-1/2 inches (88.9 mm) in diameter and 1 inch (25.4 mm) wide. 29 30 Risers: Fabricate risers from steel sheet with painted or galvanized finish, as standard with manufacturer. 31 ' 32 Footrests: Fabricate fully closed footrests from plywood, as standard with manufacturer. 33 34 Row Spacing and Row Rise: Fabricate units with row spacings and row rises indicated. 35 36 Row Spacing: Fabricate units with row spacing of 24 inches (609.6 mm), unless otherwise 37 indicated. 38 ' 39 Row Rise: Fabricate units with row rise of between 9-5/8 and 10-1/2 inches (244.5 and 266.7 40 mm), as standard with manufacturer. 41 ' 42 Bench Seats and Skirts: Provide seats with uniform heights of not less than 16' inches (406.4 mm) or 43 more than 18 inches (457.2 mm), as standard with manufacturer. 44 45 Material: Provide for fifteen (15) colors of polyethylene plastic in color selected by Architect from ' 46 manufacturer's full range of colors. 47 48 Profile: Contoured seat surface as standard with manufacturer. ' 49 - 50 Depth; 10 inches (254 mm). 51 _ 52 Aisles: Fabricate stands with the following aisle configuration, at locations and of widths indicated: ' S3 54 .Footrest-Level Configuration: Interrupt seats to provide aisle walking surfaces at footrest level. 55 _ 56 . [ridgeline ms] 12760-5 TELESCOPING BLEACHERS 12760-5 1 Flex-Row: Provide first row modular units to be utilized by persons in wheelchairs and able bodied 2 persons. Each Flex-Row unit shall have an unlock lever for easy deployment if wheelchair access is 3 needed. Unlock lever shall lock the bleacher seats into position when fully opened. 4 5 Accessories: Provide the following accessories of manufacturer's standard design and construction at 6 locations indicated or required to comply with referenced code standard: 7 8 Nonslip adhesive-backed, abrasive tread nosings at vertical aisles. 9 10 ~ Intermediate aisle steps, fully enclosed with abrasive tread nosing, at each vertical aisle. 11 12 Removable front steps, fully enclosed, at each vertical aisle, that engage with front.row to prevent 13 accidental separation or movement and are equipped with a minimum of 4 nonskid feet. 14 15 Intermediate Aisle Handrails: Provide single pedestal mount handrails 34" high with terminating 16 mid rail. Handrails shall be attached to the socket and shall rotate 90 degrees for easy storage in 17 socket. Aisle handrails that are detached from the socket for storage are unacceptable. 18 19 End railings of telescoping, self-storing type. 20 21 Rear fillers including supports for closing openings between top row and rear wall of adjoining 22 construction. ' 23 24 Gap fillers for closing openings between bleacher units or between bleacher units and adjoining 25 construction. 26 27 End panels covering exposed ends of bleachers in stored and deployed position. 28 29 Scorer's Table: Provide one 8' (2438) x 15" (4572) scorer's table. Table top shall be 30 manufacturer's standard table top unit with cushioned edges and high pressure laminate edge 31 mounting. Perimeter steel frame with tubular steel legs permanently attached to top with screws. 32 33 34 STEEL FINISHES -SHOP APPLIED 35 36 Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and 37 other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated 38 steel complying with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling). 39 40 Understructure: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive 41 finish to exposed and concealed metal surfaces including understructure, except where other types of 42 finishes are indicated. 43 44 Wear Surfaces: Surface subject to normal wear ~by spectators shall have a finish that does not wear to 45 show different color underneath: 46 47 Steel nosing and rear risers shall be pre-galvanized with a minimum spangle of G-60 zinc plating. 48 49 Railin s: Steel railings shall be finished with powder coated semi-gloss black. 50 51 52 OPERATION 53 54 General: Provide telescoping bleachers incorporating manufacturer's standard system of seating and 55 understructure members that permit opening and closing of adjacent rows, allow individual and collective 56 rows to be locked open for use, and close with vertical faces of upper skirts in the same vertical plane. [ridgeline'ms] 12760-6 TELESCOPING BLEACHERS ~ 12760-6 1 Main Gymnasium and Auxiliary Gym to be power operated. ' 2 3 Tractive Electric Operation: Provide manufacturer's standard integral power operation of telescoping ' 4 bleachers by a series of electric-motor-driven units mounted under first or second rows that apply tractive 5 force to floor. Provide units with rubber rollers or tracks that will not mar or damage floor over which 6 bleachers move. Control units by plug-in, walk-along pendant switch for operator management of stop, 7 start, forward, and reverse control of the power operation. The integral power and control system of ' 8 motors, housing, and wiring shall be installed and grounded in complete accord with the National 9 Electrical Code and shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) approved and listed. 10 ' 11 Limit Switches: Provide open and closed limit switches that automatically stop the integral power 12 system when telescoping bleachers reach the fully opened or closed positions. 13 ' 14 Provide transformer, if required, to coordinate current characteristics of motor and control station 15 with building electrical system. 16 17 Power operation shall utilize a combination of contactors and limit switches to insure the wiring is 18 not energized except during operation. Straight wired electric system is not allowed. ' 19 20 ' 21 PART 3 -EXECUTION 22 23 24 EXAMINATION ' 25 26 Examine areas where telescoping bleachers are to be installed; with Installer present, for compliance with 27 requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of telescoping ' ~ 28 bleachers. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 29 30 31 INSTALLATION ' 32 33 Install telescoping bleachers to comply with manufacturer's instructions and shop drawings. Provide 34 accessories indicated and anchors, fasteners, inserts, and other items required for installing and ' 35 attaching units to adjoining construction. 36 37 38 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ' 39 40 On completion of installation, .including work of other trades, lubricate, test, and adjust each telescoping 41 bleacher unit to operate easily and to comply with manufacturer's operation manual. ' 42 _ 43 Clean installed telescoping bleachers on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied 44 finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 45 i 46 47 DEMONSTRATION 48 49 Engage a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance ' S0 personnel as specified below. 51 52 Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and 1 53 equipment. 54 55 Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to operation, _ 56 troubleshooting, servicing, inspection, and maintenance. [ridgeline ms] 12760-7 TELESCOPING BLEACHERS 12760-7 1 Seats: Nominal 2 x 10 anodized aluminum plank with 2 x 10 anodized end caps. 2 3 Treads: Two nominal 2 x 11 mill aluminum planks with 2 x 11 anodized end caps. 4 5 Risers: Nominal 1.x 6-1/2 anodized aluminum riser plank beginning at Row 2; two 1 x 6 6-1/2 aluminum riser plank on top row. 7 8 Guardrailing: Two lines of aluminum rail with chain link 42 inches above seat on both 9 sides of bleacher and across back of bleacher. 10 11 Aisle: Aisle to be provided with 34" high handrail and intermediate rail at approximately 12 22" above tread. Handrails with rounded ends are discontinuous to allow access 13 to seating through a 24" wide space. Aluminum tread nosing of contrasting color 14 on aisle steps. 15 16 Wheelchair Area: Wheelchair area to be 5' 6" wide for two wheelchairs (33" each) and 17 36" for single. 18 19 Materials/Finishes 20. 21 Framework: 22 23 Galvanized Steel: Structural fabrication with ASTM-A529 steel. Shop connections are 24 seal welded. After fabrication, all steel is hot-dipped galvanized to ASTM-A123 25 specification. 26 27 Extruded Aluminum: 28 29 Seat Planks, Riser Planks, Step Risers: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6, clear 30 anodized 204R1, AA-M10C22A31, Class II, and a wall thickness of .094". 31 32 Tread Planks: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6, mill finish and wall thickness of .094". 33 34 Accessories: 35 36 Channel End Caps: Aluminum alloy 6063-T6, clear anodized 204R1, AA-M10C22A31, 37 Class II. 38 39 Hardware: 40 41 Bolts, Nuts: Galvanized or plated. 42 43 Hold-Down Clip Assembly: Aluminum alloy 6061-T6.. 44 45 Guardrailing: Anodized aluminum rail 1-5/8" O:D. with galvanized chain link. 46 47 Crossbraces: Extruded aluminum angle alloy 6061-T6, mill finish. 48 49 Aisle Nose: Aluminum alloy, 6063-T6, black powder-coat finish. 50 51 Manufactured Units: 52 53 5 Row Models w/Wheelchair Areas: - 2 Line Chain link from Row 1 to Top 54 55 - (2) 2 x 11 Tread Planks on All Rows 56~ [ridgeline ms] 13125-2 FRAME TYPE BLEACHER 13125-2 i ~' ~! 1 2 3 4 '~' 5 6 '~ 8 9 '10 11 ' ' 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 , ~ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 ' 26 27 28 ' 29 . 30 31 ' 32 33 34 35 36 37 END OF SECTION 13125 1 (ridgeline ms) 13125-3 PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install bleacher unit in accordance with manufacturer's installation procedures. - 1 x 6-1/2 Riser Beginning @ Row 2, (2) 1 x 6-1 /2 Riser on Top Row - Aisle(s) as Required ' - Wheelchair Seating Area(s) as Noted Model 521 (5 row x 21', 46 net seats, 2 wheelchair seat areas) Quantity of Units (3) Fabrication -- Design Load: Live Load: 100 psf gross horizontal projection Lateral Sway Load: 24 plf seat plank Perpendicular Sway Load: 10 plf seat plank Live Load of Seat and Tread Plank: 120 plf Guardrail: 100 plf vertical and 50 plf horizontal. All connections made in shop to be shop welded. Manufactured by certified welders conforming to AWS Standards. FRAME TYPE BLEACHER .13125-3 i I i` ;~